- -- ---- -

I,

ANALYTICAL STRENGTH
ASSESSMENT
5t h Edition

VDMA Verlag Forschungskuratorium

Maschinenbau
II
I I
FKM-Guideline

ANALYTICAL STRENGTH ASSESSMENT

OF COMPONENTS
IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

5 th , revised edition, 2003, English Version

Translation by E. Haibach

Title of the original German Version:

RECHNERISCHER FESTIGKEITSNACHWEIS
FUR MASCHINENBAUTEILE
5., iiberarbeitete Ausgabe, 2003

Editor:

Forschungskuratorium Maschinenbau (FKM)

Postfach 71 0864, D - 60498 Frankfurt / Main
Phone *49 - 69 - 6603 - 1345
(c) 2003
byVDMA Verlag GmbH
Lyoner StraBe 18
60528 Frankfurt am Main
www.vdma-verlag.de

All rights reserved

AIle Rechte, insbesondere das Recht

der Vervielfaltigung und Verbreitung
sowie der Ubersetzung vorbehalten.

Kein Teil des Werkes darfin irgend-

einer Form (Druck, Fotokopie,
Mikrofilm oder anderes Verfahren) ohne
schriftliche Genehmigung des Verlages
reproduziert oder unter Verwendung
elektronischer Systeme gespeichert,
verarbeitet, vervielfaltigt oder
verbreitet werden.

ISBN 3-8163-0425-7
 3

This FKM-Guideline was elaborated under contract between

Forschungskuratorium Maschinenbau e. V. (FKM), Frankfurt / Main, and
IMA Materialforschung und Anwendungstechnik Gmhfl, Dresden,
as contractor in charge,
by

Dr.-Ing. Bernd Hanel,

IMA Materialforschung und Anwendungstechnik GmbH, Dresden,

Prof. Dr.-Ing. Erwin Haibach,

Wiesbaden,

Prof. Dr.-Ing. TimID Seeger,

Technische Hochschule Darmstadt, Fachgebiet Werkstoffmechanik,

Dipl.-Ing. Gert Wlrthgen,

IMA Materialforschung und Anwendungstechnik GmbH, Dresden,

Prof. Dr.-Ing. Harald Zenner,

Technische Universitat Clausthal, Institut fur
Maschinelle Anlagentechnik und Betriebsfestigkeit,

and it was discussed among experts from industry and research institutes
in the FKM expert group "Strength of components" .

Financial grants were obtained from the "Bundesministerium fUr Wirtschaft (BMWi, Bonn)" through
the "Arbeitsgemeinschaft industrieller Forschungsvereinigungen 'Otto von Guericke ' e.V. (AiF,
K6ln)" under contract AiF-No. D-156 and B-9434. The "Forschungskuratorium Maschinenbau e.V."
gratefully acknowledges the financial support from BMWi and AiF and the contributions by the experts
involved.

Terms of liability

The FKM-Guideline is intended to conform with the state of the art. It has been
prepared with the necessary care. The user is expected to decide, whether the
guideline meets his particular requirements, and to observe appropriate care in
its application. Neither the publisher nor the editor, the involved experts, or the
translator shall be liable to the purchaser or any other person or entity with
respect to any liability, loss, or damage caused or alleged to have been caused
directly or indirectly by this guideline.
 4
Preface to the English Version of
the 5th Edition.
For engineers concerned with construction and
calculation in mechanical engineering or in related fields
of industry the FKM-Guideline for analytical strength
assessment is available since 1994. This guideline was
elaborated by an expert group "Strength of components"
of the "Forschungskuratorium Maschinenbau (FKM),
Frankfurt/Main," with financial support by the
Bundesministerium fur Wirtschaft (BMWi), by the
"Arbeitsgemeinschaft industrieller Forschungsvereini-
gungen 'Otto von Guericke" and by the "Forschungs-
kuratorium Maschinenbau.
Based on former TGL standards and on the former
guideline VDI 2226, and referring to more recent
sources it was developed to the current state of
knowledge.
The FKM-Guideline
- is applicable in mechanical engineering and in related
fields of industry,
- allows the analytical strength assessment for rod-
shaped (lD), for shell-shaped (2D) and for block-shaped
(3D) components under consideration of all relevant
influences,
- describes the assessment of the static strength and of
the fatigue strength, the latter according to an assessment
of the fatigue limit, of the constant amplitude fatigue
strength, or of the variable amplitude fatigue strength
according to the service stress conditions,
- is valid for components from steel, cast steel, or cast
iron materials at temperatures from -40°C to 500 °C, as
well as for components from aluminum alloys and cast
aluminum alloys at temperatures from -40°C to 200 °C,
- is applicable for components produced with or without
machining, or by welding,
- allows an assessment in considering nominal stresses as
well as local elastic stresses derived from finite element
or boundary element analyses, from theoretical
mechanics solutions, or from measurements.
A uniformly structured calculation procedure applies to
all of these cases of application. The calculation
procedure is almost completely predetermined. The user
has to make some decisions only.
The FKM-Guideline is a commented algorithm,
consisting of statements, formulae, and tables. Most of
the included figures have an explanatory function only.
Textual declarations are given where appropriate to
ensure a reliable application.
Its content complies with the state of knowledge to an
extend that may be presented in a guideline and it
enables quite comprehensive possibilities of calculation.
The employed symbols are adapted to the extended
requirements of notation. The presented calculation
procedure is complemented by explanatory examples.
Practically the described procedure of strength
assessment should be realized by means of a suitable
computer program. Presently available are the PC
computer programs "RIFESTPLUS" (applicable for a
calculation using elastically determined local stresses, in
particular with shell-shaped (2D) or block-shaped (3D)
components) and "WELLE" (applicable for a calculation
using nominal stresses as it is appropriate in the
frequently arising case of axles or shafts with gears etc).
The preceding editions of the FKM-Guideline observed
a remarkably great interest from which the need of an up
to date guideline for analytical strength analyses
becomes apparent. Moreover the interest of users was
confirmed by the well attended VDI conferences on
"Computational Strength Analysis of Metallic
Components", that were organized for presentation of
the FKM-Guideline at Fulda in 1995, 1998 and 2002.
The contents-related changes introduced with the third
edition from 1998 were mainly concerned with the
consideration of stainless steel and of forging steel, with
the technological size factor, with the section factor for
assessing the static strength, with the fatigue limit of
grey cast iron and of malleable cast iron, with additional
fatigue classes of welded structural details and with the
local stress analysis for welded components, with the
specification of an estimated damage sum smaller than
one for the assessment of the variable amplitude fatigue
strength, with the assessment of multiaxial stresses, and
with the experimental determination of component
strength values.
An essential formal change in the third edition was a
new textual structure providing four main chapters, that
describe the assessment of the static strength or of the
fatigue strength with either nominal stresses or local
stresses, respectively. For ease of application each of
these chapters gives a complete description of the
particular calculation procedure, although this results in
repetitions of the same or almost the same parts of text in
the corresponding sections.
 5

The major change in the forth edition from 2002 is the

possibility of considering structural components made
from aluminum alloys or cast aluminum alloys by
applying the same calculation procedure that was
developed for components from steel, cast steel and cast
iron materials so far.
The decisions necessary to include aluminum materials
were derived from literature evaluations. It had to be
recognized, however, that some of the relevant factors of
influence were not yet examined with the desirable
clearness or that available results could not be evaluated
objectively due to large scatter. In these cases the
decision was based on a careful consideration of
substantial relations.
Concerning an analytical strength assessment of
components from aluminum alloys or from cast
aluminum alloys this guideline is delivered to the
technical community by supposing that for the time Notes of the translator
being it will be applied with appropriate caution and
with particular reference to existing experience so
far. This English translation is intended to keep as close as
possible to the original German version, but by using a
The involved research institutes and the "Forschungs-
common vocabulary and simple sentences. If the given
kuratorium Maschinenbau (FKM)" will appreciate any
translation is different from a literal one, the technical
reports on practical experience as well as any proposals
meaning of the sentence and/or of the paragraph is
for improvement.
maintained, however.
Further improvements may also be expected from
The translation observes an almost identical structure of
ongoing research projects concerning the procedure of
the headlines, of the chapters, of the paragraphs and of
static strength assessment using local elastic stresses,
the sentences, and even of the numbering of the pages.
Chapter 3, and the fatigue assessment of extremely sharp
notches. Also the tables and the figures as well as their numbering
and headlines are adapted as they are, while only the
Last not least the fifth edition of the FKM-Guideline is a
verbal terms have been translated.
revision of the forth edition with several necessary,
mainly formal amendments being introduced. It is In particular the original German notation of the
presented in both a German version and an English mathematical symbols, indices and formulas, as well
as their numbering, has not been modified in order to
version with the expectation that it might observe similar
insure identity with the German original in this
attention as the preceding editions on a broadened respect.
international basis of application.
The applier of this guideline is kindly asked to accept
the more or less unusual kind of notation which is
due to the need of clearly distinguishing between a
great number of variables.
In particular the applier is pointed to the speciality,
that a comma ( , ) is used with numerical values
instead of a decimal point ( . ), hence 1,5 equals 1.5
for example. .

For updates and amendments see

www.fkm-guideline.de
 6

References
/1/ TGL 19 340 (1983). Ermiidungsfestigkeit, Dauerfestigkeit der Maschinenbauteile.
/2/ TGL 19 341 (1988). Festigkeitsnachweis fiir Bauteile aus Eisengusswerkstoffen.
/3/ TGL 19 333 (1979). Schwingfestigkeit, Zeitfestigkeit von Achsen und Wellen.
/4/ TGL 19 350 (1986). Ermiidungsfestigkeit, Betriebsfestigkeit der Maschinenbauteile.
/5/ TGL 19 352 (Entwurf 1988). Aufstellung und Uberlagerung von Beanspruchungskollektiven.
/6/ Richtlinie VDI 2226 (1965). Empfehlung fiir die Festigkeitsberechnung metallischer Bauteile.
/7/ DIN 18 800 Teil 1 (1990). Stahlbauten, Bemessung und Konstruktion.
/8/ DIN ENV 1993 (1993). Bemessung und Konstruktion von Stahlbauten, Teil1-1:
Allgemeine Bemessungsregeln, ... (Eurocode 3).
/9/ Hobbacher, A.: Fatigue design of welded joints and components. Recommendations of the Joint Working
Group XIII-XV, XIII-1539-96 / XV-845-96. Abbington Publishing, Abbington Hall, Abbington,
Cambridge CB1 6AH, England, 19996
/10/ Haibach, E.: Betriebsfestigkeits - Verfahren und Daten zur Bauteilberechnung, 2.Aufl.
Berlin und Heidelberg, Springer-Verlag, 2002, ISBN 3-540-43142-X.
/11/ Radaj, D.: Ermiidungsfestigkeit. Grundlage fur Leichtbau, Maschinenbau und Stahlbau.
Berlin und Heidelberg: Springer-Verlag, 2003, ISBN 3-540-44063-1.
/12/ FKM-Forschungsheft 241 (1999). Rechnerischer Festigkeitsnachweis fiir Bauteile aus Alumininiumwerkstoff.
/13/ FKM-Forschungsheft 230 (1998). Randschichthartung.
/14/ FKM-Forschungsheft 227 (1997). Lebensdauervorhersage II.
/15/ FKM-Forschungsheft 221-2 (1997). Mehrachsige und zusammengesetzte Beanspruchungen.
/16/ FKM-Forschungsheft 221 (1996). Wechselfestigkeit von Flachproben aus Grauguss.
/17/ FKM-Forschungsheft 183-2 (1994). Rechnerischer Festigkeitsnachweis fur Maschinenbauteile, Richtlinie. *1
/18/ FKM-Forschungsheft 183-1 (1994). Rechnerischer Festigkeitsnachweis fiir Maschinenbauteile, Kommentare.
/19/ FKM-Forschungsheft 180 (1994). Schweillverbindungen II.
/20/ FKM-Forschungsheft 143 (1989). Schweillverbindungen I.
/21/ FKM-Richtlinie Rechnerischer Festigkeitsnachweis fiir Maschinenbauteile,
3., vollstandig iiberarbeitete und erweiterte Ausgabe (1998).
/22/ FKM-Richtlinie Rechnerischer Festigkeitsnachweis fur Maschinenbauteile,
4., erweiterte Ausgabe (2002).

Related Conference Proceedings

Festigkeitsberechnung metallischer Bauteile, Empfehlungen fur Konstrukteure und Entwicklungsingenieure.
VDI Berichte 1227, Diisseldorf, VDI-Verlag, 1995.
Festigkeitsberechnung metallischer Bauteile, Empfehlungen fur Entwicklungsingenieure und Konstrukteure.
VDI Berichte 1442, Diisseldorf, VDI-Verlag, 1998.
Festigkeitsberechnung metallischer Bauteile, Empfehlungen fur Entwicklungsingenieure und Konstrukteure.
VDI Berichte 1698, Dusseldorf, VDI-Verlag, 2002.
Bauteillebensdauer Nachweiskonzepte. DVM-Bericht 800, Deutscher Verband fur Materialsforschung und
-prufung, Berlin 1997.
Betriebsfestigkeit - Neue Entwicklungen bei der Lebensdauerberechnung von Bauteilen. DVM-Bericht 802,
Deutscher Verband fur Materialsforschung und -prufung, Berlin 2003.

1 1'" and 2 nd Edition ofthe FKM-Guideline

 7

Contents
Page 5 Appendices Page
0 General survey 5.1 Material tables. 131
0.1 Scope 9 5.2 Stress concentration factors 178
0.2 Technical background 5.3 Fatigue notch factors 187
0.3 Structure and elements 5.4 Fatigue classes (FAT) for welded
components of structural steel and of
1 Assessment of the static strength aluminum alloys 195
using nominal stresses 5.5 Comments about the fatigue strength
1.0 General 19 of welded components 209
1.1 Characteristic stress values 5.6 Adjusting the stress ratio of a stress
1.2 Material properties 22 spectrum to agree with that of the S-N curve
1.3 Design parameters 30 and deriving a stepped spectrum 216
1.4 Component strength 33 5.7 Assessment using classes of utilization 218
1.5 Safety factors 34 5.8 Particular strength characteristics of
1.6 Assessment 36 surface hardened components 222
5.9 An improved method for computing the
2 Assessment of the fatigue strength component fatigue limit in the case of
using nominal stresses synchronous multiaxial stresses 223
2.0 General 41 5.10 Approximate assessment of the fatigue
2.1 Parameters of the stress spectrum strength in the case of non-proportional
2.2 Material properties 47 multiaxial stresses 226
2.3 Design Parameters 50 5.11 Experimental determination of
2.4 Component strength 57 component strength values 227
2.5 Safety factors 68 5.12 Stress concentration factor for a substitute
2.6 Assessment 70 structure 230

3 Assessment of the static strength 6 Examples

using local stresses
6.1 Shaft with shoulder 231
3.0 General 73 6.2 Shaft with V-belt drive 236
3.1 Characteristic stress values 6.3 Compressor flange made of grey
3.2 Material properties 76 cast iron 241
3.3 Design parameters 85 6.4 Welded notched component 245
3.4 Component strength 89 6.5 Cantilever subject to two independent loads 250
3.5 Safety factors 90 6.6 Component made of a wrought
3.6 Assessment 93 aluminum alloy 256
4 Assessment of the fatigue strength 7 Symbols and basic formulas
using local stresses
7.1 Abbreviations 259
4.0 General 97 7.2 Indices
4.1 Parameters of the stress spectrum 7.3 Lower case characters
4.2 Material properties 103 7.4 Upper case characters 260
4.3 Design parameters 106 7.5 Greek alphabetic characters 261
4.4 Component strength 113 7.6 Basic formulas 262
4.5 Safety factors 125
4.6 Assessment 127 8 Subject index 263
8
 9
o General survey

o General survey lRo2 EN.dog 0.2 Technical Background

Basis of the guideline are the references listed on page
0.1 Scope 7, in particular the former TGL-Standards, the former
This guideline is valid for components in mechanical Vlrl-Guideline 2226, as well as the- regulations of DIN
engineering and in related fields of industry. Its 18 800, the IIW-Recommendations and Eurocode 3.
application has to be agreed between the contracting Moreover the guideline was developed to the current
parties. state of knowledge by taking into account the results of
more recent investigations.
For components subjected to mechanical loadings it
allows an analytical assessment of the static strength
and of the fatigue strength, the latter as an assessment of
the fatigue limit, of the constant amplitude fatigue 0.3 Structure and elements
strength or of the variable amplitude fatigue strength, Contents Page
according to the service stress conditions.
0.3.0 General 9
Other analytical assessments, for example of safety
against brittle fracture, of stability, or of deformation 0.3.1 Procedure of calculation 10
under load, as well as an experimental assessment of 0.3.2 Service stresses
strength *1, are not subject of this guideline.
0.3.3 Methods of strength assessment 11
It is presupposed, that the components are professionally 0.3.3.0 General
produced with regard to construction, material and 0.3.3.1 Assessment of the static strength
workmanship, and that they are faultless in a technical using nominal stresses, Chapter 1
sense. 0.3.3.2 Assessment of the fatigue strength 12
The guideline is valid for components produced with or using nominal stresses, Chapter 2
without machining or by welding of steel, of iron or of 0.3.3.3 Assessment of the static strength
aluminum materials that are intended for use under using local stresses, Chapter 3
normal or elevated temperature conditions, and in detail 0.3.3.4 Assessment of the fatigue strength 13
- for components with geometrical notches, using local stresses, Chapter 4
for components with welded joints, 0.3.4 Kinds of components 13
for static loading, 0.3.4.0 General
- for fatigue loading with more than about 104 0.3.4.1 Rod-shaped (lD) components
constant or variable amplitude cycles, 0.3.4.2 Shell-shaped (2D) components 14
- for milled or forged steel, also stainless steel, cast 0.3.4.3 Block-shaped (3D) components 15
iron materials as well as aluminum alloys or cast
aluminum alloys, 0.3.5 Uniaxial and multiaxial stresses 16
- for component temperatures
from- 40°C to 500°C for steel,
from- 25°C to 500°C for cast iron materials and 0.3.0 General
from- 25°C to 200°C for aluminum materials, An assessment of the static strength is required prior to
- for a non-corrosive environment. an assessment of the fatigue strength.
If an application of the guideline is intended outside the Before applying the guideline it has to be decided
mentioned field of application additional specifications
are to be agreed upon. - what cross-sections or structural detail of the
2
component shall be assessed * and
The guideline is not valid if an assessment of strength is
what service loadings are to be considered.
required according to other standards, rules or
guidelines, or if more specific design codes are The service loadings are to be determined on the safe
applicable, as for example for bolted joints. side, that is, with a sufficient probability they should be
higher than most of the normally occurring loadings *3.
The strength values are supposed to correspond to an
anticipated probability of 97,5 % (average probability of
1 Subject of Chapter 5.11 "Experimental determination of component survival Po = 97,5 %).
strength values" is not the realization of an experimental assessment of
strength, but the question how specific and sufficiently reliable
component strength values suitable for the general procedure of strength
assessment may be derived experimentally.

2 In particular, what critical points of the considered cross-sections or

component. 3 Usually this probability can hardly be quantified, however.
 10
o General survey
0.3.1 Procedure of calculation At the assessment stage (box at bottom of either Figure)
the characteristic values of service stress occurring in
The procedure of calculation for an assessment of the the component (box at top on the left) and the
static strength is presented in Figure 0.0.1, the almost component strength values derived from the mechanical
identical procedure for an assessment of the fatigue material properties and the design parameters (middle
strength in Figure 0.0.2 *4. column) are compared by including the required safety
factors (box at bottom on the right). In specifying
Sequential component fatigue strength values the mean stress and
procedure of
calculation the variable amplitude effects are regarded as essential
factors of influence. The assessment of strength is
successful if the degree of utilization is less or equal
1,00, where the degree of utilization is defined by the
ratio of the characteristic service stress to the component
strength value that has been reduced by the safety factor,
Chapter 1.6.
In Figure 0.0.1 and Figure 0.0.2 the arrangements of the
individual boxes from top to bottom illustrate the
Safety
factors
sequential procedure of calculation.

0.3.2 Service stresses

Figure 0.0.1 Procedure of calculation for an assessment
of the static strength.
Characteristic
service S~resses
Component fati;~~l;it~~~~~~~l
forzeromean stress
Component fatigiielimlt
for-the actualmean stress
.~~--
Figure 0.0.2 Procedure of calculation for an assessment
of the fatigue strength.
For an application of the guideline the stresses resulting
from the service loadings have to be determined for the
so-called reference point of the component, that is the
potential point of fatigue crack initiation at the cross-
section or at the component under consideration. In case
of doubt several reference points are to be considered,
for example in the case of welded joints the toe and the
-- root of the weld.
Sequential
procedure of
There is a need to distinguish the names and subscripts
caJc.ulation
of the different components or types of stress, that may
act in rod-shaped (lD), in shell-shaped (2D) or in
block-shaped (3D) components, respectively, Chapter
0.3.4.
The stresses are to be determined according to known
principles and techniques: analytically according to
: elementary or advanced methods of theoretical
.,
mechanics, numerically after the finite element or the
Component
fatigue boundary element method, or experimentally by
strength measurement.
i
I All stresses, except the stress amplitudes, are combined
JI
with a sign, in particular compressive stresses are
Safety negative.
factors
To perform an assessment it is necessary to decide about
the kind of stress determination for the reference point
considered: The stresses can be determined
as nominal stresses *5 (notation S and T),
as elastically determined local stresses, effective
notch stresses or structural (hot spot) stresses *
6
(notation o and r).

4 A survey on the analytical procedures of assessment based on the
equations of the guideline may be found in Chapter 7.6.
5 Nominal stresses can be computed for a well defmed cross-section only.
6 The elastic stress at the root of a notch exceeds the nominal stress by a
stress concentration factor. In the case of welded joints effective notch
stresses are applied to the assessment of the fatigue strength only.
Structural stresses, also termed geometrical or hot spot stresses, are
normally in use with welded joints only. For further information see
Chapter 5.5.

Correspondingly the component strength values are to
be determined
as nominal strength values or
as local strength values of the elastic local stress, of
the effective notch stress or of the structural stress.
With the procedures of calculation structured uniformly
for both types of stress determination it is intended that
more or less identical results will be obtained from
comparable strength assessments based on either
nominal stresses or local stresses.
0.3.3 Methods of strength assessment
0.3.3.0 General
In order to present the guideline clearly arranged and
user-friendly, it is organized in four chapters, Figure
0.0.3:
- Assessment of the static strength
using nominal stresses, Chapter I,
Assessment of the fatigue strength
using nominal stresses, Chapter 2,
Assessment of the static strength
using local stresses, Chapter 3,
Assessment of the fatigue strength
using local stresses, Chapter 4.
.~.
Static strength LNoml?al
~
Fatii:ue strength
Nominalstresses ) stresses Nominal stresses
;/
Static
I
Fatigue
strength strength'
aSseSSlllent assessment
~~.
.r" Chapter 3: "<. Chapter 4:
(
Stresses \.Li ..
~tb
Stade. strength ) - . LO.cal. -....ali.ou. estr.c.·.n.. \
.)
"..
.~
IAcalstrcsses/" ~~
Figure 0.0.3 Organization of the guideline.
In particular the procedure of calculation is completely
presented in everyone of the four chapters, even if this
results in repetitions of the same or almost the same
parts of text in Chapter I and Chapter 3 or in Chapter 2
and Chapter 4, respectively.
The procedure of calculation using nominal stresses is
to be preferred for simple rod-shaped (lD) and for shell-
shaped (2D) components. The procedure of calculation
using local stresses has to be applied to block-shaped
(3D) components, and moreover in general, if the
stresses are determined by a finite-element or a
boundary-element calculation, if there are no well-
defined cross-sections or no simple cross-section shapes,
if stress concentration factors or fatigue notch factors
are not known, or (concerning the assessment of the
static strength) in the case ofbrittIe materials.
11
o General survey
0.3.3.1 Assessment of the static strength using
nominal stresses, Chapter 1
Relevant nominal characteristic service stresses are the
extreme maximum and extreme minimum values of the
individual types of stress or stress components, e.g.
nominal values of the axial (or tension-compression)
stress, Szd, of the bending stress, Sb, and so forth *7 *8,
Chapter 1.1.
Relevant material properties are the tensile strength and
the yield strength (yield stress or 0.2 proof stress) as
well as the strength values for shear derived from these.
A technological size effect is taken into account if
appropriate. The influence of an elevated temperature
on the material properties - strength at elevated
temperature and creep strength, yield strength at
elevated temperature and I% creep limit - is allowed for
by means of temperature factors, Chapter 1.2.
Design parameters are the section factors, by which an
experienced partial plasticity of the component is
allowed .according to yield strength, type of loading,
shape of cross-section, and stress concentration factor.
From the section factor and from further parameters an
overall design factor is derived, Chapter 1.3.
The nominal values of the static component strength are
derived from the tensile strength, divided by the
respective overall design factor, Chapter 1.4.
As common in practice the safety factor against the
tensile strength is 2,0. For materials with a yield
strength less than 0,75 times the tensile strength the
safety factor is 1,5 against the yield strength, however.
Under favorable conditions these safety factors may be
reduced, Chapter 1.5.
The assessment is carried out by proving that the degree
of utilization is less or equal 1,00 . The degree of
-,
utilization for an individual stress component or type of
stress is the ratio of its nominal characteristic service
stress value, divided by the allowable nominal static
component strength value, which follows from the
nominal static component strength divided by the safety
factor.
If there are several stress components or types of stress
their individual degrees of utilization are combined to
obtain an entire degree of utilization. The interaction
formula to be applied to that combination allows for the
ductility of the material in question, Chapter 1.6.
For welded components the assessment of the static
strength has to be carried out for the toe section as for
non-welded components, and for the throat section with
7 According to rod-, shell- or block-shaped components, Chapter 0.3.4.
8 The extreme maximum or minimum stresses for the assessment of the
static strength may be different from the maximum and minimum stresses
for the assessment of the fatigue strength, that are determined from the
largest amplitude and the related mean value of a stress spectrum.
 12
an equivalent nominal stress, that is computed from the
components of nominal stress acting in the weld seam
*9.
0.3.3.2 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
nominal stresses, Chapter 2
Relevant nominal characteristic service stresses are the
largest stress amplitudes in connection with the
respective stress spectra and the related mean stress
values. They are determined for the individual stress
components or types of stress, e.g. amplitudes and mean
values of the nominal axial (tension-compression)
7 8
stresses, Sa,zd and Sm,zd, and so forth * *, Chapter 2.1.
Relevant material properties are the fatigue limit for
completely reversed axial stress and the fatigue limit for
completely reversed shear stress of the material in
question. A technological size effect is taken into
account where appropriate. The influence of an
elevated temperature is allowed for by means of
temperature factors, Chapter 2.2.
Design parameters to be considered in particular are the
fatigue notch factors, allowing for the design of the
component (shape, size and type of loading), as well as
the roughness factor and the surface treatment factor, by
which the respective surface properties are accounted
for. By specific combination of all these factors a
summary design factor is calculated, Chapter 2.3.
The nominal values of the component fatigue limit for
completely reversed stresses follow from the derived
fatigue limit values of the material, divided by the
respective design factors, Chapter 2.4.1. From these
fatigue limit values the amplitudes of the component
fatigue limit according to the mean stress values (or the
stress ratios) are to be derived, Chapter 2.4.2. The
amplitudes that specify the variable amplitude fatigue
strength of the component are obtained from the fatigue
limit values multiplied by a factor depending on the
parameters of the stress spectrum (total number of
cycles and amplitude frequency distribution), Chapter
2.4.3.
The basic value of the safety factor is 1,5. Under
favorable conditions this safety factor may be reduced,
Chapter 2.5.
The assessment is carried out by proving that the degree
of utilization is less or equal 1,00 . The degree of
utilization for an individual stress component or type of
stress is the ratio of its nominal characteristic service
stress amplitude, divided by the allowable amplitude of
the component fatigue limit or of the component
variable amplitude fatigue strength. The allowable
9 This assessment of the static strength for welded components is
according to DIN 18 800 part 1. As far as conditionally weldable steel,
stainless steel, weldable cast iron materials or weldable aluminum alloys
are concerned, the rules of DIN 18 800 are provisional and may be
applied with caution only.
o General survey
amplitude value follows from the nominal amplitude of
the derived component fatigue strength divided by the
safetyfactor.
If there are several stress components or types of stress
their individual degrees of utilization are combined to
obtain the total degree of utilization. The interaction
formula to be applied to that combination allows for the
ductility of the material in question, that is in the same
way as for the assessment of the static strength, Chapter
2.6.
For the assessment of the fatigue strength of welded
components using nominal stresses basic fatigue limit
values for completely reversed stress are given. They are
independent of the tensile strength of the base material
(which is different to non-welded components). They
are converted by design factors that follow from a
classification scheme of structural weld details. The
combined effect of mean stress and of residual stresses
in welded components is considered by means of a mean
stress factor together with a residual stress factor *10.
0.3.3.3 Assessment of the static strength using local
stresses, Chapter 3
Relevant characteristic local service stresses are the
extreme maximum and extreme minimum stresses of
the individual types of stress or stress components, e.g.
local values of the normal (axial and/or bending) stress,
7
o, and of the shear (shear and/or torsional) stress * *8,
Chapter 3.1.
Relevant material properties are to be determined as for
nominal stresses, Chapter 3.2.
Design parameters are the section factors, by which an
experienced partial plasticity of the component is
allowed according to yield strength, type of loading, and
shape of the component. The section factors are
calculated on the basis of Neuber's formula, but by
observing individual upper bound values that follows
from the plastic limit load (plastic notch factor). From
the .section factors and from further parameters an
overall design factor is derived, Chapter 3.3 *11.
The local values of the static component strength are
derived from the tensile strength, divided by the
respectiveoverall design factor, Chapter 3.4.
The safety factors are to be determined as for nominal
stresses, Chapter 3.5.
10 The assessment of the fatigue strength for welded components makes
reference to the llW-Recommendations and Eurocode 3. As far as
conditionally weldable steel, stainless steel, weldable cast iron materials
or weldable aluminum alloys are concerned this kind of calculation is
provisional and may be applied with caution only.
11 The assessment ofthe static strength using local stresses on the basis of
Neuber's formula and the plastic limit load is an approximation which has
to be regarded as provisional and is to be applied with caution only.
 13
o General survey
The assessment is carried out by means of the degree of nominal stresses by means of a mean stress factor
utilization as for nominal stresses, but with the together with a residual stress factor *10.
respective local values of the characteristic service stress
and the local component strength values, Chapter 3.6.
For welded components the assessment of the static 0.3.4 Kinds of components
strength using local stresses is carried out using 0.3.4.0 General
structural stresses (not with notch root stresses), for the
weld toe as for non-welded components, for the root of Rod-shaped (10), shell-shaped (2D) and block-shaped
the weld using an equivalent structural stress, that is to (3D) components are to be distinguished, as in each case
be derived from the structural stress components acting other stress components or types of stresses, identified
in the weld seam *9. by differing symbols and subscripts, are of concern. The
distinction is only a formal one, however, and the
procedure of calculation is the same in all cases.
0.3.3.4 Assessment of the fatigue strength using local Specific particulars apply to welded components.
stresses, Chapter 4
Relevant local characteristic service stresses are the 0.3.4.1 Rod-shaped (ID) components
largest stress amplitudes in connection with the
respective stress spectra and the related mean stress For rod-shaped (10) components - rod, bar, shaft, or
values. They are determined for the individual stress beam for example - the following system of co-ordinates
components or types of stress, e.g. amplitudes and mean is introduced: x-axis is the longitudinal center line of
values of the local normal (axial and/or bending) stress, the component, y- and z-axes are the main axes of the
7 8 cross-section that are to be specified so, that for the
0"a and O"m , and so forth * * , Chapter 4.1.
moments of inertia Iy~ Iz is valid, Figure 0.0.4.
The relevant material properties are determined as for
nominal stresses, Chapter 4.2.
Design parameters to be considered in particular are the
Kt-Kf ratios, allowing for the design of the component
(shape and size), as well as the roughness factor and the
surface treatment factor, by which the respective surface
properties are accounted for. By specific combination of
all these factors a summary design factor is calculated,
Chapter 4.3.
The local values of the component fatigue limit for
"0.0...·
'z
completely reversed stresses follow from the derived
fatigue limit values of the material, divided by the
Figure 0.0.4 Rod-shaped (ID) component (round
respective design factors, Chapter 4.4.1. The
specimen with groove) in bending. Nominal stress S,
conversions to the amplitude of the component fatigue
and maximum local stress O"m"" at the reference point W.
limit and to the amplitude of the component variable
amplitude fatigue strength are as for nominal stresses,
Chapter 4.4.2 to 4.4.3.
Calculation using nominal stresses
The safety factors are to be determined as for nominal
stresses, Chapter 4.5. If the assessment of rod-shaped (ID) components is
carried out by using nominal stresses, Chapter I and 2,
The assessment by means of the degree of utilization is the nominal stresses to be computed at the reference
as for nominal stresses, but with the respective local point are Szd from an axial load, Sb from a bending
values of the characteristic stress amplitude and the moment, T, from a shear load, and/or Tt from a
value of the component fatigue limit or of the torsional moment acting at the respective section.
component variable amplitude fatigue strength, Chapter
4.6. For the equations given in Chapter 1 and 2 it is
provided, that both the bending stress Sb and the shear
For the assessment of the fatigue strength of welded stress T, act in the x-z-plane. Otherwise stress
components using structural stresses or effective notch components Sb,y and Sb,z , Ts,y and Ts,z are to be
stresses the same basic fatigue limit values for considered *12.
completely reversed stresses apply as for nominal
stresses. They hold for effective notch stresses without
conversion, but for structural stresses they have to be
converted by factors given for some typical weld details.
The combined effect of mean stress and of residual
12 The indices y and z describe the direction ofthe related vectors ofthe
stresses in welded components is to be considered as for bending moments My, Mz and ofthe lateral loads Fy, Fz .
 14
o General survey
In case of rotationally symmetrical cross-sections with 0.3.4.2 Shell-shaped (2D) components Rod-shaped
circumferential notches a resultant bending stress and a (ID) welded components
resultant shear stress can be calculated from these stress
For shell-shaped (2D) components - disk, plate, or shell
components,
for example - the following system of coordinates is
s, =Jr-S-~,y-+-S-~,-z ' (0.3.1) introduced: The x- and y-axis are placed in the surface
at the reference point, the z-axis is normal to the surface
2 2
Ts = Ts,y +TS,z in thickness direction. The normal stress and the shear
stress in thickness direction are supposed to be
The equations given in Chapter 1 and 2 may be applied negligible, Figure 0.0.5.
to Sb and T;
In the general case of not rotationally symmetrical
cross-sections a calculation using local stresses is
normally to be preferred.
Additional stresses at notches (as for example the
circumferential stress associated with an axial stress of a
shaft with groove) may be included in the stress
concentration factor, otherwise they will be neglected.

Figure O. O. 5 Shell-shaped (2D) component (shell with

Calculation using local stresses
If the calculation of rod-shaped (ID) components is
carried out using local stresses *13, Chapter 3 and 4, the
local normal stresses at the reference point from axial
and from bending loading (in x-direction), azd = a as
well as the local shear stresses "ts = "t from shear and
from torsion (normal to the x-direction) are considered.
If the local stresses are calculated from the nominal
stresses by multiplication with the respective stress
concentration factors, the equations given in Chapter 3
and 4 are applicable.
However, if the calculation yields the complete local
state of stress at the reference point (as for example a
finite-element calculation does), the principle stresses
0"1, 0"2, 0"3 are computed *14 and treated as described for
block-shaped (3D) components.
Rod-shaped (ID) welded components
For rod-shaped (ID) welded components *15 the
notations a and "t apply to structural stresses and the
notation aK and "tK apply to effective notch stresses *16.
cutout detail). Local stresses aa,x at the reference point
W (peak value) and aa,x,ru. at the neighbouring point B.
Calculation using nominal stresses
If the assessment of shell-shaped (2D) components is
carried out using nominal stresses, Chapter 1 and 2, the
nominal stresses at the reference point to be computed
are the normal stresses Szdx = S, and Szdy = S, from
loadings in the x- and y-directions and T, = T from a
shear loading.
Calculation using local stresses
If the assessment of shell-shaped (2D) components is
carried out using local stresses, Chapter 3 and 4, the
local stresses at the reference point azdx = ax and
azdy = a y in the x- and y-directions and the local shear
stress r, = t are considered.
If the local stresses are computed from the nominal
stresses by multiplication with the respective stress
concentration factors, the equations given in Chapter 3
and 4 are applicable.
However, if the calculation yields the complete local
state of stress at the reference point (as for example a
finite-element calculation does), the principle stresses
0"1,0"2,0"3 are computed *14 and treated as described for
block-shaped (3D) components.

13 The assessment of rod-shaped (ID) components should preferably be

carried out using nominal stresses whenever possible.

14 Principle stresses are independent of the chosen coordinate system. In

the special case of a proportional loading the directions of the principle
stresses remain fixed to the coordinates of the component. In the more 15 Rod-shaped (ID) welded components are rolled sections with circular,
general case of non-proportional loading the directions and the amounts tube, 1-, box or other cross-sections connected or joined with butt welds
of the three principle stresses will change with time, see Chapter 0.3.5. and/or fillet welds.
 15
o General survey
Shell-shaped (2D) welded components 0.3.4.3 Block-shaped (3D) components
For shell-shaped (2D) welded components the notations In the general case block-shaped (3D) components are
o"x , O"y and 't apply to structural stresses and the to be calculated using local stresses, Chapter 3 and 4
*17 ~~--'-"
notations O"Kx , O"Ky and 'tK apply to effective notch
stresses *16 . For block-shaped (3D) components the coordinate
system at the reference point may be of cartesian,
0':«,x'1l!~. ¥
_.-
;70.
- . .,
.. . . ; (
... J~.~
... '. . - S x
/-~
cylindrical or spherical type.
The calculation is supposed to yield the complete state
/Io-{ (It'd --of local stress at the reference point (as for example a
<;,fI"c-(<lC<{ ,finite-element calculation does). From that the principle
1 : - - - ' = - -_ _ nO)'jJIr'rtfl.{ >tl~esses_~!.....~2-,.~~~.,are computed *14, and for these the
:....--+--~-"'i , degrees of utilization are determined.
If the reference point W is located at a free surface of a
block-shaped (3D) component, Figure 0.0.8, it is
supposed that 0"1 and 0"2 are the principle stresses at the
surface, while the principle stress 0"3 is supposed to point
normally to the surface inwards the component.
In general stress gradients exist for all three principle
Figure 0.0.6 Shell-shaped (2D) welded component. stresses, ·both normal to the surface and in either
Example: Strap with longitudinal stiffner. After Radaj direction of the surface. However, only the stress
/10/. gradients for 0" 1 and 0"2 normal to the surface can be
Top: Joint, Centre: Stress distribution, Bottom: Profile. Relevant is the considered in the procedure of calculation, while the
stress at the reference point W (at the toe line of the weld).
stress gradients for 0"1 and 0"2 in any directions of the
Calculation using nominal stresses: Stress Sx . surface and the gradients of 0"3 can not.
Calculation using structural stress: Maximum stress O"x,max obtained from Block-shaped (3D) components can be calculated as
extrapolating the stress distribution towards the weld toe. shell-shaped (2D) components if the stresses O"x , O"y and
Calculation using effective notch stresses: Maximum stress O"Kx,max 't at the load free surface are of concern only.
occurring at the weld toe, see Figure 0.0.7 .

.......Radius r = 1 mm
/ I \
F
\/ F

Figure 0.0.7 Shell-shaped (2D) welded component.

Example: Cruciform joint and butt weld. After Radaj
/l0/.
Calculation using effective notch stresses: The maximum stress O"Kx,max
occurring at the toe or at the root of the weld has to be computed by
introducing a fictitious effective notch radius r = 1 rom, unless the real
radius is r > 1 rom (the fictitious notch radius is intended for the Figure 0.0.8 Block-shaped (3D) component (flange).
assessment of the fatigue strength only). Local longitudinal stress 0"1 and circumferential stress 0"2
The fictitious notch radius r = 1 rom applies to welded joints from at the reference point W (peak values), stresses O"u,s and
structural steel. It is supposed, however, that it is applicable for other 0"2,~s at neighboring point B.
kinds of material as well, although this has to be considered as a
preliminary specification for welded aluminum materials so far.

16 Structural stresses can be applied to the assessment of the static

strength and to the assessment of the fatigue strength. Effective notch
stresses can be applied to the assessment of the fatigue strength, but not to 17 For block-shaped components the determination of a nominal stress is
the assessment of the static strength. not possible since there is no well defmed cross-section.
 16
Block-shaped (3D) welded components
Welds at a load-free surface of block-shaped (3D)
components having no inner defects can be assessed as
shell-shaped (2D) welded components. Then the
notations G x , Gy and 't apply to structural stresses and
the notations O"Kx , O"Ky and 'tK apply to the notch root
stresses at the surface, Figure 0.0.6.
0.3.5 Uniaxial and multiaxial stresses
The stresses occurring in the cross-section or at the
reference point of a component may be caused
by a single load or
- by several loads acting simultaneously.
In both cases
an uniaxial stress or
multiaxial stresses
may result at the reference point.
An uniaxial stress occurs under special circumstances
only, as for example in a tension loaded prismatic bar,
or at an unloaded edge of shell-shaped (2D) or block-
shaped (3D) components, the latter even if several loads
act on these components simultaneously, Figure 0.0.9.
In addition an uniaxial stress may be assumed at the
reference point if, by comparison, any further stresses
are small.
In general components are subject to multiaxial stresses,
however. Then two or three normal stresses, or normal
stresses and shear stresses occur at the reference point.
t T
s,"-,-+ Sy t
-"-+T
+-~ +~at ..
-
f
~
t-': x
-{Q:Jt..:'
~ ~
Figure 0.0.9 Uniaxial and multiaxial stresses.
Nominal stresses Sx- Sy and T.
Left: multiaxial stresses in a sheet section,
Right: uniaxial stress in a sheet section at the edge of a cutout.
In this guideline a basic principle is defined both for an
assessment of the static strength and of the fatigue
strength in case of multiaxial stresses:
the individual degrees of utilization for everyone of
the computed types of stress or stress components
have to be determined and assessed separately in a
first step, and
thereafter these individual degrees of utilization will
be combined by means of an appropriate interaction
formula to obtain the entire degree of utilization for
final assessment.
o General survey
Assessment of the static strength
For the assessment of the static strength the most
unfavorable case to be considered is that the extreme
values of all maximum and minimum stresses occur
simultaneously. Accordingly the entire degree of
utilization has to be computed. However, stresses of
different sign that will decrease the entire degree of
utilization are to be included only if they definitely
occur together with the remaining stresses, Chapter 1.6
or 3.6.
Assessment of the fatigue strength
For the assessment of the fatigue strength *18 multiaxial
stresses varying with time have to be distinguished as
follows:
proportional stresses,
synchronous stresses, or
non-proportional stresses.
Proportional stresses
Normally proportional stresses result from a single
loading acting on the component.
Examples of proportional stresses are the
circumferential and the longitudinal stresses of a
cylindrical vessel loaded by internal pressure, or the
bending and torsional stresses of a round cantilever
loaded eccentrically by a single load.
If this single acting loading is varying with time, all
multiaxial stresses are varying proportionally to that
loading and proportionally to each other, which also is
true with regard to their amplitudes and their mean
values. Further, as a consequence, the principle stresses
observe non-changing directions relative to the
component. The amounts of the stresses, also in the
stress amplitude spectra, may be converted by constant
factors. Hence all stress spectra are of similar shape, but
may differ in intensity (amount of their characteristic
maximum stress).
Proportional stresses my also result from several
loadings that act on the component simultaneously and,
for their part, change proportionally with time as well.
Then several stresses of the same kind are to be overlaid
additively.
For proportional multiaxial stresses, the interaction
formulas given in Chapter 2.6 and 4.6 are exactly valid
in the sense of material mechanics, if the related rules of
signs are observed.
18 Both for the assessment ofthe fatigue limit and for the assessment of
the variable amplitude strength.
 17
o General survey
Synchronous stresses determined degrees of utilization for the individual
loadings are then added linearly in order to estimate the
Synchronous stresses are a simple case of non-
entire degree of utilization. Compared to usual
proportional stresses. They are proportional with regard
interaction formulas developed for proportional stresses
to their amplitudes, however non-proportional with
the linear addition may be assumed to produce results
regard to their mean values.
on the safe side *19.
Normally synchronous stresses result from a combined
A necessary reservation for applying this approximate
action of a constant loading with a second, different
way of calculation is, that a thorough stress analysis is
kind of loading, that is varying with time. Examples are
performed in every case and that careful evaluation of
a shaft with a non-changing torsional loading and a
the result is performed finally.
rotating bending loading. Or a long, lying cylindrical
vessel under pulsating internal pressure, where the In order to reach an optimum degree of utilization of the
longitudinal stress is non-proportional to the component fatigue strength in the case of non-
circumferential stress because of the bending stress from proportional multiaxial stresses, an experimental
the dead weight is additively overlaid. assessment of the fatigue strength has to be
recommended according to the contemporary state of
For synchronous multiaxial stresses, the interaction
the art.
formulae given in Chapter 2.6 and 4.6 - if observing the
related rules of sign - are valid as a useful
approximation, because they are applied to the stress
amplitudes, which are proportional to each other, and
because the fatigue strength is determined by the stress
amplitudes in the first place. Additional rules for
considering the mean stresses are required, however.
An improved procedure for the assessment of the
component fatigue limit in the case of synchronous
multiaxial stresses is presented in Chapter 5.9.

Non-proportional stresses
Non-proportional stresses result from the action of at
least two loadings that vary non-proportionally with
time in a different manner.
In this most general case of non-proportional loading
different spectra apply to the individual types of stress
that result from the combined loadings. In particular the
amounts and the directions of the principle stresses are
variable with time.
The case of variable directions of the principle stresses
can not be considered with the interaction formulas
given in Chapter 2.6 and 4.6.
Appropriate methods of calculation proposed for the
assessment of the fatigue strength in the case of non-
proportional stresses, that have been developed from a
material mechanics point of view, require much
computing effort and are applicable with computer
programs for short stress sequences only. Their
plausibility is currently subject of investigations.
Therefore only an approximate way of calculation for
the assessment of the fatigue strength in the case of non- 19 For non-proportional multiaxialloadings the reference point may be at
proportional multi-axial stresses can be given, Chapter different positions in the case ofthe combined loadings and in the case of
5.10: As proportional stresses result from each of the each ofthe individual loadings, respectively. This is because the most
damaging stresses from the combined loadings may occur at positions
acting loadings the degrees of utilization of these different from the positions ofthe maximum stresses from the individual
individual loadings can be correctly computed and loadings. By the above mentioned approximation, however, the full
assessed as described in Chapter 2.6 and 4.6. The so damaging effect of each loading may be assumed to be superimposed at
the reference point in question.
18
o General survey
 19
1.1 Characteristic stress values
1 Assessment of the static
strength using nominal stresses
IR>11 N.doq
1.0 General
According to this chapter the assessment of the static
strength using nominal stresses is to be carried out.
It should be observed that not necessarily the component
static strength is determined by a failure occurring at a
notched section. Likewise a global failure occurring at a
different, unnotched or moderately notched section of
the component may be determining, Figure 1.0.1.
Kt,A
~
-__ c------- ~ _
.~--+._._. -- -------'---- .-...-...
F F
Figure 1.0.1 Different sections for a static failure
occurring as a local failure (A) or as a global failure (B).
For GGG sorts and wrought aluminium alloys with low
elongation, A < 12,5 % , for all sorts GT and GG as
well as for cast aluminium alloys the assessment of the
static strength is to be carried out by using local stresses
according to Chapter 3 *1.
In the case of very high stress concentration factors the
assessment of the static strength is to be carried out by
using local stresses according to Chapter 3 *2.
For block-shaped (3D) components the assessment of
the static strength is to be carried out by using local
stresses according to Chapter 3.
For all other kinds of material (GGG sorts and
wrought aluminium alloys with high elongation,
A'2 12,5 % , GS, milled steel and forging-steel) and for
smaller stress concentration factors of rod-shaped (lD)
and of shell-shaped (2D) components the assessment of
the static strength using nominal stresses is applicable.
1 Because these materials lack sufficient plasticity.
2 Because extremely high local strains are associated with a very high
stress concentration factor. The stress concentration factor Kt = 3 ofaflat
bar with a hole issuggested asa limit value.
1 Assessment of the static strength
using nominal stresses
1.1 Characteristic stress values
Contents Page
1.1.0 General 19
1.1.1 Characteristic stress values
1.1.1.0 General
1.1.1.1 Rod-shaped (ID) components 20
1.1.1.2 Shell-shaped (2D) components
1.1.0 General
According to this chapter the characteristic service
stress values are to be determined.
Relevant are the extreme maximum and rmmmum
stresses Smax,ex,zd and Smin,ex,zd, ... of the individual stress
components expected for the most unfavorable operating
conditions and for special loads according to
specification or due to physical limits *3. Both the
maximum and minimum stresses can be positive or
negative. It is assumed, that all stresses reach their
extreme values simultaneously.
Elevated temperature
In case of elevated temperature the values Smax,ex,zd, ...
and Smin,ex,zd,... are relevant for a short-term loading
(related to the high temperature strength or high
temperature yield strength).
For a long-term·loading (related to the creep strength or
1% creep limit) correct results will only be obtained in
case of a constant (static) tensile stress Smax,ex,zd equally
distributed over the section of concern.
In all other cases of constant or variable loading the
assessment will be more or less on the safe side if the
values Smax,ex,zd , ... and Smin,ex,zd, ... refer to a stress
distribution with a stress gradient, and/or if they refer to
the peak values of a variable stress history, which are of
short duration only, while for the rest of time the stress
is lower.
If in those cases it becomes necessary to make best use
of the long-term load bearing capacity of the component
3 In general the values Smax,ex,zd and Smin,ex,zd for the assessment of
the static strength are the extreme values of a stress history. For the
assessment ofthe fatigue strength a stress spectrum is tobe derived from
that history consisting ofstress cycles ofthe amplitudes Sa,zd,i and the
mean values Sm,zd,i , Chapter 2.1.
The largest amplitude ofthis stress spectrum is Sa,zd, 1 , and the related
mean value is Sm,zd,l . The related maximum and minimum values are
Smax,zd,l = Sm,zd,l + Sa,zd,l and Smin,zd,l = Sm,zd,l - Sa,zd,l .The
values Smax,ex,zd and Smin,ex,zd may be different from the values
Smax,zd, 1 and Smin,zd, 1 . This is because extreme, very seldom
occurring events are important only for the assessment of the static
strength, but hardly for the assessment ofthe fatigue strength. In a stress
spectrum which issupposed toapply tonormal service conditions they do
not have tobe considered therefore.

1.1 Characteristic stress values
(because otherwise the assessment cannot be achieved)
an expert stress analysis is recommended to define the
appropriate stress value to be used for the assessment.
Such an analysis is beyond the scope of the present
guideline, however.
Superposition
If several stress components act simultaneously at the
reference point, they are to be overlaid. For the same
type of stress (for example tension and tension
Smax,ex,zd,l, Smax,ex,zd,2 , ... ) the superposition is to be
carried out at this stage, so that in the following a single
stress value (Smax,ex,zd, ...) exists for each type of stress
*4. For different types of stress (for example bending
and torsion, or tension in direction x and tension in
direction y) the superposition is to be carried out at the
assessment stage, Chapter 1.6.
Stress components acting opposed to each other and
which do not or can not occur simultaneously, are not to
be overlaid however.
1.1.1 Characteristic stress values
1.1.1.0 General
Rod-shaped (lD) and shell-shaped (2D), as well as non-
welded and welded components are to be distinguished.
11.1.1 Rod-shaped (ID) components
Rod-shaped (ID) non-welded components
For rod-shaped (lD) non-welded components an axial
stress Szd , a bending stress Sb, a shear stress T, *5
and/or a torsional stress T t are to be considered. The
extreme maximum and minimum stresses are
Smax,ex,zd, Smax,ex,b, Tmax.exs . Tmax,ex,t,
Smin,ex,zd, Smin,ex,b, T min.ex,s, Tmin,ex,t .
Stresses of different sign (Smax,ex,zd positive, Smin,ex,zd
negative for instance) are generally to be considered
separately *6. For shear and for torsion the highest
absolute value is relevant.
4 Stress components having different signs may cancel out each other in
part orcompletely.
5 Bending and shear in two planes (components y and z) are to be
considered if appropriate, see Chapter 0.3.4.1 .
6 Particularly inthe case ofcast iron materials with different tension and
compression strength values aswell asinthe case ofunsymmetrical cross-
sections.
20
1 Assessment of the static strength
using nominal stresses
Figure 1.1.1 Components of nominal stress SII' Til' SJ.
and TJ. in welds. After DIN 18800, Part 1.
Left: Butt weld, Right: Fi)let weld; the nominal stress isto becomputed
with the throat thickness a.
Rod-shaped (ID) welded components
For rod-shaped (ID) welded components the nominal
stresses are in general to be determined separately for
the toe section and for the throat section *7.
For the toe section the nominal stresses are to be
computed as for non-welded components, Eq. (1.1.1)
.For the throat section equivalent nominal stresses have
to be computed from the nominal stresses resulting from
the particular types of loading, Figure 1.1.1 *8.
2 2 2
Swv,zd = S..L,zd + T..L,zd + 1j1 ,zd ' (1.1.2)
S..L,zd Axial stress normal to the weld seam
T..L,zd Shear stress normal to the weld seam,
TII,zd Shear stress parallel to the weld seam.
Swv,b, T WV,s and T wv,t in analogy.
The extreme maximum and minimum values of the
equivalent nominal stresses are
Smax,ex,wv,zd and Smin,ex,wv,zd, .... (1.1.3)
(1.1.1)
Stresses of different sign (Smax,ex,wv,zd posiuve,
Smin,ex,wv,zd negative for instance) are generally to be
considered separately. For shear and for torsion the
highest absolute value is relevant.
7 For welded components ingeneral anassessment ofthe static strength
isto be carried out for the toe section and for the throat section, because
the cross-sectional areas may be different and because the strength
behavior is evaluated in a different way. The assessment for the toe
section istobecarried out asfor non-welded components. The assessment
for the throat section is to be carried out with the equivalent nominal
stress Swv.zd . ...
8 According to DIN 18 800 part 1, page 36. The nominal stress SII
(normal stress parallel tothe orientation ofthe seam) istobeneglected.
9 Normally Swv,zd will result mainly from S..Lzd. Further types of
loading analogous.
 21
1.1 Characteristic stress values 1 Assessment of the static strength
using nominal stresses

1.1.1.2 Shell-shaped (2D) components

Shell-shaped (2D) non-welded components
For shell-shaped (2D) non-welded components normal
stresses in the x- and y-directions Szd,x = Sx and
Szd,y = Sy as well as a shear stress Ts = T are to be
considered.
The extreme maximum and minimum stresses are
Smax,ex,x , Smax,ex,y , Tmax,ex , (1.1.4)
Smin,ex,x , Smin,ex,y , Tmin,ex .
Tension stresses (positive) or compression stresses
(negative) are generally to be considered separately *10.
For shear the highest absolute value is relevant.

Shell-shaped (2D) welded components

For shell-shaped (2D) welded components, Figure 0.0.6,
the nominal stresses are in general to be determined
separately for the toe section and for the throat
section *7.
For the toe section the nominal stresses are to be
computed as for non-welded components, Eq. (1.1.4),
For the throat section equivalent nominal stresses Swv,x,
Swv,y and Twv have to be computed from the nominal
stresses resulting from the particular types of loading,
Figure 1.1.1, according to Eq (1.1.2). The extreme
maximum and minimum values of the equivalent
stresses are
Smax,ex,wv,x and Smin,ex,wv,x , .... (1.1.5)
In case of opposing effect Smax,ex,wv,x is to be regarded
as positive and Smin,ex,wv,x as negative. Tension and
compression are generally to be considered separately.
For shear the highest absolute value is relevant.

10 See footnote *6. And moreover because the second normal stress Sy
may reduce the degree ofutilization.
 22
1.2 Material properties 1 Assessment of the static strength
using nominal stresses

1.2 Material properties 11m EN.dog

Contents Page
1.2.0 General 22
1.2.1 Component values according to standards 23.
1.2.1.0 General
1.2.1.1 Component values according to standards
of semi-finished products or test pieces
1.2.1.2 Component values according to the
drawing
1.2.1.3 Special case of actual component values 24
1.2.2 Technological size factor
1.2.2.0 General
1.2.2.1 Dependence on the effective diameter
1.2.2.2 Effective diameter
1.2.3 Anisotropy factor 26
values '.'
1.2.4 Compression strength factor and liCCj)tding.
to s.tanqai"ds
shear strength factor Component
1.2.4.0 General values -
1.2.4.1 Compression strength factor
1.2.4.2 Shear strength factor 27
fIg)
1.2.5 Temperature factors Figure 1.2.1 Values according to standards and com-
1.2.5.0 General ponent values according to standards, Rm and Rp, or
1.2.5.1 Normal temperature values specified by drawings, R.n.z and Rp,z .
1.2.5.2 Low temperature
1.2.5.3 Elevated temperature Top: All kinds of material except GG, Rm =:; Rm,N, Rp =:; Rp,N .
Semi-logarithmic decrease of the mechanical material properties with the
effectivediameter deft'.
1.2.0 General
Bottom: GG, Rm =:; or ~ Rm,N . Double-logarithmic decrease of the
According to this chapter the mechanical material mechanicalmaterial propertieswith the effectivediameter deff.
properties like tensile strength R.n, yield strength R, and
further characteristics for non-welded and welded Specified values according to drawings Rm,z and Rp,z.
components are to be determined *1.
All mechanical material properties are those of the Values according to standards
material test specimen. Values according to standards,
component values and component values according to The values according to standards <Rm.N , R.n, Rp,N, Rp)
standards are to be distinguished, Figure 1.2.1. correspond to an average probability of survival
Po = 97,5 % and depend on the effective diameter cleft'
and on the technological size factor.
Material test specimen
In the context of this guideline the material test Component values
specimen is an unnotched polished round specimen of
do = 7,5 mID diameter *2 .. The component values <Rm , R.n.z , R, , Rp,z ) are valid
for the effective diameter cleft' of the component, they
may correspond to different probabilities of survival Po ,
however.
1 If in this chapter values are given for GT, GG or cast aluminum
alloys, they are needed for the assessment of the fatigue strength
only, Chapter 2, but not for the assessment of the static strength, Special case of actual component values
which is to be carried out using local stresses for these materials,
Chapter 3. If specific values for a component <Rm.r , Rp,v have been
2 This definition is the basis of the presented calculation, although determined experimentally, they normally apply to a
specimens for tensile tests may usually have diameters different from probability of survival Po = 50 % ,. and therefore they
7,5mm.

1.2 Material properties
are valid only for the particular component, but not for
the entirety of all those components. They may be used,
for instance, fora subsequent assessment of the strength
of the particular component in case of a service failure,
if for that purpose all safety factors are set to 1,00 in
addition.
Component values according to standards
The component values according to standards <Rm , Rp)
apply to an average probability of survival Pu = 97,5 %
and are valid for the effective diameter, delI, of the
component. Their application is not limited to a
particular component, and therefore they may be used
for an assessment of strength, valid for the entirety of
all those components.
To determine the tensile strength Rm and the yield
strength R, *3 the technological size factor, the
anisotropy factor and the temperature factors are to be
considered in general. Furthermore compression
strength and shear strength values are to be considered.
1.2.1 Component values according to
standards
1.2.1.0 <Teneral
The component values according to standards, Rm and
R, , are to be determined from the values of semi-
finished products or of test pieces defined by standards,
Rm,N and Rp,N , or from the component value specified in
the drawing, Rm,z . As a special case the experimentally
determined actual component values, Rm,r and Rp,r , may
be applied.
1.2.1.1 Component values according to standards of
semi-finished products or of test pieces
The component values according to standards of the
tensile strength, Rm , and of the yield strength, Rp, are
Rm = KJ,m' K A' Rm,N,
R, = KJ,p . K A' Rp,N,
KJ,m, KJ,p technological size factors, Chapter 1.2.2,
KA anisotropy factor, Chapter 1.2.3,
Rm,N , Rp,N values of the semi-finished product or
of a test piece defined by standards,
Chapter 5.1 .
In the case of steel or wrought aluminum alloys the
tensile strength, Rm,N js the guaranteed minimum value
specified for the smallest size of the semi-finished
3 The term yield strength is used as a generalized term for the yield
stress (of milled or forged steel as well as cast steel) and for the 0.2
proof stress (of nodular cast iron or malleable cast iron as well as
aluminum alloys).
23
1 Assessment of the static strength
using nominal stresses
product *4 , in the case of cast iron or cast aluminum it
is the value from the test piece defined by the material
standard.
The yield strength, Rp,N , is the guaranteed minimum
value specified for the smallest size of the semi-finished
product *4 or for the test piece defined by the material
standard *5.
Moreover there are to be considered: for compressive
stresses the compression strength factor f, , Chapter
1.2.4, for shear stresses the shear strength factor :4 ,
Chapter 1.2.4, and for elevated temperature the
temperature factors Kt,m, ..., Chapter 1.2.5.
1.2.1.2 Component values according to the drawing
The component value of the tensile strength, RID, is
Rm = 0,94 . Rm,z . (1.2.2)
The component value according to the drawing Rm,z is
the tensile strength of the material specified on the
drawing. As the value Rm,z is normally verified by
random inspection of small samples only *6, it is
assumed to have a probability of survival less than Pu =
97,5 % . Eq. (1.2.2) converts the value Rm,z to a
component value R; that is expected to conform with
the probability of survival of Pu = 97,5 %.
The yield strength R, corresponding to the tensile
strength Rm is *7 .
Rp= Kd,p . Rp,N . Rm, (1.2.3)
Kd,m Rm,N
technological size factors, Chapter 1.2.2,
values of the semi-finished product or
of a test piece defined by standards,
Chapter 5.1 .
(1.2.1)
4 If different dimensions of that semi-finished product are given by
the standard.
5 A probability of survival Po = 97,5 % is assumed for the component
prop~ies according to standards Rm,N ' Rp,N . This probability of
survival should also apply to the values Rm ' Rp calculated therefrom.
6 The value Rm Z is checked by three hardness measurements
(n=3) for exampl~, where every test has to reach or to exceed the
required value. The probability of survival of the lowest ofn=3 tests
may be estimated to 75 % (= 1 - 1/(n+l) = 1 - 11(3+1) = 0,75), and
may be assigned to Rm,Z . With a likely coefficient of variation of
4% the conversion to Po = 97,5 % follows from Eq. (1.2.2).
7 A conversion proportional to Rp N I Rm N would not be correct
since the technological size effect is more pronounced for the yield
strength than for the tensile strength.
 24
1.2 Material properties 1 Assessment of the static strength
using nominal stresses

1.2.1.3 Special case of actual component values
If only an experimental value of the tensile strength Rm,r
is known the value of the yield strength Rp,r may be
computed from Eq. (1.2.3) with Rm = Rm,r.
For milled steel there is deff,max,m = deff,max,p = 250 mm.
For all other kinds of material there are no upper limit
values cleff,max,... ,
(1.2.11)
unless otherwise specified in the material standards.

1.2.2 Technological size factor Aluminum alloys

1.2.2.0 <ieneral For wrought aluminum alloys the component values of
The technological size factor accounts for a decrease of the tensile strength, Rm , and of the yield strength, Rp,
the material strength values usually observed with are given in Chapter 5 according to the type of material
increasing dimensions of the component, It is specified and its condition, and depending on the thickness or
as a function of the effective diameter, Figure 1.2.1. It diameter of the semi-finished product. To these values
is different for non-welded and for welded components the technological size factors Kt,m = Kt,p = 1 apply.
*8
For cast aluminum alloys the technological size factors
for the tensile strength and for the yield strength are as
1.2.2.1 Dependence on the effective diameter follows: For deff~ defl;N,m = defl;N,p = 12 mm
Non-welded components :KI,m = :KI,p = 1, (1.2.12)
Steel and cast iron materials for 12 mm < deff < defl;max.m = defl;max,p = 150 mm
For GG the following technological size factor applies v.
..I.~m
= v.
.I.~p
= 1, 1 . (,I
Ueff / 7 , 5 mm) - 0,2 , (1.2.13)
to the tensile strength: For cleff 5 7,5 mm
for deff~ defl;max,m = defl;max,p = 150 mm
Kt,m = 1,207, (1.2.4)
:KI,m = :KI,p = 0,6 . (1.2.14)
for cleff > 7,5 mm *9
Kt,m = 1,207 . (cleff /7,5 mm) - 0,1922 . (1.2.5) Welded components *11

For stainless steel within the dimensions given in For all kinds of material the technological size factor for
material standards there is the toe section and for the throat section of welded
components is *12
Kt,m = Kd,p = 1. (1.2.7)
(1.2.15)
For all other kinds of steel and cast iron materials the
technological size factor is: For cleff 5 cleff,N,m For materials such as conditionally weldable steel,
stainless steel or weldable cast iron the subsequent
Kt,m = Kd,p =1, (1.2.8) calculation is provisional and therefore it is to be
for cleff,N,m < cleff 5 cleff,max,m *10: (1.2.9) applied with caution.

!Cd, 1-0, 7686·ad,m ·lg(deff /7,5mm)

. m 1- 0, 7686· ad,m ·lg(deff,N,m /7,5mm) , 1.2.2.2 Effective diameter
For components with a simple shape of the cross section
for cleff ~ deff,max,m it is: the effective diameter is given according to the cross
Kt,m = Kt,m (cleff,max,m)· (1.2.10) section in Table 1.2,3.

cleff effective diameter, Chapter 1.2.2.2 , In general the upper limit of the effective diameter is
cleff,N,m, ~m constants, Table 1.2.1 and 1.2.2 . specified in the material standards.

Considering the yield strength the values Kt,m, cleff,N,m , For the determination of the effective diameter cleff two
and ~m have to be replaced by the values Kt,p , deff,N,p , cases are to be distinguished as to the kind of material.
and ~p (except for GG).· .

8 The influence factors according toChapter 1.2.3 (KA ), Chapter 1.2.4

(fer, f't) and Chapter 1.2.5 (KT m- ...) aresupposed tobe valid for both
non-welded and welded compon~ts.
11 Valid for steel, cast iron material and aluminum alloys.
9 Footnote and Eq. (1.2.6) cancelled. 12 For structural steel and fine grain structural steel according to
10 0,7686 = l/ig 20. DIN 18800, part 1, page 40.
 25
1.2 Material properties 1 Assessment of the static strength
using nominal stresses

Table 1.2.1 Constants deff,N,m , ... , and adm, ... , for steel Table 1.2.2 Constants deff,N,m, ... , and amn, ..., for cast
iron materials
Values in the upper row referto thetensile strength R m ,
Values in the lower rowreferto the yield strength R p . Values in theupper row referto thetensile strength Rm '
Values in the lower row refer to the yield strength R p .
Kinds of material ~ 1 deff,N,m ad,m
cleff,N,p ad,p cleff,N,m 3.d,m
Kinds of material
~2 deff,N,p ad,p
inmm
inmm
Non-alloyed structural steel 40 0,15
DIN-EN 10 025 40 0,3 Cast steel 100 0,15
Fine grain structural steel 70 0,2 DIN 1681 100 0,3
DIN 17102 40 0,3 Heat treatable steel casting, 300 ~1 0,15
Fine grain structural steel 100 0,25 DIN 17 205 300 0,3
DIN EN 10 113 30 0,3 Heat treatable steel casting,
Heat treatable steel, q&t 16 ~3 0,3 q&t, DIN 17 205, 100 0,3
DIN EN 10 083-1 16 0,4 types ~2 No.1, 3, 4 100 0,3
Heat treatable steel, n 16 0,1 as above 200 0,15
DIN EN 10083-1 16 0,2 types ~3 No. 2 200 0,3
Case hardening steel, bh 16 0,5 as above 200 0,15
DIN EN 10 083-1 16 0,5 . types No.5, 6, 8 200 0,3
Nitriding steel, q&t 40 0,25 as above 500 0,15
DIN EN 10 083-1 40 0,30 types No.7, 9 500 0,3
stainless steel - - GGG 60 0,15
DIN EN 10 088-2 ~4 DIN EN 1563 60 0,15
Steel for big forgings, q&t 250 0,2 GT~4 15 0,15
SEW 550 ~5 250 0,25 DIN EN 1562 15 0,15
Steel for big forgings, n 250 0
q&t= quenched and tempered
SEW 550 250 0,15
~ 1 For GS-30 Mn 5 or GS-25 CrMo 4 there is deff N m = 800 mm
q&t=quenched a. tempered, n=normalized, bh=blank hardened or 500mm respectively, values ad,mand ad,p as gi~ed above.
~ 1 Within the kinds of material there are thetypes of material. ~2 Material types see Table 5.1.11.
~2 More precise values depending on the kind of material (except ~3 Valid for strength level V I, for level V II deff,N,m = deff,N,p
for non-alloyed structural steel) seeTable 5.1.2 to Table 5.1.7. = 100 mm with values ad,mandad,p as above.
~2 For 30 CrNiMo 8 and 36 NiCrMo 16: deff N m = 40 mm, ~4 The values for GT are needed for the assessment of the fatigue

values ad,mand ad,p as given above. ' , strength only.

~4 No technological size effect within the dimensions mentioned in

the material standards.
~5 For 28 NiCrMoV 8 5 or 33 NiCrMo 145: deff,N,m = deff,N,p
= 500mm or 1000 ~ resp., values ad.mandad,p asgiven above.
Case 1
Case 2
Components (also forgings) made of non-alloyed
structural steel, of fine grained structural steel, of
normalized quenched and tempered steel, of cast steel,
or of aluminum materials.

Components (also forgings) made of heat treatable steel,
of case hardening steel, of nitriding steel, both nitrided
or quenched and tempered, of heat treatable cast steel,
of GGG, GT or GG.
The effective diameter cleff from Table 1.2.3, Case 1,
applies.
In general it is:
The effective diameter d eff is equal to the diameter or
wall thickness of the component, Table 1.2.3, Case 2.
Rod-shaped (1D) components made of quenched and
tempered steel
The effective diameter is the diameter existing while the
heat treatment is performed.

deff= 4 . V /0, (1.2.16) In case of machining subsequent to the heat treatment

the effective diameter cleff is the largest diameter of the
V,O Volume and surface rod. In case of machining prior to the heat treatment the
of the section of the component considered. effective diameter cleff is defined as the local diameter in
question. The diameter cleff according to the first
sequence of machining is an estimate on the safe side .
 26
1.2 Material properties 1 Assessment of the static strength
using nominal stresses

Table 1.2.3 Effective diameter deff Aluminum alloys

The anisotropy factor for cast aluminum alloys is
No. Cross section deff deff
KA = 1. (1.2.20)
Case 1 Case 2
For forgings ·13, for which material standards specify
1
~ d d the strength values as depending on the testing
direction, the anisotropy factor is not to be applied:
(1.2.21)

~
2 2s s For aluminum alloys the anisotropy factor for the
strength values in the main direction of processing is
(1.2.22)
For the strength values transverse to the main direction
~
3 2s s
of processing the anisotropy factor from Tab. 1.2.4 is
to be applied.

2b·s

~
4 s
-- Table 1.2.4 Anisotropy factor K A •
b+s
Steel:
Rm up to 600 from 600 from 900 above
5
r:£13 b b in Mpa

KA 0,90
to 900

0,86
to 1200

o.ss
1200

0,80

Aluminum aIIovs:

1.2.3 Anisotropy factor

Rm up to 200 from 200 from 400
in Mpa to 400 to 600
The anisotropy factor allows for the fact that the
KA 1,00 0,95 0,90
strength values of milled steel and forgings are lower
transverse to the main direction of milling or forging
than in the main direction of processing. It is to be
supposed that the specified strength values are valid for
the main direction of processing. .
1.2.4 Compression strength factor and
shear strength factor
In case of multiaxial stresses, and also with shear stress,
the anisotropy factor is 1.2.4.0 (;eneral

KA = 1. (1.2.17) The compression strength factor allows for the fact that
in general the material strength is higher in compression
than in tension.
Steel and cast iron material The shear strength factor allows for the fact that the
The anisotropy factor for cast iron material is material strength in shear is different from the tensile
strength.
KA = 1. (1.2.18)
For milled steel and forgings *13 the anisotropy factor
in the main direction of processing is 1.2.4.1 Compression strength factor

(1.2.19) For tensile stresses (axial or bending) the compression

strength factor is
For the strength values transverse to the main direction
of processing the anisotropy factor from Table 1.2.4 is (1.2.23)
to be applied. For compression stresses (axial or bending) the tensile
strength Rm and the yield strength Rp are to be replaced
by the compression strength Rc,m and the yield strength
in compression Rc,p:

13 With material properties depending on the direction.

 27
1.2 Material properties 1 Assessment of the static strength
using nominal stresses

Rc,m = f, . Rm , (1.2.24) 1.2.5.1 Normal temperature

Rc,F = f, . Rp,
Normal temperatures are as follows:
f" compression strength factor, Table 1.2.5, - for fine grain structural steel from -40°C to 60°C,
Rm , Rp tensile strength and yield strength, see for other kinds of steel from -40°C to + lOO°C,
Eq. (1.2.1) to (1.2.3). for cast iron materials from -25°C to + lOO°C,
for age-hardening aluminum alloys
The values Rc,m and Rc,p are not explicitly neededfor
from -25°C to 50°C,
an assessment of the static strength, as only the
for non-age-hardening aluminum alloys
compression strength factor f, is needed *14. from -25°C to lOO°C.
For normal temperature the temperature factors are
Table 1.2.5 Compression strength factor f, and shear KT,m = ... = I. (1.2.26)
strength factor f,;

Kinds of material r, f, f, 1.2.5.2 Low temperature

for for ~1
tension compress. Temperatures below the values listed above are outside
1 the field of application of this guideline.
Case harden'g steel 1 0,577
Stainless steel 1 1 0,577
Forging steel 1 1 0,577
1.2.5.3 Elevated temperature
Other kinds of steel 1 1 0,577
GS 1 1 0,577 In the field of elevated temperatures - up to 500 °C for
GGG 1 1,3 0,65 steel and cast iron materials and up to 200°C for
Aluminum alloys 1 1 0,577 aluminum materials - the influence of the temperature
on the mechanical properties is to be considered. In case
~ 1 0,577 = 1 /.J3, according to v. Mises criterion, of elevated temperature the tensile strength Rm is to be
also valid for welded components. replaced by the high temperature strength Rrn, T or by
the creep strength Rrn, Tt • The yield strength Rp is to be
replaced by the high temperature yield strength Rp,T or
1.2.4.2 Shear strength factor by the 1 % creep limit Rp,Tt *15.
For shear stresses the tensile strength Rm and the yield For the short-term values Rm,T and Rp,T as well as for
strength Rp are to be replaced by the shear strength Rs,m the long-term values Rm,Tt and Rp,Tt Eq. (1.2.27) to
and the yield strength in shear Rs,p: (1.2.35) apply.
Rs,m = f't . Rm, (1.2.25)
Rs,p = f't . Rp ,
Short-term values
f't shear strength factor, Table 1.2.5
Rm , Rp tensile strength and yield strength, Short term values of the static strength are
Eq. (1.2.1) to (1.2.3). Rm,T = KT,m . R m, (1.2.27)
The values Rs,m and Rs,p are not explicitly needed for Rp,T = KT,p . R p ,
an assessment of the strength, as only the shear strength KT,m, Kt,p. temperature factors,
factor f't is needed. Eq. (1.2.28) to (1.2.33),
Rm, Rp tensile strength and yield strength,
Eq. (1.2.1) to (1.2.3).
1.2.5 Temperature factors The values Rm,T and Rp,T are not explicitly needed for
1.2.5.0 General an assessment of the static strength, as only the
temperature factors KT,m and KT,p are needed.
The temperature factors allow for the fact that the
material strength decreases with increasing temperature. Steel and cast iron materials
Normal temperature, low temperature and higher According to the temperature T the temperature factors
temperature are to be distinguished. KT,m and KT,p apply as follows:

14 Tensile strength and yield strength in compressionare supposedto be 15 The relevant temperature factors will be applied in combination
positive, Rc,rn, Rc,p > 0, therefore for compressionfcr > 1. with the safety factors at the assessment stage.
 28
1.2 Material properties 1 Assessment of the static strength
using nominal stresses

for fme grain structural steel, T > 60°C *16. Kr,m = 1 - 4,5 . 10 -3 . (T / °C - 50) ~ 0,1,
KT,m = KT,p = 1 - 1,2 . 10 -3 • T / DC, (1.2.28) KT=,1p - 4, 5 . 10 -3 . (T / °C - 50) >
- 0"1

for other kinds of steel *17, T > 100°C, Figure - for not age-hardening aluminum alloys:
1.2.2: (1.2.29) T> 100°C, Figure 1.2.3 (1.2.33)
3
KT,m = KT,p = 1-1,7' 10- • (T / °C-100), Kr,m = 1 - 4,5 . 10 -3 . (T / °C - 100) ~ 0,1,
Kr,p = 1- 4,5' 10- . (T / °C - 100) ~ 0,1,
3
for GS, T> 100°C: (1.2.30)
1 - 1,5 . 10 -3 . (T /
Kr,m = Kr,p = °c - 100), Eq. (1.2.32) and (1.2.33) are valid from the indicated
temperature T up to 200°C, and in general only, if the
- for GGG, T > 100°C: relevant characteristic stress does not act on long terms.
1 - 2,4 . (10
K r. m = Kr,p = -3 . T / "C) 2. (1.2.31)

o,s High temperature

Eq. (1.2.28) to (1.2.31) are valid from the indicated strength Rm,T
temperature T up to 500°C. For a temperature above Rm;T 1
350°C they are valid only, if the relevant characteristic R. 'jm.
stress does not act on long terms.
Cre.ep.Strength
I~TI
Rm.Tl. .1
If,;"' i.I

I 0/0 creep Iimit' Rp."f'

0,3 t--e-~+--'----+-~*+~'-Th-iL.".j Rp,TiR p I I
.High temperature
Rp'Rm'}pt fatigueslrength
CreepStreiiglh RmiTt O,l ·c:sw,zdiT-,....,...+~-------i'\----f'\-,--....-+\~-1
O,21----,--+---+-~-+.......,,..-.;.1~~ Rm,TI. I <rW,zd,1'. O'W,~. I
~'jml' CW;Ul.. R m 'JD
. I
Q
() 5&lliQ ISO 20.0 2S0 300
1.2.3 TIT.

o Figure 1.2.3 Temperature dependent values of the static

o 100200300 400 500 strength of aluminum alloys plotted for comparison.
~~ Tin'C
Static strength values:
Figure 1.2.2 Temperature dependent values of the
static strength of non-alloyed structural steel plotted for Rp,T/Rm= KT,m= KT,p/Rp= KT,p

comparison. Rm,Tt/Rm=KTt,m= KTt,p/Rp= KTt,p

5
Rp I Rm = Rei Rm = 0,65, Rm, rr. Rp,Tt for 1= 10 h.
Rm,T/Rm = KTm = Rp,T/R = KT,p,
r
Rm,Tt/Rm=KTt,m = Rp,Tt Rp=KTt,p· Fatigue limit for completely reversed stress (N = 106 cycles):
O'W,zd I Rm = 0,30; O'W,zd,T I O'w,zd = KT,D.
Rm,T, Rp,T as well as Rm,Tt- Rp,Tt for t = 10 5 h,

Safety factors according to Chapter 1.5 and 2.5: Safety factors according to Chapter 1.5 and 2.5:
jm = 2,0, jp = Jmt = 1,5, jpt = 1,0 .Jn = 1,5 .
Jm = 2,0 , jp = Jmt = 1,5 , jpt = 1,0, Jn = 1,5 .

Aluminum alloys
Long-tenn values
According to the temperature T the temperature factors
Long term values of the static strength are
KT,m and KT,p for aluminum alloys apply as follows:

- for age-hardening aluminum alloys: T > 50°C, R""Tt = KTt,m • R", , (1.2.34)
Figure 1.2.3 (1.2.32) ~,Tt = KTt,p • R, ,
KTt,m, KTt,p temperature factors,
Figure 1.2.2 and 1.2.3, Eq. (1.2.35),
R"" R, tensile strength and yield strength,
16 There is an insignificant discontinuity at T = 60°C. Eq. (1.2.1) to (1.2.3).
17 For stainless steel no values are known up to now.
 29
1.2 Material properties 1 Assessment of the static strength
using nominal stresses

The values ~Tl and ~,Tl are not explicitly needed for
an assessment of the static strength, as only the Table 1.2.7 Constants aTt,m, ..., Cp ~1
temperature factors KTl,m and KTt,p are needed.
Steel Non- Fine grain Heat-
Steel and cast iron materials alloyed structural treatable-
structural steel steel
Depending on the temperature T and on the operation steel
time t at that temperature the temperature factors Krt,m ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5

and KTt,p apply, Figure 1.2.2 *18

Creep strength
=10(aTt,m+ bTt,m . Pm+ CTt,m . Pm 2 )
K Tt,m , (1.2.35)
aTLm - 0,994 -1,127 - 3,001
= lO(aTt,p+ bTt,p . Pp+ CTt,p . Pp2 ) bTLm 2,485 2,485 3,987
K np ,
cTt.m - 1,260 - 1,260 - 1,423
Pm = 10 -4. (T / C + 273)' (C m + 19(t/h)),
em 20 20 24,27
Pp = 10 - 4. (T / C + 273) . (C m + 19(t/ h)), 1 % Creep limit
aTt,m, ..., C p constants, Table 1.2.7, aTt.n - 5,019 - 6,352 - 3,252
t operation time in hours h atthe 7,227 9,305 5,942
bTLn
temperature T. - 2,636 - 3,456 - 2,728
Cn n
Cn 20 20 17,71
Eq. (1.2.35) apply to temperatures from approximately
350°C up to 500°C, but only for stresses acting on long
terms. In general they do not apply to temperatures Cast iron GS <¢>6 GGG<¢>7
below about 350°C *19. materials
Creep strength
Aluminum alloys
aTt.m -7,524 2,50
5
For aluminum alloys and t = 10 hours Krt,m is given by bTLm 9,894 - 1,83
Figure 1.2.4 *20. CTtm -3,417 0

1,0
em 19,57 20
R""TI I R",
0,8
1\ 1 % Creep limit

0,6 \ \
aTtn
bTt.D
- 10,582
8,127
0,12
1,52
cTt.n - 1,607 - 1,28
0,4 Co 35,76 18

0,2 \ :
<¢>1 Approximate values, applicable from about 350°Cto 500°C.

o I
RT 100
\..t-
200 300 400
<¢>2 Not valid for stainless steel.
<¢>3 Initially for St38,Rm = 360MPa, similar toSt37.
TrC
<¢>4 Initially for H 52, Rm = 490 MPa, similar to StE 355; the absolute
Figure 1.2.4 Temperature factor Krt,m ~ Rm,Tt I R.n for values Rill,Tt are thesame asfor St38.
aluminum alloys and t = 105 hours. <¢>5 Initially for C 45 N (normalized) with Rm = 620 MPa. For C 35 N,
The given curve is the same as in Figure 1.2.3, except that the factor with Rm = 550 MPa the constants -3,001 and -3,252areto bereplaced
(1 /jm ) isdifferent. by -2,949 and -3,198. The absolute values Rill,Tt arethe same asfor
C45N.
<¢>6 Initially for GS-C 25 with Rm = 440 MPa.
-c-7 Initially for GGG-40 with Rm = 423 MPa.
18 Larsen-Miller-parameter P andLarsen-Miller-constant C.
19 Because the values would be unrealistic for temperatures
T < 350°C, where the values KT,m and KT,p are relevant instead.
20 The temperature factor Kt,p is not defmed up to now. It may be
assumed, however, as it is essential for the assessment of the static
strength, thattheterm Rp,Tt / jpt is more or less equal to Rill,Tt/ Jmt ,
see Figure 1.2.2 (required safety factorsjpt = 1,0 andjmt = 1,5).
ALarsen-Miller equation similar to Eq. (1.2.32) or(1.2.33) applicable to
derive the values of KTt,m and KTt,p according to temperature T and
operation time T has notbeen specified for aluminum alloys uptonow.
 30
1.3 Design parameters 1 Assessment of the static strength
using nominal stresses

1.3 Design parameters 11m EN.dog 1.3.1.2 Welded components

For welded components the design factors are generally
to be determined separately for the toe section and for
Contents Page the throat section.
1.3.0 General 30 For the toe section the calculation is to be carried out as
1.3.1 Design factors for non-welded components.
1.3.1.0 General For the throat section of rod-shaped (lD) welded
1.3.1.1 Non-welded components components the design factors for axial (tension or
1.3.1.2 Welded components compression), for bending, for shear and for torsional
1.3.2 Section factors stress are
1.3.3 Weld factor a.w 31 KSK,zd = 1/ a.w, . (1.3.4)
KSK,b = I / (npl,b . a.w ),
KsK,s = 1/ a.w ,
1.3.0 General KSK,t = I / (npl,t . a.w ).
According to this chapter the design parameters are to For the throat section of shell-shaped (2D) welded
be determined. components the design factors for normal stresses in the
directions x and y as well as for shear stress are

1.3.1 Design factors KsK,x= 1/ a.w, (1.3.5)

KsK,y= 1/ a.w,
1.3.1.0 General KsK,s = I / a.w ,
Non-welded and welded components are to be npl,b ... section factor, Chapter 1.3.2,
distinguished. They can be both rod-shaped (lD) or a.w weld factor, Chapter 1.3.3.
shell-shaped (2D).
Weld factors a.w are given for tension, for compression
and for shear stress.
1.3.1.1 Non-welded components For tension and tension in bending a.w for tension is to
The design factors of rod-shaped (lD) non-welded be applied. For compression and compression in
components for axial (tension or compression), for bending a.w for compression is to be applied. For shear
bending, for shear, and for torsional stress are and for torsion a w for shear is to be applied.
KSK,zd=l, (1.3.1)
KSK,b = I / npl,b ,
KSK,s = I, 1.3.2 Section factors
KSK,t = I / npl,t , The section factors npl,b and npl,t allow for the influence
npl,b ... section factor *1, Chapter 1.3.2. of the stress gradient in bending and/or torsion in
connection with the shape of the cross section on the
The design factors of shell-shaped (2D) non-welded static strength of components, Figure 1.3.1. They serve
components for normal stresses in the directions x and y to make best use of the load carrying capacity of a
as well as for shear stress are component by accepting some yielding as the outside
KSK,x= I, (1.3.2) fiber stress exceeds the yield strength.
KsK,y = I, An essential condition is the existence of a stress
KsK,s = 1. gradient normal to the surface of the component, Figure
1.3.1.
It has to be observed, however, that the derived section
factors only apply to the notched section considered and
not to the component as a whole. Therefore other
sections may have to be considered in addition, see
Chapter 1.0 and Figure 1.0.1.

1 KsK,zd = = 1 means, that the value ofthe related section factor

is npl,zd = = 1.
 31
1.3 Design parameters 1 Assessment of the static strength
using nominal stresses

For other types of steel, GS and GGG *4 the section

factors for tension or compression, for bending, for
1- SSK,b (npl,b)
1-- R p ~I-----+-""':: shear, and for torsion are *5 *6

npl,zd = 1, (1.3.9)
npl,b = MIN (JRp,max / R p ; Kp,b ),
npl,s = 1,
npl,t = MIN (JRp,max / R p ; Kp,t),

Rp,max constant, Table 1.3.1,

n, yield strength, Chapter 1.2,
t Kp,b,Kp,t plastic notch factors, Table 1.3.2.

Figure 1.3.1 Definition of the section factor npl,b for

bending of a notched bar, for instance.
Table 1.3.1 Constant Rp,max ~ 1.
Bending moment Mb, yield strength R p , static component strength
for bending SSK,b , section factor npl,b = SSK,b I Rp . Kind of material Steel, GS GGG Aluminum
alloys.
Light straight line: fictitious distribution of the stress calculated
elastically. Solid angular line: real stress distribution when providing Rp,max'/ MFa 1050 320 250
elastic ideal-plastic material behavior.
-c- 1 Constant defining an upper bound value of the sectionfactor
dependingon the kind of material.

Surface hardened Components

The section factors are not applicable if the component

Table 1.3.2 Plastic notch factors Kp,b and Kp,t .
has been surface or case hardened, see Table 2.3.5 *2
npl,b, ... = I (1.3.6) Cross-section Bending Torsion
Kp,b Kp,t
Steel and cast iron material rectangle ~ 1 1,5 -
For austenitic steel in the solution annealed condition *3 circle 1,70 ~2 1,33 ~3
the section factors for tension or compression, for circular ring 1,27 ~4 1 ~5
bending, for shear, and for torsion are I-section or box ~6
-
npl,zd = I, (1.3.8) ~1 or plate, ~2 1,70 = 16/ (3 . It), d 1,33 = 4/3.
npl,b = Kp,b , ~4 thin-walled, 1,27 = 4 / It.
npl,s = 1, ~ 5 thin-walled, otherwisethere is

n p1,t = Kp,t . 3
K p t = 1,33' 1- (dID) , (1.3.14)
, 1-(dID)4
d, D inner and outer diameters.
1- (b I B) . (h I H)2
~6 Kp b = 1,5· --'-----'---'---'-:- (1.3.15)
, 1- (b I B)· (h I H)3
b, B inner and outer width, h, H inner and outer hight.

2 Because the plasticity of a hard surface layer - for example as a

result of case hardening - is limited, it may observe cracks when
yielding occurs, particularly at notches where the calculation of
nominal stress neglects the stress and strain concentration. 4 GT and GO are not consideredhere becausethe assessmentof the static
strengthhas to be carried out using local stressesfor these materials.
Possibly this rule is too far on the safe side, as npl = 1,1 is allowedfor
case hardenedshafts accordingto the recent DIN 743 (launchedin 2000).
5 MIN means that the smaller value from the right side of the equation is
valid.
3 Because of the high ductility of austenitic steel in the solution annealed
conditionthe plastic notch factors Kp,b and Kp,t are relevant and not the 6 Upper and lower bound values of the section factors are the plastic
givenmaterial dependentsectionfactors. notch factor and 1,00
 32
1.3 Design parameters 1 Assessment of the static strength
using nominal stresses

Aluminum alloys
For ductile wrought aluminum alloys (A 2 12,5 %) the
section factors are to be determined from Eq (1.3.9) *7.

1.3.3 Weld factor Uw

The weld factor Ci.w accounts for the effect of a weld. It

applies to the throat section of welded components only,
Tab. 1.3.3 *8.

Table 1.3.3 Weld factor Ci.w ~1 .

Weld quality
Type of RmS Rm >
Joint
stress 360 MPa 360Mua
full all Compression
~2
penetration
weld verified 1,0 1,0
or with Tension 10
back weld not
verified
partial all Compression 0,95 0,80
penetration or 0,80
or fillet Tension
weld
all all Shear
welds
butt weld Tension 0,55 -
~3
055
~1 According to DIN 18 800 part 1, Table 21 and Eq. (75).
~2 For aluminum alloys (independent of Rm ) the values typed in
in boldface should be applied for the time being.
~3 Butt welds of sectional steel from St 37-2 or USt 37-2 with a
product thickness t> 16 mm.

7 Less ductile aluminum alloys (A < 12,5 %) and cast aluminum alloys
are not considered here because the assessmentof the static strength has to
be carried out using local stressesfor these materials.

8 For the toe section the calculation is to be carried out as for non-
welded components.
 33
1.4 Component strength 1 Assessment of the static strength
using nominal stresses

1.4 Component strength 1R14 EN.do~ 1.4.2 Welded components

Contents Page For welded components the strength values are
generally to be determined separately for the toe section
1.4.0 General 33 and for the throat section.
1.4.1 Non-welded components
1.4.2 Welded components For the toe section the calculation is to be carried out as
for non-welded components.
For the throat section of rod-shaped (lD) welded
1.4.0 General components the nominal values of the component static
According to this chapter the nominal values of the strength for axial (tension or compression), for bending,
component static strength are to be determined. for shear, and for torsional stress are

Non-welded and welded components are to be SSK,zd = fa' Rut/ KSK,zd, (1.4.4)
distinguished. They can be both rod-shaped (10) or SSK,b = fa . Rut/ KSK,b ,
shell-shaped (2D). TSK,s = f't' Rut/KSK,s,
TSK,t = f't . Rut/ KSK,t .
For the throat section of shell-shaped (2D) welded
1.4.1 Non-welded components components the nominal values of the component static
strength for axial (tension or compression) stresses in
The nominal values of the component static strength of the directions x and y as well as for shear stress are
rod-shaped (lD) components for axial (tension or
compression), for bending, for shear, and for torsional SSK,x = fa . Rut/ KsK,x , (1.4.5)
stress are * 1 *2 *3 SSK,y = fa . Rut/ KsK,y ,
TSK = f't' Rut/ KsK,s,
SSK,zd = fa' Rut/ KSK,zd, (1.4.1)
SSK,b = fa . Rut/ KSK,b , fa compression strength factor, Chapter 1.2.4,
TSK,s = f't . Rut/ KSK,s, Rut tensile strength, Chapter 1.2.1,
TSK,t = f't' Rut/ KSK,t. KsK,zd, ... design factor, Chapter 1.3.1.
f't shear strength factor, Chapter 1.2.4.
The nominal values of the component static strength of
shell-shaped (2D) components for normal stresses
(tension or compression) in the directions x and y as
well as for shear stress are
SSK,x = fa . Rut/ KsK,x , (1.4.2)
SSK,y = fa . Rut/ KsK,y ,
TSK = f't' Rut/ KsK,s,
fa compression strength factor, Chapter 1.2.4,
Rut tensile strength, Chapter 1.2.1,
SSK,zd ... design factor, Chapter 1.3.1,
f't shear strength factor, Chapter 1.2.4.

1 The component static strength values are different for normal stress and
for shear stress, and moreover they are different due todifferent section
factors according tothe type ofstress.
2 Basically the tensile strength Rm is the reference value of static
strength, even if inthe case ofa low Rp / Rm ratio the yield strength
should to be used for the assessment ofthe static strength, a fact that is
accounted for in Chapter 1.5.5, however.
3 The tensile static strength isthe reference value for the bending static
strength, too. The difference instatic strength inbending compared tothe
static strength intension orcompression is accounted for by the design
factor. Torsional static strength inanalogy.
 34
1.5 Safety factors 1 Assessment of the static strength
using nominal stresses

Table 1.5.1 Safety factors jm and jp for steel

1.5 Safety factors IR015 EN.dog (not for GS) and for ductile wrought aluminum alloys
Contents Page A5 ~ 12,5 %).
-¢-1 Consequences offailure
jm
1.5.0 General 34 -¢-2 severe moderate
jp
1.5.1 Steel -¢-3
jmt -¢-5
1.5.2 Cast iron materials . -¢-4
Jpt
1.5.3 Wrought aluminum alloys
1.5.4 Cast aluminum alloys
high 2,0 1,75
1.5.5 Total safety factor 35
1,5 1,3
Probability of 1,5 1,3
occurrence of 1,0 1,0
1.5.0 General the characteristic.
low 1,8 1,6
According to this chapter the safety factors are to be service stress -¢-6 1,35 1,2
determined. values
1,35 1,2
The safety factors are valid under the condition that the 1,0 1,0
design loads are reliably determined on the safe side and -¢-1 referring tothe tensile strength Rm ortothe strength at elevated
that the material properties correspond to an average temperature RmT ,
probability of survival of Po = 97,5 % *1 . -¢-2 referring tothe yield strength Rp ortothe hot yield strength Rp,T ,
The safety factors may be reduced under favorable -¢-3 referring tothe creep strength Rm, Tt ,
conditions, that is depending on the probability of -¢-4 referring tothe creep limit Rp,Tt .
occurrence of the characteristic stress values in question -¢-5 moderate consequences offailure of a less important component in
and depending on the consequences of failure. the sense of"no catastrophic effects" being associated with a failure; for
example because of a load redistribution towards other members of a
The safety factors are valid for both non-welded and statically undeterminate system. Reduction by approximately 15 %.
welded components. -¢-6 or only infrequent occurrences of the characteristic service stress
values, for example stresses due toanapplication ofproof loads ordue to
The safety factors given in the following are valid for loads during anassembling operation. Reduction by approximately 10 %.
ductile materials. In this respect any types of steel are
ductile materials, as well as cast iron materials
and wrought aluminum alloys with an elongation 1.5.3 Wrought aluminum alloys
A5 ~ 12,5 %. *2.
Safety factors for ductile wrought aluminum alloys are
the same as given for steel in Table 1.5.1, in particular
1.5.1 Steel all types of wrought aluminum alloys with an elongation
A5 ~ 12,5 %, see Table 5.1.22 to 5.1.30 ·2.
Safety factors that generally apply to the tensile strength
and to the yield strength, to the creep strength and to the
creep limit are given in Table 1.5.1.
1.5.4 Cast aluminum alloys
Cast aluminum alloys are non-ductile materials for
1.5.2 Cast iron materials which there is no need of giving safety factors here ·2.

Cast iron materials with an elongation

As ~ 12,5 % are considered as ductile, in particular all
types of GS and some types of GGG, see Table 5.1.12.
Safety factors for ductile cast iron materials are given in
Table 1.5.2. Compared to Table 1.5.1 they are higher
because of an additional partial safety factor jp that
accounts for inevitable but allowable defects in
castings. The factor is different for castings that have
been subject to non-destructive testing or have not *3 .
1Statistical confidence S = 50 %.
2 All types of GT, GG and cast aluminum alloys have elongations
As < 12,5 % and are considered as non-ductile materials. Wrought
aluminum alloys with elongations As < 12,5 % are considered asnon-
ductile materials, too. Fornon-ductile materials the assessment of the
static strength is to be carried out with local stresses according to
Chapter 3.
3 In mechanical engineering cast components are of standard quality
for which a further reduction of the partial safety factor to jF = 1,0
does not seem possible up to now.
A safety factor jF = 1,0 may be applied to high quality cast
components in the aircraft industry however. Those high quality cast
components have to meet special demands and checks on
qualification of the production process, as well as on the quality and
extent of product testing in order to guarantee little scatter of their
mechanical properties.
 35
1.5 Safety factors 1 Assessment of the static strength
using nominal stresses

Table 1.5.2 Safety factors jm and jp for ductile cast iron 1.5.5 Total safety factor
materials (GS; GGG with A 5 ~ 12,5 %) ~1
From the individual safety factors the total safety factor
jm Consequences offailure jgesis to be derived *4:
jp severe moderate
jmt
Jpt

castings not subject to non-destructive testing ~2

high 2,8 2,45 jm ... safety factors, Table 1.5.1 and 1.5.2,
2,1 1,8 temperature factors, Chapter 1.2.5 *5.
2,1 Kt,m···
Probability of 1,8
occurrence 1,4 1,4
of the characteristic low 2,55 2,2 Simplifications
stress 1,9 1,65 The following simplifications apply to Eq. (1.5.4) :
1,9 1,65
1,4 1,4 In the case of normal temperature the third and j
fourth term have no relevance *6, and moreover
castings subject to non-destructive testing ~3
there is KT,m = KT,p = 1,
high 2,5 2,2
1,9 1,65 - for Rp / Rm~ 0,75 the first term has no relevance,
Probability of 1,9 1,65 for Rp / Rm > 0,75 the second term has no
occurrence 1,25 1,25 relevance *7.
of the characteristic low 2,25 2,0
stress 1,7 1,5
1,7 1,5
1,25 1,25

~1 Explanatory notes for the safety factors see Table 1.5.1.

~2 Compared to Table 1.5.1 anadditional partial safety factor iF = 1,4
isintroduced toaccount for inevitable but allowable defects incastings.
~3 Compared toTable 1.5.1 anadditional partial safety factor iF = 1,25
is introduced, for which it isassumed that a higher quality ofthe castings
isobviously guaranteed when testing.

4 MAX means that the maximum value of the four terms in the
parenthetical expression isvalid.
5 Applicable to the tensile strength Rm orthe yield strength Rp toallow
for the tensile strength at elevated temperature ~ T ' the creep strength
Rm,Tt , the hot yield strength ~,T' or the creep limit Rp,Tt ,
respectively.

6 The terms containing the factors KTt,m and KTt,f must not beapplied
in the case of normal temperature, as they wil produce misleading
results.
7 If there is a ratio ofthesafety factors ip lim = 0,75.
 36
1.6 Assessment 1 Assessment of the static strength
using nominal stresses

1.6 Assessment 1*16 EN. dog Superposition

Contents Page For stress components of the same type of stress the
superposition is to be carried out according to Chapter
1.6.0 General 36 1.1.
1.6.1 Rod-shaped (ID) components If different types of stress like axial stress, bending
1.6.1.1 Individual types of stress stress ... *5 are to be considered and if the resulting
1.6.1.2 Combined types of stress 37 state of stress is multiaxial, see Figure 0.0.9 *6, the
1.6.2 Shell-shaped (2D) components 38 particular extreme maximum stresses and the extreme
1.6.2.1 Individual types of stress minimum stresses are to be overlaid as indicated in the
1.6.2.2 Combined types of stress 39 following.

1.6.0 General Kinds of component

According to this chapter the assessment of the static Rod-shaped (lD) and shell-shaped (2D) components are
strength using nominal stresses is to be carried out. to be distinguished. They can be both non-welded or
welded
In general the assessments for the individual types of
stress and for the combined types of stress are to be
carried out separately *1 *2. 1.6.1 Rod-shaped (ID) components
In general the assessments for the extreme maximum 1.6.1.1 Individual types of stress
and the extreme minimum stresses (axial stresses in
tension or compression and/or bending stresses in Rod-shaped (ID) non-welded components
tension or compression) are to be carried out separately. The degrees of utilization of rod-shaped non-welded
For steel or wrought aluminum alloys and a symmetrical components for the different types of stress like axial,
cross-section the highest absolute value is relevant *3. bending, shear or torsional stress are
The calculation applies to both non-welded and welded - S max,ex,zd < 1
components. For welded components assessments are aSK,zd - . -, (1.6.1)
SSK,zd / Jges
generally to be carried out separately for the toe section
and for the throat section as indicated in the following. Smax,ex,b
aSK,b = .:s:; 1,
SSK,b / Jges
Degree of utilization a - Tmax,ex,s :s:; 1,
sK,s - T. / .
The assessments are to be carried out by determining the SK,s Jges
degrees of utilization of the component static strength.
In the context of the present Chapter the degree of _ Tmax,ex,t
aSK,t - .:s:; 1,
utilization is the quotient of characteristic service stress TSK,t / Jges
(extreme stress Smax,ex,zd, ...) divided by the allowable
static stress at the reference point *4. The allowable Smax,ex,zd ... extreme maximum stresses according to
static stress is the quotient of the nominal component type of stress; the extreme minimum
static strength, SSK,zd, ... , divided by the total safety stresses, Smin,ex,zd ... , are to be considered
factor jges . The degree of utilization is always a positive in the same way as the maximum stresses,
value. Chapter 1.1.1.1,
SSKzd ... related component static strength,
Chapter 1.4.1,
total safety factor, Chapter 1.5.5.
1 It is a general principle for an assessment of the static strength to
suppose that all types of stress observe their maximum (or minimum)
values atthe same time.
5 Bending stresses in two planes,' Sb,z and Sb,y, are different types of
2 This is in order to examine the degrees ofutilization ofthe individual stress, also shear stresses intwo planes, Ts,z and Ts,y .
types ofstress ingeneral, and inparticular ifthey may occur separately.
6 Only inthe case ofstresses acting simultaneously the character of Eq.
3 Not so for cast iron materials orcast aluminium alloys with different (1.6.4) and (1.6.12) is that ofa strength hypothesis. If Eq. (1.6.4) and
static tension and compression strength values orfor an unsymmetrical (1.6.12) are applied inother cases, they have the character ofan empirical
cross-section. interaction formula only. For example the extreme stresses from bending
and shear will - as a rule - occur atdifferent points ofthe cross-section, so
4 The reference point is the critical point ofthe cross section that observes that different reference points W are to be considered. As.a rule bending
the highest degree ofutilization. will be more important. Moreover see Footnote 1.
 37
1.6 Assessment 1 Assessment of the static strength
using nominal stresses

All extreme stresses are positive or negative (or zero). In aSK,Sv = q . aNH+ (l - q)' aoH:::; 1, (1.6.4)
general axial stresses (tension and compression) and
where *8
bending stresses (tension and compression) are to be
considered separately. For shear and torsion the highest aNH=~{lsl+~s2 +4.t 2), (1.6.5)
absolute value of shear stress is relevant.

aoH =Js 2
2
+t ,
Rod-shaped (ID) welded components
S = aSK,zd + aSK,b , (1.6.6)
For the toe section of rod-shaped (lD) welded
components the calculation is to be carried out as for t = aSK,s + aSK,t ,
rod-shaped (lD) non-welded components. aSK,zd, ... degree of utilization, Eq. (1.6.1).
For the throat section of rod-shaped (lD) welded and
components the degrees of utilization for an axial,
bending, shear and/or torsional type of loading follow (1.6.7)
from the equivalent nominal stresses, Chapter 1.1.1.1:

a = S max,ex,wv,zd < 1 f, shear strength factor, Table 1.2.5.

SK,wv,zd S /. -, (1.6.2)
SK,zd Jges
Rules of sign: If the individual types of stress (axial and
bending, or shear and torsion, respectively) always act
a - Smax,ex,wv,b :::; 1
SK,wv,b - S / . , unidirectionally at the reference point *10, the degrees
SK,b Jges
of utilization aSK,zd and aSK,b and/or asK,s and asK,t are
Tmax,ex,wv,s to be inserted into Eq. (1.6.6) with equal (positive) signs
asK,wv,s = .:::; 1, (summation); then the result will be on the safe side. If
TSK,s / Jges
they act always opposingly, however, *ll, they are to be
T inserted into Eq. (1.6.6) with different signs
aSK,wvt= max,ex,wv,t :::; 1,
, T /. (subtraction) *12.
SK,t Jges

Smax,ex,wv,zd, ... extreme maximum stresses (equivalent

nominal stresses); the extreme minimum
stresses, Smin,ex,wv,zd ... , are to be
considered in the same way as the
maximum stresses, Chapter 1.1.1.1,
8 Inthe the case ofassessing the static strength the degrees ofutilization
SSK,zd ... related component static strength, aSK,zd and aSK,b are defined by the static component strength values
SSK,zd and SSK,b . Contained inthese are the section factors for tension
values, Chapter 1.4.2, or compression, npl,zd , and for bending, npl,b . aSK,zd and aSK,b are
overlaid linearly when computing the value s. For shear and torsion in
total safety factor, Chapter 1.5.5. analogy. Compared to a more precise solution this procedure is on the
safe side. .
All extreme stresses are positive or negative (or zero). In
general axial stresses (tension and compression) and 9 Table 1.6.1 Constant q(f,).
bending stresses (tension and compression) are to be
considered separately. For shear and torsion the highest Steel, GOG GT, GG
absolute value of shear stress is relevant. Wrought Cast
Al-allovs Al-allovs
f', 0,577 0,65
1.6.1.2 Combined types of stress q 0,00 0,264

Rod-shaped (ID) non-welded components
For rod-shaped (lD) non-welded components the degree
of utilization for combined types of stresses is *7
7 The applied strength hypothesis for combined types of stress is a
combination ofthe normal stress criterion (NH) and the v. Mises criterion
(GH). Depending on the ductility of the material the combination is
controlled by a parameter q as a function off, according to Eq. (1.6.7)
and Table 1.6.1. For steel is q = 0 so that only the v. Mises criterion isof
effect. For GOG is q = 0,264 so that both the normal stress criterion and
the v. Mises criterion are of partial influence.
Caution: Here only ductile wrought aluminium alloys are considered
(elongation A > 12,5 %). For non-ductile wrought aluminium alloys (as
well asfor cast aluminium alloys, and for GT or GG) the assessment of
the static strength istobe carried out according toChapter 3.
10 For example a tension stress from axial loading and a tension stress
from bending acting at the reference point, where both result from the
same single extemalload affecting the component
11 For example a tension stress from axial loading and a compression
stress from bending acting atthe reference point, where both result from
the same single external load affecting the component.
12 Stress components acting opposingly may cancel each other inpart or
completely.
 38
1.6 Assessment 1 Assessment of the static strength
using nominal stresses

In the general case - without knowing whether the
stresses act unidirectionally or opposingly *13 - the
degrees of utilization are to be inserted into Eq. (1.6.6)
both with equal or with different signs; then the least
favorable case is relevant.
Moreover the degrees of utilization calculated with
Smin,ex,zd , Smin,ex,b , T min.ex,s and T min.ex.t are to be included
in this comparative evaluation.
Rod-shaped (1D) welded components
For the toe section of rod-shaped (10) welded
components the calculation is to be carried out as for
rod-shaped (lD) non-welded components.
For the throat section of rod-shaped (10) welded
components the degree of utilization for combined types
of stresses (or loadings) is *14
aSK,Swv =
J(aSK,WV,Zd +aSK,wv,b)2 +(aSK,wv,s +aSK, wv.t )2 ,
aSK,wv,zd, ... degree of utilization, Eq. (1.6.2).
Rules of sign: If the individual types of stress (tension
or compression and bending, or shear and torsion,
respectively) always act unidirectionally at the reference
point *10, the degrees of utilization aSK,wv,zd and aSK,wv,b
and/or aSK,wv,s and aSK,wv,t are to be inserted into Eq.
(1.6.8) with equal (positive) signs (summation); then the
result will be on the safe side. If they act always
opposingly, however, *11, they are to be inserted into Eq.
(1.6.8) with different signs (subtraction) *12.
In the general case - without knowing whether the
stresses act unidirectionally or opposingly '13 - the
degrees of utilization are to be inserted into Eq. (1.6.8)
both with equal or with different signs; then the least
favorable case is relevant.
Moreover the degrees of utilization calculated with
Smin,ex,wv,zd , Smin,ex,wv,b , Tmin,ex,wv,s and Tmin,ex,wv,t are to be
included in this comparative evaluation.
1.6,2 Shell-shaped (2D) components
1.6.2.1 Individual types of stress
Shell-shaped (2D) non-welded components
The degrees of utilization of shell-shaped (2D) non-
welded components for the types of stress like normal
stress in the directions x and y as well as shear stress are
Smax,ex,x
aSK,x = s 1, (1.6.9)
SSK,x / jges
Smax,ex,y
aSK,y = ::;; 1,
SSK,y / jges
aSK,s = Tmax,ex s 1·,
TSK / jges
Smax,ex,x ... extreme maximum stresses according to
(1.6.8) type of stress; the extreme minimum
stresses, Smin,ex,x ... , are to be considered
in the same way as the extreme maximum
stresses, Chapter 1.1.1.2,
SSK,x ... related component static strength,
Chapter 1.4.1,
Jges total safety factor, Chapter 1.5.5.
All extreme stresses may be positive or negative (or
zero). In general tension and compression stresses are to
be considered separately. For shear stress the highest
absolute value is relevant.
Shell-shaped (2D) welded components
For the toe section of shell-shaped (2D) welded
components the calculation is to be carried out as for
shell-shaped (2D) non-welded components.
For the throat section of shell-shaped (2D) welded
components the degrees of utilization for normal
stresses in the directions x and y as well as for shear
stress follow from the equivalent nominal stresses,
Chapter 1.1.1.2:

a - Smax,ex,wv,x < 1 (1.6.10)

SK,wv,x - S / . -,
SK,x Jges

aSK,wv,y =ISmax, ex,wv,y

. < ,
- 1 I
SSK,y / Jges

a = T.max,ex,wv < 1
SK,wv,s T. / . -,
SK,s Jges

Smax,ex,wv,x ... extreme maximum stresses (equivalent

13 For example, iftwo loadings vary with time in a different manner. nominal stresses); the extreme minimum
stresses, Smin,ex,wv,x ... , are to be
14 Eq. (1.6.8) does not agree with the structure ofEq. (1.1.2) onpage 20 considered in the same way as the .
in all respects. It is an approximation which has to be regarded as maximum stresses, Chapter 1.1.1.1,
provisional and therefore it istobeapplied with caution.
 39
1.6 Assessment 1 Assessment of the static strength
using nominal stresses

SSK,x'" related component static strength, Shell-shaped (2D)"welded components

Chapter 1.4.2,
For the toe section of shell-shaped (2D) welded
total safety factor, Chapter 1.5.5. components the calculation is to be carried out as for
shell-shaped (2D) non-welded components.
All extreme stresses may be positive or negative (or
zero). In general tension and compression stresses are to For the throat section of shell-shaped (2D) welded
be considered separately. For shear stress the highest components the degree of utilization for combined types
absolute value is relevant. of stress (or loadings) is *14
222
asK,Swv = aSK,wv,x +aSK,wv,y +aSK,wv,s' (1.6.16)
1.6.2.2 Combined types of stress
aSK,wv,x, ... degree of utilization, Eq. (1.6.10).
Shell-shaped (2D) non-welded components
The degree of utilization of shell-shaped (2D) non-
welded components for combined stresses is *7
aSK,Sv = q . aNH + (1 - q) . aGH:::; 1, (1.6.12)
where

aNH=1{lsx +syl+~(Sx _Sy)2 +4.t 2)' (1.6.13)

2 2 2
J
aaH= Sx +Sy -sx 'Sy +t ,
(1.6.14)
sx= aSK,x,
Sy= asK,y,
t = aSK,s,
aSK,x, ... degree of utilization, Eq. (1.6.9),
and

(1.6.15)

f't shear strength factor, Table 1.2.5.

Rules of sign: If the individual types of stress always act

unidirectionally at the reference point *15, the degrees
of utilization aSK,x and aSK,y are to be inserted into Eq.
(1.6.14) with equal (positive) signs (summation). If they
always act opposingly, however *16, the degrees of
utilization aSK,x and asK,y are to be inserted into Eq.
(1.6.14) with different signs.
In the general case - without knowing whether the
stresses act unidirectionally or opposingly *13 - the
degrees of utilization are to be inserted into Eq. (1.6.14)
both with equal or with different signs; then the least
favorable case is relevant.
Moreover the degrees of utilization calculated with
Smin,ex,x , Smin,ex,y and Tmin.ex,s are to be included in this
"comparative evaluation.

15 For example tension in direction x and tension in direction y from a

single loading affecting the component.

16 For example tension in direction x and compression in direction y from

a single loading affecting the component.
 40
1.6 Assessment 1 Assessment of the static strength
using nominal stresses
 41
2.1 Characteristic service stresses 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using nominal stresses

A special case is the constant amplitude spectrum,

2 Assessment of the fatigue consisting of one step i = j = 1 only. For axial stress
strength using nominal stresses there is Sa,zd = Sa,zd,i = Sa,zd,1, Sm,zd = Sm,zd,i = Sm,zd,1 .
1R21 EN.do~

2.0 General Superposition

According to this chapter the assessment of the fatigue Proportional or synchronous stresses
strength using nominal stresses is to be carried out.
If several proportional or synchronous stress
components act simultaneously at the reference point,
2.1 Parameters of the stress spectrum Chapter 0.3.5, they are to be overlaid. For the same type
of stress (for example unidirectional axial stresses
Contents Page Sa,zd,l. Sm,zd,1 and Sa,zd,2, Sm,zd,2 , ...) the superposition
2.1.0 General 41 is to be carried out at this stage, so that in the following
a single stress component (Sa,zd, Sm,zd, ...) exists for each
2.1.1 Characteristic service stresses type of stress *2. For different types of stress (for
according to the kind of component example bending and torsional stress or axial stresses in
2.1.1.0 General x- and y-direction) the superposition is to be carried out
2.1.1.1 Rod-shaped (lD) components at the assessment stage, Chapter 2.6.
2.1.1.2 Shell-shaped (2D) components 42
2.1.2 Parameters of the service stress spectrum Non-proportional stresses
2.1.2.0 General
If several non-proportional stress components act
2.1.2.1 Mean stress spectrum 43
simultaneously at the reference point, Chapter 0.3.5,
2.1.2.2 Stress ratio spectrum
they are to be overlaid according to Chapter 5.10.
2.1.3 Adjusting a stress spectrum to match the
component constant amplitude S-N curve
2.1.4 Determination of the parameters 2.1.1 Characteristic service stresses
of a service stress spectrum according to the kind of component
2.1.4.0 General
2.1.4.1 Standard stress spectrum 44 2.1.1.0 General
2.1.4.2 Class of utilization 45 Rod-shaped (10) and shell-shaped (2D) components are
2.1.4.3 Damage-equivalent stress amplitude to be distinguished. They may be both non-welded or
welded.
2.1.0 General
According to this chapter the parameters of the service 2.1.1.1 Rod-shaped (ID) components
stress spectra are to be determined. Spectra are Rod-shaped (ID) non-welded components
applicable for N > 104 cycles approximately.
For rod-shaped (lD) non-welded components an axial
Relevant are the stress spectra of the individual stress stress Szd , a bending stress Sb , a shear stress T s- and a
components. They are specified by a number of steps, torsional stress Tt are to be considered *3 . The
i = 1 to j , giving the amplitudes Sa,zd,i. ... and the respective amplitudes and mean values are
related mean values Sm,zd,i , ... of stress cycles, Figure
Sa,zd,i , Sa,b,i , Ta,s,i , Ta,t,i , (2.1.1)
2.1.1, as well as the related numbers of cycles n,
Sm,zd,i, Sm,b,i, Tm.s.i s Tm,t,i .
according to the required fatigue life *1.

S.,zd,i
Figure 2.1.1
Sm,zd,f - -- -
Stress cycle
Example: S.,zd,1 1 As a rule a stress spectrum is to be determined for normal service
stress cycle (axial stress),
stress ratio: conditions, see footnote 3 on page 19. The largest amplitude Sa zd 1 ofa
service stress spectrum with its related mean stress value Sm,zd,1' defme
R . = Sm,zd,i -Sa,zd,i the step i = 1 and serve as the characteristic stress values.
Zd,1 Sm,Z,1 d . + Sa,Z,1
d·· t
2 Stress components acting opposingly can cancel each other inpart or
completely.
 42
2.1 Characteristic service stresses 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using nominal stresses

Rod-shaped (ID) welded components Parameters of the stress spectrum are: (2.1.9)
For rod-shaped (lD) welded components the (nominal) Sa,zd 1 characteristic (largest) stress amplitude of the
stress values are in general to be determined separately , stress spectrum, equal to the amplitude in step 1
for the toe section and for the throat section *4. Sa,zd,i amplitude in step i,
Respective amplitudes and mean values see Eq. (2.1.1). Sa,zd,i > 0, Sa,zd,i+ 1 / Sa,zd,i :s: 1,
Sm,zd,i mean value in step i,
N total number of cycles corresponding to the
2.1.1.2 Shell-shaped (2D) components required fatigue life
Shell-shaped (2D) non-welded components (required total number of cycles),
N = Lni (summed up for 1 to j),
For shell-shaped (2D) non-welded components the n.1 related number of cycles in step i,
(nominal) axial stresses in x- and y-direction, Szdx = Sx N, = Lni (summed up for 1 to i),
and Szdy = Sy, as well as a shear stress T, = T are to be H total number of cycles of a given spectrum,
considered. The respective amplitudes and related mean - 8
values are H = Hj = Lhi (summed up for 1 to j) * ,
h·1 related number of cycles in step i,
Sa,x,i, , Sa,y,i , Ta,i , (2.1.4) Hi = Lhi (summed up for 1 to i),
Sm,x,i, , Sm,y,i, Tm,i . step, i = 1 to j,
j total number of steps, step for the smallest
amplitudes
Shell-shaped (2D) welded components Yzd damage potential.
For shell-shaped (2D) welded components, Figure 0.0.6,
stress values are in general to be determined separately The damage potential is defined by *5 *9,
for the toe section and for the throat section *4. kO"
Respective amplitudes and mean values see Eq. (2.1.4). j hi Sa zd,i
Yzd = ke L-=""' --'- (2.1.10)
i=l H [ Sa,zd,l )
2.1.2 Parameters of the stress spectrum
where 1<" is the exponent of the component S-N curve.
2.1.2.0 General
Sa,zd,i / Sa,zd,l and hi /H describe the shape of the stress
A stress spectrum describes the stress cycles contained spectrum. The amplitudes Sa,zd,i are always positive, the
in the stress history of concern *5 • mean values Sm,zd.i may be positive, negative, or zero.
If the stress cycles show variable amplitudes a stress As a rule a restriction to the following kinds of stress
spectrum is to be determined for every stress component spectra is possible: Mean stress spectra and stress ratio
*6. The constant amplitude stress spectrum may be spectra (with the fluctuating stress spectra as a special
regarded in the following as a special case '7 , for which case), Figure 2.1.2 *10.
i = I and
Sa,zd = Sa,zd,i = Sa,zd,l , (2.1.8)
7 In this case an assessment ofthe fatigue limit is to be carried out for
N= N = ni = n1
type I S-N curves if N = N ~ ND 0" oranassessment ofthe endurance
limit for type 11 S-N curves if N:" N ~ ND,O", 11 , respectively, oran
assessment for fmite life based on the constant amplitude S-N curve
(formally similar to an assessment of the variable amplitude fatigue
strength) if N = N < ND,O" or N = N ~ ND,O", II for Typ I orTyp 11
S-N curves, respectively. ND,O" or ND,O", 11 isthe number ofcycles at
the fatigue limit ofthe component constant amplitude S-N curve, Chapter
2.4.3.2.
3 Where appropriate bending and shear stresses in two planes are to be
considered (components yand z), see Chapter 0.3.4.1 . 8 The valuesN - total number ofcycles required - and if - total num~
ofcycle!!j!fa given spectrum - are different ingeneral. The terms niIN
4 For welded components separate assessments ofthe fatigue strength for and hi I H are equivalent.
both the toe section and the throat section ofthe weld are to be carried 9 The damage potential is a value characterising the shape of a stress
out. Both assessments are ofthe same kind, but ingeneral the respective spectrum. The values ka = 5for normal stress and Ie,; = 8 for shear stress
stresses and fatigue classes FAT are different. are valid for non-welded components. The values ka = 3 and k't = 8 are
5 In the following all variables and equations are presented for the axial
valid for welded components.
stress component Szd only, but written with the appropriate indices they The term hi I H may be replaced by ni IN.
are valid for all other types ofstress aswell..
lOA mean stress spectrum, for example, results from a static load with
6 In thiscase an assessment ofthe variable amplitude fatigue strength isto dynamic loads superimposed, a fluctuating stress spectrum, for example,
be carried out. results for a crane hook when lifting variable loads.
 43
2.1 Characteristic service stresses 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using nominal stresses

or
Sm,zd,i / Sa,zd,i = (1 + ~d) / (l - ~d)' (2.1.14)

Special case: Fluctuating stress spectrum

A constant stress ratio of zero applies to all steps of a
fluctuating stress spectrum:
(2.1.15)
or
Sm,zd,i / Sa,zd,i = 1. (2.1.16)

2.1.3 Adjusting a stress spectrum to match

the component constant amplitude S-Ncurve
This chapter mainly applies to stress spectra, the steps
of which do not have the same stress ratio *11.
A mean stress spectrum, for example, has different
amplitudes Sa,zd,i ' and constant mean stress values
Sm,zd,i = Sm,zd ' and consequently the individual steps
have different stress ratios Rzd,i . On the other hand the
component constant amplitude S-N curve, Chapter
"1" 4.4.3.2, is derived for a constant stress ratio Rzd . To
allow the proper application of Miner's rule, Chapter
4.4.3.1, all steps of a spectrum, however, must have or
must be converted to that stress ratio RZd,i = Rzd ,
Smin,zd=O Chapter 5.6.1.

Figure 2.1.2 Stress spectra

2.1.4 Determination of the parameters of a
Top: Mean stress spectrum. Midle: Stress ratio spectrum. Bottom:
Fluctuating stress spectrum. Example: The presented stress spectra are
stress spectrum
standard type stress spectra, basicaUy defined by a binomial frequency 2.1.4.0 General
distribution, a coefficient p = 1/3 , a total number of cyclesH = 106 , and
extrapolated to the required total number of cyclesN. If the stress spectrum of a component under
consideration is not known, or in case of high demands
on its accuracy, the parameters of the stress spectrum
are to be determined by calculation, by simulation, or by
2.1.2.1 Mean stress spectrum
measurement. The determination of the stress spectrum
A constant mean stress applies to all steps of a mean from a stress history has to be realized according to the
stress spectrum: rainflow cycle counting procedure or in the sense of this
procedure.
Sm,zd,i = Sm,zd. (2.1.11)
From a measured and graphically presented continuous
stress spectrum a stepped stress spectrum may be
2.1.2.2 Stress ratio spectrum obtained according to Chapter 5.6.2.
A constant stress ratio applies to all steps of a stress In case of existing experiences - depending on the
ratio spectrum: component and its application - the determination of the
parameters of a stress spectrum may be simplified by
RZd,i = Rzd, (2.1.12) applying a standard stress spectrum, a class of
where utilization, or a damage-equivalent stress amplitude.
~d = (Sm,zd,i - Sa,zd,i) / (Sm,zd,i -+ Sa,zd,i) (2.1.13)

11 Applies to a mean stress spectrum, for instance, but not for a stress
ratio spectrum or a fluctuating stress spectrum.
 44
2.1 Characteristic service stresses 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using nominal stresses

2.1.4.1 Standard stress spectrum 1 2

Standard stress spectra are used to describe the shape of
typical stress spectra. Standard stress spectra having a P
binomial or an exponential frequency distribution that 2/3
vzd = 1
may be modified by the spectrum parameter p , are 0,5 0,739
presented in Figure 2.1.3. In addition, damage 0,499
potentials Vzd according to Eq. (2.1.10) and Figure 2.1.1 1/3
0,326
are given in the graphical presentations. (These apply to
an exponent of the component constant amplitude S-N
a .j........--,---,--~--.---,-----lO
curve 1<:" = 5 and a total number of cycles H = 106 ). 106

Parameters of a so derived stress spectrum

Sa,zd,l characteristic (largest) stress amplitude ofthe Step i Sa' / Sal hi H-I
stress spectrum, equal to the amplitude in step 1 P 0 1/3 2/3
1 1 1 1 2 2
N required total number of cycles,
2 0,950 0,967 0,983 16 18
Yzd or Sa,zd,i / Sa,zd,l and hi, i = 1 to j, 3 0,850 0,900 0,950 280 298
according to the shape 4 0,725 0,817 0,908 2720 3018
of the standard stress spectrum 5 0,575 0,717 0,858 20000 23000
Sm,zd,i mean values, i = 1 to j. 6 0,425 0,617 0,808 92000 115000
7 0,275 0,517 0,758 280000 395000
8 0,125 0,417 0,708 604982 1000000

Table 2.1.1 Damage potentials Vzd and v, for standard

1
stress spectra having a binomial or exponential 1,0 I"""~-' --.---.....,.---~·1
frequency distribution, modified by the spectrum Sa,zd,1
parameter p, a total number of cycles H = 106 , for non- Sa,zd,l
welded and welded components, for normal stress and
shear stress (exponents of the constant amplitude S-N 0,5
curve 1<:" and k, ). ......--""'1/3

non-welded welded
p binom. I expon. binom. expon.
Vzd normal stress
k, = 5 1<:" = 3
0 0,326 0,196 0,267 0,155
1/6 0,400 0,297 0,366 0,286 Step i H-I
Sa' / Sa hi
1/3 0,499 0,430 0,483 0,426 0 1/3 2/3
P
1/2 0,615 0,570 0,608 0,569
1 1 1 1 2 2
2/3 0,739 0,713 0,737 0,712
2 0,875 0,917 0,958 10 12
5/6 0,868 0,856 0,868 0,856
3 0,750 0,833 0,917 64 76
1 1 1 1 1
4 0,625 0,750 0,875 340 416
v, shear stress 5 0,500 0,667 0,833 2000 2400
k, = 8 k, = 5 6 0,375 0,583 0,792 11000 13400
0 0,399 0,275 0,326 0,196 7 0,250 0,500 0,750 61600 75000
1/6 0,452 0,330 0,400 0,297 8 0,125 0,417 0,708 924984 1000000
1/3 0,527 0,438 0,499 0,430
1/2 0,627 0,573 0,615 0,570 Figure 2.1.3 Standard stress spectra.
2/3 0,743 0,713 0,739 0,713 Top: Binomial distribution. Bottom: Exponential distribution (Straight
5/6 0,869 0,856 0,868 0,856 line distribution). Spectrum parameter p, total number of cyclesII = Hj
1 1 1 1 1 = E hi = 106, number of steps j = 8 , damage potential Yzd for an
exponent ko = 5 of the component constant amplitude SoN curve.
 45
2.1 Characteristic service stresses
Analytical relationship:For standard stress spectra with
spectrum parameters p > 0 (p = 1/6, 1/3, 1/2, 2/3, 5/6)
there is
[ Sa,zd,1 p
J
Sa,zd,i = p + (l - p) .[Sa,zd,i J . (2.1.17)
Sa,zd,1 p=o
Application: In case of existing experiences about the
shape of the stress spectrum a suitable standard stress
spectrum may be applied to assess the variable
amplitude fatigue strength in two ways:
Application of the damage potential Vzd. Eq. (2.1.10)
for an assessment of the variable amplitude fatigue
strength according to the elementary version of
Miner's rule, Chapter 2.4.3.1.
Application of the data on Sa,zd,i / Sa,zd,1 and hi of the
steps i = I to j from Figure 2.1.3 for an assessment
of the variable amplitude fatigue strength according
to the consistent version of Miner's rule, Chapter
2.4.3.1.
The appropriate standard stress spectrum has to be
specified separate from this guideline.
2.1.4.2 Class of utilization *12
A class of utilization is an approximately damage-
equivalent combination of different shapes of stress
spectra and of specific figures of the required total
numbers of cycles, Figure 2.1.4, see also Chapter 5.7.
Sa,zd,i
Sa,zd,1
N
Figure 2.1.4 Spectra corresponding to the same class of
utilization.
Example: Welded component, stress spectra with binomial distribution,
axial stress. All three stress spectra are approximately damage-equivalent
and correspond tothe same class ofutilization B5, Table 5.7.4.
12 According toDIN 15018.
2 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using nominal stresses
Parameters of a so derived stress spectrum
characteristic (largest) stress amplitude of the
stress spectrum, equal to the amplitude in step 1
B class of utilization (a combination of the shape of
the stress spectrum and of the required total
number of cycles),
Sm,zd mean stress *13.
Analytical relationship: See Chapter 5.7.
Application: In case of existing experiences about the
shape of stress spectrum and the required total number
of cycles a class of utilization may be applied to assess
the variable amplitude fatigue strength, Chapter 2.4.3.1.
The class of utilization has to be specified separate from
this guideline.
2.1.4.3 Damage-equivalent stress amplitude
The damage-equivalent stress amplitude is a constant
stress amplitude with an assigned number of cycles
equal to the number of cycles at the knee point of the
component constant amplitude S-N curve, ND,cr . It is
damage-equivalent to the stress spectrum in question, In
particular it is defined by the shape of stress spectrum,
the required total number of cycles, N, and the largest
stress amplitude Sa,zd,b Figure 2.1.5.
S,;z!il WL
S.,UI'l
S.,zd:;~tr~~""""",----<J--";>-.....-.t-..:-
2;1.5'
Figure 2.1.5 Damage-equivalent stress amplitude.
Component constant amplitude S-N curve, WL, number ofcycles atthe
knee point ND,C" ' component variable amplitude fatigue life curve, ~.
characteristic stress amplitude Sa,zd,l, required total number ofcycles N.
Shown is the situation when full use is made of the fatigue strength
capacity of the component (degree of utilization aBl(,zd = 100 %,
Eq.2.6.3).
As the damage-equivalent stress amplitude Sa,zd,eff isassigned toND,C"
it allows an assessment ofthe variable amplitude fatigue strength to be
performed as an assessment ofthe fatigue limit.
 46
2.1 Characteristic service stresses 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using nominal stresses

Parameters of the so derived stress spectrum

Sa,zd,eff Damage-equivalent stress amplitude
(damage-equivalent to a combination of the
shape of the stress spectrum, the required total
number of cycles and of the largest amplitude
in the stress spectrum).
Sm,zd Related mean value.

Analytical relationship: Based on the elementary

version of Miner's rule the damage-equivalent stress
amplitude is obtained as *14

1 j
Sa,zd,eff = k -
N _.L. '"
. Il:1 ·ska
a,zd,i (2.1.18)
D,« 1=1

= (N / NO,a ) 111m. Vzd . Sa,zd,1 ,

ka exponent of the component constant

amplitude S-N curve
No,a number of cycles at the knee point of the
component constant amplitude S-N curve
j, i, ni, ... seeEq. (2.1.9),
Yzd damage potential, Eq. (2.1.10).

Application: In case of existing experiences about the

damaging effect of the stress spectrum a damage-
equivalent stress amplitude Sa,zd,eff may be applied. It
allows an assessment of the variable amplitude fatigue
strength to be performed as an assessment of the fatigue
limit, Chapter 2.6.
The damage-equivalent stress amplitude has to be
specified separate from this guideline.

14 Eq. (2.1.18) is valid for a damage sum OM = 1 , see Chapter 2.4.3.1.

 47
2.2 Material properties 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using nominal stresses

2.2 Material properties *1 11m EN.do~ fw,cr fatigue strength factor for completely reversed
normal stress, Chapter 2.2.2,
Contents Page fw,'t fatigue strength factor for completely reversed
2.2.0 General 47 shear stress, Chapter 2.2.2,
Rm tensile strength, Chapter 1.2.1.1.
2.2.1 Component values according to standards
2.2.1.0 General Caution: For non-welded wrought and cast aluminum
2.2.1.1 Non-welded components alloys the fatigue limit is different from the endurance
2.2.1.2 Welded components limit associated with N ~ NO,cr,II =NO,'t,ll= 108 cycles.
2.2.2 Fatigue strength factors 48
for normal stress and for shear stress 2.2.1.2 Welded components

2.2.3 Temperature factor For the base material of welded components the material
2.2.3.0 General fatigue strength values for completely reversed stress are
2.2.3.1 Normal temperature the same as for non-welded components.
2.2.3.2 Low temperature
2.2.3.3 Elevated temperature Steel and cast iron materials
For the toe section and for the throat section of
professionally welded components from weldable
2.2.0 General
structural steel *5 specific values of the fatigue strength
According to this chapter the material fatigue strength apply independent of the kind of material. These are for
values (component values according to standards) are to completely reversed normal stress at N ~ No,cr = 5' 106
be determined. These are the material fatigue limit for cycles and for completely reversed shear stress at
completely reversed normal stress, crW,zd , and shear N ~ No,'t = 1 . 108 cycles *6, Chapter 5.5,
stress, 'tW,s, as well as further characteristics *2.
crW,zd = crw,w = 92 MPa, (2.2.3)
'tw,s = 'tw,w = 37 MPa.
2.2.1 Component values according to Caution: For other kinds of material (stainless steel
standards conditionally weldable steel, weldable cast iron
2.2.1.0 General material) these values are to be considered as
provisional and are to be applied with caution.
The determination of the material fatigue strength is
different for non-welded and for welded components. Aluminum alloys
For the toe section and for the throat section of
2.2.1.1 Non-welded components professionally welded components from aluminum
For non-welded components the values according to alloys *5 specific values of the fatigue strength apply in
standards of the material fatigue strength for completely analogy to steel independent of the kind of material.
reversed normal stress and shear stress *3 and for a These are for completely reversed normal stress at
number of cycles N ~ No,cr = No,'t = 106 are *4 N ~ NO,cr = 5 . 106 cycles and for completely reversed
shear stress at N ~ No,'t = 1 . 108 cycles *6, Chapter 5.5,
crW,zd = fw,cr· Rm, (2.2.1)
'tw,s = fw,'t' crW,zd, crW,zd = crw,w = 33 MPa, (2.2.4)
'tw,s = 'tw,w = 13 MPa.
Caution: These values are provisional and are to be
I Chapters 2.2 and 4.2 are identical. applied with caution *7

2 An influence offrequency on the material fatigue strength values isnot

considered up to now although itmight be ofimportance for aluminum
alloys. 4 The values crW,zd and 'tw., correspond tothe fatigue limit which is equal
to the endurance limit of steel and cast iron material, but not of
3 For the tensile strength according to standards, Rm , a probability of aluminum alloys, however, Figure 2.4.5 and Chapter 5.1.0.
survival Po = 97,5 % ispresumed. That probability should also apply to
the values crW,zd and 'tW,s computed from Rm . Moreover Eq. (1.2.1) 5 Weld imperfections occurring with normal production standards are
applies here too: allowable.
crW,zd = I<d,m . KA' crW,zd,N , (2.2.2)
'tW,s = I<d,m . KA . 'tW,s,N , 6 The values crw,w and 'tw.w correspond tothe fatigue limit which is equal
Kd,m technological size factor asfor the tensile strength, tothe endurance limit ofwelded steel and cast iron material aswell as of
Chapter 1.2.2. welded aluminum alloys, Figure 2.4.6 and Chapter 5.1.0.
KA anisotropy factor, Chapter 1.2.3,
crW,zd,N, ... semi-fmished product fatigue strength value according to 7 Values derived from an average relation of0,36 ofthe FAT classes for
standards, Chapter 5.1. aluminum alloys and for structural steel, Chapter 5.4.
 48
2.2 Material properties 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using nominal stresses

2.2.2 Fatigue strength factors for normal For normal temperature the temperature factor is
stress and for shear stress KT,D = 1. (2.2.5)
The fatigue strength factor for completely reversed
normal stress, fw,O" , is the quotient of the axial fatigue
strength value for completely reversed stress divided by 2.2.3.2 Low temperature
the tensile strength, Table 2.2.1. Temperatures below the values listed above are outside
the field of application of this guideline.
The fatigue strength factor for shear stress, fw,~ ,
considers that the material fatigue strength is lower for
shear stress than for normal stress, Table 2.2.1.
2.2.3.3 Elevated temperature
In the field of elevated temperatures - up to 500°C for
Table 2.2.1 Fatigue strength factors for completely
steel and cast iron materials and up to 200°C for
reversed normal stress, fw,O" , and shear stress, fw,~ -c- 1.
aluminum materials - the influence of the temperature
on the fatigue strength is to be considered. For elevated
Kind of material fw,O" fw,~ temperature the fatigue strength values for completely
Case hardening steel 0,40 ~2 0,577 ~2 ~3 reversed normal stress and shear stress are
Stainless steel 0,40 ~4 0,577 crW,zd,T = KT,D . crW,zd, (2.2.6)
Forging steel 0,40 ~4 0,577 'tW,s,T = KT,D . 'tw,s ,
Steel other than these 0,45 0,577
KT,D temperature factor, Eq. (2.2.7) to (2.2.11),
GS 0,34 0,577
crW,zd, ... material fatigue strength value for completely
GGG 0,34 0,65
reversed normal stress, Chapter 2.2.1.1 and
GT 0,30 0,75
2.2.1.2.
GG 0,30 0,85
'tw,s, ... material fatigue strength value for completely
Wrought aluminum alloys 0,30 ~5 0,577 reversed shear stress, Chapter 2. 2. 1. 1 and
Cast aluminum alloys 0,30 ~5 0,75 2.2.1.2.
fw,O" and fw, ~ arevalid for a number of cycles N = 106 •
-c- 1
fw ~ equal to f~ , Table 1.2.5. According to the temperature T the temperature factor
~2 Bl~-hardened. The influence of the carburization on the
component fatigue strength is to by considered by the surface KT,D is
treatment factor, Ko, Chapter 2.3.4. for fine grain structural steel, T > 60°C:
~3 0,577 = 1 / J3, according tothe v. Mises criterion. Also valid for
welded components. KT,D = 1-10- 3 . T / DC, (2.2.7)
~4 Preliminary values.
for other kinds of steel *7, T> 100°C, Figure 2.2.1:
~5 fW,O" does not correspond tothe endurance limit for N = <:i) here! KT,D = 1-1,4' 10- 3 . (T / °C-IOO), (2.2.8)
for GS, T > 100°C:
KT,D = 1- 1,2 . 10 -3. (T / °C_ 100), (2.2.9)
2.2.3 Temperature factor - for GGG, GT and GG, T > 100°C, Figure 2.2.1:
2.2.3.0 General KT,D = 1- aT,D . (10 - 3 . T / oC)2, (2.2.10)

The temperature factors considers that the material for aluminum alloys, T > 50°C:
fatigue strength for completely reversed stress decreases KT,D = 1-1,2' 10 -3. (T / °C - 50)2, (2.2.11)
with increasing temperature. Figure 1.2.3 in the Chapter 1.2,

Normal temperature, low temperature and elevated aT,D Constant, Table 2.2.2.
temperature are to be distinguished.

2.2.3.1 Normal temperature

Table 2.2.2 Constant aT,D *8.
Normal temperatures are as follows:
for fine grain structural steel from -40°C to 60°C, Kind of material GGG GT GG
for other kinds of steel from -40°C to + 100°C, aT,D 1,6 1,3 1,0
for cast iron materials from-25°C to + 100°C,
- for age-hardening aluminum alloys
from -25°C to 50°C,
- for non-age-hardening aluminum alloys
from - -25°C to 100°C.
8 Forstainless steel values aT.D arenot known up to now.
 49
2.2 Material properties 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using nominal stresses

Eq. (2.2.7) to (2,1.10) apply to steel and cast iron

Higb 'temperature
strength Rm,T
1i1ghtemperature
yieidStl'ellgthRp,t
materials from the indicated temperature T up to 500 o e.
Eq. (2.2.11) applies to aluminum alloys up to 200 o e.
The values crW,zd,T and "CW,s,T are not explicitly needed
for an assessment of the fatigue strength, as only the
temperature factor KT,D is used.
For elevated temperature, and in particular when the
mean stress Sill, i- 0 , the fatigue strength in terms of
the maximum stress may be higher than the static
strength so that the assessment is governed by the static
strength.

Ojlf-~=

o
o lOO 200 300 400 500
nt. Tin·C

Rrn;T .~
R ln . 1m

Crecp.Stn~ngth It,,.,TI
Rrn;Tt J
~:m'jlJ1t

0,1 F:=:q:~::J=--.L--d-~~
oW~Z(n
aW,m

o
o 100 200 300 400 500
2;2,lb Tin·C

Figure 2.2.1 Temperature dependent values of the static

strength and of the fatigue strength, plotted for
comparison.
Safety factors j according to Chapter 1.5 or 2.5, respectively.
Rm,T/Rm = KT,m, Rp,T / Rp = KT,p,
Rm,Tt/Rm = KTt,m, Rp,Tt / Rp = KTt,p .
Rm,T, Rp,T as well as Rill,Tt, Rp,Tt for t = io' h.
Fatigue strength value at elevated temperature:
crW,zd,T / crW,zd = KT,O·
Top: Non-alloyed structural steel, as in Figure 1.2.2,
Rp / Rm = n, / Rm = 0,65, crW,zd/ Rm = 0,45,
Jm = 2,0, jp = Jmt = 1,5, Jpt = 1,0, In = 1,5 .

Bottom: GG, as in Figure 3.2.2,

crW,zd/ Rm = 0,30, jm = 3,0, Jmt = in = 2,4.
 50
2.3 Design parameters 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using nominal stresses

2.3 Design parameters 1R23 EN. dog The design factors of shell-shaped (2D) non-welded
components for normal stresses in the directions x and y
as well as for shear stress are (2.3.2)
Contents Page KwK, =[K +_1_ _ 1) . 1 _
2.3.0 General 50 f
x ,x KR,cr K y ·K s .KNL,E
2.3.1 Design factors
2.3.1.0 General KWK,y=[K f y +_1_ _ 1) . 1
2.3.1.1 Non-welded components , KR,cr K y .K s .KNL,E
2.3.1.2 Welded components
KwK,s = [Kf,S +_1__ 1)' 1
2.3.2 Fatigue notch factors 51 KR,'t Ky.K s
2.3.2.0 General
2.3.2.1 Fatigue notch factors computed Kf,zd ... fatigue notch factors,
from stress concentration factors Chapter 2.3.2,
2.3.2.2 Fatigue notch factors computed roughness factor, Chapter 2.3.3,
from experimental values 52 surface treatment factor, Chapter 2.3.4,
2.3.2.3 Fatigue notch factors for coating factor, Chapter 2.3.4,
superimposed notches 54 constant for GG, Chapter 2.3.5.
2.3.3 Roughness factor
2.3.4 Surface treatment and coating factors 55
2.3.1.2 Welded components
2.3.5 Constant KNL,E 56
2.3.6 Fatigue classes (FAT) For the base material of welded components the design
2.3.7 Thickness factor factors are to be computed as for non-welded
components.
For the toe section and for the throat section of welded
2.3.0 General components the design factors are in general to be
According to this chapter the design parameters are to determined separately, since the cross-section values,
be computed in terms of design factors. the nominal stresses and the fatigue classes FAT may be
different.
Rod-shaped (10) and shell-shaped (2D) .welded
2.3.1 Design factors components are to be distinguished.
2.3.1.0 General
Steel and cast iron material
Non-welded and welded components are to be
distinguished. The design factors of welded rod-shaped (lD)
components made of steel or of cast iron materials *2 for
axial, for bending, for shear and for torsional stress are,
2.3.1.1 Non-welded components
KWK,zd = 225 / (FAT' ft' Kv KNL,E), (2.3.4)
Rod-shaped (10) and shell-shaped (2D) non-welded KWK,b = KWK,zd ,
components are to be distinguished. KwK,s = 145/ (FAT' it· Ko ),
KWK,t = KwK,s .
The design factors of rod-shaped (ID) non-welded
components for axial, for bending, for shear and for The design factors of shell-shaped (2D) welded
torsional stresses are *1, (2.3.1) components made of steel or of cast iron materials for
normal stresses in the directions x and y as well as for
KWK,Zd=[K f Zd +_1__ 1)' 1 shear stress are
, KR,cr K y ·K s .KNL,E

KWKb=[K fb +_1__ 1) . 1
, , KR,cr K y ·K s .KNL,E
1 The additive combination of the fatigue strength notch factor Kfzd ...
with the reciprocal roughness factor Kk,c, ... reduces the effect 'of
KwK,s = [Kf,S +_1__ 1) . 1 roughness for components with sharp notched (Kj is large) incomparison
KR,'t Ky.K s tocomponents with mild ornonotches (Kf '" 1).
2 To a major part the FAT values where derived with reference to the
KWK,t =[K f t +_1__ 1) , 1 . nw recommendations and Eurocode 3 (Ref 191, 18/). The design factors
, KR,'t Ky.K s are supposed, however, to be valid notonly for weldable structural steel
but also for other kinds of iron based materials (conditionally weldable
steel, stainless steel, weldable cast iron materials).
 51
2.3 Design parameters 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using nominal stresses

KwK,x = 225 / (FAT' ft' Kv KNL,E), (2.3.5) concentration factors, K, , and from the Kj-K, ratios,
KwK,y = 225 / (FAT' ft' Ko KNL,E), l1o(r) , Ilo(d) , nt(r) , n'[(d) , *5.
KwK,s = 145/ (FAT' it· Ky).
(2.3.10)
Aluminum alloys
The design factors of rod-shaped (lD) welded
components made of aluminum alloys *3 for axial, for
bending, for shear and for torsional stress are
KWK,zd = 81 / (FAT·:tt· Ky' K s), (2.3.6)
KWK,b = KWK,zd ,
KwK,s = 52 / (FAT' ft' Kv Ks),
KWK,t = KwK,s . The fatigue notch factors, Kf,x ,... , for normal stress in
The design factors of shell-shaped (2D) welded com- the directions x and y as well as for shear stress of shell-
ponents made of aluminum alloys for normal stresses in shaped (2D) components are
the directions x and y as well as for shear stress are
Ktx
Kf,x =--'(-) , (2.3.11)
KwK,x = 81 / (FAT' ft' Ke : Ks), (2.3.7) n crx r
KwK,y = 81 / (FAT' ft' Kv Ks), _ Kt,y
KWK,s = 52 / (FAT' ft), Kf,y- Day (r) ,

FAT fatigue class, Chapter 2.3.6, K - Kt,s

ft thickness factor, Chapter 2.3.7, f,s - n't (r) ,
Kv surface treatment factor, Chapter 2.3.4 *4,
Kt,zd ... stress concentration factor according to type
Ks coating factor, Chapter 2.3.4,
of stress, Chapter 5.2,
KNL,E constant for GG, Chapter 2.3.5.
ncr (r) ... Kt-Kf ratio of the component for normal
The fatigue classes FAT are in general different for stress or for shear stress as a function of r,
normal stress in the direction x and in the direction y, as ncr (d), .. Kj-K, ratio of the component for normal
well as for shear stress. stress or for shear stress as a function of d,
r notch radius at the reference point,
d diameter or width of the net notch section.
2.3.2 Fatigue notch factors
Caution: IfEq. (2.3.10) or (2.3.11) yield a fatigue notch
2.3.2.0 General factors Kfzd, '" < 1 the realistic value to be applied is *7,
The fatigue notch factors, Kf,zd , ... , allow for the Kf,zd = ... = 1. (2.3.12)
influence on the fatigue strength resulting from the
design (contour and size) of a non-welded component.
They are to be computed from stress concentration Kt-Kr ratios for normal stress
factors or, if these are not applicable or not known, from The Kt-Kf ratios for normal stress, ncr (r) and ncr (d),
experimental values. Figure 2.3.1, are to be computed from the related stress
gradients Gcr(r) and Gcr(d), Eq. (2.3.13) to (2.3.15).
2.3.2.1 Fatigue notch factors computed from stress
concentration factors ForG cr ;; 0,1 mrrr ! there is (2.3.13)

Rod-shaped (lD) and shell-shaped (2D) components are -(a G - 0,5 + R m )

to be distinguished. Ocr = 1 +G cr . mmTO bG·MPa ,

The fatigue notch factors , Kf,zd , ... , for axial, for for 0,1 mrrr ! <G cr ;; 1 mnr ! there is
bending, for shear and for torsional stress of the rod-
shaped (lD) non-welded structural details presented in -(aG + R m )
Chapter 5.2 are to be computed from the stress Ocr = 1 +~Gcr'rom ·10 bG' MPa, (2.3.14)

for 1 mrrr ! < Gcr;; 100 mnr ! there is

3 Tosome part the FAT values where derived with reference tothe IIW -(aG + R m )
recommendations. Moreover the design factors are supposed tobevalid, vo = 1 +~Gcr -rnm '10 bG.MPa, (2.3.15)
however, for all weldable aluminum alloys, except for the aluminum
alloys 5000, 6000 and 7000. Numerical values see Footnote 6 onpage
47.
a G, bo constants, Table 2.3.2.
4 As a rule Ky isnot relevant for welded components, that isKy = 1.
 52
2.3 Design parameters 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using nominal stresses

For surface hardened components *8 (components with

thermal or with chemo-thermal surface treatment) the
K,-K r ratios are lower than for non surface hardened
components *9 * 10.

Kt-Kr ratios for shear stress

The Ki-K, ratios for shear stress, n, (r) und n, (d), are to
be computed from the related stress gradients G,(r) and
.r /VV V.
. IJ
1/ 800
V:/VlI
1/. / /1 0,80 V G,(d) according to Eq. (2.3.13) to (2.3.15), after having
1,2 .SteeV 1200 replaced cr by 't and the tensile strength Rm by

1,1
~~V~~{t~V fw" . Rm, where fw" is the fatigue strength factor for
shear stress, Table 2.2.1.

·/l/Pl/ f/ l/
Related stress gradients
The related stress gradients as a function of the notch
radius r at the reference point, G cr (r) andG,(r), are to be
determined from Table 2.3.3. The related stress
gradients from bending and torsion as a function of the

1,02 V/tVI Z I do= I

diameter or width d at the notch net section are

G cr (d) =G,(d) = 2/ d. (2.3.17)

101
. "",
'1111
..
1 I I
0;01 0,020,050;1 0,2 0,5
0;267'

1 2
I
5 to
2.3.2.2 Fatigue notch factors computed from
G(Jinmm~l experimental values
Figure 2.3.1 Kj-K; ratios ncr for normal stress. Rod-shaped (lD) and shell-shaped (2D) components are
The diagram may be extended up to G cr = 100 mm r l to be distinguished.
Indicated numerical values 1/0,65 to 1/0,95: Difference of the fatigue
limit for completely reversed stress in tension-compression and in
bending, valid for the material test specimen ofthe diameter do = 7,5 mm.

Not included in the figure 2.3.1:

Stainless steel. Threshold values forGcr = I mm -1 :
largest value: ncr = 1,27 for Rm = 400 MPa and
smallest value: ncr = 1,14 for Rm = 1070 MPa. 5 The fatigue notch factor depends on the notch root radius r and
Wrought aluminum alloys: Threshold values forGcr = 1 mm -1 : moreover in the case of bending or torsion on the diameter or width d at
the notch net section.
largest value: ncr = 1,69 for Rm = 95 MPa and
smallest value: ncr = 1,18 for R m = 590 MPa.
6 See footnote 12.
Cast aluminum alloys: Threshold values for: G cr = 1 mm -1 :
largest value: ncr = 2,02 for Rm = 130 MPa and 7 Exception in case of bending: IfKt,b / Ilo (r) < 1 then Kt,b / Ilo (r) = 1 is
smallest value: ncr = 1,88 for Rm = 330 MPa. to be applied (without considering Ilo(d) ). Accordingly in case oftorsion.

8 Does not apply to cold rolled or shot peened surfaces. See the summary
Table 2.3.2 Constants l1G and bG . of special features ofthe fatigue strength of surface hardened components,
Chapter 5.8.
Kind Stain- Other GS GGG GT GG 9 The Kt - Kf ratio for a crack originating in the hardened surface layer is
of less kinds lower because the tensile strength R m of the hard surface layer is higher
mate- steel of than the tensile strength Rm of the core material according to the material
standard.
rial steel
0,40 0,50 0,25 0,05 -0,05 -0,05 The Kt - Kf ratio for a crack origgiating ~the core material is lower
l1G because the related stress gradientGcr (or G, ) in the core material has
bG 2400 2700 2000 3200 3200 3200 decreased from its maximum value at the surface.

10 The tensile strength of the surface layer may be estimated

Kind of material Wrought Cast approximately as Rm = (3,3 . HV) MPa , where HV is the Vickers
Al-alloys Al-alloys hardness number. As this equation, however, was not specifically
established for hardened surface layers, it is to be applied with caution. In
l1G 0,05· -0,05 particular the fatigue strength value crW,zd of the hardened surface layer
bG 850 3200 must not be derived from that estimate of the tensile strength
(crW,zd * fW,cr' Rm)·
 53
2.3 Design parameters 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using nominal stresses

Table 2.2.3 Related stress gradients G c (r) andG't (r)

for simple structural details ~ 1.

G (r) ~2~3 G~(r) ~4

Structural detail cr

2
-1
Mb~r
The fatigue notch factors for shell-shaped (2D) non-
-·(I+<p)
~(iD
Fzd
. d' ~--
. FZd
r r welded components applying to normal stresses in the
I
directions x and y as well as shear stress are:
t

MbBtfb
_( D
FZd
·-d'

t
x.,
I Fzd
2,3
-'(l+<p)
r
1,15
r
K - K (d) n crx (rp )
f,x-f,xP' ()'
n crx r
(2.3.19)

-
Mb~rb
2
-. (1+<p)
- ( B--b
)- r
Fzd Fzd
~5
t Kf,zd (dp), .. fatigue notch factor of the test

- specimen according to type of stress,

Mb~b
-(-t B - -- b ) -
2,3. (l +<P)
r ncr (rp)...
Chapter 5.3 *13,
Kt-Kf ratio of the test specimen for normal
Fzd ' FZd ~5 stress or for shear stress according to r p *14,
t ncr (r) ... Kt-Kf ratio of the component for normal

2,3 - stress or for shear stress according to r *14,

Mb Mb ncr (d)...
_(.~-Efr -\--~-
- Kt-Kf ratio of the component for normal
r stress or for shear stress according to d,
Fzd '- "0 , I Fzd

Round specimen or flat ~5

member
11 In this case the fatigue notch factor depends on the notch radii r and
~ 1 r > O. The equations are valid for round members, approximately
rp and for bending and torsion on the diameter or width d at the notch
they apply to round members with a central borehole too. net section.
~2 rp = 0 for t! d > 0,25 ort! b > 0,25,
12 The basic definition of the fatigue notch factor Kf,b for bending is:
q>= 1I(4.M +2) for t!d~ 0,25 or t!b~ 0,25.
Kf,b = crW,zd/ SWK,b ' (2.3.20)
~3 The related stress gradient Gcr(r) applies to axial stress and to
crW,zd fatigue strength value for completely reversed axial stress
bending stress; nevertheless there is a difference for bending because of
of the unnotched test specimen of the diameter do ,
the Kt-KfTatio ncr(d) additionally contained in Eq. (2.3.10) and (2.3.18). fatigue strength value for completely reversed bending stress
SWK,b
of the notched component of the diameter or width d.
~4 The related stress gradient G~(r) applies to shear stress and to
torsion stress; nevertheless there is a difference for torsion because of the Kfb in bending is dependent on the notch radius r and on the diameter or
Kt-KfTatio n~(d) additionally contained in Eq. (2.3.10) and (2.3.18). width d of the notch net section. Kf,t for torsion in analogy.
~5 flat member of thickness s. The .defmition of the fatigue notch factor for bending derived from
experimental data - under the provision that the unnotched and the
notched specimen have the same diameter dp - is:

The fatigue notch factors, Kf,zd , ... , for axial, for
bending, for shear and for torsional stress of the rod-
shaped (lD) non-welded structural details presented in
Chapter 5.3 are to be computed from the experimentally
derived fatigue notch factors of test specimens given
there, and from the respective Kf
particular *II
Kf,b (d p) = SW,b,P / SWK,b,P, (2.3.21)
SW,b,P fatigue limit for completely reversed bending stress of the
unnotched test specimen of diameter dp,
SWK,b,P Fatigue limit for completely reversed bending stress of the
notched test specimen of diameter dp.
-K, ratios. In Kf,b is dependent on the notch radius rp and on the diameter or width of
the notch net section d. Kf,t for torsion in analogy.

13 The fatigue notch factors given in Chapter 5.3 are applicable to

K - K (d) ncr (rp ) (2.3.18) components from steel without surface treatment. Additionally, however,
f,zd - f,zd p ' --(-)- ,
ncr r a procedure for components being surface hardened and for components
made of cast iron materials and aluminum alloys is described there.

14 For computing Kt-Kf ratios the notch radii, r or rp , are required.

Particularly for cases that may produce some doubt the radii are specified
in Chapter 5.3. A possible incorrectness that may occur will be reduced
by the division of ncr(rp ) / ncr(r).
 54
2.3 Design parameters 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using nominal stresses

r notch radius of the component,

d diameter or width of the component, 1,0 ..
rp notch radius of the test specimen, •r:::.::- '--": 1.1>
KR,ta
~ :-:::: r--.. r--...
i"'-
dp diameter or width of the test specimen. .,1:'.: 32
O~9 .zz:
The Kt-Kf ratios Ila (rp), .., are to be computed
~ ~ i'.. <,
63
according to the related stress gradient Gcr(rp ) with
'\( ~. <,", --.!...

...: ::\\.. <, 12

reference to Chapter 2.3.2.1 .... Q~ "
~
~~~'\
. ~"":,\,, 25
Because of similarity of the test specimen and 0,1 ~~ '\ r'.
component it is
i' $
rid = rpl dp. (2.3.22) 0,6
J-.00
Caution: If a fatigue notch factors Kf,zd , ... < 1 is
obtained from Eq. (2.3.18) or (2.3.19) the realistic 2bo
value to be applied is *15

Kf,zd = ... = 1. (2.3.12) 0,4

300500 700. 1000 2000
2,Uil Rlil in MPil
2.3.2.3 Fatigue notch factors for superimposed
notches
For superimposed notches (for example a fillet and a KR;l!
borehole), the partial fatigue notch factors of which are
0;9 '!o...~~-,-,,+-~+--"""'t-;;;;:
Kf,1 and Kf,2 , the resulting fatigue notch factor in the
most unfavorable case is
Kf= 1 + (Kf,l- 1) + (Kf,2- 1). (2.3.24)
If the distance of notches is 2 r or above
(where r is the larger one of both notch radii) *16 a
superposition does not need to be considered.

40n 600800 lOtIO

2.3.3 Roughness factor Rm hll\-IPafiir as, Cfu'G; GT
OJ. ,

The roughness factor KR,cr or KR;t accounts for the "r .... J

100 200 30ll 400

influence of the surface roughness on the fatigue
strength of the component. R m in MPa fUr G~

The roughness factor valid for a polished surface is

Figure 2.3.3 Roughness factor KR,cr .
KR,cr = KR,'t = 1. (2.3.25)
Top, Steel.
For a rolling skin, a forging skin or the skin of castings
Bottom: Cast iron materials with skin, steel with rolling skin for
an average roughness value R, = 200 11m applies.
comparison
The roughness factors for normal stress, Figure 2.3.3,
and for shear stress are *17

KKR,cr (2.3.26)
= 1 - aR,cr . 19 (Rz 111m ) . 19(2Rm I Rm,N,min ),
KKR,'t=
= 1 - fw,'t . aR,cr -lg (Rz /um) -lg (2Rm!Rm, N, min), 15 Exception in case of bending: If Kr.b(lip ) . Ilo(rp ) / Ilo(r) < 1 then
Kf,b(lip) . Ilo(rp) / Ilo(r) = 1 is to be applied (without considering Ilo(d) ).
aR,cr constant, Table 2.3.4, Accordingly in case of torsion.
Rz average roughness value of the surface
16 The distance of 2 r is likely to be on the safe side.
in 11m , according to DIN 4768,
Rm tensile strength, Chapter 1.2.1.1, 17 In particular residual stresses as a result of manufacturing and of a
surface treatment are determining the influence of the surface on the
Rm,N,min minimum tensile strength, Table 2.3.4,
component fatigue limit, rather than the surface roughness. According to
fw,'t fatigue strength factor for shear stress, the current state of knowledge, however, improved regulations to allow
Table 2.2.1. for the surface effect are not yet developed, so that the traditional
equations based on a roughness value have to be accepted for the time
being.
 55
2.3 Design parameters 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using nominal stresses

Table 2.3.4 Constant aR,cr and nummum tensile Table 2.3.5 Upper and lower limits of the surface
strength. ~l1,N,min , for the kind of material considered. treatment factor for steel and cast iron materials ~H·2.

Kind of Steel GS GGG GT GG

Surface unnotched notched
material
treatment components components
aR,cr 0,22 0,20 0,16 0,12 0,06 ~3

Rm,N,min 400 400 400 350 100 Steel

inMPa Chemo-thermal treatments
Nitriding 1,10 - 1,15 1,30 - 2,00
Depth of case 0,1...0,4 mm (1,15 - 1,25) (1,90 - 3,00)
Kind of Wrought Cast Surface hardness
material aluminum alloys aluminum alloys 700 to 1000 HV 10
aR,cr 0,22 0,20 Case hardening 1,10 - 1,50 1,20 - 2,00
Depth of case 0,2 ... 0,8 mm (1,20 - 2,00) (1,50 - 2,50)
~,N,min 133 133 Surface hardness
inMPa 670 to 750 HV 10
Carbo-nitriding
Depth of case 0,2 ... 0,8 mm (1,80)
Surface hardness
670 to 750 HV 10
For surface hardened components *8 and an expected
Mechanical treatment
crack origine at the surface the roughness factor is less
Cold rolling 1,10 - 1,25 1,30 - 1,80
favorable (smaller) than for components not surface
(1,20 - 1,40) (1,50 - 2,20)
hardened, because of the higher tensile strength ~ of
the hardened surface layer *10. Shot peening 1,10 - 1,20 1,10 - 1,50
(1,10 - 1,30) (1,40 - 2,50)
Normally, in the case of experimentally determined Thermal treatment
fatigue notch factors the roughness factor does not need 1,20 - 1,50 1,50 - 2,50
to be considered (KR,cr = KR,'t = 1). Otherwise, in the Inductive hardening
(1,30 - 1,60) (1,60 - 2,80)
case of fatigue notch factors that are experimentally Flame-hardening
Depth of case 0,9 ... 1,5 mm
determined for specimens with a different surface
Surface hardness
roughness, KR,cr and KR,'t are to be replaced by 51 to 64 HRC

K R,o = KR,cr (Rz ) / KR,cr (Rz,p ), (2.3.27) Cast iron materials

Nitriding 1,10 (1,15 ) 1,3 (1,9)
KR,'t = KR,'t (Rz) / KR,'t (Rz,p), 1,1 (1,2) 1,2 (1,5)
Case hardening
Rz average surface roughness of the component in urn, Cold rolling 1,1 (1,2) 1,3 (1,5)
Rz,p average surface roughness of the specimen in urn, Shot peening 1,1 (1,1) 1,1 (1,4)
Inductive hardening, 1,2 (1,3) 1,5 (1,6)
Flame-hardening
~ 1 Concerning typical component values and further kinds of treatments,
2.3.4 Surface treatment and coating factors see also FVA-worksheet "Schwingfestigkeitssteigerung (increasing the
fatigue strength)".
The surface treatment factor, Kv , allows for the
influence of a treated surface layer on the fatigue ~ 2 The given values typically apply to the component fatigue limit.
Values applying to the variable amplitude fatigue strength are in general
strength of the component. somewhat lower.
Without a surface treatment there is The values are valid for specimens of 30 to 40 mm diameter; values in
parenthesis for specimens of 8 to 15 mm diameter.
Kv= 1. (2.3.28)
~ 3 For unnotched or slightly notched components.
For components with surface treatment *8 the surface
treatment factor depends on whether a crack origin is to
be expected at the surface or in the core. Essential
factors of influence are the ratio of the fatigue limits of
the surface layer and of the core material, as well as the
ratio of the local stress values on the surface and in the
core just below the surface layer.
Upper and lower limits of the surface treatment factors
for steel and cast iron materials are given in Table 2.3.5. 18 Provided that the procedures of surface treatment can be applied to
A definite value is to be determined by the user *18. components of aluminum alloys, the Ko-values for cast iron material
may approximately be taken into account.
 56
2.3 Design parameters 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using nominal stresses

The coating factor K s allows for the influence of a 2.3.6 Fatigue class (FAT)
surface coating on the fatigue strength of a component
made of an aluminum alloy. The fatigue classes (FAT) for nominal stresses allow for
the influences of both the form of welded components,
For steel and cast iron material there is of the shape of the weld seam and of the weld seam
Ks = 1. (2.3.29) itself on the fatigue strength of the toe section or of the
throat section) *19.
For aluminum alloy without coating there is
A complete catalogue of fatigue classes with reference to
Ks = 1. (2.3.30) the IIW Recommendations is given in Chapter 5.4.1 *20
For aluminum alloy with coating there is
K s < 1. (2.3.31)
Ks for example after Figure 2.3.4 (provisional values). 2.3.7 Thickness factor
When using nominal stresses for the calculation of
transversely loaded welds the thickness factor ft

'Ks 0.9
--..,J
r.
I
, I
1-'111T1-
••I•
"f
I!'
Ii
.;- !
,.
I ;; !;-1!
accounts for the influence of the sheet metal thickness
on the fatigue strength *21 ..
'"""
--- 'ffi'!r
.r...........
0,1 , "'" .I
I. o

n .

0.7 _...LL.1.J The thickness factor ft is of no effect, however,

~ ~:. d-H~~JJ. - if there is no weld,
o..s .ld···
1--1-'rn.-rr
r-irti. - if there is no transversely loaded weld, or
.I I
I 1 I .•: l:\!. - if the sheet metal thickness is t :::: 25 mm. -
'B.~
T--T~i . iiTi'Y
o,a '_--H-'-'l~,"L. In these cases the thickness factor is
! l _ "j j- :!:J'iJ
! f4+!- r'
:1 _
Q~ r
ft = 1. (2.3.33)
0;1

o
..iH+i-H
I ! !',•.1i For a transversely loaded weld and a sheet metal
1 10 100
thickness t > 25 min the thickness factor is a function of
Thickness ·.of layerinp.ID
the sheet metal thickness t (in mm):
:tt = (25 mm / t) n, (2.3.34)
Figure 2.3.4 Influence of anodic coating on the fatigue
limit (at 106 cycles) of a component from aluminum n after Table 2.3.7.
alloy as a function of the layer thickness (after Wilson).
Provisional values.
Table 2.3.7 Exponent n for the thickness factor.

Type of the welded joint n

2.3.5 Constant KNL,E
cruciform joints, transverse T-joints, plates with
The constant KNL,E accounts for the non-linear elastic transverse attachments
stress strain behavior of GG when loaded in tension- - as welded 0,3
compression or bending. - toe ground 0,2
For all kinds of material except for GG there is transverse butt welds,
- as welded 0,2
KNL,E = 1. (2.3.32) butt welds ground flush, base material, longitudi-
KNL,E for GG after Table 2.3.6. nal welds or attachments, - as welded or ground 0,1

Table 2.3.6 Constant KNL,E ~ I.

19 Different from an assessment with structural stresses or with effective
Kind of
material
GG
-10
I GG
-15
GG
-20
I
GG
-25
GG
-30
I GG
-35
notch stresses, see Chapter 4.3 and Chapter 5.5.

20 All fatigue classes, except those for the base material, are considered
KNL,E 1,075 1,05 1,025 here: for steel FAT::;; 140 for nomial stress and FAT::;; 100 for shear
stress, for aluminum alloys FATS; 50 for normal stress and FAT::;; 36
for shear stress.
-e- 1 For unnotched or slightly notched components in tension-compression
KNL.E = 1. The assessment ofthe base material ofwelded components is to be carried
out as for non-welded components.

21 The thickness factor is supposed to be valid for steel, but also for
aluminum alloys.

2.4 Component strength
2.4.1 Component fatigue limit for completely reversed stress
2.4 Component strength \R24 EN.dog
Content
2.4.0 General
2.4.1 Component fatigue limit for completely
reversed stress
2.4.2 Component fatigue limit
according to mean stress
2.4.2.0 General
2.4.2.1 Mean stress factor
Calculation for type of overloading F2
Calculation for type of overloading Fl
Calculation for type of overloading F3
Calculation for type of overloading F4
2.4.2.2 Individual or equivalent mean stress
2.4.2.3 Residual stress factor
2.4.2.4 Mean stress sensitivity
2.4.3 Component variable amplitude fatigue
strength
2A.3.G General
2.4.3.1 Variable amplitude fatigue strength factor
Calculation for a constant amplitude
spectrum
Calculation for a variable amplitude
spectrum
Elementary version of Miner's rule
based on the damage potential
Calculation according to the consistent
version of Miner's rule
Calculation using a class of utilization
Calculation using a damage-equivalent
stress amplitude
2.4.3.2 Component constant amplitude S-N curve
2.4.0 General
According to this chapter the component fatigue
strength is to be calculated as follows:
Step 1: component fatigue limit for completely
reversed stress in considering the design factor,
Chapter 2.4.1,
Step 2: component fatigue limit in considering the
mean stress factor, Chapter 2.4.2,
Step 3: component variable amplitude fatigue
strength in considering the variable amplitude
fatigue strength factor, Chapter 2.4.3.
2.4.1 Component fatigue limit for
completely reversed stress
According to this chapter the component fatigue limit
for completely reversed stress is to be calculated in
considering the design factor.
57
2 Assessment of the fatigue strength
with nominal stresses
Caution: See the comment in the second paragraph of
Chapter 4.4.2.
Page
Rod-shaped (lD) and shell-shaped (2D) components are
57 to be distinguished.
The component fatigue limits of rod-shaped (lD)
components for completely reversed axial, bending,
58 shear and torsional stress are *1
SWK,zd = crW,zd I KWK,zd , (2.4.1)
SWK,b = crW,zd I KWK,b *2 ,
59
TwK,s = 'tw,sl KwK,s,
TWK,t = 'tw,sl KWK,t,
60
crW,zd, 'tW,s material or weld specific fatigue limit for
completely reversed stress, Chapter
61
2.2.1,
KWK,zd... design factor, Chapter 2.3.1.
62
Eq. (2.4.1) is based on thefatigue limit for completely
reversed stress, Eq. (2.2.1) or (2.2.3) and (2.2.4), and on
the design factor, Eq. (2.3.1) or (2.3.4) and (2.3.6). It
63
applies to non-welded and to welded components.
64
The component fatigue limits of shell-shaped (2D)
components for completely reversed normal stresses in
the directions x and y as well as for shear stress are
SWK,x = crW,zd l KwK,x , (2.4.2)
SWK,y = crW,zd I KwK,y ,
TWK = 'tw,s I KwK,s ,
65
66 crW,zd, 'tw,s material or weld specific fatigue limit for
completely reversed stress, Chapter 2.2.1,
KWK,x, ... design factor, Chapter 2.3.1.
Eq. (2.4.2) is based on the fatigue limit for completely
reversed stress, Eq. (2.2.1) or (2.2.3) and (2.2.4), and on
the design factor, Eq. (2.3.2) or (2.3.5) and (2.3.7). It
applies to non-welded and to welded components.
1 The component fatigue limits for completely reversed stress are
different for normal stress and for shear stress, and moreover because of
different stress gradients ordifferent weld characteristics depending onthe
type ofstress.
2 The material fatigue limit forcompletely reversed stress isthebasis for
both axial and bending stress. The difference is allowed for bythe design
factor. Forshear and torsion inanalogy.

2.4 Component strength
2.4.2 Component fatigue limit according to mean stress
2.4.2 Component fatigue limit according to
mean stress 1R242 EN.dog
2.4.2.0 General
According to this chapter the amplitude of the
component fatigue limit is to be determined according to
a given mean stress, and where appropriate, in
considering a multi axial state of stress.
Comment: For non-welded components of austenitic
steel, or of wrought or cast aluminum alloys the
component fatigue limit is different from the component
endurance limit for N = 00 , Chapter 2.4.3.2.
Observing the specific input values the calculation
applies to non-welded and to welded components.
An improved procedure for non-welded components of
steel to compute the component fatigue limit in the case
of synchronous multiaxial stresses is given in Chapter
5.9.
In combination with a stress spectrum the indicated
stress ratio Rzd, ... commonly refers to step I of the
stress spectrum (maximum amplitude), R zd,l, .,. *1 *2.
The mean stress factor, Figure 2.4.1, allows for the
influence of the mean stress on the fatigue strength.
Without mean stress the mean stress factor is
KAK,zd = ... = I.
The residual stress factor accounts for the influence of
the residual stress on the fatigue strength. For non-
welded components the residual stress factor for normal
stress and for shear stress is
Rod-shaped (ID) and shell-shaped (2D) components are
to be distinguished.
Rod-shaped (ID) components
The mean stress dependent amplitudes of the component
fatigue limit of rod-shaped (lD) components for axial,
for bending, for shear and for torsional stress are
SAK,zd = KAK,zd . KE,cr . SWK,zd,
SAK,b = KAK,b . KE,cr' SWK,b,
TAK,s = KAK,s . KE;t . TWK,s ,
TAK,t = KAK,t . KE,'t . TWK,t ,
1 This definition is necessary only for mean stress spectra, not for
stress ratio spectra or for fluctuating stress spectra, for which the
stress ratios of allsteps are identical.
2 For more details see Chapter 5.6.
58
2 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using nominal stresses
KAK,zd .., mean stress factor, Chapter 2.4.2.1,
KE,cr ... residual stress factor, Chapter 2.4.2.3,
SWK,zd ... component fatigue limit for completely
reversed stress, Chapter 2.4.1.
Eq. (2.4.6) applies to non-welded and to welded
components.
Shell-shaped (2D) components
The mean stress dependent amplitudes of the component
fatigue limit of shell-shaped (2D) components for
normal stresses in the directions x and y as well as for
shear stress are
SAK,x = KAK,x . KE,cr' SWK,x, (2.4.7)
SAK,y = KAK,y . KE,cr . SWK,y,
TAJ( = KAK,s' KE,'t' TWK,
KAK,x... mean stress factor, Chapter 2.4.2.1,
KE,cr... residual stress factor, Chapter 2.4.2.3,
SWK,x ... component fatigue limit for completely
reversed stress, Chapter 2.4.1.
Eq. (2.4.7) applies to non-welded arid to welded
components.
Type of overloading
(2.4.4) The mean stress factor KAK,zd, ... is dependent on the
type of overloading, FI to F4. It distinguishes the way
how the stress may increase in the case of a possible
overload in service (not by crash). Therefore it is to be
determined in the sense of "safety of operation in
service", that is for normal stress as follows:
(2.4.5) - Type FI:
the mean stress Sm,zd remains the same,
- TypeF2:
the stress ratio Rzd remains the same,
- Type F3:
the minimum stress Smin,zd remains the same,
- TypeF4:
the maximum stress Smax,zd remains the same.
For bending, shear or torsion Sm,zd, Rzd, .., are to be
replaced by Sm,b, ~, ..., T rn.s- Rg, ... or T m.t- Rt .
(2.4.6) Intermediate types of overloading are possible.
Dependent on the type of overloading the amplitude of
the component fatigue limit is different, Figure 2.4.1.
Fields of mean stress
In determining the mean stress factor KAK,zd, ... four
fields of mean stress are to be distinguished. These are
dependent on the stress ratio Rzd, ..., or on the mean
stress Sm,zd, ... , respectively, see Chapter 2.4.2.2.
 59
2.4 Component strength 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength
2.4.2 Component fatigue limit according to mean stress using nominal stresses

Figure 2.4.1 Amplitude of the component fatigue Rad=-=

strength as a function of mean stress or stress ratio ® Rzd =-1
(Haigh diagram), described in four fields of mean stress
(M~=M.)
Example: Nonnal stress, types of overloading F1 and F2. S .
WK.zd
Given: Component fatigue strength for completelyreversed SAK,zd,Fl

stress SWK,zd , service stress amplitude Sa,zd ,

(M~=M<T/3) (M~=O)
stress ratio Rzd ,
Derived: Amplitudes of the componentfatigue limit SAK,zd b2U
®
for the types of overloading F1 and F2.

Normal stress:
Calculation for the type of overloading F2 * 4
Field I: Rzd > 1, field of fluctuating compression stress,
In case of a possible overload in service the stress ratio
where Rzd = + or - ex) is the zero compression stress.
Rzd remains the same.
Field II: - ex) ~ Rzd~ 0, where Rzd < -1 is the field of
alternating compression stress, Rzd = -1 is the Normal stress:
completely reversed stress, Rzd > -1 is the field of
Field I: Rzd > 1:
alternating tension stress.
KAK,zd = 1/ ( 1- Ma) , (2.4.9)
Field III: 0 < Rzd < 0,5, field of fluctuating tension
stress, where Rzd = 0 is the zero tension stress.
Field IV: Rzd ~ 0,5, field of high fluctuating tension
stress. 1
KAK,zd- , (2.4.10)
1+M cr . Sm,zd / Sa,zd
For bending b the index zd is to be replaced by the index
b, "tension stress" by "tension bending stress", and
"compression stress" by "compression bending stress". Field III, 0< Rzd < 0,5:
1+ M cr /3
I+M cr
Shear stress: *3: KAK,zd = M S ' (2.4.12)
1+ _cr_ . m,zd
Field I: (not existing),
3 Sa,zd
Field II: - 1 ~ Rs~ 0 (lower boundary changed),
Field III: 0 < n, < 0,5 (unchanged),
Field IV: Rs~ 0,5 (unchanged). Field IV, Rzd~ 0,5:

K - 3+M cr (2.4.13)
For torsion the index s is to be replaced by the index 1. AK,zd- 3.(I+M ) 2 '
cr

2.4.2.1 Mean stress factor Rzd stress ratio *6, Chapter 2.4.2.2,
Ma mean stress sensitivity, Chapter 2.4.2.4,
The mean stress factor KAK,zd ... is dependent on the Sm,zd mean stress *6, Chapter 2.4.2.2,
mean stress and on the mean stress sensitivity. Sa,zd stress amplitude.
For bending the index zd is to be replaced by b.

3 The fatigue limit diagram (Haigh diagram) for normal stress shows
. increasing amplitudes for Rzd < -1 (negative mean stress). For negative
mean stress the fatigue limit diagram (Haigh diagram) for shear stress is
the same as for positive mean stress and symmetrical to Tm,s = O. 5 Sm,zd / Sa,zd=(l+Rzd)/(l-Rzd)' (2.4.11)
Practically it is restricted to the fields of positive mean stress or a
stress ratio Rs ~ -1 , as the mean stress in shear is always regarded to Using the term Sm zd I Sa zd instead of (1 + Rzd ) I (1 - Rzd ) avoids
be positive, Tm,s ~ O. numerical probl~, when the stress ratio becomes Rzd =- 00.

4 The type of overloading F2 is described first because it is of primary 6 Or equivalent mean stress, equivalent minimum stress, equivalent
practical importance . maximum stress, Chapter 2.4.2.2.
 60
2.4 Component strength 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength
2.4.2 Component fatigue limit according to mean stress using nominal stresses

Shear stress:
For KAK,s Field I is not existing and Field II is
restricted to positive mean stresses R, ~ -1 . For
positive mean stress, or R, ~ -1 , the same equations
are valid if M cr is replaced by M.
For torsion the index s is to be replaced by t.
Calculation for the type of overloading Fl
In case of a possible overload in service the mean stress
Sm,zd remains the same.
For positive mean stresses, tm,s ~ 0, the same equations
are valid if Sm,zd is replaced by tm,s and M, is replaced
by M,
For torsion the index s is to be replaced by t.
Calculation for the type of overloading F3
In case of a possible overload in service the minimum
stress Smin,zd remains the same.
Normal stress:

Normal stress: Smin,zd -2 *7

For Smin,zd = < there is
KE,cr ,SWK,zd I-Moo

Smzd -1
< - - - there is
KAK,zd = 1 1 (1 - Ma ), (2.4.18)
For Sm,zd = ' *7
KE,oo ,SWK,zd I-M cr
Field II
KAK,zd = 11 (1 - M cr), (2.4.14)
for - 2 1(1 - Ma)~ Smin,zd ~ 0 there is
Field II 1-M cr .Smin,zd
(2.4.19)
for -1 1 (1 - Ma) s Sm,zd s 1 1 (1 + Ma) there is I+M oo

KAK,zd = 1 - Ma . Sm,zd, (2.4.15) Field III

Field III 2. 3+M oo

for 0 < Smin,zd < - there is
3 (1 + M cr )2
1 3 +M cr
for - - < Sm,zd < ( )2 there is 1+M cr 13 M cr
I+M oo I+M cr 1+ M - -3-' Smin,zd
KAK, d - _ _----"'cr _ (2.4.20)
z - I+Moo 13
(2.4.16)

Field IV
Field IV
_2 . 3 + Moo
for Smin,zd;?: there is
3 (I+M oo Y
K - 3+Moo (2.4.21)
AK,zd - (
3· I+M oo
)2'
(2.4.17)

minimum stress *6, Chapter 2.4.2.2,

Sm,zd mean stress *6, Chapter 2.4.2.2,
KE,cr residual stress factor, Chapter 2.4.2.3,
SWK,zd component fatigue limit for completely
reversed stress, Chapter 2.4.1,
M, mean stress sensitivity, Chapter 2.4.2.4.
For bending the index zd is to be replaced by b.
Shear stress:
For KAK,s Field I is not existing and Field II is
restricted to positive mean stresses tm,s ~ 0 or
o ~tm,s = Tm,s I(KE,< ' TWK,s) ~ 1/(1 + M"t).
7 The abbreviation Srn,zd = Sm,zd / (KE,cr' SWK,zd) applies inthe
following to Smin,zd, Smax,zd , tm,s , ..., accordingly.
residual stress factor, Chapter 2.4.2.3,
component fatigue limit for completely
reversed stress, Chapter 2.4.1,
M, mean stress sensitivity, Chapter 2.4.2.4.
For bending the index zd is to be replaced by b.
Shear stress:
For KAK,s Field I is not existing and Field II is
restricted to positive mean stresses Tm,s ~ 0 or
- 1 s tmin,s = Tmin,s 1 (KE,< . TWK,s) s 0 .
For positive mean stresses, tm,s ~ 0 , the same equations
are valid if Smin,zd is replaced by tmin,s and M, is
replaced by M r .
For torsion the index s is to be replaced by t.
 61
2.4 Component strength 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength
2.4.2 Component fatigue limit according to mean stress using nominal stresses

Calculation for the type of overloading F4 Individual mean stress

In case of a possible overload in service the maximum As a rule the individual mean stress Sm,zd is used to
stress Smax,zd remains the same. determine Smin,zd , Smax,zd and Rzd . For normal stress
the respective equations are
Normal stress: Smin,zd = Sm,zd - Sa,zd , (2.4.26)
Smax,zd = Sm,zd + Sa,zd ,
Rzd= Smin,zd 1 Smax,zd ,
Smax,zd *7
Sa,zd stress amplitude,
For Smax,zd = < 0 there is
KE,cr ,SWK,zd Smin,zd minimum stress,
Smax,zd maximum stress,
KAK,zd = 1 1 (l - 110- ), (2.4.22) Rzd stress ratio.

Field II For bending, shear and torsion the appropriate variables

are Smin,b, ..., ~, Tmin,s , ..., R, or Tmin,t , ..., Rt·
for O:s; Smax,zd s 2 1 (l + 110-) there is
I-M cr 'smax
KAK,zd (2.4.23) Equivalent mean stress
I-M cr
In the case "bending and torsion", which is typical for
Field III numerous applications in machine design, and in
similar cases, where normal stresses are combined with
2 4 . 3 +M cr
for - - - < Smax,zd <- there is shear stresses, the variables Smin,zd,v , Smax,zd,v and
I+M cr 3 (1+ M cr)2 Rzd,v are to be used. They are derived from an
equivalent mean stress Sm,v , to be computed as a
1+ M cr 13 M
- - -cr . smax,zd function of the respective individual mean stress values,
1+ M cr 3 Eq. (2.4.28). For normal stress there is
KAK,zd = - - - - - - " - - - - - - - (2.4.24)
I-M cr /3
Smin,zd,v = Sm,v - Sa,zd , (2.4.27)
Smax,zd,v = Sill,v + Sa,zd ,
Field IV Rzd,v = Smin,zd,v l Smax,zd,v,

for Smax,zd->
~ . 3+M cr Sa,zd individual stress amplitude,
( )2 there is
3 1+ M cr Rzd,v equivalent stress ratio,
Smin,zd,v equivalent minimum stress,
Smax,zd,v equivalent maximum stress.
(2.4.25)
For bending, shear and torsion the appropriate variables
are Smin,b,v, ..., ~,v, Tmin,s,v , ..., Rs,v or Tmin,t,v
Smax,zd maximum stress *6, Chapter 2.4.2.2,
residual stress factor, Chapter 2.4.2.3, Rt,v
K E•cr
SWK,zd component fatigue limit for completely
reversed stress, Chapter 2.4.1, The equivalent mean stress, Eq. (2.4.27), for normal
mean stress sensitivity, Chapter 2.4.2.4. stress is
For bending the index zd is to be replaced by b.
Sm,v = q . Sm,v,NH + (l - q) . Sm,v,GH, (2.4.28)
Shear stress:
where
For shear stress the type of overloading F4 (Tmax,s
remaining constant) can practically not being realized.
q=
13 -(l/f-c) (2.4.29)
13-1
Sm,v,NH -~ (ISml+~S~ +4.T~ )
2.4.2.2 Individual or equivalent mean stress
In each case Rzd , ..., Smin,zd, ... and Smax,zd , ... are
. determined by mean stress and stress amplitude. The Sm,vGH
, =~S2m +3.Tm2 .
mean stress may be taken either as the individual mean
stress according to type of stress or as an equivalent
mean stress from the individual mean stresses of all
types of stress.
 62
2.4 Component strength 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength
2.4.2 Component fatigue limit according to mean stress using nominal stresses

q material dependent parameter High residual stresses are to be assumed in case of

after Table 2.6.1. welding without residual stress reducing precautions.
Sm , Tm individual mean stress,
Moderate residual stresses are to be assumed in case of
Eq. (2.4.31) and (2.4.32),
welding with residual stress reducing precautions, for
example by observing a suitable weld sequence.
For shear stress there is
Low residual stresses are to be assumed in case of
Tm,v=fw,, ' Sm,v, (2.4.30) welding with subsequent stress-relief heat treatment, or
if residual stress may evidentially be excluded.
fw" shear strength factor, Table 2.2.1.

Rod-shaped (ID) components 2.4.2.4 Mean stress sensitivity

For rod-shaped (lD) components the equivalent mean The mean stress sensitivity M, or M, , in connection
stress after Eq. (2.4.28) is to be computed only if with the mean stress factor, describes to what extent the
Sm,zd + Sm,b ~ O. It is mean stress affects the amplitude of the component
fatigue strength, Figure 2.4.1.
Sm = Sm,zd + Sm,b, (2.4.31)
Tm = Tm,s + Tm,t, For non-welded components the mean stress sensitivity
for normal stress and for shear stress, applicable in case
Sm,zd, ... individual mean stresses, Chapter 2.1.1.1.
of normal or elevated temperature, is
Sm,zd , Sm,b , Tm,s and Tm,t are to be inserted into Eq.
M, = aM' 10 -3. Rm/ MPa + bl\.:f, (2.4.34)
(2.4.31) with proper sign to be added or subtracted.
M't = fw" . Mq,
aM, bM constants, Table 2.4.2,
Shell-shaped (2D) components
fw " shear fatigue strength factor, Table 2.2.1.
For shell-shaped (2D) components the equivalent mean
For components that have been surface hardened *8 the
stress afterEq. (2.4.28) is to be computed only if
mean stress sensitivity is greater because of the tensile
Sm,y = 0 and Sm,x ~ 0 (or in reverse). It is
strength R.n of the hardened surface being higher than
Sm = Sm,x (or Sm = Sm,y), (2.4.32) that of components not surface hardened.
T m = Tm,s,
For welded components the mean stress sensitivity for
Sm,x, ... individual mean stress, Chapter 2.1.1.2. normal stress and for shear stress, applicable in case of
normal or elevated temperature, is dependent on the
intensity of the residual stress, but independent of the
2.4.2.3 Residual stress factor tensile strength R.n of the base material. Values are
given in Table 2.4.1, see also Chapter 5.5.
The residual stress factor for non-welded components is
KE,cr = KE;t = 1. (2.4.33)
Table 2.4.2 Constants aM and bM .
For welded components of structural steel and of
aluminum alloys the residual stress factor is different for Kind of Steel ~1 GS GGG GT GG
high, moderate or low residual stresses. It is given for material
normal stress and for shear stress in Table 2.4.1, see
aM 0,35 0,35 0,35 0,35 0
also Chapter 5.5.
bM - 0,1 0,05 0,08 0,13 0,5

Table 2.4.1 Residual stress factor KE,cr , KE;t and mean

stress sensitivity Mcr, M, for welded components. Kind of Wrought Cast
material aluminum alloys aluminum alloys
Residual KE,cr Mcr KE,'t M't ~1
aM 1,0 1,0
stress - 0,04 0,2
bM
high 1,00 0 1,00 0
moderate 1,26 0,15 1,15 0,09
low 1,54 0,30 1,30 0,17 ~ 1 also stainless steel.

~ 1 For Shear Stress there is M't = fw r ' Mcr fw,'t = 0,577 ,

Table 2.2.1. "

8 Not applicable to components being cold rolled or shot-peened.

 63
2.4 Component fatigue strength 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength
2.4.3 Component variable amplitude fatigue strength using nominal stresses

Rp yield strength, Chapter 1.2.1.1,

2.4.3 Component variable amplitude fatigue Kp,b, Kp,t plastic notch factors, Table 1.3.2,
strength \R243 EN.dog ~ shear strength factor, Table 1.2.5.
2.4.3.0 General
4 N; N* Componentfatigue lifecurve
According to this chapter the amplitude of the
component variable amplitude fatigue strength is to be N ComponentScbrcurve
derived from the stress spectrum and the component
constant amplitude S-N curve, Chapter 2.4.3.2.
The variable amplitude fatigue strength factor KBK,zd ,
. ... , to be calculated depends on the stress spectrum, that
is on the required total number of cycles '1 and on the
shape of the stress spectrum, as well as on the
component constant amplitude S-N curve, and in
addition it depends on the type of stress (normal stress
or shear stress).
It has to be distinguished, whether in case of a constant
amplitude spectrum an assessment of the fatigue limit
(or endurance limit) or an assessment of the fatigue N,N
strength for finite life is intended, or whether in case of Figure 2.4.2 Component constant amplitude S-N curve,
a variable amplitude spectrum an assessment of the component fatigue life curve derived by the consistent
variable amplitude fatigue strength is intended *2. version of Miner's rule, and influence of the critical
The calculation for a constant amplitude stress damage sum DM .
spectrum is a special case of the more general case of Highest amplitude in stress spectrum SBK , component fatigue limit SAl(,
calculation for a variable amplitude stress spectrum. In number ofcycles N after the component constant amplitude S-N curve,
each case the way of calculation is the same, but the ~mber ofcycles N aft3the com.£?nent fatigue life curve for DM < 1 or
N * for DM = 1. Itis N = N + (N *- N) . DM. This formula implies that
variable amplitude fatigue strength factors are different. a number ofcycles N -7 N isobtained for se:.ctra ofincreasing damage
Observing the specific input values the calculation potential and the exact nu~er of cycles N = N for the constant
applies to both non-welded components (component amplitude stress spectrum as N * - N-7 O.
constant amplitude S-N curve model I or model II) and In German the fatigue life curve is usually termed 'Gassner curve' and
to welded components (component constant amplitude the constant amplitude SoN curve is usually termed 'Woehler curve'.
S-N curve model I only).
Rod-shaped (10) and shell-shaped (2D) components are
to be distinguished.

Rod-shaped (1D) components

The amplitudes of the component variable amplitude
fatigue strength (highest amplitude in stress spectrum)
of rod-shaped (lD) components for axial stress,
bending stress, shear stress and for torsional stress are,
Figure 2.4.2,
SBl<,zd = KSK,zd . SAK,zd, (2.4.41)
SSK,b = KSK,b . SAK,b,
TSK,s = KsK,s . TAK,s , Figure 2.4.3 Restriction of the amplitudes of the
TSK,t = KSK,t . TAK,t , variable amplitude fatigue strength, SBK,I , or of the
KSK,zd, ... variable amplitude fatigue strength factor, maximum value Sm + SBK and the minimum value
Chapter 2.4.3.1, Sm - SBK respectively, in relation to the yield strength,
SAK,zd ... component fatigue limit, Chapter 2.4.2. displayed in terms of the Haigh-diagram.

Except for GG, the following restrictions apply, Figure

2.4.3:
1 Required total number ofcycles and required component fatigue life are
SSK,zd s 0,75 Rp, (2.4.42) corresponding denotations.
SSK,b s 0,75 Rp' Kp,b,
2 In a simplified manner the variable amplitude fatigue strength can be
TsK,s s 0,75 fW,"t . Rp , derived on the basis ofa damage-equivalent stress amplitude. Then the
TSK,t ~0,75 f"t' Rp' Kp,t, assessment ofthe variable amplitude fatigue strength turns out to be an
assessment ofthe fatigue limit being sufficient.

2.4 Component fatigue strength
2.4.3 Component variable amplitude fatigue strength
Shell-shaped (2D) components
The amplitudes of the component variable
fatigue strength (highest amplitude in stress
of shell-shaped (2D) components for normal
the directions x and y as well as for shear
Figure 2.4.2,
SBK,x = KBK,x . SAK,x, (2.4.43)
SBK,y = KBK,y . SAK,y ,
TBK,s = KBI<,s . TAK ,
KBI<,x" ... variable amplitude fatigue strength factor,
Chapter 2.4.3.1,
SAK,x, ... component fatigue limit, Chapter 2.4.2.
Except for GG, the following restrictions apply, Figure
2.4.3,
SBK,x s 0,75 Rp ,
SBK,y ::; 0,75 Rp ,
TBK,s ::; 0,75 fw,'t . Rp ,
Rp yield strength, Chapter 1.2.1.1,
fw.'t shear strength factor, Table 1.2.5.
2.4.3.1 Variable amplitude fatigue strength factor
The variable amplitude fatigue strength
KBK,zd , ... , are to be derived as follows *3:
Calculation for a constant amplitude spectrum
Component constant amplitude S-N curve model I:
horizontalfor N > ND,cr (steel and cast iron material)
Assessment ofthe fatigue strength for finite life:
KBK,zd = (N o.e / N) l/k cr forN ::; No,cr .
Assessment ofthe fatigue limit = endurance limit:
KBK,zd = 1 forN > No,cr.
Component constant amplitude S-N curve model II:
slopingfor N > ND,cr (non-welded aluminum alloys)
Assessment ofthe fatigue strength for finite life:
KBK,zd = (N O,cr / N) l/k cr for N'< No,cr.
KBK,zd = (N O,cr / N) l/kO,cr for No,cr<N s NO,cr,II ,
Assessment ofthe fatigue limit:
KBK,zd = 1 forN > No,cr.
Assessment ofthe endurance limit:
KBK,zd = f n,e forN > NO,cr,II. (2.4.52)
N number of cycles of the component constant
amplitude S-N curve, Chapter 2.4.3.2,
N required number of cycles,
No,cr number of cycles at knee point of the component
constant amplitude S-N curve, Chapter 2.4.3.2,
64
2 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using nominal stresses
ka slope of the component constant amplitude S-N
curve for N < No,cr , Chapter 2.4.3.2.
amplitude
NO,cr,II number of cycles at second knee point of the
spectrum)
component constant amplitude S-N curve,
stresses in
Chapter 2.4.3.2,
stress are,
ko,cr slope of the component constant amplitude S-N
curve for N > No,cr , Chapter 2.4.3.2,
f n.e factor by which the endurance limit is lower than
the fatigue limit, Chapter 2.4.3.2, Table 2.4.4.
Calculation for a variable amplitude spectrum
As a rule the variable amplitude fatigue strength factor
is to be computed by using the elementary version of
Miner's rule (not necessary for a constant amplitude
stress spectrum). Somewhat more favourable results,
however, may be obtained by using the consistent
(2.4.44) version of Miner's rule. Moreover, the classes of
utilization can be applied as a simplified method of
calculation; the so derived results approximately
correspond to those obtained by the elementary version
of Miner's rule. In an even more simplified manner the
variable amplitude fatigue strength can be derived on
the basis of a damage-equivalent stress amplitude.
Elementary version of Miner's rule based on the
factors damage potential
Using the elementary version of Miner's rule, Figure
2.4.4, the variable amplitude fatigue strength factor is to
*4
be computed directly as follows *5. The calculation
applies to both component constant amplitude S-Ncurve
model I and model II (2.4.53)
(2.4.47)
KBK,zd = [( 1 cr -I).D + 1] k~ . ( N~cr
(v zd)
k M
N
) :0 ,
where the damage potential is *6 *7
(2.4.48)
'"j h i (S
Vzd-_ k cr L.=-' --
a,zd,i )kcr , (2.4.54)
. i=l H l
Sa,zd,l
(2.4.49)
3 The following is written for axial stress, KBK.zd , k", ... , but applies to
(2.4.50) other types of stress accordingly.
4 For welded components only model I of the component constant
(2.4.51) amplitude SoN curve is of concern, not model II.
5 Direct calculation without iteration. The results obtained from the
elementary version of Miner's rule approach the results obtained from the
consistent version of Miner's rule on the safe side.
6 When computing the damage potential (and also in the following
equations) the values ni and N according to the required total number of
cycles can be replaced by the values hi and H according to the total
number of cycles in the given standard type spectrum, see Chapter 2.1.
7 Instead of Alcon after Eq. (2.4.58) is here
A
ele
= 11 (v zd)kcr (2.4.55)
 65
2.4 Component fatigue strength 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength
2.4.3 Component variable amplitude fatigue strength using nominal stresses

slope of the component constant amplitude S-N Calculation according to the consistent version of
curve for N < ND,cr , Chapter 2.4.3.2, Miner's rule *9 *10
DM critical damage sum, Table 2.4.3,
Using the consistent version of Miner's rule the variable
ND,cr number of cycles at knee point of the component
constant amplitude S-N curve, Chapter 2.4.3.2, amplitude fatigue strength factor is to be computes!
iteratively for differing values of Sa,zd,l , until a value N
H total number of cycles of the given spectrum,
equal to the required total number of cycles N is
H = H, = L hi (summed up for i = 1 toj), obtained. The respective value of Sa,zd,l is used to derive
h·1 related number of cycles in step i, the variable amplitude fatigue strength factor.
Hi = L hi (summed up for i = 1 to i) *8,
j total number of steps in the spectrum, Component constant amplitude S-N curve model I:
number of the step in the spectrum, horizontal/or N > ND,u (Steel and cast iron material)
Sa,zd,i stress amplitude in step i of the spectrum,
Sa,zd,l stress amplitude in step i = 1 of the spectrum. In case of a component constant amplitude S-N curve
model I ( horizontal for N > ND,cr or slope kD,o = (0) the
If for a component constant amplitude S-N curve model
number of cycles N to be computed for an value Sa,zd,l
I (horizontal for N > ND,cr ) a value KBK,zd < 1 is is (2.4.57)
obtained from Eq. (2.4.53), then the value to be used is
N = {[ Akon - 1 ] . DM + I}' SAK,zd
s )kcr
. ND,cr ,
KBK,zd = 1. (2.4.56)
[ a,zd,l
If for a component constant amplitude S-N curve model
where
II (sloping for N > ND,cr ) a value KBK,zd is obtained
from Eq. (2.4.53) that is smaller than the value obtained cr-1
from Eq. (2.4.50) or (2.4.52), then the higher value Ak -_ [ -
Sa,zd,l
-
)k .
[ZI
-+ L j Z2]
- (2.4.58)
on SAK,zd Nl v=m N2
from Eq. (2.4.50) or (2.4.52) is to be used.
kcr- 1 [S )k cr-1
Zl = ~AK'Zd _ Sa,zd,m , (2.4.59)
[ a,zd,l ) a.zd.l
sa
[~a,zd'v )k
cr-1 cr-1
(lg) Z2 = _ [S;,Zd,V+1 )k (2.4.60)
v,Sa.l
a,zd,l a,zd,l

Stress spectrum
m-1
Nl= L -.: ~ ~
h. [S cr
d.i )k (2.4.61)
i=l H Sa,zd,l

kcr
v h. S .
N2=L -.:. ~ (2.4.62)
2:U N (lg) i=l H [ Sa,zd,l )
Figure 2.4.4 Elementary version of Miner's rule, com- For the summation of the term Z2, Eq. (2.4.60), it is to
ponent constant amplitude S-N curve model I, DM = 1. be observed that Sa,zd,j+l = O.
Characteristics ofthe stress spectrum according toChapter 2.1,
component constant amplitude SoN curve according toChapter 2.4.3.2. N number of cycles of the component constant
amplitude S-N curve, Chapter 2.4.3.2,
ND,cr number of cycles at knee point of the component
constant amplitude S-N curve, Chapter 2.4.3.2,
Table 2.4.3 Critical damage sum DM , recommended DM critical damage sum, Table 2.4.3,
value. Sa,zd,i stress amplitude in step i of the spectrum,
Sa,zd,l stress amplitude in step i = 1 of the spectrum,
non-welded welded SAK,zd amplitude of the component fatigue limit,
components components ka slope of the component constant amplitude S-N
Steel, GS, 0,3 0,5 curve for N < ND,cr , Chapter 2.4.3.2,
Aluminum alloys j total number of steps in the spectrum,
GGG, GT, GG 1,0 1,0

9 The consistent version of Miner's rule allows for the fact, that the
component fatigue limit will decrease as the damage sum increases.
The decrease applies tocomponent constant amplitude S-N curves model
8 hi / H may be replaced by n, / N , I as well as tomodel II for ND,s ~ 106 .

N Required total number ofcycles according to the required fatigue life, 10 The consistent version ofMiner's rule was first developed by Haibach.
N = ~ ni (summed up for 1toj), A simplified version allowing for the decrease ofthe fatigue limit became
nj number ofcycles instep i according tothe required fatigue life. known as the modified version orthe Haibach method ofMiner's rule.

2.4 Component fatigue strength
2.4.3 Component variable amplitude fatigue strength
i number of the step in the spectrum,
m number i = m of the first step below SAK,zd,
H total number of cycles in the given spectrum,
H = Hj = L hi (summed up for I to j),
hi number of cycles in step i,
Hi = L hi (summed up for I to i) "8.
The computation is to be repeated iteratively for
differing values Sa,zd,1 > SAK,zd , until a..!alue N equal
to the required total number of cycles N is obtained.
From the respective value of Sa,zd,1 the variable
amplitude fatigue strength factor is obtained as
KBI<,zd = Sa,zd,1 / SAK,zd.
If a value KBK,zd < I is obtained from Eq. (2.4.63), then
the value to be applied is
KBK,zd = 1.
Component constant amplitude S-N curve model II:
slopingfor N > N D, 0' (non-welded aluminum alloys)
*11
In case of a component constant amplitude S-N curve
model II (sloping for N > ND,O' or slope kD,a < kD,a < (0)
the number of cycles N is first to be computed for a
. ' 1/3
smgle value Sa,zd,1 = SAK,zd / (fn,O' ) as follows
O welded components of austenitic steel or of aluminum
N={[A -1]'D +1}.[SAK'Zd)k
kon M S f )kal3
a.zd.l ( II a
with (2.4.65)
Akon after Eq. (2.4.58) to (2.4.62)
and the explanations as before,
fn,O' factor by which the endurance limit is lower
than the fatigue limit, Table 2.4.4.
If a value N = N* > N is obtained then the calcu-
lation of N, Eq. (2.4.65), is to be continued for
differing values Sa,zd,1 > SAK,zd / ( fn,O' )1/3 until a value
N equal to the required total number of cycles N is
obtained. From the respective value of Sa,zd,1 the
variable amplitude fatigue strength factor is obtained as
KBK,zd = Sa,zd,1 . (fn,O' )1/3 / SAK,zd (2.4.66)
If a value N = N* ~ N is obtained then the variable
amplitude fatigue strength factor is
If a value KBK,zd < fn,O' is obtained from Eq. (2.4.67)
then the value to be applied is
KBK,zd = fn,O' .
66
2 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using nominal stresses
Calculation using a class of utilization
The variable amplitude fatigue strength factor KBK,zd is
to be determined according to the appropriate class of
utilization "12 , Chapter 5.7.
Calculation using a damage-equivalent stress
amplitude
When using a damage-equivalent stress amplitude the
variable amplitude fatigue strength factor for both
constant amplitude S-N curves model I and model II is
KBK,zd = 1. (2.4.69)
(2.4.63)
2.4.3.2 Component constant amplitude S-N curve
Component constant amplitude S-N curves for non-
(2.4.64) welded components (without surface hardening) and for
welded components *13 are shown for normal stress and
for shear stress in Figure 2.4.5 and 2.4.6. The particular
number of cycles at the knee point ND,O' , ... and the
values of slope ka, ... are given in Table 2.4.4.
The component fatigue limit SAK,zd, ... is the reference
fatigue strength value for calculation. It follows from
Chapter 2.4.2. For S-N curves Model I the fatigue limit
SAK and the endurance limit SAK,n for N = 00 are
identical, while for S-N curves Model II (valid for non-
ND,a alloys) they are different by a factor fn,O' , Table 2.4.4
and Figure 2.4.5.
A lower boundary of the numbers of cycles is implicitly
defined by the maximum stress being limited according
to the static strength requirements, Chapter 1.
For surface hardened components "14 the slope of the
component constant amplitude S-N curves is more
shallow. Instead of the values of slope kO' = 5 and k, = 8
for not surface hardened components, Table 2.4.4, the
values that apply to surface hardened components are
ka = 15 and k, = 25 ,while the number of cycles at the
knee point ND,O' and ND,'t remain unchanged, see also
Chapter 5.8.
The component constant amplitude S-N curves for
welded components are valid for the toe section and for
the throat section.
(4.4.67)
II Simplified and approximate calculation.
12 Class of utilization as a characteristic of the stress spectrum. It is an
approximately dam~e equivalent combination of the required total
number of cycles N with the shape of a particular standard stress
(2.4.68) spectrum the frequency distribution of which is of binomial or exponential
type modified by a spectrum parameter p. It provides a result that
corresponds to a calculation based on the elementary version of Miner's
rule.
13 With reference to nW-Recommendations and Eurocode 3.
14 Not applicable to cold rolled or shot-peened components.
 67
2.4 Component fatigue strength 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength
2.4.3 Component variable amplitude fatigue strength using nominal stresses

Table 2.4.4 Number of cycles at the knee point, slope

of the component constant amplitude S-N curves, and
values of fu,o- and fu,t.
Normal stress Shear stress

Component IND,o- IND,o-,II Ik, IkD,o- fu,o- Component IND,t 1 ND,t,ll Ik, IkD;t fu,t
Steel and cast iron materials ( S-N curve model I ) Steel and cast iron materials (S-N curve model I)
6
non-welded 110 1- 15 1- 1,0 non-welded 110
6
1- 18 1- 1,0
welded 15 ' 106 1- 13 1- 1,0 welded 110
8
1- 15 1- 1,0
Aluminum alloys (S-N curve modell II Aluminum alloys (S-N curve model II \
non-welded 110 6 1108 15 115 0,74 non-welded 110
6
110
8
18 125 10,83
15' 10 1-
6
welded 13 1- 1,0 welded 110
8
1- 15 1- 11,0

Sa,zd
(lg) (Ig)

SAK,zdf--------~"-~----­ SAC
II
SAK.zd.IlI-----------t- ];~~~~",,""_ SAK.zd

Nc = NDo-=
6
2 '10 5 .'10 6
ails bildw. N (Ig) aila bIJdw12
N (lg)

T a •s Ta . s
(lg) (Ig)

I T
AC
TAK.s +-- -----..:c~~-----
II
TAK,s,II 1----------+--.::...'--;~--=~s.."8
TAK.s

Nc= ND'7 8
. 06 =10
aif. bildwl6 N (lg)
ails bildll'l5 N (lg)

Figure 2.4.5 Component constant amplitude S-N curve

for non-welded components *14 Figure 2.4.6 Component constant amplitude S-N curve
Top: Normal stress S. for welded components *13
Bottom: Shear stress T. Top: Normal stress S.
Steel and cast iron materials, except austenitic steel, (Model I): Bottom: Shear stress T.
horizontal for N > ND,cr, kD,cr = co
Steel, cast iron materials and aluminum alloys, welded (Model I):
or for N > ND,"t, k D,"t = co
Aluminum alloys and austenitic steel (Model II): horizontal for N > ND,cr, kD,cr = co
Sloping for N > ND cr, kD o» or for N>ND,"t, kD,"t=co
or for N > ND:"t, kD,~. NC is the referencenumber of cycles
correspondingto the characteristic strength values SAC and TAC.
horizontal for N > ND cr II, kD e II = co
or for N > ND:"t.it" ' kD:"t:II= co. SAK,zd/ SAC = (Nc / ND,cr) 11ko = 0,736 and
TAK,s / TAC = (Nc / ND,"t ) 11 kr = 0,457.
 68
2.5 Safety factors 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using nominal stresses

2.5 Safety factors *1 !R25 EN .docl 2.5.2 Cast iron materials

Contents Page 2.5.2.0 General
2.5.0 General 68 Ductile and non-ductile cast tron materials are to be
distinguished.
2.5.1 Steel
2.5.2 Cast iron materials
2.5.2.0 General 2.5.2.1 Ductile cast iron materials
2.5.2.1 Ductile cast iron materials Cast iron material with an elongation As :2: 12,5 % are
2.5.2.2 Non-ductile cast iron materials 69 considered as ductile cast iron materials, in particular
2.5.3 Wrought aluminum alloys all types of GS and some types of GGG. Values of
2.5.3.0 General elongation see Table 5.1.12.
2.5.3.1 Ductile wrought aluminum alloys Safety factors for ductile cast iron materials are given in
2.5.3.2 Non-ductile wrought aluminum alloys Table 2.5.2. Compared to Table 2.5.1 they are higher
2.5.4 Cast aluminum alloys because of an additional partial safety factor jF that
accounts for inevitable but allowable defects in castings
2.5.5 Total safety factor *4. The factor is different for severe or moderate
consequences of failure and moreover for castings that
have been subject to non-destructive testing or have not.
2.5.0 General
According to this chapter the safety factors are to be
determined. Table 2.5.2 Safety factors for ductile cast iron materials
GS; GGG) (A,:2: 12,5%\
The safety factors are valid under the condition that the Consequences of failure
JD
design loads are reliably determined on the safe side and
that the material properties correspond to an average
severe I moderatev!
probability of survival of Po = 97,5 % *2. castings not subject to non-destructive testing ~2
The safety factors apply both to non-welded and welded regular no 2,1 I 1,8
components. Inspection yes ~3 1,9 I 1,7
castings subject to non-destructive testing ~4

2.5.1 Steel
regular no 1,9 I 1,65
Inspection yes ~3 1,7 I 1,5
The basic safety factor concerning the fatigue strength ~1 See footnote ~1 of Table 2.5.1.
'IS
~2 Compared to Table 2.5.1 an additional partial safety factor
.in = 1,5. (2.5.1) jF = 1,4 is introduced to account for inevitable but allowable defects
in castings.
This value may be reduced under favorable conditions,
~3 Regular inspection in the sense of damage monitoring. Reduction
that is depending on the possibilities of inspection and by about 10 %.
on the consequences of failure, Table 2.5.1.
~4 Compared to Table 2.5.1 an additional partial safety factor
jF = 1,25 is introduced, for which it is assumed that a higher quality
of the castings is obviously guaranteed when testing.
Table 2.5.1 Safety factors for steel *3 (not for GS) and
for ductile wrought aluminum alloys (A:2: 12,5 %).
jD Consequences of failure
severe moderate ~1
regular no 1,5 1,3
yes~2 2 Statistical confidenceS ; 50 %.
inspections 1,35 1,2
3 Steel is always considered as a ductile material.
~1 Moderate consequences of failure of a less important component
in the sense of "non catastrophic" effects of a failure; for example
4 In mechanical engineering cast. components are of standard quality
because of a load redistribution towards other members of a statical
for which a further reduction of the partial safety factor to jF = 1,0
indeterminate system. Reduction by about 15 %.
does not seem possible up to now.
~2 Regular inspection in the sense of damage monitoring. Reduction
A safety factor jF = 1,0 may be applied to high quality cast
by about 10 %.
components in the aircraft industry however. Those high quality cast
components have to meet special demands on qualification and
checks of the production process, as well as on the extent of quality
and product testing in order to guarantee little scatter of their
1 Chapters 2.5 and 4.5 are identical. mechanical properties.
 69
2.5 Safety factors 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using nominal stresses

2.5.2.2 Non-ductile cast iron materials
Cast iron materials with an elongation AS < 12,5 %
(for GT A3 < 12,5 %) are considered as non-ductile
materials, in particular some types of GGG as well as
all types of GT and GG. Values of elongation for GGG
and GT see Table 5.1.12 or 5.1.13. The value for GG
is AS = O.
For non-ductile cast iron materials the safety factors
from Table 2.5.2 are to be increased by adding a value
Llj, Figure 2.5.1 *s:
Llj = 0,5 -JAs /50%,
AS Elongation, to be replaced by A3 for GT.
2.5.3.2 Non-ductile wrought aluminum alloy
Wrought aluminum alloys with an elongation
A < 12,5 % are considered as non-ductile materials.
Values of elongation see Table 5.1.22 to 5.1.30.
For non-ductile wrought aluminum alloys all safety
factors from Table 2.5.1 are to be increased by adding a
value Llj , Eq. (2.5.2).
2.5.4 Cast aluminum alloys
(2.5.2) Cast aluminum alloys are always considered as non-
ductile materials. All safety factors from Table 2.5.2
are to be increased by adding a value Llj , Eq. (2.5.2).
Values of elongation see Table 5.1. 31 to 5.1. 38.

GG
0,5 2.5.5 Total safety factor
Llj
Similar to an assessment of the component static
strength, Chapter 1.5.5, a "total safety factor" jges is
to be derived:
o 1U 12,5 20
As ,A3 in % jges = i D
T,D
, (2.5.4)

Figure 2.5.1 Value Llj to be added to the safety Jn safety factor, Table 2.5.1 or 2.5.2,
factor In , defined as a function of the elongation As or Kt,D temperature factor, Chapter 2.2.3.
A3 , respectively.

2.5.3 Wrought aluminum alloys

2.5.3.0 (;eneral
Ductile and non-ductile wrought aluminum alloys are to
be distinguished.

2.5.3.1 Ductile wrought aluminum alloys

Wrought aluminum alloys with an elongation
A"C. 12,5 % are considered as ductile materials. Values
of elongation see Table 5.1.22 to 5.1.30.
Safety factors for ductile wrought aluminum alloys are
the same as for steel according to Table 2.5.1.

S For example the safety factor for GG is at least

in = I,S + O,S = 2,0 (2.S.3)
Gn = 1,5 from Table 2.5.2, j = O,S after Eq. (2.S.2) for AS = 0).

2.6 Assessment
2.6 Assessment 1R26
Contents
2.6.0 General
2.6.1 Rod-shaped (lD) components
2.6.1.1 Individual types of stress
2.6.1.2 Combined types of stress
2.6.2 Shell-shaped (2D) components
2.6.2.1 Individual types of stress
2.6.2.2 Combined types of stress
2.6.0 General
According to this chapter the assessment of the fatigue
strength using nominal stresses is to be carried out.
In general the assessments for the individual types of
stress and for the combined types of stress are to be
carried out separately *1.
The procedure of assessment applies to both non-welded
and welded components.
For welded components assessments are generally to be
carried out separately for the toe section and for the
throat section. They are to be carried out in the same
way, but using the respective cross-section values,
nominal stresses and fatigue classes FAT as these are in
general different for the toe and throat section.
Degree of utilization
The assessment is to be carried out by determining the
degree of utilization of the component fatigue strength.
In the general context of the present Chapter the degree
of utilization is the quotient of the (nominal)
characteristic stress amplitude Sa,zd,l , ..., divided by the
allowable (nominal) stress amplitude of the component
fatigue strength at the reference point *2. The allowable
stress amplitude is the quotient of the component
variable amplitude fatigue strength after Chapter 2.4.3,
SBI<,zd, ... , divided by the total safety factor jges . The
degree of utilization is always a positive value *3.
1 It is essential to examine the degree of utilization not only of the
combined types ofstress but also that ofthe individual types ofstress in
general, and inparticular ifthese may occur separately.
2 The reference point is the critical point ofthe considered cross-section
that observes the highest degree ofutilization.
3 As the degree of utilization is the quotient of two amplitude which
always are positive.
70
2 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using nominal stresses
EN.dog An assessment of the variable amplitude fatigue
strength and an assessment of the fatigue limit or of the
Page endurance limit are to be distinguished. In each case the
70 calculation is the same when using the appropriate
variable amplitude fatigue strength factor KBK,zd , ... ,
71 Chapter 2.4.3, and when taking
Sa,zd, I = Sa,zd , ... , (2.6.1)
in case of a constant amplitude spectrum, or
Sa,zd,l ~ Sa,zd,eff and N = ND,cr (2.6.2)
72
in case of a damage-equivalent stress amplitude.
Sa,zd, ... , constant stress amplitude for which the
required number of cycles is N,
Sa,zd,eff, ... , damage-equivalent stress amplitude,
ND,cr number of cycles at knee point of the
component constant amplitude S-N
curve, Chapter 2.4.3.2.
Superposition
For proportional or synchronous stress components of
same type of stress the superposition is to be carried out
according to Chapter 2.1.
If different types of stress like axial stress,· bending
stress, ... *4 act simultaneously and if the resulting stress
is multiaxial, Chapter 0.3.5 and Figure 0.0.9, both the
individual types of stress and the combined types of
stress are to be considered as described below *5.
Kinds of component
Rod-shaped (lD) and shell-shaped (2D) components are
to be distinguished. They can be both non-welded or
welded.
4 Bending stresses intwo planes, Sa,b,y and Sa,b,z ' are different types of
stress, also shear stresses in two planes, T a,s,y and T a.s.z .
5 Proportional, synchronous and non-proportional multiaxial stresses are
tobe distinguished. , Chapter 0.3.5.
Only under special conditions ofproportional stresses the character ofEq.
(2.6.4) and (2.6.12) is that of a strength hypothesis from a material-
mechanics point ofview. For example the extreme stresses from bending
and shear will . as a rule - occur atdifferent points ofthe cross-section, so
that different reference points W are to be considered. As a rule bending
will be more important. More general Eq. (2.6.4) and (2.6.12) have the
character of an empirical interaction formula. They are applicable for
proportional stresses and approximately applicable for synchronous
stresses; an improved procedure for non-welded components is given in
Chapter 5.9. For non-proportional stresses they are not suitable; an
approximate procedure applicable for non-proportional stresses is
proposed in Chapter 5.10.
 71
2.6 Assessment 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using nominal stresses

2.6.1 Rod-shaped (ID) components Table 2.6.1 Values of q as dependent on f W •t ~1

2.6.1.1 Individual types of stress Steel. GGG GT, GG
wrought cast
The degrees of utilization of rod-shaped (lD)
AI alloys AI alloys
components for variable amplitude types of stress like
fWt 0.577 0.65 0,75 0,85
axial, bending. shear and torsional stress are
Q 0 0,264 0,544 0,759
Sa,zd,l ~1 Exceptions: For non-ductile wrought aluminum alloys (elongation
aSK,zd :5: 1, (2.6.3)
A < 12,5 %) q = 0,5 , for surface hardened or welded components
SBK,Zd / jerf
q = 1.
Sa,b,l
aSK,b :5: 1,
SBK,b / i,
Rules of signs: If the individual types of stress (axial
T a.s, 1 and bending, or shear and torsion, respectively) always
aSK,s :5: 1, act proportional or synchronous in phase the degrees of
TBK,s / jerf utilization aSK,zd and aSK,b and/or aSK,s and aSK,t are to
Ta,!,l be inserted in Eq. (2.6.6) with the same (positive) signs
aSK.t = :5: 1. *7. If they act always proportional or synchronous 1800
TBK,t / jerf out of phase, however. the above degrees of utilization
Sa,zd,1 • ...• characteristic stress amplitude (largest stress are to be inserted in Eq. (2.6.6) with oposite signs *8 *9.
amplitude in the spectrum) according to If the individual types of stresses act non-proportional,
type of stress. Chapter 2.1.1.1 and that is neither proportional nor synchronous, the Eq.
Eq. (2.6.1) or (2.6.2), (2.6.4) to (2.6.6) are not applicable and the procedure
SSK,zd •... , related amplitude of the component proposed in Chapter 5.10 is to be applied instead.
variable amplitude fatigue strength,
Chapter 2.4.3.
jges total safety factor, Chapter 2.5.5. 2.6.2 Shell-shaped (2D) components
2.6.2.1 Individual types of stress

2.6.1.2 Combined types of stress The degrees of utilization of shell-shaped (2D)

components for variable amplitude types of stress like
The degree of utilization of rod-shaped (lD) normal stresses in the directions x and y as well as shear
components for combined types of stress is *6 are
aSK,Sv = q' aNH + (1 - q) . <lGH:5: 1. (2.6.4)
asK,x =
s., :5: 1, (2.6.8)
where SBK,X / jerf
aNH=1-(lsal+~s; +4.t;), (2.6.5)
aSK,y =
Sa,y,l
:5: 1.
SBK,y / jerf
<lGH=JS~+t~ ,
Ta,l
Sa = aSK,zd + aSK,b , (2.6.6) aSK,s :5: 1.
T BK / jerf
ta = aSK,s + aSK,t •
aSK,zd,'" degrees of utilization after Eq. (2.6.3).
6 Eq. (2.6.4) or (2.6.12) isa combination ofthe normal stress criterion
For non-ductile wrought aluminum alloys (elongation (NH) and the v. Mises criterion (GH). Depending on the ductility ofthe
A < 12.5 %) q = 0,5 is to be applied. For surface material the combination is controlled by a parameter q as a function of
hardened or for welded components q = 1 is to be tW,t according toEq. (2.6.7) and Table 2.6.1. For instance q = 0 for steel
applied. Otherwise there is, Table 2.6.1. so that only the v. Mises criterion isofeffect, while q = 0,264 for GGG so
that both the normal stress criterion and the v. Mises criterion are of
./3 -(l/fw.'t) partial influence.
(2.6.7) 7 For example a tensile axial stress and a tensile bending stress acting at
q ./3-1 the reference point that both result from the sam single external load
affecting the component.
fw,'t shear fatigue strength factor, Table 2.2.1 or 2.6.1. 8For example an tensile axial stress and a compressive bending stress
acting atthe reference point that both result from the sam single external
load affecting the component.
9 Stress components acting opposingly may cancel each other inpart or
completely.
 72
2.6 Assessment 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using nominal stresses

Sa,x,1 , ..., characteristic stress amplitude (largest stress

amplitude in the spectrum) according to
type of stress, Chapter 2.1.1.2 and Eq. (2.6.1)
or (2.6.2),
SB!(,x, ..., related amplitude of the component variable
amplitude fatigue strength, Chapter2.4.3,
jges total safety factor, Chapter 2.5.5.

2.6.1.2 Combined types of stress

The degree of utilization of shell-shaped (2D)
components for combined types of stresses is *7
aBK,Sv = q . aNH + (1 - q) . 1lGH:::; 1, (2.6.9)
where (2.6.10)

aNH =~{Isa,x +sa,yl+~~a,x -Sa,y)2 +4.t; ),

2 2 2
J
1lGH = sa,x + sa,y - sa,x . sa,y + t a '

sa,x = aBK,x , (2.6.11)

Sa,y = aBK,y ,
t a = aBK,s,
aBK,x ... degrees of utilization after Eq. (2.6.8).

For non-ductile wrought aluminum alloys (elongation

A < 12,5 %) q = 0,5 is to be applied. For surface
hardened or for welded components q = 1 is to be
applied. Otherwise there is, Table 2.6.1,

q
13 -(lIfw,'t) (2.6.12)
13-1
fw,'t shear fatigue strength factor, Table 2.2.1 or 2.6.1.

Rules of signs: If the normal stresses Sx and Sy always

act proportional or synchronous in phase the degrees of
utilization aBK,x and aBK,y are to be inserted in Eq.
(2.6.11) with the same (positive) signs *10. If they act
always proportional or synchronous 1800 out of phase,
however, the degrees of utilization aBK,x and aBK,y are
to be inserted in Eq. (2.6.11) with oposite signs *11.
If the individual types of stress act non-proportional,
that is neither proportional nor synchronous, the Eq.
(2.6.9) to (2.6.11) are not applicable and the procedure
proposed in Chapter 5.10 is to be applied instead.

10 For example a tensile stress in direction x and a tensile stress in

directions y that both result from the same external load affecting the
component.

11 For example a tensile stress indirection x and a compressive stress in

directions y that both result from the same external load affecting the
component.
 73
3.1 Characteristic stresses 3 Assessment of the static strength
using local stresses

maximum and mirumum stresses can be positive or

3 Assessment of the static negative. It is assumed, that all stresses reach their
strength using local stresses extreme values simultaneously.
IU-1---=EN-'-.-'-do-'q
r-I

3.0 General Elevated temperature

According to this chapter the assessment of the static
strength using local stresses is to be carried out *1.
It should be observed that not necessarily the component
static strength is determined by a local failure occurring
at a notch. Likewise a global failure occurring ata
different, unnotched or moderately notched section of
the component may be determining, Figure 3.0.1.
...-.;.. _._.
F short duration only, while for the rest of time the stress
Figure 3.0.1 Different locations for a static failure
occurring as a local failure (A) or as a global failure (B).
3.1 Characteristic stress values
Contents Page
3.1.0 General 73
3.1.1 Characteristic stress values
3.1.1.0 General
3.1.1.1 Rod-shaped (ID) components
3.1.1.2 Shell-shaped (2D) components 74
3.1.1.3 Block-shaped (3D) components 75
3.1.0 General
According to this chapter the characteristic service
stress values are to be determined as elastic stresses.
Relevant are the extreme maximum and minimum
stresses O"max,ex and O"min,ex , ... of the individual stress
components expected for the most unfavourable
operating conditions and for special loads according to
specification or due to physical limits *2. Both the
1 The assessment of the static strength with local stresses based on
Neuber's rule and the plastic. limit load, Chapter 3.3, is an approximation
that has to be regarded as provisional and therefore it should be applied
with caution. Also the assessment of the static strength for welded
components using structural stresses has to be regarded as provisional and
therefore it is to be applied with caution, as well.
2 In general the values Gmax,ex and Gmin,ex for the assessment of the
static strength are the extreme values of a stress history. For the
In case of elevated temperature the values O"max,ex ,
and O"min,ex , . . . are relevant for a short-term loading
(related to the high temperature strength or high
temperature yield strength).
For a long-term loading (related to the creep strength or
1% creep limit) correct results will only be obtained in
case of a constant (static) tensile stress O"max,ex equally
distributed over the section of concern.
In all other cases of constant or variable loading the
assessment will be more or less on the safe side if the
values O"max,ex , . . . and O"min,ex , ... refer to a stress
distribution with a stress gradient, and/or if they refer to
the peak values of a variable stress history, which are of
is lower.
If in those cases it becomes necessary to make best use
of the long-term load bearing capacity of the component
(because otherwise the assessment cannot be achieved)
an expert stress analysis is recommended to define the
appropriate stress value to be used for the assessment.
Such an analysis is beyond the scope of the present
guideline, however.
Superposition
If several stress components act simultaneously at the
reference point, they are to be overlaid. For same type of
stress (for example normal stress and normal stress,
O"max,ex,1 , O"max,ex,2, ... ) the superposition is to be carried
out at this stage, so that in the following a single stress
value (O"max,ex, ... ) exists for every type of stress *3. For
different types of stress (for example normal stress and
shear stress, or normal stress in direction x and normal
assessment of the fatigue strength a stress spectrum is to be derived from
that history consisting of stress cycles of the amplitudes Ga,i and the mean
values Grn,i' Chapter 2. I.
The largest amplitude of this stress spectrum is Ga,1 ' and the related
mean value is Grn,1 . The related maximum and minimum values are
Gmax,1 = Grn,1 + Ga,1 and Gmin,1 = Grn,1 - Ga,1 . The values Gmax,e.x
and Gmin,ex may be different from the .values Gmax,1 .and Gmin, 1 . This
is because extreme, very seldom occunng events are Important only for
the assessment of the static strength, but hardly for the assessment of the
fatigue strength. In a stress spectrum which is supposed to apply for
normal service conditions they do not have to be considered therefore.
3 Stress components having different sign may cancel out each other in
part or completely.
 74
3.1 Characteristic stresses 3 Assessment of the static strength
using local stresses

stress in direction y) the superposition is to be carried

out at the assessment stage, Chapter 3.6.
Stress components acting opposed to each other, and /
t~··
which do not always occur simultaneously, are not to be
overlaid however.
/-

3.1.1 Characteristic stress values

3.1.1.0 General
Rod-shaped (lD), shell-shaped (2D) and block-shaped
(3D) as well as non-welded and welded components are
to be distinguished.
For welded components the local stresses are _to be
'determined as structural stresses. An assessment of the
'stailc-stiength'- ()fwelcleclcomponents using effective
notch stresses is not possible up to now *4.
When using local stresses it is not necessary that a well
defined cross-section does exist. Hence it cannot be
presupposed that nominal stresses can be determined as
well.
Left: Butt weld. Right: Fillet weld. The structural stress is to be computed
with the throat thickness a.
Rod-shaped (ID) welded components
For rod-shaped (I D) welded components the local
stresses (structural stresses only) are generally to be
determined for the weld toe and for the root of the weld
separately *7.
For the weld toe the local stresses are to be computed as
for non-welded components, Eq. (3.1.1)..

3.1.1.1 Rod-shaped (ID) components For the root of the weld equivalent structural stresses
have to be computed from the structural stresses
Rod-shapedHD) non-welded components resulting from the normal and shear loadings, Figure
For rod-shaped (ID) non-welded components a normal 3.1.1, *8
stress O'zd = 0' and a shear stress ". =" are to be
considered *5. The extreme maximum and minimum (3.1.2)
stresses are
O'.L normal stress normal to the weld seam *9,
O'max,ex , "max,ex , (3.1.1) ".l shear stress normal to the weld seam,
O'min,ex , "min,ex . "II shear stress parallel to the weld seam.
Stresses of different sign (O'max,ex positive, O'min,ex "wv in analogy.
negative for instance) are generally to be considered
separately *6. For shear and for torsion the highest The extreme maximum and muumum values of the
absolute value is relevant. equivalent nominal stresses are
O'max,ex,wv and O'min,ex,wv, .... (3.1.3)

Stresses of different sign (O'max,ex,wv positive, O'min,ex,wv

negative for instance) are generally to be considered
separately. For shear and for torsion the highest absolute
value is relevant.

4 See Figure 0.0.6 and 0.0.7 for definition of structural stresses and of
effective notch stresses. For effective notch stresses the assessment
procedure has not been developed up to now.
5 For rod-shaped (ID) components the different types of stress (axial,
bending, shear and/or torsion) may also occur independent of each other.
This case is not considered in the following, however, as it is supposed
that (J will contain all normal stresses and t will contain all shear stresses.
6 Particularly in the case of cast iron materials with different tension and
compression strength values, and moreover because of the non-linear-
elastic stress-strain characteristic of grey cast iron.
7 For welded components in general an assessment of the static strength
is to be carried out for the toe section and for the throat section, because
the cross-sectional areas may be different and because the strength
behavior is evaluated in a different way. The assessment for the toe
section is to be carried out as for non-welded components. The assessment
for the throat section is to be carried out with the equivalent structural
stress (Jwv.
8 According to DIN 18 800 part 1, page 36. The structural stress (JII
(normal stress parallel to the orientation ofthe weld) is to be neglected.
9 Normally (Jwv will result mainly from (J.l. 'twv in analogy.
 75
3.1 Characteristic stresses 3 Assessment of the static strength
using local stresses

3.1.1.2 Shell-shaped (2D) components <J1,max,ex, <JZ,max,ex , <J3,max,ex , (3.1.6)

The calculation for shell-shaped (2D) components can
be applied also for block-shaped (3D) components, if the
stresses O"x, O"y, 't at the surface are of interest only,
otherwise Chapter 3.1.1.3 applies.
<J1,min,ex, <JZ,min,ex , <J3,min,ex .
Note: Independent of the value of the stresses the
directions of the stresses <J1 and <Jz are parallel to the
free surface, and direction 3 points normally to the
surface into the interior of the component.

Shell-shaped (2D) non-welded components Tension stresses (positive) or compression stresses

For shell-shaped (2D) non-welded components normal
stresses in the x- and y-directions O"zd,x = o, and O"zd,y= O"y
as well as a shear stress "ts = r are to be considered. The
extreme maximum and minimum stresses are
O"rnax.ex.x , O"rnax.ex.y , "trnax.ex , (3.1.4)
O"rnin,ex.x , O"rnin,ex.y , 'trnin,ex .
Tension stresses (positive) or compression stresses
(negative) are generally to be considered separately *10 .
For shear the highest absolute value is relevant.
(negative) are generally to be considered separately *11.
Block-shaped (3D) welded components
For certain applications block-shaped (3D) components
may be welded at the surface, for example by surfacing
welds. Then the calculation is to be carried out as for
shell-shaped (2D) welded components, if the stresses at
the surface, <JX' <Jy and 't, are of interest only.

Shell-shaped (2D) welded components

For shell-shaped (2D) welded components, Figure 0.0.6,
the local stresses (structural stresses only) are in general
to be determined separately for the weld toe and for the
root of the weld *7.
For the weld toe the local stresses are to be computed as
for non-welded components, Eq. (3.1.4).
For the root of the weld an equivalent structural stresses,
O"wv,x , has to be computed from the structural stresses
resulting from the loading in x-direction, Eq. (3.1.2)
and Figure 3.1.1. Stresses O"wv,y and"twv in analogy. The
extreme maximum and minimum values of the
equivalent stresses are
O"max,ex,wv,x and O"min,ex,wv,y, ... (3.1.5)
Stresses of different sign (<Jmax,ex,wv,x positive,
<Jmin,ex,wv,x negative for instance) are generally to be
considered separately. Tension and compression are
generally to be considered separately. For shear the
highest absolute value is relevant.

3.1.1.3 Block-shaped (3D) components

Block-shaped (3D) non-welded components
For block-shaped (3D) non-welded components the
principal stresses <J1,zd = <J1 , <JZ,zd = <Jz and <J3,zd = <J3
are to be considered. The extreme maximum and
minimum stresses are

10 See footnote *6. And moreover because the second normal stress 0y 11 See footnote *6. An moreover because the second and/or third
may reduce the degree ofutilization. principle stress 0zand 03 may reduce the degree ofutilization.
3.2 Material properties 3 Assessment of the static strength
76
using nominal stresses

3.2 Material properties 1R32 EN.dog

Contents Page
3.2.0 General 76
3.2.1 Component values according to standards 77
3.2.1.0 General
3.2.1.1 Component values according to standards
of semi-finished products or test pieces
3.2.1.2 Component values according to
the drawing
3.2.1.3 Special case of actual component values
3.2.2 Technological size factor 78
3.2.2.0 General
3.2.2.1 Dependence on the effective diameter Rm,N
3.2.2.2 Effective diameter
3.2.3 Anisotropy factor 80
Values
3.2.4 Compression strength factor and according
to standards
shear strength factor Component
3.2.4.0 General values -

3.2.4.1 Compression strength factor de ff .N -deff

(Jg)
3.2.4.2 Shear strength factor 81
3.2.5 Temperature factors Figure 3.2.1 Values according to standards and com-
3.2.5.0 General ponent values according to standards, Rm and Rp, or
3.2.5.1 ~ormal temperature values specified by drawings, Rm,z and Rp,Z .
3.2.5.2 Low temperature Top: All kinds of material except GG, Rm ::: Rm.N, R" ::: R",N
3.2.5.3 Elevated temperature Semi-logarithmic decrease of the mechanical material properties with the
effective diameter d.n- .

3.2.0 General Bottom: GG, Rm ::: or ~ Rm.N . Double-logarithmic decrease of the

According to this chapter the mechanical material
properties like tensile strength R.n, yield strength R, and
further characteristics for non-welded and welded'
components are to be determined.
All mechanical material properties are those of the
material test specimen. Values according to standards,
component values and component values according to
standards are to be distinguished, Figure 3.2.1.
mechanical material properties with the effective diameter dell'.
Specified values according to drawings Rm.z and R",z.
Values according to standards
The values according to standards (R.n,N , Rm , Rp,N , Rp)
correspond to an average probability of survival
Po = 97,5 % and depend on the effective diameter deff
and on the technological size factor.

Material test specimen Component values

In the context of this guideline the material test The component values CRm , R.n.z , R, , Rp,z ) are valid
specimen is an unnotched polished round specimen of for the effective diameter deff of the component, they
do = 7,5 mm diameter *1. may correspond to different probabilities of survival Po,
however.

Special case of actual component values

1 This definition is the basis of the present calculation, although
specimens for tensile tests may usually have diameters different from
7,5 mm.
If specific values for a component (R.n,r , Rp,r) have been
determined experimentally, they normally apply to a
probability of survival Po = 50 % , and therefore they
are valid only for the particular component, but not for
the entirety of all those components. They may be used,
for instance, for a subsequent assessment of the strength
3.2 Material properties
of the particular component in case of a service failure,
if for that purpose all safety factors are set to 1,00 in
addition.
Component values according to standards
The component values according to standards <Rm , Rp)
apply to an average probability of survival PD = 97,5 %
and are valid for the effective diameter, c1eff, of the
component. Their application is not limited to a
particular component, and therefore they may be used
for an assessment of strength, valid for the entirety of
all those components.
To determine the tensile strength Rm and the yield
strength R, *2 the technological size factor, the
anisotropy factor and the temperature factors are to be
considered in general. Furthermore compression
strength and shear strength values are to be considered.
3.2.1 Component values according to
standards
3.2.1.0 General
The component values according to standards,
R, , are to be determined from the values of semi-
finished products or of test pieces defined by standards,
Rm.N and Rp,N , or from the component value specified in
the drawing, Rm,z . As a special case the experimentally
determined actual component values, Rm.r and Rp,r , can
be applied.
For GG the yield strength is not defined and Eq. (3.2.1)
is not applicable.
3.2.1.1 Component values according to standards of
semi-finished products or of test pieces
The component values according to standards of the
tensile strength, Rm , and of the yield strength, Rp, are
Rm = Kd,m . KA ' Rm.N,
R, = K<J,p . KA ' Rp.N,
K<J,m, K<J,p technological size factors, Chapter 3.2.2,
KA anisotropy factor, Chapter 3.2.3,
Rm.N, Rp.N values of the semi-finished product or
of a test piece according to standards,
Chapter 5.1 .
In the case of steel or wrought aluminum alloys the
tensile strength, Rm.N , is the guaranteed minimum value
specified for the smallest size of the semi-finished
2 The term yield strength is used as a generalized tenn for the yield
stress (of milled or forged steel as well as cast steel) and for the 0.2
proof stress (of nodular cast iron or malleable cast iron as well as
aluminum alloys).
3 Assessment of the static strength
77
using nominal stresses
product *3 , in the case of cast iron or cast aluminum it
is the value from the test piece according to the material
standard.
The yield strength, Rp,N , is the guaranteed minimum
value specified for the smallest size of the semi-finished
product *3 or for the test piece defined by the material
standard *4.
Moreover there are to be considered: for compressive
stresses the compression strength factor fa , Chapter
3.2.4, for shear stresses the shear strength factor f, ,
Chapter 3.2.4, and for elevated temperature the
temperature factors Kt,m , ..., Chapter 3.2.5.
3.2.1.2 Component values according to the drawing
The component value of the tensile strength, Rm, is
Rm = 0,94 . Rm.z. (3.2.2)
The component value according to the drawing Rm,z is
the tensile· strength of the material specified on the
drawing. As the value Rm.z is normally verified by
random inspection of small samples only *5, it is
assumed to have a probability of survival less than
PD= 97,5 % . Eq. (1.2.2) converts the value Rm•z to a
Rm and component value Rm that is expected to conform with
the probability of survival of Pr, = 97,5 %.
The yield strength R, corresponding to the tensile
strength Rm is *6 .
R, = Kd,p . Rp,N . Rm, (3.2.3)
Kd,m Rm,N
technological size factors, Chapter 3.2.2,
values of the semi-finished product or
of a test pieces defined by standards,
Chapter 5.1 .
(3.2.1)
3 If different dimensions of that semi-finished product are given by
the standard.
4 A probability of survival Pii = 97,5 % is assumed for the component
properties according to standards Rm,N , Rp,N . This probability of
survival should also apply to the values Rm ' Rp is calculated therefrom.
5 The value R m Z is checked by three hardness measurements
(n=3) for exampl~, where every test has to reach or to exceed the
required value. The probability of survival of the lowest of n = 3 tests
may be estimated to 75 % (= I - I/(n+ 1) = 1 - 1/(3+1) = 0,75), and
may be assigned to R m Z . With a likely coefficient of variation of
4% the conversion to P; = 97,5 % follows from Eq. (3.2.2).
6 A conversion proportional to R p N f R m N would not be correct
since the technological size effect is more pronounced for the yield
strength than for the tensile strength.
3.2 Material properties 3 Assessment of the static strength
78
using nominal stresses

3.2.1.3 Special case of actual component values
If only an experimental value of the tensile strength Rm,I
is known the value of the yield strength Rp,I may be
computed from Eq. (3.2.3) with Rm = Rm,I.
For milled steel there is deff,max,m = deff,max,p = 250 mm.
For all other kinds of material there are no upper limit
values deff,max, ... ,
deft:max.m = deft:max.p = 00 , (3.2.11)
unless otherwise specified in the material standards.

3.2.2 Technological size factor Aluminum alloys

3.2.2.0 General For wrought aluminum alloys the component values of
The technological size factor accounts for a decrease of the tensile strength, Rm , and of the yield strength, Rp,
the material strength values usually observed with are given in Chapter 5 according to the type of material
increasing dimensions of the component. It is specified and its condition, and depending on the thickness or
as a function of the effective diameter, Figure 3.2.1. It diameter of the semi-finished product. To these values
is different for non-welded and for welded components the technological size factors Kj., = :KI.p = 1 apply.
*7 For cast aluminum alloys the technological size factors
for the tensile strength and for the yield strength are as
3.2.2.1 Dependence on the effective diameter follows: For deft':::; deft:N,m = deft:N,p = 12 mm
Non-welded components :KI.m = :KI.p = 1, (3.2.12)
Steel and cast iron materials for 12 mm < deft' < deft:max.m = deft:max.p = 150 mm
For GG the following technological size factor applies v.
.J..~m
= v.
.J..~p
= 1, 1 . (d
Ueff /7 , 5 mm) -0,2 , (3.2.13)
to the tensile strength: For deff :s; 7,5 mm
for deft'~ deft:max.m = deft:max.p = 150 mm
Kd,m = 1,207, (3.2.4)
:KI.m = :KI.p = 0,6 . (3.2.14)
for deff > 7,5 mm *8
Kd,m = 1,207' (deff/7,5 mm)-0,1922. (3.2.5) Welded components *10

For stainless steel within the dimensions given in For all kinds of material the technological size factor for
material standards there is the toe section and for the throat section of welded
components is *11
Kd,m = Kct,p =1. (3.2.7)
KcI,m = Kct,p = 1. (3.2.15)
For all other kinds of steel and cast iron materials the
technological size factor is: For deff s deff,N,m For materials such as conditionally weldable steel,
stainless steel or weldable cast iron the subsequent
KcI,m = Kd,p =1, (3.2.8) . calculation is provisional and therefore it is to be
for deff,N,m < deff :s; deff,max,m *9: (3.2.9) applied with caution.

1-0, 7686·ad,m ·lg(deff /7,5mm)

KcI,m , 3.2.2.2 Effective diameter
1-0, 7686·ad,m .lg(deff,N,m /7,5mm)
For components with a simple shape of the cross section
for deff ~ deff,max,m it is: - as far as a cross section may be defined - the effective
~m = ~m (deff,max,m). (3.2.10) diameter is given according to the cross section in Table
3.2.3.
deff effective diameter, Chapter 3.2.2.2 ,
deff,N,m, ad,m constants, Table 3.2.1 and 3.2.2. In general the upper limit of the effective diameter is
specified in the material standards.
Considering the yield strength the values Kct,m , deff,N,m ,
and act,m have to be replaced by the values ~p , deff,N,p , For the determination of the effective diameter deff two
and ad,p (except for GG). cases are to be distinguished as to the kind of material.

Table 3.2.1 Constants deff,N,m, ... , and adm, ... , for

steel

7 The influence factors according toChapter 3.2.3 (KA), Chapter 3.2.4

(fer, f't) and Chapter 3.2.5 (KT m- ...) are supposed tobe valid for both
non-welded and welded compon~nts.
10 Valid for steel, cast iron material and aluminum alloys.
8 Footnote an Eq. (3.2.6) cancelled. 11 For structural steel and fine grain structural steel according to
9 0,7686 = 1 fig 20. DIN 18800, part 1, page 40.
3.2 Material properties 3 Assessment of the static strength
79
using nominal stresses

Table 3.2.1 Constants deff,N,m, ... , and adm' ... , for Table3.2.2 Constants cleff,N,m , ..., and adm, ... , for
steel cast iron materials
Values inthe upper row refer tothe tensile strength R m , Values inthe upper row refer tothe tensile strength Rm ,
Values inthe lower row refer to the yield strength Rp . Values inthe lower row refer to the yield strength Rp .

Kinds of material -¢o1 cleff,N,m ad,m Kinds of material deff,N,m ~,m

cleff,N,p ad,p cleff,N,p ~,p

inmm -¢o2 inmm

Non-alloyed structural steel 40 0,15 Cast steel 100 0,15
DIN-EN 10 025 40 0,3 DIN 1681 100 0,3
Fine grain structural steel 70 0,2 Heat treatable steel casting, 300 -¢o1 0,15
DIN 17 102 40 0,3 DIN 17205 300 0,3
Fine grain structural steel 100 0,25 Heat treatable steel casting,
DIN EN 10 113 30 0,3 q&t, DIN 17 205, 100 0,3
Heat treatable steel, q&t 16 -¢o3 0,3 types -¢o2 No.1, 3,4 100 0,3
DIN EN 10 083-1 16 0,4 as above 200 0,15
Heat treatable steel, n 16 0,1 types -s No.2 200 0,3
DIN EN 10083-1 16 0,2 as above 200 0,15
Case hardening steel, bh 16 0,5 types No.5, 6, 8 200 0,3
DIN EN 10 083-1 16 0,5 as above 500 0,15
Nitriding steel, q&t 40 0,25 types No.7, 9 500 0,3
DIN EN 10 083-1 40 0,30 GGG 60 0,15
stainless steel - - DIN EN 1563 60 0,15
DIN EN 10 088-2 -¢o4 GT-¢o4 15 0,15
Steel for big forgings, q&t 250 0,2 DIN EN 1562 15 0,15
SEW 550-¢os 250 0,25
q&t= quenched and tempered
Steel for big forgings, n 250
SEW 550 250 °
0,15 » l For GS-30 Mn 5 orGS-25 CrMo 4 there is deff,N,m = 800 mm
or 500 mm respectively, values ad,m and ad,p asgiven above.
q&t=quenched a. tempered, n=normalized, bh=blank hardened -¢o2 Material numbers see Table 5.1.11.
-e-I Within the kinds ofmaterial there are the types ofmaterial. -¢o3 Valid for strength level V I, for level V II deff,N,m = deff,N,p
-¢o2 More precise values depending on the kind of material (except = 100 mm with values ad,m and ad,p asabove.
for non-alloyed structural steel) see Table 5.1.2 toTable 5.1.7.
-¢o2 For 30 CrNiMo 8 and 36 NiCrMo 16: deffN m = 40 mm,
values ad,m and ad,p asgiven above. ' ,
Case 2
-¢o4 No technological size effect within the dimensions mentioned in
the material standards. Components (also forgings) made of non-alloyed
»s For 28 NiCrMoV 8 5 or 33 NiCrMo 145: deff N m = deffN p structural steel, of fine grained structural steel, of
= 500mm or 1000 mm resp., values ad.m and ad.~ ~s given abo~e. normalized quenched and tempered steel, of cast steel,
or of aluminum materials.
The effective diameter deff is equal to the diameter or
Case 1
the wall thickness of the component, Table 3.2.3, case 2.
Components (also forgings) made of heat treatable steel,
of case hardening steel, of nitriding steel both nitrided
Rod-shaped (ID) components made of quenched and
or quenched and tempered, of heat treatable cast steel,
tempered steel
of GGG, GT or GG.
The effective diameter is the diameter existing while the
The effective diameters deff from Table 3.2.3, Case 1,
heat treatment is performed.
apply.
In case of machining subsequent to the heat treatment
In general it is:
the effective diameter deffis the largest diameter of the
deff= 4· V / 0, (3.2.16) rod. In case of machining prior to the heat treatment the
effective diameter deff is defined as the local diameter in
V,O Volume and surface
question. The diameter deff according to the first
of the section of the component considered.
sequence of machining is an estimate on the safe side.
3.2 Material properties 3 Assessment of the static strength
80
using nominal stresses

Table 3.2.3 Effective diameter defi' Aluminum alloys

The anisotropy factor for cast aluminum alloys is
No. Cross section defi' defi'
KA = 1. (3.2.20)
Case 1 Case 2
For forgings ·13, for which material standards specify

~
1 d d the strength values as depending on the testing
direction, the anisotropy factor is not to be applied:
(3.2.21)

~
2 2s s For aluminum alloys the anisotropy factor for the
strength values in the main direction of processing is
(3.2.22)
for the strength values transverse to the main direction
3
~ s[ 2s s
of processing the anisotropy factor from Tab. 3.2.4 is
to be applied.

~
4 2b·s s
-- Table 3.2.4 Anisotropy factor K A .
b+s
Steel'
Rm up to 600 from 600 from 900 above

r:fE
5 b b inMpa to 900 to 1200 1200

KA 0,90 0,86 0,83 0,80

Alumtnum aIIoys:
Rm up to 200 from 200 from 400
3.2.3 Anisotropy factor inMpa to 400 to 600
The anisotropy factor allows for the fact that the 1,00 0,95 0,90
KA
strength values of milled steel and forgings are lower
transverse to the main direction of milling or forging
than in the main direction of processing. It is to be
supposed that the specified strength values are valid for
3.2.4 Compression strength factor and
the main direction of processing.
shear strength factor
In case of multiaxial stresses, and also with shear stress,
the anisotropy factor is 3.2.4.0 (;eneral

KA = 1.
Steel and cast iron material
The anisotropy factor for cast iron material is
KA = 1.
For milled steel and forgings *12 the anisotropy factor
in the main direction of processing is
(3.2.17) The compression strength factor allows for the fact that
in general the material strength is higher in compression
than in tension.
The shear strength factor allows for the fact that the
material strength in shear is different from the tensile
strength.
(3.2.18)
3.2.4.1 Compression strength factor

KA = 1. (3.2.19) For tensile stresses (axial or bending) the compression

strength factor is
For the strength values transverse to the main direction
of processing the anisotropy factor from Table 3.2.4 is fa = 1. (3.2.23)
to be applied. For compression stresses (axial or bending) the tensile
strength Rm and the yield strength Rp are to be replaced
by the compression strength Rc,m and the yield strength
in compression Rc,p:
Rc,m =fa ' Rm, (3.2.24)
Rc,F = fa . Rp ,
12 With material properties depending on the direction.
3.2 Material properties 3 Assessment of the static strength
81
using nominal stresses

compression strength factor, Table 3.2.5, 3.2.5 Temperature factors

tensile strength and yield strength, see
Eq. (3.2.1) to (3.2.3). 3.2.5.0 General

The values Rc,m and Rc,p are not explicitly needed for The temperature factors allow for the fact that the
an assessment of the static strength, as only the material strength decreases with increasing temperature.
compression strength factor fa is needed. *13. Normal temperature, low temperature and higher
temperature are to be distinguished.

Table 3.2.5 Compression strength factor fa and shear

strength factor f, 3.2.5.1 Normal temperature
Normal temperatures are as follows:
Kinds of material fO" fO" f, - for fine grain structural steel from -40°C to 60°C,
for for ~l - for other kinds of steel from -40 DC to + lOODC,
tension compress. - for cast iron materials from -25 DC to + lOODC,
Case harden's steel 1 1 0,577 for age-hardening aluminum alloys
Stainless steel 1 1 0,577 from -25 DC to 50 DC,
Forging steel 1 1 0,577 - for non-age-hardening aluminum alloys
Other kinds of steel 1 1 0,577 from - -25°C to lOODC.
GS 1 1 0,577
For normal temperature the temperature factors are
GGG 1 1,3 0,65
GT 1 1,5 0,75 KT,m = ... = 1. (3.2.26)
GG 1 2,5 0,85
Wrought aluminum 1 1 0,577
Cast aluminum 1 1,5 0,75 3.2.5.2 Low temperature
Temperatures below the values listed above are outside
~ 1 0,577 = 1 /.J3, according tov.Mises criterion,
also valid for welded components. the field of application of this guideline.

3.2.4.2 Shear strength factor 3.2.5.3 Elevated temperature

For shear stresses the tensile strength Rm and the yield In the field of elevated temperatures - up to 500°C for
strength Rp are to be replaced by the shear strength R, m steel and cast iron materials and up to 200 °C for
and the yield strength in shear Rs,p: ' aluminum materials - the influence of the temperature
on the mechanical properties is to be considered. In case
Rs,m = f, . Rm, (3.2.25) of elevated temperature the tensile strength R m is to be
Rs,p = f, . Rp, replaced by the high temperature strength Rrn,T or by
f, shear strength factor, Table 3.2.5 the creep strength Rrn,Tt . The yield strength Rp is to be
R m, Rp tensile strength and yield strength, replaced by the high temperature yield strength Rp,T or
Eq. (3.2.1) to (3.2.3). by the 1 % creep limit Rp,Tt *14.

The values Rs,m and Rs,p are not explicitly needed for For the short-term values Rm,T and Rp,T as well as for
an assessment of the strength, as only the shear strength the long-term values Rm,Tt and Rp,Tt the Eq. (3.2.27) to
factor f, is needed. (3.2.35) apply.

13 Tensile strength and yield strength incompression are supposed to be 14 The relevant temperature factors will be applied in combination
positive, Rc,rn, Rc,p > 0, therefore for compression fO" > 1. with the safety factors at the assessment stage.
3.2 Material properties 3 Assessment of the static strength
82
using nominal stresses

Short-term values
For GG a yield strength value is not defined and
therefore the value Rp,T does not exist.
Short term values of the static strength are
Hightemperarure
Rm,T = KT,m . R m , (3.2.27) yield strength Rp •T
Rp,T = KT,p . R p ,
I % creep limit Rp,Tt
KT,m, Kt,p. temperature factors,
Rp,Tt Rp I
Eq. (3.2.28) to (3.2.33), ~'RII1'jpt
R m, R p tensile strength and yield strength,
Creep Strength R;";Tt
Eq. (3.2.1) to (3.2.3). O,21--~+---+---+---+>o&..,..-..j Rrn.Tt I
The values Rm,T and Rp,T are not explicitly needed for ~'jmt
an assessment of the static strength, as only the
temperature factors KT,m and KT,p are needed. 0,11----1-----4---'4-4-'--\-1.

Steel and cast iron materials o

According to the temperature T the temperature factors
o 160 200 360 400 500
KT,m and KT,p apply as follows: 1.2.2 Tin ·C

for fine grain structural steel, T > 60 °C *15: OA r---,....,.--,--------,--------...,

Rm,T High temperature
KT.m = KT,p = 1 - 1,2' 10.3 . T / DC, (3.2.28) Rm 'jm strengtli R,.,T
for other kinds of steel *16, T > 100°C, Figure CreepStrength Rrn,Tt
0,3: I---t---t=""'-.;;;:c--/-'--
1.2.2: (3.2.29) RIlj;TI I
KT,m = KT,p = 1-1,7' 10,3. (T / °C -100), Rm'jmt

for GS, T> 100D C : (3.2.30) 0,21---+---+---+--·+\----,""1

-3 0
KT,m = KT,p = 1- 1,5 . 10 . (T / C - 100),
for GGG, GT and GG, T > 100D C, Figure 3.2.2:
K T.m = Kr,p = 1- aT,m . (10 -3. T / DC) 2. (3.2.31)

aT,m Constant

Eq. (3.2.28) to (3.2.31) are valid from the indicated o 100 200300 400 500
temperature T up to 500 DC. For a temperature above 3.2.2b Tin ·C
350° C they are valid only, if the relevant characteristic
stress does not act on long terms. Figure 3.2.2 Temperature dependent values of the
static strength of non-alloyed structural steel and of GG
plotted for comparison.
Table 3.2.6 Constant aT,m .
Safety factors after Chapter 3.5.
Kind of material GGG GT GG Rm,T/Rm= KT,m, Rp,T/Rp=KT,p,
2,4 2,0 1,6 Rm,Tt/ Rm = KTt,m, Rp,Tt / Rp = KTt,p'
aT,m
Top: Non-alloyed structural steel with Rp / Rm = Re / Rm = 0,65,
Rm,T, Rp,T aswell as Rm,T1> Rp,Tt fort = 105 h,
Jm= 2,0, jp =Jmt= 1,5 , Jpt= 1,0.
Bottom: 00,
Rm,T aswell as Rm,Tt fort = 105 h,
Jm= 3,0, jmt= 2,4.

15There isan insignificant discontinuity at T = 60°C.

16 For stainless steel no values are known up to now.
3.2 Material properties 3 Assessment of the static strength
83
using nominal stresses

Aluminum alloys Long-term values

According to the temperature T the temperature factors Long term values of the static strength are
KT,mand KT,p for aluminum alloys apply as follows:
R""Tt = KTt,m . R; , (3.2.34)
- for age-hardening aluminum alloys: T > 50 DC, ~,Tt = KTt,p . ~,
Figure 3.2.3 (3.2.32)
Kr,m = 1 - 4,5 . 10 -3. (T / DC - 50) ;:: 0,1, KTt,m, KTt,p temperature factors,
Figure 3.2.2 and 3.2.3, Eq. (3;2.35),
Kr,p = 1 - 4,5 . 10 -3. (T / DC - 50) ;:: 0,1,
Rm, R, tensile strength and yield strength;
- for non-age-hardening aluminum alloys: Eq. (3.2.1) to (3.2.3).
T> 100°C, Figure 3.2.3 (3.2.33)
Kr,m = 1 - 4,5 . 10 -3. (T / °C - 100) ~ 0,1, The values R""Tt and ~,Tt are not needed explicitly for
an assessment of the static strength, as only the
Kr,p = 1 - 4,5 . 10 -3 . (T / °C - 100) ~ 0,1,
temperature factors KTt,m and KTt,p are needed.
Eq. (3.2.32) and (3.2.33) are valid from the indicated
temperature T up to 200°C, and in general only, if the
Steel and cast iron material
relevant characteristic stress does not act on long terms.
For GG a yield strength value is not defined and
therefore the value Rp,Tt does not exist.

0,5 Depending on the temperature T and on the operation

High temperaturc
time t at that temperature the temperature factors KTt,m
strengthRm,T
and KTt,p apply, Figure 3.2.2 *17
Ri'D;'l'l
R. 'Jm = 10(aTt,m+ bTt,m . Pm+ cTt,m . Pm )
2
K Tt,m , (3.2.35)
CrecpStrellgth
. IR..Tt K = lO(aTt,p+b Tt,p ·Pp+cTt,p .pp2 )
Rm,Tt 1
np ,
}fn7'jlllt Pm = 10 -4. (T / C + 273)' (C m + 19(t/ hj),
Pp = 10 - 4. (T / C + 273) . (C m + 19(t / hj),
aTt,m, ..., Cp constants, Table 3.2.7,
t operation time in hours h at the
I
Higll temperature
temperature T.

fatigueslrength Eq. (3.2.35) applies to temperatures from approximately

0,1 .Gw,zd,t'--""'+-~----f+----+l,o-;__+\_~ 350°C up to 500°C, but only for stresses acting on long
6W;.d.T .00W••d
crw.>.d . R., .jo1 terms. In general they do not apply to temperatures
below about 350°C *18.
o
o so 100 150 200 250 100
1.2.3 T/'C

Figure 3.2.3 Temperature dependent values of the static

strength of aluminum alloys plotted for comparison.
Static strength values:
Rm,T/Rm = KT,m = Rp,T/Rp = KT,p'
Rm,Tt/ Rm = KTt,m = Rp,Tt / Rp = KTt,p .
Rm,Tt,Rp,Tt for t = 105 h.
Fatigue limit for completely reversed stress (N = 106 cycles):
crW,zd / Rm = 0,30 ; crW,zd,T / crW,zd = KT,D .

Safety factors according to Chapter 3.5 and 4.5:

17 Larsen-Miller-parameter P andLarsen-Miller-constant C.

18 Because the values would be unrealistic for temperatures

T < 350°C, where thevalues KT,m andKT,p are relevant instead.
3.2 Material properties 3 Assessment of the static strength
84
using nominal stresses

Table 3.2.7 Constants aTt,m, ... , C p ~1 Aluminum alloys

For aluminum alloys and t = 105 hours KTt,m is given by
Steel Non- Fine grain Heat- Figure 1.2.4 *19.
alloyed structural treatable-
structural steel steel 1,0

~2
steel
~3 ~4 ~5
R"..TI {R".
0,8
\
Creep strength 0,6
\\
aTt.m - 0,994 -1,127 - 3,001
0,4
b Tlm 2,485 2,485 3,987
CTtm - 1,260 - 1,260 - 1,423 0,2
\ i
Cm 20
1 % Creep limit
20 24,27
o i ~
RT -100 200 300 400
Trc
aTt.n - 5,019 - 6,352 - 3,252
bTt.n 7,227 9,305 5,942 Figure 3.2.4 Temperature factor KTl,m ~ R.n.Tt/ R.n for
5
cTt.n - 2,636 - 3,456 - 2,728 aluminum alloys and t = 10 hours.
Co 20 20 17,71 The given curve is the same as in Figure 3.2.3, except that the factor
(1 / jm ) is different.

Cast iron GS GGG,GT GG

material ~6 ~7 ~8

Creep strength

aTtm -7,524 2,50 -1,46

bTtm 9,894 - 1,83 2,36
- 3,417 -0,90
CTtm
Cm 19,57 °
20 25
1 % Creep limit
aTtn - 10,582 0,12 -
b Tln 8,127 1,52 -
CTt.n - 1,607 - 1,28 -
Cn 35,76 18 -
<-I Approximate values, applicable from about 350 0 e to 500 o e.
~2 Not valid for stainless steel.
~3 Initially for 8t 38, Rm = 360 MPa, similar to sr37.
~4 Initially for H 52, Rm = 490 MPa, similar to 8tE 355; the absolute
values Rm,Tt are the same as for St 38.
~5 Initially for e 45 N (normalized) with Rm = 620 MPa. For C 35 N,
with Rm = 550 MPa the constants -3,001 and -3,252 are to be replaced
by -2,949 and -3,198. The absolute values Rm,Tt are the same as for
C45N.
~6 Initially for 08-C 25 with Rm = 440 MPa.
~7 Initially for 000-40 with Rm = 423 MPa.

~7 Initially for 00-25 with Rm = 250 MPa.

19 The temperature factor Kt,p is not defmed up to now. It may be

assumed, however, as it is essential for the assessment of the static
strength, that the term Rp,Tt / jpt is more or less equal to Rm,Tt / jmt , see
Figure 1.2.2 (required safety factorsjpt = 1,0 andjmt = 1,5).
A Larsen-Millerequation similar to Eq. (3.2.32) or (3.2.33) applicable to
derive the values of KTt,m and KTt, according to temperature T and
operationtime T has not been specifieffor aluminum alloys up to now.
 85
3.3 Design parameters 3 Assessment of the static strength
using local stresses

3.3 Design parameters 1R33 EN.dog 3.3.1.2 Welded components

Contents Page For welded components the design factors are generally
to be determined separately for the toe and for the root
3.3.0 General 85 of the weld.
3.3.1 Design factors For the toe of the weld the calculation is to be carried
3.3.1.0 General out as for non-welded components.
3.3.1.1 Non-welded components
3.3.1.2 Welded components For the root of the weld of rod-shaped (ID) welded
components the design factors for normal stress (tension
3.3.2 Section factors or compression) and for shear stress are
3.3.3 Plastic notch factors 87
3.3.4 Weld factor CI.w KSK,a = 1/ (npl,a . fJ.w · KNd , (3.3.4)
3.3.5 Constant KNL 88 KsK,~ = 1 / (npl,~ . fJ.w ) .

For the root of the weld of shell-shaped (2D) welded

components the design factors for normal stress (tension
or compression) in the directions x and y as well as for
3.3.0 General shear are
According to this chapter the design parameters are to KSK,ax = 1 / (npl,ax . CI.w ..KNL ), (3.3.5)
be determined.
KsK,cry = 1 / (npl,cry . CI.w' KNL ),
KSK,~ = 1 / (npl,~ . CI.w),

3.3.1 Design factors npl,a, ... section factor, Chapter 3.3.2

fJ.w weld factor, Chapter 3.3.4.
3.3.1.0 General KNL constant for GG, Chapter 3.3.5
Non-welded and welded components are to be Weld factors CI.w are given for tension, for compression,
distinguished. They can be both rod-shaped (lD), for shear and for torsion of the throat section.
shell-shaped (2D) and block-shaped (3D).
For certain applications block-shaped (3D) components
may be welded at the surface, for example by surfacing
3.3.1.1 Non-welded components welds. Then the calculation is to be carried out as for
shell-shaped (2D) welded components, if the stresses at
The design factors of rod-shaped (lD) non-welded the surface ax, a y and 1: are of interest only.
components for normal stress (tension or compression)
and for shear stress are
KSK,a = 1/ (npl,a . KNd, (3.3.1) 3.3.2 Section factors
KSK;t = I / npl;t .
The section factors npl,a , ... allow for the influence of
The design factors of shell-shaped (2D) non-welded the stress gradient in connection with the shape of the
components for normal stress (tension or compression) cross section on the static strength of the component,
in the directions x and y as well as for shear are Figure 1.3.1. They serve to make best use of the load
KSK, ax = 1/ (npl,a . KNd, (3.3.2) carrying capacity by accepting some yielding as the
KsK,ay = I / (npl,a . KNL), outside fiber stress exceeds the yield strength.
KSK,~ = 1 / npl,~ . An essential condition is the existence of a stress
The design factors of block-shaped (3D) non-welded gradient of the stress a and/or 1: normal to the surface of
components for the principle stresses (tension or the component, Figure 3.3.1. A stress gradient parallel
compression) in the directions 1, 2 and 3 (normal to the to the surface is not considered for the section factor *1.
surface of the component) *1 are
KSK,al = 1 / (npl,a . KNL), (3.3.3)
KSK,a2 = I / (npl,a . KNL),
K SKa3 = 1/ KNL *',
npl,a ... section factor, Chapter 1.3.2,
KNL constant for GG, Chapter 3.3.4
1 For the stress components ax, a y , t, a, and a2the stress gradient of
interest is normal to the direction ofthestress, Figure 3.3.1. A stress
gradient of a3it is not considered and np l,53 = I , because the stress
gradient as defined above isparallel toa3.
 86
3.3 Design parameters 3 Assessment of the static strength
using local stresses

For austenitic steel in the solution annealed condition

according to Table 5.1.8 the section factors for normal
stress (tension or compression) and for shear stress
are *4

npl,a = Kp,a , (3.3.8)

npl;t = K p,~ .
For all other kinds of material the section factors for
normal stress and for shear stress are *5 *6

npl,a = MIN (~E·t:ertr /R p ; Kp,a), (3.3.9)

npl,~ = MIN (~E·t:ertr /R p ; Kp,~),
~rlr
E Young's modulus, Table 3.3.1,
npl'''=R , limit value of total strain, Table 3.3.1,
yield strength, Chapter 3.2,
plastic notch factors.

Aluminum alloys
10 15 For cast aluminum alloys as well as for wrought
~
3.3.1 Rp/E aluminum alloy with small elongation, A '< 8 %, the
section factors are *3:

npl,a = .., = 1. (3.3.10)

Figure 3.3.1 Definition of the section factor npl,a of a
notched component, for instance. For ductile wrought aluminum alloys, A:2: 8 %, the
section factors are to be determined from Eq. (3.3.9).
Top: Detail of the component. Yield strength Rp , component
static strength for normal stress aSK section factor
npl,a = aSK / Rp , load F.
Continuous curve: Fictitious distribution of the elastically computed Table 3.3.1 Young's modulus E and limit values of
stress. Curve limited to Rp: Real stress distribution providing elastic total strain Eertr .
ideal-plastic material behavior.
Bottom: Stress-strain curve of the component (relative scales). Kinds of material Steel GS GGG GT AI
Plastic notch factor Kp,a , limit value of total strain Sertr , Young's' alloys
modulus E. 10-5. E / MPa 2,1 2,1 1,7 1,8 0,70
Eertr/ % ~1 5 5 2 ~2 2 2 ~3

Surface hardened components

~ 1 Sertr / % '" 5 means Sertr = 0,05
The section factors are not applicable if the component ~2 Valid for As < 12,5 %. For Aj z 12,5% thereis Sertr=4%.
has been surface or case hardened, see Table 2.3.5 *2:
~3 Valid for A < 12,5%. For A~ 12,5% thereis Sertr = 5 %.
npl,a = ... = 1. (3.3.6)

Steel and cast iron material

For GG as well as for types of GT or GGG with small
elongation, A 3 < 8 % or A5 < 8 %, the section factors
are *3:
npl,a = ... = 1. (3.3.7)
3 Because of the low plasticity of these materials.

4 Because of the high ductility of austenitic steel in the solution

2 A hard surface layer - for example as a result of case hardening
and particularly at notches - may observe cracks when yielding
occurs because of the limited plasticity of the hardened surface layer.
Possibly this rule is too far on the safe side, as npl = 1,1 is allowed
for case hardened shafts according to the recent DIN 743 (launched in
2000).
annealed condition the plastic notch factors Kp,a and Kp;r are
relevant instead of the material dependent sectionfactors.
5 MIN means that thesmaller valuefrom the rightsideofthe equation is
valid.
6 Section factor based on Neuber's formula.
 87
3.3 Design parameters 3 Assessment of the static strength
using local stresses

3.3.3 Plastic notch factors ..

Table 3 3 2 Plastic notch factors K-n.o and K . ~n~

Cross section Bending Torsion

The section factors according to Eq. (3.3.8) and (3.3.9)
Kp,b Kp,t
are limited by the plastic notch factors Kp,a and
Kp,~ that depend on the plastic limit load: rectangle ~ 1 1,5 -
circle 1,70 ~2 1,33 ~3
plastic limit load
K K = -=-------- (3.3.11) circular ring 1,27 ~4 p5
p,a, p,~ elastic limit load
I-section or box ~6
-
The elastic limit load for normal stress (and for shear
~1 or plate, ~21,70=16/(3'1t), ~3 1,33=4/3.
stress) is defined as the load for which the maximum
~4 thin-walled, 1,27 = 4/1t.
local stress exceeds the yield stress.
~5 thin-walled, otherwisethere is
The plastic limit load of a component may be obtained K = 133 1-(dlD)3
p.t r- 4 ' (3.3.14)
most reliable from an elastic-plastic finite element v

1-(dlD)
analysis. To reduce the computing effort for such an
d, D inner and outer diameters.
analysis a simplified elastic-ideal-plastic stress strain
1- (b 1 B)· (h 1 H)2
curve may be used and the finite element mesh may be ~6 Kp,b = 1,5 . 3 (3.3.15)
less fine than for computing notch stresses. 1- (b 1 B) . (h 1 H)
b, B inner and outer width, h, H inner and outer hight.
Approximately the plastic limit load may be derived as
follows:
Definition and plotting of the cross section which
will determine the limit state,
Entering the yield stresses o = ± Rp and 't = ± f~' Rp 3.3.4 Weld factor Uw
into the plotted cross section (f~ from Table 3.2.5),
. Balancing the areas of the section under + Rp and The weld factor CJ..w accounts for the effect of a weld. It
Rp to obtain a similarity between these stresses and applies to the root of the weld of welded components
the external loading situation. only, Table 3.3.3 *9 .
In general realization of the described procedure is not
easy and the formulation of an appropriate algorithm is
difficult. Table 3.3.3 Weld factor CI..w ~1 .

Particular case Type of R m ::; Rm >

Joint Weld quality
stress 360 MPa 360 MPa
In case of a component for which nominal stresses may
full all Compression
be defined for the section of concern, and the ~2
penetration
corresponding stress concentration factors for tension or
weld verified 1,0 1,0
compression, for bending, for shear and for torsion are
or with Tension 10
known *7 *8, the plastic notch factors are as follows:
back weld not
Kp,a = Kt,zd, (3.3.13) verified
Kp,a = Kp,b . Kt,b , partial all Compression 0,95 0,80
Kp,~ = Kt,s, penetration or or 0,80
Kp,~ = Kp,t' Kt,t. fillet weld Tension

Kt,zel, stress concentration factor, Chapter 5.2, all all Shear

Kp,b, plastic notch factors, Table 3.3.2.
bun weld ~3 Tension 0,55 -
It has to be observed, however, that the so-derived 055
plastic notch factors only apply to the notched section
~I Accordingto DIN 18800 part 1, Table 21 and Eq. (75).
considered and not to the component as a whole.
Therefore other sections may have to be considered in ~2 For aluminium alloys (independent of Rm ) the values typed in
addition, see Chapter 3.0 and Figure 3.0.1. boldfaceshould be applied for the time being.
~3 Butt welds of sectional steel from St 37-2 and USt 37-2 with a
product thickness t > 16 mm,

7 Usually stress concentraction factors do nor exist in combinationwith

local stresses.
8 The stress concentration factors Kt.o and Kt., given in Chapter 5.12 for
a substitute structure are intended to be used in Chapter 4.3.1.1 only and 9 For the toe of a weld the calculation is to be carried out as for non-
should not be used in the present context. welded components.
 88 3 Assessment of the static strength
3.3 Design parameters
using local stresses

3.3.5 Constant K NL
The Constant KNL allows for the non-linear elastic
stress strain characteristic of GG in tension and
compression or in bending.
For all kinds of material except for GG there is
K NL = 1. (3.3.16)
For GG the values
K NL = KNL,Zug (3.3.17)
apply to the tension side of the cross section (tension or
tension from bending).
The reciprocal values
KNL,Druck = 1/ KNL,Zug (3.3.18)
apply to the compression side of the cross section
(compression or compression in bending).
Values of the KNL,Zug and KNL,Druck from Table 3.3.4.

Table 3.3.4 Constant KNL -c- 1.

Type of GG GG GG GG GG GG
material -10 -15 -20 -25 -30 -35

KNL,Zug 1,15 1,15 1,10 1,10 1,05 1,05

KNL,Druck 0,87 0,87 0,91 0,91 0,95 0,95

~ 1 For unnotched and slightly notched components at tension or

compression there is KNL = 1.
 89
3.4 Component strength 3 Assessment of the static strength
using local stresses

3.4 Component strength 1R34 EN.dog 3.4.2 Welded components

For welded components the strength values are
generally to be determined separately for the toe and for
Contents Page the root of the weld.
3.4.0 General 89 For the toe of the weld the calculation is to be carried
3.4.1 Non-welded components out as for non-welded components.
3.4.2 Welded components
For the root of the weld of rod-shaped (lD) welded
components the local values of the component static
3.4.0 General strength for normal stress (tension or compression) as
well as for shear stress are
According this chapter the local values of the
component static strength are to be determined. csx = fa . Rm I KSK,a , (3.4.4)
'tSK = f~' Rml KsK,~.
Non-welded and welded components are to be
distinguished. They can be both rod-shaped (10), shell- For the root of the weld of shell-shaped (2D) welded
shaped (2D), or block-shaped (3D). components the local values of the component static
strength for normal stresses (tension or compression) in
the directions x and y as well as for shear stress are
3.4.1 Non-welded components
crSK,x = fa . Rm I KSK,ax , (3.4.5)
The local values of the component static strength of rod-
crSK,y = fa . Rm I KsK,cry ,
shaped (lD) components for normal stress (tension or
TSK = f~' Rml KSK,~,
compression) and for shear stress are *1 *2
fa compression strength factor, Chapter 3.2.4,
O'sK=fa'Rm/KSK,a, (3.4.1) f~ shear strength factor, Chapter 3.2.4.
'tSK = f~ . Rm I KSK,~ . Rm tensile strength, Chapter 3.2.1,
The local values of the component static strength of KsK, a, ... design factor, Chapter 3.3.1.
shell-shaped (2D) components for normal stresses
(tension or compression) in the directions x and y as For certain applications block-shaped (3D) components
well as for shear stress are may be welded at the surface, for example by surfacing
welds. Then the calculation is to be carried out as for
O'SK,x = fa . Rm I KSK,ax , (3.4.2) shell-shaped (2D) welded components, if the stresses at
O'SK,y = fa . Rm I KsK,cry , the surface crx , cry and r are of interest only.
'tSK = f~' Rml KsK,~ .
compression strength factor, Chapter 3.2.4,
shear strength factor, Chapter 3.2.4,
tensile strength, Chapter 3.2.1,
design factor, Chapter 3.3.1.

The local values of the component static strength of

block-shaped (3D) components for the principal stresses
(tension or compression) in the directions 1, 2 and 3 are
O'l,SK = fa . Rm I KSK,a1 , (3.4.3)
0'2,SK = fa . Rm I KSK,a2 ,
0'3,SK = fa . Rm I K SK,a3 ,
fa compression strength factor, Chapter 3.2.4,
Rm tensile strength, Chapter 3.2.1,
KSK,al ... design factor, chapter 3.3.1.

1 The component static strength values are different for normal stress and
for shear stress, and moreover they are different due to different section
factors according to the type of stress.
2 Basically the tensile strength Rm is the reference value of static
strength, even if in the case of a low Rp / Rm ratio the yield strength is
to be used for the assessment of the static strength, a fact that is accounted
for in Chapter 1.5.5.
 90
3.5 Safety factors 3 Assessment of the static strength
using local stresses

3.5 Safety factors 1R35 EN .docl

Table 3.5.1 Safety factors jm and jp for steel
(not for GS) and for ductile wrought aluminum alloys
Contents Page As> 12,5 %).
3.5.0 General 90 jm ->1 Consequences of failure
3.5.1 Steel jp ->2 severe moderate
3.5.2 jmt ->3
Cast iron materials ->S
3.5.2.0 General jpt ->4
3.5.2.1 Ductile cast iron materials
3.5.2.2 Non-ductile cast iron materials 91 high 2,0 1,75
3.5.3 Wrought aluminum alloys 1,5 1,3
3.5.3.0 General Probability of 1,5 1,3
3.5.3.1 Ductile wrought aluminum alloys occurrence of 1,0 1,0
3.5.3.2 Non-ductile wrought aluminum alloys the characteristic
low 1,8 1,6
3.5.4 Cast aluminum alloys service stress ->6 1,35 1,2
3.5.5 Global safety factor 92 values
1,35 1,2
1,0 1,0
3.5.0 General ->1 referring tothe tensile strength Rm ortothe strength atelevated
temperature RmT,
According to this chapter the safety factors are to be ->2 referring tothe yield strength Rp ortothe hot yield strength Rp,T ,
determined *1. ->3 referring tothe creep strength Rm,Tt,
The safety factors are valid under the condition that the ->4 referring tothe creep limit Rp,Tt .
design loads are reliably determined on the safe side and ->S moderate consequences of failure of a less important component in
that the material properties correspond to an average the sense of "no catastrophic effects" being associated with a failure; for
example because of a load redistribution towards other members of a
probability of survival of Po = 97,5 % *2. statically undeterminate system. Reduction byapproximately IS %.
The safety factors may be reduced under favorable ->6 or only infrequent occurrences of the characteristic service stress
conditions, that is depending on the probability of values, for example due to anapplication ofproof loads or due to loads
during anassembling operation. Reduction byapproximately 10 %.
occurrence of the characteristic stress values in question
and depending on the consequences offailure.
The safety factors are valid both for non-welded and
welded components.
3.5.2 Cast iron materials
3.5.2.0 General
The safety factors given in the following are valid for
ductile and for non-ductile materials. In this respect any Ductile and non-ductile cast iron materials are to be
types of steel are ductile materials, as well as cast iron distinguished.
materials and wrought aluminum alloys with an
elongation As~ 12,5 %, while GT, GG and cast
aluminum alloys are always considered as non-ductile 3.5.2.1 Ductile cast iron materials
materials here. *3
Cast iron materials with an elongation
A5~12,5 % are considered as ductile, in particular all
types of GS and some types of GGG (not GT and not
3.5.1 Steel GG). Values of elongation see Table 5.1.12.
Safety factors applicable to the tensile strength and to Safety factors for ductile cast iron materials are given
the yield strength, to the creep strength and to the creep by Table 3.5.2. Compared to Table 3.5.1 they are
limit are given in Table 3.5.1. higher because of an additional partial safety factor jF
that accounts for inevitable but allowable defects in
castings. The factor is different for castings that have
1 The safety factors in Chapter 1.5 are the same, but with the been subject to non-destructive testing or have not *4 .
difference, that non-ductile cast iron materials and non-ductile
aluminum alloys are considered here as well.
2 Statistical confidence S = SO %. 4 In mechanical engineering. cast components areof standard quality
for which a further reduction of the partial safety factor to jr = 1,0
3 All types of GT, GG and cast aluminum alloys have elongations does not seem possible up to now.
As < 12,S % and are considered as non-ductile materials here. Wrought
aluminum alloys with elongations As < 12,S % are considered asnon- A safety factor jF = 1,0 may be applied to high quality cast
ductile materials, too. For non-ductile materials the assessment of the components in the aircraft industry however. Those high quality cast
static strength is to be carried outwith local stresses. components have to meet special demands and (cont'dpage 91)
 91
3.5 Safety factors 3 Assessment of the static strength
using local stresses

Table 3.5.2 Safety factors jm and jp for ductile cast iron GG

materials (GS; GGG with A5~ 12,5 %) -}1 0,5
Aj
jm Consequences of failure
jp severe moderate
jmt
Jpt
o 1U 12,5 20
As ,A3 in %
castings not subject to non-destructive testing-}2 Figure 3.5.1 Value L\j to be added to the safety factors
high 2,8 2,45 jm and jp , defmed as a function of the elongation As or
2,1 1,8 A3 respectively.
Probability of 2,1 1,8
occurrence of 1,4 1,4
the characteristic low 2,55 2,2 3.5.3 Wrought aluminum alloys
service stress 1,9 1,65
values 1,9 1,65 3.5.3.0 General
1,4 1,4
Ductile and non-ductile wrought aluminum alloys are to
castings subject to non-destructive testing -}3 be distinguished.
high 2,5 2,2
1,9 1,65
Probability of 1,9 1,65
3.5.3.1 Ductile wrought aluminum alloys
occurrence of 1,25 1,25 Wrought aluminum alloy with an elongation
the characteristic low 2,25 2,0 A ~ 12,5 % are considered as ductile materials. Values
service stress 1,7 1,5 of elongation see Table 5.1.22 to 5.1.30.
values 1,7 1,5
The safety factors for ductile wrought aluminum alloys
1,25 1,25
are the same as for steel, Table 3.5.1.
-}1 Explanatory notes for the safety factors see Table 3.5.1.
-}2 Compared to Table 3.5.1 an additional partial safety factor jF = 1,4
is introduced to account for inevitable but allowable defects in castings. 3.5.3.1 Non-ductile wrought aluminum alloys
-}3 Compared to Table 3.5.1 an additional partial safety factor jF = 1,25
is introduced, for which it is assumed that a higher quality of the castings Wrought aluminum alloy with an elongation
is obviously guaranteed when testing. A < 12,5 % are considered as non-ductile materials.
Values of elongation see Table 5.1.22 to 5.1.30.
3.5.2.2 Non-ductile cast iron materials For non-ductile wrought aluminum alloys all safety
factors from Table 3.5.2 are to be increased by adding a
Cast iron materials with an elongation As < 12,5 % value L\j, Figure 3.5.1 and Eq. (3.5.2).
(A3 < 12,5 % for GT) are considered as non-ductile
materials, in particular some types of GGG as well as
all types of GT and GG. Values of elongation for GGG 3.5.4 Cast aluminum alloys
and GT see Table 5.1.12 or 5.1.13. The value for GG
is As = 0 *5. Cast aluminum alloys are always considered as non-
ductile materials. Values of elongation see Table 5.1.31
For non-ductile cast iron materials the safety factors to 5.1.38.
from Table 3.5.2 are to be increased by adding a value
L\j, Figure 3.5.1 *6: For cast aluminum alloys all safety factors from Table
3.5.2 are to be increased by adding a value L\j, Figure
L\j = 0,5 -~A5 /50%. (3.5.2) 3.5.1 and Eq. (3.5.2).
AS Elongation, to be replaced by A3 for GT.

6 For example the safety factor Jm for GG is at least

checks' on qualification of the production process, as well as on the
quality and extent of product testing in order to guarantee little jm = 2,0 + O,S = 2,S . (3.S.3)
scatter of their mechanical properties.
( jm = 2,0 from Table 3.5.2, moderate consequences, non-
5 For GG the values Jp and Jpt are not relevant since the yield strength destructively tested, low probability, ~j=O,S for AS = 0 from Eq.
and the creep limit of GO are not specified. (3.S.2) ).
 92
3.5 Safety factors 3 Assessment of the static strength
using local stresses

3.5.5 Total safety factor

From the individual safety factors the total safety factor
is to be derived *7:
jges

jges = (3.5.4)

MAX(~ ~.Rm ~ ~.Rm]

KT,m ' KT,p R p ' KTt,m ' KTt,p n, ,
.lm ... safety factors, Table 3.5.1 and 3.5.2,
Kt,m ... temperature factors, Chapter 3.2.5 *8.

Simplifications
The following simplifications apply to Eq. (3.5.4):

In the case of normal temperature the third and

fourth term have no relevance *9, and moreover
there is KT,m = K T. p =1 ,

for Rp / Rms 0,75 the first term has no relevance,

for Rp / Rm > 0,75 the second term has no
relevance * 10,

for GG the second and fourth term have no

relevance *11.

7 MAX means that the maximum value of the four terms in the
parenthetical expression is valid.

8 Applicable to the tensile strength Rm or to the yield strength Rp to

allow for the tensile strength at elevated temperature ~ T ' the hot yield
strength ~,T' the creep strength Rm,Tt , or the creep limit Rp,Tt,
respectively'

9 The terms containing the factors KTt,m and KTt,p must not be applied
in the case of normal temperature, as they will produce misleading results.

10 If there is a ratio of the safety factorsjp I jm = 0,75.

11 Since a yield strength and a creep limit are not specified.

 93
3.6 Assessment 3 Assessment of the static strength
using nominal stresses

3.6 Assessment !R36 EN.dog

strength, O"SK , ..., divided by the total safety factor jges.
The degree of utilization is always a positive value.
Contents Page
3.6.0 General 93
Superposition
3.6.1 Rod-shaped (ID) components
3.6.1.1 Individual types of stress For stress components of the same type of stress the
3.6.1.2 Combined types of stress 94 superposition is to be carried out according to Chapter
3.1.
3.6.2 Shell-shaped (2D) components
3.6.2.1 Individual types of stress If different types of stress like normal stress and shear
3.6.2.2 Combined types of stress 95 stress act simultaneously and if the resulting state of
stress is multiaxial, see Figure 0.0.9 *5, the particular
3.6.2 Block-shaped (3D) components extreme maximum stresses and the extreme minimum
3.6.2.1 Individual types of stress stresses are to be overlaid as indicated in the following.
3.6.2.2 Combined types of stress 96

Kinds of component
3.6.0 General
Rod-shaped (lD), shell-shaped (2D) and block-shaped
According to this chapter the assessment of the (3D) components are to be distinguished. They can be
component static strength using local stresses is to be both non-welded or welded
carried out.
In general the assessments for the individual types of
stress and for the combined stress are to be carried out 3.6.1 Rod-shaped (ID) components
separately * I *2. 3.6.1.1 Individual types of stress
In general the assessments for the extreme maximum Rod-shaped (ID) non-welded components
and minimum stresses (normal stresses in tension and
compression and/or shear stress) are to be carried out The degrees of utilization of rod-shaped non-welded
separately. For steel or wrought aluminum alloys the components for the different types of stress like normal
highest absolute value of stress is relevant *3. stress or shear stress are

The calculation applies to both non-welded and welded Cimax,ex

components. For welded components assessments are aSK,O' = ~ 1, (3.6.1)
CiSK / jges
generally to be carried out separately for the toe and for
the root of the weld as indicated in the following. 'tmax,ex
aSK,~ = s 1,
'tSK / jges
Degree of utilization O"max,ex, , ... extreme maximum stresses according to
The assessments are to be carried out by determining the type of stress; the extreme minimum
degrees of utilization of the component static strength. stresses, O"min,ex, , ..., are to be considered
In the context of the present Chapter the degree of in the same way as the maximum stresses,
utilization is the quotient of the characteristic stress Chapter 3.1.1.1,
(extreme stress O"max,ex, , ...) divided by the allowable O"SK, ... related component static strength,
static stress at the reference point *4. The allowable Chapter 3.4.1,
static stress is the quotient of the component static
jges total safety factor, Chapter 3.5.5.
All extreme stresses are positive or negative (or zero). In
general normal stresses in tension or compression are
I It is a general principle for an assessment of the static strength to to be considered separately. For shear the highest
suppose that all types of stress observe their maximum (or minimum) absolute value of shear stress is relevant.
values atthe same time.
2 This is in order toexamine the degrees ofutilization ofthe individual
types ofstress in general, and in particular if they may occur separately. 5 Only in the case ofstresses acting simultaneously the character ofEq.
(1.6.4) and (1.6.12) isthat ofa strength hypothesis. If Eq. (1.6.4) and
3 Different in the case ofcast iron materials or cast aluminium alloys with (1.6.12) are applied in other cases, they have the character ofan empirical
different static tension and compression strength values. interaction formula only. For example the extreme stresses from bending
and shear will -as arule - occur atdifferent points ofthe cross-section, so
4 The reference point isthe critical point ofthe cross section that observes that different reference points W are to be considered. As a rule bending
the highest degree ofutilization. will be more important. Moreover see Footnote 1.
 94
3.6 Assessment 3 Assessment of the static strength
using nominal stresses

Rod-shaped (ID) welded components For non-ductile wrought aluminum alloys (elongation
A < 12,5 %) there is q = 0,5 , otherwise
For the toe of the weld of rod-shaped (lD) welded
components the calculation is to be carried out as for ./3-(l/f't) 7
rod-shaped (lD) non-welded components. q
./3-1
*' (3.6.7)

For the root of the weld of rod-shaped (lD) welded f, shear strength factor, Table 3.2.5.
components the degrees of utilization for normal stress
and/or shear stress follow from the equivalent nominal Rod-shaped (ID) welded components
stresses, Chapter 3.1.1.1:
For the toe of the weld of rod-shaped (lD) welded
. O"max,ex wv components the calculation is to be carried out as for
aSK, wv,e = / .'.$; 1, (3.6.2) rod-shaped (lD) non-welded components.
O"SK Jges
For the root of the. weld of rod-shaped (ID) welded
'tmax, ex,wv components the degree of utilization for combined types
aSK,wv,'t = ..$; 1,
'tSK / Jges of stress (or loadings) is *8

O"max,ex,wv , ... Extreme maximum equivalent structural (3.6.8)

stresses; the extreme minimum stresses,
Smin,ex,wv,zd .. , , are to be considered in
the same way as the maximum stresses,
Chapter 3.1.1.1,
O"SK, ... related component static strength
values, Chapter 3.4.2,
total safety factor, Chapter 3.5.5.
All extreme stresses are positive or negative (or zero). In
general normal stresses in tension or compression are to
be considered separately. For shear the highest absolute
value of shear stress is relevant.
aSK,wv,cr, ... degree of utilization , Eq. (3.6.2).
3.6.2 Shell-shaped (2D) components
3.6.2.1 Individual types of stress
Shell-shaped (2D) non-welded components
The degrees of utilization of shell-shaped (20) non-
welded components for the types of stress like normal
stress in the directions x and y as well as shear stress are
O"max,ex,x
asK,crx = ..$; 1, (3.6.9)
O"SK,x / Jges

3.6.1.2 Combined types of stress O"max,ex,y

asK,cry = ..$; 1,
Rod-shaped (ID) non-welded components O"SK,y / Jges

For rod-shaped (lD) non-welded components the degree 't max, ex

I----I.$; 1,
of utilization for combined types of stress is *6 'tSK / jges
aSK,crv = q . aNH + (l - q) . llGH.$; 1, (3.6.4)
O"max,ex,x, ... Extreme maximum stresses according to
where type of stress, Chapter 3.1.1.1; the

aNH=±{lsl +~s2 +4.t

2)' extreme minimum stresses, O"min,ex,x , ...,
(3.6.5) are to be considered in the same way as
the maximum stresses, Chapter 3.1.1.2,

s = aSK,cr , (3.6.6)
t = aSK,cr , 7Table 1.6.1 Constant q(f t ) .

aSK,cr, .., degree of utilization, Eq. (3.6.1). Steel, GOO GT, GG

Wrought Cast
AI-alloys Al-alloys
r, 0,577 0,65 0,75 0,85
q 0,00 0,264 0,544 0,759
6 The applied strength hypothesis for combined types of stress is a
combination ofthe normal stress criterion (NH) and the v. Mises criterion Caution: For non-ductile wrought aluminium alloys (elongation
(GH). Depending on the ductility of the material the combination is A < 12,5 %) there is q = 0,5.
controlled by a parameter q as a function off, according to Eq. (1.6.7)
and Table 1.6.1. For steel isq = 0 so that only the v. Mises criterion isof 8 Eq. (3.6.8) does not agree with the structure ofEq. (3.1.2) on page 74.
effect. For GG isq = 0,759 so that both the normal stress hypothesis and It is an approximation which has to be regarded as provisional and
the v. Mises criterion are of partial influence. therefore itis tobe applied with caution.
 95
3.6 Assessment 3 Assessment of the static strength
using nominal stresses

crSK,x , ... related static component strength,

Chapter 3.4.1,
J
2 2·
<lQH= sx+Sy-sx'Sy+t 2,

Sx = aSK,crx , (3.6.14)
Total safety factor, Chapter 3.5.5.
Sy = aSK,cry ,
All extreme stresses are positive or negative (or zero). In
general normal stresses in tension or compression are to t = aSK,.,
be considered separately. For shear stress the highest
asK,crx, ... degree of utilization, Eq. (3.6.9).
absolute value is relevant.
For non-ductile wrought aluminum alloys (elongation
A < 12,5 %) there is q = 0,5 , otherwise
Shell-shaped (2D) welded components
./3 -(lIf.) 9

./3-1 * '
For the toe of the weld of shell-shaped (2D) welded q (3.6.15)
components the calculation is to be carried out as for
shell-shaped (2D) non-welded components. f. shear strength factor, Table 3.2.5.
For the root of the weld of shell-shaped (2D) welded
components the degrees of utilization for normal Rules of sign: If the individual types of stress always act
stresses in the directions x and y as well as for shear unidirectionally at the reference point *9, the degrees of
stress follow from the equivalent local stresses, Chapter utilization aSK,crx and asK,cry are to be inserted into Eq.
3.1.1.2: (3.6.14) with equal (positive) signs (summation). If they
always act opposingly, however *10, the degrees of
aSK, - 0"
max,ex,wv,x ~ 1, utilization aSK,crx and aSK,cry are to be inserted into Eq.
wv.ox - / . (3.6.10) (3.6.14) with different signs.
O"SK,x Jges
In the general case - without knowing whether the
a -
SK,wv,cry -
0"
max,ex,wv,y
/ .
s 1
, stresses act unidirectionally or opposingly *11 - the
O"SK,y Jges degrees of utilization are to be inserted into Eq. (3.6.14)
both with equal or with different signs; then the least
'tmax,ex,wv favorable case is relevant.
aSK,wv;t = . ~ 1,
'tSK / J ges
Moreover the degrees of utilization calculated with
crmin,ex,x , crmin,ex,y and 'tmin,ex,s are to be included in this
O"max,ex,wv, ... extreme maximum stresses (equivalent
comparative evaluation.
local stresses); the extreme minimum
stresses, O"min,ex,wv, ... , are to be
considered in the same way as the
Shell-shaped (2D) welded components
maximum stresses, Chapter 3.1.1.1,
For the toe of the weld of shell-shaped (2D) welded
O"SK,x ... related static component strength values,
components the calculation is to be carried out as for
Chapter 3.4.2,
shell-shaped (2D) non-welded components.
total safety factor, Chapter 3.5.5.
For the root of the weld of shell-shaped (2D) welded
All extreme stresses are positive or negative (or zero). In components the degree of utilization for combined types
general normal stresses in tension or compression are to of stress (or loadings) is "8
be considered separately. For shear stress the highest (3.6.16)
absolute value is relevant. 2 2 2
J
aSK, crwv = aSK,wv,crx +aSK,wv,cry +aSK,wv,. '

aSK,wv,crx, ... degrees of utilization, Eq. (3.6.10).

3.6.2.2 Combined types of stress
Shell-shaped (2D) non-welded components
The degree of utilization of shell-shaped (2D) non-
welded components for combined stresses is *6
aSK,ov = q . aNH + (l - q). <lQH~ 1, (3.6.12) 9 For example tension in direction x and tension in direction y from a
single loading affecting the component.
where
10 For example tension indirection xand compression indirection yfrom
a single loading affecting the component.
11 For example, iftwo loadings vary with time ina different manner.
 96
3.6 Assessment 3 Assessment of the static strength
using nominal stresses

3.6.3 Block-shaped (3D) components For non-ductile wrought aluminum alloys (elongation
A < 12,5 %) there is q = 0,5 , otherwise
3.6.3.1 Individual types of stress
The degrees of utilization of block-shaped (3D) non- q
/3- (lIf't) *9 (3.6.23)
welded components in terms of the principal stresses in /3-1 '
the directions 1,2 and 3 are
f't Shear strength factor, Table 3.2.5.
(J
aSK,O'I I, max, ex <1 (3.6.17) Rules of sign: If the individual principal stresses always
(Jl,SK / jges - ,
act unidirectionally at the reference point *13, the

aSK,O'2 =1 (J2,max,~x 1~
(J2,SK / Jerf
1,
degrees of utilization aSK,O'I , aSK,cr2 and aSK,cr3 are to be
inserted into Eq. (3.6.22) with equal (positive) signs
(summation). If they always act opposingly, however
aSK,O'3 = I (J3,max,ex < ,
1 *14, the degrees of utilization aSK,crl , aSK,cr2 and aSK,cr3
/ . 1- are to be inserted into Eq. (3.6.22) with different signs.
(J3,SK Je-r
In the general case - without knowing whether the
O'I,max,ex,'" extreme maximum principal stresses; the stresses act unidirectionally or opposingly - the degrees
extreme minimum principal stresses, of utilization are to be inserted into Eq. (3.6.22) both
O'I,min,ex , ..., are to be considered in the with equal or with different signs; then the least
same way as the extreme maximum favorable case is relevant.
principal stresses, Chapter 3.1.1.3,
Moreover the degrees of utilization calculated with
O'SK,1 , ... related static component strength,
O'l,min,ex , 0'2,min,ex and 0'3,min,ex are to be included in this
Chapter 3.4.1,
comparative evaluation.
total safety factor, Chapter 1.5.3.
All extreme principal stresses may be positive or
negative (or zero). Tension and compression are
generally to be considered separately.

3.6.3.2 Combined types of stress

The degree of utilization of block-shaped non-welded
components for the combined principal stresses is *8
aSK,crv = q . aNH + (l - q) . aoH~ 1, (3.6.20)
where *12

(3.6.21)

SI = aSK,O'I , (3.6.22)
s2 = aSK,O'2 ,
s3 = aSK,O'3 ,
aSK, 0'1, ... degrees of utilization, Eq. (3.6.17).

13 For example tension in direction 1 and tension indirection 2 from a

single loading affecting the component.
12 Max means that the maximum value of the three terms in the 14 For example tension in direction 1 and compression in direction 2
parenthetical expression is valid. from a single loading affecting the component.
 97
4.1 Characteristic service stresses 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using local stresses

4 Assessment of the fatigue

strength using local stresses *1
C"IR:-:-4l:-=EN:-:-.--=-do-'q Figure 4.1.1

4.0 General Stress cycle

Example:
According to this chapter the assessment of the fatigue stress cycle (normal stress),
strength using local stresses is to be carried out. stress ratio
a . -a .
Rai= m,1 a,l
, crm,i + 0' a.i
4.1 Parameters of the stress spectrum t

Contents Page
A special case is the constant amplitude spectrum,
4.1.0 General 97 consisting of one step i = j = 1 only. For normal stress
4.1.1 Characteristic service stresses there is O"a = O"a,i = 0"a,1, O"m = O"m,i = O"m,1 .
according to the kind of component
4.1.1.0 General Superposition
4.1.1.1 Rod-shaped (lD) components 98
4.1.1.2 Shell-shaped (2D) components Proportional or synchronous stresses
4.1.1.3 Block-shaped (3D) components 99 If several proportional or synchronous stress
4.1.2 Parameters of the service stress spectrum components act simultaneously at the reference point,
4.1.2.0 General Chapter 0.3.5, they are to be overlaid. For the same type
4.1.2.1 Mean stress spectrum of stress (for example unidirectional normal stresses
4.1.2.2 Stress ratio spectrum 0"a,1, 0"m,1 and O"a,2 , 0"m,2) the superposition is to be
carried out at this stage, so that in the following a single
4.1.3 Adjusting a stress spectrum to match the 100 stress component (O"a, O"m ...) exists for each type of stress
component constant amplitude S-N curve *3. For different types of stress (normal stress and shear
4.1.4 Determination of the parameters stress or normal stress in x- and y-direction) the
of a service stress spectrum superposition is to be carried out at the assessment
4.1.4.0 General stage, Chapter 4.6.
4.1.4.1 Standard stress spectrum
4.1.4.2 Class of utilization 102 Non-proportional stresses
4.1.4.3 Damage-equivalent stress amplitude
If several non-proportional stress components act
simultaneously at the reference point, Chapter 0.3.5,
4.1.0 General they are to be overlaid according to Chapter 5.10.

According to this chapter the parameters of the service

stress spectra are to be determined (spectra for
elastically determined local stresses). Spectra are 4.1.1 Characteristic service stresses
applicable for N > 104 cycles approximately. according to the kind of component
Relevant are the stress spectra of the individual stress 4.1.1.0 General
components. They are specified by a number of steps, Rod-shaped (lD), shell-shaped (2D) and block-shaped
i = I to j , giving the amplitudes O"a,i, ... and the related (3D) components are to be distinguished. They may be
mean values O"m,i , ... of stress cycles, Figure 4.1.1, as both non-weldedor welded.
well as the related numbers of cycles ni according to the
required fatigue life *2. For welded components the local stresses may be
determined as either structural stresses or effective
notch stresses.
Local stresses may be applied even if nominal stresses
can not be computed because a nominal cross-section
can not be clearly defined.
1Chapters 4.1 and 2.1 are basically identical.
2 As a rule a stress a spectrum is to be determined for normal service
conditions, see Footnote 2 on page 73. The largest amplitude 0a,1 ofa
service stress spectrum with its related mean stress value am,1serves as 3 Stress components acting opposingly can cancel each other in part or
the characteristic stress value. completely.
 98
4.1 Characteristic service stresses 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using local stresses

4.1.1.1 Rod-shaped (ID) components

Rod-shaped (ID) non-welded components
For rod-shaped (ID) non-welded components a local
normal stress Cl"zd = cr and a shear stress 'ts = 't are to be
considered *4. The respective amplitudes and mean
values are
Cl"a,i , 'ta,i ,
Cl"m,i ,'tm,i·
Rod-shaped (ID) welded components
For rod-shaped (lD) welded components the local
stresses (structural stresses or effective notch stresses *5)
are in general to be determined for the toe and the root
of a weld separately *6.
4.1.1.2 Shell-shaped (2D) components
The calculation for shell-shaped (2D) components may
also be applied to block-shaped (3D) components, if the
stresses Cl"x, Cl"y and 't at the surface are of interest only.
(4.1.1)
Shell-shaped (2D) non-welded components
For shell-shaped (2D) non-welded components the
(local) normal stresses in x- and y-direction, Cl"zdx = Cl"x
and Cl"zdy = Cl"y, as well as a shear stress 'ts = 't are to be
considered. The respective amplitudes and related mean
values are
(4.1.4)
Cl"a,x,i , Cl"a,y,i , 'ta,i ,
Cl"m,x,i , Cl"m,y,i , 'tm,i .

Calculation with structural stresses

Shell-shaped (2D) welded components
Structural stresses are to be applied to the toe of a weld For shell-shaped (2D) welded components,
only. For the root of a weld the calculation is to be Figure 0.0.6 and 0.0.7, the local stresses (structural
carried out with effective notch stresses *7. stresses or effective notch stresses) are in general to
When performing a calculation of welded rod-shaped be determined for the toe and the root of a weld
(ID) components with structural stresses a normal stress separately *6.
(normal stress) rr and a shear stress 't are to be
considered. The respective amplitudes and mean values
are Calculation with structural stresses

Cl"a,i , 'ta,i , (4.1.2)
Cl"m,i , 'tm,i .
Calculation with effective notch stresses
Effective notch stresses may be applied to the toe and to
the root of a weld *6.
When performing a calculation of welded rod-shaped
(ID) components with effective notch stresses a normal
stress Cl"K and a shear stress 'tK are to be considered. The
respective amplitudes and mean values are
Cl"K,a,i , 'tK,a,i , (4.1.3)
Cl"K,m,i , 'tK,m,i .
4 Rod-shaped (10) components may be subject to normal stresses
resulting from tension-compression and from bending and to shear
stresses resulting from shear and torsion. The case that these stresses may
occur separate from each other, is not considered here, however, as both
tension-compression stresses and bending stresses as well as both shear
stresses and torsion stresses are supposed to be contained in cr or in 't,
respectively.
5 Definition of structural stresses and of effective notch stresses see
Figure 0.0.6 and Figure 0.0.7, Chapter 5.4 and 5.5
Structural stresses are to be applied to the toe of a weld
only. For the root of a weld the calculation is to be
carried out with effective notch stresses *7 •
When performing a calculation of welded shell-shaped
(2D) components with structural stresses, the normal
stresses in the directions x and y , Cl"x and Cl"y , as well as
a shear stress 't are to be considered. The respective
amplitudes and mean values are
Cl"a.x.i » Cl"a.y.i » 'ta,i, (4.1.5)
Cl"m,x,i, Cl"m,y,i, 'tm,i·
Calculation with effective notch stresses
When performing a calculation of welded shell-shaped
(2D) components with effective notch stresses, the
normal stress in the direction of the maximum effective
notch stress, Cl"K , as well as the shear stress, 'tK , are to
be considered. The respective amplitudes and mean
values are
Cl"K,a,x,i , Cl"K,a,y,i , 'tK,a,i,. (4.1.6)
Cl"K,m,x,i, Cl"K,m,y,i, 'tK,m,i·

6 For welded components separate assessments of the fatigue strength for

both the toe and the root of the weld are to be carried out. Both
assessments are of the same kind, but in general the respective stresses
and fatigue classes FAT are different.

7 An alternative is an assessment of the throat section using nominal

stresses.
 99
4.1 Characteristic service stresses 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using local stresses

4.1.1.3 Block-shaped (3D) components O"m,i mean value in step i,

Block-shaped (3D) non-welded components N total number of cycles corresponding to the
required fatigue life
For block-shaped (3D) non-welded components the (required total number of cycles),
(local) principal stresses in the directions 1, 2 and 3, N = Lni (summed up for 1 to j),
O"I,zd = 0"1 , 0"2,zd = 0"2 and 0"3,zd = 0"3 , are to be n'I related number of cycles in step i,
considered. The respective amplitudes and related mean N, = Lni (summed up for 1 to i),
values are H total number of cycles of a given spectrum,
O"I,a,i , 0"2,a,i , 0"3,a,i, (4.1.7)
H = Hj = Lhi (summed up for 1 to j) *11,
O"I,m,i , 0"2,m,i, 0"3,m,i·
h·I related number of cycles in step i,
Caution: Independent of the particular values of the
Hi = Lhi (summed up for 1 to i),
principle stresses the directions 1 and 2 are defined here
step, i = 1 to j,
to be parallel to the free surface, the direction 3 to point
j total number of steps, step for the smallest
normally to the surface into the interior of the
amplitudes,
component.
Vzd damage potential.
The damage potential is defined by *12,
Block-shaped (3D) welded components
For certain applications block-shaped (3D) components J. h· [ O"ai )kcr.
may be welded at the surface, for example by a surfacing Ye = ke L I. - ' - (4.1.10)
welds. Then the calculation can be carried out as for i=1 H 0" a,I
shell-shaped (2D) welded components, if the stresses
where k, is the exponent ofthe component S-N curve.
o"x, O"y and 't are of interest only.
O"a,i /O"a,I and hi / H describe the shape of stress
spectrum. The amplitudes O"a,i are always positive, the
4.1.2 Parameters of the stress spectrum mean values O"m.i may be positive, negative, or zero.
4.1.2.0 General As a rule a restriction to the following kinds of stress
A stress spectrum describes the stress cycles contained spectra is possible: Mean stress spectra and stress ratio
spectra (with the fluctuating stress spectra as a special
in the stress history of concern *8.
case), Figure 2.1.2 *13.
If the stress cycles show variable amplitudes a stress
spectrum is to be determined for every stress component
4.1.2.1 Mean stress spectrum
*9. The constant amplitude stress spectrum may be
regarded in the following as a special case *10, for A constant mean stress applies to all steps of a mean
which i = 1 and stress spectrum:
O"a = O"a,i = 0"a,1 . (4.1.8) O"m,i = O"m· (4.1.11)
N= N = nj = nl
Parameters of stress spectrum are: 2.1.2.2 Stress ratio spectrum
0"a,1 characteristic (largest) stress amplitude equal to A constant stress ratio applies to all steps of a stress
the amplitude in step 1 of the stress spectrum, ratio spectrum:
O"a,i amplitude in step i,
O"a,i > 0, O"a,i+1/ O"a,i s 1, Res,i = Res , (4.1.12)

8 In the following all variables and equations are presented for the local
normal stress o only, but written with the appropriate indices they are
valid for all other types ofstress as well.
9 In this case anassessment ofthe variable amplitude fatigue strength is
tobe carried out.
lOin this case an assess~nt ofthe fatigue limit isto be carried out for
type I SoN curves if N= N ;:: ND,cr.,.2r an assessment ofthe endurance
limit for type II SoN curves if N = N ;:: NDcr II , respectively, oran
assessment for finite life based on the constant amplitude SoN curve
(formally similar.20 an assessment ~ the variable amplitude fatigue
strength) if N = N < ND,cr or N= N ;:: ND,cr, II for Typ I orTyp II
SoN curves, respectively. ND,cr orND,cr, II isthe number ofcycles at
the fatigue limit ofthe component constant amplitude SoN curve, Chapter
2.4.3.2.
11 The values N -total number ofcycles required -and II -total num~
ofcycles ofa given spectrum - are different ingeneral. The terms ni IN
and hi I H are equivalent.
12 The damage potential is a characteristic for the shape of a stress
spectrum. The values kcr = 5for normal stress and k't = 8for shear stress
are valid for non-welded components. The values kcr = 3 and ~ = 8 are
valid for welded components.
The term hi IH may be replaced by ni IN .
13 A mean stress spectrum, for example, results from a static load with
dynamic loads superimposed, a fluctuating stress spectrum, for example,
results for a crane hook when lifting variable loads.
 100
4.1 Characteristic service stresses 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using local stresses

4.1.3 Adjusting a stress spectrum to match

the component constant amplitude S-Ncurve
This chapter mainly applies to stress spectra the steps of
which do not have the same stress ratio.
A mean stress spectrum, for example, has different
amplitudes Ga,i ' and constant mean stress values Gm,i =
Gm ' and consequently the individual steps have different
stress ratios Ra,i . On the other hand the component
constant amplitude S-N curve, Chapter 4.4.3.2, is
derived for a constant stress ratio Ra . To allow the
proper application of Miner's rule, Chapter 4.4.3.1, all
steps of a spectrum, however, must have or must be
converted to that stress ratio Ra,i = Ra, Chapter 5.6.1.

4.1.4 Determination of the parameters of a

stress spectrum
<Tmin '.. '.-H' = 106
4.1.4.0 General
<T max
If the stress spectrum of a component under
consideration is not known, or in case of high demands
on its accuracy, the parameters of the stress spectrum
are to be determined by calculation, by simulation, or by
20'a,l 1 "I"
20'a,1
measurement. The determination of the stress spectrum
from a stress history has to be realized according to the
rainflow cycle counting procedure or in the sense of this
procedure.
O'roin = 0 - 6
-H=10 From a measured and graphically presented continuous
stress spectrum a stepped stress spectrum may be
Figure 4.1.2 Stress spectra *14. obtained according to Chapter 5.6.2.
Top: Mean stress spectrum. Midle: Stress ratio spectrum. Bottom: In case of existing experiences - dependent on the
Fluctuating stress spectrum. Example: The presented stress spectra are. component and its application - the determination of the
standard type stress spectra, basically defined by a binomial frequency parameters of a stress spectrum may be simplified by
distribution, a coefficient p = 1/3 , a total number of cyclesH = 106 , and applying a standard stress spectrum, a class of
extrapolated to the required total number of cyclesN. utilization or a damage-equivalent stress amplitude.

where 4.1.4.1 Standard stress spectrum

Ra = (Gm,i - Ga,i) / (Gm,i + Ga,i)
or
Gm,i / Ga,i = (1 + Ra) / (l - Ra).
Special case: Fluctuating stress spectrum
A constant stress ratio of zero applies to all steps of a
fluctuating stress spectrum:
(4.1.13) Standard stress spectra are used to describe the shape of
typical stress spectra. Standard stress spectra having a
binomial or an exponential frequency distribution, and
(4.1.14) modified by the spectrum parameter p , are presented in
Figure 4.1.3. In addition, damage potentials v,
according to Eq. (4.1.10) and Figure 4.1.1 are given in
the graphical presentations. (These apply to an exponent
of the component constant amplitude S-N curve k, = 5
and a total number of cycles H = 106 ).

Ra,i =Ra = 0, (4.1.15)

Parameters of a so derived stress spectrum
or
Ga,l characteristic (largest) stress amplitude equal to
Gm,i / Ga,i = 1. (4.1.16) the amplitude in step 1 of the stress spectrum,
N required total number of cycles,
Vcr or Ga,i / Ga,l and hi , i = 1 to j, according to the
shape of the standard stress spectrum
14 To derive the steps of a spectrum see chapter 5.6.2. Sm,i mean values, i = 1 to j.
 101
4.1 Characteristic service stresses 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using local stresses

Table 4.1.1 Damage potential v, and v- for standard

stress spectra having a binomial or exponential
frequency distribution, modified by the spectrum
parameter p, a total number of cycles H = 106 , for non-
welded and welded components, for normal stress and
shear stress (exponents of the constant amplitude S-N
curve k, and k, ).

non-welded welded
p binom. I expon. binom. Expon,
Vcr normal stress
ka= 5 k, =3
0,326 0,196 0,267 0,155
Step i Ga i / Ga I h·I H-1 °
1/6 0,400 0,297 0,366 0,286
P
1 1
° 1
1/3
1
2/3
2 2
1/3
1/2
0,499
0,615
0,430
0,570
0,483
0,608
0,426
0,569
2 0,950 0,967 0,983 16 18 2/3 0,739 0,713 0,737 0,712
3 0,850 0,900 0,950 280 298 5/6 0,868 0,856 0,868 0,856
4 0,725 0,817 0,908 2720 3018 1 1 1 1 1
5 0,575 0,717 0,858 20000 23000 shear stress
Vt
6 0,425 0,617 0,808 92000 115000
k, =8 k, = 5
7 0,275 0,517 0,758 280000 395000
0,399 0,275 0,326 0,196
8 0,125 0,417 0,708 604982 1000000 °
1/6 0,452 0,330 0,400 0,297
1/3 0,527 0,438 0,499 0,430
1/2 0,627 0,573 0,615 0,570
1
1,0 2~3 1 2/3 0,743 0,713 0,739 0,713
4
aa,i 5/6 0,869 0,856 0,868 0,856
p
aa,l 8 1 1 1 1 1
2/3
0,5
1/3

Analytical relationship: For standard stress spectra

with spectrum parameters p > °
(p = 1/6, 1/3, 1/2, 2/3,
5/6) there is

: a,i ) = p + (1- p) .[:a,i) (4.1.17)

[
a.l p a,l p=o

Step i Ga i/ Gal hi H·1

P
1 1
° 1
1/3
1
2/3
2 2 Application: In case of existing experiences about the
2 0,875 0,917 0,958 10 12 shape of the stress spectrum a suitable standard stress
3 0,750 0,833 0,917 64 76 spectrum may be applied to assess the variable
4 0,625 0,750 0,875 340 416
amplitude fatigue strength in two ways:
5 0,500 0,667 0,833 2000 2400 - Application of the damage potential v.,; Eq. (4.1.10)
6 0,375 0,583 0,792 11000 13400 for an assessment of the variable amplitude fatigue
7 0,250 0,500 0,750 61600 75000 strength according to the elementary version of
8 0,125 0,417 0,708 924984 1000000 Miner's rule, Chapter 4.4.3.1.

Figure 4.1.3 Standard stress spectra
Top: Binomial distribution. Bottom: Exponential distribution (straight
line distribution). Spectrum parameter p, total number of cycles H = Hj
= ~ hi = 106, number of steps j = 8 , damage potential Vcr for an exponent
k cr = 5 of the component constant amplitude S-N curve.
- Application of the data on Ga,i / Ga,1 and hi of the
steps i = 1 to j from Figure 4.1.3 for assessing the
variable amplitude fatigue strength according to the
consistent version of Miner's rule, Chapter 4.4.3.1.
The appropriate standard stress spectrum has to be
specified separate from this guideline.
 102
4.1 Characteristic service stresses 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using local stresses

4.1.4.2 Class of utilization *15 question. In particular it is defined by the shape

of the stress
A class of utilization is an approximately damage-
equivalent combination of different shapes of stress cra. WL
spectra and of specific figures of the required total
numbers of cycles, Figure 4.1.4, see also Chapter 5.7.

cra,1
Cl'a,cJt ~~......,-,...----i ....--~~--

N Characteristic stress amplitude 0"a,1, required total number ofcycles.
Figure 4.1.4 Spectra corresponding to the same class of
utilization
Example: Welded component, stress spectra with binomial distribution,
normal stress. All three stress spectra are approximately damage-
equivalent and correspond to the same class of utilization B5,
Table 5.7.4.
ND,Q' N Iii'
Figure 4.1.5 Damage-equivalent stress amplitude
Component constant amplitude S-N. curve WL, number of cycles at the
knee point ND cr, component variable amplitude fatigue life curve LL.
The damage-equivalent stress amplitude O"a,eff is. assigned to ND,O" and
hence itallows an assessment ofthe variable amplitude fatigue strength to
be performed asan assessment ofthe fatigue limit.
spectrum, the required total number of cycles and the
characteristic (largest) stress amplitude, Figure 4.1.5.

Parameters of the so derived stress spectrum

Parameters of a so derived stress spectrum
O"a,eff damage-equivalent stress amplitude
0"a,1 characteristic (largest) stress amplitude equal to
the amplitude in step 1 of the stress spectrum, O"m related mean value.
B class of utilization (a combination of the
shape of the stress spectrum and the required
total number of cycles), Analytical relationship: Based on the elementary
O"m mean stress *16. version of Miner's rule the damage-equivalent stress
amplitude is obtained as d7
Analytical relationship: See Chapter 5.7.
1 j
0"a.eff "" k -
N _ . '" n' ·crak<!I
L. 1
(4.1.18)
D,cr i=1 '
Application: In case of existing experiences about the
shape of stress spectrum and the required total number (N / ND,cr )11ks . Vcr . 0"a,1 ,
of cycles a FEM-class of loading may be applied to the
assessment of the variable amplitude fatigue strength, exponent of the component constant
Chapter 2.4.3.1. amplitude S-N curve
ND,O" number of cycles at the knee point of the
The appropriate class of utilization has to be specified component constant amplitude S-N curve,
separate from this guideline. j, i, n, ... see (4.1.9),
VO" damage potential, Eq. (4. 1.10).

4.1.4.3 Damage-equivalent stress amplitude
The damage-equivalent stress amplitude is a constant
stress amplitude with an assigned number of cycles
equal to the number of cycles at the knee point of the
component constant amplitude S-N curve, ND CJ • It is
damage-equivalent to the stress spectrum in
Application: In case of existing experiences about the
damaging effect of the stress spectrum a damage-
equivalent stress amplitude O"a,eff may be applied. It
allows an assessment of the variable amplitude fatigue
strength to be performed as an assessment of the fatigue
limit, Chapter 2.6.
The damage-equivalent stress amplitude has to be
specified separate of this guideline.

15 Following DIN 15018.

17 Eq. (4.1.18) is based on a critical damage sum DM = 1, Chapter
16 The determination ofan individual mean stresses crm,i is not possible. 4.4.3.1.
 103
4.2 Material parameters 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength
with local stresses

4.2 Material properties *1 1R42 EN.dog fw,cr fatigue strength factor for completely reversed
normal stress, Chapter 4.2.2,
Contents Page fW,"t fatigue strength factor for completely reversed
4.2.0 General 47 shear stress, Chapter 4.2.2,
R m tensile strength, Chapter 3.2.1.1.
4.2.1 Component values according to standards
4.2.1.0 General Caution: For non-welded wrought and cast aluminum
4.2.1.1 Non-welded components alloys the fatigue limit is different from the endurance
4.2.1.2 Welded components limit associated with N ~ No.e.n =ND,"t,n= lOS cycles.
4.2.2 Fatigue strength factors 48
for normal stress and for shear stress
4.2.1.2 Welded components
4.2.3 Temperature factor
4.2.3.0 General For the base material of welded components the material
4.2.3.1 Normal temperature fatigue strength for completely reversed stress are the
4.2.3.2 Low temperature same as for non-welded components.
4.2.3.3 Elevated temperature Steel and cast iron materials
For the toe and the root of the weld of professionally
4.2.0 General welded components from weldable structural steel *5
According to this chapter the material fatigue strength specific values of the fatigue strength apply independent
values (component values according to standards) are to of the kind of material. These are for completely
be determined, These are the material fatigue limit for reversed normal stress at N ~ ND,cr = 5' 106 cycles
completely reversed normal stress, aW,zd , and shear and for completely reversed shear stress at
stress, "Cw,s ' as well as further characteristics *2 N ~ ND,"t = 1 . lOS cycles *6, Chapter 5.5,
aW,zd = aw,w = 92 MPa, (4.2.3)
4.2.1 Component values according to "Cw,s = "Cw,w = 37 MPa.
standards
Caution: For other kinds of material (conditionally
4.2.1.0 General weldable steel, stainless steel, weldable cast iron
The determination of the material fatigue strength is material) these values are to be considered as
different for non-welded and for welded components. provisional and are to be applied with caution.
Aluminum alloys
4.2.1.1 Non-welded components For the toe and the root of the weld of professionally
For non-welded components the values according to welded components from aluminum alloys *5 specific
standards of the material fatigue strength for completely values of the fatigue strength apply in analogy to steel
independent of the kind of material. These are for
reversed normal stress and shear stress *3 and for a
completely reversed normal stress at N ~ ND,cr = 5 . 106
number of cycles N = 106 *4 are
cycles and for completely reversed shear stress at
aW,zd = fw,cr . Rm , (4.2.1) N ~ ND,"t = 1 . 108 cycles *6, Chapter 5.5,
rw., = fW,"t' aW,zd, (4.2.4)
aW,zd = aw,w = 33 MPa,
"Cw,s = "Cw,w = 13 MPa.

I Chapters 2.2 and 4.2 are identical. Caution: These values are provisional and are to be
applied with caution *7 .
2 An influence offrequency on the material fatigue strength values is not
considered up to now although it might be ofimportance for aluminum
alloys.
4 The values crW.zd and "tw.s correspond tothe fatigue limit which isequal
3 For the tensile strength according to standards, Rm , a probability of
survival Po = 97,5 % ispresumed. That probability should also apply to to the endurance limit of steel and cast iron material, but not of
aluminum alloys, however, Figure 4.4.5 and Chapter 5.1.0.
the values crW,zd and "tW,s computed from Rm . Moreover Eq. (1.2.1)
applies here too: 5 Weld imperfections occurring with normal production standards are
crw zd = Kd m. KA . crw zd N, (2.2.2) allowable.
"tw~ = Kd:n· KA'"tW s'N',
" " 6 The values crw.w and "tw.w correspond tothe fatigue limit which is equal
Kd,m technological size factor as for the tensile strength, tothe endurance limit ofwelded steel and cast iron material aswell as of
Chapter 3.2.2. welded aluminum alloys, Figure 4.4.6 and Chapter 5.1.0.
KA anisotropy factor, Chapter 3.2.3,
crW,zd,N, ... semi-finished product fatigue strength value according to 7 Values derived from an average relation of0,36 ofthe FAT classes for
standards, Chapter 5.1. aluminum alloys and for structural steel, Chapter 5.4.
 104
4.2 Material parameters 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength
with local stresses

4.2.2 Fatigue strength factors for normal For normal temperature the temperature factor is
stress and for shear stress
KT,D'" 1. (4.2.5)
The fatigue strength factor for completely reversed
normal stress, fw,O" , is the quotient of the axial fatigue
strength value for completely reversed stress divided by 4.2.3.2 Low temperature
the tensile strength, Table 4.2.1.
Temperatures below the values listed above are outside
The fatigue strength factor for shear stress, fw,~ , the field of application of this guideline.
considers that the material fatigue strength is lower for
shear stress than for normal stress, Table 4.2.1.
4.2.3.3 Elevated temperature
Table 4.2.1 Fatigue strength factors for completely In the field of elevated temperatures - up to SOO°C for
reversed normal stress, fw,O" , and shear stress, fw,~ ~1. steel and cast iron materials and up to 200°C for
aluminum materials - the influence of the temperature
Kind of material fw,O" fw,~ on the fatigue strength is to be considered. For elevated
temperature the fatigue strength values for completely
Case hardening steel 0,40 ~2 0,577 ~2 ~3
reversed normal stress and shear stress are
Stainless steel 0,40 ~4 0,577
Forging steel 0,40 ~4 0,577 <JW,zd,T = KT,D . <JW,zd, (4.2.6)
Steel other than these 0,45 0,577 't:W,s,T = KT,D . 't:w,s ,
GS 0,34 0,577 KT,D temperature factor, Eq. (4.2.7) to (4.2.11),
GGG 0,34 0,65 <JW,zd material fatigue strength value for completely
GT 0,30 0,75 reversed normal stress, Chapter 4.2.1.1 and
GG 0,30 0,85 4.2.1.2.
Wrought aluminum alloys 0,30 ~5 0,577 't:W,s material fatigue strength value for completely
Cast aluminum alloys 0,30 ~5 0,75 reversed normal stress, Chapter 4.2. 1. 1 and
4.2.1.2.
~1 fw 0" and fw ~ are valid fora number of cycles N = 106 •
fw' ~ is equal 'to f~ , Table 3.2.5.
~2 Bla'nk-hardened. The influence of the carburization on the According to the temperature T the temperature factor
component fatigue strength is to be considered by the surface KT,D is
treatment factor, Kv, Chapter 4.3.4.
~3 0,577 = 1//3, according tothe v. Mises criterion. Also valid for for fme grain structural steel, T > 60 DC:
welded components. KT,D"'I-1O-3'T/oC, (4.2.7)
~4 Preliminary values.
~5 fW,O" does not correspond tothe endurance limit for N = co here! for other kinds of steel *7, T> 100°C, Figure 4.2.1:
KT,D = 1-1,4' 10- 3. (T / °C-100), (4.2.8)
for GS, T> 100°C:
4.2.3 Temperature factor
KT,D = 1- 1,2 . 10 -3. (T / °C- 100), (4.2.9)
4.2.3.0 General
- for GGG, GT and GG, T > 100°C, Figure 4.2.1:
The temperature factor considers that the material KT,D'" 1- aT,D' (10 - 3. T / 0C)2, (4.2.10)
fatigue strength for completely reversed stress decreases
with increasing temperature. for aluminum alloys, T > 50°C:
KT,D = 1- 1,2' 10 -3. (T / °C - 50)2, (4.2.11)
Normal temperature, low temperature and elevated Figure 3.2.3 in the Chapter 3.2,
temperature are to be distinguished.
aT,D Constant, Table 4.2.2.
4.2.3.1 Normal temperature
Normal temperatures are as follows:
for fine grain structural steel from -40°C to 60°C,
- for other kinds of steel from -40°C to + 100°C, Table 4.2.2 Constant aT,D *8.
for cast iron materials from -25°C to + 100°C,
Kind of material GGG GT GG
- for age-hardening aluminum alloys
aT,D 1,6 1,3 1,0
from -25°C to 50°C,
- for non-age-hardening aluminum alloys
from -25°C to 100°e.

8 Forstainless steel novalues are known up to now.

 105
4.2 Material parameters 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength
with local stresses

Eq. (4.2.7) to (4.2.10) apply to steel and cast iron

Rm,T High temperature
R m 'jm strength Rm,T
I I
o4 I~-+--''r-~:-- Rp,T Rp I High temperature
, Rp'R m ' jp yieldstreilgth Rp,T
1 % creep limit Rp;Tt
0,3t----K:--+---",;:t-''':--tt--r---,.-J . Rp,Tt It p '1
R p . Rm ' jpt
Creep Strength R,.,Tt
0,2 m ........."'f-...,...,..,..,.,..,~=--+~-fu~-1 Rm,T~ 1 strength so that the assessment is governed by the static
R';;"""' jmt
materials from the indicated temperature T up to 500°C.
Eq. (4.2.11) applies to aluminum alloys up to 200°C.
The values CYW,zd,T and 1:W,s,T are not explicitly needed
for an assessment of the fatigue strength, as only the
temperature factor KT,D is used.
For elevated temperature, and in particular when the
mean stress Sm, i:- 0 , the fatigue strength in terms of
the maximum stress may be higher than the static
strength.

0;1

o
o 100 ZOO 300 400 500
2.2.1. Tin "C

Creep$trengthR,.;Tt
Rm,Tt I
Rm 'jmt

0,1 t====J=::='=b--L....,,=-1-..+1

o
o 100 200 300 400 500
Z,2.1b Till 'c

Figure 4.2.1 Temperature dependent values of the

static strength and of the fatigue strength plotted for
comparison.
Safety factorsj according to Chapter 3.5 or 4.5, respectively.

Rm,TI Rm = KT,m, Rp,T I Rp = KT,p,

Rm,Tt l Rm = KTt,m, Rp,Tt l Rp = KTt,p'
5
Rm,T, Rp,T as well as Rm, Tt, Rp,Tt for t = 10 h.
Fatigue strength value at elevated temperature :
crW,zd,T I crW,zd = KT,D·
Top: Non-alloyed structural steel, as in the Figure 3.2.2,
Rp I Rm = n, I R m = 0,65 , crW,zd I Rm = 0,45,
Jm = 2,0, Jp = jmt = 1,5, Jpt = 1,0, in = 1,5 .
Bottom: GG, as in Figure 3.2.2,
crW,zd I Rm = 0,30, Jm = 3,0, Jrnt = in = 2,4 .
 106
4.3 Design parameters 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using local stresses

KwK,crx = (4.3.2)
4.3 Design parameters 1R43 EN.dog
=_1_'(1+_1_.(_1_ _ 1)) 1
Content Page ncr,x Kf KR,cr K y .K s .KNL,E '
4.3.0 General 106

'(1+~.(_1
w
4.3.1 Design factors K : ,O"Y1= -1)1
4.3.1.0 General
ncr,y Kf KR,cr ) K y .K s .KNL,E
4.3.1.1 Non-welded components
4.3.1.2 Welded components 107 KwK,~ =

4.3.2
4.3.2.0
Kt-K f ratios
General
108
~ n1, {1+ ~f K~, -I)J Ky l Ks
-( >
4.3.2.1 Computation of Kj-K, ratios
4.3.2.2 Kj-K, ratio for superimposed notches 109
The design factors of block-shaped non-welded
4.3.3 Roughness factor components for the principle stresses in the directions 1,
4.3.4 Surface treatment and coating factor 110 2 and 3 (normal to the surface) are *2
4.3.5 Constant KNL,E III
4.3.6 Fatigue classes (FAT) 112 KWK,crl = (4.3.3)

~ n:,1 {1+ ~f -(K~,o -I)) >KYKS\N~E

4.3.7 Thickness factor

4.3.0 General K WK,cr2 =

1
According to this chapter the design parameters are to =_1 .(1+-2-.(_1 -1)]
be determined in terms of design factors. n cr,2 Kf K R,«
KWK,cr3 =

4.3.1 Design factors

4.3.1.0 General
++ ~f -( K~o -I)) KYKS\N~E
>

Non-welded and welded components are to be ncr, .., Kt-K f ratio, Chapter 4.3.2,
distinguished. Kf constant, Table 4.3.1,
if no better estimate is available,
KR,cr, ... roughness factor, Chapter 4.3.3,
4.3.1.1 Non-welded components Ky surface treatment factor, Chapter 4.3.4,
Ks coating factor, Chapter 4.3.4,
Rod-shaped (lD), shell-shaped (2D) and block-shaped constant for GG, Chapter 4.3.5.
KNL,E
(3D) non-welded components are to be distinguished.
The design factors of rod-shaped (lD) non-welded
Table 4.3.1 Constant K, .
components for normal stress and for shear stress are ·1
KWK,cr = (4.3.1) Kind of Steel GS GGG GT GG

~ n1 {I+ ~f K~,o -I)) >K y >KS\N~E

material wrought cast
Al-alloys Al-alloys
0
-( '
Kf 2,0 2,0 1,5 1,2 1,0
KWK,~ =

=_1
n,
'(1+~.(_1
x,
-1))' 1
KR,~
Ky.K s
A better estimate of K f may be obtained from stress
concentration factors Kt,cr and Kt,~ of a substitute
structure, Chapter 5.12, and the Kt-K f ratios, Chapter
4.3.2.1: Kf~Kt:cr=Kt,cr/ncr or Kf~Kf,~=Kt,~/n~.
The design factors of shell-shaped (2D) non-welded
components for normal stresses in the directions x and y
as well as for shear stress are

1 About the purpose ofthe constant Kf see Footnote 1 inChapter 2.3.

2 The Kt-Kf ratio in direction 3 normal to the surface, ",,3. , is not

contained in Eq. (4.3.3) since a stress gradient normal tothe surface isnot
considered.
 107
4.3 Design parameters 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using local stresses

4,3.1.2 Welded components FAT fatigue class, Chapter 4.3.6,

ft thickness factor, Chapter 4.3.7,
For the base material of welded components the design
Kv surface treatment factor, Chapter 4.3.4 *5,
factors are to be computed as for non-welded
components. Kg coating factor, Chapter 4.3.4;
KNL,E constant for GG, Chapter 4.3.5.
The design factors for the toe and for the root of a weld
The fatigue classes FAT are in general different for
are in general to be determined separately, since the
normal stresses in the directions x and y as well as for
local stresses and the fatigue classes (FAT) may be
different. shear stress.

Rod-shaped (lD), shell-shaped (2D) and block-shaped For certain applications block-shaped (3D) components
(3D) welded components are to be distinguished. The may be welded at the surface, for example by surfacing
calculation can be carried out with structural stresses or welds. Then the design factors are to be calculated as for
with effective notch stresses. shell-shaped (2D) welded components.

Calculation with structural stresses Calculation with effective notch stresses

Steel and cast iron material Steel and cast iron material as well as aluminum
alloys
The design factors of rod-shaped (lD) welded
The design factors of rod-shaped (lD) welded
components made of steel or of cast iron materials *3 for
steel, of cast iron materials l'' , and
components made of ~
normal stress and for shear stress are,
of a1uminum alloys for normal stress and for shear
KWK,cr = 225 / (FAT' ft' Kv KNL,E), (4.3.4) stress are *6,
KWK,~ = 145/ (FAT' ft' Ko ),
KWK,crK = 1/ (Kv Kg' KNL,E), (4.3.8)
The design factors of shell-shaped (2D) welded KWK,~K = 1/ !Ky' Kg).
components for normal stresses in the directions x and y
as well as for shear stress are For shell-shaped (2D) welded components, as a rule,
only the effective notch stress in direction of the
KWK,crx = 225 / (FAT' ft' Ky' KNL,E), (4.3.5) maximum effective notch stress and the corresponding
KwK,cry = 225 / (FAT' ft' Kv KNL,E), shear stress are to be considered. The design factors are
KwK,~ = 145/ (FAT' ft' Ko ). as before

Aluminum alloys KWK,crK = 1 / (Ko . Kg . KNL,E ), (4.3.9)

KWK,~K = 1/ (Ky' Kg),
The design factors of rod-shaped (lD) welded
Kv surface treatment factor, Chapter 4.3.4 *5,
components from aluminum alloys *4 for normal stress
Ks coating factor, Chapter 4.3.4,
and for shear stress are,
KNL,E constant for GG, Chapter 4.3.5
KWK,cr = 81 / (FAT' ft' Ky' Kg), (4.3.6)
For certain applications block-shaped (3D) components
KwK,~ = 52 / (FAT' ft' Ky' Ks).
may be welded at the surface, for example by surfacing
welds. Then the design factors are to be calculated as for
The design factors of shell-shaped (2D) welded shell-shaped (2D) welded components.
components for normal stresses in the directions x and y
as well as for shear stress are
KWK,sx = 81 / (FAT' ft' Ky' Kg), (4.3.7)
KwK,sy = 81 / (FAT' ft' Ky' Kg),
KwK,~ = 52/ (FAT' fi' Ky' Kg),

3 To some part the FAT values where derived with reference to the IIW
recommendations and Eurocode 3 (Ref. /9/, /81). Moreover the design
factors are supposed tobe valid, however, not only for weldable structural
ste~1 but also for other kinds of steel (conditionally weldable steel, 5 As a rule Ky is not relevant for welded components, that is Ky = I.
stainless steel) and weldable cast iron materials).
6 On principle for steel: KWK,crK = 225 / (FAT ... ) where FAT = 225,
4 To some part the FAT values where derived with reference tothe IIW and K~K,~K = 145 / (FAT ... ) where FAT = 145; aluminum alloys
reco~endations (Ref. /91). Moreover the design factors are supposed to
accordingly, Weld quality conforming tonormal production standard.
be v.ahd, however, for all weldable aluminum alloys, except the
aluminum alloys 5000, 6000 and 7000. Numerical values see Footnote 7 In combination with effective notch stresses the thickness factor ft is not
on page 103. applied, since the thickness effect isaccounted for by the stress analysis.
 108 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength
4.3 Design parameters
using local stresses

4.3.2 Kt-Kr ratios 3

~m in MP;---:: 350
100
4.3.2.0 General GG~V
400
/2.·~ 900
The Kj-K, ratios nO", ... allow for an influence on the
fatigue strength resulting from the design (contour and
2
//'~~it// 800
size) of a non-welded component. / V, ~ [GGG-: 400

., ',.I "/V
/ 1/0.65'
Condition for the application of a Kj-K; ratio is a stress v
/ / 1 10,70 800
gradient normal to the direction of stress as shown in 1,4 ~/1/ . 7'"" i -: 400
Figure 3.3.1 *7. V/ /V
/ 1 10,75 G S:/
800
IIV~
1/
/ ~/10,80 -: //'
Stah~ 1200
1,2 /

-:V
~
/ 1/0,85
4.3.2.1 Computation of Kt-Kr ratios
Kt-Kr ratios for normal stress
1,1
./J V /{;!~ ,,-/
The Kt-Kr ratio for normal stress, Ocr, Figure 4.3.1, is to j/I/;;/ I / / /
~/I//il /
/
be computed from the related stress gradient GO" after / 110,95
/v
Eq. (4.3.13) to (4.3.15).
1,04 II {III ill /
ForG 0" ;;;; 0,1 rnm" 1 there is (4.3.13) Iff; 1/ 1 //
n 0" = 1 +G 0" . mm Itl r
-(a o -0,5+ Rm )
bo ·MPa ,
1,02
1~ /II til ,

~(f;
2/ do = r

for 0,1 mm" 1 <00" ;;;; 1 mm" 1 there is 0,267-

1,01 \ I I !
n 0" = 1 +.~ G 0" . mm . 10 (
- ao+ R)m
bo . MPa (4.3.14)
.0,01 0,02 0,05 0,1 0,2 0,5 2 5 10
,

for 1 mrrr ! < GO";;;; 100 mm" 1 there is Figure 4.3.1 Kt-Kr ratios Ocr for normal stress.

n0" = 1 +~G 0" -rnm l O (

- ao+ R)
m
bo·MPa (4.3.15)
The diagram may be extended up to GO"; 100 mm -1.
r
, Indicated numerical values 1/0,65 to 1/0,95: Difference of the fatigue
limit for completely reversed stress in tension-compression and in
bending, valid for the material test specimen of the diameter do = 7,5 mm.
ao, bo constants, Table 4.3.2.
Not included in the figure 4.3.1:

Stainless steel. Threshold values forGO" = 1 mm -1 :

largest value. n-, = 1,27 for Rm = 400 MPa and
Table 4.3.2 Constants aa and bo . smallest value: "cr = 1,14 for Rm = 1070 MPa.

Kind Stain- Other GS GGG GT GG Wrought aluminum alloys: Threshold values forGO" = 1 mm -1 :
of less kinds largest value:"cr = 1,69 for Rm = 95 MPa and
mate- steel of smallest value:"cr = 1,18 for Rm = 590 MPa.
rial steel
Cast aluminum alloys: Threshold values for: GO" = 1 mm -1 :
aa 0,40 0,50 0,25 0,05 -0,05 -0,05 largest value: "cr = 2,02 for Rm = 130 MPa and
bo 2400 2700 2000 3200 3200 3200 smallest value: "cr = 1,88 for Rm = 330 MPa.

Kind of material Wrought Cast

Al-allovs Al-allovs For surface hardened components *8 (components with
thermal or with chemo-thermal surface treatment) the
aa 0,05 -0,05
KcK r ratios are lower than for non surface hardened
bo 850 3200 components *9 *10.

8 Does not apply to cold rolled or shot peened surfaces. See the summary
7 A stress gradient in direction of stress is supposed not to cause any of special features of the fatigue strength of surface hardened components,
effect. This restriction concerns block-shaped (3D) components only. Chapter 5.8
 109
4.3 Design parameters 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using local stresses

Kt-K, ratios for shear stress The point below the surface is to be chosen such that the
maximum values of Ga and G, being calculated.
The Kj-K. ratio for shear stress, n, , is to be computed
from the related stress gradient G, according to Eq. If stress amplitudes below the surface (as in Figure 4.3.2
(4.3.13) to (4.3.15), after having replaced a by 't and provided by an FE analysis, e.g.) are not available, an
the tensile strength Rm by fw" . Rm , where fw" is the approximate computation of the related stress gradients
fatigue strength factor for shear stress, Table 4.2.1. for normal stress and for shear stress is as follows:
With the radius r at the reference point (influence of the
contour) and the dimension d (influence of a loading in
Related stress gradients
bending or torsion) there is *12
The related stress gradients normal to the direction of
G a = 2 / r + 2 / d, (4.3.17)
stress , G a and G, necessary to compute the KcK r
ratios, are to be determined from the stress amplitudes G, = 1/ r + 2 / d.
for normal stress, ()a , and for shear stress, 't a , at the
reference point and a point below the reference point, 4.3.2.2 Kt-K, ratio for superimposed notches
Figure 4.3.2 * 11,
For superimposed notches - for example a boring
located in a groove, the partial K-K; ratios of which are
G a=_l- . ",,"aa =_1 . (1- a2a), (4.3.16)
a la ",,"s ",,"s a la n 1 and n2 according to the related stress gradients G I
and G 2 - a most favorable Kj-K, ratio n is to be
G, =_1_ . ",,"'t a =_1 '(1- 't2a) , computed for a related stress gradient
'tla ",,"s ",,"s 'tla
G=Gl+ G 2 ' (4.3.24)
ala, 'tla stress amplitudes at the reference point,
If the distance of notches is 2 r or above
a2a, 't2a stress amplitudes in a distance ",,"s below, (where r is the larger one of both radii) *13 a
",,"s distance between the reference point and superposition is not to be considered. If a value of a
the neighboring point below the surface, radius is missing, a fictitious radius may be estimated
Figure 4.3.2.
fromEq. (4.3.17)(for example r:::o 2/G a ) .

4.3.3 Roughness factor

The roughness factors KRcr or KR" accounts for the
Figure 4.3.2 influence of the surface roughness on the fatigue
Stress amplitudes at the strength of the component.
reference point and below
the surface. The roughness factors valid for polished surface is
KR,cr = KR" = 1. (4.3.25)
For a rolling skin, a forging skin or the skin of castings
an average roughness value R, = 200 urn applies.
9 The Kt - Kf ratio for a crack originating inthe hardened surface layer is The roughness factors for normal stress, Figure 4.3.3,
lower because the tensile strength Rm ofthe hard surface layer is higher and for shear stress are *14 (4.3.26)
than the tensile strength Rm ofthe core material according tothe material
standard. KR,cr = 1- aR,a . 19 (Rz / urn) . Ig(2Rm / Rm,N,min ),
The Kt - Kf ratio for a crack origklating i!!,.the core material is lower KR" = 1- f w" . aR,cr . 19 (R, /um) . Ig(2Rm1Rm, N, miJ,
because the related stress gradient Oa (or 0, ) in the core material has
decreased from its maximum value atthe surface. aR,cr constant, Table 4.3.4,
10 The tensile strength of the surface layer may be estimated R, average roughness of the surface of the
approximately as Rm = (3,3 . HV) MPa , where HV is the Vickers component in um, according to DIN 4768,
hardness number. As this equation, however, was not specifically tensile strength, Chapter 3.2.1.1,
established for hardened surface layers, itistobe applied with caution. In Rm
particular the fatigue strength value aw zd ofthe hardened surface layer Rm,N,min constant, Table 4.3.4,
must not be derived from that estimate of the tensile strength fw" fatigue strength factor for shear stress,
(aW,zd* fW,a' Rm)· Table 4.2.1.
11 For Eq. (4.3.16) the tangent at al. is approximately replaced by the
secant.
If no stress gradient exists, then na = n, = I . In general a stress
gradient normal to the direction ofstress and normal tothe surface does
exist for the stress components ax , ay , t , at and cr2 . A stress gradient in
direction ofstress isnot considered, that is"cr,3 = I.
4.3 Design parameters
110
4 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using local stresses
1
r

Table 4.3.4 Constant aR,oo and minimum tensile

1,0 .... strength, Rm,N,min , of the kind of material considered.
;:::--::1- 1,6
~ ;:::: r-... ..,
l- Kind of Steel GS GGG GT GG
t--.. 3,2 = material
~ ~ r-, :----- I--...
~
e
==
aR,oo 0,22 0,20 0,16 0,12 0,06
~
"~

0,8
R ~ "-'~ 400 400 400 350 100
...>:1'\., f" r-
~
Rm,N,min
inMPa
~'"
~ r-., ~
0,7 <I'~~,
25
Kind of Wrought Cast
i' ~ material aluminum alloys aluminum alloys
0,6
J.Q.o aR,oo 0,22 0,20

0,5 20o Rm,N,min 133 133

inMPa

0,4
300 500 700 1000 2000
2.3.3a RminMPa
4.3.4 Surface treatment factor and
coating factor
KR,11
1,0 ~---r---'-

--l" The surface treatment factor, Kv , allows for the

influence of a treated surface layer on the fatigue
O9 l-...---+---+-~-..;;j0 ,8 83 strength of the component.
' 0
II Without a surface treatment there is
0,8 k y = 1. (4.3.28)
For components with surface treatment ·8 the surface
0, 1l----l-·----''Y-,~;:X;;rl---H treatment factor depends on whether a crack origin is to
be expected at the surface or in the core. Essential
factors of influence are the ratio of the fatigue limits of
400 600 800 IOOO the surface layer and of the core material, as well as the
Rut in .MPa fiir GS, ('..GG, GT ratio of the local stress values on the surface and in the
'. • ! core just below the surface layer.
100 200 300 400
Rm in MPa fiir cc
Upper and lower limits of the surface treatment factors
Z.3.3b
for steel and cast iron materials are given in Table 4.3.5.
Figure 4.3.3 Roughness factor KR,oo . A definite value is to be determined by the user *15.

Top: Steel. The coating factor Ks allows for the influence of a

Bottom: Cast iron material with skin, surface coating on the fatigue strength of a component
steel with rolling skin for comparison • 14 made of an aluminum alloy.
For steel and cast iron materials there is
For surface hardened components '8 and an expected Ks = 1. (4.3.29)
crack origin at the surface the roughness factor is less
favorable (smaller) than for components not surface For aluminum alloys without coating there is
hardened, because of the higher tensile strength Rm of Ks = 1. (4.3.30)
the hardened surface layer *10.
For aluminum alloys with coating there is

12 For shell-shaped (2D) componen~ -

Ks < 1. (4.3.31)
Goo,x , rx-
an.!Goo,y , ry.
For block-shaped (3D) components Goo,l, q and Goo,2 , r2 " Ks for example after Figure 4.3.4 (provisional values).
13 The value 2r is likely to be on the safe side.
14 In particular residual stresses as a result of manufacturing and ofa
surface treatment are determining the influence of the surface on the
component fatigue limit, rather than the surface roughness. According to
the current state of knowledge, however, improved regulations to allow 15 Provided that the procedures ofthe surface treatment can be applied to
for the surface effect are not yet developed, so the traditional equations components ofaluminum alloys, the Ko -values for cast iron. material
based on aroughness value have tobe accepted for the time being. may approximately be taken into account.
4.3 Design parameters
III
4 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using local stresses

Table 4.3.5 Upper and lower limits of the surface Ks 0.9

--...,J. 1""-__ I ~._-~.j .j -W-W
II I I I i I! i
treatment factor for steel and cast iron materials ?1?2. .. r I
0.8
0,7 I ffi-rTf1
--+-.llllif
.Lu.u
Surface unnotched notched ~
. ,l_LLU+
i I , I. II :
. __---.4_,__ L..LJ._l.~.
treatment components components 0,6
?3 0."
I : -r-_-.-
t i l.....ll···Tr
"1---
!i
i I I i 111.1
Steel 0;1 I--·-Ti-t.-i-i.. t·i~
I
Nitriding
Chemo-thermal treatments
1,10-1,15 1,30 - 2,00
0.2
o.t
!I
I !
'+1;
L.LLL~.!.J.
i. II ,I
rn rr
Depth of case 0,1...0,4 nun o
(1,15 - 1,25) (1,90 - 3,00) 1 10 100
Surface hardness Thickness of layer in /lID
700 to 1000 HV 10 2.3.•

Case hardening 1,10 - 1,50 1,20 - 2,00

Depth of case 0,2 ... 0,8 nun (1,20 - 2,00) (1,50 - 2,50)
Surface hardness Figure 4.3.4 Influence of anodic coating on the fatigue
670 to 750 HV 10 limit (at 106 cycles) of a component from aluminum
Carbo-nitriding alloys as a function of the layer thickness (after Wilson).
Depth of case 0,2 ... 0,8 nun (1,80)
Surface hardness
Provisional values.
670 to 750 HV 10
Mechanical treatment
Cold rolling 1,10 - 1,25 1,30 - 1,80 4.3.5 Constant KNL,E
(1,20 - 1,40) (1,50 - 2,20)
Shot peening 1,10 - 1,20 1,10-1,50 The constant KNL,E accounts for the non-linear elastic
(1,10 - 1,30) (1,40 - 2,50) stress strain behavior of GG when loaded in tension-
compression or bending.
Thermal treatment
1,20 - 1,50 1,50 - 2,50 For all kinds of material except for GG there is
Inductive hardening
(1,30 - 1,60) (1,60 - 2,80) (4.3.32)
Flame-hardening KNL,E = 1.
Depth of case 0,9 ... 1,5 nun
Surface hardness KNL,E for GG after Table 4.3.6.
51 to 64 HRC
Cast iron materials
Nitriding 1,10 (1,15) 1,3 (1,9) 1.
Table 4.3.6 Constant KNL,E ?
Case hardening 1,1 (1,2) 1,2 (1,5)
Cold rolling 1,1 (1,2) 1,3 (1,5) Kind of
material
GG
-10
I GG
-15
GG
-20
GG
-25
I GG
-30
IGG
-35
Shot peening 1,1 (1,1) 1,1 (1,4)
Inductive hardening, 1,2 (1,3) 1,5 (1,6) KNL,E 1,075 1,05 1,025
Flame-hardening
? 1 For unnotched or slightly notched components in tension-compression
? 1 Concerning typical component values and further kinds of treatments,
see also FVA·worksheet "Schwingfestigkeitssteigerung (increasing the KNL,E = 1.
fatigue strength)".
? 2 The given values typically apply to the component fatigue limit.
Values applying to the variable amplitude fatigue strength are in general
somewhat lower.
4.3.6 Fatigue class (FAT)
The values are valid for specimens of 30 to 40 nun diameter; values in Calculation with structural stresses
parenthesis for specimens of 8 to 15 nun diameter.
The fatigue classes (FAT) for structural stresses allow
? 3 For unnotched or slightly notched components .
for the influence of the toe of a weld on the fatigue
strength *16 (For the root of a weid a fatigue class FAT
for structural stresses is not applicable up to now; only
effective notch stresses are applicable).

16 Fatigue classes for structural stresses do not depend on the of design

of a component, because the influence of design on the fatigue strength is
allowed for when computing structural stresses, see Chapter 5.5 (This is
different from computing nominal stresses, Chapter 2.3.)
 112
4.3 Design parameters 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using local stresses

A complete catalogue of the fatigue classes of structural Table 4.3.7 Exponent n for the thickness factor.
stresses according to the IIW-Recommendations is given
in Chapter 5.4.2 *17. Type of the welded joint n
cruciform joints, transverse T-joints, plates with
Calculation with effective notch stresses transverse attachments
Effective notch stresses are applicable for the toe and for - as welded 0,3
the root of a weld and do not require a fatigue classes to - toe ground 0,2
be considered as the fatigue strength values given by Eq. transverse butt welds,
(4.3.8) or (4.3.9) are those determined for effective - as welded 0,2
notch stresses (normal stress or shear stress, butt welds ground flush, base material, longitudi-
respectively) *18. nal welds or attachments, - as welded or ground 0,1

4.3.7 Thickness factor

When using structural stresses for the calculation of
transversely loaded welds the thickness factor ft
accounts for the influence of the sheet metal thickness
on the fatigue strength *19.
The thickness factor ft is of no effect, however,
- if the calculation uses effective notch stresses,
- if there is no weld,
- if there is no transversely loaded weld, or
- if the sheet metal thickness is t < 25 mm.
In these cases the thickness factor is
(4.3.33)
For a transversely loaded weld and a sheet metal
thickness t > 25 mrn the thickness factor is a function of
the sheet metal thickness t (in mrn):
it = (25 mm / t) n. (4.3.34)
n after Table 4.3.7.

17 All fatigue classes for structural stresses given in the IIW-

Recommendations are considered except those for the base material.
Considered are for steel FAT::; 140 for normal stress and FAT:::;; 100 for
shear stress, or for aluminum alloys FAT::; 50 for normal stress and
FAr::; 36 for shear stress.

The calculation for the base material of welded components is to be

carried out as for non-welded components.

18 The generally applicable fatigue strength values do not depend on the

design of a component nor on the shape of the weld, because all these
influences on the fatigue strength are considered when computing
effective notch stresses. Chapter 5.5 (This is different from computing
nominal stresses or structural stresses, see Chapter 5.5).

19 'Thethickness factor is supposed to be valid for steel, but also for

aluminum alloys
 113
4.4 Component strength, 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength
4.4.1 Fatigue limit for completely reversed stress using local stresses

4.4 Component strength 1R44 EN.dog aWK = aW,zd I KwK,cr , (4.4.1)

1:WK = 1:w,s I KWK;t ,
Content Page
aW,zd,1:W,s material or weld specific fatigue limit for
4.4.0 General 113 completely reversed stress, Chapter 2.2.1
4.4.1 Component fatigue limit for completely KWK,cr ... design factor, Chapter 4.3.1
reversed stress Eq. (4.4.1) is based on the fatigue limit for completely
4.4.2 Component fatigue limit 114 reversed stress, Eq. (4.2.1), (4.2.3) or (4.2.4), and on the
according to mean stress design factor, Eq. (4.3.1), (4.3.4), (4.3.6) or (4.3.8). It
4.4.2.0 General applies to non-welded components for calculations with
4.4.2.1 Mean stress factor 115 local stresses and to welded components both for
Calculation for type of overloading F2 calculations with structural stresses or with effective
Calculation for type of overloading FI 116 notch stresses *2.
Calculation for type of overloading F3 The component fatigue limits of shell-shaped (2D)
Calculation for type of overloading F4 117 components for completely reversed normal stresses in
4.4.2.2 Individual or equivalent mean stress the directions x and y as well as for shear stress are
4.4.2.3 Residual stress factor 118
4.4.2.4 Mean stress sensitivity aWK,x = aW,zd I KWK,crx , (4.4.2)
awK,y = aW,zd I KWK,cry ,
4.4.3 Component variable amplitude fatigue 119
1:WK = 1:w,s I KwK,s ,
strength
4.4.3.0 General aW,zd, 'tw,s material or weld specific fatigue limit for
4.4.3.1 Variable amplitude fatigue strength factor 120 completely reversed stress, Chapter 2.2.1
Calculation for a constant amplitude spectrum KwK,crx,... design factor, Chapter 4.3.1
Calculation for a variable amplitude spectrum
Eq. (4.4.2) is based on the fatigue limit for completely
Elementary version of Miner's rule
reversed stress, Eq. (4.2.1), (4.2.3) or (4.2.4), and on the
based on the damage potential
design factor, Eq. (4.3.2), (4.3.5), (4.3.7) or (4.3.9). It
Calculation according to the consistent
applies to non-welded components for calculations with
version of Miner's rule 121
local stresses and to welded components both for
Calculation using a class of utilisation 123
calculations with structural stresses or with effective
4.4.3.2 Component constant amplitude S-N curve
notch stresses.
4.4.0 General The component fatigue limits of block-shaped (3D)
According to this chapter the component fatigue components for completely reversed principal stresses in
strength is to be calculated as follows: the directions 1, 2, and 3 are
- Step 1: component fatigue limit for completely
al,WK = aW,zd l KWK,crl , (4.4.3)
reversed stress in considering the design factor,
a2,WK = aW,zd l KWK,cr2,
Chapter 4.4.1,
a3,WK = aW,zd l KWK,cr3,
- Step 2: component fatigue limit in considering the
mean stress factor, Chapter 4.4.2, aW,zd,1:W,s material or weld specific fatigue limit for
- Step 3: component variable amplitude fatigue completely reversed stress, Chapter 2.2.1
strength in considering the variable amplitude K WK, I ... design factor, chapter 4.3.1
fatigue strength factor, Chapter4.4.3.
Eq. (4.4.3) is based on the fatigue limit for completely
reversed stress, Eq. (4.2.1), and on the design factor,
4.4.1 Component fatigue limit for Eq. (4.3.3). It applies to non-welded components.
completely reversed stress
For certain applications block-shaped (3D) components
According to this chapter the component fatigue limit may be welded at the surface, for example through
for completely reversed stress is to be calculated in surfacing welds. Then the calculation is to be carried
considering the design factor. out as for shell-shaped (2D) welded components.
Caution: See the comment in the second paragraph of
Chapter 4.4.2.

Rod-shaped (lD), shell-shaped (2D) and block-shaped
(3D) components are to be distinguished.
The component fatigue limits of rod-shaped (lD)
components for completely reversed normal stress and
shear stress are *I
1 The component fatigue limits for completely reversed stress are
different for normal stress and for shear stress, and moreover because of
different stress gradients or different weld characteristics depending on the
type of stress.
2 Structural stresses crWK, ... or effective notch stresses crWK,K . The
index K is to be added where appropriate.
 --r
I

4.4 Component strength

114
4 assessment of the fatigue strength
iI

4.4.2 Component fatigue limit according to mean stress with nominal stresses

4.4.2 Component fatigue limit according to Rod-shaped (ID) components

mean stress 1R442 EN.dog The mean stress dependent amplitudes of the component
fatigue limit of rod-shaped (10) components for normal
4.4.2.0 General stress and for shear stress are

According to this chapter the amplitude of the 0'AK = KAK,cr . KE,cr . O'WK , (4.4.6)
component fatigue limit is to be determined according to 1:AK = KAK;t . KE,~ . 1:WK ,
a given mean stress and, where appropriate, in
considering a multiaxial state of stress. KAK,cr, .. , mean stress factor, Chapter 4.4.2.1,
KE,cr, . residual stress factor, Chapter 4.4.2.3,
Comment: For non-welded components of austenitic O'WK, . component fatigue limit for completely
steel, or of wrought or cast aluminum alloys the reversed stress, Chapter 4.4.1.
component fatigue limit is different from the component
endurance limit for N = 00 , Chapter 4.4.3.2. Eq. (4.4.6) applies' to non-welded and to welded
components.
Observing the specific input values the calculation
applies to non-welded components (with local stresses)
and to welded components (with structural stresses or Shell-shaped (2D) components
effective notch stresses) *1. The mean stress dependent amplitudes of the component
An improved procedure for non-welded components of fatigue limit of shell-shaped (2D) components for
steel to compute the component fatigue limit in the case normal stress in the directions x and y as well as for
of synchronous multiaxial stresses is given in Chapter shear stress are
5.9. 0'AK,x = KAK.,x . KE,cr . O'WK,x , (4.4.7)
In combination with a stress spectrum the indicated 0'AK,y = KAK.,y . KE,cr . O'WK,y ,
stress ratio R, , ... commonly refers to step I of the 1:AK = KAK.,~ . KE,~ . 1:WK ,
stress spectrum (maximum amplitude), Ra,I, ... *2 *3. KAK.,x, ... mean stress factor, Chapter 4.4.2.1,
The mean stress factor, Figure 4.4.1, allows for the KE,cr, '" residual stress factor, Chapter 4.4.2.3,
influence of the mean stress on the fatigue strength. O'WK,x' .. , component fatigue limit for completely
Without mean stress the mean stress factor is reversed stress, Chapter 4.4.1.

KAK,cr = KAK;t = 1. (4.4.4) Eq. (4.4.7) applies to non-welded and to welded

components.
The residual stress factor accounts for the influence of
the residual stress on the fatigue strength. For non-
welded components the residual stress factor for normal Block-shaped (3D) components
stress and for shear stress is The mean stress dependent amplitudes of the component
K E,cr = KE;r = 1. (4.4.5) fatigue limit of block-shaped (3D) components *4 for
principal stresses in the directions I, 2 and 3 are
Rod-shaped (10), shell-shaped (2D) and block-shaped
(3D) components are to be distinguished. O'I,AK = KAK.,crl . KE,cr . O'I,WK , (4.4.7)
O'2,AK = KAK.,cr2 . KE,cr . 0'2, WK ,
O'3,AK = KAK.,cr3 . KE,cr . O'3,WK ,

KAK.,crl , ... mean stress factor, Chapter 4.4.2.1,

KE,cr, . residual stress factor, Chapter 4.4.2.3,
O'I,WK, .. component fatigue limit for completely
reversed stress, Chapter 4.4.1.

1 Struktural stresses crWK' ... or effective notch stresses crWK.,K . In

the following the missing index K is to be added where appropriate.

2 This definition is necessary only for mean stress spectra, not for
stress ratio spectra or for fluctuating stress spectra, for which the
stress ratios of all steps are identical.
3 For more details see Chapter 5.6.
4 For certain applications block-shaped (3D) components may be
welded at the surface, for example by surfacing welds. Then the
calculation may be carried out as for shell-shaped (2D) components.
 115
4.4 Component strength 4 assessment of the fatigue strength
4.4.2 Component fatigue limit according to mean stress with nominal stresses

Figure 4.4.1 Amplitude of the component fatigue R :-=

strength as a function of mean stress or stress ratio " Q
@
(Haigh diagram), described in four fields of mean stress
(M~=O)
Example: Normal stress, types of overloading FI and F2.
Given: Component fatigue strength for completely reversed CD
stress crwK ' service stress amplitude cra ,
(M~=MQ/3) (M~=O)
stress ratio Ra ,
Derived: Amplitudes of the component fatigue limit oAK ®
for the types of overloading FI and F2.

Type of overloading
The mean stress factor, KAK,cr or KAK,~, depends on
the type of overloading, Fl to F4. It distinguishes the Shear stress: *5:
way how the stress may increase in the case of a possible
Field I: (not existing),
overload in service (not by crash). Therefore it is to be
Field II: - 1S; R~S; 0 (lower boundary changed),
determined in the sense of a safety of operation in
Field III: 0 < R~ < 0,5 (unchanged),
service, that is for normal stress as follows:
Field IV: R~~ 0,5 (unchanged).
- Type Fl:
the mean stress am remains the same,
- Type F2: 4.4.2.1 Mean stress factor
the stress ratio Rcr remains the same,
The mean stress factor for normal stress, KAK,cr , or
- Type F3:
shear stress, KAK,1: , depends on the mean stress and on
the minimum stress amin remains the same,
the mean stress sensitivity.
- Type F4:
the maximum stress a max remains the same.
For shear stress a is to be replaced by L. Intermediate Calculation for the type of overloading F2 *6
types of overloading are possible. Dependent on the type
In case of a possible overload in service the stress ratio
of overloading the amplitude of the component fatigue
limit is different, Figure 4.4.1.
Rcr remains the same.
Normal stress:
Fields of mean stress Field I: n, > 1:
In determining the mean stress factor, KAK,cr , ... , four KAK,cr= 1/ (1 - Ma), (4.4.9)
fields of mean stress are to be distinguished. These
depend on the stress ratio Rcr or on the mean stress am
respectively, see Chapter 4.4.2.2.
(4.4.10)

Normal stress:
Field I: Rcr > I, field of fluctuating compression stress,
where Rcr = + or - 00 is the zero compression stress.
Field II: -00 S; Rcr S; 0, where R, < -1 is the field of
alternating compression stress, R, = -1 is the
completely reversed stress, R; > -1 is the field of
alternating tension stress.
Field III: 0 < Rcr < 0,5, field of fluctuating tension stress,
where R, = 0 is the zero tension stress.
Field IV: R, ~ 0,5, field of high fluctuating tension
stress.
5 The fatigue limit diagram (Haigh diagram) for normal stress shows
increasing amplitudes for R < -1 (compression mean stress). For
negative mean stress the fatigue limit diagram (Haigh diagram) for shear
stress is the same as for positive mean stress and symmetrical to ~m = O.
Practically it is restricted to the fields of positive mean stress or a
stress ratio R~ 2:- 1 , as the mean stress in shear is always regarded to
be positive, ~m 2: 0 .
6 The type of overloading F2 is described first because it is of primary
practical importance.
(4.4.11)

Using the term crm / cra instead of (1 + Rcr ) / (1 - Rcr ) avoids

numerical problems, when the stress ratio becomes Ra = - 00.
 116
4.4 Component strength 4 assessment of the fatigue strength
4.4.2 Component fatigue limit according to mean stress with nominal stresses

Field III, Q< n, < 0,5: Field IV

I+M cr /3
K - I+M cr
AK,cr - M ' (4.4.12)
I+~. crm
3 ca (4.4.17)

Field IV, n, ~ 0,5:

am mean stress *8, Chapter 4.4.2.2,
K - 3+M cr KE,cr residual stress factor, Chapter 4.4.2.3,
AK,cr - ( \2 ' (4.4.13) aWK component fatigue limit for completely
3· 1 + Mcrl
reversed stress, Chapter 4.4. I,
n, stress ratio *8, Chapter 4.4.2.2, M, mean stress sensitivity,
M; mean stress sensitivity, Chapter 4.4.2.4.
Chapter 4.4.2.4,
am mean stress *8, Chapter 4.4.2.2, Shear stress:
aa stress amplitude.
For KAK,'[ Field I is not existing and Field II is restricted
°
to positive mean stresses ~ tm = Om / (KE,' . 0WK) ~
1 / (1 + M'[) . For positive mean stresses the same
Shear stress:
equations are valid if Sm is replaced by t m and M, is
For KAK,'[ Field I is not existing and Field II is restricted replaced by M'[ .
to positive mean stresses R'[ ~ -I . For positive mean
stresses, or R'[ ~ -I , the same equations are valid if
M, is replaced by M'[ Calculation for the type of overloading F3
In case of a possible overload in service the minimum
stress amin remains the same.
Calculation for the type of overloading Fl
Normal stress:
In case of a possible overload in service the mean stress
am remains the same.
-2
Normal stress: For smin = crmin / (KE,a . crWK) < - - - there is *9
I-M cr
Field I
(4.4.18)
For sm= crm / (KE,a . crWK) < -1 / (l -M cr ) there is *9
(4.4.14)
Field II

Field II
for - 2 /(1 - Mcr)~ Smin ~ ° there is
1-M cr .Smin.,zd
for -I / (l - M cr ) ~ sm s 1 / (l + M cr ) there is (4.4.19)
I+M cr
(4.4.15)
Field III
Field III
for °< Smin < - 2
3
.
3+M
cr there is
(I+M cr ) 2

1+ M cr /3 M cr
---·s·
I+M cr 3 mm
(4.4.16) KAK, cr = --~~----- (4.4.20)
I+M cr /3

Field IV

8Or equivalent mean stress, equivalent minimum stress, equivalent

maximum stress, Chapter 4.4.2.2.
9 In the following the abbreviation sm= crm I (KE.cr . 0"Wl() applies
accordingly tosmin , smax , tm , ... .
 117
4.4 Component strength 4 assessment of the fatigue strength
4.4.2 Component fatigue limit according to mean stress with nominal stresses

K - 3+M cr Shear stress:

(4.4.21)
AKa - (1 + M cr)2 ' For shear stress the type of overloading F4
('tmax remaining constant) can practically not being
O"min minimum stress *8, Chapter 4.4.2.2, realized.
KE,a residual stress factor, Chapter 4.4.2.3,
O"WK component fatigue limit for completely
reversed stress, Chapter 4.4.1, 4.4.2.2 Individual or equivalent mean stress
M, mean stress sensitivity,
Chapter 4.4.2.4. In each case Ra , O"min , and O"max are determined by
mean stress and stress amplitude. The mean stress may
Shear stress: be taken either as the individual mean stress according
For KAK" Field I is not existing and Field II is restricted to type of stress or as an equivalent mean stress from the
to positive mean stresses, that is - 1 :::; tmin = individual mean stresses of all types of stress.
'tmin I (KE,t . 'tWK ) :::; O. For positive mean stresses,
'tm 2: 0 , the same equations are valid if Smin is Individual mean stress
replaced by tmin and Mcr is replaced by M, As a rule the individual mean stress O"m is used to
determine O"min , O"max and Ra . For normal stress the
respective equations are
Calculation for the type of overloading F4 O"min = O"m - O"a , (4.4.26)
In case of a possible overload in service the maximum O"max = O"m + O"a ,
stress O"max remains the same. Ra = O"min I O"max ,
O"a stress amplitude,
Normal stress: O"min minimum stress,
O"max maximum stress,
Ra stress ratio.
For Smax= CY max I (KE,a . CYWK) < 0 there is *9
For shear stress 0" is to be replaced by t .
KAK,a = 1 I (1 - M, ), (4.4.22)
Equivalent mean stress *10,
In the case "bending and torsion which is typical for
for 0:::; smax :::; 2 I (I + M a ) there is numerous applications in machine design, and in
I-M cr ,smax similar cases, where normal stresses are combined with
KAK. = ---.,;;---:,:;:::;.:. (4.4.23)
.o 1- M cr ' shear stresses, the variables O"min,v , O"max,v and Ra,v are
to be used. They are derived from an equivalent mean
stress O"m,v , to be computed as a function of the
Field III
respective individual mean stress values, Eq. (4.4.28).
2 4 . 3 +M cr For normal stress there is
for - - - < Smax <- there is
1+ M cr 3 (I + M cr ? O"min,v = O"m,v - O"a , (4.4.27)
O"max,v = O"m,v + O"a,
I+M cr 13 M cr
l+M --3-, smax Ra,v = O"min,v l O"max,v,
cr
KAK.,a = - - - - : ; : . . . - - - - - - (4.4.24) individual stress amplitude,
I-M cr 13 O"a
Ra,v equivalent stress ratio,
Field IV O"min,v equivalent minimum stress,
O"max,v equivalent maximum stress.
For shear stress 0" is to be replaced by r .

The equivalent mean stress, Eq. (4.4.27), for normal

(4.4.25)
stress is
O"m,v = q . O"m,v,NH + (1 - q) . O"m,v,GH, (4.4.28)
maximum stress *8, Chapter 4.4.2.2,
residual stress factor, Chapter 4.4.2.3, where
component fatigue limit for completely
reversed stress, Chapter 4.4.1, .J3 -(lIf-c)
q= (4.4.29)
mean stress sensitivity, .J3-1 '
Chapter 4.4,2.4.
 118
4.4 Component strength 4 assessment of the fatigue strength
4.4.2 Component fatigue limit according to mean stress with nominal stresses

High residual stresses are to be assumed in case of

welding without residual stress reducing precautions.
Moderate residual stresses are to be assumed in case of
welding with residual stress reducing precautions, for
q Material dependent parameter after Table 4.6.1 example by observing a suitable weld sequence.
am , Tm Individual mean stresses, Low residual stresses are to be assumed in case of
Eq. (4.4.31) and (4.4.32). welding with subsequent stress-relief heat treatment, or
if residual stresses may evidentially be excluded.

For shear stress there is

Tm,v = f w,< . am,v, (4.4.30) 4.4.2.4 Mean stress sensitivity

fw,< shear strength factor, Table 4.2.1. The mean stress sensitivity M, or M. , in connection
with the mean stress factor, describes to what extent the
mean stress affects the amplitude of the component
Rod-shaped (ID) components fatigue strength, Figure 4.4.1.
For rod-shaped (ID) components the equivalent mean For non-welded components the mean stress sensitivity
stress after Eq. (4.4.28) is to be computed only if for normal stress and for shear stress, applicable in case
am~ O. of normal or elevated temperature, is
M, = aM . 10. 3 . Rm / MFa + bM, (4.4.34)
Shell-shaped (2D) components M. = fw,< • Ma: '
For shell-shaped (2D) components the equivalent mean aM, bM constants, Table 4.4.2,
stress after Eq. (4.4.28) is to be computed only if fw ,< shear fatigue strength factor, Table 4.2.1.
am,y = 0 and am,x ~ 0 (or in reverse). It is
For components that have been surface hardened *11 the
am = am,x (or am = am,y), (4.4.32) mean stress sensitivity is greater because of the tensile
strength Rm of the hardened surface is higher than that
am,x, ... individual mean stresses, Chapter 4.1.1.2. of components not surface hardened.
For welded components the mean stress sensitivity for
normal stress and for shear stress, applicable in case of
4.4.2.3 Residual stress factor normal or elevated temperature, is dependent on the
The residual stress factor for non-welded components is intensity of the residual stress, but independent of the
tensile strength R; of the base material. Values are
KE,cr = KE;[ = 1. (4.4.33) . given in Table 4.4.1, see also Chapter 5.5.
For welded components of structural steel and of
aluminum alloys the residual stress factor is different for Table 4.4.2 Constants aM and bM .
high, moderate or low residual stresses. It is given for
normal stress and for shear stress in Table 4.4.1, see Steel 1>1
Kind of GS GGG GT GG
also Chapter 5.5.
material
aM 0,35 0,35 0,35 0,35 0
Table 4.4.1 Residual stress factor KE,cr, K E;[ and mean bM - 0,1 0,05 0,08 0,13 0,5
stress sensitivity Mcr , M. for welded components.
Residual Ma M
stress
KE,cr K E;[ • 1>1 Kind of Wrought Cast
material aluminum alloys aluminum alloys
high 1,00 0 1,00 0
aM 1,0 1,0
moderate 1,26 0,15 1,15 0,09 bM - 0,04 0,2
low 1,54 0,30 1,30 0,17
1> 1 For Shear Stress there is M. = fw.· M cr fw,. = 0,577, 1> 1 also stainless steel.
Table 4.2.1. "

10 The equivalent mean stress applies to rod-shaped and shell-shaped

components as indicated, but not to block-shaped components. 11 Not applicable to components being cold rolled or shot-peened.
 119
4.4 Component fatigue strength 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength
4.4.3 Component variable amplitude fatigue strength using local stresses

Except for GG, the following restrictions apply, Figure

4.4.3 Component variable amplitude fatigue 4.4.3:
strength 1R443 EN.dog
crSK ~ 0,75 Rp . Kp,o , (4.4.42)
4.4.3.0 General 'tBK s 0,75 f.' Rp' Kp,. ,

According to this chapter the amplitude of the Rp yield strength, Chapter 1.2.1.1,
component variable amplitude fatigue strength is to be Kp,o , K p,. plastic notch factors, Table 1.3.2,
derived from the stress spectrum and the component f. shear strength factor, Table 1.2.5.
constant amplitude S-N curve, Chapter 4.4.3.2.
The variable amplitude fatigue strength factor KBK•a , ... , 4 N, '!Ii. Component fatigue life curve
to be calculated depends on the stress spectrum, that is
N Component s-N curve
on the required total number of cycles *1 and on the
shape of the stress spectrum, as well as on the
component constant amplitude S-N curve, and in
addition it depends on the type of stress (normal stress
or shear stress). 2
It has to be distinguished, whether - in case of a
constant amplitude spectrum - an assessment of the
fatigue limit (or endurance limit) or of the fatigue
strength for finite life is intended, or whether - in case
of a variable amplitude spectrum - an assessment of the
variable amplitude fatigue strength is intended *2.
lOB
The calculation for a constant amplitude stress 2.••2 N, '!Ii
spectrum is a special case of the more general case of
Figure 4.4.2 Component constant amplitude S-N curve,
calculation for a variable amplitude stress spectrum. In
component fatigue life curve derived by the consistent
any case the way of calculation is the same, but the
version of Miner's rule, and influence of the critical
variable amplitude fatigue strength factors are different.
damage sum DM .
Observing the specific input values the calculation
Highest amplitude in stress spectrum GSK, component fatigue limit GAJ(,
applies to both non-welded components (component number of cycles N after the component constant amplitude S-N curve,
constant amplitude S-N curve model I or model II) and number of cyclesN after the component fatigue life curve for DM < 1 or
to welded components (component constant amplitude N' for DM = 1. It isN = N + (N' - N) DM. This formula implies
S-N curve model I only). that a number of cycles N -7 N is obtaine~ for spectra of increasing
damage potential and a nu~er of cycles N = N for the constant
Rod-shaped (lD), shell-shaped (2D) and block-shaped amplitude stress spectrum as N' - N -7 O.
(3D) components are to be distinguished. In German the fatigue life curve is usually termed 'Gassner curve' and
the constant amplitude S-N curve is usually termed' Woehler curve'.

Rod-shaped (ID) components

The amplitudes of the component variable amplitude
fatigue strength (highest amplitude in stress spectrum)
of rod-shaped (lD) components for normal stress and
for shear stress are, Figure 4.4.2,
crSK = KsK,o . c AK , (4.4.41)
'tSK = KsK,•. 'tAK,
KSK,o , ... variable amplitude fatigue strength factor,
Chapter 4.4.3.1,
crAK,... component fatigue limit, Chapter 4.4.2.

Figure 4.4.3 Restriction of the amplitudes of

the variable amplitude fatigue strength, or of the
1 Required total number of cy~les and required component fatigue life
are corresponding denotations.
maximum value crrn,1 + crBK,1 and the minimum value
crrn,1 - crBK,1 respectively, in relation to the yield strength,
2 In a simplified manner the variable amplitude fatigue strength can be
derived on the basis of a damage-equivalent stress amplitude. Then the displayed in terms of the Haigh-diagram.
assessment ofthe variable amplitude fatigue strength turns out to be an
assessment of the fatigue limit.
 120
4.4 Component fatigue strength 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength
4.4.3 Component variable amplitude fatigue strength using local stresses

Shell-shaped (2D) components Calculation for a constant amplitude spectrum *4

The amplitudes of the component variable amplitude

fatigue strength (highest amplitude in stress spectrum) Component constant amplitude S-N curve model I:
of shell-shaped (2D) components for normal stresses in horizontal for N > No,cr (steel and cast iron material)
the directions x and y as well as for shear stress are,
Figure 4.4.2, Assessment ofthe fatigue strength for finite Life:
-)lIk -
O"BK,x = KBK,crx· O"AK,x, (4.4.43) KBK,cr= (No,cr/N cr forN:<:;No,cr. (4.4.47)
O"BK,y = KBK,cry . 0"AK,y ,
'tBK = KBK,'t . 'tAK, Assessment ofthe fatigue limit = endurance Limit:

KBK,crx , ... variable amplitude fatigue strength factor, KBK,cr = I forN > No,cr. (4.4.48)
Chapter 4.4.3.1,
O"AK,x, ... component fatigue limit, Chapter 4,4-.2.
Component constant amplitude S-N curve model II:
Except for GG, the following restrictions apply, Figure sloping for N > Nn,cr (non-welded aluminum alloys)
4.4.3,
Assessment ofthe fatigue strength for finite Life:
O"BK,x :<:;0,75 Rp' Kp,crx, (4.4.44)
KBK,cr = (N D,« I N) IIk cr for Nz; No,cr. (4.4.49)
O"BK,y :<:; 0,75 Rp . Kp,cry,
'tBK :<:; 0,75 f't' R p' Kp,'t, KBK,cr = (N D,« I N)lIk o,cr for No,cr<N:<:; No.e.n ,
Rp yield strength, Chapter 1.2.1.1, (4.4.50)
Kp,crx, ... plastic notch factors, Chapter 3.3.2, Assessment ofthe fatigue Limit:
f't shear strength factor, Table 1.2.5.
KBK,cr = I forN > No,cr. (4.4.51)

Block-shaped (3D) components Assessment ofthe endurance Limit:

The amplitudes of the component variable amplitude KBK,cr = f n,e forN > NO,cr,ll. (4.4.52)
fatigue strength (highest amplitude in stress spectrum)
of block-shaped (3D) components for the principal N number of cycles of the component constant
stresses in the directions I, 2 and 3 are, Figure 4.4.2, amplitudeS-N curve, Chapter 4.4.3.2,
N required number of cycles,
O"l,BK = KBK,crl . O"l,AK, (4.4.45)
No,cr number of cycles at knee point of the component
O"Z,BK = KBK,crZ . O"z,AK ,
constant amplitude S-N curve, Chapter 4.4.3.2,
0"3,BK = KBK,cr3 . 0"3,AK, ka slope of the component constant amplitude S-N
KBK,crl , ... variable amplitude fatigue strength factor, curve for N < No,cr, Chapter 4.4.3.2.
Chapter 4.4.3.1, No.e.n number of cycles at second knee point of the
O"l,AK, ... component fatigue limit, Chapter 4.4.2. component constant amplitude S-N curve,
Chapter 4.4.3.2,
Except for GG, the following restrictions apply, Figure
ko,cr slope of the component constant amplitude S-N
4.4.3:
curve for N > No,cr , Chapter 4.4.3.2,
O"l,BK s 0,75 Rp . Kp,crl , (4.4.46) f n.e factor by which the endurance limit is lower than
O"Z,BK s 0,75 Rp . Kp,crz, the fatigue limit, Chapter 4.4.3.2, Table 4.4.4.
0"3,BK :<:; 0,75 Rp ,
Rp yield strength, Chapter 1.2.1.1, Calculation for a variable amplitude spectrum
Kp,crl , Kp,crz plastic notch factors, Chapter 3.3.2 As a rule the variable amplitude fatigue strength factor
f't shear strength factor, Table 1.2.5. is to be computed by using the elementary version of
Miner's rule (not necessary for a constant amplitude
stress spectrum). Somewhat more favourable results,
4.4.3.1 Variable amplitude fatigue strength factor however, may be obtained by using the consistent
The variable amplitude fatigue strength factors version of Miner's rule. Moreover, the classes of
KBK,cr, ... , are to be derived as follows *3: utilization can be applied as a simplified method of
calculation; the so derived results approximately
correspond to those obtained by the elementary version
3 The following is written for axial stress, KBK,o , k,; ... , but applies to of Miner's rule. In an even more simplified manner the
other types of stress accordingly. For effective notch stresses the index K
is to be added.
variable amplitude fatigue strength can be derived on
the basis of a damage-equivalent stress amplitude.
4 For welded components model 1 of the component constant amplitude
S-N curve is of concern only, not model II.
 121
4.4 Component fatigue strength 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength
4.4.3 Component variable amplitude fatigue strength using local stresses

Calculation using the elementary version of Miner's

rule based on the damage potential
l1 a
The variable amplitude fatigue strength factor is to be
computed directly as follows *5. Both for model I and (lg)
1\r,11•• 1
for model II of the component constant amplitude S-N
curve the elementary version of Miner's rule yields,
Figure 4.4.4, (4.4.53-)

K BK,cr -[(
- (v zd1)ka

where the damage potential is *6 *7

I)-D M +f r~·· J:.. N

Figure 4.4.4 Elementary version of Miner's rule, com-

ponent constant amplitude S-N curve model I, DM = 1.
_
Vcr -
k
a
J. hi [Ga,i )k
L=' - -
a
, (4.4.54) Characteristics ofthe stress spectrum according toChapter 4.1,
i=1 H Ga,l component constant amplitude S-N curve according toChapter 4.4.3.2.

slope of the component constant amplitude S-N

Table 4.4.3 Critical damage sum DM, recommended
curve for N < No,a , Chapter 4.4.3.2,
critical damage sum, Table 4.4.3, values.
number of cycles at knee point of the component non-welded welded
constant amplitude S-N curve, Chapter 4.4.3.2, components components
H total number of cycles of the given spectrum, Steel, GS, 0,3 0,5
H = H, = L: hi (summed up for i = 1 to j), Aluminum alloys
h·I related number of cycles in step i, GGG,GT,GG 1,0 1,0
Hi = L: hi (summed up for i = 1 to i) *8,
j total number of steps in the spectrum,
number of the step in the spectrum,
Ga,i stress amplitude in step i of the spectrum, Calculation according to the consistent version of
Ga,1 stress amplitude in step i = 1 of the spectrum. Miner's rule *9 *10

If for a component constant amplitude S-N curve model
I (horizontal for N > No,a ) a value KBl<,cr < 1 is
obtained from Eq. (4.4.53), then the value to be used is
(4.4.56)
If for a component constant amplitude S-N curve model
II (sloping for N > NO,a ) a value KBK,cr is obtained
from Eq. (4.4.53) that is smaller than the value obtained
from Eq. (4.4.50) or (4.4.52), then the higher value
from Eq. (4.4.50) or (4.4.52) is to be used.
5 Direct calculation without iteration. The results from the elementary
version ofMiner's rule approach the results from the consistent version of
Miner's rule on the safe side.
6 When computing the d~ge potential (and also in the following
equations) the values ni and N according toth.:..;equired total number of
cycles can be replaced by the values hi and H according to the total
number ofcycles inthe given standard type spectrum, see Chapter 4.1.
7 Instead ofAJcon after Eq. (4:4.57) and (4.4.63) ishere
A
ele = I / (va) ke . (4.4.55)
8 hi / H may also be replaced by n, / N ,
N Required total number ofcycles according tothe required fatigue life,
N = Eni(summed up for I toj),
ni number ofcycles instep i according tothe required fatigue life.
Using the consistent version of Miner's rule the variable
amplitude fatigue strength factor is to be computed
iteratively for differing values of Ga,l , until a value N
equal to the required total number of cycles N is
obtained. The respective value of Ga,1 is used to derive
the variable amplitude fatigue strength factor.
Component constant amplitude S-N curve model I:
horizontal for N > ND,a (Steel and cast iron material)
In case of a component constant amplitude S-N curve
model I ( horizontal for N > No,a or slope kD,o = (0) the
number of cycles N to be computed for a value Sa,1 is
(4.4.57)
a
N = {[ Akon -1] . DM + I}' [G AI< . NO,a,
G a.l
)k
where
9 The consistent version of Miner's rule allows for the fact, that the
component fatigue limit will decrease asthe damage sum increases.
The decrease applies tocomponent constant amplitude S-N curves model
Ias well astomodel IIfor N D,s 2': 10 6 .
10 The consistent version ofMiner's rule was first developed byHaibach.
A simplified version allowing for the decrease ofthe fatigue limit became
known as the modified version orthe Haibach method ofMiner's rule.
 122
4.4 Component fatigue strength 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength
4.4.3 Component variable amplitude fatigue strength using local stresses

ka - I [
Component constant amplitude S-N curve model II:
aaI ZI J. Z2 ]
sloping for N > ND,a (non-welded aluminum alloys)
Akon = ( a~ ) . NI + v~m N2 ' (4.4.58)
*11

ZI = a AK k-I ( )k -I In case of a component constant amplitude S-N curve

( )a a.l
a _ a a,m
a a.I
a
(4.4.59) model II (sloping for N > No,a or slope kD,a < kD,a < (0)

Z2 = k-I ( )k -I
a a,v a a,v+!
the number of cycles N is first to be computed for a
single value aa,1 = a AK / (fn,a )1/3 as follows
( )
a a.l
a _

a a,1
a
(4.4.60)
N= {[ Akon - I ] , DM + I}' (aa AK ) k
a
N D:" / 3
Nl = m-J hi (aa,i
L -=-' -
)k a
, (4.4.61)
a.l ([n,,,)
i=1 H a a,1 with (4.4.65)
Akon after Eq. (4.4.58) to (4.4.62)
N2 = v hi (aa,i
L-=-' - )k a (4.4.62) and the explanations as before,
i=1 H aa,1 fn,a factor by which the endurance limit is lower
than the fatigue limit, Table 4.4.4.
For the summation of the term Z2, Eq. (4.4.60), it is to
be observed that aaj+! = O.
If a value N = N* > N is obtained then the calcu-
N number of cycles of the component constant lation of N, Eq. (4.4.65), is to be continued fqr
amplitude S-N curve, Chapter 4.4.3.2, differing values aa,1 > a AK / ( fn,a )1/3 until a value N
N D,« number of cycles at knee point of the component equal to the required total number of cycles N is
constant amplitude S-N curve, Chapter 4.4.3.2, obtained. From the respective value of aa,1 the variable
DM critical damage sum, Table 4.4.3, amplitude fatigue strength factor is obtained as
stress amplitude in step i of the spectrum,
stress amplitude in step 1 of the spectrum, KSK,a = aa,1 . (fn,a )1/3/ aAK (4.4.66)
component fatigue limit, If a value N = N *:s N is obtained then the variable
slope of the component constant amplitude S-N amplitude fatigue strength factor is
curve for N < No, a , Chapter 4.4.3.2,
j total number of steps in the spectrum, (4.4.67)
i number of the step in the spectrum,
m number i = m of the first step below a AK , If a value KSK,a < fn,a is obtained from Eq. (4.4.67)
H total number of cycles in the given spectrum, then the value to be applied is
H = Hj = L: hi (summed up for 1 to j),
KSK,a = fn,a . (4.4.68)
h·I number of cycles in step i,
Hi = L: hi (summed up for I to i) '8.
The computation is to be repeated iteratively for Calculation using a class of utilization
differing values a a,I > a AK , until a value N equal to the The variable amplitude fatigue strength factor KSK,a is
required total number of cycles N is obtained. From the
to be determined according to the appropriate class of
respective value of aa,1 the variable amplitude fatigue
utilization *12 , Chapter 5.7.
strength factor is obtained as

KSK,a = aa,1 / aAK· (4.4.63)

Calculation using a damage-equivalent stress
amplitude
If a value KSK,a < I is obtained from Eq. (4.4.63), then
the value to be applied is When using a damage-equivalent stress amplitude the
variable amplitude fatigue strength factor for both
KSK,a = 1. (4.4.64)
constant amplitude S-N curves model I and model II is
KSK,a = 1. (4.4.69)

12Class ofutilization asa characteristic ofthestress spectrum. It isan

approximately damage equivalent combination oftherequired total
number ofcycles N with theshape ofa particular standard stress
spectrum thefrequency distribution ofwhich is ofbinomial orexponential
type modified bya spectrum parameter p. It provides a result that
corresponds toa calculation based ontheelementary version ofMiner's
II Simplified and approximate calculation. rule
 123
4.4 Component fatigue strength 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength
4.4.3 Component variable amplitude fatigue strength using local stresses

4.4.3.2 Component constant amplitude S-N curve

Component constant amplitude S-N curves for non-
welded components (without surface hardening) and for
welded components *13 are shown for normal stress and
for shear stress in Figure 4.4.5 and 4.4.6. The particular
number of cycles at the knee point No,cr , ... and the
values of slope kcr, ... are given in Table 4.4.4.
The component fatigue limit crAK , ... is the reference
fatigue strength value for calculation. It follows from
Chapter 4.4.2. For S-N curves Model I the fatigue limit
crAK and the endurance limit o AK,II for N = 00 are
identical, while for S-N curves Model II (valid for non-
welded components of austenitic steel or of aluminum
alloys) they are different by a factor fII,cr , Table 4.4.4
and Figure 4.4.5.
A lower boundary of the numbers of cycles is implicitly
defined by the maximum stress being limited according
to the static strength requirements, Chapter 1.
For surface hardened components "14 the slope of the
component constant amplitude S-N curves is more
shallow. Instead of the values of slope kcr = 5 and k, = 8
for not surface hardened components, Table 4.4.4, the
values that apply to surface hardened components are
kcr = 15 and k, = 25 , while the number of cycles at the
knee point No,cr and No,~ remain unchanged, see also
Chapter 5.8.
The component constant amplitude S-N curves for
welded components are valid for the toe section and for
the throat section.

13 With reference to IIW-Recommendations and Eurocode 3.

14 Not applicable to cold rolled or shot-peened components.

 124
4.4 Component fatigue strength 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength
4.4.3 Component variable amplitude fatigue strength using local stresses

Table 4.4.4 Number of cycles at the knee point, slope

of the component constant amplitude S-N curves, and
values of flI,cr and flI,<'

Normal stress Shear stress

Component IND,cr IND,cr,II Ik, IkD,cr flI,cr Component IND,< IND,<,II Ik, IkD,< IflI,<
Steel and cast iron materials (S-N curve model I ) Steel and cast iron materials (S-N curve model I )
non-welded 110
6
1- 15 1- 1,0 non-welded 11086 1- 18 1- 11,0
welded 15 . 10 1-
6
13 1- 1,0 welded 110 1- 15 1- 11,0
Aluminum alloys (S-N curve modell II Aluminum alloys (S-N curve model II )
non-welded 1106 1108 /5 /15 0,74 non-welded 1106 1108 18 125 10,83
welded 15 . 106 1- 13 1- 1,0 welded 110
8
1- 15 1- 11,0

1 (lg)

O"AC 1 - - - - - - - - - " "

O"AK f--------~l!ji,.~----- (JAK I---------+~------

O"AK,1I f-----'--------~:- ~~-='T':;~~

ND,D =10 6
aifa bild'W13
!Iifa bildll'JI N (lg) N (lg)

(Ig)

TAK f--------~""_=~-----
TAK I----------+--~~---
TAK,1I f----------l-~'~--.:~~~
Nc = 6 Nn,T
2 '10 =10 8
ND,T =10 6
etra bild,,14 N (lg)
Bifa bildwl7 N (lg)

Figure 4.4.5 Component constant amplitude S-N curve Figure 4.4.6 Component constant amplitude S-N curve
for non-welded components *14 for welded components *13
Top: Normal stress a. Top: Normal stress a.
Bottom: Shear stress t. Bottom: Shear stress t;

Steel and cast iron materials, except austenitic steel, (Model I): Steel, cast iron materials and aluminum alloys, welded (Model I):
horizontal for N > NO,a, kO,a = co
or for N > NO,~, k O,~ = co horizontal for N > NO a, kO a = co
or for N > NO' ~, k ~ = co D
Aluminum alloys and austenitic steel (Model II): NC is the reference number of cycles
sloping for N > NO a, kO a,
corresponding to the characteristic strength values a AC and ~ AC.
or for N > NO:~, kO:~'
aAK / aAC = (Nc / NO,a ) 11ko = 0,736 and
horizontal for N > NO,a,lI, kO,a,1I = co ~AK / ~AC = (Nc / NO,~) 11kr = 0,457.
or for N > N0, ~,II ' kO, ~,II = co.
 125
4.5 Safety factors 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using local stresses

4.5 Safety factors *1 IR25 EN .docl 4.5.2 Cast iron materials

Contents Page 4.5.2.0 General
4.5.0 General 68 Ductile and non-ductile cast iron materials are to be
distinguished.
4.5.1 Steel

4.5.2 Cast iron materials

4.5.2.0 General 4.5.2.1 Ductile cast iron materials
4.5.2.1 Ductile cast iron materials Cast iron materials with an elongation A5 ~ 12,5 % are
4.5.2.2 Non-ductile cast iron materials 69 considered as ductile cast iron materials, in particular
4.5.3 Wrought aluminum alloys all types of GS and some types of GGG. Values of
4.5.3.0 General elongation see Table 5.1.12.
4.5.3.1 Ductile wrought aluminum alloys Safety factors for ductile cast iron materials are given in
4.5.3.2 Non-ductile wrought aluminum alloys Table 4.5.2. Compared to Table 4.5.1 they are higher
4.5.4 Cast aluminum alloys because of an additional partial safety factor jp that
accounts for inevitable but allowable defects in castings
4.5.5 Total safety factor
*4. The factor is different for severe or moderate
consequences of failure and moreover for castings that
have been subject to non-destructive testing or have not.
4.5.0 General
According to this chapter the safety factors are to be
determined. Table 4.5.2 Safety factors for ductile cast iron materials
The safety factors are valid under the condition that the (GS; GGG) (A5~ 12,5 %).
design loads are reliably determined on the safe side and
that the material properties correspond to an average
probability of survival of Po = 97,5 % *2.
Jo
I Consequences of failure
Severe I
moderate? 1

castings not subject to non-destructive testing ?2

The safety factors apply both to non-welded and welded
components.
regular no I 2,1 I 1,8
inspection yes?3 I 1,9 I 1,7

castings subject to non-destructive testing ?4

4.5.1 Steel regular no I 1,9 I 1,65
The basic safety factor concerning the fatigue strength
inspection yes ?3 I 1,7 I 1,5
is ? 1 See footnote? I of Table4.5.1.
Jo = 1,5. (4.5.1) ?2 Compared to Table 4.5.1 an additional partial safety factor
jF = 1,4 is introduced to account for inevitable but allowable defects
This value may be reduced under favorable conditions,
in castings.
that is depending on the possibilities of inspection and
on the consequences of failure, Table 4.5.1. ?3 Regular inspection in the senseof damage monitoring. Reduction
by about10 %.
?4 Compared to Table 4.5.1 an additional partial safety factor
Table 4.5.1 Safety factors for steel *3 (not for GS) and jp= 1,25 is introduced, for which it is assumed that a higher quality
for ductile wrought aluminum alloys (A~ 12,5 %). ofthecastings isobviously guaranteed when testing.

jo Consequences of failure
severe moderate ?1
regular I no 1,5 1,3
2 Statistical confidence S = 50 % .
inspections I yes?2 1,35 1,2
3 Steel is always considered as a ductile material.
? 1 Moderate consequences of failure of a less important component
in the sense of "non catastrophic" effects of a failure; for example 4 In mechanical engineering cast components are of standard quality
because of a load redistribution towards other members of a statical for which a further reduction of the partial safety factor to jF = 1,0
indeterminate system. Reduction by about 15 %. does not seempossible up to now.
? 2 Regular inspection in the sense of damage monitoring. Reduction A safety factor jF = 1,0 may be applied to high quality cast
by about 10 %. components in the aircraft industry however. Those high quality cast
components, have to meet special demands on qualification and
checks of the production process, as well as on the extent of quality
and product testing in order to guarantee little scatter of their
1 Chapters 4.5 and2.5 are identical. mechanical properties.
4.5 Safety factors
126
4 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using local stresses
1
I

4.5.2.2 Non-ductile cast iron materials
Cast iron materials with an elongation As < 12,5 %
(for GT A3 < 12,5 %) are considered as non-ductile
materials, in particular some types of GGG as well as
all types of GT and GG. Values of elongation for GGG
and GT see Table 5.1.12 or 5.1.13. The value for GG
is As = O.
For non-ductile cast iron materials the safety factors
from Table 4.5.2 are to be increased by adding a value
~j, Figure 4.5.1 *s:
~j = 0,5 -~ As /50%,
AS Elongation, to be replaced by A3 for GT.
4.5.3.2 Non-ductile wrought aluminum alloy
Wrought aluminum alloys with an elongation
A < 12,5 % are considered as non-ductile materials.
Values of elongation see Table 5.1.22 to 5.1.30.
For non-ductile wrought aluminum alloys all safety
factors from Table 4.5.1 are to be increased by adding a
value Aj , Eq. (4.5.2).
4.5.4 Cast aluminum alloys
(4.5.2) Cast aluminum alloys are always considered as non-
ductile materials. All safety factors from Table 4.5.2
are to be increased by adding a value 4i , Eq. (4.5.2).
Values of elongation see Table 5.1. 31 to 5. 1.38.

GG
0,5 ~.---GGG-,----r~1
4.5.5 Total safety factor
~j GT
Similar to an assessment of the component static
strength, Chapter 3.5.5, a "total safety factor" .lges is
to be derived:
o 10 12,5 20
As, A3 in % . _ In (4.5.4)
Jges-~ ,
T,O
Figure 4.5.1 Value ~j to be added to the safety safety factor, Table 4.5.1 or 4.5.2,
factor Jn , defined as a function of the elongation As or temperature factor, Chapter 4.2.3.
A3 , respectively.

4.5.3 Wrought aluminum alloys

4.5.3.0 General
Ductile and non-ductile wrought aluminum alloys are to
be distinguished.

4.5.3.1 Ductile wrought aluminum alloys

Wrought aluminum alloys with an elongation
A~ 12,5 % are considered as ductile materials. Values
of elongation see Table 5.1.22 to 5.1.30.
Safety factors for ductile wrought aluminum alloys are
the same as for steel according to Table 4.5.1.

S For example the safety factor for GG is at least

Jn = 1,5 + 0,5 = 2,0 (4.5.3)

(Jn = 1,5 from Table 4.5.2, j = 0,5 after Eq. (4.5.2) for AS = 0).
 127
4.6 Assessment 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using local stresses

4.6 Assessment 1R46 EN.doq fatigue strength after Chapter 4.4.3, GBK , ... , divided
by the total safety factor jges. The degree of utilization is
Contents Page always a positive value *4.
4.6.0 General 127 An assessment of the variable amplitude fatigue
4.6.1 Rod-shaped (lD) components 128 strength, an assessment of the constant amplitude
4.6.1.1 Individual types of stress fatigue strength for finite life, or an assessment of the
4.6.1.2 Combined types of stress fatigue limit or of the endurance limit are to be
distinguished. In each case the calculation is the same
4.6.2 Shell-shaped (2D) components when using the appropriate variable amplitude fatigue
4.6.2.1 Individual types of stress strength factors KBK,o , ... , Chapter 2.4.3, and when
4.6.2.2 Combined types of stress taking
4.6.3 Block-shaped (3D) components 129 G a,l = G a , ... , (4.6.1)
4.6.3.1 Individual types of stress
4.6.3.2 Combined types of stress in case of a constant amplitude spectrum, or
Ga , l = Ga,eff (4.6.2)

4.6.0 General in case of a damage-equivalent stress amplitude.

According to this chapter the assessment of the fatigue
strength using local stresses is to be carried out.
In general the assessments for the individual types of
stress and for the combined types of stress are to be
carried out separately *1.
The procedure of assessment applies to both non-welded
and welded components.
For welded components the assessment is to be carried
out with structural stresses or effective notch stresses *2.
Assessments are generally to be carried out separately
for the toe and for the root of a weld. They are to be
carried out in the same way, but using the respective
local stresses and fatigue classes FAT as these are in
general different for the toe and the root of a weld.
Ga , ... , characteristic constant amplitude stress for
which the required number of cycles is N,
Ga"eff, ... , damage-equivalent stress amplitude.
Superposition
For proportional or synchronous stress components of
same type of stress the superposition is to be carried out
according to Chapter 4.1.
If different types of stress like normal stress and shear
stress act simultaneously and if the resulting stress is
multiaxial, Chapter 0.3.5 and Figure 0.0.9, both the
individual types of stress and the combined types of
stress are to be considered as described below *5.

Degree of utilization
The assessment is to be carried out by determining the
degree of utilization of the component fatigue strength.
In the general context of the present Chapter the degree
of utilization is the quotient of the (local) characteristic
stress amplitude Ga,l> ... , divided by the allowable (local)
stress amplitude of the component fatigue strength at
the reference point *3. The allowable stress amplitude is
the quotient of the component variable amplitude
Kinds of component
Rod-shaped (10), shell-shaped (2D) and block-shaped
(3D) components are to be distinguished. They can be
both non-welded or welded.
4 As the degree of utilization is the quotient of two amplitude which
always are positive.
5 Proportional, synchronous and non-proportional multiaxial stresses are
to be distinguished. , Chapter 0.3.5.

Only under special conditions of proportional stresses the character of Eq.

1 It is essential to examine the degree of utilization not only of the
combined types of stress but also of the individual types of stress in
general, and in particular if these may occur separately.
2 The additional index K marking effective notch stresses is to be added
to the stress symbols where appropriate.
3 The reference point is the critical point of the considered component
that observes the highest degree of utilization.
(4.6.4), (4.6.9) and (4.6.14) is that of a strength hypothesis from a
material-mechanics point of view. For example the extreme stresses from
bending and shear will - as a rule - occur at different points of the cross-
section, so that different reference points W are to be considered. As a rule
bending will be more important. More general the Eq. (4.6.4), (4.6.9) and
(4.6.14) have the character of an empirical interaction formula. They are
applicable for proportional stresses and approximately applicable for
synchronous stresses; an improved procedure for non-welded components
is given in Chapter 5.9. For non-proportional stresses the Eq. (4.6.4),
(4.6.9) and (4.6.14) are not suitable; an approximate procedure
applicable for non-proportional stresses is proposed in Chapter 5.10.
 128
4.6 Assessment 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using local stresses

4.6.1 Rod-shaped (ID) components Table 4.6.1 Values of q as dependent on f w ,< ~1

4.6.1.1 Individual types of stress Steel, GGG GT, GG

wrought cast
The degrees of utilization of rod-shaped (ID)
Al alloys Al alloys
components for variable amplitude types of stress like
f w< 0,577 0,65 0,75 0,85
normal stress and shear stress are
q 0 0,264 0,544 0,759

~ I, (4.6.3) ~1 Exceptions: For non-ductile wrought aluminum alloys (elongation

A < 12,5 %) q = 0,5 , for surface hardened or welded components
q = I.

4.6.2 Shell-shaped (2D) components

O"a,1 , ... characteristic stress amplitude (largest stress
amplitude in the spectrum) according to type of
stress, Chapter 4.1.1.1 and Eq. (4.6.1) or (4.6.2),
O"SK, ... related amplitude of the component variable
amplitude fatigue strength, Chapter 4.4.3,
jges total safety factor, Chapter 4.5.5.
4.6.2.1 Individual types of stress
The degrees of utilization of shell-shaped (2D)
components for variable amplitude types of stress like
normal stress in the directions x and y as well as shear
are

0'., x, I
aSK,crx = ~ 1, (4.6.8)
4.6.1.2 Combined types of stress 0' BK,x / j erf
The degree of utilization of rod-shaped (ID) O'.,y,]
aSK,cry = ~ 1,
components for combined types of stress is *6
0' BK,y / j erf
aSK,Sv = q' aNH + (l - q) . aoH s 1, (4.6.4)
where

aNH =1 {Isal + ~s; + 4· t; ). (4.6.5)

0"a,x,1,... characteristic stress amplitude (largest stress
amplitude in the spectrum) according to type of
aoH =Js; +t; , stress, Chapter 4.1.1.2 and Eq. (4.6.1) or
Sa= aSK,cr , (4.6.6) (4.6.2),
O"SK,x, ... related amplitude of the component
variable amplitude fatigue strength, Chapter
aSK,cr, ... degrees of utilization after Eq. (4.6.3). 4.4.3,
jges total safety factor, Chapter 4.5.5.
For non-ductile wrought aluminum alloys (elongation
A < 12,5 %) q = 0,5 is to be applied. For surface
hardened or for welded components q = 1 is to be 4.6.1.2 Combined types of stress
applied. Otherwise there is, Table 4.6.1,
The degree of utilization of shell-shaped (2D)
q
J3 -(l/fw"t) (4.6.7)
components for combined types of stresses is *6
J3 -1 aSK,crv = q . aNH + (l - q) . aoH~ 1, (4.6.9)
fw,'t shear fatigue strength factor, Table 4.2.1 or 4.6.1. where (4.6.10)

aNH =1{lsa,x +Sa,yl+~(Sa,x -Sa,y)2 +4.t;),

2 2 2
J
aoH = sa,x + sa,y - sa,x . sa,y + t a '

sa,x = aSK,crx , (4.6.11)

6 Eq. (4.6.4), (4.6.9) and (4.6.14) is a combination ofthe normal stress
criterion (NH) and the v. Mises criterion (GH). Depending on the sa,y= aSK,cry ,
ductility ofthematerial thecombination is controlled bya parameter q as
a function of fw,< according to Eq. (4.6.7), (4.6.12) or (4.6.17) and ta = aSK,"t ,
Table 4.6.1. For instance q = 0 forsteel sothat only thev. Mises criterion
is of effect, while q = 0,264 for GGG so that both the normal stress aSK,crx, ... degrees of utilization after Eq. (4.6.8) .
criterion and thev.Mises criterion areof partial influence.
 129
4.6 Assessment 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using local stresses

For non-ductile wrought aluminum alloys (elongation 4.6.3.2 Combined types of stresses
A < 12.5 %) q = 0,5 is to be applied. For surface
The degree of utilization of block-shaped (3D)
hardened or for welded components q = 1 is to' be
components for combined types of stresses is *6 *9
applied. Otherwise there is, Table 4.6.1,
aSK,sv = q . aNH + (1 - q) . aGH~ 1, (4.6.14)
J3-(l/fw,)
q
J3 -1
(4.6.12)
,I ,I
aNH = MAX (Isa,d Sa,21 Sa,31) , (4.6.15)

f w" shear fatigue strength factor, Table 4.2.1 or 4.6.1

aoH =
1/ 2
"2\(Sa,1 -Sa,2) +(Sa,2
2
-Sa,3) +(Sa,3 -Sa,l)
2) ,
Rules of signs: If the normal stresses ax and a y always
act proportional or synchronous in phase the degrees of Sa,I = aSK,al , (4.6.16)
utilization aSK,ax and aSK,cry are to be inserted in Eq.
Sa,2 = aSK,a2 ,
(4.6.11) with the same (positive) signs. If they act
always proportional or synchronous 1800 out of phase, Sa,3 = aSK,a3 ,
however, the degrees of utilization aSK,ax and aSK,cry are
aSK,al ... degrees of utilization after Eq. (4.6.13).
to be inserted in Eq. (4.6.11) with opposite signs *7 .
If the individual types of stress act non-proportional, For non-ductile wrought aluminum alloys (elongation
that is neither proportional nor synchronous, the Eq. A < 12,5 %) q = 0,5 is to be applied. For surface
(4.6.9) to (4.6.11) are not applicable and the procedure hardened or for welded components q = 1 is to be
proposed in Chapter 5.10 is to be applied instead. applied. Otherwise there is, Table 4.6.1,

J3-(l/fw,)
q (4.6.17)
4.6.3 Block-shaped (3D) components *8 J3 -1
4.6.3.1 Individual types of stress fw" shear fatigue strength factor, Tab. 4.2.1.
The degrees of utilization of block-shaped (3D)
components for the principle stresses in the directions 1, Rules of signs: If the principle stresses al , a2 and a3
2 and 3 are always act proportional or synchronous in phase the
degrees of utilization aSK,al , aSK,a2 and aSK,a3 are to
(J l,a,1 be inserted in Eq. (4.6.16) with the same (positive)
aSK,al = ~ 1, (4.6.13) signs. If they act always proportional or synchronous
(J I BK / j erf 1800 out of phase, however, the respective degrees of
(J 2,0,1 utilization aSK,aI , aSK,a2 and aSK,a3 are to be inserted
aSK,a2 = ~ 1, in Eq. (4.6.16) with opposite signs *12. If the individual
(J 2,BK / j erf principle stresses act non-proportional (that is in a non-
(J 3,0,1
constant direction), the Eq. (4.6.14) to (4.6.16) are not
aSK,a3 = ~ 1, applicable and the procedure proposed in Chapter 5.10
(J3 BK / jerf is to be applied instead.

al,a,l , ... characteristic stress amplitude (largest stress

amplitude in the spectrum) ofthe particular
principle stress, Chapter 4.1.1.3 and
Eq. (4.6.1) or (4.6.2),
al,SK, ... related amplitude of the component variable
amplitude fatigue strength, Chapter 4.4.3,
jges total safety factor, Chapter 4.5.5.

7 For example normal stresses iii thedirections x and ythatresult from

the same single external load affecting the component.
8 Sometimes block-shaped (3D) components may be welded at the
surface, for example by surfacing welds. Then assessment can becarried
out as for shell-shaped (2D) welded components, if the stresses ax, ay
and, areofinterest only. 9 MAX means themaximum ofthevalues inparenthesis to bevalid.
 130
4.6 Assessment 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength
using local stresses

5.1 Material tables
5 Appendices
5.1 Material tables
Contents
5.1.0 General
5.1.1 Material tables for steel and
cast iron materials
5.1.2 Material tables for
for aluminum alloys
5.1.0 General
No responsibility can be taken for the mechanical
material properties indicated in the material tables
below, see page 3 "Terms of liability". The newest
versions of the standards are decisive. The data given
are not to be used for selecting the material in design
since this would require additional material properties
to be considered that are not contained in the tables
below.
The tables *I contain mechanical properties according
to standards Rm,N , ... . They apply in the case of steel to
the smallest dimension of a semi-finished product *2, in
the case of cast iron materials and cast aluminum alloys
for the test piece. In the case of wrought aluminum
alloys the tables give component values Rm= Rm.N, ... ,
of the semi-finished product indicated. Properties ac-
cording to standards, component values and component
properties according standards are to be distinguished,
as explained in the Chapters 1.2,2.2, 3.2 or 4.2.
Rm,N or Rm are the minimum value, the guaranteed
value or the lower boundary of the specified range of the
tensile strength. The minimum value or the guaranteed
value ofthe yield strength are Rp,N or R, *3 *4.
The material fatigue strength values in the tables for
completely reversed loading, crW,zd,N , or for zero-
tension loading, crSch zd N ' ..., are intended for
information only, because they can be computed as
described below and are not necessary for the
assessment therefore.
All following equations are supposed to be valid for a
material test specimen of the diameter do = 7,5 mm
independent of the real dimension of the semi-finished
product or of the raw casting (index N left out, e.g.
crW,zd instead of crW,zd,N , etc.)
Material fatigue strength for completely reversed normal
stress
crW.zd = fw,o- . Rm ,
I Kinds of material (e.g. non-alloyed structural steel) and types of
material within the kind ofmaterial (e.g. St37-2) are distinguished.
2 Ifdifferent dimensions ofa semi-finished product are given.
3 For the values Rm,N ' Rp,N, Rm ' Rp , an average probability of
survival PO = 97,5 % is supposed that should also apply to the further
values crW,zd,N ' "" crW,zd , "', derived therefrom.
131
5 Appendices
fw,o- Fatigue strength factor for completely reversed
IRT51 EN. dog
normal stress, Table 2.2.1.
Material fatigue strength for completely reversed shear
stress
Page
-Cw,s = fW,t' crW,zd, (2.2.1) (5.2)
131 fW,t Shear fatigue strength factor, Tab. 2.2.1.
132
Material fatigue strength for completely reversed
132/ 142 bending stress
c W,b = ncr(do) . crW,zd, (5.3)
no-(do) Kj-Kj ratio, Eq.(2.3.14) *5, with do = 7,5 mm.
Material fatigue strength for completely reversed
torsional stress
-CW,t = nldo)' -cw,s, (5.4)
nldo) Kt-Kfratio, Eq.(2.3.14) *5, with do = 7,5 mm.
Material fatigue strength for zero-tension axial stress
(amplitude)
crSch,zd = crW,zd / (1 + Mo- ), (5.5)
M, Mean stress sensitivity, Eq. (2.4.34) *6.
Comment: The values crw, zd , ... , Eq. (5.1)6to (5.5), apply
to a number of cycles N = ND,s = ND,t = 10 .
For steel and cast iron materials (constant amplitude
S-N curve modell, Figure 2.4.4 and Table 2.4.4)
crW,zd, ..., is the fatigue limit = endurance limit.
Example: Quenched and tempered steel,
- fw,o- = 0,45 (Tab. 2.2.1),
- fatigue limit crW,zd = fw,o- . Rm = 0,45 Rm .
For aluminum alloys (constant amplitude S-N curve
model II, Figure 2.4.4 and Table 2.4.4) crW,zd, ..., is the
fatigue limit, while the endurance limit crW,II,zd, ..., is
achieved at a number of cycles N = ND, II,o- = ND,II;, = 108 .
It is lower than crW,zd or -cw,s by a factor fII, or fn,t :0-
_ fILo- = (108/106 ) 1/15 = 0,74
(kD,o-= 15 for normal stress) and
_ fILt = (108/106 ) 1/25 = 0,83
(kD,t = 25 for shear stress).
Example:
- fw,o- = 0,30 (Tab. 2.2.1),
fILo- = 0,74,
- Endurance limit crW,II,zd = fILo- . fw,o- . Rm=
= 0,74 . 0,30 . Rm = 0,22 . Rm .
4 Rp stands both for the yield stress R, orthe 0.2 proofstress RpO,2 .
(2.2.1) (5.1)
5 Eq. (5.3) for bending (and Eq. (5.4) for torsion in analogy) results from
a combination ofthe following equations:
- Eq. (2.4. I) (crW,b in the meaning ofa component value SWK,b )
- Eq. (2.3.1) (KWK,b = K(b),
- Eq. (2.3. 10) (Kt,b = I ; ncr(r) = I ; K(b = 11 ncr(d) ),
- Eq. (2.3.14) (ncr(d) with d = do = 7,5 mrn for the material in question,
- Eq. (2.3.17) (Ocr (do) = 2/ do = 0,267 mrn -I ).
6 Eq. (5.5) follows from Eq. (2.4.10) with Rzrl = 0 orSm,zd / Sa,zd = I,
respectively.
 132
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

5.1.1 Material tables for steel and cast iron
materials
The tables 5.1.1 to 5.1.14, from page 132 on, contain
mechanical properties according to standards, Rm.N, ... ,
for the following kinds of material: for rolled steel (non-
alloyed structural steel, weldable fine grain structural
steel, quenched and tempered steel, case hardening
steel, nitriding steel and stainless steel), for forging steel
and for cast iron materials (cast steel, heat treatable steel
castings, nodular cast iron (GGG), malleable cast iron
(GT) and cast iron with lamellar graphite (GG)).
From these and according to Chapter 1.2.1 or 3.2.1 the
component properties according to standards Rrn are to
be computed under observation of the technological size
factor according to the diameter or width of the semi-
finished product or of the raw casting, respectively.
The fatigue limit values O"W.zd.N. .., correspond to the
endurance limit as well.
5.1.2 Material tables for aluminum alloys
Table 5.1.21 on page 142 gives a survey of the
aluminum materials.
The tables 5.1.22 to 5.1.30, from page 143 on, contain
component properties according to standards, R.ll , ...,
for wrought aluminum alloys according to the type of
material and its condition. They are valid for the
indicated dimensions.
The tables 5.1.31 to 5.1.38, from page 172 on, contain
material properties according to standards, Rrn•N , ... , for
cast aluminum alloys according to the type of material
and its condition, from which - and according to
Chapter 1.2.1 or 3.2.1 - the component properties
according to standards, Rm , ... , are to be computed
under observation of the technological size factor
according to the width of the raw casting.
The fatigue limit values O"W.zd , O"W.zd.N , ... , are different
from those of the endurance limit, however, see page
131.

Table 5.1.1 Mechanical properties in MPa for non-alloy structural steels, after DIN EN 10 025 (1994-03-00) c- 1.

Type of Type of material, Material s,.N <>2

Rm.N O"W,zd,N O"Sch,zd,N O"W,b,N 'tW.s.N 'tW.I,N
material after DIN 17 100 No.
S185 St 33 1.0035 310 185 140 138 155 80 90
S235JR St 37-2 1.0037 360 235 160 158 180 95 105
S235JRGI USt 37-2 1.0036
S235JRGlC UQSt 37-2 1.0121
S235JRG2 RSt 37-2 1.0038
S235JRG2C RQSt 37-2 1.0122
S235JO St 37-3 U 1.0114
S235JOC QSt 37-3 U 1.0115
S235J2G3 St 37-3 N 1.0116
S235J2G4 1.0117
S235J2G3C QSt 37-3N 1.0118
S275JR St 44-2 1.0044 430 275 195 185 215 110 125
S275JRC QSt 44-2 1.0128
S275JO St 44-3 U 1.0143
S275JOC QSt 44-3 U 1.0140
S275J2G3 St 44-3 N 1.0144
S275J2G4 1.0145
S275J2G3C QSt 44-3N 1.0141
S355JR 1.0045 510 355 230 215 255 130 150
S355JO St 52-3 U 1.0553
S355JOC QSt 52-3 U 1.0554
S355J2G3 St 52-3 N 1.0570
S355J2G4 1.0577
S355J2G3C QSt 52-3 N 1.0569
S355K2G3 1.0595
S355K2G4 1.0596
E295 St 50-2 1.0050 490 295 220 205 245 125 145
E335 St 60-2 1.0060 590 335 265 240 290 155 170
E360 St 70-2 1.0070 690 360 310 270 340 180 200
<> 1 Effective Diameter del(N = 40 mm. c- 2 Re.N / Rrn,N < 0,75 for all types ofmatenal hsted.
 133
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.2 Mechanical properties in MFa for weldable fine grain structural steels in the normalized condition, after
DIN 17102 (1983-10-00) ~1.

Type of material Material Rm,N Re,N ()W,zd,N ()Sch,zd,N ()W,b,N 1:W,s,N 1:W,t,N ad,rn ad,p
No. ~2 ~3 ~3

StE 255 1.0461 360 255 160 160 180 95 105 0,33 0,41
StE 285 1.0486 390 285 175 170 195 100 115 0,31 0,38
StE 315 1.0505 440 315 200 190 220 115 130 0,28 0,35
StE 355 1.0562 490 355 220 205 245 125 145 0,26 0,30
StE 380 1.8900 500 380 225 210 250 130 145 0,26 0,34
StE 420 1.8902 530 420 240 220 265 140 155 0,24 0,31
StE 460 1.8905 560 460 250 230 280 145 165 0,23 0,30
StE 500 1.8907 610 500 275 245 300 160 180 0,22 0,31

~ 1 Effective Diameter for the tensile strength deff,N = 70 mm, for the yield strength deff,N = 40 mm.
~ 2 Re,N / ~N < 0,75 up to and including StE 355, Re,N / ~N > 0,75 from StE 380 on.
~ 3 More specific values for the individual types of material compared to the average values given in Table 1.2.1 and 3.2.1.

Table 5.1.3 Mechanical properties in MFa for weldable fine grain structural steels in the normalized condition, after
DIN EN 10 113 (1993-04-00) -c- 1.

Type of material Material Rrn,N Re,N ()W,zd,N ()Sch,zd,N ()W,b,N 1:W,s,N 1:W,t,N ad,rn ad,p
No. ~2 ~3 ~3

S 275 N 1.0490 370 275 165 160 185 95 110 0,30 0,30
S 275 NL 1.0491
S 355 N 1.0545 470 355 210 200 235 120 140 0,25 0,28
S 355 NL 1.0546
S 420N 1.8902 520 420 235 215 260 135 150 0,23 0,30
S 420 NL 1.8912
S460N 1.8901 550 460 245 225 275 140 160 0,00 0,22
S 460 NL 1.8903
S275M 1.8818 360 275 160 158 180 95 105 0,30 0,30
S 275 ML 1.8819
S 355M 1.8823 450 355 205 190 225 115 130 0,25 0,28
S 355 ML 1.8834
S420M 1.8825 500 420 225 210 250 130 145 0,23 0,30
S 420 ML 1.8836
S460M 1.8827 530 460 240 220 265 140 155 0,00 0,22
S 460 ML 1.8838

~ I Effective Diameter for the tensile strength deff,N = 100 mm, for the yield strength deff,N = 30 mm.
~ 2 Re,N / ~N < 0,75 up to and including S 275 NL, Re,N / ~N > 0,75 from S 355 Non.
~ 3 More specific values for the individual types of material compared to the average values given in Table 1.2.1 and 3.2.1.
 134
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.4 Mechanical properties in MFa for quenched and tempered steels in the quenched and tempered
condition, after DIN EN 10 083-1 (1996-10-00) -¢-1. Notes? 1 to -¢-4 see next page.

Type of Type of Material

Rm,N R,N crW,zd,N crSch,zd,N crW,b,N LW,s,N LW,t,N ad,rn llci,p
material, material, No.
after DIN EN after ?2 -¢-3 -¢-3 ?3 ?3 ?3 ?4 ?4
10 027-1 DIN 17200
C22E Ck 22 1.1151
C22R Cm22 1.1149 500 340 225 210 250 130 145 0,19 0,43
C22 C 22 1.0402
C25E Ck 25 1.1158 550
C25R Cm25 1.1163 370 250 225 275 145 160 0,29 0,40
C25 C25 1.0406
C30E Ck 30 1.1178
C30R Cm30 1.1179 600 400 270 245 295· 155 175 0,26 0,37
C30 C 30 1.0528
C35E Ck 35 1.1181
C35R Cm35 1.1180 630 430 285 255 310 165 185 0,20 0,39
C35 C 35 1.0501
C40E Ck40 1.1186
C40R Cm40 1.1189 650 460 295 260 320 170 190 0,12 0,36
C40 C40 1.0511
C45E Ck45 1.1191
C45R Cm45 1.1201 700 490 315 275 345 180 205 0,16 0,36
C45 C45 1.0503
C50E Ck 50 1.1206
C50R Cm50 1.1241 750 520 340 290 365 195 215 0,21 0,35
C50 C 50 1.0540
C55E Ck 55 1.1203
C55R Cm55 1.1209 800 550 360 305 390 210 230 0,19 0,35
C55 C 55 1.0535
C60E Ck60 1.1221
C60R Cm60 1.1223 850 580 385 320 415 220 245 0,18 0,34
C60 C60 1.0601
28Mn6 28Mn6 1.1170 800 590 360 305 390 210 230 0,30 0,38
38Cr2 38 Cr 2 1.7003 800 550 360 305 390 210 230 0,37 0,52
38CrS2 38 CrS 2 1.7023
46Cr2 46 Cr 2 1.7006 900 650 405 335 435 235 260 0,41 0,54
46CrS2 46 CrS 2 1.7025
34Cr4 34 Cr4 1.7033 900 700 405 335 435 235 260 0,33 0,49
34CrS4 34 CrS 4 1.7037
37Cr4 37 Cr4 1.7034 950 750 430 345 460 245 270 0,32 0,46
37CrS4 37 CrS 4 1.7038
41Cr4 41 Cr 4 1.7035 1000 800 450 360 480 260 285 0,30 0,44
41CrS4 41 CrS 4 1.7039
25CrMo4 25 CrMo4 1.7218 900 700 405 335 435 235 260 0,33 0,49
25CrMoS4 25 CrMoS 4 1.7213
34CrMo4 34 CrMo 4 1.7220 1000 800 450 360 480 260 285 0,30 0,44
34CrMoS4 34 CrMoS 4 1.7226
42CrMo4 42 CrMo 4 1.7225 1100 900 495 385 525 285 315 0,32 0,43
42CrMoS4 42 CrMoS 4 1.7227
50CrMo4 50 CrMo4 1.7228 1100 900 495 385 525 285 315 0,28 0,38
36CrNiMo4 36 CrNiMo 4 1.6511 1100 900 495 385 525 285 315 0,32 0,38
34CrNiM06 34 CrNoMo6 1.6582 1200 1000 540 410 570 310 340 0,33 0,39
30CrNiMo8 -¢- 1 30 CrNiMo 8 1.6580 1250 1050 565 420 595 325 355 0,36 0,42
36NiCrMo16?1 1.6773 1250 1050 565 420 595 325 355 0,28 0,32
51CrV4 50 CrY 4 1.8159 1100 900 495 385 525 285 315 0,28 0,33
 135
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.5 Mechanical properties in MPa for quenched and tempered steels in the normalized condition,
after DIN EN 10 083-1 (1996-10-00) -9-1.

Type of Type of Material Rn,N Re,N crW,zd,N CJSch,zd,N CJW,b,N 't W,s,N 'tW,I,N ~m ad,p
material, material, No. -9-2 -9-3 -9-3
after DIN EN after
10 027-1 DIN 17200

C22E Ck22 1.1151

C22R Cm22 1.1149 430 240 195 185 215 110 125 0,08 0,19
C22 C 22 1.0402
C25E Ck 25 1.1158
C25R Cm25 1.1163 470 260 210 200 235 120 140 0,10 0,18
C25 C 25 1.0406
C30E Ck 30 1.1178
C30R Cm30 1.1179 510 280 230 215 255 135 150 0,10 0,19
C30 C 30 1.0528
C35E Ck 35 1.1181
C35R Cm35 1.1180 550 300 250 225 275 145 160 0,10 0,19
C35 C 35 1.0501
C40E Ck40 1.1186
C40R Cm40 1.1189 580 320 260 235 285 150 170 0,09 0,19
C40 C40 1.0511
C45E Ck45 1.1191
C45R Cm45 1.1201 620 340 280 250 305 160 180 0,10 0,20
C45 C45 1.0503
CSOE Ck50 1.1206
C50R Cm50 1.1241 650 355 295 260 320 170 190 0,10 0,19
C50 C 50 1.0540
C55E Ck 55 1.1203
C55R Cm55 1.1209 680 370 305 270 335 175 195 0,09 0,20
C55 C 55 1.0535
C60E Ck60 1.1221
C60R Cm60 1.1223 710 380 320 280 350 185 205 0,09 0,19
C60 C60 1.0601
28Mn6 28Mn6 1.1170 630 345 285 250 310 165 185 0,07 0,17

-9- 1 Effective diameter deff,N = 16 rom.

-9- 2 Re,N / Rm,N < 0,75 for all types of material listed.
-9- 3 More specific values for the individual types of material compared to the average values given in Table 1.2.1 and 3.2.1.

Notes referring to Table 5.1.4:

-9- 1 Effective diameter deff,N;= 40 rom for 30 CrNiMo 8 and 36 NiCrMo 16, deff,N = 16 rom for all other types of material listed.
-9- 2 Re,N / Rm,N < 0,75 up to and including 46 Cr 2, 46 CrS 2; Re,N / Rm,N > 0,75 from 34 Cr 4, 34 CrS 4 on.
-9- 3 The fatigue strength values of the sulphur bearing steels 38 CrS 2 to 42CrMoS 4 are lower than the values listed for 28 Cr 2 to 42 CrMo 4.
-9- 4 M ore specific values for the individual types of material compared to the average values given in Table 1.2.1 and 3.2.1.
 136
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.6 Mechanical properties in MPa for case hardening steels in the blank hardened condition -:> 1,
after DIN EN 10 084 (1998-06-00) (selected types of material only) -:>2.
6
Type of material Material Rm,N Re,N O'W,zd,N O'Sch,zd,N O'W,b,N 1: W,s,N 1:W,t,N ad,rn -:>
-:>3 No. ad,p
-:> 4 -:> 5
ClOE 1.1121 500 310 200 185 220 115 130 0,56
C15E 1.1141 800 545 320 270 345 185 205 0,68
C16E 1.1148 800 545 320 270 345 185 205 0,68
17Cr3 1.7016 800 545 320 270 345 185 205 0,37
28Cr4 * 1.7030 900 620 360 295 385 210 230 0,33
16MnCr5 * 1.7131 1000 695 400 320 430 230 255 0,44
20MnCr5 * 1.7147 1200 850 480 365 510 280 305 0,48
18CrMo4 * 1.7243 1100 775 440 340 470 255 280 0,52
18CrMoS4 * 1.7244 1100 775 440 340 470 255 280 0,52
22CrMoS3-5 * 1.7333 1100 775 440 340 470 255 280 0,28
20MoCr3 1.7320 900 620 360 295 385 210 230 0,33
20MoCr4 1.7321 900 620 360 295 385 210 230 0,33
16NiCr4 1.5714 1000 695 400 320 430 230 255 0,30
10NiCr5-4 * 1.5805 900 620 360 295 385 210 230 0,61
18NiCr5-4 * 1.5810 1200 850 480 365 510 280 305 0,37
l7CrNi6-6 * 1.5918 1200 850 480 365 510 280 305 0,37
l5NiCr13 * 1.5752 1000 695 400 320 430 230 255 0,30-
20NiCrMo2-2 * 1.6523 1100 775 440 340 470 255 280 0,52
l7NiCrMo6-4 * 1.6566 1200 850 480 365 510 280 305 0,37
20NiCrMoS6-4 * 1.6571 1200 850 480 365 510 280 305 0,37
18CrNiMo7~6 * 1.6587 1200 850 480 365 510 280 305 0,37
14NiCrMo13-4 * 1.6657 1200 850 480 365 510 280 305 0,37

-:> 1 Values after DIN EN 10084 Appendix F ("tensile strength values after quenching and tempering at 200°C") given for information only.
-c- 2 Effective diameter deff,N = 16 mm,
-c- 3 Only up to 40 mm diameter, types of material marked by * up to 100 mm diameter, however.
-:> 4 Re,N after DIN 17210 (Draft 1984-10-00), fitted.
-:> 5 Re,N / ~,N < 0,75 for all types of material listed.
-:> 6 More specific values for the individual types of material compared to the average values given in Table 1.2.1 and 3.2.1.

Table 5.1. 7 Mechanical properties in l\1Pa for nidriding steels in the quenched and tempered condition,
after DIN EN 10 085 (2001-07-00) -:>1.

Type of material Material Rm,N Re,N O'W,zd,N O'Sch,zd,N O'W,b,N 1: W,s,N 1:W,t,N ad,rn ad,p
No. -:>2 -:>3 -:>3

24CrMo13-6 1.8516 1000 800 450 360 480 260 285 0,22 0,26
31CrMo12 1.8515 1030 835 465 370 495 270 295 0,21 0,27
32CrAIMo7-1O 1.8505 1030 835 465 370 495 270 295 0,21 0,27
3lCrMoV5 1.8519 1100 900 495 385 525 285 315 0,31 0,36
33CrMoV12-9 1.8522 1150 950 520 395 550 300 330 0,30 0,35
34CrAINi7-1O 1.8550 900 680 405 335 435 235 260 0,17 0,17
41CrAlMo7-1O 1.8509 950 750 430 345 460 250 275 0,23 0,24
40CrMoV13-9 1.8523 950 750 430 345 460 250 275 0,23 0,24
34CrAIMo5-1O 1.8507-:>4 800 600 360 305 390 210 230 0,00 0,00

-:> 1 Effective diameter deff,N = 40 mm.

-:> 2 Re,N / ~N > 0,75 for all types of material listed.
-:> 3 More specific values for the individual types of materiaI compared to the average values for the kind of material given in Table 1.2.1 and 3.2.1.
-:> 4 Only up to 100 mm diameter.
 137
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.8 Mechanical properties in MFa for stainless steels, after DIN EN 10 088-2 (1995-08-00) (selected types of
material only) v I v 2

Type of material Type of material, Mate- Kind of

Rm,N R,N CJW,zd,N CJSch,zd,N CJW,b,N '"CW,.,N '"CW,t,N
after DIN / SEW rial product
No. v3

. tl ie annealed con diition,

F emtic stee 1s ill . stan dar d qualiHIes,
X2CrNi12 - 1.4003 P(25) 450 250 180 170 205 105 120
X6CrAl13 X6CrAI13 1.4002 P(25) 400 210 160 155 180 90 110
X6Crl7 X6Cr17 1.4016 P(25) 430 240 170 165 195 100 115
X6CrMo17-1 X6CrMo 17 1 1.4113 H(12) 450 260 180 170 205 105 120

Martensitic steeIs 'ill th e h eat treate d con d"

inon, stan dar d oualiti
qua ities.
X20Cr13 X20Cr 13 1.4021 P(75)
QT650 650 450 260 230 290 150 170
QT750 750 550 300 260 330 175 195
X4CrNiMo16-5-1 - 1.4418 P(75)
QT840 840 680 335 280 410 195 220
P ecipitation
.. . martensitic steeIs ill
h ar demng . tll e heat treate d condition, special qualities.
X5CrNiCuNb16-4 - 1.4542 P(50)
P1070 1070 1000 430 335 460 245 275
P950 950 800 380 310 410 220 245
P850 850 600 340 285 370 195 220

Austemtic steeIs 'ill t h ' anneaIed condiition,

e soiution , stan dar d qua
oualiti
ities.
X10CrNi18-8 X12CrNi 177 1.4310 C(6) 600 250 240 215 270 140 160
X2CrNiNI8-1O X2CrNi 18 10 1.4311 P(75) 550 270 220 200 245 125 145
X5CrNil8-10 X5CrNi 18 10 1.4301 P(75) 520 220 210 190 235 120 140
X6CrNiTi18-1O X6CrNi 18 10 1.4541 P(75) 500 200 200 185 225 115 135
X6CrNiMoTil7-12-2 X6CrNiMoTi 1722 1.4571 P(75) 520 220 210 190 235 120 140
X2CrNiMoN17-13-5 X2CrNiMoN17135 1.4439 P(75) 580 270 230 210 260 135 155

v I The fatigue strength values are provisional values.

v 2 An effective diameter deff,N is not required, as there is no technological size effect within the dimensions covered by the standard.
v 3 Kind of product: P(2S) hot rolled plates up to 25 mm thickness, H(12) hot rolled strip up to 12 mm thickness, C(6) cold r~l1ed strip up to
6 mm thickness, QT650 heat treated to a tensile strength of650 MPa, PI070 hot rolled plate with a tensile strength of 1070 MPa.
 138
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.9 Mechanical properties in MFa of steels for bigger forgings, after SEW 550 (1976-08-00) <, I <,2.

Type of material Material Rn,N R,N O"W,zd,N O"Sch,zd,N O"W,b,N 1: W,s,N 1:W,t,N ~,m ad,p
No. <,3 <03

Quenched and tempered condition.

Ck22 1.1151 410 225 165 155 185 95 105 0,00 0,16
Ck 35 1.1181 490 295 195 185 215 115 130 0,00 0,22
Ck45 1.1191 590 345 235 215 260 135 155 0,00 0,19
Ck 50 1.1206 630 365 250 280 275 145 165 0,00 0,25
Ck60 1.1221 690 390 275 240 300 160 180 0,00 0,27
20Mn5 1.1133 490 295 195 185 215 115 130 0,00 0,22
28Mn6 1.1170 590 390 235 215 260 135 155 0,26 0,31
20 MnMoNi 45 1.6311 580 420 230 210 255 135 150 0,18 0,23
22 NiMoCr 47 1.6755 560 400 225 205 245 130 145 0,00 0,00
24 CrMo 5 1.7258 640 410 255 230 280 150 165 0,24 0,26
34 CrMo4 1.7220 690 460 275 240 300 160 180 0,23 0,30
42 CrMo 4 1.7225 740 510 295 255 320 170 190 0,34 0,37
50 CrMo 4 1.7228 780 590 310 265 340 180 200 0,23 0,30
32 CrMo 12 1.7361 880 685 350 290 380 205 225 0,27 0,33
34 CrNiMo 6 1.6582 780 590 310 265 340 180 200 0,19 0,26
30 CrNiMo 8 1.6580 880 685 350 290 380 205 225 0,19 0,22
28 NiCrMoV 85<>' 1.6932 780 635 265 225 290 155 170 0,22 6,26
2
33 NiCrMo 145<0 1.6956 930 785 315 260 340 185 200 0,35 0,37

Normalized condition.

Ck22 1.1151 410 225 165 155 185 95 105 0,00 0,16
Ck 35 1.1181 490 275 195 180 215 115 130 0,00 0,19
Ck45 1.1191 590 325 235 215 260 135 155 0,00 0,16
Ck 50 1.1206 620 345 250 220 270 145 160 0,00 0,15
Ck60 1.1221 680 375 270 220 295 155 175 0,00 0,14

<> I The fatigue strength values are provisional values.

<> 2 Effective diameter deff,N = 500 nun for 28 NiCrMoV 8 5 und deff,N = 1000 nun for 33 NiCrMo 145, deff,N = 250 nun for
all other types of material listed.
<> 3 More specific values for the individual types of material compared to the average values for the kind of material given in Table 1.2.1 and 3.2.1.
 139
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.10 Mechanical propertiesin:MFafor steelcastingsfor general applications,

after DIN 1681 (1985-06-00) ~ 1.
2
Type of material Material No. Rm,N Re,N
~
crW,zd,N crSch,zd,N crW,b,N L W,s,N . LW,t,N

GS-38 1.0420 380 200 130 125 150 75 90

GS-45 1.0446 450 230 150 130 180 90 105
GS-52 1.0552 520 260 175 145 205 100 125
GS-60 1.0558 600 300 205 160 235 120 140
~ 1 Effective diameter deff,N = 100 mm. ~ 2 Re,N / ~N < 0,75 for all types of material listed.

Table 5.1.11 Mechanical properties in:MFafor quenched and tempered steel castingsfor general applications,
after DIN 17205 (1992-04-00).
A'If-hardened and tempered condiinon (LV) ~ 1
2
Type of material Material No. Rm,N Re,N
~
crW,zd,N crSch,zd,N crW,b,N LW,s,N LW,t,N

GS-30 Mn 5 ~1 1.1165 520 260 175 145 205 100 125

GS-25 CrMo 4 ~ 1 1.7218 550 300 185 150 215 110 130
GS-34 CrMo 4 1.7220 650 380 220 175 250 130 150
GS-42 CrMo 4 1.7225 700 400 240 185 270 135 160
GS-30 CrMoV 6 4 1.7725 650 400 220 175 250 130 150
GS-35 CrMoV 10 4 1.7755 800 650 270 205 305 155 185
GS-25 CrNiMo 4 1.6515 700 400 240 185 270 135 160
GS-34 CrNiMo6 1.6582 800 550 270 205 305 155 185
GS-30 NiCrMo 8 5 1.6570 800 600 270 205 305 155 185
GS-33 NiCrMo 7 4 4 1.6740 800 600 270 205 305 155 185
Liquid-hardened and temperedcondition, strength level V I (upperline) or V II (line below) ~ 3.
GS-30 Mn 5 1.1165 520 400 175 145 205 100 125
(No. J) ~4 700 550 240 185 270 135 160
GS-25 CrMo 4 1.7218 600 450 205 160 235 120 140
(No.2) 750 600 255 195 285 145 175
GS-34 CrMo 4 1.7220 750 600 255 195 285 145 175
(No, 3) 850 700 290 215 320 165 195
GS-42 CrMo 4 1.7225 780 650 265 200 295 155 180
(No.4) 900 800 305 225 340 175 205
GS-30 CrMoV 64 1.7725 850 700 290 215 320 165 195
(No.5) 900 750 305 225 340 175 205
GS-35 CrMoV 10 4 1.7755 850 700 290 215 320 165 195
(No.6) 1050 850 355 250 390 205 235
GS-25 CrNiMo 4 1.6515 700 550 240 185 270 135 160
(No.7) 800 650 270 205 305 155 185
GS-34 CrNiMo 6 1.6582 850 700 290 215 320 165 195
(No.8) 900 800 340 225 370 195 225
GS-30 NiCrMo8 5 1.6570 850 700 290 215 320 165 195
(No. 9) ~5 1050 950 355 250 390 205 235
GS-33 NiCrMo 7 4 4 1.6740 850 700 290 215 320 165 195
(No. 9) ~5 1050 950 355 250 390 205 235
~ 1 Effective diameter defT,N = 800 mm for GS-30 Mn 5 and defLN = 500 mm for GS-25 CrMo 4, defLN = 300 mm for all other materials listed.
~ 2 Air-hardened condition: Re,N / ~N ::;; 0,75 for all types of material listed.
Liquid-hardened condition: Re,N / ~N > 0,75 for all types of material listed.
~ 3 Effective diameter
deff,N = 100 mm for type of material-No.2 (strength level VII only) and for type of material-No. 1, 3, 4 (strength levels VI and VII);
deff,N = 200 mm for type of material-No. 2 (strength level VI only) and for type of material-No. 5,6,8 (strength levels VI and VII);
deff,N = 500 mm for type ofmaterial-No.7, 9 (strength levels VI and VII);
~ 4 Numbers indicating types of material for Table 1.2.2 and 3.2.2.
-c- 5 The mechanical properties for GS-30 NiCrMo 8 5 and GS-33 NiCrMo 74 4-are the same.
 140
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.12 Mechanical properties in MPa for spheroidal graphit cast irons, after DIN EN 1563 (1997-08-00)
or after DIN 1693/01 (1973-10-00) (namings given in brackets) {ol.

{o 2 As {o3
Type of material Material Rm,N RpO,2,N CYW,zd,N CYSch,zd,N CYW,b,N 1: W,s,N 1:W,t,N
No.
EN-GJS-350-22-LT EN-JS1015 350 220 22 120 100 160 75 110
(GGG-35.3) (0.7033)
EN-GJS-350-22-RT EN-JS1014
EN-GJS-350-22 EN-JS 1010
EN-GJS-400-18-LT EN-JS1025 400 240 18 135 110 185 90 120
(GGG-40.3) (0.7043)
EN-GJS-400-18-RT EN-JS1024 250
EN-GJS-400-18 EN-JS1020 250
EN-GJS-400-15 EN-JS1030 400 250 15 135 110 185 90 120
(GGG-40) (0.7040)
EN-GJS-450-1 0 EN-JS1040 450 310 10 155 125 205 100 135
EN-GJS-500-7 EN-JS1050 500 320 7 170 135 225 110 150
(GGG-50) (0.7050)
EN-GJS-600-3 EN-JS1060 600 370 3 205 160 265 135 180
(GGG-60) (0.7060)
EN-GJS-700-2 EN-JS1070 700 420 2 240 180 305 155 205
(GGG-70) (0.7070)
EN-GJS-800-2 EN-JS1080 800 480 2 270 200 340 175 235
(GGG-80) (0.7080)
EN-GJS-900-2 EN-JS1090 900 600 2 305 220 380 200 260
{o 1 Effective diameter deff,N = 60 mm.

{o 21)J0,2,N / ~,N < 0,75 for all types of material listed.

{o3 Elongation in %. For non-ductile materials, A 5 < 12,5%, the assessment ofthe static strength is to be carried out by using local stresses, Chapter 1.0,
and all safety factors are to be increased by adding a value 6.j, Eq. (2.5.2), ... , see Chapters 2.5, 3.5 or 4.5 , respectively.

Table 5.1.13 Mechanical properties for malleable cast irons see next page.

Table 5.1.14 Mechanical properties in MPa for grey cast irons, after DIN EN 1561 (1997-08-00)
or after DIN 1691 (1985-05-00) (namings given in brackets) {> 1.

{o2 3
Type of material Material Rm,N RpO,I,N CYW,zd,N {o CYSch,zd,N CYW.b.N 1: W.s,N 1:W,t,N
No.
EN-GJL-100 EN-JL 1010
(GG-10) {>4 (0.6010)
100 - 30 20 45 25 40
EN-GJL-150 EN-JL1020
150 100 45 30 70 40 60
(GG-15) (0.6015)
EN-GJL-200 EN-JL1030
200 130 60 40 90 50 75
(GG-20) (0.6020)
EN-GJL-250 EN-JL1040
250 165 75 50 110 65 95
(GG-25) (0.6025)
EN-GJL-300 EN-JL1050
300 195 90 60 130 75 115
(GG-30) (0.6030)
EN-GJL-350 EN-JL1060
350 230 105 70 150 90 130
(GG-35) (0.6035)

{> 1 Effective diameter deff,N = 20 mm.

{> 2 After supplement 1 of the standard; not to be used for an assessment of strength.
{o3 0W,zd,N / Rrn,N = 0,30; different from DIN EN 1561.
{o 4 Not to be used for load carrying components.
 141
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.13 Mechanical properties in MPa for malleable cast irons, after DIN EN 1562 (1997-06-00)
or after DIN 1692 (1982-01-00) (namings given in brackets) ~ 1.
2
Type of material Material Rm,N RpO.2,N ~ A 3 ~3 O"W,zd,N O"Sch,zd,N O"W,b,N 'tW,s,N 'tW,t,N
No.

Black heart malleable (non-decarburized) cast irons.

EN-GJMB-300-6 EN-JMlllO 300 - 6 90 75 130 70 100

(- ) (- )
EN-GJMB-350-1O EN-JMl130 350 200 10 105 85 150 80 115
(GTS-35-1O) (0.8135)
EN-GJMB-450-6 EN-JMl140 450 270 6 135 105 190 100 145
(GTS-45-06) (0.8145)
EN-GJMB-500-5 EN-JMl150 500 300 5 150 115 210 115 160
(-) (-)

EN-GJMB-550-4 EN-JM1160 550 340 4 165 125 230 125 175

(GTS-50-04) (0.8155)
EN-GJMB-600-3 EN-JM1l70 600 390 3 180 135 250 135 190
(-) (-)
EN-GJMB-650-2 EN-JMl180 650 430 2 195 145 265 145 205
(GTS-65-02) (0.8165)
EN-GJMB-700-2 EN-JM1l90 700 530 2 210 155 285 160 220
(GTS-70-02) (0.8170)
EN-GJMB-800-1 EN-JM1200 800 600 1 240 170 320 180 250
(-) (-)

White heart malleable (decarburized) cast irons.

EN-GJMW-350-4 EN-JM1010 350 - 4 105 85 150 80 115

(GTW-35-04) (0.8035)
EN-GJMW-360-12 EN-JM1020 360 190 12 110 85 155 80 120
(GTW-S 38-12) (0.8038)
EN-GJMW-400-5 EN-JM1030 400 220 5 120 95 170 90 130
(GTW-40-05) (0.8040)
EN-GJMW-450-7 EN-JM1040 450 260 7 135 105 190 100 145
(GTW-45-07) (0.8045)
EN-GJMW-550-4 EN-JM1050 550 340 4 165 125 230 125 175
(-) (-)

~ 1 Effective diameter deff,N = 15 mm.

-c- 2 Table on top: R pO,2,N / Rm,N < 0,75; except for GTS-70-02 there is R pO,2,N / Rm,N > 0,75; Table below: R pO,2,N / Rm,N < 0,75 throughout.
~ 3 Elongation in %. For non-ductile materials, A5 < 12,5%, the assessment of the static strength is to be carried out by using local stresses, Chapter 1.0,
and all safety factors are to be increased by adding a value t.j , Eq. (2.5.2), ... , see Chapters 2.5,3.5 or 4.5 , respectively.

Table 5.1.14 Mechanical properties for grey cast irions see previous page.
 142
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.21. Survey of the Aluminum materials. IRT51Al-a.do~

Table Kind of material Semi-finished product / Type of casting Material standard (Edition)

5.1.22 Wrought Strips, sheets, plates DIN EN 485-2 (03/95)

Aluminum alloys
5.1.23 Strips, sheets DIN 1745 T. 1 (02/83)
5.1.24 Cold drawn rods / bars and tubes DIN EN 754-2 (08/97)
5.1.25 Rods / bars DIN 1747 T. 1 (02/83)
5.1.26 Extruded rods / bars, tubes and profiles DIN EN 755-2 (08/97)
5.1.27 Extruded profiles DIN 1748 T. 1 (02/83)
5.1.28 Forgings DIN EN 586-2 (U/94)
5.1.29 Die forgings DIN 1749 T. 1 (12/76)
5.1.30 Hand forgings DIN 17606 (12/76)

5.1.31 Cast Sand castings DIN EN 1706 (06/98)

Aluminum alloys
5.1.32 Permanent mould castings DIN EN 1706 (06/98)
5.1.33 Investment castings DIN EN 1706 (06/98)
5. 1.34 High pressure die castings DIN EN 1706 (06/98)
5.1.35 Casting alloys for general applications DIN 1725 T. 2 (02/86)
5. 1.36 Alloys with special mechanical properties DIN 1725 T. 2 (02/86)
5. 1.37 Alloys for special applications DIN 1725 T. 2 (02/86)
5.1.38 Alloys for high pressure die castings DIN 1725 T. 2 (02/86)

Tables 5.1.22 to 5.1.38 give the respective values of elongation: For non-ductile materials,
A < 12,5%, the assessment of the component static strength is to be carried of using local stresses, Chapter 1.0,
and all safety factors are to be increased by adding a value ~j , see Eq. (2.5.2), ... in Chapter 2.5, 3.5 or 4.5,
respectively.

Attention:
The fatigue limit values GW,zd, ... given in the Table 5.1.22 to 5.1.38 refer to the knee point of the S-N curve
at N = ND,O' = ND,< = 106 cycles.
The endurance limit values GW,Il,zd , ... refer to a number of N = ND,O'.II = ND.< ,II = 108 cycles, and are lower than
the fatigue limit by a factor fIl,O' or fIl,< (see also page 131):
- fIl,O' = (108 / 106 ) 1/15 = 0,74 (kD,O' = 15 for normal stress),
- fIl,< = (108 / 106 ) 1/25 = 0,83 (kD,< = 25 for shear stress).
 143
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.22 Mechanical properties in MPa for wrought aluminum alloys,

strips, s h eets, pJates,
I aft er DIN EN 485-2 (03/95) (selected types 0 f matenial onlly),
Material Condition Nom, thickness Rm A{>1 Hardness
Re crW,zd crSch,zd crW,b ~W,s ~W,t
inmm number
from to % HB
EN AW-2014 T3 <: 0,4 1,5 395 245 120 85 140 70 85 14 III
1,5 6,0 400 245 120 90 140 70 85 14 112
AlCu4SiMg T4 <: 0,4 1,5 395 240 120 85 140 70 85 14 110
T451 1,5 6,0 395 240 120 85 140 70 85 14 110
6,0 12,5 400 250 120 90 140 70 85 14 112
T451 12,5 40,0 400 250 120 90 140 70 85 10* 112
40,0 100,0 395 250 120 85 140 70 85 7* 111
T42 <:0,4 6,0 395 230 120 85 140 70 85 14 110
6,0 12,5 400 235 120 90 140 70 85 14 III
12,5 25,0 400 235 120 90 140 70 85 12* III
T6 <: 0,4 1,5 440 390 130 95 150 75 95 6 133
T651 1,5 6,0 440 390 130 95 150 75 95 7 133
6,0 12,5 450 395 135 95 155 80 95 7 135
T651 12,5 40,0 460 400 140 95 160 80 100 6* 138
40,0 60,0 450 390 135 95 155 80 95 5* 135
60,0 80,0 435 380 130 95 150 75 95 4* 131
80,0 100,0 420 360 125 90 145 75 90 4* 126
100,0 120,0 410 350 125 90 145 70 90 4* 123
T62 <: 0,4 12,5 440 390 130 95 150 75 95 7 133
12,5 25,0 450 395 135 95 155 80 95 6* 135
EN AW-2017A T4 <: 0,4 1,5 390 245 115 85 135 70 85 14 110
T451 1,5 6,0 390 245 115 85 135 70 85 15 110
AICu4MgSi(A) 6,0 12,5 390 260 115 85 135 70 85 13 III
T451 12,5 40,0 390 250 115 85 135 70 85 12* 110
40,0 100,0 385 240 115 85 135 65 85 10* 108
100,0 120,0 370 240 110 85 130 65 80 8* 105
120,0 150,0 350 240 105 80 125 60 75 4* 101
T42 <:0,4 3,0 390 235 115 85 135 70 85 14 109
3,0 12,5 390 235 115 85 135 70 85 15 109
12,5 25,0 390 235 115 85 135 70 85 12* 109
EN AW-2024 T4 <: 0,4 1,5 425 275 130 90 145 75 90 12 120
1,5 6,0 425 275 130 90 145 75 90 14 120
AICu4Mgl T3 <:0,4 1,5 435 290 130 95 150 75 95 12 123
T351 1,5 3,0 435 290 130 95 150 75 95 14 123
3,0 6,0 440 290 130 95 150 75 95 14 124
6,0 12,5 440 290 130 95 150 75 95 13 124
T351 12,5 40,0 430 290 130 95 150 75 90 11* 122
40,0 80,0 420 290 125 90 145 75 90 8* 120
80,0 100,0 400 285 120 90 140 70 85 7* 115
100,0 120,0 380 270 115 85 135 65 85 5* 110
120,0 150,0 360 250 110 80 130 60 80 5* 104
T42 <: 0,4 6,0 425 260 130 90 145 75 90 15 119
6,0 12,5 425 260 130 90 145 75 90 12 119
12,5 25,0 420 260 125 90 145 75 90 8* 118
T8 <:0,4 1,5 460 400 140 95 160 80 100 5 138
T851 1,5 6,0 460 400 140 95 160 80 100 6 138
6,0 12,5 460 400 140 95 160 80 100 5 138
T851 12,5 25,0 455 400 135 95 155 80 95 4* 137
25,0 40,0 455 395 135 95 155 80 95 4* 136
T62 <:0,4 12,5 440 345 130 95 150 75 95 5 129
12,5 25,0 435 345 130 95 150 75 95 4* 128

-c- 1 Elongation A for gaugelengthof 50 mm, or (with*) Elongation A5 for gaugelength of 5 x specimen diameter
 144
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.22 Continued, page 1 of 7.

Material Condition Nom. thickness Rm Re A~l Hardness

crW,zd crSch,zd crW,b 1W,S 1W,t
inmm number
from to % HB
EN AW-4006 H12 0,2 0,5 120 90 35 35 50 20 30 4 38
0,5 1,5 120 90 35 35 50 20 30 4 38
AISi1Fe 1,5 3,0 120 90 35 35 50 20 30 5 38
H14 0,2 0,5 140 120 40 40 55 25 35 3 45
0,5 1,5 140 120 40 40 55 25 35 3 45
1,5 3,0 140 120 40 40 55 25 35 3 45
T4 0,2 0,5 120 55 35 35 50 20 30 14 35
0,5 1,5 120 55 35 35 50 20 30 16 35
1,5 3,0 120 55 35 35 50 20 30 18 35
3,0 6,0 120 55 35 35 50 20 30 21 35
EN AW-4007 O1H111 0,2 0,5 110 45 35 30 45 20 25 15 32
0,5 1,5 110 45 35 30 45 20 25 16 32
AISi1, 5Mn 1,5 3,0 110 45 35 30 45 20 25 19 32
3,0 6,0 110 45 35 30 45 20 25 21 32
6,0 12,5 110 45 35 30 45 20 25 25 32
H12 ~0,2 0,5 140 110 40 40 55 25 35 4 44
0,5 1,5 140 110 40 40 55 25 35 4 44
1,5 3,0 140 110 40 40 55 25 35 5 44
EN AW-5049 O/H111 0,2 0,5 190 80 35 50 75 35 45 12 52
0,5 1,5 190 80 35 50 75 35 45 14 52
AI Mg2MnO,8 1,5 3,0 190 80 35 50 75 35 45 16 52
3,0 6,0 190 80 35 50 75 35 45 18 52
6,0 12,5 190 80 35 50 75 35 45 18 52
12,5 100,0 190 80 35 50 75 35 45 17* 52
Hl12 ~6,0 12,5 210 140 65 55 80 35 50 12 62
12,5 25,0 200 120 60 50 75 35 45 10* 58
25,0 40,0 190 80 55 50 75 35 45 12* 52
40,0 80,0 190 80 55 50 75 35 45 14* 52
H12 0,2 0,5 220 170 65 55 85 40 50 4 66
0,5 1,5 220 170 65 55 85 40 50 5 66
1,5 3,0 220 170 65 55 85 40 50 6 66
3,0 6,0 220 170 65 55 85 40 50 7 66
6,0 12,5 220 170 65 55 85 40 50 9 66
12,5 40,0 220 170 65 55 85 40 50 9* 66
H14 0,2 0,5 240 190 70 60 90 40 55 3 72
0,5 1,5 240 190 70 60 90 40 55 3 72
1,5 3,0 240 190 70 60 90 40 55 4 72
3,0 6,0 240 190 70 60 90 40 55 4 72
6,0 12,5 240 190 70 60 90 40 55 5 72
12,5 25,0 240 190 70 60 90 40 55 6* 72
H16 0,2 0,5 265 220 80 65 100 45 60 2 80
0,5 1,5 265 220 80 65 100 45 60 3 80
1,5 3,0 265 220 80 65 100 45 60 3 80
3,0 6,0 265 220 80 65 100 45 60 3 80
H18 0,2 0,5 290 250 85 70 105 50 65 1 88
0,5 1,5 290 250 85 70 105 50 65 2 88
1,5 3,0 290 250 85 70 105 50 65 2 88
H22/H32 0,2 0,5 220 130 65 55 85 40 50 7 63
0,5 1,5 220 130 65 . 55 85 40 50 8 63
1,5 3,0 220 130 65 55 85 40 50 10 63
3,0 6,0 220 130 65 55 85 40 50 11 63
6,0 12,5 220 130 65 55 85 40 50 10 63
12,5 40,0 220 130 65 55 85 40 50 9* 63
H241H34 0,2 0,5 240 160 70 60 90 40 55 6 70
0,5 1,5 240 160 70 60 90 40 55 6 70
1,5 3,0 240 160 70 60 90 40 55 7 70
3,0 6,0 240 160 70 60 90 40 55 8 70
6,0 12,5 240 160 70 60 90 40 55 10 70
12,5 25,0 240 160 70 60 90 40 55 8* 70
H26/H36 0,2 0,5 265 190 80 65 100 45 60 4 78
0,5 1,5 265 190 80 65 100 45 60 4 78
1,5 3,0 265 190 80 65 100 45 60 5 78
3,0 6,0 265 190 80 65 100 45 60 6 78
H28/H38 0,2 0,5 290 230 85 70 105 50 65 3 87
0,5 1,5 290 230 85 70 105 50 65 3 87
1,5 3,0 290 230 85 70 105 50 65 4 87
 145
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.22 Continued, page 2 of 7.

Material Condition Nom.thickness Rm Re A~1 Hardness

crW,zd crSch,zd crW,b ~W,s ~W,t
inmm number
from to % HB
EN AW-5052 OIHIlI 0,2 0,5 170 65 50 45 65 30 40 12 47
0,5 1,5 170 65 50 45 65 30 40 14 47
AI Mg2,5 1,5 3,0 170 65 50 45 65 30 40 16 47
3,0 6,0 170 65 50 45 65 30 40 18 47
6,0 12,5 165 65 50 45 65 30 40 19 46
12,5 80,0 165 65 50 45 65 30 40 18* 46
HIl2 <: 6,0 12,5 190 110 55 50 75 30 45 7 55
12,5 40,0 170 70 50 45 65 30 40 10* 47
80,0 170 70 50 45 65 30 40 14* 47
40,0
H12 0,2 0,5 210 160 65 55 80 35 50 4 63
0,5 1,5 210 160 65 55 80 35 50 5 63
1,5 3,0 210 160 65 55 80 35 50 6 63
3,0 6,0 210 160 65 55 80 35 50 8 63
6,0 12,5 210 160 65 55 80 35 50 10 63
12,5 40,0 210 160 65 55 80 35 50 9* 63
H14 0,2 0,5 230 180 70 60 85 40 55 3 69
0,5 1,5 230 180 70 60 85 40 55 3 69
1,5 3,0 230 180 70 60 85 40 55 4 69
3,0 6,0 230 180 70 60 85 40 55 4 69
6,0 12,5 230 180 70 60 85 40 55 5 69
12,5 25,0 230 180 70 60 85 40 55 4* 69
H16 0,2 0,5 250 210 75 60 95 45 55 2 76
0,5 1,5 250 210 75 60 95 45 55 3 76
1,5 3,0 250 210 75 60 95 45 55 3 76
3,0 6,0 250 210 75 60 95 45 55 3 76
H18 0,2 0,5 270 240 80 65 100 45 60 1 83
0,5 1,5 270 240 80 65 100 45 60 2 83
1,5 3,0 270 240 80 65 100 45 60 2 83
H22IH32 0,2 0,5 210 130 65 55 80 35 50 5 61
0,5 1,5 210 130 65 55 80 35 50 6 61
1,5 3,0 210 130 65 55 80 35 50 7 61
3,0 6,0 210 130 65 55 80 35 50 10 61
6,0 12,5 210 130 65 55 80 35 50 12 61
12,5 40,0 210 130 65 55 80 35 50 12* 61
H24/H34 0,2 0,5 230 150 70 60 85 40 55 4 67
0,5 1,5 230 150 70 60 85 40 55 5 67
1,5 3,0 230 150 70 60 85 40 55 6 67
3,0 6,0 230 150 70 60 85 40 55 7 67
6,0 12,5 230 150 70 60 85 40 55 9 67
12,5 25,0 230 150 70 60 85 40 55 9* 67
H26IH36 0,2 0,5 250 180 75 60 95 45 55 3 74
0,5 1,5 250 180 75 60 95 45 55 4 74
1,5 3,0 250 180 75 60 95 45 55 5 74
3,0 6,0 250 180 75 60 95 45 55 6 74
H28IH38 0,2 0,5 270 210 80 65 100 45 60 3 81
0,5 1,5 270 210 80 65 100 45 60 3 81
1,5 3,0 270 210 80 65 100 45 60 4 81
EN AW-5251 OIHIlI 0,2 0,5 160 60 50 45 65 30 40 13 44
0,5 1,5 160 60 50 45 65 30 40 14 44
AlMg2 1,5 3,0 160 60 50 45 65 30 40 16 44
3,0 6,0 160 60 50 45 65 30 40 18 44
6,0 12,5 160 60 50 45 65 30 40 18 44
12,5 50,0 160 60 50 45 65 30 40 18 44
H12 0,2 0,5 190 150 60 50 75 35 45 3 58
0,5 1,5 190 150 60 50 75 35 45 4 58
1,5 3,0 190 150 60 50 75 35 45 5 58
3,0 6,0 190 150 60 50 75 35 45 8 58
6,0 12,5 190 150 60 50 75 35 45 10 58
12,5 25,0 190 150 60 50 75 35 45 10* 58
Hl4 0,2 0,5 210 170 65 55 80 35 50 2 64
0,5 1,5 210 170 65 55 80 35 50 2 64
1,5 3,0 210 170 65 55 80 35 50 3 64
3,0 6,0 210 170 65 55 80 35 50 4 64
6,0 12,5 210 170 65 55 80 35 50 5 64
H16 0,2 0,5 230 200 70 60 85 40 55 1 71
0,5 1,5 230 200 70 60 85 40 55 2 71
 146
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.22 Continued, page 3 of 7.

Material Condition Nominal thickness Rm A?1 Hardne
Re crW,zd crSch,zd crW,b "tW,s "tW,t
inmm ss
number
from to % HB
AlMg2 H16 1,5 3,0 230 200 70 60 85 40 55 3 71
continued 3,0 4,0 230 200 70 60 85 40 55 3 71
H18 0,2 0,5 255 230 75 65 95 45 60 1 79
0,5 1,5 255 230 75 65 95 45 60 2 79
1,5 3,0 255 230 75 65 95 45 60 2 79
H221H32 0,2 0,5 190 120 55 50 75 35 45 4 56
0,5 1,5 190 120 55 50 75 35 45 6 56
1,5 3,0 190 120 55 50 75 35 45 8 56
3,0 6,0 190 120 55 50 75 35 45 10 56
6,0 12,5 190 120 55 50 75 35 45 12 56
12,5 25,0 190 120 55 50 75 35 45 12* 56
H241H34 0,2 0,5 210 140 65 55 80 35 50 3 62
0,5 1,5 210 140 65 55 80 35 50 5 62
1,5 3,0 210 140 65 55 80 35 50 6 62
3,0 6,0 210 140 65 55 80 35 50 8 62
6,0 12,5 210 140 65 55 80 35 50 10 62
H26/H36 0,2 0,5 230 170 70 60 85 40 55 3 69
0,5 1,5 230 170 70 60 85 40 55 4 69
1,5 3,0 230 170 70 60 85 40 55 5 69
3,0 4,0 230 170 70 60 85 40 55 7 69
H281H38 0,2 0,5 255 200 75 65 95 45 60 2 77
0,5 1,5 255 200 75 65 95 45 60 3 77
1,5 3,0 255 200 75 65 95 45 60 3 77
EN AW-5154A OlHlll 0,2 0,5 215 85 65 55 80 35 50 12 58
0,5 1,5 215 85 65 55 80 35 50 13 58
AIMg3,5(A) 1,5 3,0 215 85 65 55 80 35 50 15 58
3,0 6,0 215 85 65 55 80 35 50 17 58
6,0 12,5 215 85 65 55 80 35 50 18 58
12,5 50,0 215 85 65 55 80 35 50 16* 58
H112 ~6,0 12,5 220 125 65 55 85 40 50 8 63
12,5 40,0 215 90 65 55 80 35 50 9 59
40,0 80,0 215 90 65 55 80 35 50 13* 59
H12 0,2 0,5 250 190 75 60 95 45 55 3 75
0,5 1,5 250 190 75 60 95 45 55 4 75
1,5 3,0 250 190 75 60 95 45 55 5 75
3,0 6,0 250 190 75 60 95 45 55 6 75
6,0 12,5 250 190 75 60 95 45 55 7 75
12,5 40,0 250 190 75 60 95 45 55 6* 75
H14 0,2 0,5 270 220 80 65 100 45 60 2 81
0,5 1,5 270 220 80 65 100 45 60 3 81
1,5 3,0 270 220 80 65 100 45 60 3 81
3,0 6,0 270 220 80 65 100 45 60 4 81
6,0 12,5 270 220 80 65 100 45 60 5 81
12,5 25,0 270 220 80 65 100 45 60 4* 81
H18 0,2 0,5 310 270 95 75 110 55 70 1 94
0,5 1,5 310 270 95 75 110 55 70 1 94
1,5 3,0 310 270 95 75 110 55 70 1 94
H19 0,2 0,5 330 285 100 75 120 55 75 1 100
0,5 1,5 330 285 100 75 120 55 75 1 100
H221H32 0,2 0,5 250 180 75 60 95 45 55 5 74
0,5 1,5 250 180 75 60 95 45 55 6 74
1,5 3,0 250 180 75 60 95 45 55 7 74
3,0 6,0 250 180 75 60 95 45 55 8 74
6,0 12,5 250 180 75 60 95 45 55 10 74
12,5 40,0 250 180 75 60 95 45 55 9* 74
H241H34 0,2 0,5 270 200 80 65 100 45 60 4 80
0,5 1,5 270 200 80 65 100 45 60 5 80
1,5 3,0 270 200 80 65 100 45 60 6 80
3,0 6,0 270 200 80 65 100 45 60 7 80
6,0 12,5 270 200 80 65 100 45 60 8 80
12,5 25,0 270 200 80 65 100 45 60 7* 80
H261H36 0,2 0,5 290 230 85 70 105 50 65 3 87
0,5 1,5 290 230 85 70 105 50 65 3 87
1,5 3,0 290 230 85 70 105 50 65 4 87
3,0 6,0 290 230 85 70 105 50 65 5 87
H28/H38 0,2 0,5 310 250 95 75 110 55 70 3 93
0,5 1,5 310 250 95 75 110 55 70 3 93
1,5 3,0 310 250 95 75 110 55 70 3 93
 147
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

..
T a ble 5122 Contmued, page 4 0 f 7
Material Condition Nominalthickness Rm Re crW,zd crSch,zd crW,b 'tW,s vw.. A Hardness
inmm number
from to % HB
EN AW-5454 O1H111 0,2 0,5 215 85 65 55 80 35 50 12 58
0,5 1,5 215 85 65 55 80 35 50 13 58
AIMg3Mn 1,5 3,0 215 85 65 55 80 35 50 15 58
3,0 6,0 215 85 65 55 80 35 50 17 58
6,0 12,5 215 85 65 55 80 35 50 18 58
12,5 80,0 215 85 65 55 80 35 50 16* 58
Hl12 12,5 220 125 65 55 85 40 50 8 63
40,0 215 90 65 55 80 35 50 9* 59
120,0 215 90 65 55 80 35 50 13* 59
HI2 0,2 0,5 250 190 75 60 95 45 55 3 75
0,5 1,5 250 190 75 60 95 45 55 4 75
1,5 3,0 250 190 75 60 95 45 55 5 75
3,0 6,0 250 190 75 60 95 45 55 6 75
6,0 12,5 250 190 75 60 95 45 55 7 75
12,5 40,0 250 190 75 60 95 45 55 6* 75
H14 0,2 0,5 270 220 80 65 100 45 60 2 81
0,5 1,5 270 220 80 65 100 45 60 3 81
1,5 3,0 270 220 80 65 100 45 60 3 81
3,0 6,0 270 220 80 65 100 45 60 4 81
6,0 12,5 270 220 80 65 100 45 60 5 81
12,5 25,0 270 220 80 65 100 45 60 4* 81
H221H32 0,2 0,5 250 180 75 60 95 45 55 5 74
0,5 1,5 250 180 75 60 95 45 55 6 74
1,5 3,0 250 180 75 60 95 45 55 7 74
3,0 6,0 250 180 75 60 95 45 55 8 74
6,0 12,5 250 180 75 60 95 45 55 10 74
12,5 40,0 250 180 75 60 95 45 55 9* 74
H24/H34 0,2 0,5 270 200 80 65 100 45 60 4 80
0,5 1,5 270 200 80 65 100 45 60 5 80
1,5 3,0 270 200 80 65 100 45 60 6 80
3,0 6,0 270 200 80 65 100 45 60 7 80
6,0 12,5 270 200 80 65 100 45 60 8 80
12,5 25,0 270 200 80 65 100 45 60 7* 80
H26/H36 0,2 0,5 290 230 85 70 105 50 65 3 87
0,5 1,5 290 230 85 70 105 50 65 3 87
1,5 3,0 290 230 85 70 105 50 65 4 87
3,0 6,0 290 230 85 70 105 50 65 5 87
H28/H38 0,2 0,5 310 250 95 75 110 55 70 3 93
0,5 1,5 310 250 95 75 110 55 70 3 93
1,5 3,0 310 250 95 75 110 55 70 3 93
EN AW-5754 O/HU1 0,2 0,5 190 80 55 50 75 35 45 12 52
0,5 1,5 190 80 55 50 75 35 45 14 52
AI Mg3 1,5 3,0 190 80 55 50 75 35 45 16 52
3,0 6,0 190 80 55 50 75 35 45 18 52
6,0 12,5 190 80 55 50 75 35 45 18 52
12,5 100,0 190 80 55 50 75 35 45 17* 52
HIl2 ?: 6,0 12,5 210 140 65 55 80 35 50 12 62
12,5 25,0 200 120 60 50 75 35 45 10* 58
25,0 40,0 190 80 55 50 75 30 45 12* 52
40,0 80,0 190 80 55 50 75 30 45 14* 52
H12 0,2 0,5 220 170 65 55 85 40 50 4 66
0,5 1,5 220 170 65 55 85 40 50 5 66
1,5 3,0 220 170 65 55 85 40 50 6 66
3,0 6,0 220 170 65 55 85 40 50 7 66
6,0 12,5 220 170 65 55 85 40 50 9 66
12,5 40,0 220 170 65 55 85 40 50 9* 66
H14 0,2 0,5 240 190 70 60 90 40 55 3 72
0,5 1,5 240 190 70 60 90 40 55 3 72
1,5 3,0 240 190 70 60 90 40 55 4 72
3,0 6,0 240 190 70 60 90 40 55 4 72
6,0 12,5 240 190 70 60 90 40 55 5 72
12,5 25,0 240 190 70 60 90 40 55 5* 72
H16 0,2 0,5 265 220 80 65 100 45 60 2 80
0,5 1,5 265 220 80 65 100 45 60 3 80
1,5 3,0 265 220 80 65 100 45 60 3 80
3,0 6,0 265 220 80 65 100 45 60 3 80
H18 0,2 0,5 290 250 85 70 105 50 65 1 88
0,5 1,5 290 250 85 70 105 50 65 2 88
1,5 3,0 290 250 85 70 105 50 65 2 88
 148
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.22 Continued, page 5 of 7.

Material Condition Nominal thickness Rm Re crW,zd crSch,zd crW,b ToW,S vw.r A<? Hardness
inmm 1 number
from to % HB
EN AW-5754 HI8 0,2 0,5 290 250 85 70 105 50 65 1 88
AlMg3 0,5 1,5 290 250 85 70 105 50 65 2 88
continued 1,5 3,0 290 250 85 70 105 50 65 2 88
H22/H32 0,2 0,5 220 130 65 55 85 40 50 7 63
0,5 1,5 220 130 65 55 85 40 50 8 63
1,5 3,0 220 130 65 55 85 40 50 10 63
3,0 6,0 220 130 65 55 85 40 50 11 63
6,0 12,5 220 130 65 55 85 40 50 10 63
12,5 40,0 220 130 65 55 85 40 50 9* 63
H24/H34 0,2 0,5 240 160 70 60 90 40 55 6 70
0,5 1,5 240 160 70 60 90 40 55 6 70
1,5 3,0 240 160 70 60 90 40 55 7 70
3,0 6,0 240 160 70 60 90 40 55 8 70
6,0 12,5 240 160 70 60 90 40 55 10 70
12,5 25,0 240 160 70 60 90 40 55 8* 70
H26/H36 0,2 0,5 265 190 80 65 100 45 60 4 78
0,5 1,5 265 190 80 65 100 45 60 4 78
1,5 3,0 265 190 80 65 100 45 60 5 78
3,0 6,0 265 190 80 65 100 45 60 6 78
H28/H38 0,2 0,5 290 230 85 70 105 50 65 3 87
0,5 1,5 290 230 85 70 105 50 65 3 87
1,5 3,0 290 230 85 70 105 50 65 4 87
EN AW-5083 O/Hll1 0,2 0,5 275 125 85 65 100 45 60 11 75
0,5 1,5 275 125 85 65 100 45 60 12 75
AI Mg4,5MnO,7 1,5 3,0 275 125 85 65 100 45 60 13 75
3,0 6,0 275 125 85 65 100 45 60 15 75
6,0 12,5 275 125 85 65 100 45 60 16 75
12,5 50,0 275 125 85 65 100 45 60 15* 75
50,0 80,0 270 115 80 65 100 45 60 14* 73
80,0 120,0 260 110 80 65 95 45 60 12* 70
120,0 150,0 255 105 75 65 95 45 60 12* 69
H112 <:6,0 12,5 275 125 85 65 100 50 60 12 75
12,5 40,0 275 125 85 65 100 50 60 10* 75
40,0 80,0 270 115 80 65 100 45 60 10* 73
H116"} <: 1,5 3,0 305 215 90 70 110 55 70 8 89
3,0 6,0 305 215 90 70 110 55 70 10 89
6,0 12,5 305 215 90 70 110 55 70 12 89
12,5 40,0 305 215 90 70 110 55 70 10* 89
40,0 80,0 285 200 85 70 105 50 65 10* 83
HI2 0,2 0,5 315 250 95 75 115 55 70 3 94
0,5 1,5 315 250 95 75 115 55 70 4 94
1,5 3,0 315 250 95 75 115 55 70 5 94
3,0 6,0 315 250 95 75 115 55 70 6 94
6,0 12,5 315 250 95 75 115 55 70 7 94
12,5 40,0 315 250 95 75 115 55 70 6* 94
HI4 0,2 0,5 340 280 100 80 120 60 75 2 102
0,5 1,5 340 280 100 80 120 60 75 3 102
1,5 3,0 340 280 100 80 120 60 75 3 102
3,0 6,0 340 280 100 80 120 60 75 3 102
6,0 12,5 340 280 100 80 120 60 75 4 102
12,5 25,0 340 280 100 80 120 60 75 3* 102
H16 0,2 0,5 360 300 110 80 130 60 80 1 108
0,5 1,5 360 300 110 80 130 60 80 2 108
1,5 3,0 360 300 110 80 130 60 80 2 108
3,0 4,0 360 300 110 80 130 60 80 2 108
H22/H32 0,2 0,5 305 215 90 70 110 55 70 5 89
0,5 1,5 305 215 90 70 110 55 70 6 89
1,5 3,0 305 215 90 70 110 55 70 7 89
3,0 6,0 305 215 90 70 110 55 70 8 89
6,0 12,5 305 215 90 70 110 55 70 10 89
12,5 40,0 305 215 90 70 110 55 70 9* 89
H24/H34 0,2 0,5 340 250 100 80 120 60 75 4 99
0,5 1,5 340 250 100 80 120 60 75 5 99
1,5 3,0 340 250 100 80 120 60 75 6 99
3,0 6,0 340 250 100 80 120 60 75 7 99
6,0 12,5 340 250 100 80 120 60 75 7 99
12,5 25,0 340 250 100 80 120 60 75 7* 99
 149
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.22 Continued, page 6 of 7.

Material Condition Nom.thickness Rm Re crW,zd crSch,zd crW,b ~W,s ~W,t AV 1
Hardness
m mm number
from to % HB
EN AW-5083 H26/H36 0,2 0,5 360 280 110 80 130 60 80 2" 106
AI Mg4,5MnO,7 0,5 1,5 360 280 110 80 130 60 80 3 106
continued 1,5 3,0 360 280 110 80 130 60 80 3 106
3,0 4,0 360 280 110 80 130 60 80 3 106
EN AW-5086 OlHlIl 0,2 0,5 240 100 70 60 90 40 55 11 65
0,5 1,5 240 100 70 60 90 40 55 12 65
AlMg4 1,5 3,0 240 100 70 60 90 40 55 13 65
3,0 6,0 240 100 70 60 90 40 55 15 65
6,0 12,5 240 100 70 60 90 40 55 17 65
12,5 150,0 240 100 79 60 90 40 55 16* 65
H1I2 2: 6,0 12,5 250 125 75 60 95 45 55 8 69
12,5 40,0 240 105 70 60 90 40 55 9* 65
40,0 80,0 240 100 70 60 90 40 55 12* 65
H1I6 2: 1,5 3,0 275 195 85 65 100 50 60 8 81
3,0 6,0 275 195 85 65 100 50 60 9 81
6,0 12,5 275 195 85 65 100 50 60 10 81
12,5 50,0 275 195 85 65 100 50 60 9* 81
H12 0,2 0,5 275 200 85 65 100 50 60 3 81
0,5 1,5 275 200 85 65 100 50 60 4 81
1,5 3,0 275 200 85 65 100 50 60 5 81
3,0 6,0 275 200 85 65 100 50 60 6 81
6,0 12,5 275 200 85 65 100 50 60 7 81
12,5 40,0 275 200 85 65 100 50 60 6* 81
H14 0,2 0,5 300 240 90 70 110 50 65 2 90
0,5 1,5 300 240 90 70 110 50 65 3 90
1,5 3,0 300 240 90 70 110 50 65 3 90
3,0 6,0 300 240 90 70 110 50 65 3 90
6,0 12,5 " 300 240 90 70 110 50 65 4 90
12,5 25,0 300 240 90 70 110 50 65 3* 90
H16 0,2 0,5 325 270 100 75 120 55 70 1 98
0,5 1,5 325 270 100 75 120 55 70 2 98
1,5 3,0 325 270 100 75 120 55 70 2 98
3,0 4,0 325 270 100 75 120 55 70 2 98
H18 0,2 0,5 345 290 105 80 125 60 75 1 104
0,5 1,5 345 290 105 80 125 60 75 1 104
1,5 3,0 345 290 105 80 125 60 75 1 104
H22/H32 0,2 0,5 275 185 85 65 100 50 60 5 80
0,5 1,5 275 185 85 65 100 50 60 6 80
1,5 3,0 275 185 85 65 100 50 60 7 89
3,0 6,0 275 185 85 65 100 50 60 8 80
6,0 12,5 275 185 85 65 100 50 60 10 80
12,5 40,0 275 185 85 65 100 50 60 9* 80
H24/H34 0,2 0,5 300 220 90 70 110 50 65 4 88
0,5 1,5 300 220 90 70 110 50 65 5 88
1,5 3,0 300 220 90 70 110 50 65 6 88
3,0 6,0 300 220 90 70 110 50 65 7 8 88
6,0 12,5 300 220 90 70 110 50 65 7* 88
12,5 25,0 300 220 90 70 110 50 65 88
H261H36 0,2 0,5 325 250 100 75 115 55 70 2 96
0,5 1,5 325 250 100 75 115 55 70 3 96
1,5 3,0 325 250 100 75 115 55 70 3 96
3,0 4,0 325 250 100 75 115 55 70 3 96
EN AW-6082 T4 2:0,4 1,5 205 110 60 55 80 35 50 12 58
T451 1,5 3,0 205 110 60 55 80 35 50 14 58
AISiMgMn 3,0 6,0 205 110 60 55 80 35 50 15 58
6,0 12,5 205 110 60 55 80 35 50 14 58
T451 12,5 40,0 205 110 60 55 80 35 50 13* 58
40,0 80,0 205 110 60 55 80 35 50 12* 58
T42 2: 0,4 1,5 205 95 60 55 80 35 50 12 57
1,5 3,0 205 95 60 55 80 35 50 14 57
3,0 6,0 205 95 60 55 80 35 50 15 57
6,0 12,5 205 95 60 55 80 35 50 14 57
12,5 40,0 205 95 60 55 80 35 50 13* 57
40,0 80,0 205 95 60 55 80 35 50 12* 57
T6 2: 0,4 1,5 310 260 95 75 110 55 70 6 94
T651 1,5 3,0 310 260 95 75 110 55 70 7 94
T62 3,0 6,0 310 260 95 75 110 55 70 10 94
6,0 12,5 310 260 95 75 110 55 70 9 91
 150
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.22 Continued, page 7 of 7.

Material Condition Nom.thickness Rm Re A-}I Hardness

crW,zd crSch,zd crW,b ~W,s ~W,t
in mm number
from to % HB
EN AW-6082 T651 12,5 60,0 295 240 90 70 110 50 65 8* 89
AlSiMgMn T62 60,0 100,0 295 240 90 70 110 50 65 7* 89
continued 100,0 150,0 275 240 85 65 100 50 60 6* 84
150,0 175,0 275 230 85 65 100 50 60 4* 83
T61 20,4 1,5 280 205 85 70 105 50 65 10 82
T6151 1,5 3,0 280 205 85 70 105 50 65 11 82
3,0 6,0 280 205 85 70 105 50 65 11 82
6,0 12,5 280 205 85 70 105 50 65 12 82
T6151 12,5 60,0 275 200 85 65 100 50 60 12* 81
60,0 100,0 275 200 85 65 100 50 60 10* 81
100,0 150,0 275 200 85 65 100 50 60 9* 81
150,0 175,0 275 200 85 65 100 50 60 8* 81
EN AW-7020 T4 20,4 1,5 320 210 95 75 115 55 70 11 92
T451 1,5 3,0 320 210 95 75 115 55 70 12 92
AI Zn4,5Mg1 3,0 6,0 320 210 95 75 115 55 70 13 92
6,0 12,5 320 210 95 75 115 55 70 14 92
T6 20,4 1,5 350 280 105 80 125 60 75 7 104
T651 1,5 3,0 350 280 105 80 125 60 75 8 104
T62 3,0 6,0 350 280 105 80 125 60 75 10 104
6,0 12,5 350 280 105 80 125 60 75 10 104
T651 12,5 40,0 350 280 105 80 125 60 75 9* 104
40,0 100,0 340 270 100 80 120 60 75 8* 101
100,0 150,0 330 260 100 75 120 55 75 7* 98
150,0 175,0 330 260 100 75 120 55 75 6* 98
EN AW-7021 T6 21,5 3,0 400 350 120 90 140 70 85 7 121
AIZn5,5Mg1,5 3,0 6,0 400 350 120 90 140 70 85 8 121
EN AW-7022 T6 >3,0 12,5 450 370 135 95 155 80 95 8 133
AIZn5Mg3Cu T6 12,5 25,0 450 370 135 95 155 80 95 8* 133
T651 25,0 50,0 450 370 135 95 155 80 95 7* 133
50,0 100,0 430 350 130 90 150 75 95 5* 127
100,0 200,0 410 330 125 90 145 70 90 3* 121
EN AW-7075 T6 20,4 0,8 525 460 160 105 175 90 110 6 157
T651 0,8 1,5 540 460 160 110 180 95 115 6 160
AIZn5,5MgCu T62 1,5 3,0 540 470 160 110 180 95 115 7 161
3,0 6,0 545 475 165 110 180 95 115 8 163
6,0 12,5 540 460 160 110 180 95 115 8 160
T651 12,5 25,0 540 470 160 110 180 95 115 6* 161
T62 25,0 50,0 530 460 160 105 180 90 110 5* 158
50,0 60,0 525 440 160 105 175 90 110 4* 155
60,0 80,0 495 420· 150 100 170 85 105 4* 147
80,0 90,0 490 390 145 100 165 85 105 4* 144
90,0 100,0 460 360 140 95 160 80 100 3* 135
100,0 120,0 410 300 125 90 145 70 90 2* 119
120,0 150,0 360 260 110 80 130 60 80 2* 104
T76 21,5 3,0 500 425 150 105 170 85 105 7 149
T7651 3,0 6,0 500 425 150 105 170 85 105 8 149
6,0 12,5 490 415 145 100 165 85 105 7 146
T73 21,5 3,0 460 385 140 95 160 80 100 7 137
T7351 3,0 6,0 460 385 140 95 160 80 100 8 137
6,0 12,5 475 390 145 100 160 80 100 7 140
T7351 12,5 25,0 475 390 145 100 160 80 100 6* 140
25,0 50,0 475 390 145 100 160 80 100 5* 140
50,0 60,0 455 360 135 95 155 80 95 5* 133
60,0 80,0 440 340 130 95 150 75 95 5* 129
80,0 100,0 430 340 130 95 150 75 95 5* 126
 151
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.23 Mechanical properties in MFa for wrought aluminum alloys, strips and sheets with a thickness
from 0,35 mm on, after DIN 1745 T. I (1983-02-00) (selected types of material only).

Material Thickness Rm Rp crW,zd crSch,zd crW,b ~W,s ~W,t A5 AlO Hardness Condo
inmm % % number
DIN notation ~1 ~1 HB
No. from to ~2
A1Mg2,5 3.3523 0,35 3,0 170 60 50 45 65 30 40 20 17 50 w
W17 .10 0,35 10
F21 .24 0,35 3,0 210 160 65 55 80 35 50 10 8 65 kg
0,35 10
G21 .25 0,35 3,0 210 130 65 55 80 35 50 12 10 65 rg
0,35 10
F23 .26 0,35 3,0 230 180 70 60 85 40 55 5 4 73 kg
0,35 10
G23 .27 0,35 3,0 230 150 70 60 85 40 55 10 8 73 rg
0,35 10
F25 .28 0,35 3,0 250 210 75 60 95 45 55 4 3 80 kg
0,35 4,0
G25 .29 0,35 3,0 250 180 75 60 95 45 55 7 6 80 rg
0,35 4,0
F27 .30 0,35 3,0 270 240 80 65 100 45 60 3 2 85 kg
0,35 3,0
G27 .31 0,35 3,0 270 210 80 65 100 45 60 6 5 85 rg
0,35 3,0
A1Mg3 3.3535 0,35 3,0 190 80 55 50 75 35 45 20 17 50 w
W19 .10 0,35 6,0
W19 .10 - - 190 80 55 50 75 35 45 18 - 50 w
6,0 50
F19 .07 - - 190 80 55 50 75 35 45 12 - 50 wg
25 50
F20 .07 - - 200 120 60 50 75 35 45 10 - 60 wg
10 25
F21 .07 3 - 210 140 65 55 80 35 50 12 - 60 wg
5,0 10
F22 .24 0,35 10 220 165 65 55 85 40 50 9 7 65 kg
0,35 10
G22 .25 0,35 3,0 220 130 65 55 85 40 50 14 12 65 rg
0,35 10
F24 .26 0,35 3,0 240 190 70 60 90 40 55 5 4 73 kg
0,35 10
G24 .27 0,35 3,0 240 160 70 60 90 40 55 10 8 73 rg
0,35 4,0
F27 .28 0,35 3,0 265 215 80 65 100 45 60 4 3 80 kg
0,35 4,0
G27 .29 0,35 3,0 265 190 80 65 100 45 60 7 6 80 rg
0,35 4,0
F29 .30 0,35 3,0 290 250 85 70 105 50 65 3 2 85 kg
0,35 3,0
A1Mg2MnO,8 3.3527 0,35 3,0 190 80 55 50 75 35 45 20 17 50 w
W19 .10 0,35 6,0
W19 .10 - - 190 80 55 50 75 35 45 18 - 50 w
6,0 50
F19 .07 - . 190 80 55 50 75 35 45 12 - 50 wg
25 50
F20 .07 - - 200 120 60 50 75 35 45 10 - 60 wg
10 25
F21 .07 - - 210 140 65 55 80 35 50 12 - 60 wg
6,0 10
F22 .24 0,35 3,0 220 165 65 55 85 40 50 9 7 65 kg
0,35 10
022 .25 0,35 3,0 220 130 65 55 85 40 50 14 12 65 rg
0,35 10
F24 .26 0,35 3,0 240 190 70 60 90 40 55 5 4 73 kg
0,35 10
G24 .27 0,35 3,0 240 160 70 60 90 40 55 10 8 73 rg
0,35 10
F27 .28 0,35 3,0 265 215 80 65 100 45 60 4 3 80 kg
0,35 10

~ 1 see page153 ~ 2 kg = coldrolled, rg = recrystallization annealed, w = softannealed, wg = hot rolled.

 152
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.23 Continued, page 1 of2.

Material Thickness Rm Rp crW,zd crSch,zd crW,b 'tW,s 'tW,t A5 AlO Hardness Condo
inmm % number
DIN notation No. from to t'"1 -¢>1 HB ~2

AlMg2MnO,8 .29 0,35 3,0 265 190 80 65 100 45 60 7 6 80 rg

G27 0,35 10
F29 .30 0,35 3,0 290 250 85 70 105 50 65 3 2 85 kg
0,35 10
AlMg2,7Mn 3.3537 - - 215 100 65 55 80 35 50 17 - 55 wg
F22 .07 4,0 25
F22 .07 - - 215 100 65 55 80 35 50 12 - 55 wg
25 50
G25 .25 - - 245 180 75 60 90 40 55 10 - 75 rg
4,0 6,0
G25 .25 - - 245 180 75 60 90 40 55 8 - 75 rg
6,0 12
G27 .27 - - 270 200 80 65 100 45. ·60 9 - 85 rg
4,0 6,0
G27 .27 - - 270 200 80 65 100 45 60 7 - 85 rg
6,0 12
AlMg4Mn 3.3545 - - 240 310 70 60 90 40 55 18 - 65 w
W24 .10 1,0 6,0
W24 .10 - - 240 95 70 60 90 40 55 17 - 60 w
6,0 50
F28 .24 - - 275 200 85 65 100 50 60 7 - 80 kg
1,0 6,0
G28 .25 - - 275 190 85 65 100 50 60 12 - 80 rg
.27 1,0 6,0
G30 .27 - - 300 230 90 70 110 50 65 8 - 90 rg
1,0 6,0
AlMg4,5Mn 3.3547 0,35 3,0 275 125 85 65 100 45 60 17 15 70 w
W28 .10 0,35 50
F28 .07 - - 275 125 85 65 100 45 60 12 - 70 wg
4,0 50
G31 .25 - - 310 205 95 75 110 55 70 10 - 85 rg
2,0 40
G35 .27 1,0 3,0 345 270 105 80 125 60 75 6 5 100 rg
1,0 6,0
AlMgSil 3.2315 0,35 3,0 - :S: 85 - - - - - 18 15 35 w
W .10 0,35 10
F21 .51 0,35 3,0 205 110 60 55 80 35 50 16 14 65 ka
0,35 3,0
F21 .51 - - 205 110 60. 55 80 35 50 14 12 65 ka
3,0 20
F28 .71 0,35 3,0 275 200 85 65 100 50 60 14 12 85 wa
0,35 3,0
F28 .71 - - 275 200 85 65 100 50 60 12 - 85 wa
3,0 60
F32 .72 0,35 3,0 315 255 95 75 115 55 70 10 8 95 wa
0,35 10
F30 .72 - - 295 245 90 70 110 50 65 9 - 95 wa
0,35 20
F30 .72 - - 295 240 90 70 110 50 65 8 - 90 wa
2,0 100
AlMglSiCu .10 0,35 3,0 - :S: 80 - . - - - 18 15 40 w
W 0,35 6,0
W .10 - - - :S: 80 - - - - - 17 14 40 w
6,0 12
F21 .51 0,35 3,0 205 110 60 55 80 35 50 14 12 60 ka
0,35 3,0
F21 .51 - - 205 110 60 55 80 35 50 12 10 60 ka
3,0 12
F29 .71 0,35 3,0 290 240 85 70 105 50 65 10 8 90 wa
0,35 3,0
F29 .71 - - 290 240 85 70 105 50 65 9 - 90 wa
3,0 12

~ 2 ka = naturallyaged, kg = coldrolled, rg = recrystallization annealed, w = softannealed, wa = artificially aged, wg = hot rolled.

 153
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.23 Continued, page 2 of2.

Material Thickness Rm Rp O'W,zd O'Sch,zd O'W,b ~W,s ~W,t A5 AIO Hardness Condo
inmm number
~I
%
DIN notation No. from to -}1 HB .;..2
AlCuMgI 3.1325 0,35 3,0 - s 140 - - - - - 13 II 50 w
W .10 0,35 12
F40 .51 0,35 3,0 395 265 120 85 140 70 85 13 II 100 ka
0,35 3,0
F39 .51 - - 390 265 115 85 135 70 85 13 - 100 ka
3,0 12
F39 .51 - - 385 245 115 85 135 65 85 12 - 95 ka
12 60
AlCuMg2 3.1355
W .10
0,35
0,35
3,0
12
- s 140 - - - - - 13 II 55 w

F44 .51 0,35 3,0 440 290 130 95 150 75 95 13 II 110 ka

0,35 12
AlCuSiMn 3.1255 - - - ~ 140 - - - - - 13 - 55 w
W .10 6,0 12
F40 .51 - - 400 250 120 90 140 70 85 12 - 105 ka
1,5 25
F40 .51 - - 400 250 120 90 140 70 85 II - 100 ka
25 50
F39 .51 - - 390 250 115 85 135 70 85 8 - 100 wa
50 100
F46 .71 - - 460 400 140 95 160 80 100 7 - 125 wa
1,5 25
AlZn4,5Mg1 3.4335 - - - s 140 - - - - - 15 13 45 w
W .10 1,5 6,0
F35 .71 0,35 3,0 350 275 105 80 125 60 75 10 8 105 wa
0,35 15
F34 .71 - - 340 270 100 80 120 60 75 9 - 105 wa
15 60
AlZnMgCuO,5 3.4345 - - 450 370 135 95 155 80 95 8 - 125 wa
F45 .71 6,0 25
F45 .71 - - 450 370 135 95 155 80 95 7 - 125 wa
25 50
F43 .71 - - 430 350 130 95 150 75 95 5 - 110 wa
50 100
F41 .71 - - 410 330 125 90 145 70 90 3 - 100 wa
100 200
AlZnMgCu1,5 3.4365 - - 530 450 160 105 180 90 110 8 - 140 wa
F53 .71 6,0 12
F53 .71 - - 530 450 160 105 180 90 110 5 - 140 wa
12 25
F53 .71 - - 530 450 160 105 180 90 110 3 - 140 wa
25 50
F50 .71 - - 500 430 150 105 170 85 105 2 - 130 wa
50 63
F48 .71 - - 480 410 145 100 165 85 100 2 - 130 wa
63 75
F48 .71 - - 480 390 145 100 165 85 100 2 - 130 wa
75 100

-c- 1 The elongation As is to be usedfor the assessment.

.;.. 2 ka = naturallyaged, w = soft annealed, wa = artificially aged.

 154
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.24 Mechanical properties in MPa for wrought aluminum alloys,

cold drawn rods / bars and tubes, after DIN EN 754-2 (1997-08-00).

Material, Condition Rods/ Bars Tubes Rm Rp crW,zd crsch,zd crW,b 'tW,s 'tW,t A A50
D; 8 ~ 1 e~ I
EN notation ~2 ~2
DIN notation MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa % %
mm mm
No. von to von to
EN AW-2007 T3 - 30 - - 370 240 110 85 130 65 80 7 5
AlCu4PbMgMn 30 80 - - 340 220 100 80 120 60 75 6 -
3.1645 - - - 20 370 250 110 85 130 65 80 7 5
T351 - 80 - - 370 240 110 85 130 65 80 5 3
T3510 - - - 20 370 240 110 85 130 65 80 5 3
T3511
EN AW-2011 T3 - 40 - - 320 270 95 75 115 55 70 10 8
AlCu6BiPb 40 50 - - 300 250 90 70 110 50 70 10 -
3.1655 50 80 - - 280 210 85 70 105 50 65 10 -
- - - 5 310 260 95 75 110 55 70 10 8
EN AW-2011A - - 5 20 290 240 85 70 105 50 65 8 6
AlCu6BiPb(A) T8 - 80 - - 370 270 110 85 130 65 80 8 8
- - - 20 370 275 110 85 130 65 80 8 6
EN AW-2014 0 - 80 - 20 <240 < 125 70 60 90 40 55 12 10
AlCu48iMg Hill
3.1255 T3 - 80 - 20 380 290 115 85 135 65 85 8 6
T351 - 80 - - 380 290 115 85 135 65 85 6 4
T3510 - - - 20 380 290 115 85 135 65 85 6 4
T3511
EN AW-2014A T4 - 80 - - 380 220 115 85 135 65 85 12 10
AlCu48iMg(A) - - - 20 380 240 115 85 135 65 85 12 10
T451 - 80 - - 380 220 115 85 135 65 85 10 8
T4510 - - - 20 380 240 115 85 135 65 85 10 8
T4511
T6 - 80 - 20 450 380 135 95 155 80 95 8 6
T651 - 80 - - 450 380 135 95 155 80 95 6 4
T6510 - - - 20 450 380 135 95 155 80 95 6 4
T6511
EN AW-2017A 0 - 80 - 20 <240 < 125 <70 <60 <90 40 55 12 10
AlCu4Mg8i(A) HIll
3.1325 T3 - 80 - 20 400 250 120 90 140 70 85 10 8
T351 - 80 - - 400 250 120 90 140 70 85 8 6
T3510 - - - 20 400 250 120 90 140 70 85 8 6
T3511
EN AW-2024 0, Hill - 80 - - <250 < 150 <75 <60 <90 <45 < 55 12 10
AlCu4Mgl - - 20 <240 < 140 <70 <60 >90 <40 < 55 12 10
3.1355 T3 - 10 - - 425 310 130 90 145 75 90 10 8
10 80 - - 425 290 130 90 145 75 90 9 7
- - - 5 440 290 130 95 150 75 95 10 8
- - 5 20 420 270 125 90 145 75 90 10 8
T351 - 80 - - 425 310 130 90 145 75 90 8 6
T3510 - - - 20 420 290 125 90 145 75 90 8 6
T3511
T6 - 80 - - 425 315 130 90 145 75 90 5 4
T651 - 80 - - 425 315 130 90 145 75 90 4 3
T8 - 80 - - 455 400 135 95 155 80 95 4 3
T851 - 80 - - 455 400 135 95 155 80 95 3 2
EN AW-2030 T3 - 30 - - 370 240 110 85 130 65 80 7 5
AlCu4PbMg 30 80 - - 340 220 100 80 120 60 75 6 -
T351 - 80 - - 370 240 110 85 130 65 80 5 3
T3510 - - - 20 370 240 110 85 130 65 80 5 3
T3511
EN AW-3003 0, HIli - 80 - - 95 35 30 25 40 15 25 25 16
AlMnlCu - - - 20 95 35 30 25 40 15 25 25 10
3.0517 HI4 (D) 40 - 10 130 110 40 35 50 25 30 6 4
(8) 10 - - 130 110 40 35 50 25 30 6 4
H16 (D) 15 - 5 160 130 50 45 65 30 40 4 3
(8) 5 - - 160 130 50 45 65 30 40 4 3
HI8 (D) 10 - 3 180 145 55 45 70 30 40 3 2
(8) 3 - - 180 145 55 45 70 30 40 3 2
 155
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.24 Continued, page I of 2.

Material Condition Rods/ Bars Tubes Rm Rp O"W,zd O"sch,zd O"W,b 'tW,s 'tW,t A A50
D;8~ I e -e- I
EN notation ~2 ~2
DIN notation mm mm MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa % %
No. von to von to
EN AW-3103 0, HIll 80 - 95 30 25 40 15 25 25 20
~~?
20 35
AlMnI 60 - · 95 35 30 25 40 15 25 25 20
3.0515 H14 (D) 40 · 10 130 110 40 35 50 25 30 6 4
(8) 10 - - 130 110 40 35 50 25 30 6 4
H16 (D) 15 - 5 160 130 50 45 65 30 40 4 3
(8) 5 - - 160 130 50 45 65 30 40 4 3
H18 (D) 10 - 3 180 145 55 45 70 30 40 3 2
(8) 3 - - 180 145 55 45 70 30 40 3 2
EN AW-5005 0,H111 (D) 80 - 20 100 40 30 30 40 15 25 18 16
AlMg1(B) (8) 60 - - 100 40 30 30 40 15 25 18 16
H14 (D) 40 - 5 140 110 40 40 55 25 35 6 4
EN AW·5005A (8) 10 - - 140 110 40 40 55 25 35 6 4
AlMg1(C) H18 15 - 3 185 155 55 50 70 30 45 4 2
3.3315 ~~? 2 - · 185 155 55 50 70 30 45 4 2
EN AW-5019 0, HIll (D) 80 - 20 250 110 75 60 95 45 55 16 14
AlMg5 (8) 60 - · 250 110 75 60 95 45 55 16 14
3.3555 H12, H22, (D) 40 · 10 270 180 80 65 100 45 60 8 7
H32 (8) 25 - - 270 180 80 65 100 45 60 8 7
H14, H24, (D) 25 · - 300 210 90 70 110 50 65 4 3
H34 (8) 10 - · 300 210 90 70 110 50 65 4 3
- - · 5 300 220 90 70 110 50 65 4 3
H16, H26, (D) · · 3 320 260 95 75 115 55 70 2 2
H36 (8) - - - · - · - - - · - -
EN AW-5251 0, HIll (D) 80 · 20 150 60 45 40 60 25 35 17 15
AlMg2 (8) 60 · · 150 60 45 40 60 25 35 17 15
3.3525 H12, H22, (D) - - 10 180 110 55 45 70 30 40 5 4
H32 (8) · - - · - - . - - - - -
H14, H24, (D) 30 - - 200 160 60 50 75 35 45 5 4
H34 (8) 5 - · 200 160 60 50 75 35 45 5 4
- - 5 200 160 60 50 75 35 45 4 3
H16, H26, - - 5 220 180 65 55 85 40 50 3 2
H36 ~~? - · - - - · - - . · - -
H18, H28, (D) 20 - 3 240 200 70 60 90 40 55 2 2
H38 (8) 3 - - 240 200 70 60 90 40 55 2 2
EN AW·5052 0, HIll (D) 80 - 20 170 65 50 45 65 30 40 20 17
AlMg2,5 (8) 60 - · 170 65 50 45 65 30 40 20 17
3.3523 H12, H22, (D) 40 - · 210 160 65 55 80 35 50 7 5
H32 (8) - · - - - · - - - - - -
H14, H24, 25 - 230 180 70 60 85 40 55 5 4
~~?
5
H34 - · - - - - - - - - - -
H16, H26, (D) 15 - - 250 200 75 60 95 45 55
- .
3 3
-
H36 (8) · - - - - - - · -
H18, H28, (D) 10 - 5 270 220 80 65 100 45 60 2 2
H38 (8) - - - - - - - · - - - -
EN AW-5154A 0, HIll 80 - 20 200 85 60 50 75 35 45 16 14
AlMg3,5(A) ~~? 60 · - 200 85 60 50 75 35 45 16 14
H14, H24, (D) 25 - 10 260 200 80 65 95 45 60 5 4
H34 (8) - - - - - · - - - - - -
H18, H28, (D) 10 - 5 310 240 95 75 110 55 70 3 2
H38 (8) - · - · - · - - - · - -
EN AW-5754 0, HIll · 55 45 70 30 40 16 14
~~?
80 20 180 80
AlMg3 60 · - 180 80 55 45 70 30 40 16 14
3.3535 H14, H24, (D) 25 - 10 240 180 70 60 90 40 55 4 3
H34 (8) 5 - - 240 180 70 60 90 40 55 4 3
H18, H28, (D) 10 - 3 280 240 85 70 105 50 65 3 2
H38 (8) 3 - - 280 240 85 70 105 50 65 3 2
EN AW·5083 0, H111 80 - 270 80 65 100 45 60 16 14
~~?
20 110
AlMg4,5MnO,7 60 - - 270 110 80 65 100 45 60 16 14
3.3547 H12, H22, (D) 30 · 10 280 200 85 70 105 50 65 6 4
H32 (8) - - - - . - - - - - - -
H14, H24, - - - 5 300 235 90 70 110 50
.
65 4 3
H34 - · - - - - - - · -
 156
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.24 Continued, page 2 of2.

Material, Condition Rods! Bars Tubes Rm Rp crW,zd crsch,zd crW,b ~W,s ~W,t A A50
D;S -¢ol e -¢o 1
EN notation -¢o2 -¢o2
DIN notation mm mm MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa % %
No. von to von to
EN AW-5086 0, HIlI - 20 95 70 60 90 40 55 16 14
~~?
80 240
AlMg4 60 - - 240 95 70 60 90 40 55 16 14
3.3545 H12, H22, (D) 30 - 10 270 190 80 65 100 45 60 5 4
H32 (S) - - - · - - - - - - - -
H14, H24, · - - 5 295 230 90 70 110 50 65 3 2
H34 - - - - - - - - - - -
H16, H26, - - - 3 320 260 95 75 115 55 70 2 1
H36 - - - - - · - - · - -
EN AW-6012 T4 - 80 - 20 200 100 60 50 75 35 45 10 8
AlMgSiPb T6 - 80 - 20 310 260 95 75 110 55 70 8 5
3.0615
EN AW-6060 T4 - 80 - -5 130 65 40 35 50 25 30 15 13
AlMgSi - - - 130 65 40 35 50 25 30 12 10
3.3206 - 5 20 130 65 40 35 50 25 30 15 13
T6 - 80 - 20 215 160 65 55 80 35 50 12 10
-
EN AW-6061 0, - 80 - 20 < 150 < 110 <45 <40 <60 <25 <35 16 14
AlMglSiCu HIll
3.3211 T4 · 80 - 20 205 110 60 55 80 35 50 16 14
T6 - 80 - 20 290 240 85 70 105 50 65 10 8
EN AW·6262 T6 - 80 - 5 290 240 85 70 105 50 65 10 8
AlMglSiPn - - 5 20 290 240 85 70 105 50 65 10 8
T8 · 50 - 10 345 315 105 80 125 60 75 4 3
T9 - 50 - 10 360 330 110 80 130 60 80· 4 3
EN AW-6063 T4 - 80 - - 150 75 45 40 60 25 35 15 13
AlMgO,7Si - - · 5 150 75 45 40 60 25 35 12 10
- - 5 20 150 75 45 40 60 25 35 15 13
T6 - 80 - 20 220 190 65 55 85 40 50 10 8
T66 - 80 20 230 195 70 60 85 40 55 10 8
T832 - - - 5 275 240 85 65 100 50 60 5 3
EN AW-6063A 0, - 80 - 20 < 140 - <40 <40 < 55 < 25 < 35 15 13
AlMgO,7Si(A) HlIl
T4 - 80 - 20 150 90 45 40 60 25 35 16 14
T6 - 80 - 20 230 190 70 60 85 40 55 9 7
EN AW-6082 0, - 80 - 20 < 160 < 110 <50 <45 <65 <30 <40 15 13
AlSilMgMn HIll
3.2315 T4 - 80 - 20 205 110 60 55 80 35 50 4 12
T6 - 80 - - 310 255 95 75 110 55 70 10 9
- - - 5 310 255 95 75 110 55 70 8 7
- - 5 20 310 240 95 75 110 55 70 10 9
EN AW-7020 T6 (D) 80 - 20 350 280 105 80 125 60 75 10 8
AlZn4,5Mgl (S) 50 - - 350 280 105 80 125 60 75 10 8
3.4335
EN AW-7022 T6 - 80 - 20 460 380 140 95 155 80 100 8 6
AlZn5Mg3Cu - - - - · - - - - - -
3.4345 - - - - - · · · · · .
EN AW-7049A T6 · 80 - · 590 500 175 115 195 100 120 7 5
AlZn8MgCu T6, T651O, · - · 5 590 530 175 115 195 100 120 6 4
T6511 · · 5 20 590 530 175 115 195 100 120 7 5
EN AW-7075 0, · 80 - 20 <275 < 165 <85 <65 < 100 < 50 <60 10 8
AlZn5,5MgCu HIll
3.4365 T6 · 80 · 20 540 485 160 110 180 95 115 7 6
T651 · 80 - - 540 485 160 110 180 95 115 5 4
T651O, · · · 20 540 485 160 110 180 95 115 5 4
T6511 · · · · · · · · · · . - .
T73 · 80 · 20 455 385 135 95 155 80 95 10 8
T7351 · 80 · · 455 385 135 95 155 80 95 8 6
T73510 - - - 20 455 385 135 95 155 80 95 8 6
T73511 - - · · · - · · · · - . .
~ 1 D diameter of roundrods, S gaugeof squareor hexagonal rods, S thickness of rectangular rods, e wall thickness of tubes.
~ 2 The elongation A is to be usedfor the assessment.
 157
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.25 Mechanical properties in MFa for wrought aluminum alloys, rods / bars,
after DIN 1747 T. I (1983-02-00) (selected types of material only).
Material Rods/ Bars Rm R" (JW,zd O'Sch.zd Q"W.b 'tW,s 'tw.t A, A IO Hdn Condo
% % no. ~5
~4 ~4
DIN notation No. D~1 S~2 S~ 3
rom rom mm HB
AlMg3 3.3535 aile aile aile 180 80 55 50 70 30 40 14 12 45 P
F18 .08
W18 .10 aile aile aile 180 80 55 50 70 30 40 16 14 45 P,Z
F25 .26 20 10 5 250 180 75 60 95 45 55 4 3 75 Z
AlMg5 3.3555 aile aile aile 250 110 75 60 95 45 55 13 11 60 P
F25 .08
W25 .10 aile aile aile 250 110 75 60 95 45 55 14 12 60 w
p,z
F26 .24 60 60 15 255 145 75 65 95 45 60 10 8 70 Z
F28 .26 35 25 10 280 200 85 70 105 50 65 6 5 80 Z
AlMg2MnO,8 3.3527 aile aile aile 200 100 60 50 75 35 45 13 11 50 P
F20 .08
W18 .10 aile aile aile 180 80 55 50 70 30 40 16 14 45 w
p,z
F25 .26 20 10 5 250 180 75 60 95 45 55 4 3 75 Z
AlMg4,5Mn 3.3547 aile aile aile 270 140 80 65 100 45 60 12 10 65 P
F27 .08
W27 .10 aile aile aile 270 110 80 65 100 45 60 12 10 60 w
P, Z
AlMgSiO,5 3.3206 aile aile aile 130 65 40 35 50 25 30 15 13 45 ka
F13 .51 p, Z
F22 .71 - 50 - 50 - 50 215 160 65 55 80 35 50 12 10 70 wa
P,Z
F25 .72 - 50 - 50 - 50 145 195 45 40 55 25 35 10 8 75 wa,
p,z
AlMgSil 3.2315 - 80 - 80 - 50 205 110 60 55 80 35 50 14 12 65 ka,
F21 .51 p,z
F22 .71 - 60 - 60 - 50 275 200 85 65 100 50 60 12 13 80 wa
p,Z
F31 .72 - 60 - 60 - 50 310 260 95 75 110 55 70 10 8 95 wa
p,z
F30 .72 60 200 60 200 50 100 300 240 90 70 110 50 65 8 - 95 wa,p
F27 .72 200 250 200 250 100 200 270 200 80 65 100 45 60 6 - 95 wa,p
AlCuMgl 3.1325 - 50 - 50 - 20 380 260 115 85 135 65 85 10 8 110 ka,z
F38 .51
F40 .51 - 80 - 80 - 30 400 270 120 90 140 70 85 10 8 110 ka,p
F36 .51 80 200 80 200 30 70 360 220 110 80 130 60 80 7 - 110 ka,p
F33 .51 200 250 200 250 70 200 330 200 100 75 120 55 75 6 - 110 ka, p
AlCuMg2 3.1355 - 50 - 50 - 30 440 310 130 95 150 75 95 10 8 115 ka, Z
F44 .51
F47 .51 - 100 - 100 - 60 470 330 140 100 160 80 100 8 6 120 ka, p
F40 .51 100 200 100 200 60 150 400 260 120 90 140 70 85 6 - 105 ka,p
AlCuSiMn
F44
3.1255
.71
- 50 - 50 - 30 440 360 130 95 150 75 95 8 7 120 wa,z

F46 .71 - 100 - 100 - 60 460 400 140 95 160 80 100 7 6 125 wap
F43 .71 100 200 100 200 60 150 430 350 130 95 150 75 95 6 - 120 wa,p
AlZn4,5Mgl 3.4335 - 50 - 50 . 30 350 280 105 80 125 60 75 10 8 100 wa,z
F35 .71
F35 .71 - 100 - 100 - 60 350 290 105 80 125 60 75 10 8 105 wa, p
F35 .71 100 250 100 250 60 200 350 270 105 80 125 60 75 7 - 100 wa, p
AlZnMgCuO,5 3.4345 - 50 - 50 - 30 460 380 140 95 160 80 100 .7 6 125 wa,z
F46 .71
F49 .71 - 80 - 80 - 50 490 420 145 100 165 85 105 7 6 130 wa,p
F47 .71 80 200 80 200 50 150 470 400 140 100 160 80 100 7 - 130 wa, p
AlZnMgCul,5 3.4365 - 50 - 50 - 30 510 440 155 105 170 90 105 7 6 140 wa,z
F51 .71
F52 .71 - 80 - 80 - 50 520 460 155 105 175 90 110 7 6 140 wa, p
F51 .71 . 80 120 80 120 50 80 510 450 155 105 170 90 105 7 5 140 wa, p
F50 .71 120 200 120 200 80 150 500 440 150 105 170 85 105 5 - 140 wa,p
~ 1 D diameterof roundrods, ~ 2 S gaugeof squareor hexagonal rods, ~ 3 S thickness of rectangular rods.
~ 4 The elongation A, is to be usedfor the assessment.
~ 5 Condition: ka = naturallyaged, p = extruded, w = softannealed, wa = artificially aged, Z = extruded and drawn.
 158
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.26 Material properties in MFa for wrought aluminum alloys, IRT51Al-b.doJ
extruded rods / bars, tubes and profiles after DIN EN 755A W-2 (1997-08-00).
Material Condition Rods/Bars D Rm Rp O'W,zd O'sch,zd O'W,b ~W,s ~W,t A
notation Rods/BarsS
Tubese
EN-notation Profiles e
DIN-notation v3
No.
mm
%
v 1 v 2 von bis v4 v5
AW-2007 T4 D - 80 370 250 110 85 130 65 80 8
AICuMgPb T4510 S - 80
3.1645 T4511 eR - 25
eP - 30
D >80 200 340 220 100 80 120 60 75 8
S >80 200
eR - -
eP - -
D >200 250 330 210 100 75 120 55 75 7
S >200 250
eR - -
eP - -
AW-2011 T4 D - 200 275 125 85 65 100 50 60 14
AICuBiPb S - 60
3.1655 eR - -
eP - -
T6 D - 75 310 230 95 75 110 55 70 8
S - 60
eR - 25
eP - -
D >75 200 295 195 90 70 110 50 65 6
S - -
eR - -
eP - -
AW-2011A T4 D - 200 275 125 85 65 100 50 60 14
- S - 60
- eR - -
eP - -
T6 D - 75 310 230 95 75 110 55 70 8
S - 60
eR - 25
eP - -
D >75 200 295 195 90 70 110 50 65 6
S - -
eR - -
eP - -
AW-2014 0 D - 200 <250 <135 <75 <60 <95 <45 <55 12
AICuSiMn HIll S - 200
3.1255 eR - 20
eP - all
and T4 D - 25 370 230 110 85 130 65 80 13
T4510 S - 25
AW-2014A T4511 eR - 20
- eP - 25
- D >25 20 410 270 125 90 145 70 90 12
S >25 25
eR >25 75 10
eP - 75
D >75 75 390 250 115 85 135 70 85 10
S >75 -
eR - 150
eP - 150
D >150 - 350 230 105 80 125 60 75 8
S >150 -
eR - -
eP - -
v 1 to 6 see page 159.
 159
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.26 Continued, page 1 of 9

Material notation Condition Rods/Bars D Rm Rp crW,zd crsch,zd crW,b ~W,s ~W,t A

Rods/BarsS
Tubes e
EN-notation
Profiles e
DIN-notation ~3
No.
mm %
c- I ~2 von bis ~4 ~5
continued T6 D - 25 415 370 125 90 145 70 90 6
T6510 S - 25
AW-2014 T6511 eR - 10 7
AICuSiMn eP - 25
3.1255 D >25 75 460 415 140 95 160 80 100 7
S >25 75
and eR - -
eP >25 75
AW-2014A D >75 150 465 420 140 95 7
160 80 100
- S >75 150
- eR - -
eP - -
D >150 200 430 350 130 95 150 75 95 6
S >150 200
eR - -
eP - -
D >200 250 420 320 125 90 145 75 90 5
S >200 250
eR >10 40 450 400 135 95 155 80 95 6
eP - -
AW-2017A 0 D - 200 <250 <135 <75 <60 < 95 < 45 < 55 12
AlCuMg1 Hili S - 200
3.1325 eR - 20
eP - -
T4 D - 25 380 260 115 85 135 65 85 12
T4510 Is - 25
T4511 eR - 10
eP - 30 10
D >25 75 400 270 120 90 140 70 85 10
Is >25 75
eR >10 75
eP - -
D >75 150 390 260 115 85 135 70 85 9
IseR >75 150
- -
eP - -
D >150 200 370 240 110 85 130 65 80 8
IseR >150 200
- -
eP - -
D >200 250 360 220 110 80 130 60 80 7
IseR >200 250
- -
eP - -
AW-2024 0 D - 200 <250 <150 <75 <60 <95 < 45 < 55 12
AlCuMg2 Hill S - 200
3.1355 eR . 30
eP - all

-c- 1 Sequence and material notation after DIN EN 755AW-2, page 2,

~ 2 The values "F" are for information only.
~ 3 D diameter of round rods, S gauge of square or hexagonal rods, e wall thickness of tubes and profiles.
-e- 4,,<" for R",and R, means, that only upper bound values ofR", and R, are given in DIN EN 755AW-2,
whereas lower bound values are required for an assessment of strength.
~ 5 Elongation referring to an initial length of the specimen of 5,65x (section of specimen) 1/2,
~ 6 open = open profil, hollow = hollow profil.
 160
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.26 Continued, page 2 of 9

Material notation Rods/Bars D
Condition Rods/BarsS Rm Rp crW,zd crsch,zd crW,b 'tW,s 'tW,t A
EN-notation Tubese
DIN-notation Profiles e
No. ~3
mm %
~1 ~2 von bis ~4 ~5

continued T3 D - 50 450 310 135 95 155 80 95 8

T3510 S - 50
AW-2024 T3511 eR - -
AlCuMg2 eP - -
3.1355 D >50 100 440 300 130 95 150 75 95 8
S >50 100
eR - -
eP - -
D >100 200 420 280 125 90 145 75 90 8
S >100 200
eR - 30
eP >15 50
D >200 250 400 270 120 90 140 70 85 8
S >200 250 125 90 145 75 90 8
eR - 15 395 290 120 85 140 70 85 8
eP - -
T8 D - 150 455 380 135 95 155 80 95 5
T8510 S - 150
T8511 eR - 30
eP - 50
AW-2030 T4 D - 80 370 250 110 85 130 65 80 8
- T4510 S - 80
- T4511 eR - 25
eP - 30
D >80 200 340 220 100 80 120 60 75 8
S >80 200
eR - -
eP - -
D >200 250 330 210 100 75 120 60 75 7
S >200 250
eR - -
eP - - 25
AW-3003 F D - all 95 35 30 25 40 15 25
AlMnCu H112 S - all
3.0517 0 eR - all
H111 eP - all
AW-3103 F D - all 95 35 30 25 40 15 25 25
AlMn1 H112 S - all
3.0515 0 eR - all
H111 eP - all
AW-5005 F D - all 100 40 30 30 40 15 25 18
- H112 S - all
- eR - all
eP - all
0 D - all 100 40 . 30 30 40 15 25 20
H111 S - all
eR - all
eP - -
AW-5005A F D - all 100 40 30 30 40 15 25 18
AlMg1 H112 S - all
3.3315 eR - all
eP - all
0 D - all 100 40 30 30 40 15 25 20
H111 S - all
eR - all
eP - -
AW-5051A F D - all 150 50 45 40 60 25 35 16
AlMg1,8 H112 S - all
3.3326 eR - all 150 60 45 40 60 25 35 16
eP - all
0 D - all 150 50 45 40 60 25 35 18
H111 S - all
eR - all 150 60 45 40 60 25 35 18
eP - -
~ 1 to 6 seepage 159.
 161
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.26 Continued, page 3 of 9

Material notation Condition Rods/Bars D Rm Rp O"W,zd O"sch,zd O"W,b 'tW,s 'tW,t A

Rods/BarsS
Tubese
EN-notation
Profiles e
DIN-notation
~3

No. mm %
~1 ~2 von bis ~4 ~5
AW-5251 F D - all 160 60 50 45 65 30 40 16
A IMg2MnO,3 H1l2 S - aLL
3.3525 eR - all
eP · all
0 D - all 160 60 50 45 65 30 40 17
Hlll S - aLL
eR - all
eP - -
AW-5052 F D - all 170 70 50 45 65 30 40 15
AlMg2,5 H1l2 S - aLL
3.3523 eR - all
eP - all
0 D - all 170 70 50 45 65 30 40 17
HIll S - aLL
eR - all
eP - .
AW-5154A F D - 200 200 85 60 50 75 35 45 16
- H1l2 S - 200
- eR - 25
eP · 25
0 D - 200 200 85 60 50 75 35 45 18
Hlll S - 200
eR - 25
eP - 25
AW-5454 F D - 200 200 85 60 50 75 35 45 16
AlMg2,7Mn H1l2 S - 200
3.3537 eR - 25
eP - 25
0 D - 200 200 85 60 50 75 35 45 18
Hlll S - 200
eR - 25
eP · -
AW-5754A F D · 150 180 80 55 45 70 30 40 14
AlMg3 H1l2 S - 150
3.3535 eR - 25
eP - 25
D >150 250 180 70 55 45 70 30 40 13
S >150 250
eR - -
eP - -
0 D - 150 180 80 55 45 70 30 40 17
HIll S - 150
eR - 25
eP - -
AW-5019 F D - 200 250 110 75 60 95 45 55 14
AlMg5 H1l2 S - 200
3.3555 eR - 30
eP - 30
0 D - 200 250 110 75 60 95 45 55 15
Hlll S - 200
eR - 30
eP - -
AW·5083 F D - 200 270 110 80 65 100 45 60 12
AlMg4,5Mn 0 S · 200
3.3547 Hlll eR - all
eP - all
D >200 250 260 100 8B 65 95 45 60 12
S >200 250
eR - -
eP - -
~ 1 to 6 see page 159.
 162
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.26 Continued, page 4 of 9

Material Condition Rods! Bars D Rm Rp Cl"W,zd Cl"sch,zd Cl"W,b ~W,s ~W,t A

notation Rods r Bars S
Tubese
Profiles e
EN-notation -¢-3
DIN-notation
mm %
No.
-¢-1 -¢-2 -¢-6 von bis -¢-4 -¢-5
continued H1l2 D - 200 270 125 80 65 100 45 60 12
AW-5083 S - 200
AUvIg4,5Mn eR - all
3.3547 eP - all
AW-5086 F D - 250 240 95 70 60 90 40 55 12
AUvIg4Mn H1l2 S - 250
3.3545 eR - all
eP - all
0 D - 200 240 95 70 60 90 40 55 18
Hlli S - 200
eR - all
eP - -
AW-61OIA T6 D - 150 200 170 60 50 75 35 45 10
- S - 150
- eR - all
eP - all
AW-6101B T6 D - 15 215 160 65 55 80 35 50 8
E-AUvIgSiO, 5 S - 15
3.3207 eR - 15
eP - 15
T7 D - 15 170 120 50 45 65 30 40 12
S - 15
eR · 15
eP - ·
AW-6005 T6 D - 25 270 225 80 65 100 45 60 10
- S - 25
- eR - 5
eP - -
D ->25 50 270 225 80 65 100 45 60 8
S >25 50
eR - 5
eP - -
D >50 100 260 215 80 65 95 45 60 8
S >50 100
eR >5 10
eP - -
T4 open eP - 25 180 90 55 45 70 30 40 15
T4 hollow -¢-6 - 10
T6 open eP - 5 270 225 80 65 100 45 60 8
-¢-6 >5 10 260 215 80 65 95 45 60
>10 25 250 200 75 60 95 45 60
T6 hollow - 5 255 215 75 65 95 45 60
>5 15 250 200 75 60 95 45 60
AW-6005A T6 D - 25 270 225 80 65 100 45 60 10
AUvIgSiO,7 S - 25
3.3210 eR · 5 8
eP - ·
D >25 50 270 225 80 65 100 45 60 8
S >25 50
eR - 5
eP -
>50
·
8
D 100 260 215 80 65 95 45 60
S >50 100
eR >5 10
eP - -
T4 open eP - 25 180 90 55 45 70 30 40 15
T4 hollow -¢-6 - 10
T6 open eP · 5 270 225 80 65 100 45 60 8
-¢-6 >5 10 260 215 80 65 95 45 60
>10 25 250 200 75 60 95 45 60
T6 hollow - 5 255 215 75 65 95 45 60
>5 15 I 250 200 75 60 95 45 60

-¢-1 to 6 see page 159.

 163
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.26 Continued, page 5 of 9

Material Condition Rods/Bars D Rm Rp O"W,zd O"sch,zd O"W,b ~W,s ~W,t A

notation Rods/BarsS
Tubese
Profiles e
EN-notation {>3
DIN-notation
rom %
No.
{>1 {> 2 -{> 6 von bis -{>-4 -{>5
AW-6106 T6 D - -
- S - -
- eR - -
eP - 10 250 200 75 60 95 45 60 8
AW-6012 T6 D - 150 310 260 95 75 110 55 70 8
AlMgSiPb T6510 S - 150
3.0165 T6511 eR - 30
eP - 30
D >150 200 260 200 80 65 95 45 60 8
S >150 200
eR - -
eP - -
AW-6018 T6 D - 150 310 260 95 75 110 55 70 8
- T6510 S - 150
- T6511 eR - 30
eP - 30
D >150 200 260 200 80 65 95 45 60 8
S >150 200
eR - -
eP - -
AW-6351 0 D - 200 < 160 < 110 <50 <45 < 65 <30 <40 14
- Hill S - 200
- eR - 25
eP - all
T4 D - 200 205 110 60 55 80 35 50 14
S - 200
eR - 25
eP - 25
T5 open eP - 5 270 230 80 65 100 45 60 8
T5 hollow {>6 - -
T6 open eP - 5 290 250 85 70 105 50 50 8
T6 hollow -{>6 >5 25 300 255 90 70 110 50 65 10
AW-6060 T4 D - 150 120 60 35 35 50 20 30 16
A lMgSiO,5 S - 150
3.3206 eR - 15
eP - 25
T5 D - 150 160 120 50 45 60 30 40 8
S - 150
eR - 15
eP - 5
>5 25 140 100 40 40 55 25 35 8
T6 D - 150 190 150 55 50 75 35 45 8
S - 150
eR - 15
eP - 3
>3 25 170 140 50 45 65 30 40 8
T64 D - 50 180 120 55 45 70 30 40 12
S - 50
eR - 15
eP - 15
T66 D - 150 215 160 65 55 80 35 50 8
S - 150
eR - 15
eP - 3
>3 25 195 150 60 50 75 35 45 8
AW-6061 0 D - 200 < 150 < 110 <45 <40 <60 <25 < 35 16
AlMg1SiCu Hill S - 200
3.3211 eR - 25
eP - 25

{> 1 to 6 see page 159.

 164
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.26 Continued, page 6 of 9

Material Condition Rods/ Bars D Rm Rp crW,zd crsch,zd crW,b tw,s tW,t A

notation Rods r Bars S
Tubese
Profiles e
EN-notation ~3
DIN-notation
No. mm %
~ I ~2 ~6 von bis ~4 ~5

continued T4 D - 200 180 110 55 45 70 30 40 IS

S - 200
AW-6061 eR - 25
AlMg1SiCu eP - 25
3.3211 T6 D - 200 260 240 80 65 95 45 60 8
S - 200
eR - 5 8
>5 25 10
eP - 5 .9
>5 25 10
AW-6261 0 D - 100 < 170 < 120 < 50 <45 < 65 <30 <40 14
- Hill S - 100
- eR - 10
eP - 10
T4 D - 100 180 100 55 45 70 30 40 14
S - 100
eR - 10
eP - 25
T6 D - 20 290 245 85 70 105 50 65 8
>20 100
S - 20
>20 100
eR - 5
>5 10 9
eP - 5 8
>5 10 9
T5 open eP - 5 270 230 80 65 100 45 60 8
~6 >5 25 260 220 80 65 95 45 60 9
>25 - 250 210 75 60 95 45 60 9
T5 hollow - 5 270 230 80 65 100 45 60 8
>5 10 260 220 80 65 95 45 60 9
T6 open eP - 5 290 245 85 70 lOS 50 65 8
~6 >5 25 280 235 85 70 105 50 65 8
T6 hollow - 5 290 245 85 70 lOS 50 65 8
>5 10 270 230 80 65 100 45 60 9
AW-6262 T6 - 200 260 240 80 65 95 45 60 10
- - 200
- - 25
- 25
AW-6063 0 - 200 < 130 - <40 <35 < 50 < 25 <30 18
. HilI - 200
- - 25
- -
T4 D . 150 130 65 40 35 50 25 30 14
S - 150
eR - 10
eP - 25
D >150 200 120 65 35 35 50 20 30 12
S >150 200
eR >10 25
eP - -
T5 D . 200 175 130 55 45 70 30 40 8
S - 200
eR - 25
eP - 3
>3 25 160 110 50 45 65 30 40 7

~ I to 6 see page 159.

 165
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.26 Continued, page 7 of 9

Material Condition Rods/Bars D Rm Rp crW,zd crsch,zd crW,b 'tW,s 'tW,t A

notation Rods/BarsS
Tubese
Profiles e
EN-notation ~3
DIN-notation
No. mm %
1-c- ~2 ~6 von bis ~4 ~5
continued T6 D - 150 215 170 65 55 80 35 50 10
S - 150
AW-6063 eR - 25
- eP - 10 8
- D >150 200 195 160 60 50 75 35 45 10
S >150 200
eR - -
eP >10 25 8
T66 D - 200 245 200 75 60 90 40 55 10
S - 200
eR - 25
eP - 10 8
>10 25 225 180 70 55 85 40 50 8
T64 D - -
S - -
eR - -
eP - 15 180 120 55. 45 70 30 40 12
AW-6063 0, Hll1 D - 200 < 150 - < 45 <40 <60 < 25 < 35 16
- S - 200
- eR - 25
eP - -
T4 D - 150 150 90 45 40 60 25 35 12
S - 150
eR - 10
eP - 25
D >150 200 140 90 40 40 55 25 35 10
S >150 200
eR >10 25
eP - -
T5 D - 200 200 160 60 50 '75 35 45 7
S - 200
eR - 25
eP - 10
>10 25 190 150 60 50 75 35 45 6
T6 D - 150 230 190 70 60 85 40 55 7
S - 150
eR - 25
eP - 10
D >150 200 220 160 65 55 85 40 50 7
S >150 200
eR >10 25 220 180 65 55 85 40 50 5
eP - -
AW-6463 T4 D - 150 125 75 40 35 50 20 30 14
- S - 150
- eR - -
eP - 50
T5 D - 150 150 110 45 40 60 25 35 8
S - 150
eR - -
eP - 50
T6 D - 150 195 160 60 50 75 35 45 10
S - 150
eR - 25
eP - 50
AW-6081 T6 D - 250 275 240 85 65 100 50 60 8
- S - 250
- eR - 25
eP -
T6 open eP - 25 275 240 85 65 100 50 60 8
T6 hollow ~6 - 15

~ 1 to6 seepage 159,

 166 5 Appendices
5.1 Material tables

Table 5.1.26 Continued, page 8 of 9

Material Condition Rods/Bars D Rm Rp crW,zd crsch,zd crW,b ~W,s ~W,t A

notation Rods r Bars S
Tubese
Profiles e
EN-notation ->3
DIN-notation
mm %
No.
->1 ->2 ->6 von bis ->4 ->5
AW-6082 0, HIll D - 200 < 160 < 110 < 50 <45 < 65 <30 <40 14
AlMgSiI S - 200
3.2315 eR - 25
eP - all
T4 D - 200 205 110 60 55 80 35 50 14
S - 200
eR - 25
eP - 25
T5 open eP - 5 270 230 80 65 100 45 60 8
T5 hollow ->6 - -
T6 open eP - 5 290 250 85 70 105 50 65 8
T6 hollow ->6 >5 15 310 260 95 75 110 55 70 10
-7003 T5 D - all 310 260 95 75 110 55 70 10
- S - all
- eR - all
eP - all
T6 D - 50 350 290 105 80 125 60 75 10
S - 50
eR - 10
eP - 10
D >50 150 340 280 100 80 120 60 75 10
S >50 150
eR >10 25
eP >10- 25
-7005 T6 D - 50 350 290 105 80 125 60 75 10
- S - 50
- eR - 15
eP - 40
D >50 200 340 270 100 80 120 60 75 10
S >50 200
eR -
eP -
-7020 T6 D - 50 350 290 105 80 125 60 75 10
AIZn4,5Mg1 S - 50
3.4335 eR - 15
eP - 40
D >50 200 340 275 100 80 120 60 75 10
S >50 200
eR -
eP -
-7022 T6, D - 80 490 420 145 100 165 85 105 7
AlZn5Mg3Cu T6510 S - 80
3.4345 T6511 eR - 30
eP - 30
D >80 200 470 400 140 100 160 80 100 7
S >80 200
eR -
eP -
-> 1 to 6 see page 159.
 167
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.26 Continued, page 9 of 9

Material Condition Rods/ Bars D Rm Rp Cl"W,zd Cl"sch,zd Cl"W,b 'tW,s 'tW,t A

notation RodslBarsS
Tubese
Profiles e
EN-notation ?3
DIN-notation
No. mm %
? 1 ?2 von bis ?4 ?5
-7049A T6, D - 100 610 530 185 115 200 105 125 5
A IZnMgCu 0,5 T6510, S - 100
3.4345 T6511 eR - 30
eP - 30
D >100 125 560 500 170 110 185 95 115 5
S >100 125
eR - -
eP - -
D >125 150 . 520 430 155 105 175 90 110 5
S >125 150
eR - -
eP - -
D >150 180 450 400 35 95 55 80 95 3
S >150 180
eR - -
eP - -
·7075 0 D - 200 <275 < 165 <100 < 65 <100 < 50 <60 10
AIZnMgCu1,5 Hill S - 200
3.4365 eR - 10
eP - -
T6 D - 25 540 480 180 110 180 95 115 7
T6510 S - 25
T6511 eR - 5 8
eP >25 60 6
D >25 100 560 500 185 110 185 95 115 7
S >25 100
eR 5 10
eP - -
D >100 150 530 470 180 105 175 90 110 6
S >100 150
eR - -
eP - 25 530 460 180 105 175 90 110 6
D >150 200 470 400 160 110 160 80 100 5
S >150 200
eR - -
eP - -
T73 D - 25 485 420 145 100 165 85 100 7
T73510 S - 25
T73511 eR 5 25
eP - 25
D >25 75 475 405 145 100 160 80 100 7
S >25 75
eR >25 50 8
eP - -
D >75 100 470 390 140 100 160 80 100 6
S >75 100 470 400 140 100 160 80 100 7
eR >5 25 485 420 145 100 165 85 105 8
- 5 470 400 145 100 160 80 100 7
eP - -
D >100 150 440 360 130 95 150 75 100 6
S >100 150
eR - -
eP - -
? 1 to 6 see page 159.
 168
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.27 Material properties in MFa for wrought aluminum alloys,

extruded profiles after DIN 1748 T. I (1983-02-00) (selected types of material only).

Material Wall Rm Rp crW,zd crSch,zd crW,b "tW,s "tW,t A5 AlO Hard- Con-
thi'*Y ess % %
ness dW~n
-¢>2 -¢>2 No.

DIN notation No. mm HB

AlMg3 F18 3.3535.08 any 180 80 55 50 70 30 40 14 12 45 p
AlMg5 F25 3.3555.08 to 10 250 110 75 60 95 45 55 13 11 55 p
AlMg2MnO,3 F15 3.3525.08 any 150 60 45 40 60 25 35 14 12 40 P
AlMg2MnO,8 F20 3.3527.08 any 200 100 60 50 75 35 45 13 11 50 p
AlMg4,5Mn F27 3.3547.08 any 270 140 80 65 100 45 60 12 10 65 p
AlMgSiO,5 F13 3.3206.51 any 130 65 40 35 50 25 30 15 13 45 ka
F22 .71 any 215 160 65 55 80 35 50 12 Y 't lOY't 70 wa
F25 .72 to 10 245 195 75 60 90 40 55 lOY't 8 Y 't 75 wa
r J
AlMgSiO,7 F26 3.3210.71 260 215 80 65 95 45 60 8 6 85 wa
'0 90 wa
F27 .71 270 225 80 65 100 45 60 8 6
AlMgSil F21 3.2315.51 any 205 110 60 55 80 35 50 14 12 65 ka
F28 .71 to 10 275 200 85 65 100 50 60 12 10 80 wa
F31 .72 to 20 310 260 95 75 110 55 70 10 8 95 wa
AlCuMg1 F38 3.1325.51 2 to 30 380 230 115 85 135 65 85 io 8 95 ka
AlCuMg2 F44 3.1355.51 2 to 30 440 315 130 95 150 75 95 10 8 120 ka
AlCuSiMn F45 3.1255.71 2 to 30 450 400 135 95 155 80 95 7 6 135 wa
AlZn4,5Mg1 F35 3.4335.71 3 to 30 350 290 105 80 125 60 75 10 8 105 wa
AlZnMgCuO,5 F49 3.4345.71 2 to 30 490 420 145 100 165 85 105 7 6 140 wa
AlZnMgCul,5 F53 3.4365.71 2 to 30 530 460 160 105 180 90 110 7 6 150 wa

-¢> I The material condition assigned to a profile is determined by the maximum thickness of its wall or web plate.
-¢>2 The elongation A5 is to be used for the assessment.
-¢> 3 ka = naturally aged, p = extruded, wa = artificially aged.
-¢>4 For profiles where the diameter ofthe circumscribing circle is larger than 250 mm the elongation A5 is 8% minimum or AIO is 6 % minimum.
-¢>5 For solid sections with 6 mm to 10 mm thickness ofthe web plate and for hollow sections up to 10 mm wall thickness.
-¢>6 For solid.sections up to 6 mm thickness of the web plate.
 169
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.28 Material properties in MPa for wrought aluminum alloys,

forgings after DIN EN 586AW-2 (1994-11-00).

Material Product Con- Section Testing Rm Rp crW,zd crSch,zd crW,b 'tW.s 'tW,t A
dition size I direction %
~1

EN AWAW- Forgings, T4 IS 150 L 370 270 110 85 130 65 80 11

2014 any kind
AI Cu4SiMg
Die IS 50 L 440 380 130 95 150 75 95 6
forgings T6 orT 430 370 130 95 150 75 95 3
50 < IS 100 L 440 370 130 95 150 75 95 6
orT 430 360 130 95 150 75 95 3
Hand T652 IS75 L 440 380 130 95 150 75 95 8
forgings orLT 430 370 130 95 150 75 95 4
orST 420 360 125 90 145 75 90 3
75<15150 L 420 370 125 90 145 75 90 7
orLT 420 360 125 90 145 75 90 4
orST 410 350 125 90 145 70 90 3
150 < I S 200 L 410 360 125 90 145 70 90 6
orLT 410 350 125 90 145 70 90 3
orST 400 340 120 90 140 70 85 2
EN AWAW- Forgings, T4 IS 100 L 420 260 125 90 145 75 90 8
2024 any kind
AlCu4Mgl
EN AWAW- Forgings, H112 IS 150 L 270 120 80 65 100 5 60 12
5083 any kind orT 260 110 80 65 95 45 60 10
AlMg4,5MnO,7
EN AWAW- Forgings, Hil2 IS 150 L 180 80 55 50 70 30 40 15
5754 any kind
AlMg3
EN AWAW- Forgings, T6 IS 100 L 310 260 95 75 110 55 70 6
6082 any kind orT 290 250 90 70 105 50 65 5
AlSilMgMn
EN AW·7075 Die T6 IS 50 L 510 430 155 105 170 90 105 7
AI Zn5,5MgCu forgings orT 480 410 145 100 165 85 100 4
50 < 15100 L 500 425 150 105 170 85 105 6
orT 470 400 140 100 160 80 100 4
T73 IS 50 L 455 385 135 95 155 80 95 6
orT 420 360 125 90 145 75 90 4
50<IS 100 L 445 375 135 90 140 80 95 6
orT 410 350 125 100 165 70 90 3
Hand T652 1< 75 L 490 415 145 100 165 85 105 6
forgings orLT 480 400 145 100 160 85 100 4
or ST 470 390 140 100 160 80 100 3
75 < IS 150 L 470 385 140 100 160 80 100 6
orLT 460 375 140 95 160 80 100 4
or ST 445 370 135 95 155 75 95 3
T7352 1575 L 450 370 135 95 155 80 95 6
orLT 440 360 130 95 150 75 95 4
orST 430 350 130 95 150 75 95 3
75 < IS 150 L 420 350 125 90 145 75 90 6
orLT 410 340 125 90 145 70 90 4
or ST 395 330 120 85 140 70 85 3

~1 L: Direction parallel to the main grain flow,

LT: Direction parallel to larger cross section dimension (width),
T: Direction not parallel to the main grain flow,
ST: Direction parallel to smaller cross section dimension (thickness) (usually forging direction).
 170
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.29 Material properties in MFa for wrought aluminum alloys,

die forgings after DIN 1749 T. 1 (1976-12-00) (Selected types of material only).
Material Thick-
ness
Testing-
direct.
n, n, CYW,zd CYSch,zd CYW,b 'tw,s 'tw,t
A5
%
Hard-
ness
Cnd.
~I ~2
DIN notation No. HB
A1Mg3 F18 3.3535 .08 100 L 180 80 55 45 70 30 40 14 45 s
A1Mg5 F24 3.3555 .08 100 L 240 100 70 60 90 40 55 12 55 s
A1Mg4,5Mn F27 3.3547 .08 100 L 270 120 80 65 100 45 60 12 65 s
T 260 110 80 65 95 45 60 10
A1MgSiO,5 F22 3.3206 .61 100 L 215 160 65 55 80 35 50 12 65 wa
A1MgSiO,8 F28 3.2316 .61 100 L 275 200 85 65 100 50 60 8 75 wa
A1MgSil F20 3.2315 .41 100 L 200 100 60 50 75 35 45 12 60 ka
F28 .61 100 L 275 220 85 65 100 50 60 6 75 wa
T 260 200 80 65 95 45 60 5
F31 .62 100 L 310 260? 95 75 110 55 70 6 wa
A1CuMgl F38 T 290 250 90 70 105 50 65 5
3.1325 .41 100 L 380 230 115 85 135 65 85 10 ka
A1CuMg2 F42 3.1355 .41 100 L 420 260 125 90 145 75 90 8 ka
A1CuSiMn F44 3.1255 .61 50 L 440 380 130 95 150 75 95 6 120 wa
T 430 370 130 95 150 75 95 3
>50 to L 440 370 130 95 150 75 95 6
100 T 430 360 130 95 150 75 95 3
A1Zn4,5Mgl F35 3.4335 .61 100 L 350 280 105 80 125 60 75 10 95 wa
A1ZnMgCuO,5 F48 3.4345 .61 75 L 480 410 145 100 165 85 100 6 135 wa
T 470 400 140 100 160 80 100 3
F47 >75 to L 470 400 140 100 160 80 100 6 130
100 T 460 390 140 95 160 80 100 3
A1ZnMgCul,5 F50 3.4366 .61 50 L 500 420 150 105 170 85 105 6 135 wa
T 480 410 145 100 165 85 100 4
F49 .63 >50 to L 490 410 145 100 165 85 105 6 130
100 T 470 400 140 100 160 80 100 4
F34 .63 50 L 450 380 135 95 155 80 95 6 120
T 420 360 125 90 145 75 90 4
F44 >50 to L 440 370 130 95 150 75 95 6 115
100 T 410 350 125 90 145 70 90 3

~1 L Direction parallelto the main grainflow,

T Direction not parallelto the main grainflow,

~2 Condition ka = naturallyaged, s = forged, wa = artificially aged.

 171
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.30 Material properties in MFa for wrought aluminum alloys,

hand forgings after DIN 17 606 (1976-12-00) (selected types of material only).

Material Thick- Testing- Rm Rp crW,zd crSch,zd crW,b tW,s tW,t A5 Hard- Cnd.
ness d~ft. % ness
~2
DIN notation No. HB
AlMg3 F18 3.3535.08 100 L 180 80 55 45 70 30 40 14 45 s
AlMg4,5Mn F27 3.3547.08 100 L 270 120 80 65 100 45 60 12 65 s
LT 260 110 80 65 95 45 60 10 65
AlMgSil F20 3.2315 Al 100 L 200 100 60 50 75 35 45 12 65 ka
F28 .61 100 L 275 220 85 65 100 50 60 6 75 wa
F31 .62 100 L 310 260 95 75 110 55 70 6 90 wa
AlCuMgl F38 3.1325 Al 100 L 380 230 115 85 135 65 85 10 95 ka
AlCuMg2 F42 3.1355.61 100 L 420 260 125 90 145 75 90 8 105 ka
AlCuSiMn F44 3.1255.61 75 L 440 380 130 95 150 75 95 8 120 wa
LT 430 370 130 95 150 75 95 4 120
ST 420 370 125 90 145 75 90 3 120
F42 .61 >75 to L 420 370 125 90 145 75 90 7 120 wa
150 LT 420 360 125 90 145 75 90 4 120
ST 410 360 125 90 145 70 90 3 120
F41 .61 >150 to L 410 360 125 90 145 70 90 6 120
200 LT 410 350 125 90 145 70 90 3 120
ST 400 350 120 90 140 70 85 2 120
AlZn4,5Mgl F35 3A335.61 100 L 350 370 105 80 125 60 75 10 90 wa
AlZnMgCuO,5 F48 3A345.61 75 L 480 410 145 100 165 85 100 6 135 wa
LT 470 400 140 100 160 80 100 4 135
ST 460 380 140 95 160 80 100 3 135
F47 .61 >75 to L 470 400 140 100 160 80 100 6 130
150 LT 460 390 140 95 160 80 100 3 130
ST 450 370 135 95 155 80 95 2 130
F46 .61 >150 to L 460 390 140 95 160 80 100 6 130
200 LT 450 360 135 95 155 80 95 4 130
ST 440 360 130 95 150 75 95 3 130
AlZnMgCul,5 F49 3A365 .61 75 L 490 420 145 100 165 85 105 6 135"" wa
LT 480 410 145 100 165 85 100 4 135
ST 470 390 140 100 160 80 100 3 135
F46 .61 >75 to L 460 380 140 95 160 80 100 6 135
150 LT 450 370 135 95 155 80 95 4 135
ST 440 370 130 95 150 75 95 3 135
F45 .63 75 L 450 380 135 95 155 80 95 6 120 wa
LT 440 370 130 95 150 75 95 4 120
ST 420 360 125 90 145 75 90 3 120
F42 .63 >75 to L 420 350 125 90 145 75 90 6 115
150 LT 410 350 125 90 145 70 90 4 115
ST 400 340 120 90 140 70 85 3 115

~1 L: Directionparallelto the main grainflow,

LT: Direction parallelto largercrosssection dimension (width),
ST: Direction parallelto smallercrosssectiondimension (thickness) (usuallyforging direction).
~2 Condition ka = naturally aged, s = forged, wa = artificially aged.
 172
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.31 Material properties in MPa for cast aluminum alloys,

sand castings, test pieces cast separately, after DIN EN 1706 (1998-06-00).

Material Con- Rm,N Rp,N crW,zd,N crSch,zd,N crW,b,N ~W,s,N ~W,t,N A50 Hard-
dition % ness
EN notation DIN notation HBS
AC-21000 AI Cu4MgTi T4 300 200 90 60 130 65 100 5 90
AC-21100 AI Cu4Ti T6 300 200 90 60 130 65 100 3 95
T64 280 180 85 55 125 65 95 5 85
AC-41000 AI Si2MgTi F 140 70 40 30 65 30 50 3 50
T6 240 180 70 50 lOS 55 80 3 85
AC-42000 AI Si7Mg F 140 80 40 30 65 30 50 2 50
T6 220 180 65 45 100 50 75 I 75
AC-42100 AISi7MgO,3 T6 230 190 70 50 lOS 50 80 2 75
AC-42200 AI Si7MgO,6 T6 250 210 75 50 110 55 85 I 85
AC-43000 AI SiIOMg(a) F ISO 80 45 35 70 35 50 2 50
T6 220 180 65 45 100 50 75 I 75
AC-43 100 AI SiIOMg(b) F ISO 80 45 35 70 35 50 2 50
T6 220 180 65 45 100 50 75 I 75
AC-43200 AI SiIOMg(Cu) F 160 80 50 35 75 35 55 I 50
T6 220 180 65 45 100 50 75 1 75
AC-43300 AI Si9Mg T6 230 190 70 50 105 50 80 2 75
AC-44000 AISill F ISO 70 45 35 70 35 50 6 45
AC-44100 AISiI2(b) F ISO 70 45 35 70 35 50 4 50
AC-44200 AI SiI2(a) F ISO 70 45 35 70 35 50 5 50
AC-45000 AI Si6Cu4 F ISO 90 45 35 70 35 50 I 60
AC-45200 AI Si5Cu3Mn F 140 70 40 30 65 30 50 I 60
T6 230 200 70 50 105 50 80 <I 90
AC-45300 AI Si5CulMg T4 170 120 50 35 75 40 60 2 80
T6 230 200 70 50 lOS 50 80 <I 100
AC-46200 AI Si8Cu3 F ISO 90 45 35 70 35 50 I 60
AC-46400 AI Si9CulMg F 135 90 40 30 60 30 45 I 60
AC-46600 AI Si7Cu2 F ISO 90 45 35 70 35 50 I 60
AC-47000 AI SiI2(Cu) F ISO 80 45 35 70 35 50 I 50
AC-51000 AI Mg3(b) F 140 70 40 30 65 30 50 3 50
AC-5ll00 AI Mg3(a) F 140 70 40 30 65 30 50 3 50
AC-51300 AI Mg5 F 160 90 50 35 75 35 55 3 55
AC-51400 AIMG5(Si) F 160 100 50 35 75 35 55 3 60
AC-71000 AlZn5Mg T1 190 120 55 40 85 45 65 4 60
 173
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.32 Material properties in MFa for cast aluminum alloys,

permanent mold castings, test pieces cast separately, after DIN EN 1706 (l998~06-00).

Material Cnd. Rm,N Rp,N crW,zd,N crSch,zd,N crW,b,N ~W,s,N ~W,t,N A50 Hard-
% ness
EN DIN notation HBS
notation
AC-21000 Al Cu4MgTi T4 320 200 95 65 140 70 105 8 95
AC-21100 Al Cu4Ti T6 330 220 100 65 145 75 110 7 95
T64 320 180 95 65 140 70 105 8 90
AC-41000 Al Si2MgTi F 170 70 50 35 75 40 60 5 50
T6 260 180 80 55 115 60 90 5 85
AC-42000 Al Si7Mg F 170 90 50 35 75 40 60 2,5 55
T6 260 220 80 55 115 60 90 1 90
T64 240 200 70 50 105 55 80 2 80
AC-42100 Al Si7MgO,3 T6 290 210 85 60 130 65 100 4 90
T64 250 180 75 50 110 55 85 8 80
AC-42000 Al Si7MgO,6 T6 230 240 95 65 140 70 105 3 100
T64 290 210 85 60 130 65 100 6 90
AC-43000 Al Sil0Mg(a) F 180 90 55 40 80 40 60 2,5 55
T6 260 220 80 55 115 60 90 1 90
T64 240 200 70 50 105 55 80 2 80
AC-43100 Al SilOMg(b) F 180 90 55 40 80 40 60 2,5 55
T6 260 220 80 55 115 60 90 1 90
T64 240 200 70 50 105 55 80 2 80
AC-43200 Al Sil0Mg(Cu) F 180 90 55 40 80 40 60 1 55
T6 240 200 70 50 105 55 80 1 80
AC-43300 Al Si9Mg T6 290 210 85 60 130 65 100 4 90
T64 250 180 75 50 110 55 85 6 80
AC-44000 Al Sill F 170 80 50 35 75 40 60 7 45
AC-44100 Al Si12(b) F 170 80 50 35 75 40 60 5 55
AC-44200 Al Si12(a) F 170 80 50 35 75 40 60 6 55
AC-45000 Al Si6Cu4 F 170 100 50 35 75 40 60 1 75
AC-45100 Al Si5Cu3Mg T4 270 180 80 55 120 60 90 2,5 85
T6 320 280 95 65 140 70 105 <1 110
AC-45200 Al Si5CulMn F 160 80 50 35 75 35 55 1 70
T6 280 230 85 55 125 65 95 <1 90
AC-45300 Al Si5CulMg T4 230 140 70 50 105 50 80 3 85
T6 280 210 85 55 125 65 95 <1 110
AC-45400 Al Si5Cu3 T4 230 110 70 50 105 50 80 6 75
AC-46200 Al Si8Cu3 F 170 100 50 35 75 40 60 1 75
AC-46300 Al Si7Cu3Mg F 180 100 55 40 80 40 60 1 80
AC-46400 Al Si9Cu1Mg F 170 100 50 35 75 40 60 1 75
T6 275 235 85 55 120 60 95 1,5 105
AC-46600 Al Si7Cu2 F 170 100 50 35 75 40 60 1 75
AC-47000 Al Si12(Cu) F 170 90 50 35 75 40 60 2 55
AC-48000 Al Si12CuNiMg T5 170 185 60 45 90 45 70 <1 90
T6 275 240 85 55 125 65 95 <1 100
AC-51000 Al Mg3(b) F 150 70 45 35 70 35 50 5 50
AC-51100 Al Mg3(a) F 150 70 45 35 70 35 50 5 50
AC-51300 Al Mg5 F 180 100 55 40 80 40 60 4 60
AC-51400 Al MG5(Si) F 180 110 55 40 80 40 60 3 65
AC-71000 Al Zn5Mg Tl 210 130 65 45 95 45 70 4 65
 174
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.33 Material properties in MPa for cast aluminum alloys,

investment castings, test pieces cast separately, after DIN EN 1706 (1998-06-00).

Material Cnd. Rm,N Rp,N crW,zd,N crSch,zd,N crW,b,N 'tW,s,N 'tW,t,N A50 Hard-
% ness
HBS
EN notation DIN notation
AC-21000 AI Cu4MgTi T4 300 220 90 60 130 70 100 5 90
AC-42000 AI Si7Mg F 150 80 45 35 70 35 50 2 50
T6 240 190 70 50 105 55 80 1 75
AC-42100 AI Si7MgO,3 T6 260 200 80 55 115 60 90 3 75
AC-42200 AI Si7MgO,6 T6 290 240 85 60 130 65 100 2 85
AC-44100 AI SiI2(b) F 150 80 45 35 70 35 50 4 50
AC-45200 AI Si5Cu3Mn F 160 80 50 35 75 35 55 1 60
AC-51300 AlMg5 F 170 95 50 35 75 40 60 3 55

Table 5.1.34 Material properties in MPa for cast aluminum alloys,

high pressure die castings after DIN EN 1706 (1998-06-00), without obligation, for information only.

Material Cnd. Rm,N Rp,N crW,zd,N crSch,zd,N crW,b,N 'tW,s,N 'tW,t,N A50 hard-
% ness
EN DIN notation HBS
notation
AC-43400 AI SilOMg(Fe) F 240 140 70 50 105 55 80 1 - 70
AC-44300 AI SiI2(Fe) F 240 130 70 50 105 55 80 1 60
AC-44400 AI Si9 F 220 120 65 45 100 50 75 2 55
AC-46000 AI Si9Cu3(Fe) F 240 140 70 50 105 55 80 <1 80
AC-46100 AI Si11Cu2(Fe) F 240 140 70 50 105 55 80 <1 80
AC-46200 AI Si8Cu3 F 240 140 70 50 105 55 80 1 80
AC-46500 AI Si9Cu3(Fe)(Zn) F 240 140 70 50 105 55 80 <1 80
AC-47 100 AI SiI2Cul(Fe) F 240 140 70 50 105 55 80 1 70
AC-51200 AlMg9 F 200 130 60 45 90 45 70 1 70
 175
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.35 Material properties in MPa for cast aluminum alloys, alloys for general applications,
sand castings and permanent mould castings, after DIN 1725 T. 2 (1986-02-00).

Material Mate- Casting Rm,N Rp,N O'W,zd,N O'Sch,zd,N O'W,b,N 'tW,s,N 'tW,t,N A50 Hard-
DIN ~o:ation rial process % ness
~2
No. Condition~ HB
delivered I
G-AlSiI2 3.2581 Sand castings 150 70 45 35 70 35 50 5 45
.01 as-cast condit. (140) (70) (40) (30) (65) (30) (50) (3) (45)
G- 3.2581 Sand castings 150 80 45 35 70 35 50 6 45
AlSil2g .44 annealed and (140) (70) (40) (30) (65) (30) (50) (5) (45)
quenched
GK- 3.2581 Perm. mould c. 170 80 50 35 75 40 60 6 50
AlSil2 .02 as-cast conddit. (150) (80) (45) (35) (70) (35) (50) (3) (50)
GK- 3.2581 Perm. mould c. 170 80 50 35 75 40 60 6 50
AlSil2g .45 annealed and (160) (80) (50) (35) (75) (35) (55) (4) (50)
quenched
G- 3.2583 Sand castings 150 80 45 35 70 35 50 I 50
AlSiI2(Cu) .01 as-cast condit. (140) (80) (40) (30) (65) (30) (50) (l) (50)
GK- 3.2583 Perm. mould c. 180 90 55 40 80 40 60 2 55
AlSiI2(Cu) .02 as-cast condit. (160) (90) (50) (35) (75) (35) (55) (I) (55)
G- 3.2381 Sand castings 160 80 50 35 75 35 55 2 50
AlSilOMg .01 as-cast condit. (150) (70) (45) (35) (70) (35) (50) (2) (50)
G- 3.2381 Sand castings 220 180 65 45 100 50 75 I 80
AlSilOMg .61 wa (200) (170) (60) (45) (90) (45) (70) (I) (75)
wa
GK- 3.2381 Perm. mould c. 180 90 55 40 80 40 60 2 60
AlSilOMg .02 as-cast condit. (180) (90) (55) (40) (80) (40) (60) (2) (60)
GK- 3.2381 Perm. mould c. 240 210 70 50 105 55 80 I 85
AlSilOMg .62 wa (220) (190) (65) (45) (100) (50) (75) (I) (80)
wa
G- 3.2383 Sand castings 170 90 50 35 75 40 60 I 55
AlSiIOMg(Cu) .01 as-cast condit. (150) (80) (45) (35) (70) (35) (50) (1) (55)
G- 3.2383 Sand castings 220 180 65 45 100 50 75 I 80
AlSiIOMg(Cu) .61 wa (200) (180) (60) (45) (90) (45) (70) (0,5) (75)
wa
GK- 3.2383 Perm. mould c. 200 100 60 45 90 45 70 I 65
AlSiIOMg(Cu)I .02 as-cast condit. (180) (100) (55) (40) (80) (40) (60) (0,5) (60)
GK- 3.2383 Perm. mould c. 240 210 70 50 105 55 80 I 85
AlSiIOMg(Cu) .62 wa (220) (190) (65) (45) (100) (50) (75) (0,5) (80)
wa
G- 3.2163 Sand castings 160 100 50 35 75 35 55 I 65
AlSi9Cu3 .01 as-cast condit. (140) (100) (40) (30) (65) (30) (50) (0,5) (60)
GK- 3.2163 Perm. mould c. 180 110 55 40 80 40 60 I 70
AlSi9Cu3 .02 as-cast condit. (160) (100) (50) (35) (75) (35) (55) (0,5) (65)
G- 3.2151 Sand castings 160 100 50 35 75 35 55 I 60
AlSi6Cu4 .01 as-cast condit. (140) (100) (40) (30) (659 (30) (50) (0,5) (60)
GK- 3.2151 Perm. mould c. 180 120 55 40 80 40 60 I 75
AlSi6Cu4 .02 as-cast condit. (160) (110) (50) (35) (75) (35) (55) (0,5) (65)

~I wa = artificially aged
~2
Upper line: values for test pieces cast separately,
line below (in brackets): values for test pieces cast integrally or taken from the casting.
 176
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.36 Material properties in MPa for cast aluminum alloys, alloys with particular mechanical pro-
perties, sand castings, permanent mould castings and investment castings, after DIN 1725 T. 2 (1986-02-00).

Material Mate- Casting Rm,N Rp,N crW,zd,N crSch,zd,N crW,b,N 'tW,s,N 'tW,t,N A50 Hard-
~11' notation rial process % ness
~2 HB
no. Condition~
delivered 1
G- 3.2211 Sand castings 150 70 45 35 70 35 50 6 45
AlSilI .01 As-cast condit. (140) (70) (40) (30) (65) (30) (50) (5) (45)
G- 3.221I Sand castings 150 70 45 35 70 35 50 8 45
AlSill .81 annealed (140) (70) (40) (30) (65) (30) (50) (7) (40)
g
GK- 3.221I Perm.mould c. 170 80 50 35 75 40 60 7 45
AlSill .02 As-cast condit. (150) (80) (45) (35) (70) (35) (50) (6) (45)
GK- 3.2211 Perm.mould c. 170 80 50 35 75 40 60 9 45
AlSill .82 Annealed (150) (80) (45) (35) (70) (35) (50) (8) (40)
g
G- 3.2373 Sand castings 230 190 70 50 100 50 80 2 75
AlSi9Mg .61 Wa (220) (180) (65) (45) (100) (50) (75) (2) (75)
wa
GK- 3.2373 Perm.mould c. 250 200 75 50 110 55 85 4 80
AlSi9Mg .62 Wa (240) (190) (70) (50) (105) (55) (80) (3) (80)
wa
G- 3.2371 Sands 230 190 70 50 105 50 80 2 75
AlSi7Mg .61 Wa (230) (190) (70) (50) (105) (50) (80) (2) (75)
wa
GK- 3.2371 Perm.mould c. 250 200 75 50 1I0 55 85 5 80
AlSi7Mg .62 Wa (250) (200) (75) (50) (1I0) (55) (85) (3) (80)
wa
GF- 3.2371 Investm. casts. 260 200 80 55 1I5 60 90 3 80
AlSi7Mg .63 Wa (230) (190) (70) (50) (105) (50) (80) (3) (70)
wa
G- 3.1841 Sand castings 280 180 85 55 125 65 95 5 85
AlCu4Ti .63 Ta (240) (160) (70) (50) (105) (55) (80) (3) (80)
ta
G- 3.1841 Sand castings 300 200 90 60 130 70 100 3 95
AlCu4Ti .61 Wa (250) (180) (75) (50) (110) (55) (85) (2) (90)
wa
GK- 3.1841 Perm.mould c. 320 180 95 65 140 70 105 8 90
AlCu4Ti .64 Ta (260) (170) (80) (55) (1I5) (60) (90) (4) (85)
ta
GK- 3.1841 Perm.mould c. 330 220 100 65 145 75 110 7 95
AlCu4Ti .62 Wa (280) (200) (85) (55) (125) (65) (95) (3) (90)
wa
G- 3.1371 Sand castings 300 220 90 60 130 70 100 5 90
AlCu4TiMg .41 Ka (240) (180) (70) (50) (125) (55) (80) (3) (85)
ka
GK- 3.1371 Perm.mould c. 320 220 95 60 130 70 105 8 95
AlCu4TiMg .42 Ka (280) (200) (85) (50) (125) (65) (95) (5) (90)
ka
GF- 3.1371 Investm. casts. 300 220 90 60 130 70 100 5 90
AlCu4TiMg .45 Ka (270) (180) (80) (55) (120) (60) (90) (3) (85)
ka

~I ka = naturally aged, ta = partially aged, wa = artificially aged.

~2
Upper line: values for test pieces cast separately,
line below (in brackets): values for test pieces cast integrally or taken from the casting.
 177
5.1 Material tables 5 Appendices

Table 5.1.37 Material properties in MPa for for cast aluminum alloys, alloys for particular applications,
sand castings, permanent mould castings and investment castings, after DIN 1725 T. 2 (1986-02-00).

Material Material Casting Rm,N Rp,N crW,zd,N crSch,zd,N crW,b,N 'tW,s,N 'tW,t,N A50 Hard-
DIN notation No. process, % ness
~2 HB
~1 Condition as
delivered~ I
G- 3.3541 Sand castings 140 70 40 30 65 30 50 3 50
AlMg3 .01 as-cast condit. (130) (60) (40) (30) (65) (30) (45) (3) (45)
GK- 3.3541 Penn. mould c. 150 70 45 35 70 35 50 5 50
AlMg3 .02 as-cast condit. (150) (70) (45) (35) (70) (35) (50) (4) (50)
GF- 3.3541 Investment c. 150 90 45 35 70 35 50 3 60
AlMg3 .09 as-cast condit. (140) (80) (40) (30) (65) (30) (50) (3) (55)
G- 3.3241 Sand castings 140 80 40 30 65 30 50 3 50
AlMg3Si .01 as-cast condit. (130) (70) (40) (30) (60) (30) (45) (3) (45)
G- 3.3241 Sand castings 200 120 60 40 90 45 70 2 65
AlMg3Si .61 wa (180) (120) (55) (40) (80) (40) (60) (2) (60)
wa
GK- 3.3241 Penn. mould c. 150 80 45 35 70 35 50 4 50
AlMg3Si .02 as-cast condit. (140) (80) (40) (30) (65) (30) (50) (4) (50)
GK- 3.3241 Penn. mould c. 220 120 65 45 100 50 75 3 65
AlMg3Si .62 wa (220) (120) (65) (45) (100) (50) (75) (3) (65)
wa
GF- 3.3241 Investment c. 200 120 60 40 90 45 70 2 60
AlMg3Si .63 wa (180) (120) (55) (40) (80) (40) (60) (2) (55)
wa
G- 3.3561 Sand castings 160 100 50 35 75 35 55 3 55
AlMg5 .01 as-cast condit. (140) (90) (40) (30) (65) (30) (50) (2) (50)
GK- 3.3561 Penn. mould c. 180 100 55 40 80 40 60 4 60
AlMg5 .02 as-cast condit. (150) (100) (45) (35) (70) (35) (50) (2) (55)
G- 3.3261 Sand castings 160 110 50 35 75 35 55 2 60
AlMg5Si .01 as-cast condit. (140) (l00) (40) (30) (65) (30) (50) (1) (55)
GK- 3.3261 Penn. mould c. 180 110 55 40 80 40 60 2 65
AlMg5Si .02 as-cast condit. (150) (100) (45) (35) (70) (35) (50) (1) (60)
G- 3.2341.0 Sand castings 140 100 40 30 65 30 50 1 55
AlSi5Mg 1 as-cast condit. (130) (90) (40) (30) (60) (30) (45) (0,5) (55)
GK- 3.2341 Penn. mould c. 160 120 50 35 75 35 55 1,5 60
AlSi5Mg .02 as-cast condit. (140) (100) (40) (30) (65) (30) (50) (I) (60)
GK- 3.2341 Penn. mould c. 260 240 80 55 115 60 90 I 90
AlSi5Mg .62 wa (190) (180) (55) (40) (85) (45) (65) (0,5) (90)
wa
~1 wa = artificially aged
~2
Upper line: values for test pieces cast separately,
line below (in brackets): values for test pieces cast integrally or taken from the casting.

Table 5.1.38 Material properties in MPa for cast aluminum alloys,

high pressure casting alloys after DIN 1725 T. 2 (1986-02-00).

Material Material Casting Rm,N Rp,N crW,zd,N crSch,zd,N crW,b,N 'tW,s,N 'tW,t,N A50 Hard-
DIN nataion No. process, % ness
Condition as HB
delivered
GO- 3.2163 High press. c 240 140 70 50 105 55 80 0,5 80
AlSi9Cu3 2) .05 as-cast
condition
GO- 3.2585 High press. c 220 140 65 45 100 50 75 1 60
AlSi12 .05 as-cast
condition
GO- 3.2982 High press. c 220 140 65 45 100 50 75 I 60
AlSiI2(Cu) .05 as-cast
condition
GO- 3.2381 High press. c 220 140 65 45 100 50 75 1 70
AlSilOMg .05 as-cast
condition
GO- 3.3292 High press. c 200 140 60 45 90 45 70 I 70
AlMg9 .05 as-cast
condition
 178
5.2 Stress concentration factors 5 Appendices

5.2 Stress concentration factors 5.2.1.1 Round bars with groove or shoulder fillet
The stress concentration factors for round bars with a
lR52 EN.dog
groove or shoulder fillet in tension, in bending and in
Content Page torsion are to be computed after Petersen from the
equation below, or are to be taken from the Figures
5.2.0 General 178
5.2.1 to 5.2.6, r> 0, diD < 1:
5.2.1 Round bars (5.2.2)
5.2.1.0 General
5.2.1.1 Round bars with groove or shoulder fillet K, = 1 + - - ; = = = = = = = = = = =

A'~+2B'~{1+2·~r ~r
5.2.1.2 Round bars with multiple grooves 180 d
5.2.1.3 Round bars with relief groove +C{ D
5.2.1.4 Round bars with collar (narrow shoulder)
A,B,C,z Constants, Table 5.2.1,
5.2.2 Flat bars 181 r, t, d, D See Figure 5.2.1 to 5.2.6.
5.2.2.0 General
5.2.2.1 Flat bars with notches or shoulder
fillets on both sides
5.2.2.2 Flat bars with notch on one side
.. , , , z for round bars
Table 5 2 1 Constants ABC
Groove Shoulder fillet
5.2.2.3 Flat bars with multiple notches 182
5.2.2.4 Flat bars with transverse hole 183 ten- ben- tor- ten- ben- tor-
5.2.2.5 Flat bars with notches on both sides 184 sion ding sion sion ding sion
or with transverse hole, bending in plane A 0,22 0,2 0,7 0,62 0,62 3,4
5.2.2.6 Flat bars with narrow shoulder 185 B 1,37 2,75 10,3 3,5 5,8 19
C - - - - 0,2 1
z - - - - 3 2
5.2.0 General
Stress concentration factors for round bars and for flat
bars are to be determined from the following equations
and figures. Stress concentration factors are used
together with Kj-K, ratios for computing fatigue notch
factors, Chapter 2.3.2.1.
Stress concentration factors are applicable in
combination with nominal stresses *1.
Stress concentration factors may be determined by the.
user if he has more detailed knowledge at his disposal.

5.2.1 Round bars

5.2.1.0 General
Stress concentration factors are given for round bars in
tension (load F), in bending (bending moment M, ) and 1~~~~
0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 ,
in torsion (torsion moment M t ) *2. dID
The related nominal stresses are Figure 5.2.1 Stress concentration factors for round bars
Szd = 4 F I nd 2 , (5.2.1) with groove in tension, r > 0, diD < 1.
Sb = 32 Mbl nd 3 , 1
Kt,zd = 1 +---;=========== (5.2.3)
Tt = 16 Mtl nd 3 . 2
r r r
022·-+274·-· ( 1+2·-)
The diameter d is shown in the respective figures. , t ' d d

1 Sometimes the nominal stress may be defined in a different way, for

example see Figure 5.2.20.

2 In the following tension or compression or tension-compression are

mentioned as tension throughout.
Stress concentration factors for shear are not available. Therefore no
formula for the nominal shear stress is contained in Eq. (5.2.1)
 179
5.2 Stress concentration factors 5 Appendices

rl t

J'-n-f-1'-¥iffl'rHLH O.25
0.2 --
F
'>,,+--+--¥->L-,H 0.07

-+---¥---,+-,oY-Hi-i o,09
0.06

0.06

0.1
-l-~+-¥-.'--lh14tj-...,hf-l..lrl°·3

-l-,.y+~H¥-'<'1L+-+-It-I-+-A-J°·4 -t--t-r-h~,.f-;,L71Ifirt--TH 0.15

0.5 0.2
h"'-l7"-7f-r-,>"17'n-f--7'f--rtiO,25
0.3
h"71,.7'J;..<f----7'h47oL-.N----HI ¥..".LIi7'S~~"1--7"f-7£.:;f'Y-tiO.4
o.s
~lf-t--7"<-i7-S-~~~----H'-M ~,5 -r"..,>-S1~-+:""'::"'''''''''7'''!>'''-7''f:r-t-i
2.5 I
is>f3....-;7'''b..-s-f'O--f,,L-h7L+i5 b....g~;,...f;;;....o::::~rt---7""':;ti 1.5
~,5
-±::::"'M'---::p...-c=::~n;"::"-¥-A-110 -i'7-::$1;:"=::=-+=""...f"::-"-:j;;.;$;:;.<f-;;rti 5

I~~~ ~~~~~t]10
0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 I 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.6 0.9 1
diD diD

Figure 5.2.2 Stress concentration factors for round bars Figure 5.2.4 Stress concentration factors for round bars
with groove in bending, r> 0, d / D < 1. with shoulder fillet in tension, r > 0, diD < 1.
1 1
'~,zd == 1 +--,=========
Kt,b== 1 +r========== (5.2.4) 1< (5.2.6)
2 2
o,20· -rt + 5' 5 .-.
r
d (
1+ 2 . -
r
d)
r r
062·-+ 7·-· ( 1+2·-)
, t d
r
d

t
0,06
GMt 0.05
'f-l'-H'HO,07
MtC 0,06 0,08
0,07 -t--+--f--HCf11-iO,09
Kt,t 0.08
0.09
0,1
t--t--t--H'--loLf--MHIH
0.1

2 ~2:t,.....::::~~~+?<::+~1
1.5
2

1 ~;;~~i~t~~~~,5
1~ 10
0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.6 0.9 1 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
diD diD

Figure 5.2.3 Stress concentration factors for round bars Figure 5.2.5 Stress concentration factors for round bars
with groove in torsion, r > 0, d / D < 1. with shoulder fillet in bending, r > 0, diD < 1.
1 (5.2.7)
1<
'~,t == 1 +r========= (5.2.5)
2
o,70· -rt + 20' 6 .-.
r
d (
r
1+ 2· - )
d
~==l+-;=============
,b 062. E+1l6'.!.'(1+2 . .!.)2
, t ' d d
+02.(E)3
' t
d
D
 180
5.2 Stress concentration factors 5 Appendices

FormD
The stress concentration factors for round bars with
relief groove, type D, Kt,F , Figure 5.2.8, are to be
GMt computed by superposition of the stress concentration
MtC factors for round bars with groove and with shoulder
r
fillet *4:
Kt,t
4
K, F = (KtU - K, A.>' ~Dl-d
- - + K,'A, (5.2.9)
.04
, , , D-d
.05
.06 Kt,U Stress concentration factor of the round bar
3 .07
.08 with groove, Figure 5.2.1 to 5.2.3.

2
.~;
,2
Kt,A Stress concentration factor of the round bar
with shoulder fillet, Figure 5.2.4 to 5.2.6.
4°,3
l' 0.5 D 1 Smaller diameter,
1,5
2.5 d Reduced diameter,
1 ° D Larger diameter.
0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
dID
5.2.8
Figure 5.2.6 Stress concentration factors for round bars
with shoulder fillet in torsion, r > 0, d / D < 1. Figure 5.2.8 Round
(5.2.8) bar with relief
groove, type D.
K, = 1 +-,============
.t 3.4f+38Hl+2~r +l.O.(f)' d
D
5.2.1.5 Round bars with collar (narrow shoulder)
The stress concentration factors for the round bars with
bolt head in tension, Figure 5.2.9, are approximately the
same as for the flat bars with shoulder head, Figure
5.2.26 (d = b, D= B).
5.2.1.2 Round bars with multiple grooves
Stress concentration factors for round bars with multiple
grooves in tension, in bending and in torsion are to be
determined as for flat bars with multiple notches, Figure 5.2.9 Round bar
Chapter 5.2.2.3. . with "bolt head".

5.2.1.3 Round bars with relief groove The stress concentration factors for the round bars with
collar, Figure 5.2.10, in tension, in bending and in
FormB torsion, ~,zd,L,' ~,b,L,' ~,t,L' are to be computed from
Stress concentration factors for round bars with relief Eq. (5.2.10):
groove, type B, Figure 5.2.7, are to be determined as for
the round bars with shoulder fillet with the diameters ~L = 1 + (K, - 1)' Kt,b,LlD -1 , (5.2.10)
, K t ,b,Ll D= 2 -1
d and D, Figure 5.2.4 to 5.2.6, *3. The fatigue strength
K, L Stress concentration factor of a collar with
of type B is lower than that of type D.
, values L / D and d / D according to type
of stress,
K, Stress concentration factor of the shoulder
fillet with values d / D according to type of
Figure 5.2.7 Round stress, Figure 5.2.4, 5.2.5 or 5.2.6.
bars with relief groove,
type B.

3 11 is assumed that the additional small shoulder does not influence the 4 Different from type B it is accepted, that the additional small shoulder
stress concentration factor considerably as fl / r ~ 5 . does influence the stress concentration factor considerably as f3 / r ~ 2 .
 181
5.2 Stress concentration factors 5 Appendices

K Stress concentration factor in bending for the

"'1,b,UD
actual value LID from Figure 5.2.24 (D = B,
d = b), referring to the diagram providing the
0,2
closest approximation ofB lb.
~b,UD=2 Stress concentration factor in bending for the -tJ--r--:o11 0,25
value LID = LIB from Figure 5.2.24 (D = B, 0,3
jL.,t44W~-r--~717''11
d = b), referring to the diagram as before. 0,4
4 IhW~-r-l7-n"i;i""t1 0,5

1,5
Figure 5.2.10 \L.,...:::j,.4-7Fr-t--1:r-::PA1t,5
Round bar with
2b"'~-+--;7h-f:7:?1""---:t1S
collar.
10
!---=~,...-1$~~:P""'-:Y'11

1 .
0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0
biB
5.2.2 Flat bars
Figure 5.2.11 Stress concentration factors for flat bars
5.2.2.0 General with notches on both sides in tension, r> 0, biB < 1 .
Stress concentration factors are given for flat bars in
tension (load F) and in bending (bending moment M, ) ~zd = 1 + r = = = = = = = = = (5.2.13)
'5
2
o,22· -rt + 17' .-.
r
b (
r
1+ 2 . - )
b
The related nominal stresses are normally to be
computed according to the following equations:
Szd = F I (s . b), (5.2.11)
Sb = 6 Mb I (s . b2 ) .

MJ t--~ Bt'-S;),.~. .. ,
Otherwise the equations to compute the nominal stresses
r
are presented with the diagrams in question.
"""'"""""71rTTlrxr--m/ t =
The dimensions sand b are shown in the figures. 0,2
Thickness s 5 ' r:k' 0;25
1---+7''-1;;:)'
Kt b 0,3
5.2.2.1 Flat bars with notches or shoulder fillets on t-7''-hH'-r*'''''rt--f-.Jf+.A-I
both sides
The stress concentration factors for flat bars with
notches or shoulder fillets on both sides in tension and 3~,.y"----V"7lf7';>'t7,,*;t11
in bending are to be computed from the equations 1,5
below, or read from the Figures 5.2.11 to 5.2.14, r> 0, f-:;;.f-:;>""V"74rr:7"f--t"7'H2
2,5
diD < 1, thickness s: 2 1"'75""''-:rl7'''T-""7I''-'7'j7"--t1 5

1
K, = 1 + - - - ; = = = = = = = =
2
(5.2.12)
1
~~~~JI0 .... .
r r r 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0
A·-+2B·-· 1+2·-
t b ( b) 6..2.12 bIB

A,B Constants, Table 5.2.2, Figure 5.2.12 Stress concentration factors for flat bars
r, t, b, B See Figures 5.2.11 to 5.2.14. with notches on both sides in bending, r > 0, biB < 1.
1
~b = 1 + r = = = = = = = = = (5.2.14)
2
Table 5.2.2 Constants A and B for flat bars r r r
020·-+42·-· ( 1+2·-)
Notch on both sides Shoulder fillet , t ' b b

Tension Bending Tension Bending

A 0,22 0,2 0,5 0,5
B 0,85 2,1 2,5 6
5 In the following tension or compression or tension-compression are
mentioned as tension throughout. .
 182
5.2 Stress concentration factors 5 Appendices

5.2.2.2 Flat bar with notch on one side

-
F ~ +--+.,
F . B-·- b __
r/t=
-r-r-rr-,.,....,...".,
0,08
Stress concentration factors for flat bars with a notch on
one side in bending according to Figure 5.2.15.
0.09
Thickness s r 0 1
5 ' ..
..... 3,8 _.-
&~b 3,6
,- .::rrnnTMb(
~r/b =0,04
r- ) r
!
I
i
3,4
.. Thickne ss s
3,2
3,0 . 0,08
.;...-t-1 I
2,8
2,6 I
0,1~
2,4
I .
2,2
0,2
2,0
l~~~~Jj 1,&
, : I
0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0 0,4
5.2.H bIB 1,6 I
it' 0,6
1,4 ,
I I
1,2 i
Figure 5.2.13 Stress concentration factors for flat bars 1,0 I-
with shoulder fillet in tension, r > 0, b / B < 1. 1,01,21,41,61,& 2,02,2 2,42,62,M 3,0
. . - "BIb 5:2.15
1
~ zd == 1 +---;========= (5.2.15)
2 Figure 5.2.15 Stress concentration factors for flat bars
r r r
05·-+5·_· 1+2·-
, t b b ( J with a notch on one side in bending, after Sors.

5.2.2.3 Flat bars with multiple notches

~ r/t== Stress concentration factors for flat bars with multiple
MJ ~ )Mb-r--r---rTTTTl notches in tension according to Figure 5.2.16.
For a large number of notches arranged in a row on one
Thickness s 5 1-+--1-,.-+---,t--t
side of a flat bar the effective depth t' of an equivalent
Kt,b single notch is to be computed with a release factor y
from Figure 5.2.17:
t' == y' t . (5.2.17)
Figure 5.2.17 approximately applies for both tension
and bending. With the effective depth t' of a single
notch the stress concentration factors are to be
determined from Figure 5.2.11 and 5.2.12.

I.~~
0,4 0,5 0,6 0.7 0,8 0,9 I,D
6.2.14 . ) IB

Figure 5.2.14 Stress concentration factors for flat bars

with shoulder fillet in bending, r> 0, b / B < 1.
1
(5.2.16)
2
r r r
05·-+12·-· 1+2·-
, t b b ( J
 183
5.2 Stress concentration factors 5 Appendices

5.2.2.4 Flat bars with transverse hole

Stress concentration factors for flat bars with a circular
5.2.16

--
or slotted transverse center hole for different types of
F F
stress are given in Figure 5.2.18 to 5.2.20.

-- 1trt
3,8
J4,ro 3,6 F I F
+--

--
D- 21 --
F

B I r = 18, Thickness s
--
F 3,4
3,2
3,0
-'2r
N- bl

Thickness s
3,2 r t I I 2,8
01 notch m.s\\l) 2,6
I'
tl r-=
3,0 1.(\~ ...;.+- p
4
\c\\es
2.8 c::- 1 nO c\\" 2,4
ol.~
. 5 (\o\c\\oS~ 2,2 I- 1..- r:::l ~
2,6 r-- hH0'1-n~
r- ec limit case (b)
2,4 2,0 0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7
1,,2 5.2.18 rib

2,° 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
e/r
Figure 5.2.18 Stress concentration factors for flat bars
with a circular or slotted transverse center hole in
Figure 5.2.16 Stress concentration factors for flat bars
tension, after Peterson (Ref. Frocht and Leven),
with multiple notches in tension. The stress
photoelastic study. In addition circular hole after
concentration factor is valid for the first (or last) notch
Peterson (Ref. Howland), elastic analysis. hole: t / r = 1;
in the row, after Peterson (Ref. Durelli, Lake and
limit value for b / r - 0: Kt,z = 2.
Phillips), photoelastic study.
F
Nominal stress: Szd (5.2.19)
Nominal stress: S d F (5.2.18) s.(B-2t) .
z s.(B-r)

b/2
1,0 I I I
Y
1111'"''
0,8
1/
V
J...-t
r TT1 1
I I I I I I
MJ 2t- .
tb
ll\rJ\lrw
0,6
1./ Thickness s C 2r
0,4

0,2 II ,
o 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
bIt 1,4 ;Y' J 'f
1,2 = i.SO'b·~FG·~'S.
1/ I ""''Kt.b,F '"t""';:tD~.±:.~.±j
Figure 5.2.17 Release factor y for an infinite number of H:::.+-.i-+-,.f4I--,f....:,:.=, l~~:::" 1 (1'= 30')f-"
1.O~:!7"-P:-~~4~~~~""":'~..J
notches in a row, after Peterson (Ref. Neuber), elastic o 0.1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 06 0,7 0& 09 1,0
analysis. rIb

Figure 5.2.19 stress concentration factors for flat bars

with a circular or slotted transverse center hole in
bending, after Peterson (Ref. Procht and Leven),
photoelastic study. Hole: t / r = 1; limit value for
b / r - 0: Kt,z = 2.
Nominal stress (at reference point G):
Mb
Sb G =--------.::::----- (5.2.20)
, (1-(2t1B)3).s.B 2/6
 184
5.2 Stress concentration factors 5 Appendices

--F B
b 0
F

I-
-I-,K.t',i
-I- zd ee ==~!J
SZd,,,,,

81- !"-B/b== 1 II
3,0 S
2 ' F,
tr
~~ g'~
Thickness s Kt,zd 3, 6 2,8 I I

3, 4 1'\
2,6 I.....
3,2 'V/
" 2,4 '" r-,
2r I s ==
0
I"-- I"--r-

I,..,,:~'-
3, ..... .......
°
2, 8
2,2
2,0
r-,
0,25
~
r-

2, 61-
I-
tts K.t,zd,C -- Szd,A-
f",
ac
c 1,8
r-, r-... 0,5
I"C'" ....... 1
2,4 r-,
i'-... 1,6 1,5
2, "I
" 1,4
1'-.,2
oc--
5.2.20
°
2, 0 01
, 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5
rib
1,2 r-

1'°0 0,] 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7

Figure 5.2.20 Stress concentration factors for flat bars 2r 18
with excentric hole in tension, after Peterson (Ref.:
Sjoestroem), elastic analysis. Figure 5.2.22 Stress concentration factors for flat bars
Any B / b ; transverse hole: B / b = I. with transverse hole in bending in plane, after Peterson,
photoelastic study; strain measurements, 2r / s = 0 after
Nominal stresses (away from or at the notched section): Peterson (Ref.: Howland), elastic analysis.
F
(5.2.21) . 6M b
s·(B+b) ,
Nominal stress: Sb - . (5.2.22)
~I-(r/bf (B-2r).s2

K'b~:: ~Jb
m~ ( s-···
2,4 1\
5.2.2.5 Flat bars with notches on both sides or with
2,2 ._ ....
transverse hole, bending in plane I.....
2,0
Stress concentration factors for flat bars with notches on 1,8 0
both sides or with transverse hole in bending in plane
1,6
are given in Figure 5.2.21 to 5.2.23.
1,4
1,2

3,0 B b ]'°0 2 3 4 5 6 7
2rls
2,8
=~ ~: --
-~

2,6 s Figure 5.2.23 Stress concentration factors for broad flat

2,4
2,2
1\
1\'
MJ I
1 1 I
I
bars with transverse hole in bending in plane, after
Peterson (Ref.: Goodier and Reissner), elastic analysis,
2,0 I,,,·
,'\I
I,~
bending moment per unit of length m, in N.
1,8
I' ~~$' 15'!~ Bib
oc
== Nominal stress: Sb = 6 mb/ s2 . (5.2.23)
1,6 " '1.'/"0
0 ....
I'Sro-
::;;: 2.00'
1,4 1-1"--1- ,o~ to-
...... 1,50
1,2
1'°0 0,04 0,08 0,12
rib

Figure 5.2.21 Stress concentration factors for flat bars

with notches on both sides in bending in plane, after
Peterson (Ref.: Goodier, G. H. Lee and Neuber), elastic
analysis, (B - b) » s , r> O.
 185
5.2 Stress concentration factors 5 Appendices

5.2.2.6 Flat bars with narrow shoulder

Stress concentration factors for flat bars with narrow
shoulder in bending after Figure 5.2.24.

Figure 5.2.24 stress concentration factors for flat bars

with narrow shoulder in bending, after Peterson .5.2.24 Thickness s
(Ref.: Leven and Hartman), photoelastic study.
B / b = 1,25; 2 and 3.

Kt,b rib == Kt,b rIb == rIb ==

Kt,b
3,0 00\ 3,0 OO~ 00~5-

2,8
2,6
Bib == 1,25
,
...

.......
--
'
1-:::f-O,015
......
l - 0,025
0,02=
I

2,8
2,6
Bib == 2,...
Ii
I
././
./
'''-C::: p

_f-
.
_f- 025
'fT
° "
O,03~
,
3,0
2,8
2,6
B/b=3
'I V »:
/ /'
vf"'"
--':"[(f
-bd4
,..-
,

2,4
II
I /

1 /
/

fI ' /
-
v-:
..,
..... ".
I - -O,~
I .=
f-O,O~_
2,4 111//
I,
II I /

rlI
fl
»:
,....... -
--
l- -d,04-
0,05
2,4
r/

il
1/
......-
./ _- .....
f-- r-
1'1
0,05'
. . . 9,°16
2,2 II.
--
'" -
..... I
0,05~
I 2,2
'I V 0,06 2,2 /
9,0,g

- -
II .- '/ . / l - I-"
2,0

-
2,0 (/ V 0,06 '/ 6,08- 2,0
1,8 f/ v -0,08 1,8
".. 0,1= 1,8
/'
-P'\=
1,6
1.,..00 foo-
v..... l- ,.
0,1-
0,15~ 1,6 " V~I--
1/ I...... I
0,15
I

1,6 I 1 v
I I
o 15
w.. 62- 02=
02= ~I- .-
',-
05~
" I

05~
1,4 V 1,4 I....... 1,4
05~ ;;..--
1,2
V
0'8~ 1,2
~
O'g:.M=
" -1,0=
1,2 o's:M.=
, -1,0-
'10=
I ' 1,00 1,°
1,00 0
1,0 LIB 2,0 1,0 LIB 2,0 1,0 LIB 2,0

Stress concentration factors for flat bars with shoulder

Stress concentration factors for flat bars with narrow head and concentrated compression loads at the
shoulder in tension may be approximately computed specified positions according to Figure 5.2.25.
from Eq. (5.2.24):

T< = 1+ (T< _ I)' Kt,b,LlB -I (5.2.24)

'~,zd,L ~"t,zd K _ -1'
t,b,LlB-2 F/2
Kt,zd

I
T<
'~,zd,L
stress concentration factor for the "narrow"
6
shoulder and values L / Band B / b,
---b- r
T<
'~,zd
Stress concentration factor for the "broad" \
5 Thickness s
shoulder in tension and values b / B after \ 3b
Figure 5.2.13,
4
r-, I
T<
'~,b,UB
Stress concentration factor for the "narrow" r-, ~ 3b bis 5b
shoulder and values L / B in bending after ~ h£: .....
Figure 5.2.24 (diagram that is closest to the 3
0,05
0,075
i!J.?
value BIb in question).
2 0,1 5.2.~5
K, b UB=2 stress concentration factor in bending for
,, L / B = 2 after Figure 5.2.24 (Diagram as rl b=
before) II "'(

o 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1,0 (b - r)

Figure 5.2.25 Stress concentration factors for flat bar

with shoulder and concentrated compression loads at the
specified positions, after Peterson (Ref.: Hetenyi),
photoelastic study.
 186
5.2 Stress concentration factors 5 Appendices

Stress concentration factors for flat bars with shoulder

head and distributed compression loads at the specified
line positions after Figure 5.2.26.

Figure 5.2.26 Stress concentration factors for flat bars

with shoulder head and distributed compression loads at
the specified line positions, after Peterson (Ref.: 5.2.26
Hetenyi), photoelastic study. r / b = 0,05; 0,075; 0,1 and Thickness s
0,2.

Kt,Zd
11
I-~ Ib = 0,100' I ./
Kt,zd
13
10 I .> " ./

I ~~' I I
\'Q~ "r., A "" 9 ~\)~ "V
12 ~ ~'''1, II V I'- I-- .' \"~
1-» "" I),,>" ./ . /
./

11 ./
()~I) "" ""'" ,
8 1/ V
......
\)01) ./ ./
1/ / VI),b? v V ...... \)§Y ./
/ ,/ 1/ ........11) L..--~ 7 "...... 1\).....,:'0;.. ..,::: 7"
10
\)r-~~-;; ".".
9
/
,/ 1/
, "" V
0,
O~i-"""
"..-
_ 6 -
' - .-
".. v"..
-
".. V
V ::;
\),~() ~ :;;.
8
I.....
1/
_.......
/'
_I'
- 1/ o~O ~
~'f,5l::::::1-~ 5
~~- o~~::::::-I-- \,1.) .
L..-- ~ :-' ~ .....
7
1/ _fo- I- 0,9°095
- 4 ...... -- \.5 -'

6
~
-I-
';;;-
_~ fo- \ ,0F==-
1,2=-
3
"-
- 3,0 ~

5
I I
I r-::~
-- I-
\,51-
I·
2

I I
4 I- r I b = 0,050 -~- 2,0 2,5 3,0
I !
I I I I I r BIb
3
1,5 2,0 2,5 3,0
Bib
Kt,zd
Kt,zd
10
13 I I rl/~~oI2Jo
,
rib =0,075 9 I
1/

~
12 V j
,/ 8
1/
11
V / ~\/~
10
~?~ V V 7 bl) ~
I),
\'Q"? r.," ~ v,/ 6 /' ./ I)b'>
~/ I). ..... ,/ ./ "\)~\)'"
9
v ~./ 5 /./ ./ 'b0
8 ./ ~;;.-'i:(~",,~ /'./V ./~\)' 0
S__~~
I' __ :-
"" 11) I)~'> ~ 4 /-
c- :-::;"':~~\i'
7 1/
"" "'~~"" e~;...:::::'--

6
./'
fo- ..... -
". _, '" v
/'

-
I)'b\)~~
",v """v' 9\) 9~
3 -.. . ,; ; ~:'S,
3,0

4
r---.

I'I"--.
.....
- - - - .....

--
-1)'7~
".. \.0. k::;;:-
\;. -
1--\,5",,-
13,0 -
2

2,0
I J
I I
2,5
Bib
I
I
3,0

3 I I
1,5 2,0 2,5 3,0
Bib
 187
5.3 Fatigue notch factors 5 Appendices

5.3 Fatigue notch factors 1R53 EN.dog

5.3.1 Fatigue notch factors derived from
stress concentration factors
Content Page For structural details for which stress concentration
factors are given in Chapter 5.2 - for example round
5.3.0 General 187 bars or flat bars - the fatigue notch factors, Kf,zd(d) , ...,
5.3.1 Fatigue notch factors derived from are to be computed from the stress concentration factors,
stress concentration factors Kt,zd , ..., using the Kt-Kf ratios, ncr(r), according to
Chapter 2.3.2.1.
5.3.2 Fatigue notch factors for bars
with cone- or wedge-shaped portion
or with longitudinal hole Nominal stresses
5.3.2.0 General
5.3.2.1 Round bars with cone-shaped portion The nominal stresses for tension, for bending and for
5.3.2.2 Flat bars with wedge-shaped portion 189 torsion are the same as for the stress concentration
5.3.2.3 Round bars with longitudinal hole factors, Chapter 5.2, Eq. (5.2.1) for round bars or Eq.
(5.2.11) for flat bars *2.
5.3.3 Experimentally determined fatigue notch
factors
5.3.3.0 General
5.3.3. 1 Round bars with groove for a snap ring 190
5.3.2 Fatigue notch factors for bars with
5.3.3.2 Round bars with V-groove cone- or wedge-shaped portion or with
5.3.3.3 Round bars with tranverse hole 191 longitudinal hole
5.3.3.4 Shafts with keyway
5.3.3.5 Shafts with press-fitted members
5.3.3.6 Shafts with splines 193 5.3.2.0 General
For round bars and for flat bars with cone- or wedge-
5.3.4 Fatigue notch factors for components from
cast iron materials and from aluminum alloys shaped portion or with longitudinal hole the fatigue
notch factors are to be determined as follows.
5.3.5 Fatigue notch factors determined by the 194
user
5.3.2.1 Round bars with cone-shaped portion
For round bars with cone-shaped portion, Figure 5.3.1,
the fatigue notch factors for tension, for bending and for
5.3.0 General torsion are to be computed in two steps:
The fatigue notch factors are applicable to round bars 1. Step: Computing the fatigue notch factor for the
and to flat bars. Concerning their determination the round bar with shoulder fillet, Kf,zd , ..., from the stress
following cases are to be distinguished: concentration factor, Kt,zd , ..., and the Ki-K, ratio,
- Round bars and flat bars, for which stress llcr(r), ..., according to Chapter 2.3.2.1:
concentration factors are given in Chapter 5.2,
- Round bars and flat bars with cone-shaped or wedge- Kf,zd = Kt,zd / ncr(r), ... , (5.3.1)
shaped portion as well as round bars with a 2. Step: Determining the fatigue notch factor for the
longitudinal hole, Chapter 5.3.2, round bar with cone-shaped portion, Kf,zd,Ol , ..., from
- Round bars for which experimentally determined that of the round bar with shoulder fillet, Kf,zd , ...,
fatigue notch factors are available, Chapter 5.3.3, modified according to the slope angle co, Figure 5.3.2.
- Components from cast iron materials and from
aluminum alloys, Chapter 5.3.4,
Components with fatigue notch factors determined
by the user, Chapter 5.3.5.
Fatigue notch factors are applicable in combination with
nominal stresses *1.

Figure 5.3.1 Round bar with cone-shaped portion.

Slope angle ro and length I of slope.
1 The nominal stress may be defined in a different way, see Eq. (5.3.2)
for round bars, Eq. (5.3.5) for round bars with a longitudinal hole or Eq.
(5.3.15) for round bars with tranverse hole.
 188
5.3 Fatigue notch factors 5 Appendices

4,0 Nominal stresses

Kr,c.o I Cll = 90" 50'

),<\'
3,8 45'
~
The nominal stresses for tension (load F), for bending
3,6 55' 40' (bending moment M, ) and for torsion (torsion moment
_.- - . r ~ r 35'
3,4 ..... Mt M t ) are '2
3,2 30'
1 Mb fit'
4 F I 1td2 , (5.3.2)
3,0 25'
m.,----:: 32 Mbl 1td3 ,
2,8 :-Ii
20' 16 Mtl 1td3 .
2,6
2,4 I
The diameter d is shown in the respective figures.
2,2 15'
I

2,0
1,8 , 10' Example
I
1,6 r For a round bar with cone-shaped portion, Figure 5.3.1,
1,4 5' the fatigue notch factor is to be determined for bending.
J,2 Dimensions d = 42 mm, D = 50 mm, t = (D - d) I 2 = 4
1,0 0' mm, r = 1 mm, co = 15 0, 1 = 14,9 mm, Rm = 583 MPa.
1,0 1,2 1,4 1,6 1,8 2,0 2,2 2,42,6 2,8 3,03,2 3,4 3,63,84,0

Kr 1. Step: Computation of the fatigue notch factor for the

round bar with shoulder fillet:
Figure 5.3.2 Influence of the slope angle co on the
fatigue notch factor of a round bar with cone-shaped Kt,b = 2,47, Figure 5.2.5
portion. G cr (r) = 2,53 mrrr", Tab. 2.3.3
Kt- Fatigue notch factor of the bar with shoulder, llcr(r) = 1,24, Eq. (2.3.15)
to Slope angle, G cr (d) = 2 I d = 0,048 mnr", Eq. (2.3.17)
Kr,w Fatigue notch factor of the bar with cone-shaped portion.
ncr(d) = 1,03, Eq. (2.3.13)
The initial diagram - after Peterson (Ref: Leven and Frocht), Kf,b = Kt,b I (llcr(r) . llcr(d» Eq. (2.3.10)
photoelastic study - applies to the stress concentration factor for bending
of flat bars with a notch on one-side. It is applied here as an = 2,47 I (1,24 . 1,03) = 1,9.
approximation for the fatigue notch factor of round and flat bars with
different shape of the notch and for all types of stress. 2. Step: Determining the fatigue notch factor for the
round bar with cone-shaped portion from the value
Kf,b = 1,9 and co = 15°:

Kf, b,e = 1,6. Figure 5.3.2

Special case
Note: The stress concentration factor for the round bar
For round bars with shoulder fillet and with two with cone-shaped portion that follows from Kt,b = 2,47
different notch radii ro ;::: t and r ;::: t I 4, Figure 5.3.3 and co = 15 0,
(top), the fatigue notch factors are the same as for
round bars with cone-shaped portion where r = 2 t and Kt,b,w = 1,82, Figure 5.3.2
co = 30 0, Figure 5.3.3 (bottom). must not be applied because of the following inequality,
Figure 5.3.4:
Kf,b,w;t: Kt,b,w I ( llcr(r)' llcr(d) ). (5.3.3)
1,6;t: 1,82 I (1,24' 1,03) = 1,4.

Kt,b o------~Kt,b,C'O
I
X'
I
Figure 5.3.3 Round bar with Cll = 90' ICll
I
shoulder fillet, special case I
with two notch radii (top) I
and equivalent round bar with Kr,b ' « - - - - - - - ) ' Kr,b,c.o
cone-shaped portion (bottom).
Figure 5.3.4 Relationship between Kt,b , Kf,b , Kt,b,w and
Kf,b,w'

2 In the following tension or compression or tension-compression are

mentioned as tension throughout.
Stress concentration factors for shear are not available. Therefore no
formula for the nominal shear stress is contained in Eq. (5.2.1) or (5.3.2).

5.3 Fatigue notch factors
5.3.2.2 Flat bars with wedge-shaped portion
For flat bars with wedge-shaped portion, Figure 5.3.5,
the fatigue notch factors for tension-compression and for
bending are to be determined analytically as for the
round bar with cone-shaped portion, Chapter 5.3.2.1.
5.3.$
Figure 5.3.5 Flat bar with wedge-shaped portion.
Slope angle ro , length of slope I. , plate thickness s .
Nominal stress
The nominal stresses for tension (load F) and for
bending (bending moment M, ) are to be computed
according to Eq. (5.5.4): *2:
Szd = F / (s .. b),
Sb =6Mb/(S. ·b2 ).
Thickness s and width b are shown in Figure 5.3.5.
5.3.2.3 Round bars with longitudinal hole
Longitudinal holes, Figure 5.3.6, are possible for round
bars with groove, with shoulder fillet or with cone-
shaped portion.
~.
m_--i_~
--- d - ~~\
__--±_-t
. ____________
D--- ~--
Mt
Figure 5.3.6 Round bar with longitudinal hole.
Fatigue notch factors of round bars with longitudinal
hole in tension or in bending are not available, nor a
reliable way of computation based on fatigue notch
factors of round bars without longitudinal hole.
In the case of torsion, however, fatigue notch factors of
a round bar with a longitudinal hole may approximately
be derived from the fatigue notch factors of the round
bar without a longitudinal hole in combination with the
nominal stress for the round bar with longitudinal hole.
189
5 Appendices
Nominal stress
The nominal stress for torsion (torsion moment M, ) is
to be calculated according to Eq. (5.3.5):
T - 16M t (5.3.5)
t- 3 4 4
x-d '(l-d L /d )
The diameters d and d L are shown in Figure 5.3.6.
5.3.3 Experimentally determined fatigue
notch factors
5.3.3.0 General
The following experimentally determined fatigue notch
factors for tension, for bending and for torsion apply to
round bars of rolled steel with tensile strength values
from Rm = 400 to 1250 MFa *2.
Concerning the consideration of the surface roughness
see Chapter 2.3.3, Eq. (2.3.27).
Distinctive values of the radius and of the diameter
and conversion of the fatigue notch factor
(5.5.4) Normally an experimentally determined fatigue notch
factor Kf(dp) refers to a notched test bar (with radius I'p,
diameter dp ) and not to the component in question
(with radius r, diameter d).
Therefore the experimentally determined fatigue notch
factor is to be converted according to Chapter 2.3.2.2,
Eq. (2.3.18) in order to apply to the different radius r
and diameter d of the component in question *3. For
that the Ki-K, ratios ncr(rp), ncr(r), ncr(d) and nirp),
n1;(r), n1;(d) for the distinctive values rp , rand d have to
be known.
Because of the similarity of bar and component there is
r / rp = d / dp, (5.3.6)
r, rp Notch radii ofthe component and of the test bar,
d, dp Diameters of the component and of the test bar.
From three known values the missing fourth value may
be computed. In the following the distinctive values rp
and dp are indicated if they may not be obvious.
Example
For a shaft with keyway - component diameter
d = 100 mm - the fatigue notch factor for torsion is to be
determined The experimentally determined fatigue
notch factor Kf,t<dp ) of a keyway, detail A or B, and
with tensile strength Rm , may be read from Figure
5.3.10.
3 For consideration of the size effect and for particulars of the method of
calculation see footnote 12 on page 53.
 190
5.3 Fatigue notch factors 5 Appendices

The distinctive values for Figure 5.3.10 are rp = 0,18

mm, dp = 15 mm. With d = 100 mm the radius r is, Eq.
(5.3.6),
r = rp . d I dp = 0,18 mm 100 115 = 1,2 mm. (5.3.7)
Then the conversion from the fatigue notch factor of the
test bar, Kf,t(dp), to the fatigue notch factor of the Figure 5.3.7 Round bar with groove for a snap ring.
component in question, Kf,t = Kf,t(d), is possible with
the Ki-K, ratios n~(rp), ..., according to Chapter 2.3.2.2,
Eq. (2.3.18), as follows:

K =K (d)' n~ (rp) 5.3.3.2 Round bars with V-groove

f,t f,t p n~(r).n~(d)· (5.3.8)
The fatigue notch factors, Kf,zd(dp), ..., for round bars
In the special case, if the distinctive values of the with V-groove for tension-compression and for bending
component and of the test bar are identical, d = dp, are to be read off Figure 5.3.8 or computed according to
r = rp, then the following equations:

(5.3.9) Kf,zd(dp) = 1,06 + 0,0011 . Rm I MFa, (5.3.12)

Kf,b(dp) = 0,97 + 0,00095' Rm I MFa.

Nominal stresses For torsion there is

Normally the nominal stresses for tension (load F), for Kf,t(dp) = 1 + 0,60' (Kf,b(dp) - 1). (5.3.13)
bending (bending moment Mg) and for torsion (torsion Distinctive values: rp = 0,1 mm, rafter Eq. (5.3.6),
moment Mt ) are to be computed with the diameters dp dp = 15 mm, d = given.
or d according to the equations (5.3.10); the diameter dp
is given with the figures: Nominal stresses: See Eq. (5.3.10).
(5.3.10)
Szd = 4 F I nd p 2 or Szd = 4 F I nd 2 ,
Sb = 32 Mb I nd p 3 or Sb = 32 Mbl nd 3 ,
T, = 16 M, I nd p3 or Tt = 16 Mtl 1td3 .
Otherwise the equations for computing the nominal
stresses are given with the figures *4.

Kr~(df) 2,4 I I I ,,1

5.3.3.1 Round bars with groove for a snap ring . 2,2 Tension
K f,b (dp) 20 r
The fatigue notch factors Kf,zd(dp), ... of a round bar , Y'
I LA
with groove for a snap ring, Figure 5.3.7, for tension- 1,8 LA"
compression, for bending and for torsion are "S 1,6 Bending
1,4 ,
Kf,zd(d p) = 0,9' (1,27 + 1,17 ·J(D-d)/2rf), 1,2 'I r

Kf,b(dp) = 0,9' (1,14 + 1,08 ·J(D-d)/2rf), I,D

400 600 800 1000 1200
Kf,t(dp) = 1,48 + 0,45 ·J(D-d)/2rf , (5.3.11) 5.3.1 RmiriMPa
rf = r + 2,9 p* ,
p* = 0,3 mm for austenitic steel, Figure 5.3.8 Fatigue notch factors for round bars with
p* = 0,1 mm for other kinds of steel, Rm:s; 500 MFa, V-notch for tension-compression and for bending, after
p* = 0,05 mm for other kind of steel, Rm>500 MFa, Tauscher.
p* = 0,4 mm for cast steel and for GGG. Test bar: notch radius rp = 0,1 mm, diameter dp = 15 mm,
t / d = (D - d) / 2d = 0,05 to0,20. For both smaller and larger values t / d
Distinctive values given by design: rp = r, dp = d. *6. the fatigue notch factors are smaller.
Nominal stresses: See Eq. (5.3.10).
If values Kf,zd(dp), Kf,b(dp) > 4 or Kf,t(dp) > 2,5 are
obtained from Eq. (5.3.11) then the values Kf,zd(dp),
Kf,b(dp) = 4 or Kf,t(dp) = 2,5 are to be used instead.

5FollowingDIN 743 (2000).

6 These fatigue notch factors are valid here for the component (rp = r,
dp = d). Nevertheless the conversion described by the example in Chapter
4 See footnote 1. 5.3.3.0 is necessary.
 191
5.3 Fatigue notch factors 5 Appendices

5.3.3.3 Round bars with tranverse hole Distinctive values: rp = 0,18 mm, dp = 15 mm,
d = given, r according to Eq. (5.3.6).
The fatigue notch factors, Kf,zd(dp), ..., for a round bars
with transverse hole for tension-compression, for Nominal stresses: See Eq. (5.3.10).
bending and for torsion are to be read off Figure 5.3.9 or
computed according to the following equations:

t-'r5-~M~9
Kf,zd(dp) = Kf,b(dp) = Kf,t(dp) (5.3.14)
= 1,54 + 0,0004 . Rm 1MFa.

Distinctive values: d and r = dq /2 given, dP = 15 mm,

rp according to Eq. (5.3.6).

Nominal stresses:
(5.3.15)
F 4F
f'-{~H~M~9
Szd 2/4-2rd 2(1-4.d
n·d n.d Q I(nd)) , Kr.b (dp) 2,6
s, Mb 32M b Kf,t (dp ) 2,4 r
,.1iOe.,,&~~r t;;;
'c... . ' / " I ' Y
n·d 3 132-rd 2 13 3
n· d (1-16d Q 1(3nd)) , 2,2 Detail B /
2,0
i/' : 0"
,,\o~<'''I-
Mt 16M t
Tt 3 2
1,8 ~
n·d 116-rd 13 1,6 K ?>e~M\1
lA Detail A

...;-----+--r-- d
i
E)··9:·
~
. Mo.. ....
M.'.·..l...
1,2
1,~OO 600
I I 1 I

800 1000 1200

I...,-..,.....,....,.....,..,-...+-+--~--' 'Rm in MPa
(JQ Figure 5.3.10 Fatigue notch factors of shafts with sled-
runner or profiled keyway, structural detail A or B, for
Kf;td (dp ) 2 4 r Teli~i~nm
Kf,b(d p ) 2~ Bendmg .: .. bending and for torsion, after Haenchen.
Kr,t (d, ) 2~O T '
'tersion - 'po
F= Test bar: notch radius rp = 0,18 mm (Radius atthe basis of the keyway),
diameter dp= 15 mm..
1,8 ,
J
1,6 I '-1
I.
1,4 ,
l
1,2 5.3.3.5 Shafts with press-fitted members
"
f

1,200 600800 1000· 1200·
Rm ioWa
Figure 5.3.9 Fatigue notch factors for round bars with
transverse hole for tension-compression, for bending
and for torsion, after Tauscher (Ref.: Hempel).
Test bar: notch radius rp = do,p / 2 (dQ,p diameter ofthe transverse
hole ofthe test bar), diameter dp = 15 rom, 2 r / d = 0,15 to 0,25. For both
smaller and larger values 2 r / d the fatigue notch factors are smaller.
5.3.3.4 Shafts with keyway
The fatigue notch factors, Kf,b(dp), ..., for shafts with
keyway for bending and for torsion are to be read off
Figure 5.3.10. The values for bending also apply for
tension-compression.
Structural details A and B (sled-runner or profiled
keyway) are to be distinguished. The fatigue notch
factors apply to the end of the keyway. If two keyways
are arranged in the same section of a shaft, Kf,b(dp) is to
be increased by a factor of 1,15.
The fatigue notch factors for shafts with press-fitted (or
shrink-fitted) member are to be determined from Table
5.3.1 orfrom Figure 5.3.11.
Fatigue notch factors from Table 5.3.1
The fatigue notch factors for shafts with press-fitted
member for bending, Kf,b(dp), are to be determined from
Table 5.3.1. The structural details no. 2, no. 3 and no. 4
are to be distinguished. The fatigue notch factor for
tension-compression, Kf,zd(dp), is approximately the
same as for bending. The fatigue notch factor for torsion
is
Kf,t(dp) = 1 + 0,45' (Kf,b(dp) - 1). (5.3.16)
The fatigue notch factors apply to the section of the
shaft where the press-fitted member ends.
Distinctive values: dp = 40 mm, rp from Eq. (5.3.6),
r = 0,06' d, d = given.
Nominal stresses: See Eq. (5.3.10).
 192
5.3 Fatigue notch factors 5 Appendices

Table 5.3.1 Fatigue notch factors, Kf,b(dp), of shafts Fatigue notch factors after Figure 5.3.11
with press-fitted member for bending, after Tauscher
The fatigue notch factors for shafts with press-fitted
(Ref.: Lehr).
member for bending are *6
Test bar: notch radius rp = 0,06 . dp , diameter dp = 40 mm. The bending , "
moment is transmitted via the fitted member. The same fatigue notch Kf,b(dp) = Kf,b,O(d)' C;; . C;; , (5.3.17)
factors are valid for fits with closer seat.
Kf,b,O(d), C;;' and C;;' , from Figure 5.3.11.
The fatigue notch factor for tension-compression,
1200 Kf,zd(d), is approximately the same as for bending. The
fatigue notch factor for torsion is
Kf,t(dp) = 1 + 0,45' (Kf,b(d) - 1). (5.3.18)
For the fatigue notch factor after Figure 5.3.11 it is to be
determined in addition, whether the loading is
transmitted via the press-fitted member or not. The
3,2 fatigue notch factors apply to the shaft where the press-
fitted member ends.
No.2
H8 / u8 interference Distinctive values: rp = given, dp = d given.
fit. Nominal stresses: See Eq. (5.3.10).
Comment concerning Figure 5.3.11: The fatigue notch
factors are higher than those from Table 5.3.1. The
2,9 shown dependence on the pressure p and the distinction,
whether the bending moment is transmitted via the
NO.3
press-fitted member or not, may be useful; however.
H8 / u8 interference
fit.

1,5 2,3
NO.4
H7 / n6 interference
fit.

KC,b.1) I--+-.......J.-I-H.

2,6
1-~~~~=+--4b}without 1--.....+--+-+
III
2 I';;~-i-'-""+'. bending moment transmitted
by the press-fitted member

30
~' d In mm
2,0 ~H

Note to No.1: The given fatigue notch factors are 1,8 " 1,0 -\.)
approximate values dependent on design. For plain 1,6
./v
(J,9 .. ./
v
rotating bending they may be 1,3 times higher. 1,4 V 0,8 V ..
./
1,2 ./ !
Q;7 V
Note to No.4: The fatigue notch factor is to be /
1,00/
calculated for both the press fit and for the shaft with 500 700 900 1100 0,60 100 200 300
shoulder fillet, Chapter 5.3.1. The less favorable case is
relevant. Increasing the difference of the diameters d,
Bmin MPa pressure p in Mfa
and d is of little influence on the fatigue notch factors of Figure 5.3.11 Fatigue notch factors of shafts with press-
the press-fit, but if the diameter d, differs only a little fitted member for bending, after Kogaev (Ref.: several
from diameter d an unfavorable interaction may occur authors).
(see No.2 for d j = d).
 193
5.3 Fatigue notch factors 5 Appendices

5.3.3.6 Shafts with splines Comment: In this case the definition of the fatigue notch
factor is that ofEq. (5.3.28), and the surface treatment
The fatigue notch factors of a splined or serrated shafts
factor, is
for torsion are to be determined for the nominal stress
KV,RSV = 1. (5.3.24)
computed with the innermost diameter either from
Figure 5.3.12 or according to the following equation: The fatigue notch factors apply to the section at the
transition from the splined part into the plain part of
Kf,t<dP) = expl4,2.10-7 .(R m /MPa)2 j. (5.3.19) the shaft; the shaft diameter must be smaller than
(d- 0,5 mm)!
Distinctive values: rp = 0,6 mrn (structural detail A
and C) and rp = 0,25 mm (detail B), rafter
Eq. (5.3.6), dp = 29 mm, d given.
Nominal stress: after Eq. (5.3.10) with the innermost
diameter d.
A,

Detail ~r
d
5.3.4 Fatigue notch factors for components
from cast iron or aluminum materials
2,2 The fore-mentioned experimentally determined fatigue
Kt;t{d p)
2,0 notch factors apply to notched test bars of steel. The
fatigue notch factors of components from cast iron or
1,8
1,6
v aluminum materials are different because the Kj-K,
V ratios are material-dependent. For example for
'/
1,4 V components from cast iron materials the fatigue notch
V factors are less than for steel, since the Kj-K; ratios are
1,2
t-- J....- higher.
1,°400 600 800 1000 1200
If fatigue notch factors are not available for notched test
5.3.12 Rm inMPa bars from cast iron or aluminum materials, they can
approximately be computed according to the following
Figure 5.3.12 Fatigue notch factors of splined or equations for tension-compression, for bending and for
serrated shafts for torsion, after Meisel, Schuster, torsion:
Contag, Koch.
K (d ) - K (d i ncr,St (rp ) (5.3.25)
Test bar: notch radius rp = 0,6 mm (structural detail A and C) or f,zd,GA P - f,zd,St P ( )'
rp = 0,25 mm (detail B), innermost diameter: dp = 29 mm. The torsion ncr,GA Ip
momentum is transmitted via the hub.
K (d) K (d) ncr,St (rp )
f,b,GA P = f,b,St P . () ,
ncr,GA rp

The fatigue notch factors for bending are to be K (d)

computed for splined shafts after Eq. (5.3.20) and for f,t,GA p = Kf,t,St (d)
P .
n't,St (rp)
() ,
n't,GA rp
serrated shafts after Eq. (5.3.21):
Kf,zd,GA(dp),... Fatigue notch factor of the test bar
Kf,b(dp) = I + 0,45 . (Kf,t(dp) - 1), (5.3.20)
from cast iron or aluminum material,
Kf,b(dp) = I + 0,65 . (Kf,t(dp) - 1). (5.3.21)
Kf,zd,St(dp), ... Fatigue notch factor of the
For tension-compression approximately the same values test bar from steel
apply as for bending. I1cr,St(rp), ... Kt-Kr ratio of the test bar of steel
according to rp ,
For serrated shafts with involute profile the lower
ncr,GA(rp), ... KcK r ratio of the test bar from
fatigue notch factors are valid for all types of stress:
cast iron or aluminum material
Kf,Ev (dp) = I + 0,75 . (Kf(dp) - 1). (5.3.22) according to rp ,
rp Notch radius of the test bar,
The value Kt<dp) is to be determined according to the
dp Diameter of the test bar.
type of stress from Figure 5.3.12 or from Eq. (5.3.21).
The Kt-Kf ratios ncr(rp), ... are to be computed according
For case-hardened splined or serrated shafts there is
to the type of stress and according to the related stress
Kf,RSV (dp) = 1. (5.3.23) gradient G cr (rp ), ... , Chapter 2.3.2.1 and Eq. (2.3.13)
to (2.3.15).
 194 5 Appendices
5.3 Fatigue notch factors

If values Kf,zd,GA(dp ), ... < 1 are obtained from Eq. Distinctive values: rp, r, dp, d in accordance with Eq.
(5.3.25) then the values to be used are (5.3.6).
Kf,zd,GA (dp ), ... = 1. (5.3.26) According to Chapter 5.3.3.0 the so-defined fatigue
notch factors for bars, Kf,RSy(dp) , ..., are to be
According to Chapter 5.3.3.0 the so-derived
converted, see Chapter 2.3.2.2 and Eq. (2.3.18), by
experimentally based fatigue notch factors for bars of
taking into account the Kt-Kr ratios ncr,GA(rp), ncr,GA(r),
cast iron or aluminum materials, Kf,zd,GA (dp) ..., are to
ncr,GA(d) or n"GA(rp), n"GA(r), n"GA(d) for the kind of
be converted according to Chapter 2.3.2.2, Eq. (2.3.18),
material considered.
by taking into account the KcK r ratios ncr,GA(rp ),
ncr,GA(r), ncr,GA(d) or n"GA(rp), n"GA(r), n"GA(d) '7.

5.3.5 Fatigue notch factors determined by

the user
Generally fatigue notch factors that have been
determined by the user for a particular type of stress are
valid under the following conditions - here only for test
bars from steel :
The fatigue notch factor is valid for a nominal stress
to be specified '8.
It is valid for the test bar with the notch radius rp
and the diameter dp, and it is defined as follows '9
(5.3.27)
K{(d p) =
W. unnotched specimen, no surface treatment
W. notched specimen, no surface treatment

Nominator and denominator are to be determined for

the same diameter dp and for the same type of
stress.
A surface treatment is not to be considered, as
the surface treatment factor KV according to
Chapter 2.3.4 is to be applied additionally.
The roughness R, is experimentally considered, so
that the roughness factor KR according to Chapter
2.3.3 is not to be applied (KR = 1).

Surface treatment
Fatigue notch factors in case of an existmg surface
treatment are valid under the following conditions:
The definition of the fatigue notch factor is *9
(5.3.28)
Kf,RSV(dp) =
= W. unnotched specimen, no surface treatment
W. notched specimen, with surface treatment'
7 The conversion according to Eq. (5.3.25) refers to an exchange of the
kind of material, while the conversion according to Eq. ( 2.3.18) allows
Nominator and denominator are to be determined for the size effect and the requirements of the assessment procedure, see
for the same diameter dp and for the same type footnote 12 on page 53 .
of stress.
8 In general there are various possibilities of defining the nominal stress
The surface treatment factor, Ky , according to - as for instance for a round bar with tranverse hole - so that the
Chapter 2.3.4 is not to be applied, that is corresponding fatigue notch factor may be different, too.

9 W. = alternating fatigue strength.

KY,RSY= 1. (5.3.29)
 195
5.4 Component classes for welded components of structural steel and of aluminum alloys
5.4 Fatigue classes (FAT) for welded
components of structural steel and of
aluminum alloys IR54 EN.dog
Contents Page
5.4.0 General 195
5.4.1 Fatigue classes for an assessment with
nominal stresses 195 / 197
5.4.2 Fatigue classes for an assessment with
structural stresses 195 /208
5.4.3 Fatigue classes for an assessment with
effective notch stresses 196
5.4.0 General
This chapter contains the fatigue classes (FAT) of
welded components of structural steel and of aluminum
alloys. To a major part the classes were derived with
reference to the IIW-Recommendations /9/ *1 *2. The
fatigue classes of the structural details are different for
an assessment using nominal stresses, Chapter 2.3.1.2,
and for an assessment using structural stresses or
effective notch stresses, respectively, Chapter 4.3.1.2 *3.
1 Kinds of material according to the IIW-Recommendations are ferritic-
perlitic or quenched and tempered structural steels, or aluminum alloys
5000, 6000, 7000.
For other kinds of material (conditionally weldable steel, stainless steel,
weldable cast iron materials, or other weldable aluminum alloys) the
fatigue classes are provisional and therefore they are to be applied with
caution.
2 Fatigue classes different from the IIW-Recommendations:
The fatigue classes for the base material and normal stress - FAT 160
(structural steel) or FAT 70 (aluminum alloys 5000, 6000) or FAT 80
(aluminum alloys 7000) - are not contained in Table 5.4.1 since the
assessment for the base material is to be carried out as for non-welded
components.
The fatigue classes for the base material and shear stress - FAT 100
(structural steel) or FAT 36 (aluminum alloys) - are included in Table
5.4.2, as they are valid also for full penetration butt welds.
For an assessment of welds in structural steel on the basis of the effective
notch stress the fatigue class FAT 225 for normal stress is complemented
by the fatigue class FAT 145 for shear stress. Both values were
determined experimentally /19,20/.
The corresponding fatigue classes for aluminum alloys are FAT 81 and
FAT 52. They are derived by a factor 0,36 from the equivalent fatigue
classes for structural steel; therefore these fatigue classes are provisional
and are to be applied with caution.
3 Concerning the definition of the stresses see Figure 0.0.6 and 0.0.7 on
page 15.
4 For structural steel see Table 3.2.1 and 3.2.2 and for aluminum alloys
see Table 3.2.3 and 3.2.4 of the IIW-Recommendations.
The component classes for nominal stress allow for the influences of the
component form, of the shape of the weld seam and of the weld seam
itself, see Table 5.5.1 on page 210.
5 appendices
5.4.1 Fatigue classes for an assessment with
nominal stresses
Fatigue classes for an assessment using'nominal stresses
are given in Table 5.4.1 (nominal normal stress,
page 197) and in Table 5.4.2 (nominal shear stress,
page 207) *4.
5.4.2 Fatigue classes for an assessment with
structural stresses
Fatigue classes for an assessment using structural
stresses are given in Table 5.4.3 (structural normal
stress, page 208) *5. For the structural details in Table
5.4.3 (all were taken from Table 5.4.1) the following
comments apply:
- Structural stresses are to be applied for an assessment
of the stress at the toe of a weld only, but not of the
stress at the root of a weld *6.
- There are no details for longitudinally loaded weld
seams, as structural stresses do not apply for welded
sections *7.
- Butt welds loaded transverse, details no. 200, are full
penetration butt welds.
- Fillet welds, details no. 300, may be load-carrying or
non-load-carrying ·8.
- For cruciform joints or T-joints, details no. 400, a
minor misalignment does not need to be considered
when determining structural stresses *9.
5 For structural steel the fatigue classes for structural stresses were taken
from Tab 3.3.1 of the IIW-Recommendations. The fatigue classes for
aluminum alloys were supplementary ones, derived by a factor 0,36 from
those for structural steel. Therefore they are provisional and are to be
applied with caution.
Values for shear stress in weld seams are not necessary, see footnote 7.
The fatigue classes for structural stresses allow for the influences of the
shape of the weld seam and of the weld seam itself, but not for the
influence of the component form, since-this is considered in evaluating the
structural stresses, see Table 5.5.1 on page 212.
Example: "Transition in thickness and width", detail no. 221 of Table
5.4.1 when using nominal stresses, but detail 211 of Table 5.4.3 when
using structural stresses.
6 The stresses at the root of a weld are to be assessed using nominal
stresses or effectivenotch stresses.
Example: "Cruciform joint", Detail no. 414 of Table 5.4.1.
7 The stress (normal stress or shear stress) along the weld seam is to be
regarded as constant here so that the structural stress is equal to the
nominal stress and therefore the fatigue classes for nominal stress apply.
Examples:
- "Longitudinal load carrying butt weld",
detail no. 312 of Table 5.4.1 (direct stress).
- "Full penetration butt weld",
Detail no. 1 of Table 5.4.2 (shear stress).
 196
5.4 Component classes for welded components of structural steel and of aluminum alloys 5 appendices

5.4.3 Fatigue classes for an assessment with

effective notch stresses
Fatigue classes for an assessment using effective notch
stresses do not need to be specified by structural details,
because for an assessment according to Chapter 4.3.1.2,
Eq. (4.3.8) and (4.3.9), structural particularities are
accounted for when determining effective notch
stresses *10.

8 Examples, for which the fatigue classes of detail no. 300 of Table 5.4.3
are applicable:

- "Transverse non-load-carrying attachment", detail no. 511 of Table

5.4.1: externally and internally non-loaded fillet weld.
Structural stress and nominal stress are identical.

- "Longitudinal flat side gusset welded at the edge of a flange", detail no.
525 of Table 5.4.1: externally non-loaded, but internally loaded fillet
weld.

The assessment is to be carried out with the structural stress at the end of
the gusset welded. Structural and nominal stress are different.
- "Cruciform joint", detail no. 411 of Table 5.4.1:
externally and internally loaded fillet welds.

The assessment is in general to be carried out with the structural stress

observing the misalignment. Structural and nominal stress are different if
the misalignment is large, but they are about the same if the misalignment
is small. Some smaller misalignment is already allowed for by the fatigue
class of detail 411.

9 Because some smaller misalignment is already allowed for by the

fatigue class.

10 The fatigue classes for effective notch stresses - FAT 225 for normal
stress and FAT 145 for shear stress (structural steel) and FAT 81 for
normal stress and FAT 52 for shear stress (aluminum alloys) - allow for
the influence of the weld seam, but not for the influence of the component
form and of the shape of the weld seam, since these are considered in
evaluating the effective notch stress, see Table 5.5.1 on page 210.
 197
5.4 Fatigue classes (FAT) for welded components of steel and of aluminum alloys 5 Apendices

Table 5.4.1 Fatigue classes (FAT) for structural details in steel and aluminum alloys (nominal
normal stress),after Hobbacher /9/
No. Strctural detail Description FAT FAT
Steel AI
100 Thermally cut edges
.?'
121 Machine gas cut or sheared material with no drag lines,
/~ -
140
comers removed, no cracks by inspection, no visible
1~1I11111.
I /' imperfections
,
.?'
122 Machine thermally cut edges, comers removed, no cracks

!,/~
125 40
by inspection
/' 1~1I111/.
.?'
123 Manually thermally cut edges, free from cracks and se-

I,/~
vere notches
100 -
/' Ll IUIIlI11

.?'
124 Manually thermally cut edges, uncontrolled, no notch
/~ deeper than .5 mm
80 -
IIIII.!
I /' IU
,
200 Butt welds, transverse loaded

211 Transverse loaded butt weld (X-groove or V-groove)

.-~~- ground flush to plate, 100% NDT* I.
125 50

212
-~-
Transverse butt weld made in shop in flat position,
100 40
toe angle ~ 30°, NDT

-~~-
213 Transverse butt weld not satisfying conditions of 212,
80 32
NDT

-~~-
214 Transverse butt weld, welded on ceramic backing, root
crack
80 -

215
-~-
Transverse butt weld on permanent backing bar
71 25

~
216 Transverse butt welds welded from one side without
backing bar, full penetration
root controlled by NDT 71 28
noNDT 45 18

217 Transverse partial penetration butt weld, analysis based 45 -

on stress in weld throat sectional area, weld overfill not
--r%%'~~%~~~-
/1/// {II . .' II" to be taken into account.
The detail is not recommended for fatigue loaded members.It is
recommended to verify by fracture mechanics (3.8.5.2)!

1 NDT = Non-destructive testing

 198
5.4 Fatigue classes (FAT) for welded components of steel and of aluminum alloys 5 Apendices

Ta bl e 5.4.1 Fatizue classes (FAT) for structural details in steel and aluminum allovs (nominal normal stress), cont'd.

No. Strctural detail Description FAT FAT

Steel AI
200 Butt welds transverse loaded
221 Transverse butt weld ground flush, NDT, with transition

~ slope
in thickness and width *2
slope 1:5
slope 1:3
125
100
40
32
~.~. -+ slope 1:2 80 25

222 Transverse butt weld made in shop, welded in flat

~
position, weld profile controlled, NDT, with transition
in thickness and width: *2
slope . slope 1:5 100 32
-......... 90 28
~~ ~,-
J
slope 1:3
slope 1:2 80 25

223

-ECJ sJope
Transverse butt weld, NDT, with transition on thickness
and width*2;
slope 1:5
slope 1:3
80
71
25
22
--l" C= -J~
I slope 1:2 63 20

224 71 22
-~-
Transverse butt weld, different thicknesses without
transition, centres aligned.
In cases, where weld profile is equivalent to a moderate
slope transition, see no. 222.
225
-~-
Three plate connection, root crack· 71 22

226 ,,~ ~ Transverse butt weld flange splice in built-up section 112 45

~~,
~b~l I,,> b)
welded prior to the assembly, ground flush, with radius
transition, NDT

231 80 -

!u$
Transverse butt weld splice in rolled section or bar
besides flats, ground flush, NDT

t~l -JO
232 Transverse butt weld splice in circular hollow section,
welded from one side, full penetration,
root inspected by NDT 71 -
noNDT 45 -
~

2 Some smaller misalignement is already allowed for by the fatigue class

 199
5.4 Fatigue classes (FAT) for welded components of steel and of aluminum alloys 5 Apendices

Table 5.4.1 Fatigue classes (F AT) for structural details in steel and aluminum alloys (nominal normal stress), cont'd.

No. Strctural detail Description FAT FAT

Steel AI

200 Butt welds transverse loaded

233

.zo:t:J). Tubular joint with permanent backing. 71 -

234 Transverse butt weld splice in rectangular hollow

l--J---ID
~~=1
section, welded from one side, full penetration,
root inspected by NDT
noNDT
56
45
-
-
241
ground
Transverse butt weld ground flush, weld ends and 125 -
\---. radius ground, 100% NDT at crossing flanges,
..-
- radius transition.

242 Transverse butt weld made in shop at flat position, 100 -

weld profile controlled, NDT, at crossing flanges,
..-
- radius transition.

,..,.....,....
243 ground Transverse butt weld ground flush, NDT, at 80 -

--n \-

~
----'-'-
~~
crossing flanges with welded triangular transition
plates, weld ends ground.
Crack starting at butt weld.

244 ground ,..,--... 71 -

Transverse butt weld, NDT, at crossing flanges,
\- with welded triangular transition plates, weld ends

-~ ~l- i...o.o...-
ground.
Crack starting at butt weld.

245 ground ,..,.....,.... Transverse butt weld at crossing flanges. 50 -

-~ ~-
Crack starting at butt weld.

'---
 200
5.4 Fatigue classes (FAT) for welded components of steel and of aluminum alloys 5 Apendices

Table 5.4.1 Fatigue classes (FAT) for structural details in steel and aluminum alloys (nominal normal stress), cont'd.

No. Strctural detail Description FAT FAT

Steel Al

300 Longitudinal load-carrying welds

311 Automatic longitudinal seam in hollow sections

~~ without stop/start positions

with stop/start positions
125
90
50
36

/~
312 Longitudinal butt weld, both sides ground flush 125 50
parallel to load direction, 100% NDT.

/~
313 Longitudinal butt weld,
without stop/start positions, NDT 125 45
with stop/start positions 90 36

321 Continuous automatic longitudinal fully penetrated 125 50

.s.>:>
:t:;f
-~~~
--- ~- :-----
K-butt weld without stop/start positions (based on
stress range in flange) NDT.

~
322 Continuous automatic longitudinal double sided 100 40
fillet weld without stop/start positions (based on
stress range in flange).

323 Continuous manual longitudinal fillet or butt weld 90 36

--------~

~
---=---:::::-~
(based on stress range in flange).
weld (based on and at weld ends).
-~-:-
--- =..----::::?
~;:::::::.------

324 Intermittent longitudinal fillet r:/a =

~
=0 80 32
normal stress in flange a = 0.0 - 0.2 71 28
and = 0.2 - 0.3 63 25
shear stress in web r = 0.3 - 0.4 56 22
at weld ends = 0.4 - 0.5 50 20
= 0.5 - 0.6 45 18
=0.6-0.7 40 16
> 0.7 36 14

325 Longitudinal butt weld, fillet weld or intermittent

~-='~ weld with cope holes, cope holes not higher than

~--......:::::
::::::r:::----- ~-:::.--~
40% of web.

normal stress in flange a

r:/a =
=0
= 0.0 - 0.2
71
63
28
25
and = 0.2 - 0.3 56 22
shear stress in web r: = 0.3 - 0.4 50 20
at weld ends = 0.4 - 0.5 45 18
= 0.5 - 0.6 40 16
> 0.6 36 14
 201
5.4 Fatigue classes (FAT) for welded components of steel and of aluminum alloys 5 Apendices

Table 5.4.1 Fatigue classes (FAT) for structural details in steel and aluminum alloys (nominal normal stress), cont'd.

No. Strctural detail Description FAT FAT

Steel AI
300 Longitudinal load-carrying welds

331 CI, Joint at stiffened knuckle of a flange to be assessed

according to no. 411 - 414, depending on type of
joint.
Stress in stiffener plate:
= 2 sin r
Stress in weld throat:
w = 2 sin

Ar = area of flange
ASt = area of stiffener
A", = area of weld throat

332 Unstiffened curved flange to web joint, to be

assessed according to no. 411 - 414, depending on
type of joint.
Stress in web plate
= F, / (r t),
Stress in weld throat:
= F, / (r a),
F r axial force in flange
t thickness of web plate
a weld throat

400 Cruciform joints or T -joints

411 Cruciform joint or T-joint, K-butt welds, full pene- 80 28

tration, no lamellar tearing, misalignment e<0.15·t,
-[/////~ ~v.t///1-
weld toes ground, toe crack.
t ~
~

412 Cruciform joint or T-joint, K-butt welds, full pene- 71 25

t. ~ e~ tration, no lamellar tearing, misalignment e<0.15·t,
-v/////
. ~
~
.!/¥///_ toe crack.

413 Cruciform joint or T-joint, fillet welds Of partial 63 22

penetration K-butt welds, no lamellar tearing,
misalignment e < 0.15- t, toe crack.

414 Cruciform joint or T -joint, fillet welds or partial 45 16

penetration K-butt welds including toe ground
joints, weld root crack.
Analysis based on stress in weld throat.
 202
5.4 Fatigue classes (FAT) for welded components of steel and of aluminum alloys 5 Apendices

Table 5.4.1 Fatigue classes (FAT) for structural details in steel and aluminum alloys (nominal normal stress), cont'd.

No. Strctural detail Description FAT FAT

Steel AI

400 Cruciform joints or T-joints

421 Splice of rolled section with intermediate plate, 45 -

JIrj~
fillet welds, weld root crack.
Analysis base on stress in weld throat.

422
[-~~~-Il-
..
-I
.. - - - -
-- 0 Splice of circular hollow section with intermediate
plate, singlesided butt weld, toe crack
-
~

wall thickness > 8 mm 56

~ wall thickness < 8 mm 50 -

423
r~---~~-
---- ----
---I 0 Splice of circular hollow section with intermediate
plate, fillet weld, root crack.
wall thickness > 8 mm 45 -
-
~
wall thickness < 8 mm 40
Analysis based on stress in weld throat.

C
424 Splice of rectangular hollow section, single-sided

t~·~·:I1·----l
---- ._---
butt weld, toe crack
wall thickness > 8 mm 50 -
wall thickness < 8 mm 45 -
~
425
t-~;.- ~
----
___ I[[]
u

----
Splice of rectangular hollow section with
intermediate plate, fillet welds, root crack
wall thickness > 8 mm 40 -
-
~
wall thickness < 8 mm 36

431 Weld connecting web and flange, loaded by a - -

~ concentrated force in web plane perpendicular to ~-

weld. Force distributed on width

~ b = 2·h + 50mm.
h

Assessment according to no. 411 - 414. A local

-/ bending due to eccentric load should be considered.
 203
5.4 Fatigue classes (FAT) for welded components of steel and of aluminum alloys 5 Apendices

Table 5.4.1 Fatigue classes (FAT) for structural details in steel and aluminum alloys (nominal normal stress), cont'd.

No. Strctural detail Description FAT FAT

Steel AI

500 Non-load-carrying attachments

511 Transverse non-load-carrying attachment, not

~ ./' thicker than main plate
K-butt weld, toe ground 100 36
~ Two-sided fillets, toe ground 100 36
Fillet weld(s), as welded, also single sided 80 28
/ Attachment thicker than main plate 71 25

512 Transverse stiffener welded on girder web or flange,

U: I)
not thicker than main plate.
(l K-butt weld, toe ground
Two-sided fillets, toe ground
100
100
36
36
Fillet weld(s), as welded, also single sided 80 28
stiffener thicker than main plate 71 25
For weld ends on web principle stress to be used
513 ---
r--- Non-load-carrying stud, as welded 80 28

-~~

514 I
I
, t
I Trapezoidal stiffener to deck plate,
full penetration butt weld,
71 25

_.g'UIIPene.:.....n..... calculated on basis of stiffener thickness,

out of plane bending.

515
fillet weld
"".. Trapezoidal stiffener to deck plate,
fillet or partial penetration weld,
45 16
/
i~r 0.5 ray /1; \
calculated on basis of stiffener thickness and weld
HI
:\.1£ • H·I
I H.r:: throat, whichever is smaller,
out of plane bending.

521 ;=- -=- Longitudinal fillet welded gusset at length I

-- I 1< 50 mm 80 28

---
1< 150mm 71 25
~ ..,.,~ 63 20
~- --~ 1< 300 mm
-- I> 300 mm
gusset near edge: see 525 "flat side gusset".
50 18

522 r Longitudinal fillet welded gusset with radius 90 32

I~-+ transition, end of fillet weld reinforced and ground,

gusset not at edge of flange,
t c < 2' t, max 25 mm,
-T
I r> 150 mm.
 204
5.4 Fatigue classes (FAT) for welded components of steel and of aluminum alloys 5 Apendices

Table 5.4.1 Fatigue classes (FAT) for structural details in steel and aluminum alloys (nominal normal stress), cont'd.

No. Strctural detail Description FAT FAT

Steel AI

500 Non-load-carrying attachments

523 Longitudinal fillet welded gusset with smooth

t~
9- (tl transition (sniped end or radius)
.!-~"-- -+ welded on beam flange or plate, not at edge.
--
u
C < 2 t, max 25 mm;

I -l't r > 0,5· h

r < 0,5 h or rp < 20 0
71
63
25
20

524 Longitudinal flat side gusset welded on plate edge

r~ t
a- or beam flange edge, with smooth transition (sniped
L~- ____

-.
(tv

u end or radius).
..- J + c < 2· t, max 25 mm;
.II;
(t )
1 j r> 0,5· h 50 18
-
r < 0,5 h or q> < 20 0 • 45 16
For Ii < 0.7 t., FAT rises 12%.

~
525 Longitudinal flat side gusset welded on plate or
beam flange edge, gusset length I:
1< 150 mm 50 18
1< 300 mm 45 16
I> 300 mm 40 14

526 Longitudinal flat side gusset welded

~
on edge of plate or beam flange,
radius transition ground.
~ ~ r> 150 mm or r / w > 1 /3 90 36
r 1/6<r/w<1/3 71 28
r/w<1/6 50 22

531 Circular or rectangular hollow section, 71 -

tr CfFJ ~ --- ,,..,, ---

,,
,I ,I
1-:;;' 100 mm
I I
fillet welded to another section. Section width
parallel to stress direction < 100 mm,
else like longitudinal attachment
 205
5.4 Fatigue classes (FAT) for welded components of steel and of aluminum alloys 5 Apendices

Table 5.4.1 Fatigue classes (FAT) for structural details in steel and aluminum alloys (nominal normal stress), cont'd.

No. Strctural detail Description FAT FAT

Steel AI
600 Lap joints

611 Transverse loaded lap joint with fillet welds

_VZ~«~ZI- Fatigue of parent metal 63 22
Fatigue of weld throat 45 16
Stress ratio must be 0< R< 1 !

1U'~C;>
612 Longitudinally loaded lap joint with side fillet
welds
Fatigue of parent metal 50 18
Fatigue of weld (calculation based on max. weld 50 18
length of 40 times the throat of the weld).

613
l'~
L""=~)~:
"
-c
t
Lap joint gusset, fillet welded, non-load-carrying,
with smooth transition (sniped end with <p<20° or
radius), welded to loaded element
-.
t \ f c<2·t, max 25 mm
to flat bar 63 22
to bulb section 56 20
to angle section 50 18

700 Reinforcements

711 tD~ End of long doubling plate on I-beam,

t~
welded ends
~··t"'l
1 t tD ~ 0.8 t
0.8 t < tD ~ 1.5 t
tD> 1.5 t
Based on stress range in flange at weld toe.
56
50
45
20
18
16

712 End of long doubling plate on beam, reinforced

~~
welded ends ground
~. ~ 71 28
~. '.. . tD ~ 0.8t
63
...
.", 0.8 t < tD~1.5t 25

t .",.", .""~.<l>1
L.· /' t D> 1.5t 56 22
Based on stress range in flange at weld toe.
/'

~
721 End of reinforcement plate on rectangular hollow 50 20
section.
~~~ wall thickness: t< 25mm

~EJ
731 ground Reinforcements welded on with fillet welds,
~ toe ground 80 32
Toe as welded 71 25

--[@I- Analysis based on modified (local) nominal stress·

 206
5.4 Fatigue classes (FAT) for welded components of steel and of aluminum alloys 5 Apendices

Table 5.4.1 Fatigue classes (FAT) for structural details in steel and aluminum alloys (nominal normal stress), cont'd.

No. Strctural detail Description FAT FAT

Steel AI
800 Flanges, branches and nozzles

25

t~·
811 Stiff block flange, 7I
full penetration weld.

812

• ~
Stiff block flange,
partial penetration or fillet weld
toe crack in plate
root crack in weld throat.
63
45
22
16

821
~ Flat flange with almost full penetration butt welds,
modified nominal stress in pipe,
7I 25

~~ I
~
toe crack.
i
•
~ll.
822 Flat flange with fillet welds, 63 22
modified nominal stress in pipe,
toe crack.

~~ ,l~
831 Tubular branch or pipe penetrating a plate, 80 28
~
I
-~ K-butt welds *3.
r-..
I "~
~~ i

832 Tubular branch or pipe penetrating a plate, 7I 25

T fillet welds *3.
I .....
~ ~
.""" ""J-
""III
Y
841 - Nozzle welded on plate, root pass removed by 71 25
~
'r
drilling *3.
I

-~ ~
~
~-

842 Nozzle welded on pipe, root pass as welded *3. 63 22

I
~
I ~
~ ....
i
, "\",,:,' \.'\.'\. '"
3 If the diameter is > 50 mm, stress concentration of cutout has to be considered !
 207
5.4 Fatigue classes (FAT) for welded components of steel and of aluminum alloys 5 Apendices

Table 5.4.1 Fatigue classes (FAT) for structural details in steel and aluminum alloys (nominal normal stress), cont'd.

No. Strctural detail Description FAT FAT

Steel AI

900 Tubular joints

911

-CB- Circular hollow section butt joint to massive bar,

as welded.
63 22

-
912
t Circular hollow section welded to component with
single side butt weld, backing provided .
63 22

•
Root crack.

mAl
913 Circular hollow section welded to component single 50 18
sided butt weld or double fillet welds.
Root crack.

921

¥629? Circular hollow section with welded on disk

K-butt weld, toe ground
Fillet weld, toe ground
Fillet welds, as welded
90
90
71
32
32
25

931 Tube-plate joint, tubes flattened, 71 -

E) 1- butt weld (X-groove)
Tube diameter < 200 mm and
plate thickness < 20 mm.

E> 1-

I-I So-
932 Tube-plate joint, tube slitted and welded to plate 63 -
tube diameter < 200 mm and
plate thickness < 20 mm
tube diameter> 200 mm and/or 45 -
I
:::0) ~ plate thickness > 20 mm

Table 5.4.2 Fatigue classes (FAT) for structural details in steel and aluminum alloys (nominal shear
stress), after Hobbacher /9/

No. Strctural detail Description FAT FAT

Steel AI

~
1 Full penetration butt welds 100 36

2 Fillet weld, partial penetration 80 28

~
~
 208
5.4 Fatigue classes (FAT) for welded components of steel and of aluminum alloys 5 Apendices

Table 5.4.3 Fatigue classes (FAT) for structural details in steel and aluminum alloys (structural
normal stress), after Hobbacher /9/

No. Strctural detail Description FAT FAT

Steel AI

200 Butt welds, transverse loaded

211 Transverse loaded butt weld (X-groove or V-groove)

.-~- ground flush to plate, 100% NDT *4.
125 50

212 Transverse butt weld made in shop in flat position,

-~~- toe angle ~ 30°, NDT.
100 40

-~~-
213 Transverse butt weld not satisfying conditions of 212,
80 32
NDT

300 Fillet welds

Fillet welds at weld toe Toe ground 112 -

To as welded 100 -
400 Cruciform joints or T-joints
e
l~ ~
411
i'-' l Cruciform joint or T-joint, K-butt welds, full pene-
tration, no lamellar tearing, misalignment e<0.15·t, weld
80 28
-v///// I'- ~v t // /1-
toes ground, toe crack.
f ~
t:::
412 e Cruciform joint or T-joint, K-butt welds, full penetration, 71 25
~ t\
I
~ l no lamellar tearing, misalignment e<0.15·t, toe crack.
-v/////. ~V.t///I-
f
~
~

'j~
413 Cruciform joint or T-joint, fillet welds or partial 63 22
penetration K-butt welds, no lamellar tearing,
-VZ/fC ~:«t- misalignment e < 0.15' t, toe crack.

4 NDT = Non-destructive testing.

 209
5.5 Comments about the fatigue strength of welded components 5 Appendices

5.5 Comments about the fatigue 5.5.1.1 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
nominal stresses
strength of welded components
~c-55=-=
ENC":".C":"do-'q The assessment using nominal stresses is applicable for
the toe section and for the throat section of rod-shaped
Content Page (lD) and of shell-shaped (2D) welded components.

5.5.0 General 209 Nominal stresses do not account for the stress
concentration caused by the form of the component nor
5.5.1 Compilation of the relationships for by the shape of the weld seam. Therefore the component
welded components of steel strength value is depending not only on the fatigue
5.5.1.0 General strength value of the weld but also on the form of the
5.5.1.1 Assessment of the fatigue strength component and on the shape of the weld seam, Tab.
using nominal stresses 5.5.1 *4.
5.5.1.2 Assessment of the fatigue strength 210
using structural stresses Specific fatigue limit values of welds in steel for
5.5.1.3 Assessment of the fatigue strength 211 completely reversed stress
using effective notch stresses Independent of the kind of steel *5 the specific fatigue
5.5.2 Explanation of the relationships for limit values of welds in steel for completely reversed
welded components normal stress and shear stress are, Chapter 2.2.1.2 *6,
5.5.2.0 General
GW,zd = GW,W = 92 MFa, (5.5.1)(2.2.3)
5.5.2.1 Specific fatigue limit values of welds
'tW,s = 'tw,W = 37 MFa.
in steel for completely reversed stress
5.5.2.2 Mean stress factor and residual stress 213
factor Design factors for nominal stress
5.5.3 Example 214 The design factors for normal stress and for shear stress
5.5.3.0 General are, Chapter 2.3.1.2 *7,
5.5.3.1 Assessment using nominal stresses
KWK,zd = 225 / FAT, (5.5.2)(2.3.4)
5.5.3.2 Assessment using structural stresses
5.5.3.3 Assessment using effective notch stresses 215 KWK,s= 145/FAT.
Fatigue classes for the assessment with nominal stresses
are (FAT:::; 140 for normal stress and FAT:::; 100 for
5.5.0 General shear stress) are given in Chapter 5.4.1. Fatigue classes
are not applicable to the base material, however.
The assessment of the fatigue strength of professionally
welded components *1 made of structural steel *2 agrees
with or closely follows the IIW-Recommendations and
Eurocode 3. 1 Weld imperfections corresponding to normal production standards are
allowable.
The assessment is in general to be carried out separately
2 For other kinds of material (relatively weldable steel, stainless steel,
for the toe section (or the toe of the weld) and for the weldable cast iron material) these specific fatigue limit values of welds in
throat section (or the root of the weld), since the cross- steel are provisional and are to be applied with caution therefore.
section values, the relevant stresses and the fatigue
3 Also termed geometrical stresses or hot-spot-stresses.
classes FAT will normally be different.
4 The numbers of the equivalent tables and equations in Chapter 2 are
The particular relationships that apply to welded given here as well.
components made of steel are compiled in Chapter 5.5.1
and explained in Chapter 5.5.2. Equivalent relationships 5 The type of structural steel (specified by the yield stress R, and further
properties) is important only for an assessment of the static strength, not
apply to components made of aluminum alloys.
ofthe fatigue strength. The same applies in the case of aluminum alloys.

6 All the following is valid for structural steel only.

5.5.1 Compilation ofthe relationships for
welded components of steel
5.5.1.0 General
The assessment of the fatigue strength can be carried
out with nominal stresses, Chapter 2, or with local
stresses, Chapter 4, where the local stresses of welded
components may be derived as structural stresses *3 or
as effective notch stresses.
For aluminum alloys the values 92 MPa and 37 MPa after
Eq. (2.2.3) are to be replaced by 33 MPa and 13 MPa after Eq. (2.2.4)
(Factor 0,36).
For aluminum alloys the values 225 MPa and 145 MPa after Eq. (2.3.4)
are to be replaced by 81 MPa and 52 MPa after Eq. (2.3.6) (Factor 0,36).
These values for aluminum alloys are provisional ones and are to be
applied with caution.
7 Thickness factor ft , surface treatment factor, KV and constant KNL,E
are not considered here, since they are not essential in the present context.
 210
5.5 Comments about the fatigue strength of welded components 5 Appendices

Table 5.5.1 Differences between the assessments using Table 5.5.2 (Table 2.4.1 or 4.4.1) Residual stress
nominal stresses, structural stresses or effective notch factors KE,cr , KE,~ and component mean stress
stresses. sensitivities Mc;, M~ for welded components.
The stress increasing effects of the form of the component and the notch
Residual M~-¢ol
effects of the shape of the weld seam are allowed for in a complementary KE,cr M cr KE;t
way either by the stress value or by the strength value. stress
high 1,00 0 1,00 0
Assessment with
moderate 1,26 0,15 1,15 0,09
nominal structural effective
low 1,54 0,30 1,30 0,17
stresses S stresses cr notch
stresses ex c-I For shear stress there is M~ = fw.~· M cr , fw.~ = 0,577 after Table
2.2.1 or 4.2.1.
Allowed for bv the stress value
Form of the no yes yes
component 5.5.1.2 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
Shape of the no no yes structural stresses
weld The assessment using structural stresses is applicable for
Allowed for by the strength value the toe of the weld of rod-shaped (lD) and of shell-
Form of the yes no no shaped (2D) components *9 , but not for the root of the
component weld.
Shape of the yes yes no
Structural stresses allow for all stress increasing
weld
influences of the form of the component, but do not
Effect of yes yes yes
account for influences of the weld shape. Therefore the
welding
component strength value is determined by the shape of
the weld seam and by the specific fatigue strength value
of welds, but not by the form of the component, Table
Component fatigue limit for completely reversed 5.5.1 *10.
nominal stress
Specific fatigue limit values of welds in steel for
The values of the component fatigue limit for completely reversed stress
completely reversed normal stress and shear stress are,
Chapter 2.4.1: Independent of the kind of steel the specific fatigue limit
values of welds in steel for completely reversed normal
SWK,Zd = crw,w/ KWK,zd, (5.5.3)(2.4.1) stress and shear stress are, Chapter 4.2.1.2,
TWK,s = "W,W / KWK,s .
crW,zd = crw,w = 92 MFa, (5.5.6)(4.2.3)
"w,S = "W,W = 37 MFa.
Component fatigue limit for nominal stress
The mean stress dependent values of the component Design factors for structural stress
fatigue limit *8 for normal stress and for shear stress are, The design factors for normal stress and for shear stress
Chapter 2.4.2.0: are as above *7, Chapter 4.3.1.2,
SAK,zd = KAK,zd . KE,cr' SWK,zd, (5.5.4)(2.4.6) KWK,zd = 225 / FAT, (5.5.7)(4.3.4)
TAK,s = KAK,s' KE,~' TWK,s. KWK,s = 145/ FAT.
The mean stress factors KAK,zd and KAK,s after Chapter Fatigue classes for the assessment using structural
2.4.2.1, are to be determined with the component mean stresses are given in Chapter 5.4.2.
stress sensitivity M; and M~ after Chapter 2.4.2.4, Table
5.5.2, the residual stress factors KE,cr and KE,~ after
Chapter 2.4.2.3, Tab. 5.5.2.
By combining Eq. (5.5.2), (5.5.3) and (5.5.4) the
component fatigue limit for normal stress and for shear
stress is obtained in the form 8 The component variable amplitude fatigue strength is not considered
. FAT here, since it is not essential in the present context.
SAK,zd = K AK,zd ' KE,cr ' - - ' <Jw"W
225 (5.5.5)
9 Also applicable for block-shaped (3D) components welded at the
FAT surface.
TAK,s = K AK.s . KE.<·14'5 . "W,w, laThe numbers of equivalent tables and equations in Chapter 4 are
given here as well.
 211
5.5 Comments about the fatigue strength of welded components 5 Appendices

Component fatigue limit for completely reversed Design factors for effective notch stress
structural stress
The design factors for normal stress and for shear stress
The values of the component fatigue limit for are, Chapter 4.3.1.2,
completely reversed normal stress and shear stress are,
KWK,crK=225/FAT= 1, (5.5.12)(4.3.8)
Chapter 4.4.1:
KWK;tK = 145 I FAT = 1.
CJWK = CJw,w I KWK,cr, (5.5.8)(4.4.1)
Fatigue classes FAT = 225 for normal stress and
LWK = LW,W I KWK;t .
FAT = 145 for shear stress.

Component fatigue limit for structural stress

Component fatigue limit for completely reversed
The mean stress dependent values of the component effective notch stress
fatigue limit '8 for normal stress and for shear stress are,
The values of the component fatigue limit for
Chapter 4.4.2.0:
completely reversed normal stress and shear stress are,
CJAK = KAK,cr . KE,cr . CJwK, (5.5.9)(4.4.6) Chapter 4.4.1:
LAK = KAK;t . KE,'t . LWK .
CJWK,K = CJw,w I KWK,crK (= CJw,w) (5.5.13)(4.4.1)
Values KAK,cr, ... as above, Chapter 4.4.2.1 .... LWK,K = LW,W I KWK,'tK (= LW,W).
By combining Eq. (5.5.7), (5.5.8) and (5.5.9) the
component fatigue limit for normal stress and for shear
Component fatigue limit for effective notch stress
stress is obtained in the form
The mean stress dependent values of the. component
FAT
CJAK = KAK,cr . KE,cr' 225 . CJw,w, (5.5.10) fatigue limit '8 for normal stress and for shear stress are,
Chapter 4.4.2.0:
FAT
LAK = KAK,'t . KE,'t 'l45 . LW,W . CJAK,K = KAK,crK . KE,cr . CJWK,K, (5.5.14)(4.4.6)
LAK,K = KAK,'tK • KE,'t . LWK,K·

Values KAK,crK, ... as above, Chapter 4.4.2.1 ....

5.5.1.3 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
effective notch stresses
The assessment with effective notch stresses is
applicable both to the toe and to the root of the weld of
rod-shaped (lD) and of shell-shaped (2D) welded
components *9.
Effective notch stresses, computed with the effective
notch radius r = 1 mm, see Figure 0.0.7, account both
for the influence of the form of the component and for
the influence of the shape of the weld seam (that is all
stress increasing influences). Therefore the component
fatigue limit value is identical with the specific fatigue
limit value of welds for completely reversed stress and
does not contain any influence of the form of the
component nor of the weld seam, Tab. 5.5.1 *10.
Specific fatigue limit of welds in steel for completely
reversed stress
Independent of the kind of steel the specific fatigue limit
values of welds in steel for completely reversed normal
stress and shear stress are, Chapter 4.2.1.2,
CJW,zd = CJw,w = 92 MPa, (5.5.11)(4.2.3)
LW,S = LW,W = 37 MPa.
By combining Eq. (5.5.12), (5.5.13) and (5.5.14) the
component fatigue limit values for normal stress and for
shear stress are obtained in the form
CJAK,K = KAK,crK . KE,cr . CJw,w, (5.5.15)
LAK,K = KAK,'tK . KE,'t . LW,W·
5.5.2 Explanation of the relationships
for welded components
5.5.2.0 General
The relationships between the fatigue limit of welds for
completely reversed stress, the mean stress factor and
the residual stress factor are illustrated by Figure 5.5.1
and explained in the following.
5.5.2.1 Specific fatigue limit values of welds for
completely reversed stress
According to the concept of the present guideline the
same safety factors are to be applied for non-welded
components and for welded components in order to
maintain a uniform procedure of assessment. These
safety factors are, however, higher than those of the
IIW-Recommendations and of the Eurocode 3, Tab.
5.5.3.
 212
5.5 Comments about the fatigue strength of welded components 5 Appendices

~aAI\
(aAI\ ) 145(73)
III 225(113)
MPa
(2,19) k T=5

( 1,36) 66 33

etre bildtlkl

sira bild9lkl N

I
II
b
ND,a~:~
f
~

0,17
/
0,09

°
° i'~- 1
83 MPa aifll bhghtk 0 3
Ma '"

aife bhghsk -1
° 3

The difference of the safety factors is 1,5/ 1,35 = 1,11.

Figure 5.5.1 Fatigue limit of welds in structural steel.
Therefore the specific fatigue limit values of welds for
Top: Component constant amplitude SoN curves for high residual stresses completely reversed stresses crw,w and 'Cw,w specified in
and/or for high stress ratios Rcr ~ 0,5 or R~ ~ 0,5 . Numerically shown
are the stress ranges (double amplitudes) and amplitudes (in parenthesis)
the guideline,
corresponding to Eq. (5.5.17) .
crw,w = 92 MFa, (5.5.16)
Value L'>crAK = 225 (145) MPa according to the llW-Recommendations. 'Cw,w = 37 MFa,
Bottom: Haigh-diagrams presenting the mean stress dependent amplitudes
are higher by a factor of about 1,11 than the original
crAK or ~AK at the fatigue limit or at NO c or NO t , respectively.
Component mean stress sensitivity for high ;esidual stress (M cr = M~ values to be derived from the fatigue classes (FAT)
= 0), for moderate residual stress (M cr = 0,15 , M~ = 0,09), for low given by the IIW-Recommendations and by Eurocode 3
residual stress (M cr = 0,3 , M"t = 0,17).
crw,w = 83 MFa, (5.5.17)
Left: Normal stress. Right: Shear stress.
'Cw,w = 33 Mpa,
Hence in applying the respective safety factors the same
allowable stress values will be obtained.
Table 5.5.3 Safety factors The fatigue classes (FAT) and the values ofEq. (5.5.17)
derived from these are displayed in Figure 5.5.1.
Safety factors for steel according to the present
guideline (Table 2.5.1 or 4.5.1). The above fatigue limit values crw,w and 'Cw,w and the
corresponding values ~crAK and ~'CAK of the fatigue
jo Consequence of failure classes FAT = 225 and FAT = 145 are valid in the case
high low of high residual stresses and/or high stress ratios
regular I no 1,5 1,3 Rcr~ 0,5 or R~~ 0,5 in combination with an exponent of
Inspection I yes 1,35 1,2 the constant amplitude S-N curve of k cr = 3 or k, = 5
and an average probability of survival of PD = 97,5 %.
Safety factors for structural steel according to
Eurocode 3.
Deriving the original fatigue limit values
jo Consequence of failure
high low For normal stress the original fatigue limit value of the
regular I no 1,35 1,15 IIW-Recommendations, Eq. (5.5.17), is
Inspection I yes 1,25 1,00 crw,w = 83 MFa (5.5.18)
 213
5.5 Comments about the fatigue strength of welded components 5 Appendices

This is the stress amplitude of the fatigue limit at a The residual stress factor is defined for a stress ratio
number of cycles ND,a = 5 . 106 . It corresponds to the R; = -I (R, = -I) and is equal to the reciprocal of the
experimentally established value of the IIW- mean stress factor for a stress ratio Rcr = 0,5 (R, = 0,5).
Recommendations:
The product KAK,cr . KE,cr or KAK,"t' KAK,"t describes
!:ierAK = 225 MPa. (5,5, (9) the increase of the component fatigue limit as a function
of the mean stress compared to the basic value for high
This is the stress range or double-amplitude of the
residual stress which is not dependent on mean stress.
fatigue strength at the reference number of cycles of
N c = 2· 106 ,
The relationship between these values follows from the Product KAK,O' . KE,cr for normal stress
component constant amplitude S-N curve and the values
The mean stress sensitivity in the case of high, moderate
No,cr, N c and k cr = 3, Figure 5.5,1:
or low residual stresses is, Table 5.5.2:
erw,w = (Nc / No,cr) I /kcr. !:ierAK / 2 (5.5.20)
M; = 0; 0,15 and 0,30. (5.5.25)
= (2 . 106/5 . 106 ) 1/3 ·225/2 = 83 MPa.
The residual stress factor in the case of high, moderate
For shear stress the original fatigue limit value of the
or low residual stresses derived from Eq. (2.4.13) or
IIW-Recommendations, Eq. (5.5, 17), is
(4.4.13) is
T-W,W = 33 MPa (5,5.21)
.,.,..,..... = 3.(I+M cr f
This is the stress amplitude of the fatigue limit at a
KAK,cr,R=0,5 3 + M cr
number of cycles NO,"t = 108 . It corresponds to the
I; 1,26 and 1,54. (5.5.26)
experimentally established value of the IIW-
Recommendations *11 For Rcr = -00 (zero-compression stress) it follows from
Eq. (2.4.9) or (4.4.9), Figure 5.5.1, (5.5.27)
(5.5.22)
1
This is the stress range or double-amplitude of the KAKcr' KEcr = - - - . KEcr = 1; 1,48 and 2,19.
, , 1-Mcr '
fatigue strength at the reference number of cycles of
Nc = 2.10 6 . For Rcr = -1 (alternating stress) it follows from Eq.
The relationship between these values follows from the (2.4.10) or (4.4.10) (5.5.28)
component constant amplitude S-N curve and the values KAK,cr' KE,cr = 1 . KE,cr = 1; 1,26 and/or 1,54.
NO,"t , Nc and k, = 5, Figure 5,5.1:
For Rcr = 0 (zero-tension stress) it follows from Eq.
T-w,w = (Nc / NO,"t) 1 /k"t. !:iT-AK / 2 (5,5.24) (2.4.10) or (4.4.10) (5.5.29)
= (2 . 106 / 10 8 ) 1/5 . 145/2 = 33 MPa.
1
KAKcr' KEcr = - - . KEcr = I; 1,10 and 1,18.
, , I+M cr '
5.5.2.2 Mean stress factor and residual stress factor
For Rcr = 0,5 it follows from Eq. (2.4.13) or (4.4.13)
Mean stress factor and residual stress factor are closely (5.5.30)
related to each other, Chapter 2.4.2 or 4.4.2.
KAK,u~ . KE,u~ = 3( + M cr \2 . KE,~ = I; I and 1.
The mean stress factor KAK,cr or KAK,"t describes the U

amplitude of the component fatigue limit as a function
of the mean stress. For a stress ratio Rcr = -lor R, = -1
there is KAK,cr = 1 and KAK,"t = 1. For reasons of
uniformity it is determined the same way as for non-
welded components, but with different values of the
mean stress sensitivity M; and M, assigned to the case
of high, moderate or low residual stresses, Table 5.5.2.
. 3· 1+ Mcrl
Product KAK,"t . KE,"t for shear stress
The mean stress sensitivity in the case of high, moderate
or low residual stresses is, Table 5.5.2:
(5.5.31)

The residual stress factor KE,cr or KE,"t describes how the M, = f"t' M, = 0,58' M cr = 0; 0,09 and 0,17.
amplitude of the component fatigue limit differs in the The residual stress factor in the case of high, moderate
case of high, moderate or low residual stresses, Table or low residual stresses derived from Eq. (2.4.13) or
5.5.2. (4.4.13) is
3.(I+M"t)2
K AK,"t,R=0,5 3 + M,
11 Actually a value 6"tAK R= -I = 190 MPa was experimentally
R"t
establishes for a stress ratio = -1 and low residual stresses, which is I; 1,15 and 1,30. (5.5.32)
about a factor 1,30 higher than in the case of high residual stresses,
Figure 5.5.1: (5.5.23)
6"tAK,R= -1 = 1,30' L'l"tAK = 1,30 . 145 MPa = 190 MPa.
 214
5.5 Comments about the fatigue strength of welded components 5 Appendices

For Rcr = -I (alternating stress) *12 it follows from Eq. 5.5.3 Example
(2.4.10) or (4.4.10) (5.5.33)
5.5.3.0 General
KAK;t' KE;t = 1 . KE,cr = 1; 1,15 and 1,30.
The basic way of calculation using nominal stresses,
For Rcr = 0 (zero-tension stress) it follows from Eq. structural stresses or effective notch stresses is explained
(2.4.10) or (4.4.10) (5.5.34) by the example of a transverse butt weld in a flange with
1 wedge-shaped transition in width (slope 1:2) and with
KAKt'
, K E,t = - - ' KEt
I+M '
= 1; 1,06 and 1,11. high residual stresses (KE,cr = 1, M cr = 0, Table 5.5.2),
t
Figure 5.5.3.
For Rcr = 0,5 it follows from Eq. (2.4.13) or (4.4.13)
In simplification the task is to examine the 'existing
(5.5.35)
safety factor' jYorh for an alternating constant amplitude
3+M t loading (tension-compression, R zd = R, = -1, mean
KAK t . K E t - . KE t = 1; 1 and 1.
, , 3.(I+M
t
)2 ' stress factor KAK,zd = KAK, cr = KAK, crK = 1). If the three
methods of calculation are compatible, the results will
Although somewhat differing from the IlW- agree.
Recommendations and from Eurocode 3 the application
of the concept presented here appears to be acceptable as
different Haigh-diagrams are given in the two references
and as the present concept is a more or less intermediate
one, Figure 5.5.2.
~ ~
-+------+f~;__--------\-~

2 , 1 9 - - -.....
I r-e l mm

1,6,~~~'%:-~~
1,3,-----\---="'iiiiil;d
K~'(TK
a.;a,i ~.rn~ ::::::_
aifa b 5 5 8 _ _ _ ....._ _

Figure 5.5.3 Transverse butt weld in a flange with

wedge-shaped transition in width (slope 1:2).
aila b552 -1 o 3
Stress concentration factor due to the transition in
width: Kt,cr = 1,25. Combined stress concentration factor
due to the transition in width and due to the transverse
Figure 5.5.2 Standardized Haigh diagrams according butt weld with an assigned effective notch radius r = 1
to the IlW-Recommendations (IlW), to Eurocode 3 mm, Figure 0.0.7: Kt,crK = 3,5.
(EC3) and to the present guideline (Ri).
I1W-Recommendations: Haigh-diagram for high (1), for moderate (1,3)
and for low (1,6) residual stresses. 5.5.3.1 Calculation using nominal stresses
Eurocode 3: Haigh-diagram for high (1) and for low (1,67) residual
stresses. The diagram not presented in Eurocode 3 agrees to the given Nominal stress amplitude
rule, that only 60 % of the compression part ofthe stress cycle isto be
considered. Sa= 20 MFa. (5.5.36)
Present Guideline: Haigh-diagram for high (1), for moderate (1,48) and The component fatigue limit results from Eq. (5.5.5):
for low (2,19) residual stresses.
FAT
SAK,zd = 225 . crw,w . (5.5.37)

Considering the stress concentration due to the

transition in width (form of the component) and due to
the reinforced weld seam (shape of weld seam) the
fatigue class FAT = 63 (no. 223 in Tab. 5.4.1) appears
to be appropriate and accordingly
63
SAK,zd = 225 . 92 MFa = 26 MFa. (5.5.38)

The available safety factor is

12 The stress ratio R'[ = -CX) is not mentioned because the Haigh- jvorh = SAK,zd / Sa = 26 / 20 = 1,3. (5.5.39)
diagram for shear stresses tm < 0 issymmetrically totm > O.
 215
5.5 Comments about the fatigue strength of welded components 5 Appendices

5.5.3.2 Calculation using structural stresses

Structural stress amplitude including the stress
concentration ofthe transition in width, Kt,cr = 1,25,
O"a = 1,25' 20 MPa = 25 MPa. (5.5.40)
The component fatigue limit results from Eq. (5.5.10):
FAT
O"AK = 225 . O"w,w . (5.5.41)

Considering the stress concentration of the reinforced

weld seam (shape of weld seam) the fatigue class
FAT = 80 (no. 213 in Tab. 5.4.3) appears to be
appropriate and accordingly
80
0" AK = 225 . 92 MPa = 33 MPa. (5.5.42)

The available safety factor is as before

jYorh = 0"AK / O"a = 33 /25 = 1,3. (5.5.43)

5.5.3.3 Calculation using effective notch stresses

Effective notch stress amplitude including the stress
concentration of the transition in width and of the
reinforced weld seam with an assigned effective notch
radius r = I mm, Kt,crK = 3,5 ,
O"a,K = 3,5 . 20 MPa = 70 MPa. (5.5.44)
The component fatigue limit results from Eq. (5.5.15):
O"AK,K = O"w,w = 92 MPa. (5.5.45)
The available safety factor is as before
jYorh = 0" AK,K / O"a,K = 92 /70 = 1,314 = 1,3 (5.5.46)
 216
5.6 Adjusting the stress ratio of a stress spectrum and deriving a stepped spectrum 5 Appendices

5.6 Adjusting the stress ratio of a In a second step a so derived stress spectrum for
R, = R"i = -1 may be converted to any other uniform
stress spectrum to agree with that of stress ratio of interest after Chapter 5.6.1.2, Figure 5.6.1
the S-N curve and deriving a stepped The following equations are written for local normal
spectrum IRs6 EN.dog stress o , but accordingly they are valid for a nominal
stress as well. For shear stress the normal stress c is to
be replaced by 1:, and the mean stress 1:m ,i, for i = 1 to j is
Content Page
always to be regarded as positive *3.
5.6.0 General 216
5.6.1 Adjusting the stress ratio of a stress
spectrum 5.6.1.1 Conversion to a stress ratio R., = -1
5.6.1.0 General This chapter is of relevance mainly for stress spectra the
5.6.1.1 Conversion to a stress ratio R, = -1 steps of which show different stress ratios. In particular
5.6.1.2 Conversion to an other stress ratio R, these are mean stress spectra, Figure 2.1.2 (on top) or
5.6.2 Deriving a stepped stress spectrum 217 Figure 4.1.2 (on top), or more general, all other types of
(one-parametric) stress spectra where the amplitudes cra,i
and mean values crm,i result in different stress ratios Ra,i
5.6.0 General of the individual steps. Furthermore the described
method of conversion is applicable to two-parametric
This chapter describes how to convert the stress ratios of
stress spectra, like rain-flow matrices for example,
the steps of a stress spectrum to agree with the stress
where the matrix elements show different amplitudes,
ratio of the component constant amplitude S-N curve,
mean values and stress ratios as well.
and how to derive a stepped stress spectrum, in order to
allow a damage calculation. In a first step the amplitudes of all steps i = 1 to j are to
be converted to a stress ratio Ra = -1 . This conversion
results in the damage equivalent amplitudes cra,i,Rcr=-I.
5.6.1 Adjusting the stress ratio of a stress In performing the conversion the four fields of mean
stress are to be distinguished, see Chapter 2.4.2 or 4.4.2:
spectrum *1
5.6.1.0 General Field I (fluctuating compression stress)

Usually a component constant amplitude S-N curve is For crm,i / cra,i < -1 there is
derived for a constant stress ratio over the whole range cra,i,Rcr=-1 = cra,i . (l - M; ) (5.6.1)
of stress amplitudes. To perform a damage calculation, Field II (alternating stress)
Chapter 2.4.3 or 4.4.3, the stress ratios of the individual
steps of the stress spectrum, R"i, and the stress ratio R For -I s crm,i / cra,i S I there is
of the component constant amplitude S-N curve must cra,i,Rcr=- I = cra,i . (l + M, . crm,i / cra,i ) , (5.6.2)
agree. Otherwise the differing stress ratios of all steps,
Field III (lower range of fluctuating tension stress)
i = 1 to j, are to be converted to a uniform stress ratio
R"i = R, = R, as described below. For I < crm,i / crsa,i < 3 there is
M, crm i
A conversion to a uniform stress ratio R, = R"i = -1 is 1+-·--'
normally to be preferred, Chapter 5.6.1.1, as analytically 3 o a,i
cra,i,Rcr=- I = cra,i' 1+ M /3 (5.6.3)
a S-N curve is primarily derived for a stress ratio cr
R = -1, Chapter 4.4.1 *2 I+M cr
Field IV (upper range of fluctuating tension stress)
for crm,i / cra,i ~ 3 there is
_
cra,i Rcr=-I - cra,i
.3.(I+M cr f , (5.6.4)
I Also known as the method of 'amplitude transformation'. , 3 +M cr
cra,i stress amplitude in step i of the initial spectrum
2 A conversion to the stress ratio of step i = I with the largest
amplitude of the spectrum is common for variable amplitude fatigue crm,i mean amplitude in step i of the initial spectrum
tests. Converting to the stress ratio of the most damaging step would
be another alternative. For the most damaging step imax the term of M; component mean stress sensitivity, Chapter
Eq. (4.1.10), hi' (a i / sa I )k , reaches a maximum value.
2.4.2.3 or 4.4.2.3 .
(Number of cycles hi a~d ampiitude a.i of step i = imax, amplitude
sa, I of the step I with the largest amplitude, exponent of the
constant amplitude S-N curve kcr ).

In the case of a damage calculation and an analytically derived SN-

curve both alternatives would not make any difference, however. 3 See footnote 5 on page II 5.
 217
5.6 Adjusting the stress ratio of a stress spectrum and deriving a stepped spectrum 5 Appendices

Figure 5.6.1 Converting the amplitudes in the steps of R c, I R fJ =0

a stress spectrum to a uniform stress ratio R, . R a =-1 !!l! lIlY

Initial stress amplitudes O"a,i , mean stresses O"m,i and
stress ratios ~,i .
Converted stress amplitudes O"a,i,Ra=-1 for the stress
ratio ~ = -1 (step 1), and converted stress amplitudes
O"a,i,Ro,1 for an other stress ratio ~ = ~,l , for example.

Amplitude ofthe component fatigue limit according to mean stress, oAK , bS8t

amplitude ofthe component fatigue limit for completely reversed stress

aWK ' component mean stress sensitivity Ma

5.6.1.2 Conversion to an other stress

ratio R(J
In a second step the amplitudes O"a,i,Ra=-1 of the stress 5.6.2 Deriving a stepped stress spectrum
spectrum for a stress ratio ~ = -1 can be further If a stress spectrum is presented as a continuous
converted to any other uniform stress ratio ~, for spectrum a corresponding stepped spectrum may be
example to O"a,i, Ro,l for ~ = ~,l . Again the four fields derived sufficiently exact by the graphical method
of mean stress are to be distinguished: according to Figure 5.6.2.
Field I
t---a.---...
For ~,l > 1 (O"m,l / O"a,l < - 1) there is
cr••1 1,0
O"a,i,Rcr,1 =O"a,i,Ro=-1 / (1 - M; ), (5.6.5)
cr.,1 0,8
Field II
0,6
for -00 :s; ~,l :s; 0 (-I:S; O"m,l / O"a,l :s; 1) there is *4
0;4
1
O"a,i,Rcr,1 = O"a,i,Ro=-l . 1 M / ' (5.6.6) 0,2
+ a ·O"m,l O"a,l
O'"---......l...- L...l
Field III
5.6;2
for 0 <~,l < 0,5 (l < O"m,l / O"a,l < 3) there is
Figure 5.6.2 Deriving a stepped stress spectrum.
I+M cr /3 Presented example: 8 steps.
0"' =0"' _.
l+M 0
a,I,Ra,1 a,I,Rcr--l M ' (5.6.8)
1+~. O"m,l
3 O"a,l

Field IV
for ~,l;:::: 0,5 (O"m,I / O"a,l ;:::: 3) there is
3+M o
O"a,i,Ro,1 = O"a,i,Ro=-l . - - - = - - (5.6.9)
3.(1 +Maf

4 O"m "1 fO"a I =(1 +Ra , 1 )f(1-Rcr, l)' (5.6.7)

The expression using the ratio of mean stress to stress amplitude avoids
numerical problems when Ro,l = - 00.
 218
5.7 Assessment using classes of utilization 5 Appendices

5.7 Assessment using classes of Table 5.7.1 Variable amplitude fatigue strength factors
for non-welded and for welded components, for normal
utilization 1R57 EN.dog stress, KBK,cr, and for shear stress, KBK,~, according to
Content Page the classes of utilization B ~ 1 ~2

5.7.0 General 218 Non-welded Welded

5.7.1 Non-welded components components components
5.7.2 Welded components
KBK,cr KBK,~ KBK,cr KBK,~

5.7.0 General B-7 - 6,49 - -

B-6 - 5,62 - -
This chapter applies to components made of steel and of
cast iron materials without surface treatment.
B-5 12,59 4,87 - 27,5
B-4 10,00 4,22 - 21,9
According to this chapter the variable amplitude fatigue B-3 7,94 3,65 42,9 17,4
strength factors KBK,a , KBK,t *1 for a given class of B-2 6,31 3,16 29,2 13,8
utilization *2 can be determined, Tab. 5,7.1 *3, B-1 5,01 2,74 19,9 11,0
BO 3,98 2,37 13,6 8,71
The appropriate class of utilization is to be determined
Bl 3,16 2,05 9,24 6,91
by the user according to existing experience and outside
B2 2,51 1,78 6,30 5,49
of this guideline,
B3 2,00 1,54 4,29 4,38
The classes of utilization allow the assessment of the B4 1,58 1,33 2,92 3,46
variable amplitude fatigue strength to be carried out in a B5 1,26 1,15 2,00 2,76
simplified manner, Chapter 2.1.4.2 and 2.4.3,1 or B6 1,00 1,00 1,36 2,19
4.1.4.2 and 4.4,3.1.
B7 - - 1,00 1,74
A class of utilization is an approximately damage- B8 - - - 1,38
~uivalent combination of the required number of cycles B9 - - - 1,10
N with the shapes of particular standard stress spectra, B10 - - - 1,00
the frequency distribution of which is of binomial or
-c- 1The table applies to binomially and exponentially distributed standard
exponential type modified by a spectrum parameter p. stress spectra.
Concerning the relationship between the classes of ~2 For an intermediate value of the class of utilization (for example

utilization, the required total number of cycles Nand
the spectrum parameter p for binomially or
exponentially distributed standard stress spectra see
Table 5.7.2 to 5,7.5. Because of different slopes of the
component constant amplitude S-N curves non-welded
and welded components as well as normal stress and
shear stress are to be distinguished.
5.7.1 Non-welded components
B1/2) the geometrical mean ofthe neighboring values applies.
spectrum parameter p = 1 the class of utilization B6
applies. The class B6 corresponds to the component
fatigue limit and serves as a reference value. High
values of the variable amplitude fatigue strength factor,
although formally correct, may be irrelevant and
excluded by an assessment of the static strength.

Variable amplitude fatigue strength factors are given by

Figure 5.7.1 (left columns), For a required number of
cycles at the knee point, N = ND,a = ND,t = 106 , and a
1KBK,cr, ...for local stresses; KBK,zd, .... for nominal stresses.
2 Following DIN 15018
3 Table 5.7.1 to 5.7.5 and Figure 5.7.1 correspond to a damage
calculation with the elementary version of Miner's rule with a critical
damage sum DM = 1, Eq. (4.4.51) and with Va after Eq. (4.1.10) orTable
4.1.1.
It is supposed, that the recommended damage sum ~ < 1 isconsidered
by the user according to the his experience in selecting the appropriate
class ofutilization.
5.7.2 Welded components
Variable amplitude fatigue strength factors are given by
Figure 5.7.1 (right columns). For a reference number of
cycles Nc = 2 . 106 and a spectrum parameter p = 1 the
class of utilization B6 applies. In this case the B6-class,
however, does not correspond to the component fatigue
limit but serves as a reference value only. The class of
utilization corresponding to the component fatigue limit
is B7 for normal stress and B10 for shear stress. High
values of the variable amplitude fatigue strength factor,
although formally correct, may be irrelevant and
excluded by an assessment of the static strength.
 219
5.7 Assessment using classes of utilization 5 Appendices

Table 5.7.2 Non-welded components, binomially Table 5.7.3 Non-welded components, exponentially
distributed standard stress spectra, classes of utilization distributed standard stress spectra, classes of utilization
according to the spectrum parameters Nand p. according to the spectrum parameters Nand p.
Normal stress ~1 ~2. Normal stress ~1 ~2.

Required Spectrum parameter p Required Spectrum parameter p

total number of total number of
cycles cycles
N 0 1/3 2/3 I N 0 1/3 2/3 1

... 104 B-3 B-1 BOil B2 ... 104 B-5 B-2/-1 BOil B2
104 ... 3,2 . 104 B-2 BO B1/2 B3 104 ...3,2 . 104 B-4 B-1/0 B1/2 B3
3,2 . 104 ... 105 B-1 BI B2/3 B4 3,2 . 104 ... 105 B-3 BOil B2/3 B4
105 ... 3,2 . 105 BO B2 B3/4 B5 105 ... 3,2 . 105 'B-2 B1/2 B3/4 B5
3,2' 105 ... 106 B1 B3 B4/5 B6 3,2 . 105 ... 106 B-1 B2/3 B4/5 B6
106 ... 3,2 . 106 B2 B4 B5/6 B6 106 ... 3,2 . 106 BO B3/4 B5/6 B6
3,2 . 106 ... 107 B3 B5 B6 B6 3,2 . 106 ... 107 BI B4/5 B6 B6
107 ... 3,2 . 107 B4 B6 B6 B6 107 ... 3,2 . 107 B2 B5/6 B6 B6
3,2 . 107 ... 108 B5 B6 B6 B6 3,2 . 107 ... 108 B3 B6 B6 B6
108 ... 3,2 . 108 B6 B6 B6 B6 108 ... 3,2 . 108 B4 B6 B6 B6
3,2' 108 ... 109 B6 B6 B6 B6 3,2' 108 ... 109 B5 B6 B6 B6
109 ... B6 B6 B6 B6 109 ... B6 B6 B6 B6

Shear stress ~1 ~2. Shear stress ~1 ~2.

Required Spectrum parameter p Required Spectrum parameter p

total number of total number of
cycles cycles
N 0 1/3 2/3 I N 0 1/3 2/3 1

... 104 B-5/-4 B-3/-2 BO B2 ... 104 B-7 B-4 B-1/0 B2

104 ... 3,2 . 104 B-4/-3 B-2/-1 BI B3 104 ... 3,2 . 104 B-6 B-3 BOil B3
3;2 . 104 ... 105 B-3/-2 B-1/0 B2 B4 3,2 . 104 ... 105 B-5 B-2 B1/2 B4
105 ... 3,2 . 105 B-2/-1 BOil B3 B5 105 ... 3,2 . 105 B-4 B-1 B2/3 B5
3,2 . 105 ... 106 B-1/0 B1/2 B4 B6 3,2 . 105 ... 106 B-3 BO B3/4 B6
106 ... 3,2 . 106 BOil B2/3 B5 B6 106 ... 3,2 . 106 B-2 B1 B4/5 B6
3,2 . 106 ... 107 BI/2 B3/4 B6 B6 3,2 . 106 ... 107 B-1 B2 B5/6 B6
107 ... 3,2 . 107 B2/3 B4/5 B6 B6 107 ... 3,2 . 107 BO B3 B6 B6
3,2 . 107 ... 108 B3/4 B5/6 B6 B6 3,2 . 107 ... 108 B1 B4 B6 B6
108 ... 3,2 . 108 B4/5 B6 B6 B6 108 ... 3,2' 108 B2 B5 B6 B6
3,2 . 108 ... 109 B5/6 B6 B6 B6 3,2' 108 ... 109 B3 B6 B6 B6
109 ... B6 B6 B6 B6 109 ... 3,2 . 109 B4 B6 B6 B6
3,2 . 109 ... 10 10 B5 B6 B6 B6
-c- 1 For example BO/1 means the geometrical mean value of the classes
BO and to B1. 1010 ... B6 B6 B6 B6

~2 N = ND,o = ND," = 106 and p = 1 corresponds to the component

fatigue limit and to the class of utilization B6 .
 220
5.7 Assessment using classes of utilization 5 Appendices

Table 5.7.4 Welded components, binomially Table 5.7.5 Welded components, exponentially
distributed standard stress spectra, classes of utilization distributed standard stress spectra, classes of utilization
according to the spectrum parameters Nand p. according to the spectrum parameters Nand p.
Normal stress -¢>1 -¢>2. Normal stress -¢>1 -¢>2.

Required Spectrum parameter p Required Spectrum parameter p

total number of total number of
cycles cycles
N 0 113 2/3 1 N 0 113 2/3 1

... 2' 104 B-2/-1 Bl Bl B2 ... 2' 104 B-3 Bl Bl B2

2 . 104 ... 6,3 . 104 B-I10 Bl B2 B3 2 . 104 ... 6,3 . 104 B-2 Bl B2 B3
6,3 . 104 ... 2 . 105 BOil B2 B3 B4 6,3 . 104 ... 2 . 105 B-1 B2 B3 B4
2 . 105 ... 6,3 . 105 BII2 B3 B4 B5 2 . 105 ... 6,3 . 105 BO B3 B4 B5
6,3 . 105 ... 2 . 106 B2/3 B4 B5 B6 6,3 . 105 ... 2 . 106 Bl B4 B5 B6
2 . 106 ... 6,3 . 106 B3/4 B5 B6 B7 2 . 106 ... 6,3 . 106 B2 B5 B6 B7
6,3 . 106 ... 2 . 107 B4/5 B6 B7 B7 6,3 . 106 ... 2 . 107 B3 B6 B7 B7
2 . 107 ... 6,3 . 107 B5/6 B7 B7 B7 2 . 107 ... 6,3 . 107 B4 B7 B7 B7
6,3 . 107 ... 2 . 108 B6/7 B7 B7 B7 6,3 . 107 ... 2 . 108 B5 B7 B7 B7
2 . 108 ... 6,3 . 108 B7 B7 B7 B7 2 . 108 ... 6,3 . 108 B6 B7 B7 B7
6,3 . 108 ... B7 B7 B7 B7 6,3' 108 ... B7 B7 B7 B7

Shear stress -¢>1 -¢>3. Shear stress -¢>1 -¢>3.

Required Spectrum parameter p Required Spectrum parameter p

total number of total number of cycles
cycles N 0 113 2/3 1
N 0 113 2/3 1
... 2' 104 B-5 B-2/-1 BOil B2
... 2' 104 B-3 B-1 BOil B2 2 . 104 ... 6,3 . 104 B-4 B-I10 BII2 B3
2 . 104 ... 6,3 . 104 B-2 BO BII2 B3 6,3 . 104 ... 2 . 105 B-3 BOil B2/3 B4
6,3 ",104 ... 2 . 105 B-1 Bl B2/3 B4 2 . 105 ... 6,3 . 105 B-2 BII2 B3/4 B5
2 . 105 ... 6,3 . 105 BO B2 B3/4 B5 6,3 . 105 ... 2 . 106 B-1 B2/3 B4/5 B6
6,3 . 105 ... 2 . 106 Bl B3 B4/5 B6 2 . 106 ... 6,3 . 106 BO B3/4 B5/6 B7
2' 106 ... 6,3 . 106 B2 B4 B5/6 B7 6,3 . 106 ... 2 . 107 Bl B4/5 B6/7 B8
6,3 . 106 ... 2 . 107 B3 B5 B6/7 B8 2 . 107 ... 6,3 . 107 B2 B5/6 B7/8 B9
2 . 107 ... 6,3 . 107 B4 B6 B7/8 B9 6,3 . 107 ... 2 . 108 B3 B6/7 B8/9 BlO
6,3 . 107 ... 2 . 10 8 B5 B7 B8/9 BlO 2 . 108 ... 6,3 . 10 8 B4 B7/8 BI0 BlO
2 . 108 ... 6,3 . 10 8 B6 B8 BlO BlO 6,3 . 108 ... 2 . 109 B5 B8/9 BlO BlO
6,3 . 108 ... 2 . 109 B7 B9 BlO BlO 2 . 109 ... 6,3 . 109 B6 BlO BlO BlO
2 . 109 ... 6,3 . 109 B8 BlO BlO BlO 6,3 . 109 ... 2 . 10 10 B7 BlO BlO BlO
6,3 . 109 ... 2 . 10 10 B9 BlO BI0 BlO 2 . 10 10 ...6,3 . 10 10 B8 BI0 BlO BlO
2' 1010 ... BlO BI0 BlO BlO 6,3 . 10 10 ...2 . 1011 B9 BI0 BI0 BlO
2' 1011 ... BlO BI0 BI0 BlO
-c- 1 For example 80/1 means the geometrical mean value of the classes
80 and to 81.

-¢>2 N = NC = 2 . 106 and p = 1 corresponds to the class of utilization

86. The class of utilization 87 corresponds to the component fatigue limit
at ND.cr = 5 . 106 .

-¢>3 N = NC = 2 . 10 6 and p = 1 corresponds to the class of utilization

86. The class of utilization 810 corresponds to the component fatigue
limit at ND.t = 10 8
 221
5.7 Assessment using classes of utilization 5 Appendices

Non-welded components, Welded components,

Normal stress Normal stress

KBK,<r

19,9,r-"'Ir--,---,--.--r-----:r-----.---,---B_l
'N . B-4
O,a= 106
7,94 t---t---'t<---+--1--+--+--r"':'-t--+B-3
6,31, - - _.- -._- --~. -~. :&-:2
~1--~...-+~t--*-+-t--_1_-_+_-Bl
5,01 B-1
3,98' no ~--+--+--+--B2

3,16 ni
4,29
2,51 I'-<--+--"":<C-+- 82
B3 2,92
84
B5 2,00
D6 -,
106 1,36 ~-+"""'-+--B6
N
6,32
1,00 '---'"'-"'--c-:-"-"-------l~B 7
2-10 4 2-10S 2-10 8
Shear stress

KBK,1' Shear stress

6,49
r-, D-7'
5,62 1"'-, - ~=lL_ .B'-6 KBK,t
4,87 1--. .- --- ,. ,
... - N n,1' = 106 B-5 B-5
4,22 <,
3,65
<, '" i'-- B-4
27,5
21;9 "'- ~=5
B-4
B~3
<,
'," ..."--l/J""'"0 <, I " ,
3,1.6
1'-.'-...
R;.2 .K. ...._.
No,;"" 108
.. - - - ' - ' - - - JB-3
.-.
<, ~
2,74 17,4 ~.
B-1
2,37
~ "P""l/.j............. ''-... no 13,8 ._~.- - B-2
r<, "'"
2,05
1,78 os:: ~ r--<' .
B1
'-.... .B2 n,o r-,
"" 8-1
1,54 ~
1,33
1,15
F/J
O ~
P""
I~
/.] I "
,"e"t~l N n 1' I:::
3,16 I -I\i('I( . . . '
<,

~
'-..."

<,
B3
I"- "
'-..."
84
85,
8,71
6,91
,~
1"'( K
~ ". ~r~o <,
<. '" 80
Bl
1,00
104 lOS ""e f'06 10' 108
B6
5,49
<, ~~ ~P"" r-, <, 82
-. ~p~~, <. <,
4,38 --
~~ <; <, -. <, B3
84
3,46 '~t'ljl" ~
i~ r-.
.. '"
Figure 5.7.1 Relationship between the variable 2,76 <S'''\r ~
amplitude fatigue strength factors KBK,cr and KBK, 't, the
2,19
<'11"0 1 ~ ~ <: , <,
class of utilization B, the required total number of
cycles N and spectrum parameter p. 1,74
-~,

Nc " ....
~
i~
~.~
"'-: <, B7
<,

1,38 B8
Solid straight lines: binomially distributed standard stress spectra,
dashed straight lines: exponentially distributed standard stress spectra.
1,10 !-- r-6,3'"
1,00. 4
"'-I ~~t )?s B9BI0
* Marked point in CD as an example: class of utilization B3 applies
HO 2'105 2-10'
N
HOll
when combining N = 10 7 and p = a in the case of a binomially
distributed standard spectrum and results in KBI(,cr '" 2.
 222
5.8 Particular strength characteristics of components with surface treatment
5.8 Particular strength characteristics
of surface hardened components
~--~
1R58 EN.dog
In this chapter particular strength characteristics of
surface hardened components are compiled, which are
contained at the mentioned positions of Chapter 1.3
(component static strength) and of Chapter 2.3 and 2.4
(component fatigue strength) * 1.
Surface hardening is caused by an application of chemo-
thermical procedures of surface treatment (nitriding,
case hardening, carbonitiding) or thermal procedures of
surface treatment (inductive hardening, flame-
hardening), Table 2.3.5. Mechanical procedures of
surface treatment (cold-rolling, shot-peening) are not
referred to in the present context, however.
Chapter 1.3.2, Eq. (1.3.6),
Section factors npl,b ....
In the case of surface hardened components
(components with chemo-thermical or with thermal
surface treatment), see Table 2.3.5, the section factors
npl,b ... > 1 are not to be applied *2:
npl,b, ... = 1 . (1.3.6)
Chapter 2.3.2.1, following Eq. (2.3.15),
Kt:Kf ratios ncr .., .
In the case of surface hardened components
(components with chemo-thermical or with thermal
surface treatment) the Kt-Kf ratios are lower than in the
case of components not surface hardened *3 *4.
Chapter 2.3.3, preceding Eq. (2.3.27),
Roughness factor KR,cr '" .
In the case of surface hardened components and a crack
originating at the surface the roughness factor is lower
1 OrChapter 3.3, 4.3 and 4.4: In the following the mentioned chapters,
tables, and equations always refer tothe corresponding ones ofChapter 3
and4aswell.
2 Section factors npl,zd , ... > 1 require a reasonable local plasticty to
occur at notches. The limited plasticity of a hardened surface layer,
however, does not allow that but may give rise tocracks instead.
Possibly Eq. (1.3.6) is a demand too far on the safe side, as according to
DIN 743 a value npl = 1,1 isallowed for case-hardened shafts.
3 For cracks originating atthe surface the Kj-Kj ratios are lower because
ofthe higher tensile strength Rm ofthe hardened surface layer compared
to the lower tensile strength of the tender core (according to material
standard).
For cracks originating in the core the Kt-Kf ratios are lower since the
related stress gradients Gcr and G~ are lower in the core of the
component than the related stress gradients atthe surface notch.
5 Appendices
(less favorable) than for components not surface
hardened, since the tensile strength Rm *4 of the
hardened surface layer is higher.
Chapter 2.3.4, following Eq. (2.3.28),
Surface treatment factor, Kv .
In the case of surface hardened components the surface
treatment factor is dependent on whether the origin of a
crack is expected at the surface or in the core. Essential
are the ratio of the fatigue limit values of the surface
layer and that of the core material as well as the ratio of
the load induced local stresses at the surface and in the
core just below the hardened layer (depth of case or
hardened layer).
Chapter 2.4.2.4, following Eq. (2.4.34),
Component mean stress sensitivity Ma, ....
In the case of surface hardened components the
component mean stress sensitivity is greater than for
components not surface hardened, because of the higher
tensile strength Rm of the hardened surface layer.
Chapter 2.4.3.2, 4th paragraph,
Slope of the component constant amplitude S-N curves,
k cr , ....
In the case of surface hardened components the slope of
the component constant amplitude S-N curves are less
steep than in the case of components not surface
hardened. Values kcr = 15 and k, = 25 apply for surface
hardened, non-welded components of steel and cast iron
materials instead of the values kcr = 5 and k, = 8 that
apply to components not surface hardened, Tab. 2.4.4.
The number of cycles at the knee points ND,cr and
ND,~ remain unchanged, however.
Chapter 2.6, following Eq. (2.6.6) and (2.6.14),
strength hypothesis for combined stress.
For surface hardened components there is
q = 1 *5.
4The tensile strength ofthe hardened surface layer approximately follows
from its Vickers hardness number HV: Rm = (3,3 . HV) Mpa. This
equation, however, was not especially established for hardened surface
layers and therefore it is to be applied with caution . In particular the
fatigue limit for completely reversed stress of a hardened surface layer
must not be computed from the tensile strength (crw,zd :F fW,cr . Rm ! ).
5 That means that the normal stress criterion istobe applied.
 223
5.9 An improved method for synchronous multiaxial stresses 5 Appendices

computed from all single stress amplitudes Sa,zd , ... ,

5.9 An improved method for and an equivalent mean stress Sm,v (in terms of a
computing the component fatigue related value sm,v ) is computed from all single mean
limit in the case of synchronous stresses Sm,zd, ... , and/or T rn.s- ... , and finally from
these a common mean stress factor KAK,v . Using this
multiaxial stresses 1R59 EN.docl
common mean stress factor the amplitude values of the
Content Page component fatigue limit, SAK,zd , ... , are to be
determined as before.
5.9.0 General 223
5.9.1 Equivalent stress amplitude and
equivalent mean stress 5.9.1 Equivalent stress amplitude
5.9.1.1 Rod-shaped (ID) components and equivalent mean stress *2
5.9.1.2 Shell-shaped (2D) components 224
5.9.1.3 Block-shaped (3D) components 5.9.1.1 Rod-shaped (ID) components
5.9.2 Mean stress factor 225 Equivalent stress amplitude in related form:

~ (5.9.2)
sa,v =Vsa +t a '
5.9.0 General where *3
According to this chapter the component fatigue limit Sa,zd Sa,b
sa +--- (5.9.3)
may be computed by an improved method and with SWK,zd SWK,b'
higher reliability than according to Chapter 2.4.2 or Ta,s Ta,t
4.4.2, Figure 5.9.1. The computation applies for non- ta = - - +--.
TWK,s TWK,t
welded components of steel subject to synchronous
multiaxial stresses *1, where Equivalent mean stress in related form:

fw,"t = ""Cw,s / crW,zd = 1 /.J3 = 0,58 (5.9.1) sm,v = 0,87 . (sms + t mt ), (5.9.5)

(Shear fatigue limit for completely reversed stress ""Cw,s, where *4

axial fatigue limit for completely reversed stress crW,zd)' sms = (3 /7) . (Bl . Sm + B3 . 1m), (5.9.6)

! Sa,y t mt = (liE) . {AI 'S~ +A 4 .t~ +A 5 ,sm .t m } 1I 2

!Sa,y Sm,zd Sm,b
!Sm,y Sm = +---
SWK,zd SWK,b'

D ISm,y
S m . x I I Sm.,x
~LJ~

rSa,y
tm = - - -

Sa,zd, ...
Tm,s
TWK,s
Tm,t
+--
TWK,t

stress amplitude,
r Sa,y alta bUdlq
SWK,zd ...
Chapter 2.1.1.1 (or 4.1.1.1),
component fatigue limit for completely
Figure 5.9.1 Example for the significance of the reversed stress,
improved method: Mean stress in the direction or Chapter 2.4.1 (or 4.4.1),
perpendicular to the stress amplitude (Nominal constant, Table 5.9.1,
stresses). The improved method distinguishes these with sa,x = Sa , Sa,y = 0,
cases whereas the method after Chapter 2.4.2 or 4.4.2 Sm,zd ... mean stress,
does not. Chapter 2.1.1.1 (or 4.1.1.1).

According to Chapter 2.4.2 or 4.4.2 an individual mean

stress factor KAK,zd, ... is to be computed for every
single stress amplitude Sa,zd, , either from a single
acting mean stress Sm,zd , or from an equivalent 2 The equations in Chapter 5.9.1.1 and 5.9.1.2 are written for nominal
mean stress Sm,v or Tm,v , respectively. Using these stresses. They apply to local stresses as well, if S andT arereplaced bya
mean stress factors the amplitude values of the and "to The equations in Chapter 5.9.1.3, however, apply for local stresses
only.
component fatigue limit, SAK,zd, ... are to be computed.
3 For local stresses there is
After the method described in this chapter an equivalent
sa = aa I <:5WK ' (5.9.4)
stress amplitude Sa,v (in terms of a related value sa,v ) is ta = "t a I"tWK·
4 For local stresses there is
sm = am I aWK , (5.9.7)
I seeChapter 0.3.5. t m = "t m I "tWK .
 224
5.9 An improved method for synchronous multiaxial stresses 5 Appendices

Table 5.9.1 Coefficients Al to A6 and BI to B3 . sm,x = Sm,x 1 SWK,x ,

Sm,y = Sm,y 1 SWK,y ,
2 2 2 t m = Tm/T WK ,
4s ax +3s a,y -4s a,x' , +(7/3)·t a
'Say
Al Sa,x ... stress amplitude,
2 2 2
Sa.x +S a.y -Sa,x'Sa,y+t a Chapter 2.1.1.2 (or 4.1.1.2),
SWK,x, ... component fatigue limit for completely
2 2 2
3s a,x +4s reversed stress,
a,y -4s a"x 'Say +(7/3)·t a
A2 Chapter 2.4.1 (or 4.4.1),
2 2 2
Sa,x +S a,y -Sa,x 'Sa,y +t a BI,... constant, Table 5.9.1,
Sm,x ... mean stress,
_4s 2 -4s 2 +6sa,x,say-2t 2 Chapter 2.1.1.2 (or 4.1.1.2).
a,x a,y 'a
A3
222
Sa,x +S a.y -Sa,x'Say+t
, a
5.9.1.3 Block-shaped (3D) components
2 2 2
7s a,x +7sa,y -6sa,x 'Sa,y +12t
a Equivalent stress amplitude in related form:
A4
2 2 2
Sa,x +S a,y -Sa,x 'Sa,y +t a sa,v = (5.9.14)

1 lOsa,x . t a - 6s a,y . t a ±. ((Sa,1 -Sa,2)2 +(Sa,2 -sa,3 ~ + (Sa,3 - Sa,IP ),

AS 13' 2 2
Sa,x +S a,y -Sa,x 'Sa,y +t a
2
where
1 -6s a,x . t a + lOSa,y . t a sa,! = CYa,1 1 CYWK,I , (5.9.15)
222 Sa,2 = CY a,2 1 CYWK,2 ,
A6
13 Sa,x +S a.y -Sa,x 'Sa,y +t a sa,3 = CY a,3 1 CYWK,3 .
2 2 2 Equivalent mean stress in related form:
5s a,x +S +2s a"x 'Say +(4/3)·t a
a,y
BI sm,v = 0,87 . (sms + t mt), (5.9.16)
2 2 2
3s a.x +3s a,y +2s a,x 'Sa,y +(4/3).t
a
where (5.9.17)
2 2 2
Sa.x +5s a,y +2s a"x 'Say +(4/3)·t a Sms = (3/7) . (D! . sm,! + D2 . sm,2 + D3 . Sm,3),
B2
2 2 2
3s a,x +3s a,y +2s a"x 'Say +(4/3)·t a t mt = (1 1J2l) .
2 2 2
. (C! .Sm, + C2 .Sm, 2 + C3 .Sm 3 +
I 8,(sa,x +Sa,y )·t a
+ C4 . sm,! . sm,2 + Cs . Sm,2 . sm,3 +
B3
13 2
3s a,x +3s
2 2
a,y +2s a"x 'Say +(4/3)·t a + C6' Sm,3 . sm! ) 1/ 2 ,
Sm,1 = CY m,! 1 CYWK,l ,
5.9.1.2 Shell-shaped (2D) components sm,2 = CYm,2 1 CYWK,2 ,
sm,3 = CY m,3 1 CYWK,3 ,
Equivalent stress amplitude in related form:
CYa , ! . stress amplitude, Chapter 4.1.1.3,
CYWK,! .. component fatigue limit for completely
Sav= ~ S2 +s 2 -Sa,x'Sa,y+t 2 , (5.9.8) reversed stress, Chapter 4.4.1,
, a,x a,y a
where "5 DI, . constant, Table 5.9.2,
CY m , ! . mean stress, Chapter 4.1. 1. 3 .
sa,x = Sa,x 1 SWK,x , (5.9.9)
Sa,y = Sa,y 1 SWK,y ,
ta = r,
1 TWK.
Equivalent mean stress in related form: 5 For local stresses there is
sa,x = O"a,x / O"WK,x , (S.9.!0)
sm,v = 0,87 . (sms + t mt ), (5.9.11)
Sa,y = O"a,y / O"WK,y ,
where "6 (5.9.12) t a = "ta / "tWK .
Sms = (3 17) . (BI . sm,x + B2 . Sm,y + B3 . t m), 6 For local stresses there is
sm,x = O"m,x / O"WK,x , (5.9.13)
t mt = (1 IJ21) .
2 2 Sm,y = O"m,y / O"WK,y ,
- (A! .s m,x + A2 .Sm,y + A3 . sm,x . Sm,y t m = "tm / "tWK .
2 ) 1/2
+~·tm +AS·sm,x.tm+A6·Sm,y·tm ,
 225
5.9 An improved method for synchronous multiaxial stresses 5 Appendices

5.9.2 Mean stress factor Table 5.9.2 Coefficients c, to C6 and Dl to D3.

The mean stress factor KAK,v common for all types of

stress is to be calculated according to the expected type
2
4s a.1 + 3Sa,2
2 2
+3s a.3 -4S a,I Sa.2 -2S a,2 Sa,3 -4S a,3 Sa,1
CI 2 2 2
of overloading. It is Sa,1 +Sa,2 +Sa,3 -Sa,1 Sa,2 -Sa,2 Sa,3 -Sa,3 Sa,1

Smin,v = sm,v - sa,v , (5.9.18)

smax,v = sm,v + sa,v , 3s; I . .
+ 4s;, 2 + 3s; 3 - 4s a" I Sa 2 - 4s a. ,3 - 2s a"3S a I
2 Sa
Cz 2 2 2
Rcr,v = smin,v 1 smax,v , Sa,1 +Sa,2 +Sa,3 -Sa,I Sa,2 -Sa,2 Sa,3 -Sa,3 Sa,1

sm,v, sa,v after Chapter 5.9.1.1 to 5.9.1.3.

3S;,1 +3S';,2 +4S';,3 -2S a,I Sa,2 -4S a,2 Sa,3 -4S a,3 Sa,1
C3 2 2 2
Sa,1 +Sa,2 +Sa,3 -Sa,lSa,2 -Sa,2 Sa,3 -Sa,3 Sa,1
Type of overloading F2
2Sa,1
2
+ 2 Sa,2
2 2
+Sa,3 -3S a,lSa,2 -Sa,2 Sa,3 -Sa,3 Sa,1
KAK,v is to be calculated according to Chapter 2.4.2.1
C4 2 2 2
or 4.4.2.1, type of overloading F2, after having Sa,1 +Sa,2 +Sa,3 -Sa,lSa,2 -Sa,2 Sa,3 -Sa,3 Sa,l
replaced Sm,zd 1 Sa,zd or am 1 aa by sm,v 1 sa,v (and
Rzd or R cr by Rcr,v ). 2 2 2 2
Sa,! +Sa,2 +2S a,3 -Sa,1 Sa,2 -3S a,2 Sa,3 -Sa,3 Sa,1
Cs 2 2 2
Sa,! +Sa,2 +Sa,3 -Sa,lSa,2 -Sa,2 Sa,3 -Sa,3 Sa,l

Type of overloading Fl 2 2 2
2S a,l +Sa,2 + 2S a,3 - Sa,1 Sa,2 - Sa,2 Sa,3 - 3S a,3 Sa,l
KAK,v is to be calculated according to Chapter 2.4.2.1 C6 2 2 2
Sa,l +Sa,2 +Sa,3 -Sa,lSa,2 -Sa,2 Sa,3 -Sa,3 Sa,l
or 4.4.2.1, type of overloading Fl, after having
replaced sm,zd or Sm by sm,v . 2 2 2
5s a,1 +Sa2
, +Sa3
, +2S a,lSa,2 +(2/3)sa,2 Sa,3 +2S a,3 Sa,1
DI
2 2 2
3s a,1 + 3s a,2 + 3s a,3 + 2S a,1 Sa,2 + 2Sa,2S8,3 + 2Sa,3 Sa,1
Type of overloading F3
2 2 2
KAK,v is to be calculated according to Chapter 2.4.2.1 Sal, +5s a,2 +Sa3, +2S a,l
Sa,2 +2S a,2Sa,3 +(2/3)sa,3 Sa,1
or 4.4.2.1, type of overloading F3, after having Dz 2 2 2
replaced smin,zd or Smin by smin,v . 3s a,1 +3s a,2 +3s a,3 +2S a,lSa,2 +2S a,2Sa,3 +2S a,3 Sa,1

2 2 2
Sa,l + Sa,2 + 5s a,3 + (2/3) Sa,lSa,2 + 2s a,2Sa,3 + 2s 8,3 Sa,l
Type of overloading F4 D3
2 2 2
3s a,1 +3s a,2 +3s a,3 +2S a,lSa,2 +2S a,2Sa,3 +2S a,3 Sa,1
KAK,v is to be calculated according to Chapter 2.4.2.1
or 4.4.2.1, type of overloading F4, after having
replaced Smax,zd or Smax by smax,v .
 226
5.10 Approximate assessment for non-proportional multiaxial stresses
5.10 Approximate assessment of the
fatigue strength in the case of non-
proportional multiaxial stresses
~~-51-0-EN"""."""do-'q
Content Page
5.10.0 General 226
5.10.1 Background information
5.10.2 Procedure
5.10.0 General
The procedure described in this chapter is a rough
approximation to assess the fatigue strength *1 in the
most general case of non-proportional multiaxial
stresses *2. It may be supposed that it provides a
result that is always on the safe side, but possiblyfar
on the safe side *3.
The approximate procedure is applicable for rod-
shaped (10), shell-shaped (2D) and block-shaped
(3D) components. The assessment can be carried out
with nominal stresses or with local stresses.
A background information and a description of the
procedure are presented in the following.
5.10.1 Background information
Non-proportional multiaxial stresses result if a
component observes at least two different loadings
that vary with time independently. In general
different histories and spectra apply to the these
loadings.
Under the combined action of the different loadings
a multiaxial state of stress occurs at the reference
point *4, where both the magnitude and the direction
of the principle stresses vary with time and where
the stress spectra of the principle stresses (as well as
the spectra of any other stress components) are
different.
On the other hand a separate action of each of the
particular loadings produces a state of stress at the
reference point that varies proportionally with time
1 The procedure is applicable both for an assessment of the variable
amplitude fatigue strength and of the fatigue limit.
2 Also in the special case of non-proportional uniaxial stresses.
3 Mechanically reasonable methods of calculating the fatigue
strength under non-proportional multiaxial stresses require a high
computing effort and the application of a suitable computer program.
4 Under the action of more than one loading the very reference point
may be different from the respective reference points that would
result for each of the particular loadings. This is because the
maximum damage from the combined loadings may occur at a
location different from the locations where the particular loadings
produce maximum stresses.
5 Appendices
while the directions of the principle stresses remain
constant. Moreover the histories and the spectra of
all stress components are identical with those of the
respective loading, and they differ by particular
scaling factors only.
Hence for each of the particular loadings there is no
doubt that the assessment procedure described in
Chapter 2 or 4 is applicable on the basis of the
resulting types of stress (tension-compression stress,
... , normal stress ... , principle stresses) in order to
derive the corresponding degree of utilization for the
combined types of stress according to Chapter 2.6 or
4.6.
Each of the particular loadings is to be considered in
this manner. Finally the degrees of utilization
derived for the particular loadings are to be added
linearly to obtain the overall degree of utilization
due to the combined action of all loadings.
In principle the most detrimental kind of interaction
of the particular loadings is assumed with the linear
summation of the particular degrees of utilization.
5.10.2 Procedure
The particular loadings that act non-proportionally
on the component, are to be determined as
Loading I, (5.10.1)
Loading II,
For everyone of these particular loadings I, II ... the
resulting stresses are to be determined according to
Chapter 2.1 or 4.1 and thereafter the assessment is to
be carried out according to Chapter 2 or 4.
From the particular assessments the degrees of
utilization for the combined types of stress according
to Chapter 2.6 or 4.6 are obtained for everyone of
these particular loadings I, II ...
aSK,Sv,I or aSK,crv,I, (5.10.2)
aSK,Sv,I1 or aSK,sv,I1,
These particular degrees of utilization are to be
added linearly to obtain the overall degree of
utilization due to the combined loadings.
aSK,Sv,ges = aSK,Sv,I + aSK,Sv,I1 + ... (5.10.3)
or
aSK,sv,ges = aSK,crv,I + aSK,O'V,I1 + ... (5.10.4)
A necessary reservation against this procedure is,
that in every case of application both the loading
situation and the final result has to be carefully and
critically analyzed. In cases of doubt a suitable
computer program is to be applied, or an
experimental assessment is to be carried out.
 227
5.11 Experimental determination of component strength values 5 Appendices

5.11 Experimental determination of

component strength values 1R511 EN.docl

Content Page
5.11.0 General 227
5.11.1 Experimental determination of a
mean value
5.11.2 Standard deviation and 229
statistical confidence b5Jlle 19(5x) 19(5x,50%) 19(5i,~
Component strength (logarithmic scale)

5.11.0 General
Figure 5.11.1 Sufficiently reliable component strength
According to this chapter component static strength value Sx to be derived from a number of experimentally
values and/or component fatigue strength values can be determined component strength values Si,X .
determined experimentally. The given recommendations
are aimed at obtaining component strength values that LSD = logarithmic standard deviation = standard deviation of 19( SiX) .
are sufficiently reliable, although the number of tests
will be limited in most cases *1.
The loading conditions for these tests may be specified
in terms of loads, moments or stresses observing the From a larger sample it would be possible to determine
proper load or stress ratio. The obtained test results the logarithmic standard deviation, LSD, too. If the
may be presented in terms of loads, nominal stresses or sample is small, however, this result would not be
local stresses (structural stresses or effective notch reliable. Therefore with small samples an experienced
stresses for welded structures) *2. estimate of the logarithmic standard deviation, LSD,
has to be used instead.
Practically a component may be subject to several kinds
of service loadings according to its operating Then, from the experimentally obtained geometric mean
conditions. The testing procedure described below is and the experienced logarithmic standard deviation it is
restricted to a single kind of loading the component possible to derive the wanted component strength value
strength value for which is of particular interest. for a probability of survival of Po = 97,5 %. It is
Nevertheless this single kind of loading may cause obtained by dividing the geometric mean, SX,50% , by a
multiaxial stresses of the component, which are statistical conversion factor, jn,s after Table 5.11.1,
proportional stresses, however *3. which is dependent on the logarithmic standard
deviation, LSD, and on the number of tests, n, Figure
As test results will normally show a reasonable scatter 5.11.1 *5.
several identical repetitions of the same test are
necessary in order to allow a statistical evaluation of the
results. It is common to assume a logarithmic Gaussian
scatter distribution to exist, Figure 5.11.1.
From an experimental examination of the component
strength, which is usually restricted to a small sample
because of testing time and cost, only the (geometric)
mean of the component strength value, SX,50% , can be
determined sufficiently exact. It is associated with a
probability of survival of Po = 50 % *4.

4 The geometric mean is the antilog of the logarithmic mean computed

I The same procedure also applies to material strength values. from Eq. (5.11.1) 5.11.4) or (5.11.7), respectively.
2 The description bellow is given in terms of nominal stresses, but it 5 The statistical conversion factor Jn ,s allows for the difference
also is valid for loads or local stresses. between the (geometric) mean (PO = 50 %) and the component
3 Multriaxial testing by applying more than one different kind ofloading strength value for PO = 97,5 %, and moreover for the statistical
simutaneously, which will result in non-proportional stresses of the uncertainty of an experimentally determined (geometric) mean as a
component, is not considered here. function of the sample size.

5.11 Experimental determination of component strength values
5.11.1 Experimental determination of the geometric
mean value
Component static strength
The logarithmic mean value of the experimentally
obtained component static strength values Si,SK (yield
stress or rupture stress, sample size n) is
1 n
19 (SSK ,50%) = -n . "lg
~
(S,,SK )
i=!
SSK,50% = antilog [lg ( SSK,50% )]
Component fatigue limit
For an experimental examination of the component
fatigue limit several possibilities exist.
Stair case tests and other test methods
Having available a sufficiently large sample of test
pieces (n ;::: 15 as a minimum) the component fatigue
limit can be experimentally determined in a direct
approach (without extrapolation) by the stair case test
method, or by other test methods proposed in the
literature. Result of the evaluation procedure of the
respective test method is the mean value of the
component fatigue limit,
SAK,50% = resultofevaluationprocedure (5,11.3)
Tests on a stress level above the fatigue limit
In order to reduce the required testing time and if the
number of possible tests is less than 15 (1 ::; n < 15), the
experimental examination can be carried out at some
stress amplitude exceeding the expected fatigue limit *6.
The experimental examination of n test pieces on that
stress level, SL, results in the numbers of cycles N, L ,
(i = 1 ... n), the logarithmic mean value of which is '
1 rough estimate of the fatigue limit, the values k and ND
19 (NL,50%) = -n . "lg(NiL)
~ .
NL,50% = antilog [lg (NL,50%)]
The geometric mean value of the component fatigue
limit follows from an extrapolation along the constant
amplitude S-N curve down to its knee point:
SAK,50% = S L . (NL,50% / ND ) 1 / k
6 Provided that there is a sufficient distance to the yield strength and that
the critical location and the type of failure does not change when
increasing the stress.
228
5 Appendices
where the number of cycles at the knee point, ND, and
the slope of the S-N curve, k, are those from Table
2.4.4 or 4.4.4.
Component variable amplitude fatigue strength
To determine the component variable amplitude fatigue
strength for a given stress spectrum and a required total
(5.11.1) number of cycles N the experimental examination can
be carried out at some stress amplitude exceeding the
(5.11.2) expected fatigue limit *7 ,
The experimental examination of n test pieces on that
stress level, SL = Sa,1 results in the numbers of cycles
N i,L , (i= 1 ... n), the logarithmic mean value of
which is
(5.11.7)
N L,50% = antilog [lg (N L,50% )] (5.11.8)
The mean value of the component variable amplitude
fatigue strength for the required number of cycles N
follows from an extrapolation of the variable amplitude
fatigue life curve:
SBK,50% = {-
SL . ,N L•50% /
-)lIk
N (5.11.9)
In a first approach the slope k of the variable fatigue
life curve may approximately be taken equal to the
slope k of the component constant amplitude S-N curve
after Table 2.4.4 or 4.4.4. Taking k = k means a
fatigue life curve after the elementary version of
Miner's rule being valid, see Figure 2.1.5 or 4.1.5.
The actual slope of the variable amplitude fatigue life
curve k may, however, be somewhatlarger than that of
the constant amplitude S-N curve, (k ;::: k), see Eigure
2.1.5 or 4.1.5. To observe the actual slope k the
extrapolation has to be based on a fatigue life curve
derived by the consistent version of Miner's rule for a
(5.11.4)
after Table 2.4.4 or 4.4.4, and the spectrum of concern,
Chapter 2.3,L or 4,3,1 *8. The stress amplitudes
(5.11.5) S*a,1,50% for N L,50% and S*a,l for N may be read off
that fatigue life curve for an extrapolation as follows:
[S*a 1 for N ]
SBK,50% SL" (5.11.10)
[S*a,I,50% for N L,50%]
(5.11.6)
7 Provided that there is a sufficient distance to the yield strength.
8 An experimental determination of the slope k from (a small number of
tests an two stress levels would yield an unreliable result and cannot be
recommended.
 229
5.11 Experimental determination of component strength values 5 Appendices

5.11.2.2 Logarithmic standard deviation and

statistical conversion factor
An estimate of the logarithmic standard deviation LSD
is to be applied, Table 5.11.1, as a reliable
determination of the standard deviation is not possible
because of usual test samples being too small.
The "reliable" value of the component strength Sx for
Po = 97,5 % is, with SX,50%= Figure 5.11.1,
Sx = SX,50% / jn,s, (5.11.11)
where
. = 1O(2+IIFn"j.LsD (5.11.12)
In,s
SX,50% Geometric mean value SSK,50%, SAK,50% or
SBK,50% of the experimentally determined
stress values S, x ,
In,s Statistical con~ersion factor, Table 5.11.1 *5,
n Sample size,
LSD Logarithmic standard deviation applicable to
the experimentally determined stress values
Si,X , Table 5.11.1.

Tab 5.11.1 Statistical conversion factor jn,s as a

function of the logarithmic standard deviation LSD and
of the sample size n ~ 1.

LSD n
1 2 4 6 10 100 oc

0,02 ~2 1,15 1,13 1,12 1,12 1,11 1,10 1,10

0,04 ~3 1,32 1,28 1,26 1,25 1,24 1,21 1,20
0,06 ~4 1,51 1,45 1,41 1,39 1,38 1,34 1,32
-c- 1 Statistical conversion factor according to IIW Recommendations,
~ 2 Experienced logarithmic standard deviation ofthe static strength
of non-welded or welded components,
~3 Experienced logarithmic standard deviation ofthe fatigue strength
of non-welded components,
~4 Experienced logarithmic standard deviation ofthe fatigue strength
of welded components.
 230
5.12 Stress concentration factor for a substitute structure 5 Appendices

5.12 Stress concentration factor for a Notch radius

substitute structure IRS12 EN.dog
To compute the design factors after Chapter 4.3.1.1, Eq.
(4.3.1) to (4.3.3), stress concentration factors Kt,cr and
Kt;t must be known, if the effect of surface roughness is
to be considered in relation to the notch severity.
The stress concentration factor, however, may not be
known, as in the case of a finite element calculation for
instance. Then it is to be derived for a substitute
structure from the following approximation formula.
This formula provides a general estimate of the stress
concentration factors for normal stress, Kt,cr , and for
shear stress, Kt, ~ , as a function of the notch radius r
and the "wall thickness" b *1"1:
Kt,cr = Kt,~ =
= K, = MAX (10 O,066-0,36·lg(r/s) ; 1)
The notch radius r and the wall thickness b are to be
determined from the available design data.
The approximation formula for the substitute structure,
Eq. (5.12.1), is exactly valid for a flat specimen with a
deep single-sided notch in bending, Figure 5.12.1 *2.
The notch radius r is given by the drawing, or an
apparent notch radius r is approximately to be derived
from the related stress gradient G cr or G~, see Table
2.3.3:
r=2/G cr ' (5.12.2)
r = 1 (G~ .
Wall thickness
The wall thickness b is given by the drawing, or it is to
be determined from the equivalent diameter deff .
Concerning deff two cases are to be distinguished
according to kind of material, see Table 3.2.3.
(5.12.1)
Case 1
For components (also forged components) of quenched
and tempered steel, of case-hardened steel, of quentched
and tempered and nitrided nitriding steel, of heat
treatable steel casting, GGG, GT and GG there is
s = deff/ 2. (5.12.3)

..
.. "-nnnTM r-- !

3,4
-;:;-r I b ~O,04

_.
1I ,
r
".'"" - -
i
-.
Case 2
For components (also forged coniponents) of non-
3,2 alloyed structural steel, of fine grain structural steel, of
3,0 normalized quenched and tempered steel, of cast steel
0,08
2,8 - ~I and of aluminium alloys there is
I
2,6 I (5.12.4)
I s = deff.
OJ2
2,4 I
2,2
0,2
2,0
, : I
1,8
0;4
],6 .,
1,4
I
.
I
0,6
I "'"7J
;
-\

1,2 ;
1,0
i.o 1;21,41,61,8 2,02,22,42,62,K 3,()
-. . - 1Ilb

Figure 5.12.1 Stress concentration factor for the

substitute structure, with reference to Chapter 5.2,
Figure 5.2.15.

1 MAX means, that the larger term one the right side of the equation
applies.

2 The approximation formula is a provisional one and is to be applied

with caution.
 231
6.1 Shaft with shoulder 6 Examples

6 Examples 2 MATERIAL PROPERTIES

1R61 EN.docl Tensile strength and yield strength for the standard
dimension
6.1 Shaft with shoulder *1
Rm,N = 1000 MPa, Rp,N = 800 MPa. Tab. 5.1.4
Key words: Shaft with shoulder, milled steel,
assessment of static strength, assessment of fatigue Technological size factor
limit, fatigue notch factor by calculation, type of ad,m = 0,30, ad,p = 0,44 , Tab. 1.2.1
overloading F2, multiaxial stresses, rotating bending deff,N = 16 mm,
and torsion. Supplemented: improved calculation of the deff = d = 42 mm, Tab. 1.2.3
fatigue limit, calculation using a class of utilization. ~,m = 0,895, Kd,p = 0,841 . (1.2.9)
Given: Anisotropy factor
Stresses: constant amplitude loading in bending and (1.2.17)
torsion, where the nominal stresses are, Figure 6.1.1,
Tensile strength and yield strength of the component
Sb = ±Sa,b = ±150 MPa, R m = 0,895 . 1 . 1000 MPa = 895 MPa, (1.2.1)
r, = Tm,t ± Ta,t = 50 MPa ± 100 MPa. R, = 0,841 . 1 . 800 MPa = 672 MPa .

3 DESIGN PARAMETERS
The calculation is carried out by applying the section
factor np1, although a satisfactory assessment could be
Figure 6.1.1 Shaft with shoulder. obtained without considering the section factor, that is
np1 = 1 (results given in parenthesis).

Material: 41 Cr 4 after DIN EN 10 083. Design factor for bending

Dimensions: Section factor

D = 50 mm, d = 42 mm, r = 5 mm, t = 4 mm, Rp,max = 1050 MPa, Tab. 1.3.1
d / D = 0,84, r / d = 0,119, r / t = 1,25. Rp = 685 MPa,
Surface: average roughness Rz = 10 urn. Kp,b = 1,70, Tab. 1.3.2
Ilpl,b = MIN (J1050/685; 1,70) = 1,250 (1,000).
Type of overloading: When overloaded in service the
(1.3.9)
stress ratios remain constant (Type of overloading F2).
Design factor
Safety requirement: according to the statements "with
moderate consequences of failure; regular inspections".
KSK b = I = 0,800 (1,000). (1.3.1)
, 1,250 (1)
Task: Assessment of the component static strength and
of the component fatigue limit. Design factor for torsion
Method of calculation: Rod-shaped (ID) component. Section factor
Assessment with nominal stresses, Chapter 1 and 2.
Rp,max = 1050 MPa, Tab. 1.3.1
R, = 685 MPa,
ASSESSMENT Kp,t = 1,33 , Tab. 1.3.2
OF THE COMPONENT STATIC STRENGTH npl,t = MIN ( .J1050 / 685 ; 1,33) = 1,250 (1,000).
(1.3.9)
1 CHARACTERISTIC STRESSES
Design factor
Maximum stresses
Smax,ex,b = + Sa,b = 150 MPa, (1.1.1) KSK t = 1 = 0,800 (1,000). (1.3.1)
Tmax,ex,t = Tm,t + Ta,t = 150 MPa. *2 , 1,250 (1)

1 Results ofcomputation obtained by the PC-program "WELLE".

2 Numbering of equations, tables and figures according to the main

chapters of the guideline.
 232
6.1 Shaft with shoulder 6 Examples

4 COMPONENT STATIC STRENGTH Combined types of stress

Component static strength for bending and torsion f,; = 1 /..[3, Tab. 1.2.5
Component static strength for bending resulting from q = 0, (1.6.7)
the tensile strength and the design factor: s = aSK,b = 0,235 (0,294), (1.6.6)
t = aSK,t = 0,406 (0,506),
fa = 1, Tab. 1.2.5
1·895:MPa
aGH = ~0,235 (0,294)2 +0,406 (0,506)2 (1.6.5)
SSK b = = 1119 (895) MPa. (1.4.1) = 0,469 (0,585),
, 0,800 (1)
aSK,Sv = 0,469 (0,585). (1.6.4)
Component static strength for torsion resulting from the
shear strength factor f,; , the tensile strength and the
design factor: The degree of utilization of the component static
strength is 47 % (or without section factor 59 %).
f,; = 0,58, Tab. 1.2.5
The assessment of the static strength is achieved.
T _ 0,58· 895:MPa
SK,t - 0,800 (1) = 646 (519) MPa. (1.4.1)

ASSESSMENT OF THE FATIGUE STRENGTH

5 SAFETY FACTORS 1 CHARACTERISTIC STRESSES

In general there is Constant amplitude stresses

jm = 2,0, jp = 1,5. Tab. 1.5.1 Sb = ± Sa,b = ±150 MPa, (2.1.1)

For moderate consequences of failure and high
r, = Tm,t ± Ta,t = 50 MPa ± 100 MPa.
probability of occurrence of the characteristic stress,
however, there is
2 MATERIAL PROPERTIES
jm = 1,75 , jp = 1,3. Tab. 1.5.1
Material fatigue limits for completely reversed normal
For normal temperature there is stress, crW,zd , and shear stress, 'tw,s :
KT,m = KT,p = 1, (1.2.26) R m = 895 Mpa,
and in Eq. (1.5.4) the terms 3 and 4 have no relevance: fw,e = 0,45 , Tab. 2.2.1
crW,zd = 0,45 . 895 MPa = 403 Mpa , (2.2.1)
Rp = 685 MPa, fw,,; = 0,58, Tab. 2.2.1
Rm = 895 MPa, 'tw,s = 0,58 . 403 MPa = 233 Mpa . (2.2.1)
jges =MAX(I,75;1,3. 895) (1.5.4) .
685
= MAX (1,75; 1,70) = 1,75. 3 DESIGN PARAMETERS

The tensile strength R m (term 1) is determining. Design (actor for bending

Fatigue notch factor

6 ASSESSMENT Analytically derived from the stress concentration factor

Maximum stresses for bending and for torsion, see Stress concentration factor
above, r / d = 0,119, r / t = 1,25, d / D = 0,84,
Kt,b = 1,557 . (5.2.7)
Smax,ex,b = 150 MPa, T max.ex.t 0= 150 MPa.
Component static strength for bending and for torsion, KcKfratio
see above, d / D = 0,84, t / r = 0,8 ,
<p = 0,179 , Tab 2.3.3
SSK,b = 1108 (895) MPa, TSK,t, = 642 (519) MPa.
r=5mm,
Ga(r) = 0,542 mnr! ,
Degrees of utilization
aa = 0,5 , bG = 2700 , Tab. 2.3.2
Individual types of stress, bending and torsion Rm = 895 MPa,
Ocr(r) = 1,109. (2.3.14)
150
aSK,b = 1119 (895)/1,75 = 0,235 (0,294), (1.6.1)

150
aSK,t = 646 (519)/1,75 = 0,406 (0,506).
 233
6.1 Shaft with shoulder 6 Examples

d = 42mm, For no surface treatment is Ky = 1. Therefore:

Gcr(d) = 2 I d = 0,0476 mm" , (2.3.17) Design factor
ncr (d) = 1,022 (2.3.13)
KWKt
, = 1,134 + 1 10,917 -1 = .1,224 (2.3.1)
Fatigue notch factor
1,557
Kfb = - - - - - 1,374. (2.3.10) 4 COMPONENT FATIGUE STRENGTH
, 1, 109 ·1, 022
Component fatigue limit for completely reversed
Roughness factor
bending and torsional stress
R m = 895 MPa , Rz = 10 urn ,
Component fatigue limit for completely reversed
aR,cr = 0,22, Rm,N,min = 400 MPa, Tab. 2.3.4 bending stress resulting from the material fatigue limit
KR,cr = 0,857 . (2.3.26) for normal stress and the design factor for bending:
For no surface treatment is Ky= 1. For steel and cast (2.4.1)
SWK,b = 403 MPa I 1,541 = 261 MPa .
iron materials is Ks = 1. For materials except GG is
KNL,E = 1. Therefore: Component fatigue limit for completely reversed
torsional stress resulting from the material fatigue limit
Design factor
for shear stress and the design factor for torsion:
KWK,b = 1,374 + 1 10,857 - 1 = 1,541 (2.3.1) TWK,t = 233 MPa 11,224 = 190 MPa . (2.4.1)
Amplitude of the component fatigue limit for the given
mean stress for bending and torsion
Design factor for torsion
Mean stress sensitivity
The calculation is as for bending.
Rm = 895 MPa,
Fatigue strength reduction factor Tab. 2.4.2
aM = 0,00035, bM = -0,1 ,
Analytically derived from the stress concentration Mcr = 0,213 , (2.4.34)
factor. fw,'t = 0,577 , Tab. 2.2.1
M't = 0,577 . 0,213 = 0,123 . (2.4.34)
Stress concentration factor
Equivalent mean stress
rid = 0,119, r/t = 1,25, diD = 0,84,
Kt,t = 1,283 . (5.2.8) Sm = Sm,b = 0, (2.4.31)
T m = Tm,t =.50 MPa,
Kt- Kf ratio
fw,'t = 0,577 , Tab. 2.2.1
diD = 0,84, t I r = 0,8 , q = °, (2.4.29)
r = 5mm
-
Smv
, = Smv
, ,GH = J3 . 50 MPa =
86,6 MPa ,
G't (r) = 0,230 mm-I , Tab. 2.3.3 (2.4.29) (2.4.28)
aa = 0,5, bG = 2700 , Tab. 2.3.2 Tm,v = 0,577 . 86,6 MPa = 50 MPa . (2.4.30)
Rm is to be replaced by fw,.. Rm. Calculation for the type of overloading F2.
fw,'t = 0,577 , Tab. 2.2.1 Mean stress factor for bending
Rm = 895 MPa,
fw,'t' R m = 517 MPa, Smin b v = 86,6 MPa- 150 MPa =- 63,4 MPa ,
n't (r) = 1,098 . (2.3.14) Sma:,~,v = 86,6 MPa + 150 MPa = 236 MPa,
d = 42 mm, Rb,v =- 0,267 , (2.4.27)
G't(d) = 2 I d = 0,0476 mml, (2.3.17) Because of - 00 < -0,267 ~ 0 field II applies:
n't(d) = 1,031. (2.3.13)
M cr = 0,213 ,
Fatigue notch factor
1,283
1
KAK,b = 1+0,213.86,61150 = °' 890 . (2.4.10)

Kf,t = 1,097.1,031 = 1,134 . (2.3.10)

Mean stress factor for torsion
. Roughness factor T mm,
. t,v = 50 MPa- 100 MPa =- 50 MPa,
Tmax,t,v = 50 MPa + 100 MPa = 150 MPa ,
Rm = 895 MPa, Rz = 10 urn ,
Rt,v =- 0,333 , (2.4.27)
fw,'t = 0,58 , Tab. 2.2.1
aR,cr = 0,22, Rm,N,min = 400 MPa , Tab. 2.3.4
KR,'t = 0,917 . (2.3.26)
 234
6.1 Shaft with shoulder 6 Examples

Because of -1 < -0,333 s ° field II applies: Amplitude of the component variable amplitude fatigue
strength for bending and for torsion, see above,
M, = 0,123 ,
1 TSBK,b = 233 MPa, TBK,I = 179 MPa.
KAK,I = 1+0,123.50/100 = 0,942 . (2.4.10)

Residual stress factor for normal stress and for shear Degrees of utilization
stress
Individual types of stress, bending and torsion,
KE,cr = KE,'t = 1. (2.4.5)
Amplitude of the component fatigue limit 150
a BK,b = 233/1,2 = 0 773 (2 6 1)
' , ..
The amplitude of the component fatigue limit results
from the mean stress factor, the residual stress factor a = 100 = 0 670 .
BK,t 179/1 ,2 '
and the component fatigue limit for completely reversed
bending and torsional stress: Combined types of stress
SAK,b = 0,890 . 1 . 261 MPa = 233 MPa, (2.4.6) fw,'t = 1//3, Tab. 2.2.1
TAK,I = 0,942 . 1 . 190 MPa = 179 MPa . q = 0, (2.6.7)
Component variable amplitude fatigue strength for Sa = aBK,b = 0,773 , (2.6.6)
bending and torsion ta = aBK,t = 0,670 ,

Considering the component constant amplitude fatigue aGH = ~0,7732 +0,670 2 1,023 , (2.6.5)
limit, N > No,cr and N > No,'t , and the S-N curve aBK,Sv = 1,023 . (2.6.4)
model I (horizontal for N > No,cr and N > No,'t) the
variable amplitude fatigue strength factors for bending
and for torsion is The degree of utilization of the component fatigue
limit is 102 %•
. KBK,b = KBK,I = 1. (2.4.48)
The assessment of the fatigue limit is approximately
The amplitude of the component variable amplitude achieved.
fatigue strength results from the variable amplitude
fatigue strength factor and from the amplitude of the
component fatigue limit for bending and for torsion,
SBKb = 1· 233 MPa = 233 MPa, (2.4.41)
TB~,t = 1 . 179 MPa = 179 MPa .

5 SAFETY FACTORS
In general there is
In = 1,5 . (2.5.1)
For moderate consequence of failure and regular
inspection, however, there is
jo = 1,2. Tab. 2.5.1
For normal temperature there is
KT,o = 1, (2.2.4)
and therefore
jges = 1,2. (2.5.4)

6 ASSESSMENT
Largest stress amplitudes for bending and for torsion,
see above,
Sa,b,1 = Sa,b = 150 MPa ,
T a.t, I = Ta.t = 100 MPa.
 235
6.1 Shaft with shoulder 6 Examples

Complementary assessment 1: Degrees of utilization

Amplitude of the component fatigue limit for the Individual types of stress, bending and torsion,
given mean stress - improved method of calculation
according to Chapter 5.9 aBK b = 150 = 0,732 , (2.6.1)
, 246/1,2
Related equivalent stress amplitude for bending and
torsion a
BK,1
= 168/1,2 '
°
100 = 715 .
Sa,b = 150 MPa, SWK,b = 262 MPa ,
Sa = 150 / 262 = 0,573 , (5.9.3) Combined types of stress
Ta,l = 100 MPa, TWK,1 = 190 MPa, fw,'t = 1 /.J3, Tab. 2.2.1
t a = 100 / 190 = 0,526 , q = 0, (2.6.7)
2 2 sa = aBK,b = 0,732 , (2.6.6)
sa,v =JO,573 +0,526 = 0,778 . (5.9.2)
ta = aBK,1 = 0,715 ,
Related equivalent mean stress for bending and torsion 2 2
aGH =JO,732 +0,715 = 1,023 , (2.6.5)
1 8·0,573·0,526
B3 = - ' = 1028 aBK,Sv = 1,023 . (2.6.4)
J3 3.0,573 2 +(4/3).0,526 2 '

7.0,573 2 +12.0,526 2
A4
2 2
= 7,224 Tab. 5.9.1 Complementary assessment 2:
0,573 +0,526
Assessment applying a class of utilization
The constants B I , Al and AS are not needed as Sm =0.
Differing from the constant amplitude loading condi-
Tm,l = 50 MPa, TWK,1 = 190 MPa, tions and the assessment of the fatigue limit considered
t m = 50/190 = 0,263 , (5.9.6) above an assessment of a variable amplitude loading
Sm = 0, according to the class of utilization B5 is carried out
Sms = (3/7) . 1,028' 0,263 = 0,116 , here. In this case the class of utilization B5 may, for
t ml = (1 /E) .J7,224.0,263
2
= 0,154, example, stand for binominally distributed amplitudes
of the stress spectrum, a spectrum parameter p = 1/3
sm,v = 0,87 . (0,116 + 0,154) = 0,235 . (5.9.5)
and a required total number of cyclesN = 107 , Table
Common mean stress factor 5.7.2.
smin,v = 0,235 - 0,778 = - 0,543 , (5.9.18)
The variable amplitude fatigue strength factor for the
smax,v = 0,235 + 0,778 = 1,013 ,
class of utilization B5 for bending and for torsion is
Rcr,v - 0,543 / 1,013 - 0,536
KBK,b = 1,26, KBK,1 = 1,15 . Tab 5.7.1
Because of - 00 < -0,267 ~ 0 field II applies:
The amplitudes of the component variable amplitude
Mcr = 0,213 ,
fatigue strength for bending and for torsion for bending
1
and for torsion are
KAK,v = 1+0,213.0,235/0,778 = 0,940. (2.4.13)
(2.4.41)
Residual stress factor for normal stress and for shear SBK,b = KBK,b . SAK,b = 1,26' 246 MPa =
stress = 310 MPa,
TBK,1 = KBK,I' TAK,1 = 1,15' 168 MPa =
KE,cr = KE;t = 1. (2.4.5) = 193 MPa.
The amplitude of the component fatigue limit results With these values instead of the values 246 MPa and
from the mean stress factor, the residual stress factor 168 MPa the degrees of utilization are lower than those
and the component fatigue limit for completely reversed from above.
bending and torsional stress:
SAK,b = KAK,v . KE,cr . SWK,b = (2.4.6)
= 0,940' I . 262 MPa = 246 MPa,
TAK,1 = KAK,v . KE,'t . SWK,b =
= 0,940 . 1 . 190 MPa = 168 MPa.
Using these values instead of the values 233 MPa and
179 MPa somewhat different degrees of utilization are
obtained.
 236
6.2 Shaft with V-belt drive 6 Examples

6.2 Shaft with V-belt drive *1
lR62 EN .docl
Key words: Shaft, V-belt drive, rolled steel,
assessment of the static strength, assessment of the
fatigue limit, type of overloading F 1, combined types
of stress.
Given
Loading: Maximum torque (rated torque), idealized as
a fluctuating loading (load ratio RM = 0), figure 6.2.1:
M, = M max = 1 kNm.
Surface: average roughness of the shaft: Rz = 25 J..Lm.
Type of overloading: when overloaded in service the
tension of the belt remains constant and with that the
mean stress remains approximately constant as well
(Type of overloading Fl).
Safety requirements: according to the statements
"severe consequences of failure; no regular
inspections" .
Task: Assessment of the component static strength and
(6.2.1) assessment of the component fatigue limit.

Material: St 60 after DIN EN 10 025. Method of calculation: Rod-shaped (ID) componerit.

Assessment using nominal stresses, Chapter 1 and 2.
Dimensions:
Length of shaft 1 = 400 mm,
diameter of shaft d = 56 mm. ASSESSMENT
Pulley in center position, bearing on the left OF THE COMPONENT STATIC STRENGTH
horizontally fixed, torque input at the right end. 1 LOADINGS
Specifying the loadings is not subject of the guideline.
Therefore the loadings are outlined here in brief *2.
M, is the torque input to the shaft. The torque input
results in a maximum of six loads F x , ... , M, at the
pulley. The initial tension of the belt results in a
ZCA.l--~-+-HlI.-----~Mf---t
maximum of two lateral forces F y , Fz . The sense of
rotation and direction of input and output are not
important for the loads.
The torque is transmitted by the initial tension and
frictional contact of the belt. Therefore the loadings
"torque" and "initial tension" are to be distinguished.
The axial load of the shaft and the lateral moments at
the pulley are zero:
Z
(6.2.2)

Data ofthe drive

Diameter of pulley No.1: d 1W = 200 mm,
Diameter of pulley No 2: d2W = 100 mm,
Center distance: e = 200 mm,
Wedge angle: Ys = 35°,
Friction coefficient between belt and pulley: J..L= 0,1.

Calculation equations
Figure 6.2.1 Shaft and loads due to the torque M n at
the V-belt drive. F I - F 2 = F, *2 Loading "torque"
Circumferential force transmitting the torque
Ft=Mn ' 2/d 1w ,
= 1000 kNmm . 2 I 200 mm = 10 kN. (6.2.3)
Inclination of the belt
sin a, = (d 1w - d2w) 12e, (6.2.4)
1 Results of computation obtained by the PC-program "Welle"
= (200 - 100) mm I (2 . 200 mm) = 0,25 ,
2 Full presentation of the example s given in the manual of the a, = 14,48°.
PC-program "Welle".
 237
6.2 Shaft with V-belt drive 6 Examples

Resulting loads Mz - 2,349kNm

A ..----'''--'---------~i1___7z
r, = Fy = 0, (6.2.5) y~
..;.,::
Fz = + F, . sin a. = 10 kN . 0,25 = 2,5 kN , o
lI:l
C>J
M, = M; = I kNm , B«<::...-----------.J o
II
My=Mz= O.
ails b622 -:t.
Load "initial tension"
Value of the groove angle Figure 6.2.2 Resulting moments at mid shaft.

Ys = 35 0.

Effective coefficient of friction (6.2.6) ASSESSMENT

OF THE COMPONENT STATIC STRENGTH
J.lth = ~ / sin(ys / 2) = 0,1 / sin(35012) = 0,3326 .
_3 1 CHARACTERISTIC STRESSES
Arc of belt contact at the smaller pulley (No.2)
(6.2.7) The reference point for the assessment of the static
strength is in the middle of the shaft (to the right of the
~ = 180° - 2 ·1a.1 = 180° - 2· 14,48 = 151,0°. pulley).
For the smaller pulley there is a. < 0 and ~ < 180 0. For Maximum bending moment (point B in Figure 6.2.2)
the larger Pulley there is a. > 0 and ~ < 180°.
Auxiliary variable Mb= M yz =~M~ +M; (6.2.12)

m = exp (~th . ~ . n / 180°), . (6.2.8) =~0,250kNm2+ 2, 349kNm 2 = 2,362 kNm.

= exp (0,3326 . 151,0°. n /180°) = 2,403.
Maximum torsion moment
Necessary minimum initial tension for transmitting the
maximum torque *4
2 m+l
I Id
Fs p = M, ·-·--·cosa.
1w m->I
(6.2.9) Extreme maximum stresses *5

2 2,403+1 Smax ex b = 32 Mb / pd 3 (1.1.1)

= 1000 kNmm' 200mm 2,403-1 . cosine 14,47° = '32' 2,362 kNm / (n . (56 mm)3 ) = 137 MPa ,
= 23,49 kN. T max ex t = 16 M t / pd 3
= 't6'· 1 kNm / (rt . (56 mm)3 ) = 29,0 MPa.
Resulting loads
F x = 0, (6.2.10)
Fy = + F sp = 23,49 kN, 2 MATERIAL PROPERTIES
Fz = 0, Tensile strength and yield strength for the standard
M x= M y= M z= O. dimension
Rm,N = 590 MPa, Rp,N = 335 MPa. Tab. 5.1.1
Technological size factor
2 RESULTING MOMENTS AT MID SHAFT
From the loadings "maximum torque" (M; = 1 kNm ad,m = 0,15 , ad,p = 0,3 , Tab. 1.2.1
and F z = 2,5 kN) and from the loading "initial tension" deff,N = 40 mm ,
(Fy = 23,486 kN) the moments in the middle of the shaft deff = d = 56 mm , Tab. 1.2.3
~,m = 0,982, Kd,p = 0,960 . (1.2.9)
(to the right of the pulley) are
Anisotropy factor
M, = - 1 kNm, (6.2.11)
My = + F, . I / 4 = 2,5 kN . 400 mm / 4 K A = 1. (1.2.17)
= + 0,250 kNm,
. M z = - F y . I /4 = 23,49 kN . 400 mm / 4 Tensile strength and yield strength of the component
= - 2,349 kNm . R m = 0,982 . 1 ·590 MPa = 579 MPa, (1.2.1)
Rp = 0,960 . 1 . 335 MPa = 321 MPa .
The bending moments My and M, are presented in
Figure 6.2.2. The loading without torque (only initial
tension) corresponds to the point A. The loading under
maximum M, torque (including initial tension)
corresponds to the point B. 4 Practically anincreased initial tension value needs tobeconsidered.
5 From here on the numbers of equations, tables and figures are
those of the guideline.
3 Torque and the pre-tension aretobedetermined for the smaller pulley
 238
6.2 Shaft with V-belt drive 6 Examples

3 DESIGN PARAMETERS 6 ASSESSMENT

Design factor for bending Maximum stresses for bending and for torsion, see
above,
Section factor
Smax,ex,b = 137,0 MPa, Tmax,ex,t'= 29,0 MPa.
Rp,max = 1050 MPa , Tab. 1.3.1
Rp = 321 MPa, Component static strength for bending and for torsion,
Kp,b = 1,70, Tab. 1.3.2 see above,
npl,b = MIN (J1050/321 ; 1,70)= 1,70, 1.3.9) SSK,b = 985 MPa, TSK,t = 447 MPa .
Design factor
KSK,b = 1 / 1,70 = 0,588. (1.3.1) Degrees of utilization
Individual types of stress, bending and torsion,
Design factor for torsion
137 = 0376 (1.6.1)
Section factor aSK,b = 985 I 2,70 ' ,

Rp,max = 1050 MPa , Tab. 1.3.1 a = 29,0 = 0176.

Rp = 321 MPa, SK,t 447 I 2,70 '
Kp,t = 1,33 , Tab. 1.3.2
Combined types of stress
npI,t = MIN (J1050/321 ; 1,33) = 1,33. 1.3.9)
f't = 0,577 , Tab. 1.2.5
Design factor
q = 0, (1.6.7)
KSK,t = 1 / 1,33 = 0,752. (1.3.1) s = aSK,b = 0,376 , (1.6.6)
t = aSK t = 0,176,
4 COMPONENT STATIC STRENGTH aGH = ~0,3762 +0,176 2 = 0,415 , (1.6.5)
Component static strength for bending and torsion aSK,Sv = 0,415 . (1.6.4)

Component static strength for bending resulting from The degree of utilization of the component static
the tensile strength and design factor: strength is 42 %.
The assessment of the static strength is achieved.
fa = 1 , Tab. 1.2.5
SSK,b = 579 MPa / 0,588 = 985 MPa . (1.4.1)
Component static strength for torsion resulting from the ASSESSMENT
shear strength factor f't , the tensile strength and the OF THE COMPONENT FATIGUE STRENGTH
design factor:
1 CHARACTERISTIC STRESSES
f't = 0,577 , Tab. 1.2.5
TSK,t = 0,577 . 579 MPa / 0,752 = 445 MPa . Again the reference point for the assessment of the
fatigue strength is in the middle of the shaft (to the
(1.4.1)
right of the pulley).
Cyclic bending moment
5 SAFETY FACTORS
The mean value and amplitude of the maximum cyclic
For severe consequences of failure and high probability
bending moment is to be determined.
of the occurrence of the characteristic stress there is
The mean value of the bending moment for the rotating
jm = 2,0 , jp = 1,5. Tab. 1.5.1
shaft is
For normal temperature there is
KT,m = KT,p = 1, (1.2.26)
Mm,b = °
The maximum amplitude of the bending moment for the
and in Eq. (1.5.4) the terms 3 and 4 have no relevance: rotating shaft is, as for the assessment of the static
strength,
Rp = 321 MPa,
R m = 579 MPa, Ma,b = 2,362 kNm.

jges = MAX (2,0; 1,5. 579) (1.5.4)

321
= MAX (2,0; 2,70) = 2,70.
The yield strength Rp (the second term) is determining.
 239
6.2 Shaft with V-belt drive 6 Examples

The amplitude of the bending moment is varying within For no surface treatment is Ky = 1. For steel and cast
the limits defined by no torque input or maximum iron materials is Ks = 1. For materials except GG is
torque input, points A and B in Figure 6.2.2. The KNL,E = 1. Therefore:
assumption of a continuous action of the maximum
Design factor
bending moment is an approach on the safe side.
Fluctuating torsion moment
KWK,b = 0,979 + 1/0,858 - 1 = 1,144 (2.3.1)

The mean value and amplitude of the torsion moment

fluctuating between zero and maximum is Design factor for torsion
Mm,t = Ma,t =IMxl /2 = 0,5 kNm. Fatigue notch factor

It is valid for the non-rotating shaft too. Stress concentration factor for the cylindrical shaft *6

Characteristic stresses Kt,t = 1.

The cyclic stresses resulting from the bending moment K,-K r ratios, no notchradius,
and the torsion moment are
G, (r) = 0, n, (r) = 1 ,
Sm b = 0,
, 3
(2.1.1) d = 56 mm,
Sa,b = 32 Ma,b / pd G, (d) = 2/ d = 0,0357 mm -1 , (2.3.17)
= 32 . 2,362 kNm / (n . (56 mmr' ) = 137 MPa n, (d) = 1,027 . (2.3.13)
Tm,t = 16 Mt,m / pd 3
Fatigue notch factor
= 16 . 0,5 kNm / (n . (56 mm)3 ) = 14,5 MPa ,
Ta,t = Tm,t == 14,5 MPa. Kf,t = 1 / (1 . 1,027) = 0,974. (2.3.10)
2 MATERIAL PARAMETERS Roughness factor
Material fatigue limits for completely reversed normal R m = 579 MPa , R z = 25 um ,
stress, crW,zd , and shearstress, 'tw,s, : fw" = 0,58, Tab. 2.2.1
aR,cr = 0,22, Rm,N,min = 400 MPa , Tab. 2.3.4
R m = 579 MPa,
KR" = 0,918 . (2.3.26)
fw,cr = 0,45 , Tab. 2.2.1
crW,zd = 0,45 . 579 MPa = 261 MPa , (2.2.1) For no surface treatment is Ky = 1. For steel and cast
f w " = 0,577 , Tab. 2.2.1 iron materials is Ks = 1. For materials except GG is
'tw,s = 0,577 . 261 MPa = 151 MPa . (2.2.1) KNL,E = 1. Therefore:
Design factor

3 DESIGN PARAMETERS KWK,t = 0,974 + 1/0,918 - 1 = 1,063 (2.3.1)

Design factor for bending

Fatigue notch factor
Stress concentration factor for the cylindrical shaft *6
Kt,b = 1.
K,-K r ratios, no notch radius,
G cr (r) = 0, ncr (r) = 1 ,
d = 56 mm,
Gcr(d) = 2/ d = 0,0357 mm -1 ,
ncr (d) = 1,022 .
Fatigue strength reduction factor
4 COMPONENT FATIGUE STRENGTH
Component fatigue limit for completely reversed
bending and torsional stress
Component fatigue limit for completely reversed
bending stress resulting from the material fatigue limit
for normal stress and the design factor for bending,
SWK,b = 261 MPa /1,144 = 228 MPa. (2.4.1)
(2.3.17)
Component fatigue limit for completely reversed
(2.3.13) torsional stress resulting from the material fatigue limit
for shear stress and the design factor for torsion,

Kf,b = 1 / (1 . 1,022) = 0,979 . (2.3.10) TWK,t = 151 MPa / 1,063 = 142 MPa . (2.4.1)

Roughness factor

R m = 579 MPa, R z = 25 um ,
aR,cr = 0,22, Rm,N,min = 400 MPa, Tab. 2.3.4 6 Assuming an unnotched cylindrical shaft is an unrealistic simplifica-
KR,cr = 0,858 . (2.3.26) tion for the present example. Actually a keyway or a press-fit between
pulley andshaft, Chapter 5.3.3.4, would have to beconsidered.
 240
6.2 Shaft with V-belt drive 6 Examples

Amplitude of the component fatigue limit for the given model I (horizontal for N > ND,e; and N > ND,'t ) the
mean stress for bending and torsion variable amplitude fatigue strength factors for bending
and for torsion is
Mean stress sensitivity
KBK,b = KBK,t = 1. (2.4.48)
Rm = 579 MPa,
aM = 0,00035 , bM = - 0,1 , Tab. 2.4.2 The amplitude of the component variable amplitude
Me; = 0,103 , (2.4.34) fatigue strength results from the variable amplitude
fW;t = 0,577 , Tab. 2.2.1 fatigue strength factor and from the amplitude of the
M't = 0,577 . 0,103 = 0,059 . (2.4.34) component fatigue limit for bending and for torsion,
Equivalent mean stress SBK b = 1 . 225 MPa = 225 MPa, (2.4.41)
Sm = Sm,b = °,
T m = Tm,t = 14,5 MPa ,
(2.4.31)
TB~,t = 1 . 141 MPa = 141 MPa.

fw,'t = 0,577 , Tab. 2.2.1 5 SAFETY FACTORS

q = °, (2.4.29)
For severe consequence of failure and no regular
Sm,v = Sm,v,GH =J3 .
14,5 MPa = 25,1 MPa, inspections there is
(2.4.29) (2.4.28)
Tm,v = 0,577 ·25,1 MPa = 14,5 MPa . (2.4.30) .io = 1,5. (2.5.1), Tab. 2.5.1
Calculation for the type of overloading F1. For normal temperature there is
Mean stress factor for bending KT,D =1, (2.2.5)
Jges = 1,5 . (2.5.4)
Sm,b,v = Sm,v / SWK,b = 25,1 /228 = 0,110,
Me; = 0,103 ,
- 1 / (1 - Me;) = - 1 / (1 - 0,103) = - 1,115 , 6 ASSESSMENT
1 / (1 + Me;) = 1 / (1 + 0,103) = 0,907 .
Largest stress amplitudes for bending and for torsion,
Because of - 1,115:::;; 0,110:::;; 0,907 field II applies: see above,
KAK,e; = 1 - 0,103 . 0,110 = 0,989 . (2.4.15) Sa b l = Sa b = 137 MPa ,
Mean stress factor for torsion Ta',t:! = T a:t = 14,5 MPa .
Amplitude of the component variable amplitude fatigue
tm,t,v = Tm,v / TWK,t = 14,5/142 = 0,102
strength for bending and for torsion, see above,
M, = 0,059,
1 / (1 + M't) = 1 / (1 + 0,059) = 0,944 . SBK,b = 225 MPa, TBK,t = 141 MPa .
Because of 0:::;; 0,102:::;; 0,944 field II applies: Degrees of utilization
KAK,'t = 1 - 0,059' 0,102 = 0,994. (2.4.15) Individual types of stress, bending and torsion,
Residual stress factor aBK,b = 137
225/15
,
= °9~
' ~.J, (2 • 6 • 1)
For normal stress and for shear stress there is
a t = 14,5 = 0,155 .
KE,e; = KE,'t = 1. (2.4.5) BK, 141/ 1,5
Amplitude of the component fatigue limit Combined types of stress
The amplitude of the component fatigue limit results fw,'t = 0,577 , Tab. 2.2.1
from the mean stress factor, the residual stress factor q = 0, (2.6.7)
and the component fatigue limit for completely reversed (2.6.6)
Sa = aBK,b = 0,913 ,
bending stress and torsional stress,
ta = aBK,t = 0,155 .
SAK,b = 0,989 . 1 . 228 MPa = 225 MPa, (2.4.6) aGH = ~0,9132 +0,155 2 = 0,926 , (2.6.5)
TAK,t = 0,994 . 1 . 142 MPa = 141 MPa .
aBK,Sv = 0,926. (2.6.4)

Component variable amplitude fatigue strength for

bending and torsion
Variable amplitude fatigue strength factor
Considering the component constant amplitude fatigue
limit, N > ND,e; and N > ND,'t , and the S-N curve
The degree of utilization of the component fatigue
limit is 93 %.
The assessment of the fatigue limit is achieved. *7

7 See the objections in footnote 4 and 6, however.

 241
6.3 Compressor flange made of grey cast iron 6 Examples

6.3 Compressor flange made of grey ASSESSMENT

cast iron "'I 1R63 EN.docl OF THE COMPONENT STATIC STRENGTH

1 CHARACTERISTIC STRESSES

Key words: Grey cast iron GG-30, assessment of the Maximum stresses *2 (3.1.6)
static strength, assessment of the fatigue limit, local
GI ,max ,ex = 33,6 MPa, G2,max ,ex = 11,2 MPa .
elastic stresses, type of overloading F2, elevated
temperature, combined types of stresses GI and G2 .
2 MATERIAL PROPERIES
Given
Tensile strength for the standard dimension
Stresses: Proportional, constant amplitude loading,
locally elastic stresses in the directions 1 (longitudinal) Rm,N = 300 MPa . Tab. 5.1.14
and 2 (circumferential) at the reference point (node 99)
Technological size factor
of a block-shaped (3D) component, Figure 6.3.1,
deff = 2s = 2 . 32 mm = 64 mm , Tab. 3.2.3
GI = GI,m ± GI,a = 15,0 MPa ± 18,6 MPa , Kd,m = 0,800 . (3.2.5)
G2 = G2,m ± G2,a = 5,0 MPa ± 6,2 MPa ,
G3 = 0. Anisotropy factor

Stress amplitudes at the neighbouring point (node 98) in KA = 1. (3.2.18)

a distance s = 7,7 mm below the surface Tensile strength of the component
GI,a = ± 10,0 MPa, Rm = 0,800' 1 . 300 MPa = 240 MPa: (3.2.1)
G2,a = ± 5,3 MPa.
Temperature factors
Flange
aT,m = 1,6 , Tab. 3.2.6
KT m = 0,769 , (3.2.31)
Crr: = 25 , Tab. 3.2.7
111
aTt,m = - 1,46, bn,m = 2,36, CTt,m = - 0,90 ,
91. Pm = 10 - 4. (380 + 273) . (25 + 19 100.000) =
= 1,959, (3.2.35)
_ (-1,46+2,36.1,959-0,90.1,959 2 )
KTt,m -10 = 0,511 .

92 87 3 DESIGN PARAMETERS
6.~.1
Section factor for GG
Figure 6.3.1 Compressor flange made of grey cast iron.
npl,O'I = n pl,O'2 = 1. (3.3.7)
Constant KNL for the consideration of the non-linear
Material: GG-30 according to DIN 1691 or DIN EN elastic strain characteristic of GG for tension
i,:,61.
KNL = 1,05. Tab. 3.3.4
Temperature and time: T = 380°C, t = 100.000 h. Design factor for directions 1 and 2
Dimensions: Effective wall thickness at the reference KSK,O'I = KSK,O'2 = 1/ (1'1,05) = 0,952. (3.3.3)
point (node 99) s ;::: 32 mm.
Surface: Skin
4 COMPONENT STRENGTH
Type of overloading: : When overloaded in service the
Component strength resulting from the tensile strength
stress ratios remain constant (Type of overloading F2).
and the design factor. For directions 1 and 2 there is
Safety requirement: according to the statements: fO' = 1 , Tab. 3.2.
"severe consequences of failure; no regular inspection",
GI,SK = G2,SK = 240 MFa / 0,952 = 252 MPa .
casting tested non-destructively.
(3.4.3)
Task: Assessment of the static strength and assessment
of the fatigue limit.
I Results of computation obtained by the PC-program
Method of calculation: Block-shaped (3D) component. "RIFESTPLUS"
Assessment using local elastic stresses, Chapter 3 and 4 2 Numbers of Equations, tables and figures arethose of the
guideline.
 242
6.3 Compressor flange made of grey cast iron 6 Examples

5 SAFETY FACTORS
For severe consequences of failure and high probability Note: For the assessment of the component static
of the occurrence of the maximum stress and for non- strength the presented computation for the combined
destructively tested castings there is types of stress applies to both proportional stresses and
non-proportio-nal stresses o l and cr2, see footnote 1 in
Jm = 2,5 , jmt = 1,9 . Tab. 3.5.2
Chapter 3.6.
Because of the low elongation of GG the safety factor is
to be increased by ~j :
ASSESSMENT OF THE FATIGUE STRENGTH
~j = 0,5 , (3.5.2)
jm = 3,0 , jmt = 2,4 . 1 CHARACTERISTIC STRESSES

Temperature factors, see above, Constant amplitude cyclic stresses

KT,m = 0,769, KTt,m = 0,511 . crl.a = 18,6 MPa, 01,m = 15,0 MPa . (4.1.1 )
cr2,a = 6,2 MPa, 02.m = 5,0 MPa ,
For GG the terms 2 and 4 of Eq. (3.5.4) are not
relevant. Therefore
cr3,a = 0 , 03.m = °.
2 MATERIAL PROPERTIES
.
Jges
= MAX(~._2LJ
0,769'0,511
(3.5.4)
Material fatigue limit for completely reversed normal
= MAX (3,90; 4,70) = 4,70. stress, CfW,zd ,

The creep strength Rm,Tt is is determining, Figure R m = 240 MPa,

3.2.2. fw,cr = 0,30 , Tab. 4.2.1
crW,zd = 0,30 . 240 MPa = 72,0 MPa . (4.2.1 )
Temperature factor
6 ASSESSMENT
aT,D = 1,0, Tab. 4.2.2
Maximum stresses, see above, KT,D = 0,856 . (4.2.8)
crLmax.ex = 33,6 MPa, cr2,max,ex = 11,2 MPa .
Component strength values, see above, 3 DESIGN PARAMETERS

crl,SK = cr2,SK, = 252 MPa. Kt-Kf ratios (4.3.16)

Degrees of utilizaion
Gal __
7,7mm
I_.(I_IO,OJ
18,6
0,0600

Individual types of stress, directions 1 and 2

Go ?: -
- 7,7mm'
I (I - 6,2
5.3J = 0,0189 mm- l ,
33,6
aa = - 0,05, bG = 3200 , Tab. 4.3.2
nal = 1,179, n cr2 = 1,056. (4.3.10)
aSK,cr2 = 252/4,70 = 0,209 . Roughness factor
R m = 240 MPa,
Combined types of stress
Rz = 200 um , Ch.4.3.3
f, = 0,85 , Tab. 3.2.5 aR,cr = 0,06, Rm,N.min = 100 MPa, Tab. 4.3.4
q = 0,759 , (3.6.23) KR,cr = 0,906 , (4.3.26)
81 = aSK,crl = 0,627 , (3.6.22)
Surface treatment factor,
S2 = aSK.cr2 = 0,209 ,
K v = 1. (4.3.28)
aG H = ~. ((0,627 -0,209)2 +0,209 2
+0,627 2
)
Coating factor
= 0,553 , (3.6.21) KKS = 1. (4.3.29)
a NH = MAX (0,627; 0,209) = 0,627 ,
aSK.sY = 0,759 . 0,626 + (I - 0,759) . 0,553 = Constant KNL.E
= 0,608 . (3.6.20) KNL,E = 1,025 . Tah. 4.3 (
The degree of utilization of the component static
strength is 61 %.
The assessment of the static strength is achieved. *3
3 Even though the present assessment ofthe creep strength may he tar on
the safe side, see Chapter 3.1.0 on.Elevated temperature'
 243
6.3 Compressor flange made of grey cast iron 6 Examples

Design factors crl,AK = 0,713 . 1 . 79 MPa = 56 MPa , (4.4.8)

Kf = 1, Tab. 4.3.1 cr2,AK = 0,713 . 1 ·71 MPa = 50 MPa .
1 Component variable amplitude fatigue strength for
KWK,al = 1,1\9 -(1+i-( 0,:06 -1)) 1·1·1,025 bending and torsion
= 0,913, (4.3.3) Considering the component constant amplitude fatigue
1 limit, N > No,a and N > NO;t , and the S-N curve
KWK,a2 = 1,;56 -( 1+ i -( 0,:06 -1)) 1·1·1,025 model I (horizontal for N > NO,a and N > No,'t) the
variable amplitude fatigue strength factors for normal
= 1,019. stress is
KBK,al = KBK,a2 = 1. (4.4.47)
4 COMPONENT FATIGUE STRENGTH The amplitude of the component variable amplitude
Component fatigue limit for completely reversed fatigue strength results from the variable amplitude
normal stresses fatigue strength factor and from the amplitude of the
component fatigue limit for normal stress
Component fatigue limit for completely reversed
normal stress resulting from the material fatigue limit crl,BK = 1·56 MPa = 56 MPa, (4.4.45)
for normal stress and the design factors: cr2,BK = 1 . 50 MPa = 50 MPa.

crl,WK = 72,0 MPa / 0,913 = 79 MPa, (4.4.3)

cr2,WK = 72,0 MPa / 1,019 = 71 MPa. 5 SAFETY FACTORS
Amplitude of the component fatigue limit for the given For severe consequence of failure, for no regular
mean stress inspection and for castings tested non-destructively
Mean stress sensitivity .io = 1,9 . Tab. 4.5.2
aM = 0, b M = 0,5 , Tab. 4.4.2 Because of the low elongation of GG the safety factor is
M a = 0,5 . (4.4.34) to be increased by ~j :
According to Chapter 4.4.2.2 the individual mean
~j = 0,5 , (4.5.2)
stresses are to be applied instead of an equivalent mean
.in = 2,4.
stress. Calculation for the type of overloading F2.
Temperature factor, see above,
Mean stress factor for direction 1 (4.4.26)
KT,O = 0,856 .
crl,min = 15 MPa - 18,6 MPa = - 3,6 MPa ,
crl,max = 15 MPa MPa + 18,6 = 33,6 MPa, Total safety factor
Ral = - 3,6 / 33,6 = - 0,107 . jges = 2,4/0,856 = 2,80 . (4.5.4)
Because of - CX) < -0,107 ~ ° field II applies:
Ma = 0,5 , 6 ASSESSMENT
1
KAK,al = 1+0,5.15/18,6 = 0,713 . (4.4.10)
Stress amplitudes, see above

Mean stress factor for direction 2 cra,l = 18,6 MPa , cra,2 = 6,2 MPa .
The stress ratios of both directions agree: Amplitudes of the component variable amplitude fatigue
strength, see above,
R a 2 = Ral = - 0,107 ,
KAK,a2 = 0,713 . crl,BK = 56 MPa, cr2,BK = 50 MPa .
Residual stress factor
Degrees of utilization
For normal stress there is
Individual types of stress, direction 1 and 2
KE,a = 1. (4.4.5)
Amplitude of the component fatigue limit aBK,al = 5:~;680
,
= 0,929 , (4.6.17)
The amplitude of the component fatigue limit results
from the mean stress factor, the residual stress factor aBK,a2 = 50 ~':,80 = 0,346 .
and the component fatigue limit for completely reversed
normal stress:
 244
6.3 Compressor flange made of grey cast iron 6 Examples

Combined types of stress

fw,'t = 0,85 , . Tab. 4.2.1
q = 0,759 , (4.6.23)
Sl,a = aBK,crl = 0,929, (4.6.22)
S2,a = a BK,cr2 = 0,346 ,
a GH = ±.((0,929-0,346)2 +0,346 2 +0,929 2)
= 0,813, (4.6.21)
a NH = MAX (0,929; 0,346) = 0,929 ,
aBK,sv = 0,759 . 0,929 + (1 - 0,759) . 0,813 =
= 0,901. (4.6.20)

The degree of utilization of the component fatigue

strength is 90 %.
The assessment of the fatigue limit is achieved.

Note: Different from an assessment of the static

strength the presented calculation for combined types of
stress applies in the case of proportional stresses only.
For non-proportional stresses o l and cr2 the rules of
superposition in Chapter 4.6 are not applicable and the
procedure proposed in Chapter 5.10 is to be applied
instead.

........
 245
6.4 Welded notched component 6 Examples

6.4 Welded notched component
'--~-64---EN""'.""'do--'q
Key words: Milled steel, welded notched component,
assessment of the static strength, assessment of the
variable amplitude fatigue strength, type of overloading
F2, class of utilization, nominal stress, structural stress,
effective notch stress.
Given:
Stresses: Cyclic variable amplitude axial stresses,
Figure 6.4.1.
Characteristic nominal stresses, determined elementary:
Szd = Sm,zd ± Sa,zd = 150 MPa ± 75 MPa .
Characteristic structural stresses at the edge of the weld
seam, determined by finite element analysis without
observing the weld seam, (stress concentration factor
Kt,cr = O'max / Szd = 2,5),
0' = O'm ± O'a = 375 MPa ± 187,5 MPa.
Characteristic effective notch stresses at the edge of the
weld determined by finite element analysis in
considering the weld seam with an effective notch
radius r = 1 mm, (stress concentration factor
Kt,crK = O'K,max / Szd = 5,6),
O'K = O'K,m ± O'K,a = 840 MPa ± 420 MPa .
The respective characteristic stress amplitudes refer to
the largest amplitude of the stress spectrum which
co-responds to the class of utilization B2.
S1:d
F F
~ -t--+-t-~!l--t---~-f-,-........-
Safety requirement: According to the statements "with
moderate consequences of failure; regular inspections".
Task: Assessment of the static strength and assessment
of the variable amplitude fatigue strength.
Method of calculation: Rod-shaped (ID) component.
The assessment of the static strength is to be carried out
using nominal stresses and structural stresses (an
assessment of the static strength using effective notch
stresses is not possible). The assessment of the variable
amplitude fatigue strength is to be carried out using
nominal stresses, structural stresses and effective notch
stresses.
The degrees of utilization obtained with nominal
stresses, with structural stresses and with effective
notch stresses should agree .
ASSESSMENT
OF THE COMPONENT STATIC STRENGTH
For welded components the assessment of the
component static strength is in general to be carried out
separately for the toe section (toe of the weld) and for
the throat section (root of the weld). In the present case
the assessment of the throat section (root of the weld) is
sufficient. An equivalent stress is to be computed for the
throat section.
Calculation using nominal stresses
1 CHARACTERISTIC STRESSES
Maximum nominal stress *1 (1.1.1)
Smax ,ex,zd = 150 MPa + 75 MPa = 225 MPa .
Maximum equivalent nominal stress (1.1.2)

Smax,ex,wv,zd = Sl.,zd = Smax,ex,zd = 225 MPa .

2 MATERIAL PROPERTIES
Tensile strength and yield strength of the plate material
6.4..1 R m = 610 MPa, R p = 500 MPa. Tab. 5.1.2

Figure 6.4.1 Welded notched component The values apply to the component. The technological
size factor is not relevant, Eq. (1.2.15).

Material: StE 500, DIN 17 102.

3 DESIGN PARAMETERS
Dimensions:
Width of plate B = 375 mm Section factor
Thickness of plate s = 20 mm,
npl,zd = 1 . (1.3.9)
Radius of cut-out r = 100 mm.
Weld factor Ow
Weld seam: Full penetration butt weld, as welded, toe
angle S; 30 0, tested non-destructively, low residual Ow = 1,0 . Tab. 1.3.3
stresses.
Type of overloading: When overloaded in service the
1 Numbers of equations, tables and figures arethose of the
stress ratios remain constant (type of overloading F2).
guideline.
 246
6.4 Welded notched component 6 Examples

Design factor Maximum equivalent structural stress (3.1.2)

KSK,zd = 1 / (1 . 1 ) = 1 . (1.3.4) O'max,ex,wv = O'-L = 562,5 MPa .
2 MATERIAL PROPERTIES
4 COMPONENT STATIC STRENGTH Tensile strength and yield stress of the plate material
Nominal value of the component static strength resul- Rm = 610 MPa, R, = 500 MPa . Tab. 5.1.2
ting from the tensile strength and the design factor:
The values apply to the component. The technological
fer = 1 , Tab. 1.2.5 size factor is not relevant, Eq. (3.2.15).
SSK,zd = 1 ·610 MPa / I = 610 MPa . (1.4.1)

3 DESIGN PARAMETERS
5 SAFETY FACTORS
Plastic notch factor
Tab. 1.5.1
Kp,er = Kt,a = 2,5 . (3.3.13)
For moderate consequences of failure, however, there is
Section factor
Jm = 1,75 , jp = 1,3 . Tab. 1.5.1
E = 2,1 . 105 MPa, Tab. 3.3.1
For normal temperature there is 8 ertr =5 % = 0,05 ,
Rp = 500 MPa,
KT,m = KT,p = I , (1.2.26)
and in Eq. (1.5.4) the terms 3 and 4 have no relevance:
npl." = MIN (Jr- 5
2-, 1-.1-0-.-0-,0-5-/5-0-0; 2,5) = 2,5 .
(3.3.9)
Rm = 610 MPa, Rp = 500 MPa The section factor is limited by the plastic notch factor .

. jges = MAX (1,75; 1,3· :~~) (1.5.4) Constant KNL

= MAX (1,75; 1,59) = 1,75. KNL = I. (3.3.16)

Due to a high yield stress, Rp / R m > 0,75 , the tensile Weld factor Ow
strength is deciding. Ow = 1,0. Tab. 3.3.3
Design factor
6 ASSESSMENT KSK,er = 1 / (2,5 . 1 . 1,0) = 0,400 . (3.3.4)
Maximum nominal stress, see above,
Smax,ex,wv,zd = 225 MPa . 4 COMPONENT STATIC STRENGTH
Component static strength, nominal value, see above, Local value of the component static strength resulting
from the tensile strength and the design factor:
SSK,zd = 610 MPa .
fa = 1 , Tab. 3.2.5
O'SK = 1 ·610 MPa / 0,400 = 1525 MPa. (3.4.4)
Degree of utilization
225
aSK d = = 0,646 . (1.6.1) 5 SAFETY FACTORS
.z 610/1,75
Safety factors according to Chapter 3, as before:
The degree of utilization of the component static
strength is 65 %. jges = 1,75. (3.5.4)
The assessment of the static strength is achieved.

6 ASSESSMENT
.Calculation using structural stresses Maximum structural stress, see above,
1 CHARACTERISTIC STRESSES O'max,ex,wv = 562,5 MPa .
Maximum structural stress at the inside edge of the Component structural static strength, see above,
weld (3.1.1)
O'max,ex = 375 MPa + 187,5 MPa = 562,5 MPa . O'SK = 1525 MPa .
 247
6.4 Welded notched component 6 Examples

Degree of utilization Fatigue class

562,5 FAT 40.
aSK,cr = 1525/1,75 = 0,646 . (3.6.1)
Thickness factor
The degree of utilization of the component static (2.3.33)
strength is 65 % (as with nominal stresses).
Surface treatment factor
The assessment of the static strength is achieved.
Kv = 1. (2.3.28)
Constant KNL,E
ASSESSMENT
KNL,E = 1. (2.3.32)
OF THE COMPONENT FATIGUE STRENGTH
Design factor
For welded components the assessment of the fatigue
strength is in general to be carried out separately for the KWK,zd = 225 / (40 . 1 . 1 . 1) = 5,63 . (2.3.4)
toe section (toe of the weld) and for the throat section
(root of the weld).
Furthermore the assessment of the fatigue strength for
4 COMPONENT FATIGUE STRENGTH
welded components is in general to be carried out Component fatigue limit for completely reversed stress
separately for the base material (with rolling skin) and
Component fatigue limit for completely reversed
for the weld. *2. The less favorable case is deciding.
nominal stress resulting from the weld specific fatigue
Because of the comparatively low fatigue properties of
limit for normal stress and the design factor:
welded components the weld is normally deciding.
SWK,zd = 92 MPa / 5,63 = 16,3 MPa. (2.4.1)
In this present case an assessment of the fatigue strength
for the root of the weld is sufficient.
Amplitude of the component fatigue limit for the given
mean stress
Calculation using nominal stresses
Mean stress sensitivity, low residual stresses,
1 CHARACTERISTIC STRESSES
M cr = 0,3 . Tab. 2.4.1
For the weld section the (largest) amplitude and the
mean value of the characteristic nominal stress is Calculation for the type of overloading F2.
'.

Sa,zd, I = 75 MPa, Sm,zd = 150 MPa . (2.1.1) Stress ratio

Smin,zd = 150 MPa - 75 MPa = 75 MPa , (2.4.26)
Smax,zd = 150 MPa + 75 MPa = 225 MPa ,
2 MATERIAL PROPERTIES Rzd = 75 /225 = + 0,333 .
Independent of the type of steel the weld specific Because of 0 < Rzd < 0,5 field III applies:
fatigue limit for completely reversed nominal stress is
Mean stress factor
crW,W = 92 MPa . (2.2.3)
1+0,3/3
1+0,3
KAK,zd = 0 3 150 = 0,705 . (2.4.12)
3 DESIGN PARAMETERS 1+-'-·-
3 75
The fatigue class (FAT) is required to derive the design
factor after Eq. (2.3.4). However the welded notched Residual stress factor, low residual stresses,
component considered is not contained in Table 5.4.1 KE,cr = 1,54 . Tab. 2.4.1
and therefore an assessment using nominal stresses is
not possible, on principle. Nevertheless in order to Amplitude of the component fatigue limit
demonstrate the respective way of calculation, a
(re-calculated) fatigue class is supposed to be approxi- The nominal stress amplitude of the component fatigue
mately valid for the calculation below: limit results from the mean stress factor, the residual
stress factor and the component fatigue limit for
completely reversed nominal stress:
(2.4.6)
SAK,zd = 0,705 . 1,54' 16,3 MPa = 17,7 MPa.
2 Because ofdifferent slopes the SoN curves ofnon-welded and ofwelded
components may overlap for amplitudes exceeding the fatigue limits
 248
6.4 Welded notched component 6 Examples

Component variable amplitude fatigue strength Calculation using structural stresses

Variable amplitude fatigue strength factor 1 CHARACTERISTIC STRESSES
For the class of utilization B2 *3 the variable amplitude At the inside edge of the weld the (largest) amplitude
fatigue strength factor is and the mean value of the characteristic stress is
KBK,zd = 6,30 . Tab. (5.7.1) cra,l = 187,5 MPa, crm = 375 MPa . (4.1.2)
The nominal stress amplitude of the component variable
amplitude fatigue strength results from the variable
amplitude fatigue strength factor and the amplitude of 2 MATERIAL PROPERTIES
the component fatigue limit:
Independent of the type of steel the weld specific
SBK,zd = 6,30' 17,7 MPa= 112 MPa. (2.4.41) fatigue limit for completely reversed normal stress is
crw,w = 92 MPa. (4.2.3)
5 SAFETY FACTOR
.in = 1,5 . (2.5.1) 3 DESIGN PARAMETERS
For moderate consequences of failure and regular Fatigue class (FAT)
inspection there is, however,
The fatigue class (FAT) for structural stresses of a butt
.io = 1,2. Tab. 2.5.1 weld with a toe angle s 30 0 is required to derive the
design factor after Eq. (2.3.4) for the welded notched
For normal temperature there is
component. It is
KT,D = 1, (2.2.5)
FAT 100. Tab. 5.4.3, Nr.212
Therefore Further factors of influence according to Chapter 4 1 as
before,
jges = 1,2. (2.5.4)
ft = 1 , Kv = 1 , KNL,E = 1 ,
Design factor
6 ASSESSMENT
KWK,cr = 225 / (100 . 1 . 1 . 1) = 2,25 . (4.3.4)
Characteristic (largest) nominal stress amplitude, see
above,
Sa,zd,l = 75 MPa . 4 COMPONENT FATIGUE STRENGTH
Nominal value of the amplitude of the component Component fatigue limit for completely reversed stress
variable amplitude fatigue strength, see above,
Component fatigue limit for completely reversed
SBK,zd = 112 MPa. structural stress resulting from the weld specific fatigue
Degree of utilization limit for normal stress and the design factor:

75 crWK = 92 MPa /2,25 = 40,9 MPa . (4.4.1)

aBK,zd = 112 / I 2 = 0,804 .
, Amplitude of the component fatigue limit for the given
The degree of utilization of the component variable
amplitude fatigue strength is 80 %.
The assessment of the fatigue strength is achieved.
3 See Chapter 5.7, Footnote 3.
(2.6.1)
mean stress
Mean stress factor according to Chapter 4, as before,
KAK,cr = 0,705 , (4.4.12)
Residual stress factor according to Chapter 4, as before,
KE,cr = 1,54 , Tab. 4.4.1
Amplitude of the component fatigue limit
The structural stress amplitude of the component fatigue
limit results from the mean stress factor, the residual
stress factor and the component fatigue limit for
completely reversed structural stress: (4.4.6)
crAK = 0,705 . 1,54' 40,9 MPa = 44,4 MPa .
 249
6.4 Welded notched component 6 Examples

Component variable amplitude fatigue strength 4 COMPONENT FATIGUE STRENGTH

Variable amplitude fatigue strength factor according to Component fatigue limit for completely reversed stress
Chapter 4, as before,
Component fatigue limit for completely reversed
KBK,zd = 6,30 . Tab. (5.7.1) effective notch stress resulting from the weld specific
The structural stress amplitude of the component fatigue limit for normal stress and the design factor:
variable amplitude fatigue strength results from the crK,WK = 92 MPa /1 = 92 MPa . (4.4.1)
variable amplitude fatigue strength factor and the
amplitude of the component fatigue limit: Amplitude of the component fatigue limit for the given
mean stress
crBK = 6,30 . 44,4 MPa = 280 MPa . (4.4.41)
Mean stress factor according to Chapter 4, as before,
5 SAFETY FACTOR KAK,cr = 0,705 , (4.4.12) c(
Safety factor according to Chapter 4, as before, Residual stress factor according to Chapter 4, as before,
KE,cr = 1,54 , Tab. 4.4.1
jges = 1,2 . (4.5.4)
Amplitude of the component fatigue limit
6 ASSESSMENT The effective notch stress amplitude of the component
Characteristic (largest) structural stress amplitude, see fatigue limit results from the mean stress factor, the
above, residual stress factor and the component fatigue limit
for completely reversed effective notch stress: (4.4.6)
cra,l = 187,5 MPa .
crK,AK = 0,705 . 1,54' 92 MPa = 99,9 MPa .
Structural stress amplitude of the component variable
Component variable amplitude fatigue strength
amplitude fatigue strength, see above,
Variable amplitude fatigue strength factor according to
crBK = 280 MPa . Chapter 4, as before,
Degree of utilization KBK,cr = 6,30 , Tab. (5.7.1) '7

187,5 The effective notch stress amplitude of the component

aBK cr = = 0,804 . (4.6.1) variable amplitude fatigue strength results from the
, 280[1,2
variable amplitude fatigue strength factor and the
The degree of utilization of the component variable amplitude of the component fatigue limit:
amplitude fatigue strength is 80 % (as with nominal
crK,BK = 6,30 . 99,9 MPa = 629 MPa. (4.4.41)
stresses).
The assessment of the fatigue strength is achieved.
5 SAFETY FACTOR
Safety factor according to Chapter 4, as before,
Ca.lcu.lation using effective notch stresses jges = 1,2 . (4.5.4)
1 CHARACTERISTIC STRESSES
At the inside edge of the weld the (largest) amplitude 6 ASSESSMENT
and the mean value of the characteristic stress is Characteristic (largest) effective notch stress amplitude,
crK,a,l = 420 MPa, crK,m = 840 MPa . (4.1.3) see above,

crK,a,l = 420 MPa .

2 MATERIAL PROPERTIES Effective notch stress amplitude of the component
variable amplitude fatigue strength, see above,
Independently of the type of steel the weld specific
fatigue limit for completely reversed normal stress is crK,BK = 629 MPa .
crw,w = 92 MPa . (4.2.3) Degree of utilization
420
aBK,crK = 629/12 (4.6.1)
3 DESIGN PARAMETERS , = 0,802 .
Factors of influence according to Chapter 4, as before, The degree of utilization of the component variable
Kv = 1, KNL,E = 1 . amplitude fatigue strength is 80 % (as with
Design factor structural stresses.
KWK,crK = 1 / (1 . 1) = 1 . (4.3.8) The assessment of the fatigue strength is achieved.
 250
6.5 Shaft subject to two independent loads
6.5 Cantilever subject to two
independent loads 1R65 EN.dog
Key words: Cantilever, two independent random loads,
assessment of the static strength, assessment of the
variable amplitude fatigue strength, combined stresses.
Given
Stresses: In cross-section x = 0 due to two independent
random loads with binomially distributed amplitudes,
figure 6.5.1.
In load case G1 the load Fy,Gl acts with a total number
of cycles N Gl = 105 which are binominally distributed
with a spectrum parameter PGl = O. The characteristic
mean value and amplitude are:
Fm,y,Gl = 1 kN, Fa,y,GI = ± 23,5 kN.
In load case G2 the the load Fy,G2 acts with a total
number of cycles NGl = 107 which are binominally
distributed with a spectrum parameter PGl = 0,5. The
characteristic mean value and amplitude are:
Fm,y,G2 = - 1,5 kN, Fa,y,G2 = ± 25 kN.
The loads Fy,Gl and Fy,G2 vary non-proportionally (as
they observe different load spectra!) and they may act
both simultaneously or separately. At the cross-section
at x = 0 bending moments Mz,Gl , M z,G2 and torsion
moments Mx,Gl, M x,G2 with their mean values (index
m) and amplitudes (index a) result from Fy,Gl , Fy,G2
and the lever arms I = 0,1 m.
y Ma,x,OI = (- 2,35 + 2,5) kNm = 0,15 kNm,
z
Bile b65
Figure 6.5.1 Cantilever subject to two independent
loads.
Material: St 60, DIN EN 10 025.
Dimensions:
Diameter of cantilever at x = 0: d = 57,5 mm,
Length oflever arms: 1= 0,1 m.
Surface: Average roughness R, = 25 um.
Type of overloading: When overloaded in the service
the stress ratios remain constant (type of overloading
F2).
6 Examples
Safety requirements: According to the statements:
"with severe consequences of failure; no regular
inspections".
Task: Assessment of the static strength and assessment
of the variable amplitude fatigue strength for cross
section x = O.
Method of calculation: Rod-shaped (lD) component.
Assessment to be carried out using nominal stresses.
ANALYSIS OF THE STATIC LOADING
Load case GI
Mm,z,GI = 0,10 kNm, Ma,z,GI = ± 2,35 kNm,
Mm,x,Gl = 0,10 kNm, Ma,x,GI = ± 2,35 kNm.
Load case G2
M m,z,G2 =- 0,15 kNm, Ma,z,GI = ± 2,50 kNm,
M m,x,G2 = 0,15 kNm, Ma,x,GI = ± 2,50 kNm.
Superimposed loads, case UI
The highest bending moment (absolute value) results if
the amplitudes Fa,y,Gl and Fa,y,G2 act unidirectionally
(in direction of the resulting mean value Fm,y,OI =
Fm,y,Gl + Fm,y,G2, that is downwards in Figure 5.6.1):
Mm,z,OI = (0,1- 0,15) kNm =- 0,05 kNm,
Ma,z,OI = (- 2,35- 2,5) kNm =- 4,85 kNm,
Mmin,z,OI = (- 0,05- 4,85) kNm =- 4,90 kNm.
The related torsion moment is:
Mm,x,OI = (0,1 + 0,15) kNm = 0,25 kNm,
Mmax,x,OI = (0,25 + 0,15) kNm = 0,40 kNm.
Superimposed loads, case U2
The highest torsion moment results if the amplitudes
Fa,y,Gl, and Fa,y,G2 act opposingly (in direction of the
resulting mean value Mm,y,02 = Mm,y,GI + Mm,y,G2 as
shown in Figure 6.5.1):
Mm,x,02 = (0,1 + 0,15) kNm = 0,25 kNm,
Ma,x,02 = (+ 2,35 + 2,5) kNm = 4,85 kNm,
M max,x,02 = (0,25 + 4,85) kNm = 5,10 kNm.
The related bending moment is:
Mm,z,02 = (0,1- 0,15) kNm =- 0,05 kNm,
Ma,z,02 = (2,35- 2,5) kNm =- 0,15 kNm,
Mmin,z,02 = (- 0,05- 0,15) kNm =- 0,20 kNm.
 251
6.5 Shaft subject to two independent loads 6 Examples

ASSESSMENT OF THE STATIC STRENGTH Kp,b = 1,70, Tab. 1.3.2

npl,b = MIN (J1050/321 ; 1,70) = 1,70. 1.3.9)
The assessment of the static strength is to be carried out
for each of the superimposed loads, cases VI and V2. Design factor
The highest degree of utilization is determining.
KSK,b = 1 I 1,70 = 0,588. (1.3.1)

1 CHARACTERISTIC STRESSES Design factor for torsion

Superimposed loads, case VI Section factor
The maximum bending stress and the related torsional Rp,max = 1050 MPa, Tab. 1.3.1
stress at the reference section with d = 57,5 mm is: Rp = 321 MPa,
Kp,t = 1,33, Tab. 1.3.2
Smax,b,-ol = 32 IMmin,Z,OII I pd3 npl,t = MIN (J1050/321 ; 1,33 =1,33. (1.3.9)
= 32 . 4,90 kNm I [TC . (57,5 mm)3] = 263 MPa,
Design factor
T max t -01 = 16 M max x -01 I pd3
= 16 : 0,40 kNm I [n' .'
(57,5 mm)3 ] = 10,7 MPa. KSK,t = 1 11,33 = 0,752. (1.3.1)
4 COMPONENT STATIC STRENGTH
Superimposed loads, case V2 Nominal value of the component static bending strength
resulting from the tensile strength and the design factor
The maximum torsional stress and the related bending
stress at the reference section with d = 57,5 mm is: r, = 1, Tab. 1.2.5
SSK,b = 1 . 579 MPa I 0,588 = 985 MPa. (1.4.1)
Smax,b,-02 = 32 IM min,z,0 2I I pd3 Nominal value of the component static torsional
= 32· 0,20 kNm I [TC . (57,5 mmj-'] = 10,7 MPa. strength resulting from the tensile strength and the
design factor
Tmax t -02 = 16 Mmax x -02 I pd 3
= 16: 5,10 kNm I [n'
.'(57,5 mm)3] = 137 MPa, f't = 0,577, Tab. 1.2.5, (1.4.1)
TSK,t = 0,577 ·579 MPa I 0,752 = 445 MPa.

2 MATERIAL PROPERTIES
5 SAFETY FACTORS
Tensile strength and yield strength according to
For severe consequences of failure and a low
standard
probability for the simultaneous occurrence of the peak
Rm,N = 590 MPa, Rp,N = 335 MPa. Tab. 5.1.1 values of the stress spectra there is
Technological size factor jm = 1,8, jp = 1,35. Tab. 1.5.1
ad,m = 0,15, ad,p = 0,3, Tab. 1.2.1 For normal temperature there is
deff,N = 40 mm,
KT,m = KT,p = 1. (1.2.26)
deff = d = 57,5 mm, Tab. 1.2.3
Kd,m = 0,980, Kd,p = 0,956. (1.2.9) and in Eq. (1.5.4) the terms 3 and 4 have no relevance:
Anisotropy factor Rm = 579 MPa, Re = 321 MPa,
K A = 1. (1.2.17)
= MAX (1,8;1,35. 579)
jges (1.5.4)
Tensile strength and yield strength of the component 321
= MAX (1,8; 2,44) = 2,44.
R m = 0,980 . 1 ·590 MPa = 579 MPa, (1.2.1)
R, = 0,956 . 1 . 335 MPa = 321 MPa. The second term, the yield strength R, , is determining.

3 DESIGN PARAMETERS 6 ASSESSMENT

Design factor for bending Superimposed loads, case VI
Section factor Maximum stress in bending and related stress ill
torsion, see above,
Rp,max = 1050 MPa, Tab. 1.3.1
Rp = 321 MPa, Smax,b,-ol = 263 MPa, Tmax,t,-ol = 10,7 MPa.
 252
6.5 Shaft subject to two independent loads 6 Examples

Component static strength, in bending and in torsion, ASSESSMENT OF THE FATIGUE STRENGTH
see above,
The assessment of the fatigue strength is to be carried
SSK,b = 985 MPa, TSK,I = 445 MPa. out according to Chapter 5.10: For the two non-
Degrees of utilization proportional load cases Gl and G2 the individual
degrees of utilization are to be determined and added.
Individual types of stress, bending or torsion,
263
a b= = 0651 (1.6.1) 1 CHARACTERISTIC STRESSES
SK, 985/ 2,44 ' ,
10,7 Load case Gl
a K = = 0059.
S ,I 445/2 ,44 ' Bending and torsion moments (step 1 of the spectrum):
Combined types of stress Mm,z,GI = 0,10 kNm, Ma,z,GI = ± 2,35 kNm,
Mm,x,Gl = 0,10 kNm, Ma,x,GI = ± 2,35 kNm.
f't = 0,577, Tab. 1.2.5
q = 0, (1.6.7) Nominal stresses:
s = aSK,b = 0,651, (1.6.6)
Sm,b,1 = Sm,b,GI,1 = 32 Mm,z,Gl / pd 3 (2.1.1)
t = aSK,1 = 0,059,
= 32· 0,10 kNm/[n . (57,5 mm)3 ] = 5,4 MPa,
aGH = ~0,6512 +0,059 2 = 0,654, (1.6.5)
Sa,b,1 = Sa,b,GI,1 = 32 Ma,z, GI / pd3
aSK,sv = aSK,OI = 0,654. (1.6.4) = 32 . 2,35 kNm / [n . (57,5 mm)3 ] = 126 MPa,
T m I I = T m I GI I = 16 M m x GI / pd 3
Superimposed loads, case ih = i6 .0,10 kN~ / [n . (57,5 ~)3 ] = 2,7 MPa,

Maximum stress in torsion and related bending stress, Ta,I,1 = Ta,I,GI,1 = 16 Ma,x, GI / pd 3
see above, = 16 . 2,35 kNm / [n . (57,5 mm)3 ] = 63 MPa.
Smax,b,02 = 10,7 MPa, T max,I,U2 = 137 MPa. Load case G2
Component static strength in bending and in torsion, Bending and torsion moments: (step 1 of the spectrum):
see above,
M m,z,G2 =- 0,15 kNm, Ma,z,Gl = ± 2,50 kNm,
SSK,b = 985 MPa, TSK,I = 445 MPa. M m,x,G2 = 0,15 kNm, Ma,x,Gl = ± 2,50 kNm.
Degrees of utilization
Nominal stresses:
Individual types of stress, bending or torsion,
Sm,b,1 = Sm,b,G2,1 = 32IMm,z,Gl/ / pd3 (2.1.1)
10,7 = 0027 = 32· 0,15 kNrn/[n . (57,5 mm)3 ] = 8,0 MPa,
aSK,b = 985/2,44 ' , (1.6.1)
137 Sa,b,1 = Sa,b,G2,1 = 32 Ma,z, GI / pd3
aSK,1 = 445/2,44 = 0,751. = 32· 2,50 kNm / [n . (57,5 mm)3 ] = 134 MPa,
Tm,I,1 = T m,I,G2,1 = 16 Mm,x, GI / pd 3
Combined stress = 16· 0,15 kNm / [n . (57,5 mm)3 ] = 4,0 MPa,
aGH = ~0,0272 +0,751 2 = 0,751, (1.6.5) Tm,I,1 = Ta,I,G2,1 = 16 Ma,x, Gl / pd 3
= 16· 2,50 kNm / [n . (57,5 mm)3 ] = 67 MPa.
aSK,sv = aSK,02 = 0,751. (1.6.4)
The negative sign of the mean stress for bending is not
important here.
Definite degree of utilization

aSK = MAX (aSK,0 I, aSK,02 ) 2 MATERIAL PROPERTIES

= MAX (0,654; 0,751) = 0,751. Material fatigue limits for fully reversed normal stress,
crW,zd, and shear stress, LW,S :
The degree of utilization of the component static
strength is 75 %. Rm = 579 MPa,
The assessment of the static strength is achieved. fw,« = 0,45, Tab. 2.2.1
crW,zd = 0,45 . 579 MPa = 261 MPa, (2.2.1)
fw,'t = 0,577, Tab. 2.2.1
LW,S = 0,577 . 261 MPa = 151 MPa. (2.2.1)
 253
6.5 Shaft subject to two independent loads 6 Examples

3 DESIGN PARAMETERS 4 COMPONENT FATIGUE STRENGTH

Design factor for bendin..g Component fatigue limit for completely reversed
bending and torsional stress:
Fatigue notch factor
Component fatigue limit for completely reversed
Stress concentration factor of a plain shaft *1,
bending stress resulting from the material fatigue limit
Kt,b = 1. for normal stress and the design factor for bending:

KcKf ratios, no notch radius, SWK,b = 260 MPa /1,145 = 228 MPa. (2.4.1)

Gcr(r) = 0, ncr (r) = 1, Component fatigue limit for completely reversed

d = 57,5 mm, torsional stress resulting from the material fatigue limit
for shear stress and the design factor for torsion:
Gcr(d) = 2/ d = 0,0357 mm -I , (2.3.17)
ncr (d) = 1,021. (2.3.13) TWK,t = 150 MPa /1,064 = 141 MPa. (2.4.1)

Fatigue notch factor

Load case Gl
Kf,b = 1 / (1 . 1,021) = 0,979. (2.3.10) Component fatigue limit for the given mean stress for
Roughness factor bending and torsion

Rill = 579 MPa, Rz = 25 urn, The calculation for type of overloading F2.
aR,cr = 0,22, Rm,N,min = 400 MPa, Tab. 2.3.4 Mean stress sensitivity
KR,cr = 0,858. (2.3.26)
R m = 579 MPa,
For no surface treatment is KV = 1. For materials aM = 0,00035, bM = - 0,1, Tab. 2.4.2
except GG KNL,E = 1. Therefore: M, = 0,103, (2.4.34)
Design factor fw,~ = 0,577 Tab. 2.2.1
M~ = 0,577 . 0,103 = 0,059. (2.4.34)
KWK,b = 0,979 + 1/0,858 - 1 = 1,145 (2.3.1)
Equivalent mean stress

Design factor for torsion Sm = Sm,b,GI = 5,4 MPa, (2.4.31)

Fatigue notch factor

r., = Tm,t,GI = 2,7 MPa,
fw,~ = 0,577, Tab. 2.2.1
Stress concentration factor of a plain shaft *1, q = 0, (2.4.29)

Kt,t = 1. Sm,v,l= Sm,v,GH =~5,42+3.2,72 MPa =

= 7,1 MPa, (2.24.29) (2.4.28)
KcKf ratios, no notch radius,
Tm,v,1 = 0,577 . 7,1 MPa = 4,1 MPa.
G~ (r) = 0, v~(r) = 1, (2.4.30)
d = 56 mm, Stress ratio for bending
G~ (d) = 2/ d = 0,0357 mm -I , (2.3.17)
n, (d) = 1,026. (2.3.13) Rs,v = (Sm,v,1 - Sa,b,Gl,I) / (Sm,v,1 + Sa,b,Gl,l)
=(7,1 126) / (7,1 + 126) = - 0,89.
Fatigue notch factor
Mean stress factor for bending;
Kf,t = 1 / (1 . 1,026) = 0,975. (2.3.10) °
because of - 00 :;;; Rs,v :;;; field II applies:
Roughness factor
KAK,b = 1/(1 + Sm,v,1 / Sa,b,GI,I)
R m = 579 MPa, R z = 25 urn, = 1/(1 + 7,1 / 126) = 0,947. (2.4.10)
fw,~ = 0,577 Tab. 2.2.1 Stress ratio for torsion
aR,cr = 0,22, Rm,N,min = 400 MPa, Tab. 2.3.4
KR,~ = 0,918. (2.3.26) RT,v = (Tm,v,1 - Ta,t,Gl,I) /(Tm,v,1 + Ta,t,GI,I)
=(4,1 63) / (4,1 + 63) = 0,88.
For no surface treatment is KV = 1. Therefore
Mean stress factor for torsion;
Design factor because of -1:;;; RT,v :;;; ° field II applies:
KWK,t = 0,974 + 1 /0,918 - 1 = 1,064 (2.3.1) KAK,t = 1 / (1 + Tm,v,1 / Ta,t,Gl,1 )
= 1/(1 + 4,1 /63) = 0,939. (2.4.10)
Residual stress factor for normal stress and for shear
I This isa simplifying assumption made for the present example that stress
would not bevalid for a real component, however! KE,cr = KE,~ = 1. (2.4.5)
 254
6.5 Shaft subject to two independent loads 6 Examples

Amplitude of the component fatigue limit factor and from the mean stress dependent amplitude
of the component fatigue limit for bending or for
The amplitude of the component fatigue limit results
torsion:
from the mean stress factor, residual stress factor and
the component fatigue limit for completely reversed SBK b = 1,00' 211 MPa = 211 MPa, (2.4.41)
bending or torsional stress: TB~,t = 1,04' 129 MPa = 134 MPa.
SAK,b = 0,947 . 1 . 228 MPa = 216 MPa, (2.4.6)
TAK,t = 0,939 . 1 . 141 MPa = 132 MPa. 5 SAFETY FACTOR
Component variable amplitude fatigue strength for For severe consequences of failure and no regular
bending and torsion inspections
Variable amplitude fatigue strength factors for bending .io = 1,5. (2.5.1)
and torsion
For normal temperature is
KBK,b = 3,84, KBK,t = 2,88. (2.4.51)
KT,D = 1, (2.2.4)
The variable amplitude fatigue strength factors follows
from the elementary version of Miner's rule and a jges = 1,5. (2.5.4)
critical damage sum D M = 0,3 , Chapter 2.4.3.1.
The component variable amplitude fatigue strength 6 ASSESSMENT
results from the variable amplitude fatigue strength Load case Gl
factor and from the mean stress dependent amplitude
of the component fatigue limit for bending or for Characteristic stress amplitudes for bending and for
torsion: torsion, see above,

SBK b = 3,84' 216 MPa = 829 MPa, (2.4.41) Sa,b,l = Sa,b,Gl,l = 126 MPa,
TB~,t = 2,88' 132 MPa = 380 MPa. Ta,t,l = Ta,t,Gl,l = 63 MPa.
Amplitude of the component variable amplitude fatigue
Limitation of the amplitudes strength for bending and for torsion, see above,
SBK,b ::;; 0,75 . R, . ~,b SBK,b,Gl = 409 MPa, TBK,t,Gl = 185 MPa.
= 0,75' 321 MPa '1,70 = 409 MPa, (2.4.42)
TBK,t ::;; 0,75' ft . R, . ~,t Degrees of utilization
= 0,75' 0,577 . 321 MPa '1,33 = 185 MPa. Individual types of stress, bending or torsion,
Relevant component variable amplitude fatigue strength 126
409/1,5 = 0462
aBK,b = (2.6.1)
SBK b Gl = MIN (829,409) MPa = 409 MPa, ' ,
TB~,b',Gl = MIN (380, 185) MPa = 185 MPa. 63
a K = = 0511.
B,t 185/15, '

Load case G2 Combined types of stress

Component fatigue limit for the given mean stress for fw,"t = 0,577, Tab. 2.2.1
bending and torsion q = 0, (2.6.7)
An analog calculation results in Sa = aBK,b = 0,462, (2.6.6)
ta = aBK,t = 0,511,
SAK,b = 211 MPa,
aGH = ~0,4622 +0,511 2 = 0,689,
(2.4.6)
(2.6.5)
TAK,t = 129 MPa.
aBK,Sv = aBK,Gl = 0,689. (2.6.4)
Component variable amplitude fatigue strength for
bending and torsion
Variable amplitude fatigue strength factors for bending Load case G2
and torsion Characteristic stress amplitudes for bending and for
KBK,b = 1,00, KBK,t = 1,04. (2.4.51) torsion, see above,

The variable amplitude fatigue strength factor follows
from the elementary version of Miner's rule and a
critical damage sum DM = 0,3 , Chapter 2.4.3.1.
The component variable amplitude fatigue strength
results from the variable amplitude fatigue strength
Sa,b,l = Sa,b,G2,l = 134 MPa,
Ta,t,l = Ta,t,G2,l = 67 MPa.
Amplitude of the component variable amplitude fatigue
strength for bending and for torsion, see above,
SBK,b,G2 = 211 MPa, TBK,t,G2 = 134 MPa.
 255
6.5 Shaft subject to two independent loads 6 Examples

Degrees of utilization
Individual types of stress, bending or torsion,

134 = 0953 (2.6.1)

aBK,b = 211/1,5 ' ,
67
a
BK,t
= 134/1,5
= 0750.
'

Combined types of stress

fw,'t = 0,577, Tab. 2.2.1
q = 0, (2.6.7)
Sa = aBK,b = 0,953, (2.6.6)
ta = aBK,t = 0,750,
a GH = ~0,9532 +0,750 2 = 1,213, (2.6.5)
aBK,Sv = aBK,G2 = 1,213. (2.6.4)

Total degree of utilization from the combined effect

of load case G1 and G2
aBK = aBK,GI + aBK,G2
= 0,689 + 1,213 = 1,902 (5.10.3)
The cyclical degree of utilization of the component is
190 %.
The assessment of the variable amplitude fatigue
strength is not achieved.
 256
6.6 Component made of a wrought aluminium alloy 6 Examples

6.6 Component made of a wrought ASSESSMENT

aluminium alloy *1 lRi66.docl
OF THE COMPONENT STATIC STRENGTH

Key words: Wrought aluminium alloy, assessment of 1 CHARACTERISTIC STRESSES

the static strength, assessment of the fatigue strength for Maximum stresses (3 . 1.6) *2
finite life, local elastic stresses, type of overloading F2, (JI ,max,ex = 238 MPa, (J2, max ,ex = 58,4 MPa .
combined types of stress, (JI and (J2 .
Given: 2 MATERIAL PROPERTIES
Stresses: Proportional, constant amplitude, local elastic AlZn4,5Mgl T651, Tab. 5.1.22, pp. 151.
stresses in the directions 1 (longitudinal direction) and 2 R, = 350 MPa, R, = 280 MPa, As = 9 %.
(circumferential direction) at the reference point of a
block-shaped (3D) component, Figure 6.6.1, Tensile strength and yield strength for the standard
dimension
(JI = (JI,m± (JI,a = 119 MPa ± 119 MPa, Rm,N = 350 MPa , Tab. 5.1.14
(J2 = (J2,m ± (J2,a = 29,2 MPa ± 29,2 MPa , Rp,N = 280 MPa .
(J3 = O.
No technological size factor
Stress amplitudes at the neighbouring point in a Kd,m = 1. (3.2.5)
distance s = 1,254 mm below the surface
Anisotropy factor
(JI,a = ± 54,1 MPa, (J2,a = ± 22,5 MPa . KA = 1. (3.2.18)
4
Number of cycles: N = 5 . 10 (R, = 0). Tensile strength and yield strength for the component
R m = 1 . 1 . 300 MPa = 350 MPa, (3.2.1)
Rp = 1 . 1 . 280 MPa = 280 MPa .

3 DESIGN PARAMETERS
Section factor
E = 0,70 'lOs MPa , Tab. 3.3.1
£crtr=2%,
~ = 280 MPa,
Figure 6.6.1 Aluminum component with pivot. ~,cr = 1,7,

0,70.10 5.0,02
Material: AIZn4,5Mgl , T651, npl,crl = MIN ( 280 ; 1,7)
aging wrought aluminium alloy
= MIN (2,24; 1,7) = 1,7 . (3.3.9)
Temperature: T = 50°C (normal temperature).
For n pl,cr2 the same value is assumed:
Dimensions: Effective diameter at the reference point: n pl,cr2 = 1,7 .
defT = 18 mm.
Design factor for directions 1 and 2
Surface: average roughness R.. = 10 urn, KSK,crl = KSK,a2 = 1 / 1,7 = 0,588 (3.3.3)
Type of overloading: When overloaded in service the
stress ratios remain constant (Type of overloading F2). 4 COMPONENT STATIC STRENGTH
Safety requirements: according to the statements: "with The component strength results from the tensile
moderate consequences of failure; no regular strength and the design factor. For directions 1 and 2:
inspection" . fa = 1, Tab. 3.2.5, (3.4.3)
Task: Assessment of the static strength and of the (JI,SK = (J2,SK = 1 . 350 MPa / 0,588 = 595 MPa .
constant amplitude fatigue strength for finite life
(N = 5 . 104 cycles). 5 SAFETY FACTORS
Method of calculation: Block-shaped (3D) component. For moderate consequences of failure and a high
Assessment using local elastic stresses, Chapter 3 and probability of occurrence of the maximum (constant
4. For T = 50°C temperature factors do not need to be amplitude) stress there is
considered (KT,m ~ ... = 1). jm = 1,75, jp = 1,30. Tab. 3.5.1

I Results of computation obtained by the pc- program "RIFESTPLUS". 2 The numbers of equations, tables and figures are those of the
guideline.
 257
6.6 Component made of a wrought aluminium alloy 6 Examples

For an elongation As < 12,5 % (here A s = 9 %) the ASSESSMENT

safety factors are to be increased by ~j: OF THE COMPONENT FATIGUE STRENGTH
~j = 0,5 --h/50 = 0,08, (3.5.2) 1 CHARACTERISTIC STRESSES
jm = 1,83, jp = 1,38 . Tab. 3.5.2
Proportional constant amplitude stresses
For normal temperature the terms 3 and 4 of Eq.
(3.5.4) are not relevant. O"I,a,1 = 119 MPa, 0"1,01,1 = 119 MPa, (4.1.1)
0"2,a,1 = 29,2 MPa, 0"2,01,1 = 29,2 MPa .
jg~s = MAX (1,83: 1,38. 350) (3.5.4)
280
= MAX (1,83, 1,73) = 1,83. 2 MATERIAL PROPERTIES
The tensile strength R m is deciding. Material fatigue limit for completely reversed normal
stress, O"W,zd, for N = 106
Rm = 350 MPa,
6 ASSESSMENT fw,a = 0,30 , Tab. 4.2.1
O"W,zd = 0,30 . 350 MPa = 105 MPa . (4.2.1)
Maximum stresses, see above,

O"I,max,ex = 238 MPa, 0"2,max,ex = 58,4 MPa .

3 DESIGN PARAMETERS
Component strength values, see above,
K,-Krratios (4.3.16)
O"I,SK = 0"2,SK = 595 MPa.
Gal = 1 .(1- 54,1) = 0,435 mm -I,
1,254mm 119
Degrees of utilization
Individual types of stress, direction 1 and 2 Ga 2 = 1 .(1- 22,5) = 0,183 mm -I,
1,254mm 29,2
238
(3.6.17)
aa = 0,05, b G = 850 , Tab. 4.3.2
aSK I = = 0,732, (4.3.14)
.o 595/1,83 nal = 1,228, na2 = 1,148.

aSK,a2 = 59~~':'83 = 0,179 .

Roughness factor
R z = 10 um,
aR,a = 0,22, Rm,N,min = 133 MPa, Tab. 4.3.4
Combined types of stress KR,a = 0,841 . (4.3.26)
As = 9 % , Surface treatment factor and coating factor
q = 0,5, before (3.6.23), Tab. 3.6.1 Kv = 1, Ks = 1 . (4.3.28) (4.3.30)
Sl = aSK c l = 0,732, (3.6.22)
S2 = aSK:a2 = 0,179 , A universal value forKf after table 4.3.1 would be:
Kf = 2. Tab. 4.3.1
aGH = L((0,732-0,179)2 +0,179 2 +0,732 2 )
2 Instead a value forKf derived from the stress
= 0,660, (3.6.21) concentration factor of a substitute structure after
aNH = MAX (0,732, 0,179) = 0,732, (3.6.20) Chapter 5.12 shall be applied here:
-
G a I = 0,435 mm -I ,
aSK,sv = 0,5 . 0,732 + (1 - 0,5) . 0,660 = 0,696.
r=2/G a l =4,6mm, (5.12.2)
derr = b = 18 mm,
The degree of utilization of the component static
strength is 70 %. K = 1OO,066-0,36.1g(rlb) = 1 904
t " .
(5 12 1)
•

The assessment of the static strength is achieved. nal = 1,228 ,

I(f,1 = 1,904 I 1,228= 1,550".

This result of the assessment is only exact, however, if Accordingly

the stresses 0"1 and 0"2 are proportional, even if, on K f ,2 = 1,214.
principle, it is supposed for the assessment of the
component static strength that different types of stress Design factors (4.3.3)

1,5~0 {0,~41 -1)) = 0,913 ,

observe their extreme value simultaneously, that is, as
if they were proportional. But with non-proportional KWK,al = 1,;28 {1+
stresses 0"1 and 0"2 it would be of importance that the
individual degree of utilization aSK o l = 0,732 is
higher than the degree of utilization 'of the combined KWK a2 = _1_.(1+!.(_1__ 1)) = 1,007.
, 1,056 1 0,906
types of stress aSK,sv = 0,696 derived.
 258
6.6 Component made of a wrought aluminium alloy 6 Examples

4 COMPONENT FATIGUE STRENGTH .io = 1,3. Tab. 4.5.2

Component fatigue limit for completely reversed stress For an elongation As < 12,5 % (here As 9 %) the
safety factors are to be increased by ~j:
The component fatigue limit for completely reversed
normal stress results from the material fatigue limit for ~j = 0,5 -.Jg/50 = 0,08; . (4.5.2)
completely reversed normal stress and the design .io = 1,38.
factors:
Therefore the total safety factor is
O"I.WK = 105 MPa / 0,913 = 115 MPa , (4.4.3)
jges = 1,38. (4.5.4)
O"2.',VK = 105 MPa / 1,007 = 104 MPa .

Amplitude of the component fatigue limit for the given 6 ASSESSMENT

mean stress ""- .
Characteristic stress amplitudes, see above
Mean stress sensitivity
O"I,a,1 = 119 MPa, 0"2,a,1 = 29,2 MPa.
aM = 1,0, bM = - 0,04, Tab. 4.4.2
Amplitudes of the component variable amplitude fatigue
M cr = 0,31 . (4.4.34)
strength, see above,
According to Chapter 4.4.2.2 no equivalent mean stress
is to be applied; the individual mean stresses are to be O"I,BK = 160 MPa, 0"2,BK = 145 MPa .
applied instead. The type of overloading is F2. Degrees of utilization
Mean stress factor for the direction 1 and 2. Individual types of stress, direction 1 and 2
Stress ratios 119
Rcrl = R cr 2 = O. aBK I = = 1,027 , (4.6.17)
.c 160 11,38
KAK,crl = KAK,cr2 = 1+ 0,31 = 0,763 . (4.4.10) a 2- 29,2 = 0,277 .
BK.o - 145/1,38
Residual stress factor
Combined types of stress
KE,cr = KE;t = 1 . (4.4.5)
Amplitude of the component fatigue limit As = 9 % ,
q = 0,5, Tab. 4.6.1
The amplitude of the component fatigue limit results SI,a = aBK,crl = 1,027 , (4.6.22)
from the mean stress factor, the residual stress factor S2,a = aBK cr2 = 0,277 ,
and the component fatigue limit for completely reversed
stress, aGH = L((1,027-0,277)Z +0,277 2 +1,027 2 )
2
O"I,AK = 0,763 . 1 . 115 MPa = 88 MPa , (4.4.8) = 0,921 , (4.6.21)
0"2,AK = 0,763 . 1 . 104 MPa = 80 MPa . aNH = MAX (1,027, 0,277) = 1,027 , (4.6.20)
aBK,crv = 0,5 . 1,027 + (1 - 0,5) . 0,921 = 0,974
Component variable amplitude fatigue strength
Variable amplitude fatigue strength factor The degree of utilization of the component variable
amplitude fatigue strength is 97 %.
For the constant amplitude stresses of concern with a
The assessment of the fatigue strength is achieved.
required number of cycles N = N = 5 . 104, where
N < No,cr= 106 , and a component constant amplitude
S-N curve model I or model II the variable amplitude This result of the assessment of the fatigue strength is
fatigue strength factor is valid only because the stresses 0"1 and 0"2 are
(4.4.48) proportional and definitely occur in parallel. Obviously
the degree of utilization of the individual type of stress
KBK,crl = KBK,cr2 = (10 6 / 5 ' 104 ) (I/S) = 1,821.
0"1 is higher than the degree of utilization of the
The amplitude of the component variable amplitude combined types of stress 0"1 and 0"2:
fatigue strength results from the variable amplitude aBK,crl = 1,027 is higher than aBK,sv = 0,974.
fatigue strength factor and the amplitude of the
component fatigue limit: In the case that - different from the present example -
0"1 and 0"2 could occur independent of each other, the
O"I,BK = 1,82' 88 MPa = 160 MPa , (4.4.45)
higher individual degree of utilization aBK o l of 103 %
0"2,BK = 1,82' 80 MPa = 145 MPa .
would be deciding, a result that supports the demand of
always considering the degrees of the individual types
5 SAFETY FACTORS of stress as well.

For moderate consequences of failure and no regular

inspection there is
 259
7 Symbols and basic formulas

7 Symbols and basic formulas 7.2 Indices

lRi7 EN.dog a amplitude
b bending
7.1 Abbreviations eff effective
B class of utilization (B-7, ... , B 10) ex extreme
F type of overloading (FI, F2, F3, F4) ges total
FAT fatigue class (for welded components) i number of a step of a stepped stress spectrum
GS cast steel and heat treatable cast steel, j number of the last step of a stepped stress
for general purposes spectrum (smallest amplitude),
GG cast iron with lamellar graphite number of all steps
(grey cast iron) m mean value
GGG nodular cast iron max maximum value
GT malleable cast iron mm minimum value
GTS GT, black heart (non-decarburized) s shear
GTW GT, white heart (decarburized) torsion
v equivalent value
wv equivalent value (assessment of the static
strength of welded components)
x axial direction of rod-shaped (ID)
components
x first direction of shell-shaped (2D)
components
I Applies to Rm . For Rp the m index is to be replaced by p. y first lateral direction of rod-shaped' (ID)
components
2 Applies to normal stress. y second direction of shell-shaped (2D)
For shear stress c is to be replaced by "to
components
3 Applies to nominal stress. For local stress (also structural stress or z second lateral direction of rod-shaped (ID)
effective notch stress) S is to be replaced by cr. components
zd tension, compression, or tension-compression
4 These symbols apply to nominal stress (tension-compression).
Szd , Sa,zd , Sm,zd , Smax,zd , Smin,zd ,
AK component fatigue limit
SAK,zd , SBK,zd ' SSK,zd , SWK,zd , BK component variable amplitude fatigue
KAK,zd , KBK,zd , KSK,zd , KWK,zd , Rzd , Yzd . strength
... to other kinds of nominal stress K local stress (effective notch stress)
Sb ' T s , T t ' Sx , Sy , T, .... SK component static strength
... to local stress W welded
0', (!a , ... , oAK ,... , KAK,cr ,... , Rcr , Vcr , t , ax , cry , 0'1 ,0'2,0'3 WK component fatigue limit for completely
reversed stress
5 Swv,zd applies to nominal stress (tension-compression).
number of the first step of a stepped stress
Also Swv,b ' Twv,s, Twv,t, Swv.x . Swv,y, T wv .
spectrum (largest amplitude)
For local stress crwv , "tw v , crwv,x ' crwv,y . I index of the first principle stress
6 Kt,zd is applies to nominal stress (tension-compression). 2 index of the second principle stress
Also Kt,b ' Kt,s , Kt,t . 3 index of the third principle stress, normal to
Similarly for Kf . the surface (pointing into the interior of the
component)
7 aBK,zd applies to nominal stress (tension-compression). cr normal stress
Also aBl(,b , aBK,s , aBK.,t , aBK,x , aBK.,y·
1: shear stress
For local stress aBK,cr , aBK.,"t , aBK,crx , aBK.,cry , aBK,crl ' aBK,cr2
, aBK.,cr3 .
Similarly for aSK and asK.,wv.
7.3 Lower case characters
8 npl,b applies to nominal stress in bending, npl,t in torsion.
Constant for ~ *1
For local stress npl,cr and npl,"t .
degree of utilization
9 Kp,b applies to nominal stress in bending, Kp,t in torsion. (for the assessment of the fatigue strength) *7

For local stress Kp,cr and Kpl,"t. aBK,Sv aBK for combined stresses *3
au, . Constants for ncr '"
10 Fatigue strength value. aM, . Constants for M cr
II Type of loading tension or compression zd, also types of loading, b, s, aR,cr Constant for KR,cr
t, X, y.
 260
7 Symbols and basic formulas

aSK.wv.zd aSK for welded components (equivalent stress s wall thickness of the component
for a particular type of loading) *7 time of operation at temperature T
aSK.zd degree of utilization depth of a notch
(for the assessment of the static strength) *7 Vzd damage potential of the stress spectrum *4
aSK.Sv aSK for combined stresses *3
aSK,Swv aSK for welded components (for the
combined types of loading) *3 7.4 Upper case characters
aT,m constant for KT,m *1
A, elongation
aT,D constant for KT,D
A 3 , As elongation
aTt.m ... constants for KTt,m *1 B width
b
d
width
diameter
Cm
D
, < Larsen-Miller-constants for KTt,m ...
diameter
deff effective diameter of the semi-finished
DM critical damage sum
product or the raw casting
F axial load (tension, compression, or
deff,m deff for R m *' tension-compression)
deff,N,m deff m for R m N *1
related stress gradient *2
dL dia~eter of a' longitudinal hole
dp diameter of the reference component total number of cycles in a stress spectrum,
(the test specimen) H=Hj=L:hi
diameter of a transverse hole Kd technological size factor
diameter of the material test specimen, Kd,m Kd for R m and/or fJw
do = 7,5 rom ~d,p Kd for Rp
thickness factor (for welded components) Kr constant, estimate for Kf
fatigue limit factor for completely reversed Kf,zd fatigue notch factor *6, applying to the
stress component in question, dimensions deff and r
shear fatigue strength factor Kf,zd (d p ) Kf of the reference component
compression strength factor (the test specimen), dimensions d p and r p *6
shear strength factor Kp,b plastic notch factor *9
number of cycles in step i of the stress ~,Zd stress concentration factor *6
spectrum KA anisotropy factor
J safety factor KAK zd mean stress factor *4
Jges total safety factor KBK'Zd variable amplitude fatigue strength factor *4
, *2
jm j for R m and R m,T KE,cr residual stress factor (welded components)
jmt j for Rm,Tt KNL constant allowing for the non-linear
~p j for ~ and ~,T stress-strain behavior of GG in the case of
~pt j for ~,Tt static loading
JD j for fJw and/or T:w constant allowing for the non-linear
JF partial safety factor for allowable defects in stress-strain behavior of GG in the case of
castings fatigue loading
kD,cr slope of the constant amplitude S-N curve for Roughness factor *2
N > ND,cr *2 design factor (static strength) *4
slope of the constant amplitude S-N curve for temperature factor
N::; ND,cr *2 KT for Rm,T
n,1 number of cycles in step i of the stress KT for ~,T
spectrum KT for fJw
section factor for static bending *8 KT for Rm,Tt
KcKf ratio for the fatigue strength *2 KT for ~,Tt
ncr due to the related stress gradient from surface treatment factor, .
bending or torsion of the cross section *2 design factor (fatigue strength) *4
ncr (r) ncr due to the related stress gradient caused bending moment
by a notch of the component in question *2 torsion moment
ncr (r p ) ncr due to the related stress gradient caused mean stress sensitivity *2
by a notch of the reference component number of cycles after the component
(the test specimen) *2 constant amplitude S-N curve
p spectrum parameter N total number of cycles after the component
q constant for aSK,Sv .. , variable~mplitude S-N curve (fatigue life
r notch radius of the component in question curve), N = L: ni
rp notch radius of the reference component Reference number of cycles
Nc
(the test specimen) (for the S-N curve of welded components)
 261
7 Symbols and basic formulas

Number of cycles at knee point of the SAK,II,zd amplitude of the component endurance limit
component constant amplitude S-N curve for Sm.z d or for Sm.v *4 *10
type I or type II *2 amplitude (largest amplitude of the spectrum)
N D,cr,II number of cycles at second knee point of the of the component variable amplitude fatigue
component constant amplitude S-N curve strength for Sm zd or for Sm v *4 *10
type II *2 SSK,zd component static strength *4'*10
a surface (area) of the considered section of a SWK,zd component fatigue limit for completely
component reversed stress *4 *10
Pm,Pp Larsen-Miller-parameter for the creep SII,zd normal stress parallel to the weld seam *3 *11
strength S.l,zd normal stress normal to the weld seam? *11
probability of survival T temperature
compression strength TII,zd shear stress parallel to the weld seam *3 *ll
yield strength in compression T.l,zd shear stress normal to the weld seam *3 *11
yield strength V Volume of the considered section of a
tensile strength, "component property component
according standard" for deff
Rm ,1 "component actual value" of R m
~,N property according standard of R m for
deff,N,m 7.5 Greek alphabetic characters
constant for Kp,cr weld factor
strength at elevated temperature T
Sertr limit value of total strain
creep strength at temperature T and time t
0' local stress (non-welded component) or
"component specified value according to
structural stress (welded component)
drawing" ofRm
O'K effective notch stress (welded component) *2
yield stress, a generalization of R, or ~O,2 '
O'Sch,zd fatigue limit for zero-tension stress
"component property according standard"
O'Sch,zd,N property according standard of O'Sch,zd
for deff'
constant for npl,b (bending) and for deff,N,m
Rp,max
material fatigue limit for completely reversed
npl,t (torsion)
"component actual value" of Rp normal stress
"component property according standard"
property according standard of Rp for deff,N,p
yield strength at elevated temperature T for deff,m
1 %-creep stress at temperature T and time t O'W,b O'w for bending b
0.2 % proof stress O'W,b,N property according standard of O'wb
shear strength for deff,N,m '
yield stress in shear O'W,W weld specific fatigue limit (normal stress)
average roughness of the surface O'W,zd O'w for tension-compression zd
stress ratio *4 O'W,zd,N property according standard of O'w zd
Rzd of step 1 of the stress spectrum *4 for deff,N,m '
stress amplitude *4 O'W,zd,T O'w zd for elevated temperature
equivalent stress amplitude for a number of 0'1 first principle stress *4
cycles ND,cr *4 O'I,a stress amplitude at the surface *2
Sa,zd,i Sa zd of step i of the stress spectrum *4 'C
w material fatigue limit for completely reversed
Sa,zd,1 Sa'zd of step 1 (largest amplitude) of the shear stress
st;ess spectrum *4 "component property according standard"
Sm zd mean stress *4 for deff,m
Sm.z
' d', 1Sm ,
zd of step i of*4the stress spectrum *4 'Cw for shear s

Sm,zd,1 Sm,zd for Sa,zd,1 property according standard of 'Cw s

Smax,zd maximum stress of the stress spectrum *4 for deffN, ,m '
.
Smax,ex,zd ex treme maximum stress *4 'Cw,s for elevated temperature
'CW,s,T
Smax ex wv zd extreme maximum stress of Swv zd *5 *11 'Cw,t 'Cw for t torsion
Smin ~d ' ~nimum stress of the stress spectru~ *4 'CW,t,N property according standard of 'Cw t
Smin:ex,zd extreme minimum stress *4 for deff,N,m '
reme mi
Smin,ex,wv,zd ex treme .
nummum stress 0 f Swv,zd *5*11 weld specific fatigue limit (shear stress)
Sm v equivalent mean stress *3 slope angle of a changing cross section
Sw~,Zd equivalent stress (welded component) *5 *11 increase of j for non-ductile materials
SAK zd amplitude of the component fatigue limit
, for Sm.z d or for Sm.v *4 *10
 262
7 Symbolsand basic formulas

7.6 Basic formulas

Assessment of the component static strength

The characteristic service stress values are The denotations S and T apply when using
Smax,ex or Tmax,ex nominal stresses, the denotations 0" and 't when
or
O"max,ex or 'tmax,ex using local stresses.

The component static strength values are

SSK = f, .R, .npl .(KNL ) Different values ofthe section factor ~I apply to
TTJ< = f t '.Rn npl' (KNL ) the individual types ofstress. Moreover the
or
O"SK = f, ..Rn . ~l . (KNL ) sectionfactors used with nominal or local
'tTJ< = ft '.Rn ~]. (KNL) stresses are to be determined in a different way.

The degrees of utilization are derived as:

aSK = I Smax,ex / ( SSK . jerf) I ~ 1
aSK = I Tmax,ex/(TsK . jere> I ~1
or
aSK = I Smax,ex / ( SSK . jerf) I s 1
aSK = I Tmax,ex/(TSK'jerf)1 ~1

Assessment of the component fatigue strength

Sa,1 , SBK, Ta,] , TBK or O"BK, O"BK, 'ta,] , 'tBK,
The characteristic service stress values are respectively, refer to the largest amplitude ofthe
s., or Ta,J stress spectrum ofconcern.
or
or

The component fatitgue strength values are

for notched components
SBK = {fwo' n, 'K AK . KE,a 'KBK'K y '(KNL) } / {x, / ( no(r) . no(d) ) + 1 / KR,o(RJ -1 }
TBK= {fwt . fwo' .Rn 'K AK ' KE,t 'KBK'K y '(KNL) } / {x, / [llr(r) 'llr(d) ] + 1 / KRiRJ -1 }
or
O"BK = {fwo' n, 'K AK . KE,a 'KBK 'K y '(KNL) } / {I + [ 1/ Kf ] . [1 / KR,iRJ -1] . [1/ (llcr(r,d)] }
'tBK = {fwt . fwo·.Rn 'K AK ' KE,t 'KBK'K y '(KNL) } / {I + [ 1 / Kf ] . [1/ KR,lRJ -1] . [1/ (llr(r,d)] }
for welded components:
SBK = (JW,zd' KAK ' KE,a' KBK' (Ky ) ' (KNL) (FAT / FATO,O") ':4
TBK = 'tw,s . KAK . KE,t . KBK' (Ky ) . (KNL) . (FAT / FATO,'t) . :4
or (for structural stresses or effective notch stresses)
O"BK = (Jw,w' KAK . KE,a . KBK. (Ko) . (KNL) . (FAT / FATO,O") . :4
'tBK = 'tw,w . KAK ' KE,t . KBK' (Ky ) . (KNL) . (FAT / FATO,'t) . :4

The degrees of utilization are derived as:

aBK = 1 s., / (SBK' jere> I ~1
aBK = I T a,1 / (TBK' jerf)1 ~1
or
aBK = I O"a, I / ( O"BK . jerf) 1 ~ 1
aBK = 1'ta,1 / ( 'tBK . jerf ) I ~ 1
In the case ofmultiaxial stresses a total degree
ofutilization is computedfrom the individual
degrees ofutilization ofnormal or shear stress
by means ofan interactionformula.
 263
8 Subject index
aluminium alloy 2·m. 48f. 78ff.
103f. 13If. 142ff. 193
- aging - 27f. 81. 83
- ductil - 90
- non-aging - 27f. 81. 83.
- non-ductil - 91
anisotropy facto.' 26. 80
assessment
- assessment of the fatigue strength
-- using local stresses 13,97, 127
-- using nominal stresses 12,41,70
- assessment of the static strength
- - using local stresses 12, 19. 73, 93
- - using nominal stresses II, 19, 36
- method of assessment 11
- procedure of calculation 10
binomial frequency distribution 44, 100
- see standard stress spectrum
calculation of stress see types of stress
case hardening steel 25,79,136, 193
cast aluminium alloys 172ff, 193
- for general application 175
- for high pressure die casting 174, 177
- for investment casting 174, 176, 177
- for permanent mold casting 173, 175, 177
- for sand casting 172, 175, 176, 177
cast iron materials 25ff, 79ff, 140ff, 193
- ductil cast iron 90
- non-ductil cast iron 91
- properties (material tables) 140ff
cast iron with lamellar graphite 25, 79, 140
cast steel 25, 79, 139
castings
- non-destructively tested 68, 125
- not non-destructively tested 68, 125
characteristic service stress
- assessment of the fatigue strength 41,97
- assessment of the static strength 19, 73
- probability of occurrence 34f, 90f
class of utilization 43,45,66, 100, 102, 122, 218ff,
235
coating factor 55f, llOf
coefficient of variation (static strength) 23, 77
compoment variable amplitude fatigue strength
63ff, 119ff
9 Subject index
component static strength 19, 33, 73, 89
- local failure 19,73
- global failure 19,73
component fatigue strength 57, 113
component, kinds of - 13
- block-shaped (3D) 15, 75, 96
- block-shaped (3D), welded 16, 75
- rod-shaped (lD) 13,20, 36, 73, 93
- rod-shaped (lD), welded 14,20,37, 74, 94
- shell-shaped (2D) 14, 20, 38, 73, 94
.. shell-shaped (2D), welded 15, 20, 38, 74, 95
component fatigue limit 57ff, 113ff
- according to mean stress 58ff, 114ff, 223ff
- see fatigue limit
- see material fatigue limit
component constant amplitude S-N curve
- see constant amplitude S-N curve
compression strength 27,81
compresion strength factor 26, 80
compression yield strength 27, 81
consequence offailure 34,68, 90, 125,212
constant amplitude S-N curve 63,66 F, 119, 123f,
212
- for non-welded components 66f, 123f
- for welded components (model I) 66f. 123f
- lower boundary of the number of cycles 66, 123
- model I and model II 64ff, 66f, 120ff, 123f
- non-welded aluminum alloys (model II) 66f, 123f
- non-welded steel and cast iron materials (model II)
66f, 123f
- parameters 42,67, 99, 124,212
- see endurance limit
- see fatigue limit
constant amplitude stress 42, 63f, 99, 120f
constant K NL 88
constant K NL E 56, III
constant q 37ff, 7lf, 94ff, 128ff
- aluminium alloy 7lf, 128ff
- component, welded 7lf, 128ff
- component, surface treated 7lf, 128ff
conversion factor, statistical- 229
corrosion 9
1% creep limit 11, 19, 27ff, 35, 73, 81ff, 92
creep strength 11, 19, 27ff, 35, 73, 81ff, 92
damage potential 42,44,46, 99, 101, 102
damage sum, critical 63,65, 119, 121
 264
damage-equivalent stress amplitude 45,66, 102, 122
degree of utilization
- assessment of the fatigue strength 12, 13,70,127,
226
- assessment of the static strength 11, 13,36,93
design factor 30, 50f, 85, 106f
design parameters
- assessment of the fatigue strength 5Off, 106ff
- assessment of the static strength 30ff, 85ff
diameter, effective - 22, 24, 26, 76, 78, 80
direction of 0'3 99, 106, 109
ductility 12, 37, 71, 94, 128, see elongation
effective notch stress 73, 97f, 210, 245ff
effective diameter 22, 24, 26, 76, 78, 80
elastic limit load 78
elongation 68f, 125f, 140f, 143ff
endurance limit 58,63,64, 66f, 114, 119, 120, 123f,
131,
equivalent maximum stress 61f, 117f
equivalent mean stress 61f, 117f, 223f
equivalent minimum stress 61f, 117f
equivalent stress amplitude 44f, 71[, 100, 102, 128f,
223
equivalent stress ratio 61f, 117f
examples 231ff
- cantilever subject to two independent loads (nominal
stress) 250ff
- component made of a wrought aluminium alloy (local
stress) 256ff
- compressor flange made of grey cast iron (local
stress) 241 ff
- shaft with shoulder (nominal stress) 231ff
- shaft with V-belt drive (nominal stress) 236ff
- welded notched component (nominal, structural and
local stresses) 245ff
experimentally determined strength value 227
- mean value 227f
- sample size 227f
- standard deviation 227ff
- statistical conversion factor 228
exponential frequency distribution 44, 100,219ff
- see standard stress spectrum
FAT see fatigue classes
9 Subject index
fatigue classes (of welded components) 56, II If, 195ff
- effective notch stress 112, 196
- nominal stress 56, 195, 197ff
- nominal shear stress 207
- structural stress 112, 195, 208ff
- structural shear stress 195
fatigue life
- computed - 63, 119
- required - 42,63, 99, 119
fatigue life curve 45,63, 102, 119
fatigue limit
- according to mean stress 58ff, 114ff
- component - 57, 113
- material- 47f, 103f
- model I and model II 64ff, 67, 120ff, 124
- number of cycles at knee point 42, 67, 99, 124, 212
- specific values for welds 47, 103
fatigue notch factor 51ff, 187ff
- cast iron and aluminum material 193f
- derived from stress concentration factor 51, 187
- determined by the user 194
- definition 53
- experimentally determined 52, 189ff
- of superimposed notches 54
- round and flat structural details 187ff
fatigue strength
- see constant amplitude S-N curve
- see variable amplitude S-N curve
fatigue strength factor
- for normal stress 48, 104
- for shear stress 48, 62, 71, 104, 118, 128
fine grain structural steel 25, 79, 133
fluctuating stress spectrum 42 f, 99 f
frequency, influence of - 47, 103
Gassnerlinie see fatigue life curve
GG see cast iron with lamellar graphite
GGG see nodular cast iron
GS see cast steel
GT see malleable cast iron
guideline, field of application 9
Haigh diagram 59,63, 115, 119,212,214,217
high quality castings 34, 68, 90, 125
hot-spot stress see structural stress
individual mean stress 6lf, 117f
inspection 68, 125,212
kind of material 9,24, 78, 131ff
 265 9 Subject index

~-Kf ratio 5lf, 108f modulus of elasticity 86

- for normal stress 51, 108
- for shear stress 52, 109 neighbouring point 14, 15, 109
- for superimposed notches 109 multiaxial stress 16, 37ff, 41, 7lf, 94ff, 97, 128ff,
- for components being surface treated 52, 108 222ff, 226, 250ff
- in the direction of (J 3 106
Neuber's formula 86
largest amplitude in stress spectrum 42, 99
nitriding steel 25, 79, 136
Larsen-Miller parameter 29, 83
nodular cast iron 25, 79, 140
Larsen-Miller constant 29, 83
nominal stress 10,11,12,178,181,190,210, 245ff
malleable cast iron 25, 79, 141
non-destructive testing
material - of castings 128
- ductil 34, 68f, 90, 125f - of welds 197
- non-ductil 34, 69, 90f, 126
non-proportional stress 17,41,97,226,250
- brittle 9
normal stress criterion 37ff, 7lf, 94ff, 128ff
material fatigue limit 47f,67, 103f, 124, 131ff
- aluminum 67, 124, 131f, 142 notch radius, effective ~ 15,211, 214f, 245
- bending 131ff
- shear 131ff number of cycles
- at knee point of S-N curve 42,67, 99, 124, 212
- steel 47f,67, 103f, 124, 131ff
- at lower boundary of S-N curve 9,41, 64f, 97, 123f
- tension-compression 47, 103, 131ff
- torsion 131ff - see constant amplitude S-N curve
- see fatigue life
material properties - see total number of cycles
- according to standards 22, 76 - see variable amplitude S-N curve
- assessment of the fatigue strength 47, 103
- assessment of the static strength 22, 76 parameters of the stress spectrum 41ff, 97ff

material tables 131ff plastc limit load 87

- cast aluminium alloys 172ff plastic notch factor 31, 86f
- cast iron materials 139ff
- steel 132ff principle stress 15, 75, 96, 99, 113, 129
- wrought aluminium alloys 143ff probability of occurrence
material test specimen 22, 76, 131 - of the characteristic stress 34f, 90f

maximum stress 20f, 61, 74f, 117 probability of survival 22f, 34, 47, 68, 76f, 90,103,
125, 131, 227
mean stress 41ff, 58, 59f, 6lf, 97ff, 99, 114ff, 223ff
- fields of mean stress 58ff, 114ff procedure of calculation 10

mean stress factor 58, 59ff, 114ff, 210, 213f, 225 proportional stress 16,41, 97

mean stress sensitivity 59ff, 62, 115ff, 118, 213f 0.2 % proof stress see yield strength

mean stress spectrum 42f, 99
mean value from experiments 227ff
method of calculation
- variable amplitude fatigue strength 53, 104
- class of utilization 43, 45, 66, 100, 102, 122, 218ff,
235
-constant amplitude stress 63f, 119f
- Haibach version of Miner's rule 65, 121
- Miner's rule, elementary version 45,64, IOlf, 120
- Miner's rule, consistent version 45,65, 101, 121
- Miner'rule, modified version 65, 121
Mises (v.Mises) criterion 37ff, 71f, 94ff, 128ff
quenched and tempered steel 25, 79, 134, 135
radius, effective notch ~ 15,211,214
raintlow matrix 216
raintlow cycle counting procedure 43, 100
reference point 10, 13, 14, 15, 36, 93
required total number of cycles 44, 45f, 64ff, 100,
102f, 119ff, 218ff
residual stress factor 58,62, 114, 118,210, 213f
residual stress 12, 13, 62, 118
 266
RIFESTPLUS (PC program) 241,254,271
root of weld 74,85,89, 98, 107,209
roughness, average - 54f, 109f
roughness factor 50, 54f, 106, 109f
round specimen see material test specimen
rule of sign see superposition
S-N curve
- see constant amplitude S-N curve
- see variable amplitude S-N curve
safety factor 4ff, 68ff, 90ff, 125ff, 212
- assessment of the fatigue strength 68, 125
- assessment of the static strength 34, 90
- cast aluminium alloy 34, 69, 91, 126
- cast iron material 34, 68f, 90f, 125f
- consequence offailure 34,68, 90, 125,212
- creep limit 34f, 90f
- creep strength 34f, 90f
- inspection 68, 125,212
- non-destructive testing 68, 125
- non-ductile materials 69,91,126
- steel 34, 68, 90, 125
- tensile strength 34f, 90f
- total safety factor 35, 69, 92, 126
- wrought aluminium alloy 34,69,91, 126
- yield strength 34f, 90f
sample size 227ff
section factor 30ff, 85ff
semi-finished product 23, 77, 131ff
sequence of assessment l lff
service life see fatigue life
service stress 10
- see characteristic service stress
- see parameters of the stress spectrum
shape of stress spectrum 42, 99
shear strength 27, 81
shear strength factor 27, 37, 81, 94
size factor, technological - 24, 78
spectrum see stress spectrum
spectrum parameter p 44, 101, 219ff
stair case tests 229
standard deviation 227ff
standard stress spectrum 44, 100
- binomial distribution 44, 101, 219ff
- exponential distribution 44,101, 219ff
- spectrum parameter p 44,.101, 219ff
9 Subject index
standard stress spectrum 44f, 100f
- binomial frequency distribution 44, 100
-exponential frequency distribution 44, 100
static strength see component static strength
steel 24ff, 78ff, 131ff
- austenitic 31,58,66,67,86,114,123,124,137
- ferritic or martensitic 137
- normalized 25, 79, 138
- quenched and tempered 25, 79
- stainless 25, 79
straight line distribution see exponential frequency
distribution
strength at elevated temperature 11, 19, 27, 48, 62,
73, 81, 104, 118
strength hypothesis 37, 71f, 94, 128ff
stress
- allowable - l lf, 36, 70, 93, 127
- characteristic service - 19,41,73,97
- extreme 11, 12, 36, 93
- geometrical - see structural stress
- local, elastic - 12, 97
- multiaxial>- 16, 36, 93, 223ff, 226, 235
- non-proportional- 17,41, 97, 226
- proportional- 16; 41, 97
- synchronous - 17,41,97, 223ff, 236
- uniaxial - 16
- see type of stress
stress amplitude 41ff, 97ff, 223ff
- damage-equivalent stress amplitude 45, 66, 102, 122
- equivalent stress amplitude 44f, 7lf, 100, 102, 128f,
223
- largest amplitude in stress spectrum 42, 99
stress cycle 41, 97
stress gradient
- related 52f, 109
- in direction of stress 15, 85, 108f
- normal to direction of stress 15,85,106, 108f
stress history 42, 99
stress ratio 41, 97
- adjusting the stress ratio ofa spectrum 43,100,216
stress ratio spectrum 42f, 99
stress spectrum
- adjusting the stress ratio 43, 100, 216
- damage potential 42,44, 99, 101
- deriving a stepped spectrum 43, 100,217
- determination of the parameters 43ff, 100ff
- parameters of a spectrum 42, 99
- spectrum parameter p 44, 101, 219ff
- stress ratio spectrum 42f, 99
- total number of cycles of the spectrum 42,64ff
- see standard stress spectrum
 267 9 Subject index

stress concentration factor 51, 178ff, 187 type of stress

- for a substitute structure 87, 106,230
- for flat specimen 181ff
- for round specimen 178ff
structural steel, non-alloyed 25, 79, 132
structural stress 10, 73, 97f, 210, 245ff
superposition 19, 36ff, 41, 70ff, 73, 93, 95f, 97, 127,
129f
surface hardening 31, 52, 55, 62, 66, 71, 72, 86, 108,
110, 11~ 123, 128, 129,222
surface roughness see roughness, average ~
surface treatment factor 55f, 11Of, 194
symbols 5, 257ff
synchronous stress 17,41,97, 223ff, 236
- block-shaped (3D) component 15f
- combined ~ 12,37,39,71,72,94,95,96,128,129
- individual ~ l3ff, 36, 38, 71, 93, 94, 96, 128, 129
- rod-shaped (lD) component 13f
- shell-shaped (2D) component 14f
type of material 24, 78, 131ff
ultimate strength see tensile strength
uniaxial stress 16
variable amplitude fatigue strength 63ff, 119ff
variable amplitude S-N curve 45, 63ff, 102, 119ff
variable amplitude fatigue strength factor 63ff,
119ff, 218, 221
weld factor Uw 31,87

technological size factor 24, 78 weld imperfections 47, 103

temperature weld seam 210

- elevated ~ 19,27,48,62, 73, 81, 104, 118 welded components
-Iow~ 27,48,81,104 - comments about the fatigue strength 209ff
- normal~ 27,48,81,104 - specific values of the fatigue strength 47, 103
temperature factor WELLE (pC programm) 231,236,250,271
- fatigue strength 48, 104
- static strength 27,81 wrought aluminium alloys 143ff
- short-term strength value 27f, 82f - for extruded section 158ff, 168
- long-term strength value 28f, 83f - for forgings 169,170,171
- for plates 143ff
temperature range 9,27,48,81, 104 - for rods / bars 154ff, 157ff
tensile strength 22ff, 35, 47, 76ff, 92, 13lff - for sheets 143ff, 151ff
- value according to standard 23f, 77f - for strips 143ff, 151ff
- component value according to the drawing 23, 77 - for tubes 154ff
- actual componentr value 24, 77 yield stress see yield strength
test piece (of castings) 23, 77, 131 yield strength 22ff, 35, 76ff, 92, 131ff
thickness factor 50f, 56, 107, 112 - value according to standard 23f, 77f
- component value according to the drawing 23, 77
throat section 20f, 42, 209 - actual componentr value 24, 77
toe of weld 74, 85, 89, 98, 107,209 zfP see non-destructive testing
toe section 20, 42, 209
total safety factor 35, 69, 92, 126
total number of cycles 9, 4lf, 97, 99
- computed fatigue life 63, 119
- of a stress spectrum 42, 64ff
- required ~ 42,63, 99, 119
type of overloading 58, 115,225
- type of overloading Fl 60, 116
- type of overloading F2 59f, 115f
- type of overloading F3 60, 116f
- typeofoverioadingF4 61,117
Geschattsfuhrer: Prof. Dr.-Ing. Wilhelm Hanel· Tel.: +49 351 8837-322' Fax: +49351 8804313
IiZII
IMA Materialforschung und
Anwendungstechnik GmbH
Address: Wilhelmine-Reichard-Ring 4 . Postfachadresse: Postfach 80 01 44 . 01101 Dresden

PC-programs RIFESTPLUS and WELLE

for the strength assessment of components in mechanical engineering.

Assessment of the static strength and of the fatigue strength (fatigue limit and variable amplitude
fatigue strength) of non-welded components made of steel or cast iron materials or of wrought
or cast aluminum alloys.

RIFESTPLUS is intended for shell-shaped (20) and for block-shaped (3D) components
made of steel or cast iron materials or of wrought or cast aluminum alloys the local elastic stresses
of which have been determined by a finite element analysis or by a strain gauge analysis, for example.
(A German and an English version of RIFESTPLUS is available.)

Shell-shaped (2D) component (on the left),

block-shaped (30) component (on the right),
local elastic stress amplitudes o, .

WELLE is intendedfor axles and shafts

F F F
made of steel or cast iron materials,
subject to forces and moments,
including those from gears.
The calculation is based on nominal stresses.
(A German version of WELLE is available only.) Shaft with bearings and forces F

The two programs are based on the

FKM-Guideline "Analytical Strength Assessment of Components in Mechanical Engineering",
Frankfurt: VDMA-Verlag, 4 th edition, 2002 (in German).

Personal contacts: Dr.-Ing. B. Hanel Tel. +49 351 8837 324

E-Mail: haenel@ima-dresden.de
Dipl.-Ing. G.-R. Bitterlich Tel. +49351 8837 383
E-Mail: bitterlich@ima-dresden.de
- -- -- ~ -- ~-

ISBN 3-8163-0425-7